JOURNAL OF CHROMATOGRAPHY LIBRARY-
volume 396
selective sample handling and detection in high-performance liquid chro...
188 downloads
1193 Views
14MB Size
Report
This content was uploaded by our users and we assume good faith they have the permission to share this book. If you own the copyright to this book and it is wrongfully on our website, we offer a simple DMCA procedure to remove your content from our site. Start by pressing the button below!
Report copyright / DMCA form
JOURNAL OF CHROMATOGRAPHY LIBRARY-
volume 396
selective sample handling and detection in high-performance liquid chromatography part B
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
JOURNAL OF CHROMATOGRAPHY LIBRARY - volume 3 9 B
selective sample handling and detection in high-performance liquid chromatography partB
edited by K. Zech Byk Gulden Pharmaceuticals, Byk Guldenstrasse2, P. 0. Box 6500,
7750 Konstanz, F.R. G. and
R. W. Frei
'
Department of Analytical Chemistry, Free University, De Boelelaan 1083, 108 1 HV Amsterdam, The Netherlands
ELSEVIER Amsterdam - Oxford - N e w York - Tokyo 1989
ELSEVIER SCIENCE PUBLISHERS B.V. Sara Burgerhartstraat 25 P.O. Box 2 1 1, 1000 AE Amsterdam, The Netherlands
Distributors for the United States and Canada: ELSEVIER SCIENCE PUBLISHING COMPANY INC. 655, Avenue of the Americas New York, NY 10010, U.S.A.
ISBN 0-444-88327-4 (Vol. 398) ISBN 0-444-41 6 16- 1 (Series)
0 Elsevier Science Publishers B.V., 1989 All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying. recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of the publisher, Elsevier Science Publishers B.V./ Physical Sciences & Engineering Division, P.O. Box 330, 1000 AH Amsterdam, The Netherlands. Special regulations for readers in the USA - This publication has been registered with the Copyright Clearance Center Inc. (CCC), Salem, Massachusetts. Information can be obtained from the CCC about conditions under which photocopies of parts of this publication may be made in the USA. All other copyright questions, including photocopying outside of the USA, should be referred t o the wblisher. No responsibility is assumed by the Publisher for any injury and/or damage to persons or property as a matter of products liability, negligence or otherwise, or from any use or operation of any methods, products, instructions or ideas contained in the material herein. Because of rapid advances in the medical sciences, the Publisher recommends that independent verification of diagnoses and drug dosages should be made. Although all advertising material is expected to conform to ethical (medical) standards, inclusion in this publication does not constitute a guarantee or endorsement of the quality or value of such product or of the claims made of it by its manufacturer. This book is printed on acid-free paper. Printed in The Netherlands
V
CONTENTS
L i s t o f Contributors
.................................................
............................................................
Preface
XI
1
PRECONCENTRATION AND CHROMATOGRAPHY ON CHEMICALLY MODIFIED
CHAPTER I
SILICAS WITH COMPLEXATION PROPERTIES
.
1
Introduction 1.1
1.2 2
.
1.3
4
.
.
2.2
5
.......
s u p p o r t ... .............. ................
8
Preconcentration using l i q u i d - s o l i d e x t r a c t i o n i q u i d - s o l i d ex r a c t i o n
.........
S t a t i o n a r y phases f o r Choice o f a
5 6
.............. ................
Chemically m o d i f i e d s i l i c a s 2.1
3
Bagnoud and W . H a e r d i ) ................. ...............................................
(J.L. Veuthey. M.A.
S u r f a c e m o d i f i c a t i o n .. .............. ................ C r o s s - l i n k e d f u n c t i o n a groups t o s i l cas ............
6
8 9 10
P r e c o n c e n t r a t i o n o f i n o r g a n i c compounds u s i n g c h e l a t i n g s i 1i c a s
11
................................
12
....................................................
3.1
Metal preconcentration
3.2
Advantages and disadvantages o f c h e l a t i n g s i l i c a s i n
3.3
............................... p r e c o n c e n t r a t e d m e t a l s .............. .....
preconcentrating metals
16
Analysis o f
16
The p r e c o n c e n t r a t i o n o f o r g a n i c compounds u s i n g c h e l a ing
..... ............................................. 5 . C h e l a t i n g s i l i c a s i n chromatography .................. ..... 5.1 M e t a l s e p a r a t i o n chromatography ................. ..... 5.2 Ligand exchange chromatography ........................ 5.3 Enantiomer s e p a r a t i o n ................................ 6 . Conclusion ................................................ References ..................................................... s i 1i c a s
18 21 21 23 27 29 29
CHAPTER I 1 SAMPLE HANDLING I N I O N CHROMATOGRAPHY (P.R. Haddad)
. 2. 1
Introduction
..............................................
...............................................
.......................... 2.1 Sample c o l l e c t i o n ..................................... 2.2 E x t r a c t i o n methods .................................... 2.3 Sample d i g e s t i o n ...................................... 2.4 Combustion methods .................................... 3 . Sample cleanup methods ..................................... Sample c o l l e c t i o n and d i s s o l u t i o n
33 33
37 37 38 39 40 42
VI
3.1 3.2 4
.
Introduction Filtration
..........................................
............................................
................... ...................................... ..........................................
3.3 Chemical m o d i f i c a t i o n o f t h e sample Contamination e f f e c t s 4.1 I n t r o d u c t i o n 4.2 Contamination from p h y s i c a l h a n d l i n g o f t h e sample ... 4.3 Contamination from f i l t r a t i o n devices and c a r t r i d g e columns 4.4 Contamination from chromatographic hardware components 4.5 Contamination o f t h e column
...............................................
. .
53 54
........................
.....................................................
79 79
Introduction
........................... a n a l y s i s ...................
..........................................
........................ .......................
6
44 53
55 56 59 61 61 62 62 74 76 76 76 77
5 . Sample handling f o r u l t r a - t r a c e 5.1
42 44
5.2 Use o f l a r g e i n j e c t i o n volumes 5.3 Use o f p r e c o n c e n t r a t i o n columns 5.4 Use of d i a l y t i c p r e c o n c e n t r a t i o n methods M a t r i x e l i m i n a t i o n methods
..............
.................................
..........................................
6.1
Introduction
6.2 6.3
On-column m a t r i x e l i m i n a t i o n
..........................
Post-column m a t r i x e l i m i n a t i o n
7 Conclusion References
.................................................
CHAPTER 111 WHOLE BLOOD SAMPLE CLEAN-UP FOR CHROMATOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS
.
1
2
.
.
(U C h r i s t i a n s and K.-Fr. Introduction
.
..........................
E x t r a c t i o n procedures f o r blood samples
2.1
3
Sewing)
...............................................
....................
.............................. e x t r a c t i o n ...............................
85 85
2.2
Solid-liquid
93
2.3
Column-switching
......................................
96
Blood-sample p r e p a r a t i o n and HPLC a n a l y s i s o f SandimmunR
.............................................. ..........................................
3.2 3.3
96 96
Blood sample p r e p a r a t i o n f o r SandimmunR ( c y c l o s p o r i n e ) measurement
.
82
Liquid-liquid extraction
(cyclosporine) 3.1 I n t r o d u c t i o n
4
82
...........................................
106
Chromatographic a n a l y s i s o f SandimmunR ( c y c l o s p o r i n e ) and i t s m e t a b o l i t e s
...................................
115
Trouble shooting i n development o f blood-sample clean-up
................................................. References ..................................................... procedures
126 127
VII CHAPTER I V
RADIO-COLUMN LIQUID CHROMATOGRAPHY (A.C. Veltkamp)
............................................ 1. I n t r o d u c t i o n ............................................... 1.1 The use o f r a d i o i s o t o p e s i n chemical a n a l y s i s ......... 2
.
1.2
C h a r a c t e r i s t i c s o f radio-column l i q u i d chromatography
134 136
1.3
O b j e c t i v e s and o u t l i n e
141
.......... .....................
P r i n c i p l e s o f s c i n t i 1 l a t i o n count ing chromatography
2.1
.......................
n column l i q u i d
.....................
......................
..................... .................
P r i n c i p l e s o f flow-through y.counting
2.3
P r i n c i p l e s o f R-counting i n column l i q u i d
2.4
chromatography Data a n a l y s i s
2.5
........................................
.........................................
............................................. 3 . O p t i m i z a t i o n parameters f o r flow-through &counting ........
.
Introduction
.........................................
............
3.2
The c o u n t i n g e f f i c i e n c y E; general aspects
3.3
The background count r a t e CPM(b); general aspects
3.4
.....
...................................... ....................................... ............................................... Preparation. p u r i f i c a t i o n . i d e n t i f i c a t i o n ............. D i s t r i b u t i o n and metabol sm of exogenic compounds .....
Other parameters
3.5 Special methods Applications 4.1 4.2
141 145 150 157
Commercially a v a i l a b l e flow-through r a d i o a c t i v i t y
detectors
3.1
141
I n t r o d u c t o r y comments on n u c l e a r r a d i a t i o n and detection
2.2
4
133 134
4.3
D i s t r i b u t i o n and metabol sm o f endogenic compounds
4.4
Radioassays
............. ............................. 4.5 Miscellaneous ........... ............................. 5 . Concluding remarks ........... ............................. References .....................................................
....
161 162 162 162 165 168 170 177 177 186 188 189 197 200 202
MODERN POST-COLUMN REACTION DETECTION I N HIGH-PERFORMANCE
CHAPTER V
LIQUID CHROMATOGRAPHY
. .
(H
. Jansen
and R.W.
Frei)
..................................
......................................
1
General i n t r o d u c t i o n
2
Types o f post-column r e a c t o r s
208 208 211
2.2
.............................. Open t u b u l a r r e a c t o r s ................................. Packed bed r e a c t o r s ...................................
212
2.3
Segmented stream t u b u l a r r e a c t o r s
212
2.1
.....................
211
VIII 3 5
5.1
................................ ............. ........... I n t r o d u c t i o n ..........................................
5.2
The use o f i m m o b i l i z e d enzymes i n post-column
.
Choice o f r e a c t i o n d e t e c t o r
213
.
A p p l i c a t i o n s o f post-column r e a c t i o n d e t e c t i o n New approaches t o post-column r e a c t i o n d e t e c t i o n
214 216 216
.
4
.............................................. O t h e r s o l i d - p h a s e c h e m i s t r i e s .........................
216
The use o f e l e c t r o c h e m i c a l reagent p r o d u c t i o n
241
reactors
5.3 5.4
5.5
The use o f photochemical and thermo i n i t i a t e d reactions
5.6
Miniaturization
.........
.............................................
.......................................
5.7 H o l l o w f i b e r s as post-column r e a c t o r s 6 Conclusions References
.
CHAPTER V I
.
1
.
2
.
242 245 252 254 255
NEW LUMINESCENCE DETECTION TECHNIQUES
.
V e l t h o r s t and R.W. F r e i ) ................. ...............................................
(C G o o i j e r . N.H.
260
Introduction
260
...... .......................... i n CL ............................
Chemiluminescence d e t e c t i o n w i t h s o l i d s t a t e r e a c t o r s
264
2.1
D e t e c t i o n based on CL and BL
264
2.2 2.3 2.4
Solid state reactors H 0 d e t e c t i o n by p e r o x y o x a l a t e CL 2 2 Use o f t h e s o l i d TCPO r e a c t o r f o r d e t e c t i o n of
2.5
Quenched peroxyoxal a t e chemi luminescence d e t e c t i o n
2.6
Concluding remarks
....................
f 1uorophores
3
.................
................................................ .....................................................
232
..........................................
267
....
.................................... ..................... ................
L i q u i d phase phosphorescence d e t e c t i o n 3.1 Fundamental aspects o f phosphorescence 3.2 3.3
New developments i n phosphorimetry Experimental a s p e c t s
3.4
I n d i r e c t phophorescence d e t e c t i o n
266
....................
.................................. ..................... 3.5 A l t e r n a t i v e phosphorophores/luminophores .............. 3.6 Concluding remarks .................................... References .....................................................
283 285 295 296 296 300 304 308 324 328 329
CHAPTER V I I CONTINUOUS SEPARATION TECHNIQUES I N FLOW-INJECTION ANALYSIS
.
1 2
.
(M
. V a l c a r c e l and M . D . Luque de Cast ro) ................... ...............................................
Introduction
...................................... .........................................
335 335
Gas-liquid interfaces
338
2.1
338
Gas-diffusion
IX
2.2 Distillation .......................................... 2.3 Hydride generation 3 Gas-solid interfaces 4 . Liquid-liquid interfaces ................................... 4.1 Extraction ............................................ 4.2 Dialysis .............................................. 5 . Solid-1 iquid interfaces .................................... 5.1 I o n exchange 5.2 Adsorptive preconcentration 5.3 Precipitation and dissolution 6 HPLC-FIA association ....................................... 6.1 Pre-column assemblies 6.2 Post-column assemblies ................................ 7 Final remarks .............................................. References .....................................................
343 343 345 347 347 355 359 359 361 367 369 371 373 376 378
..........................................................
383
.
.
.................................... .......................................
.......................................... ........................... ......................... .................................
.
S u b j e c t Index
Journal o f Chromatography Library (other volumes in the series) ........
391
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
XI
LIST OF CONTRIBUTORS
P rof. Dr. W. H aerd i, D r . J.L. Veuthey, D r . M.A. Bagnoud Department o f I n o r g a n i c , A n a l y t i c a l and A p p l i e d Chemistry U n i v e r s i t y o f Geneva 30 9.E. Ansermet 1211 Geneva 4 SWITZERLAND
P r o f . D r . R.W. F r e i D r . H. Jansen P h i l i p s L i g h t i n g b.v. P.O.Box 8 OD 20 5600 JM Eindhoven THE NETHERLANDS
A ssociat e P r o f . P.R. Haddad Department o f A n a l y t i c a l Chemistry U n i v e r s i t y o f New South Wales P.O. Box 1 Kensington N.S.W. 2033 AUSTRAL I A
P r o f . D r . N.H. V e l t h o r s t , D r . C. G o o i j e r , P r o f . Dr. R.W. F r e i Department o f General and A n a l y t i c a l Chemistry Free U n i v e r s i t y a t Amsterdam De B o e l elaan 1083 1081 HV Amsterdam THE NETHERLANDS
Prof. D r . K.-Fr. Sewing and D r . U. C h r i s t i a n s Medi z i n i s c h e Hochschul e Hannover Zentrum Pharmakologie und T o x i k o l o g i e A b t e i l u n g A1 lgemeine Pharmakologie P.O. Box 61 01 80 3000 Hannover F.R.G.
D r . M. V a l c h r c e l , M.D. Luque de C a s t r o Departamento de Q uimica A n a l i t i c a U n i v e r s i d a d de Cordoba F a c u l t a d de Ciencias Dr. M. V a l c a r c e l 14004 Cordoba SPAIN
D r . A.C. Veltkamp E C N S t i c h t ing Energieonderzoek Centrum Nederland Researc hcent rum P.O. Box 1 1755 ZG P e t t e n THE NETHERLANDS
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
PREFACE On 29 January 1989,
d u r i n g t h e c o m p l e t i o n o f t h i s second volume,
P r o f e s s o r Roland F r e i d i e d a f t e r an i l l n e s s o f s e v e r a l months. Through h i s death I have l o s t a dear f r i e d ,
t o whom I am g r a t e f u l f o r many
s c i e n t i f i c s t i m u l i . Roland F r e i ' s c o n t r i b u t i o n s t o t h e f i e l d o f s e l e c t i v e sample h a n d l i n g and d e t e c t i o n i n HPLC w i l l be missed n o t o n l y by m y s e l f b u t a l s o by many c o l l e a g u e s w i t h s i m i l a r i n t e r e s t s . I t was f o r t u n a t e t h a t we shared an i n t e r e s t i n sample p r e p a r a t i o n , w i t h , emphasis
on
environmental
samples
and,
i n Amsterdam,
i n Constance,
on
the
biological
samples a r i s i n g from pharmaceutical r e s e a r c h . T h i s book i s t h e second and p r o v i s i o n a l l y l a s t p a r t o f a two-volume project.
It follows
t h e p r e v i o u s l y expressed view t h a t t h e h a n d l i n g ,
s e p a r a t i o n and d e t e c t i o n o f complex samples should b e c o n s i d e r e d as an i n t e g r a t e d , i n t e r c o n n e c t e d process. On t h e b a s i s o f t h i s p h i l o s o p h y we choose t h e c o n t r i b u t i o n s ,
which we hope w i l l
perhaps even more so t h a n i n P a r t A leads
to
a simplification
of
-
convince t h e reader
-
t h a t o p t i m a l sample p r e p a r a t i o n
detection o r
reduced
demands
on
the
s e p a r a t i o n process. The r e v e r s e o f t h i s i s a l s o shown i n d e t a i l . I n accordance w i t h t h e aims o f t h i s book, we have t r i e d once a g a i n t o p u t t h e emphasis on chemical p r i n c i p l e s and have, t h e r e f o r e , suppressed, as f a r as p o s s i b l e , a d i s c u s s i o n o f t h e equipment r e q u i r e d . T h i s r e f l e c t s o u r o p i n i o n t h a t t h e l i m i t i n g f a c t o r i n t h e a n a l y s i s o f complex samples i s incomplete knowledge o f t h e u n d e r l y i n g c h e m i s t r y r a t h e r t h a n
the
a v a i l a b l e hardware. T h i s l a c k o f knowledge i s becoming more e v i d e n t as t h e demands f o r l o w e r d e t e c t i o n l i m i t s grow, as r e s o l v i n g complex m a t r i x problems r e q u i r e s even more u n d e r s t a n d i n g o f t h e chemical
interaction
between t h e substance t o be analysed and t h e s t a t i o n a r y phase. Thus, a p a r t f r o m one c h a p t e r d e a l i n g w i t h c h e m i c a l l y m o d i f i e d s i l i c a s , t h e main theme o f t h i s book i s developed i n t h r e e c h a p t e r s on sample p r e p a r a t i o n and t h r e e on d e t e c t i o n . The
first
chapter
outlines
concentration
and
chromatography
c h e m i c a l l y m o d i f i e d s i l i c a s w i t h complexing p r o p e r t i e s .
on
Examples o f t h e
use o f t h e s e phases w i t h o r g a n i c and i n o r g a n i c compounds a r e g i v e n . Chapter I 1
is
the
first
o f t h r e e c o n t r i b u t i o n s d e a l i n g w i t h sample
2
preparation. following
I n particular,
critical
ion
questions
chromatography
regarding
sample
clearly
exposes
preparation.
Is
the the
prepared sample r e p r e s e n t a t i v e o f t h e m a t e r i a l t o be analysed? How can contamination be avoided, which r e s u l t s from t h e u b i q u i t o u s n a t u r e of t h e compound t o be analysed? What i s t h e b e s t s e p a r a t i o n procedure t o use i n order t o avoid t e d i o u s sample p r e p a r a t i o n ? I n Chapter I 1 1 t h e processing o f whole blood ( r a t h e r than plasma o r serum) f o r drug a n a l y s i s i s described.
The a n a l y s i s o f c y c l o s p o r i n e and
i t s m e t a b o l i t e s , an e s p e c i a l l y d i f f i c u l t case, demonstrates how comprehensive t h e o p t i m i s a t i o n o f sample p r e p a r a t i o n must be i n o r d e r t o successfully described.
perform t h e a n a l y s i s .
Several
other
examples
are
also
Chapter I V deals w i t h radio-column l i q u i d chromatography and i n troduces t h e o t h e r theme o f t h i s book: s e l e c t i v e d e t e c t i o n methods. The widespread use o f r a d i o i s o t o p e s r e q u i r e s a h i g h degree o f p u r i f i c a t i o n d u r i n g t h e manufacture o f t h e compounds, as w e l l as h i g h l y accurate d e t e c t i o n methods i n b i o l o g i c a l and biochemical s t u d i e s . Chapter V continues t h e theme o f s e l e c t i v e d e t e c t i o n w i t h an overview o f post-column r e a c t i o n d e t e c t i o n ,
The use of
immobilised enzymes i n
post-column r e a c t o r s o r so c a l l e d 'pumpless' r e a c t o r systems f o r o n - l i n e reagent generation a f t e r t h e chromatographic s e p a r a t i o n s t e p i s discussed i n detail.
Various examples of t h e s e p a r a t i o n o f b i o l o g i c a l compounds
show how t h e p r o d u c t i o n o f electrochemical
reagents and photochemical
r e a c t i o n d e t e c t i o n have increased t h e s e l e c t i v i t y o f t h e d e t e c t i o n .
This
has l e d t o more economical a n a l y t i c a l systems.
1 uminescence d e t e c t i o n techniques i s The use o f immobilised fluorophores o r t h e
S e l e c t i v e d e t e c t i o n employing o u t l i n e d i n Chapter V I .
coup1 i n g t o photochemical r e a c t i o n s leads t o h i g h l y s e l e c t i v e d e t e c t i o n systems, which again g r e a t l y s i m p l i f y t h e sample handling. The volume concludes w i t h a r e v i e w of t h e use o f continuous s e p a r a t i o n techniques
in
flow
injection
analysis.
It
demands
that
a
strong
i n t e r d i s c i p l i n a r y dependence between sample h a n d l i n g and separation i n t h i s area i s e s s e n t i a l . The completion o f t h i s second volume marks t h e achievement o f t h e aims f i r s t s e t o u t by Professor F r e i i n t h e p r e f a c e t o P a r t A. It i s thus a f i t t i n g conclusion t o t h i s preamble t o quote these words: "By t h e n a t u r e o f i t s c o n t e n t , and w r i t t e n as i t i s by experienced p r a c t i t i o n e r s , t h e book should be useful t o i n v e s t i g a t o r s i n many areas
of
application.
Each chapter
includes
sufficient
references
t o the
l i t e r a t u r e t o serve as a v a l u a b l e s t a r t i n g p o i n t f o r more d e t a i l e d i n v e s t i g a t i o n . The s t r o n g emphasis on sample h a n d l i n g makes t h e book unique i n many ways and i t should prove u s e f u l t o t h e environmental s c i e n t i s t as w e l l as t o i n v e s t i g a t o r s from t h e c l i n i c a l , pharmaceutical and b i o a n a l y t i c a l f i e l d s
.
"
F i n a l l y , I would l i k e t o thank t h e authors f o r t h e i r c o n t r i b u t i o n s , many f r i e n d s f o r s t i m u l a t i n g d i s c u s s i o n s , D r . M. Galvan f o r l i n g u i s t i c assistance and Mrs. G. Bader and C. Jantke f o r t h e p r e p a r a t i o n o f t h e camera ready manuscript.
In p a r t i c u l a r , I am extremely g r a t e f u l t o my
w i f e , who took over most o f t h e e d i t o r i a l work f o l l o w i n g Roland's death.
September 1989
K. Zech
(Constance, F. R .G. )
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
5 CHAPTER I
PRECONCENTRATION AND CHROMATOGRAPHY ON CHEMICALLY MODIFIED SILICAS W I T H COMPLEXATION PROPERTIES J.L. VEUTHEY, M.A.
BAGNOUD and W. HAERDI
1. 1.1 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.3 2. 2.1 2.2 3. 3.1 3.2
Introduction Preconcentration using l i q u i d - s o l i d e x t r a c t i o n S t a t i o n a r y phases f o r l i q u i d - s o l i d e x t r a c t i o n P u r i t y o f preconcentration supports Other f a c t o r s i n f l u e n c i n g t h e c h o i c e o f s u p p o r t s Choice o f a s u p p o r t Chemically modified s i l i c a s Surface modification C r o s s - l i n k e d f u n c t i o n a l groups t o s i l i c a s P r e c o n c e n t r a t i o n o f i n o r g a n i c compounds u s i n g c h e l a t i n g s i l i c a s Metal p r e c o n c e n t r a t i o n Advantages and disadvantages of c h e l a t i n g s i l i c a s i n preconcentrating metals 3.3 Analysis o f preconcentrated metals 4. The p r e c o n c e n t r a t i o n of o r g a n i c compounds u s i n g c h e l a t i n g s i 1icas 5. C h e l a t i n g s i l i c a s i n chromatography Metal s e p a r a t i o n chromatography 5.1 5.2 L i gand exchange chromatography L i gand exchange p r i n c i p l e s 5.2.1 5.2.2 Types o f s t a t i o n a r y phases 5.2.2.1 Metal s i l i c a s 5.2.2.2 Complexing metal s i l i c a s 5.3 Enantiomer s e p a r a t i o n 6. Conclusion References
1. INTRODUCTION
In t h e p a s t 20 y e a r s numerous s t u d i e s have been made t o develop s o l i d s u r f a c e s c o n t a i n i n g complexing s i t e s f o r v a r i o u s a p p l i c a t i o n s . The f i r s t complexing metals
surfaces
from
found
a p p l i c a t i o n s i n preconcentrating
n a t u r a l media
(ref.
1).
Through
improved
transition
cross-linking
t e c h n i q u e s , complexing groups w i t h f a s t e r exchange k i n e t i c s were bound t o t h e support.
I t t h e n became p o s s i b l e t o use t h e s e s u p p o r t s i n chroma-
tography ( r e f . 2 ) . More r e c e n t l y , o t h e r a p p l i c a t i o n s i n c l u d e :
-
t h e use o f t h e s e supports i n heterogeneous c a t a l y s i s a t t h e complexing m e t a l s i t e s ( r e f . 3)
-
r e t a i n i n g o r g a n i c s f r o m a i r o r w a t e r ( r e f . 4) peptide synthesis ( r e f . 5 ) i m m o b i l i z i n g enzymes ( r e f . 6 ) .
6
These a p p l i c a t i o n s have o n l y been made p o s s i b l e a f t e r having t e s t e d a number o f d i f f e r e n t types of supports. F o r example, t h e f i r s t supports employed f o r metal r e t e n t i o n were d i v i n y l benzene p o l y s t y r e n e copolymer r e s i n s . The development o f o t h e r supports such as s i l i c a t e s and cellulose,
have r e c e n t l y replaced these r e s i n s .
Cross-1 inked s i l i c a t e
supports have been h i g h l y developed and have found a wide range of a p p l i c a t i o n s , e s p e c i a l l y i n chromatography, due t o t h e i r low c o s t and t h e f a c i l i t y o f b i n d i n g a wide range o f f u n c t i o n a l groups. This chapter w i l l discuss t h e use o f these supports i n l i q u i d - s o l i d e x t r a c t i o n s , t h e types o f supports a v a i l a b l e and a c e r t a i n number of considerations which should be made concerning t h e i r a p p l i c a t i o n . PRECONCENTRATION USING LIQUID-SOLID EXTRACTION
1.1
The
analysis
of
inorganic,
organic,
or
organometallic
species
necessitates, f o r t h e most p a r t , a p u r i f i c a t i o n s t e p t o e l i m i n a t e a l a r g e p r o p o r t i o n o f unwanted products.
E x t r a c t i o n techniques seem t o be t h e
most a p p r o p r i a t e i n f u l f i l l i n g t h i s need. These techniques, i n a d d i t i o n t o clean-ups, o f f e r t h e advantage o f reducing t h e i n i t i a l sample volume, thus concentrating i t . S e l e c t i v e l y e x t r a c t i n g a compound o r c l a s s o f compounds from a complex m i x t u r e w h i l e reducing t h e f i n a l sample volume b e f o r e a n a l y s i s i s c a l l e d "preconcentration" o r "enrichment". This technique i s very u s e f u l when compounds a r e found a t t r a c e l e v e l s . H i g h l y measured p r e c a u t i o n s must be taken by t h e a n a l y s t d u r i n g t r a c e analysis. A s l i g h t contamination o f t h e e x t r a c t i n g s o l v e n t , f o r example, may c o n t r i b u t e t o t h e e r r o r s contaminations
may
revealed
be preconcentrated
i n the f i n a l as
much
as
analysis the
since
compound
of
i n t e r e s t . Consequently, i t i s necessary t o f i n d techniques which reduce contamination r i s k s keeping t h e number o f o p e r a t i o n s t o a s t r i c t minimum. L i q u i d - s o l i d e x t r a c t i o n , which c o n s i s t s o f r e t a i n i n g s o l u t e s i n a l i q u i d phase on a s o l i d support ( f i l t e r , column, suspension) f u l f i l l these prer e q u i s i t e s b e t t e r than any o t h e r technique. These e x t r a c t i o n p r i n c i p l e s are n o t e x c l u s i v e t o l i q u i d phases alone b u t a r e a l s o a p p l i c a b l e t o gas phases as we1 1.
1.2
STATIONARY PHASES FOR LIQUID-SOLID EXTRACTION
Four d i f f e r e n t types of supports e x i s t f o r l i q u i d - s o l i d e x t r a c t i o n , namely ( r e f . 7 ) : 1.) 2.)
s y n t h e t i c and foamed p l a s t i c r e s i n s i l i c a and alumina
7
cellulose a c t i v a t e d carbon
3.) 4.)
A 1 1 o f these supports have advantages and disadvantages,
hence t h e
choice o f t h e support depends on t h e t y p e o f a n a l y s i s needed.
Several
c r i t e r i o n a r e necessary f o r t h i s choice. For example, t h e p u r i t y of t h e support i s a very important f a c t o r . Consideration should a l s o be g i v e n t o c e r t a i n p r o p e r t i e s such as t h e r i g i d i t y o f t h e support o r t h e ease of a n a l y s i s o r even t h e c o s t o f t h e support, a l l o f which p l a y an i m p o r t a n t r o l e i n t h i s choice. 1.2.1
PURITY OF PRECONCENTRATION SUPPORTS
Trace a n a l y s i s n e c e s s i t a t e s t h e use of h i g h p u r i t y p r e c o n c e n t r a t i o n supports. Although s i l i c a t e s have been o b t a i n e d w i t h a h i g h degree of p u r i t y , s p e c i a l a t t e n t i o n should be g i v e n t o those which have been chemically m o d i f i e d as i m p u r i t i e s may have been i n t r o d u c e d from reagents used d u r i n g t h e chemical m o d i f i c a t i o n ( f o r example, a l k o x y s i l a n e treatment o f s i l i c a t e g e l s ) .
i m p u r i t i e s due t o
Consequently they r e q u i r e a
pretreatment s t e p t o e l i m i n a t e these t r a c e compounds. S t a t i o n a r y phases may be p r e t r e a t e d u s i n g e i t h e r a Soxhlet e x t r a c t i o n o r simply prewashed w i t h an o r g a n i c s o l v e n t o r an a p p r o p r i a t e m i n e r a l acid. 1.2.2
OTHER FACTORS INFLUENCING THE CHOICE OF SUPPORTS
One important p h y s i c a l p r o p e r t y o f these supports i s t h e i r r i g i d i t y . E l u t i o n i s u s u a l l y performed under a p p l i e d pressures deforming t h e support thus
changing
t h e i r physicochemical
properties.
supports having h i g h e r r i g i d i t y a l l o w h i g h e r e l u t i o n f l o w
I n general, r a t e s t o be
obtained thus making a n a l y s i s t i m e s h o r t e r . For instance, divinylbenzene p o l y s t y r e n e r e s i n s (Chelex 100) t e n d t o s w e l l , r e t r a c t o r become deformed upon c o n t a c t of t h e m o b i l e phase. These problems may be minimized when they
a r e mixed w i t h
s i l i c a gel
of
approximately t h e same p a r t i c l e s i z e . Foamed p l a s t i c s , on t h e o t h e r hand, a r e r i g i d and remain so even a t h i g h e l u t i o n f l o w r a t e s . A t lower e l u t i o n f l o w r a t e s , s i l i c a t e s , c o n t r o l l e d pore glasses (CPG) and c r o s s - l i n k e d c e l l u l o s e s c o n t a i n i n g c h e l a t i n g s u b s t i t u t e n t s are n o t deformed e i t h e r and may be u t i l i z e d f o r p r e c o n c e n t r a t i o n as w e l l as f o r h i g h performance chromatography. Another f a c t o r a f f e c t i n g
t h e choice of
a n a l y s i s which can be performed.
After
a support
i s t h e t y p e of
preconcentration,
a n a l y s i s of
r e t a i n e d products u s i n g e i t h e r neutron a c t i v a t i o n o r X-ray fluorescence may be done d i r e c t l y on s i l i c a s ,
resins o r cellulose.
However,
direct
8
a n a l y s i s o f CPG o r foamed p l a s t i c s i s n o t recommended and e l u t i o n i s necessary. Ligand exchange k i n e t i c s a l s o p l a y s a very i m p o r t a n t r o l e i n t h e choice o f a support. Resins, f o r example, have very slow exchange k i n e t i c s as opposed t o those o f m o d i f i e d s i l i c a t e s . This d i f f e r e n c e may be a t t r i b u t e d t o t h e s t r u c t u r e i t s e l f o f t h e supports, s i n c e i n f a c t , t h e cross-bonded f u n c t i o n a l groups o f t h e r e s i n a r e p r a c t i c a l l y i n a c c e s s i b l e whereas those o f t h e m o d i f i e d s i l i c a t e s l i e a t t h e surface.
CHOICE OF A SUPPORT
1.3
Among t h e f o u r d i f f e r e n t types o f s o l i d supports employed f o r t h e extraction o r preconcentration o f t r a c e organics o r inorganics, s i l i c a s o f f e r t h e most a t t r a c t i v e p r o p e r t i e s and consequently a r e r e c e i v i n g i n creasing i n t e r e s t f o r t h e f o l l o w i n g reasons: 1.) t h e i r low c o s t
2.)
they may be used d i r e c t l y o r m o d i f i e d through t h e p h y s i c a l o r
3.)
they a r e a p p l i c a b l e t o t h e e x t r a c t i o n o f o r g a n i c as w e l l as
4.)
they a r e used n o t o n l y f o r p r e c o n c e n t r a t i o n purposes b u t f o r
chemical adsorption o f c h e l a t i n g agents i n o r g a n i c c o n s t i t u e n t s from l i q u i d o r gas phase systems chromatographic
separation
o f organic o r mineral
components
as
we1 1
5.)
they have f a s t l i g a n d exchange k i n e t i c s . The f o l l o w i n g discussion w i l l focus on complexing s i l i c a s and w i l l
cover a number o f t h e i r a p p l i c a t i o n s . order,
With r e s p e c t t o c h r o n o l o g i c d l
i t w i l l be necessary t o f i r s t mention t h e synthesis
complexing
silicas,
subsequently
their
use
for
o f these
preconcentration
a p p l i c a t i o n s , and f i n a l l y , t h e i r use as chromatography supports. C e r t a i n s i l i c a s , such as t h e c r o s s - l i n k e d a l k y l - c h a i n s i l i c a s , which a r e r e a d i l y employed i n l i q u i d chromatography, w i l l n o t be discussed here s i n c e they have been thoroughly described i n numerous a r t i c l e s ( r e f s . 8-10). 2.
CHEMICALLY M O D I F I E D SILICAS S i l i c a s can e a s i l y be modified t o o b t a i n a wide range o f supports o f
differing
properties.
Numerous
factors
may
influence
the
chemical
m o d i f i c a t i o n o f s i 1 i c a t e s making t h e i r q u a n t i t a t i v e s y n t h e s i s d i f f i c u l t An e n t i r e monography
(ref.
11) t r e a t s t h e s u b j e c t o f s i l i c a s ,
.
their
physico-chemical p r o p e r t i e s and t h e i r r e a c t i o n mechanisms. Chemical m o d i f i c a t i o n o f s i l i c a s i s p r i n c i p a l l y accomplished by one of
9
two methods: a.)
a r e a c t i o n c a l l e d " s u r f a c e m o d i f i c a t i o n " between an organosilane and t h e s i 1 i c a t e
b.)
o r by h y d r o l y t i c polycondensation o f organosilanes. Surface m o d i f i c a t i o n i s by f a r t h e most o f t e n employed as i t i s a much
s i m p l e r procedure. difficult,
I n contrast,
the
second method
is
found
u n c o n t r o l l a b l e , and g i v e s r i s e t o undefined supports.
to
be
Conse-
quently, t h i s d i s c u s s i o n w i l l focus on s u r f a c e m o d i f i c a t i o n . 2.1
SURFACE MODIFICATION Several types o f r e a c t i o n s between v a r i o u s o r g a n i c groups -R
and
s i l i c a s are employed t o modify these supports, namely: 1.)
-R may be d i r e c t l y bonded t o t h e s i l i c i u m atom, S i - R
2.)
-R may be bonded t o t h e s i l i c a t e v i a a heteroatom
a. Si-0-R b. S i - N H - R c . Si-0-Si-R Among t h e f o u r d i f f e r e n t
procedures o f c r o s s - l i n k i n g organics,
-R,
onto s i l i c a s , Si-0-Si-R i s t h e most o f t e n u t i l i z e d . The s i l o x a n e bond i s , in e f f e c t , t h e most s t a b l e one and consequently i s t h e most s u i t a b l e f o r a p p l i c a t i o n s i n complex systems such as n a t u r a l a q u a t i c systems. Problems such as h y d r o l y s i s and s y n t h e s i s a r e encountered w i t h t h e t h r e e o t h e r types o f bonds. C r o s s - l i n k i n g o f t h e o r g a n i c -R group through a s i l o x a n e bond may be accomplished u s i n g organosilanes
such as RnSiX4-n
(l
The t r i -
f u c t i o n a l s i l a n e , R-SiX3, i s t h e most o f t e n used and r e a c t s according t o t h e f o l l o w i n g mechanism: Scheme 1
1. -Si
-OH t RSiX3
-25
I
4
- Si -OH I
I
I
-Si - 0,
-Si -OH
2.
X I -0-Si - R
t
RSiX3 --c
4
-si-o' I
HX
X
Si' 'R
+ 2 HX
A maximum number o f two of t h e t h r e e f u n c t i o n a l groups may be bonded
t o t h e s i l i c a t e owing t o s t e r i c hindrance. X i s u s u a l l y an alkoxy
10 (methoxy o r ethoxy) o r h a l i d e f u n c t i o n a l group. Another i m p o r t a n t f a c t o r t o c o n s i d e r d u r i n g chemical m o d i f i c a t i o n i s t h e change i n t h e s u r f a c e p o r o s i t y . Pore s i z e as w e l l as i t s s p e c i f i c s urf ac e decrease as a r e s u l t o f s i l a n i z a t i o n .
T h i s f a c t o r should be
considered when s i l i c a s u r f a c e c a p a c i t i e s a r e c a l c u l a t e d .
2.2
CROSS-LINKED FUNCTIONAL GROUPS TO SILICAS
The t y p es o f s i l a n e s which a r e l i k e l y t o bond w i t h s i l i c a s have been discussed i n a r e c e n t r e v i e w ( r e f .
12). Only t h o s e organosilanes which
form non-h y dro l y z a b l e c r o s s - l i n k e d
bonds a r e s u i t a b l e f o r a n a l y t i c a l
appl i c a t i o n s . The s i l i c a s 2, 4
-
7, d e s c r i b e d i n Ta b l e I may be used d i r e c t l y as
c h e l a t i n g s urf ac e s f o r m e t a l s o r c h e m i c a l l y m o d i f i e d . The advantage o f w o r k i n g w i t h c r o s s - l i n k e d s i l i c a s is t h a t t h e d e s i r e d functional
group may e v e n t u a l l y be added by:
hydrolysis,
substitution,
o x i d a t i o n o r azo-coup1 i n g .
TABLE I
C r o s s - l i n k e d f u n c t i o n a l groups t o s i l i c a s by s u r f a c e m o d i f i c a t i o n
No
Organosi 1ane
Modified s i l i c a
Ref.
1
( E t 0 I 3 S i (CH2)3NH2
s i -0-Si
13-17
(cH~)~NH~
I
2
( E t 0 I 3 S i ( C H ~ ) ~ N H ( C H ~ ) ~ N SH i ~- 0 - S i (CH2) 3NH(CH2) 2NH2 I
1,13, 14,16, 18-28
3
(E t 0 )3 S i (CH2)3NHCH3
si-0-sli ( C H ~ ) ~ N H C H ~
14,28
I
4 (Me013 S i (CH2) 3NH (CH2) 2NH (CH2) 2NH2
/
5
( E t 0 I 3 S i (CH2)3N,
CH2COOCH3
S i -0-S:i ( CH2) 3NH ( CH2) 2NH (CH2) 2NH2
6
/
S i - 0 - Si (CH2)3N I
CH2COONa
CH2COOCH3
I
CH2COOCH3
\
CH2COONa
13
CH2COOCH3 I
,CH2COONa
S i - 0 - Si (CH2)3N,
(Na0I3Si (CH2)3N
13
I
13 CH2COONa
11 TABLE I
(continued)
No.
Organosi 1 ane
Modified s i l i c a
/ CH2COONa
7 (Na0I3Si (CH213N
CH2COONa
\
I
(CH2)2N,
/ CH2COONa
Si-0-Si (CH2)3N I
/
Ref.
\
/
(Me0I3Si (CH2)30CH2CHCH2
0
13
(CH2) 2N,
CH2COONa 8
CH2COONa CH2COONa
S i -0-Si (CH2)30CH2CHCH2 I
27, 29-34
0
I
9
10
3.
C1R2Si (CH2),,C6H4CH2C1
(Me0)3SiC6H4NH2
S i -0-Si (CH2),,C6H4CH2C1
28
35-41
Si-O-SiC6H4NH2
42
PRECONCENTRATION OF INORGANIC COMPOUNDS USING CHELATING SILICAS
Commercially prepared complexing r e s i n s (Chelex, Dowex, e t c . ) were t h e f i r s t supports t h a t were used f o r p r e c o n c e n t r a t i o n purpose. S e l e c t i v i t y i s a major problem w i t h these supports s i n c e they i n d i f f e r e n t l y r e t a i n a l k a l i n e and a l k a l i n e e a r t h metals as w e l l as t h e d e s i r e d t r a n s i t i o n metals. Secondly, d u r i n g e l u t i o n when pressures a r e a p p l i e d , t h e s e supports undergo s w e l l i n g o r s h r i n k i n g . Consequently t h e i r p h y s i c a l and chemical p r o p e r t i e s change d u r i n g t h e course o f t h e a n a l y s i s .
Thirdly,
c h e l a t i n g k i n e t i c s are very slow due t o s t e r i c hindrance. Complexing s i l i c a s , on t h e o t h e r hand, overcame these problems and a r e c u r r e n t l y t h e most w i d e l y used f o r ( r e f s . 7 , 12, 2 8 ) : - metal preconcentration from complex n a t u r a l systems
-
a n a l y s i s and separation o f metals i n l i q u i d chromatography.
Understanding t h e mechanism of metal complexing i s o f outmost importance. Although these mechanisms have been t h o r o u g h l y s t u d i e d i n homogeneous s o l u t i o n s ,
they have n o t been s u f f i c i e n t l y e l u c i d a t e d i n
heterogeneous 1 i q u i d - s o l i d systems. Retention p r o p e r t i e s a r e dependent upon a number o f d i f f e r e n t phenomena. For instance, t h e f o r m a t i o n of a s t a b l e complex may be prevented by s t e r i c hindrance. f a c t o r s are:
I
I
Other i m p o r t a n t
12
-
adsorption
-
i n t e r a c t i o n s between t h e s i l i c a and t h e s o l u t i o n .
Hence, t h e r e t e n t i o n behavior o f these systems i s d i f f i c u l t t o p r e d i c t s i n c e many unknown f a c t o r s a r e important. 3.1
METAL PRECONCENTRATION
Table I 1 l i s t s t h e p r i n c i p a l complexing f u n c t i o n a l groups as w e l l as t h e i r precursors cross-bonded t o s i l i c a s , employed f o r t h e purpose of preconcentration o f metals. Retention
selectivity
between
transition
metals
and
alkaline
or
a l k a l i n e e a r t h metals was t h e key p r o p e r t y evoking t h e development of c h e l a t i n g s i l i c a s . F u n c t i o n a l groups such as dithiocarbamates, diamines, diketones, oxines and o t h e r s a r e w i d e l y used because t h e y form very s t a b l e complexes w i t h t r a n s i t i o n metals even i n t h e presence o f commonly encountered i n t e r f e r i n g species. As f a r as p o s s i b l e t h e p r e c o n c e n t r a t i o n s t e p needs t o be kept simple. This necessitates t h e use o f a minimum number o f operations as w e l l as reagents. Most metal preconcentrations r e q u i r e o n l y a pH adjustment as a p r e l i m i n a r y step. TABLE I 1
Complexing f u n c t i o n a l groups cross-bonded t o s i l i c a s f o r metals preconcentration.
No.
Precursors I
1
Complexing s i l i c a
Ref.
I
Si-0-SiI ( c H ~ ) ~ N H ( c H ~ ) ~ N HS~i -0-SiI ( CH2) 3NH (CH) 2NH2
14,16,21-24 43,44
I
2
Si-0-Si ( c H ~ ) ~ N H ~ I
I
Si-0-Si ( C H ~ ) ~ N H C S ;
1, 14-21
I
I
3
S i - O - i i (CH2)3NHCH3 I
S i -0-Si (CH2)3N(CH3)CS2Na
1, 14-21
I I
4
Si-0-S\ (CH2)3NH(CH2)2NH2 I
Si-0-Si (CH2)3N(CH2)2NHCS2Na I
I CS2Na
5
S i -0-S;i (CH2)3NH2
I
S i -0-Si (CH2)3NHCOCH2COCH3 I
14,16,20, 21,45-49
19
13 TABLE I 1
(continued)
No.
Precursors
7
Si-O-Si(CH2)3NH2
Ref.
Complexing s i l i c a
I
I
51
S i - 0 - S i (CH2)3NH
I
I
CS2H ’
I
8
Si-0-
9
S i -0-S,iC6H4NH2
Si-0-Si (CH ) NHCO I 3~
I
I
Si-0-Sic H N=N I
I
10
I
S i -0-Si (CH2) 3NH (CH2)2NH2 I
42
6 4 ~
I
Si-0-Si ( c H ~ ) ~ N H ( c H ~ ) ~ Si NH -0-Si ~ (CH2) 3NH(CH2)2NHC(0) CH2C (0) C6H5 I
11
17.52-57
16
I I
S i -0-Si (CH2) 3NH(CH2) 2NHC(0)CH2C(O) CH3 I
16
14
TABLE I 1
(continued)
No.
Precursors
Complexing s i 1 i c a
12
S i-0- S i( CH2) 3NH ( CH2) 2NH2
Ref.
I
I
I
S i -0-Si (CH2)3NH(CH2)2NHC(0) CH2C(0) CF3
16
1
I
13
S i - 0 - i i (CH2)3NH(CH2)2NH2
Si-0-Si (CH2)3NH(CH2),NHC(0)C6H4NH2
16
1
I
I
14
Si-0-Si (CH2)3NH2 I
CH~-N-C~H~ I
15
I
Si-0-Si (CH2)3NH(CH2)2NH2
S i -0-Si (CH2)3NHCH2CH2N=CHC6H40H
I
I
16
I
Si-0-Si (CH2)3NH(CH2)2NH2
S i -0-Si ( C H ~ ) ~ N H C H ~ C H ~ N = C H
I
I
I
17
S i -0-Si ( CH2) 3NH(CH2)
28
I
I
2NH2
+
S i -O-S,i ( c H ~3) ~
~
2
~
~
2
~28 ~
I
i
18
Si-0-Si (CH2)3NH(CH2)2NH2
I
S i -0-Si (CH2)3NH2CH2CH2NHCOCH=CHCOO-
I
I
19
S i -0-Si (CH2)3NH(CH2)2NH2 I
+ 28
I
I
0
\
S i -0-Si (CH2)3NHCH2CH2NHCH2
cr/n 28
/
I
0
CH3
2
~
15
TABLE I 1
(continued)
No.
Precursors
20
S i -0-Si (CH2)3NH(CH2)2NH2
C om pl e x i ng s i 1 ica
Ref.
I
I
S i -0-Si (CH2)3NHCH2CH2N=C
,
HO
28
-?
cF3
I
21
S i -0-Si (CH2),NH(CH,),NH2 I
I
S i - 0 - S i (CH2I3NHCH2CH 2N=C I
HO
/cH3
28
-?
CH,
I
22
S i -0-Si (CH2)3NH(CH2)2NH2 I
CH2COO/ S i - 0 - S i (CH2)3NCH CH N I CH2COO2 2 \ CH,COO-
28
23
CF3 I
24
S i -0-S,iC6H4CH2C1
'
S i -0-SiC6H4CH2 I
I
25
Si-O-SiC6H4CH2C1 I
28
0 I
28
Si - 0- Si C 6H 4C H 2 I
OH
16
The pH o f t h e a n a l y t i c a l s o l u t i o n may have an i m p o r t a n t i n f l u e n c e on t h e s t a b i l i t y o f t h e complexing f u n c t i o n a l group. F or i n s t a n c e , s i l o x a n e bonds a r e p a r t i c u l a r l y u n s t a b l e i n e i t h e r a c i d (pH < 2) o r b a s i c (pH > 8) s o l u t i o n s . O t h e r groups such as d i t h i o c a r b a m a t e s a r e a l s o u n s t a b l e i n a c i d s o l u t i o n s (pH c 5 ) f o r t h e y become o x i d i z e d o r decompose. O t her f a c t o r s such as s t a b i l i t y o f t h e f u n c t i o n a l group i n aqueous s o l u t i o n should be t a k e n i n t o account. F o r example, d i a m i n o - s i l i c a s used as p r e c u r s o r s f o r numerous complexing s i l i c a s ( r e f s . 13, 59) a r e u n s t a b l e o v er l o n g p e r i o d s o f t i m e i n aqueous s o l u t i o n s . T heref ore, b e f o r e u s i n g a g i v e n s i l i c a t h e physico-chemical p r o p e r t i e s should be w e l l known. 3.2
ADVANTAGES AND DISADVANTAGES OF CHELATING SILICAS I N PRECONCENTRATING METALS
They o f f e r an i m p o r t a n t advantage:
r a p i d met al complexing k i n e t i c s
( r e f . 12). Consequently, p r e c o n c e n t r a t i o n f l o w r a t e s o f up t o 50 ml/min may be achieved ( r e f s . 21-23). Another advantage i s t h e p o s s i b i l i t y o f p r e c o n c e n t r a t i n g d i r e c t l y a t t h e sampling s i t e , t h u s t r a n s p o r t a t i o n , c o n t a m i n a t i o n and sample s t o r a g e problems may be e l i m i n a t e d ( r e f . 45). However, c a r e s h o u l d be t a k e n t o a v o i d met al i m p u r i t i e s ,
inate t o
s i l i c a s o r i n t r o d u c e d by r e a g e n t s used i n c r o s s b i n d i n g , s i n c e t h e y may cause i n t e r f e r e n c e w i t h t h e p r e c o n c e n t r a t i o n ( r e f . 60). Although c h e l a t i n g s i l i c a s u s u a l l y have lower r e t e n t i o n c a p a c i t i e s t han do complexing r e s i n s , m e t a l s may b e p r e c o n c e n t r a t e d f rom s e v e r a l l i t e r s o f s o l u t i o n and t h e r e f o r e t h i s i s n o t a major drawback. 3.3
ANALYSIS OF PRECONCENTRATED METALS Me t a ls which have been p r e c o n c e n t r a t e d on t h e complexing s i l i c a s may
be analyzed d i r e c t l y u s i n g t h e f o l l o w i n g methods: X-ray ESCA, phot o ac ou s t i c s spectroscopy,
f luorescence,
n e u t r o n i c a c t i v a t i o n and I R spect ro-
metry. A l t e r n a t i v e l y , analyses may b e performed by c l a s s i c a l t echniques once t h e metal has been e l u t e d from t h e s u pport : atomic a b s o r p t i o n w i t h o r w i t h o u t flame, complexometry and c o l o r i m e t r y . The drawbacks of t h i s t e c hnique a r e t h e d i f f i c u l t y i n e l u t i n g t h e s t r o n g l y r e t a i n e d met al and secondly t h es e procedures a r e time-consuming. A n a l y t i c a l t e c h n i q u e s used
for
metal determinations
are 1i s t e d i n
Table 111. X-ray f l u o r e s c e n c e i s o f t e n used s i n c e low d e t e c t i o n l i m i t s may be achieved.
C o n c e n t r a t i o n s a t ppb l e v e l s may be det ermined i n t h e
absence o f i n t e r f e r e n c e s .
17
TABLE I 1 1
Analysis o f preconcentrated metals
Complexing s i l i c a
Anal y s is
Metals
Ref.
(detection) RFX
-Zn, Cu, Co (10 ppm)
21
RFX
-Zn, Cu, Hg, C r , Pb,
22
Mn (.005-10 ppm) S i -0-S i ( c H ~ ) ~ N H ( c H ~ ) ~ NRFX H~ I
S i-0-S i (CH2)3N(CH3)CS2Na
-As04, Se04, Mn04,
23
Cr20,, Moo4, W04, V04(1-10 ppb) RFX
-phosphates (20 ppb)
44
RFX
-Co, Cu, N i , Pb, Hg
21
Zn, Mn (.5-5ppm)
I
RFX
-Cu, Zn, N i , Mn, Pb,
21
Fe( .5-l0ppb) I
-Pb, Hg(1OPPb)
Si-0-Si
1
I
ESCA
-Pb( .02-20 ppm)
20
Colorimetry
-Fe, Cu(1ppb)
52
AAS
-Cd, Pb, Zn, Cu, Fe,
57
I
S i -0-Si ( C H ~ ) ~ N H C O I
Mn, N i , Co( .03-lppb)
I
S i - 0 - S i (CH2)3NH(CH2)2NH2 I
Photoacous. spectr.
-Moo4, W04, Cu
17-24
18 THE PRECONCENTRATION OF ORGANIC COMPOUNDS U SIN G CHELATING SILICAS
4.
A recent a p p l i c a t i o n o f c h e l a t i n g s i l i c a s c o n s i s t s o f p r e c o n c e n t r a t i n g
organic compounds from complex n a t u r a l systems f o l l o w e d by a chromatographic a n a l y s i s . I n f a c t , a l a r g e number of these o r g a n i c products a r e found a t t r a c e l e v e l s n e c e s s i t a t i n g a p r e c o n c e n t r a t i o n step. P u r i f i c a t i o n and enrichment of these compounds have u s u a l l y been accomplished by 1 i q u i d -1 iq u i d e x t r a c t i o n techniques. However, these techniques a r e l a b o r i o u s , time-consuming and may be t h e o r i g i n o f product l o s s o r sample contamination. Most o f these problems have
been
eliminated
by
replacing
liquid-liquid
extraction
with
l i q u i d - s o l i d e x t r a c t i o n where s i l i c a t e s a r e employed as t h e s o l i d surface ( c f . 1.1). The use o f nonpolar s i l i c a s f o r t h e p r e c o n c e n t r a t i o n of nonp o l a r compounds from aqueous s o l u t i o n s was f i r s t mentioned i n 1974 ( r e f . 61). The s t r o n g hydrophobic i n t e r a c t i o n between t h e nonpolar o r g a n i c products and t h e nonpolar s i l i c a s made i t p o s s i b l e t o preconcentrate them
.
from l a r g e volumes o f p o l a r s o l v e n t s such as water (from 1 t o 100 m l ) By simply changing t h e p o l a r i t y o f t h e m o b i l e phase, t h e preconcentrated compounds c o u l d then be e l u t e d i n a small volume o f s o l v e n t . Due t o t h e h i g h r e t e n t i o n c a p a c i t y o f t h e s e s i l i c a s , o n l y a small q u a n t i t y was necessary t o make precolumns ( o n l y a few m i l l i m e t e r s c o n c e n t r a t i o n purposes advantages :
(ref.
-
negl i g e a b l e pressure drops
-
r e q u i r e s small phase volume
62).
These small
long) f o r p r e -
precolumns o f f e r
many
low packing c o s t s low dead volumes r e s u l t i n g from c o u p l i n g t h e pre-column t o t h e a n a l y t i c a l column. Thus, i t i s p o s s i b l e t o couple a precolumn w i t h an a n a l y t i c a l column
( o n - l i n e ) by merely u s i n g a h i g h pressure v a l v e as shown i n F i g u r e 1. Using t h i s technique,
alkyl-chain
cross-bonded
s i l i c a s were f i r s t
employed t o r e t a i n organic compounds. The use o f t h i s technique has been reviewed by several authors ( r e f s . 63-65). Two major problems may be encountered upon u s i n g a p o l a r s i l i c a s f o r preconcentration purposes: 1.)
lack o f s e l e c t i v i t y
2.)
poor r e t e n t i o n o f p o l a r o r g a n i c products.
To overcome these two problems, t h e u t i l i s a t i o n o f complexing s i l i c a s loaded w i t h metal has proven t o be promising. These s i l i c a s s e l e c t i v e l y r e t a i n compounds c o n t a i n i n g an e l e c t r o n - p a i r
donor heteroatom (Lewis
base) according t o t h e o r d e r g i v e n by t h e l i g a n d exchange p r i n c i p l e .
19
Column
Detector
HPLC Pump
J
Pr ecolumn
0-
Eluent
I
B F ig. 1
Sample
O n - l i n e c o u p l i n g o f t h e enrichment w i t h t h e chromatographic s e para t i o n . (-) Enrichment step; ( - - ) e l u t i o n and chromatographic separation.
Iminodiacetate
(IDA)
silica
loaded
with
copper
was
the
first
complexing s i l i c a loaded w i t h m e t a l t o b e s t u d i e d f o r i t s r e t e n t i o n p r o p e r t i e s o f o r g a n i c compounds ( r e f . 66). T h i s s i l i c a s t r o n g l y r e t a i n s catecholamines f ro m aqueous s o l u t i o n s and t h e n r e l e a s e s them when e l u t e d w i t h a c i d i c methanol s o l u t i o n s . S e p a r a t i o n may t hen be d i r e c t l y perf ormed by i o n - p a i r chromatography u s i n g a C18 s i l i c a a n a l y t i c a l column. Subsequently,
o t h e r metal loaded complexing s i l i c a s have a l s o been
developed. A s i l i c a c o n t a i n i n g t h e f u n c t i o n a l group 2-amino-1-cyclopentene-1-dithiocarboxyl i c acid loaded w i t h platinum i r r e v e r s i b l y r e t a i n s a n i l i n e s f rom w a t e r ( r e f . 67). filter,
retaining
I n t h i s case, t h i s s i l i c a serves as a
a n i l i n e which
would
interfere
with
the
ensuing
h e r b i c i d e a n a l y s i s . The mercury loaded o x i n e s u r f a c e i s anot her example of
a met a l loaded support. I t p r e c o n c e n t r at es 2-mercaptobenzimidazole ( r e f . 68) from aqueous s o l u t i o n s f o l l o w i n g two mechanisms:
1.)
c omp lex at io n w i t h t h e mercury
2.)
hydrophobic i n t e r a c t i o n between t h e a r o mat ic r i n g s o f t h e complexing group and t h e s o l u t e . The s o l u t e i s t h e n e l u t e d by exchanging i t w i t h a s t r o n g e r mercury
complexing l i g a n d . A subsequent s e para t i o n .
C18 s i l i c a
column
is
t hen
employed
for
the
20
Other examples include the preconcentration o f amino and carboxyl ic acids from complex environmental samples using bisdithiocarbamate, dial kyldithiocarbamate, cyclam and oxine copper-loaded chelating silicas (refs. 68-72) as shown in Fig. 2. These acids are in fact strongly complexed with copper which explains their retention on the support.
0 -k@N 1
Si -Ox
f:;
0 - S i -N-CH
I
A S S
3
Si -dial-DTC
‘ /
cu
Fig. 2
Copper-loaded chel at ing si 1 icas : bi sdi thiocarbamate (Si-bis-DTC), cyclam (Si-Cy), oxine (Si-Ox) and dialkyldithiocarbamate (Si-dial-DTC).
21
A c i d i f i c a t i o n o f t h e e l u e n t a l l o w s t h e copper complexed compounds t o be released o n t o t h e a n a l y t i c a l column. Separation o f these compounds i s then acomplished by i o n - p a i r chromatography u s i n g C18 s i l i c a columns. F i g . 3 shows chromatograms o b t a i n e d a f t e r s e l e c t i v e l y p r e c o n c e n t r a t i n g amino a c i d s o n t o copper loaded dithiocarbamate s i l i c a s from d i f f e r e n t n a t u r a l systems. obtained
from
Enrichment f a c t o r s o f up t o a thousandfold may be this
step
when
compared
with
the
direct
injection
technique. Using t h i s technique, amino a c i d c o n c e n t r a t i o n s as low as t h e ppb range may be detected. 5.
CHELATING SILICAS I N CHROMATOGRAPHY Apart from preconcentration,
c h e l a t i n g s i l i c a s may f i n d a p p l i c a t i o n s
i n metal chromatography o r , i f they a r e s a t u r a t e d i n m e t a l , t h e y can be used i n 1igand exchange chromatography.
5.1
METAL SEPARATION CHROMATOGRAPHY Numerous a r t i c l e s d e a l i n g w i t h t h e s e p a r a t i o n o f o r g a n i c compounds by
l i q u i d chromatography have been published,
but l i t t l e information i s
a v a i l a b l e regarding t h e s e p a r a t i o n o f metals. This technique i s s u i t a b l e f o r metal separation whereas o t h e r chromatographic techniques, gas chromatography, a r e i n a p p l i c a b l e f o r t h i s purpose. Among t h e chromatographic techniques, ionic
and
such as
ion-exchange
chromatography a r e t h e most o f t e n employed f o r metal s e p a r a t i o n . I n t h e s e techniques,
t h e s t a t i o n a r y phase c o n s i s t s o f
ionic-exchange
functional
groups
attached
resins. to
More r e c e n t l y ,
silicas
have
been
s u b s t i t u t e d f o r t h e r e s i n s . Several review a r t i c l e s have been p u b l i s h e d concerning t h i s s u b j e c t ( r e f s .
73-75).
A l e s s commonly employed chromatographic method i n v o l v e s t h e use o f
c h e l a t i n g s i l i c a s as t h e s t a t i o n a r y phase. One o f t h e drawbacks of t h i s technique i s t h e d i f f i c u l t y i n e l u t i n g t h e metal s i n c e s t r o n g bonds a r e formed between t h e metal and t h e l i g a n d . Provided t h a t t h i s problem i s overcome
better
metal
selectivity
may
be
obtained.
One
way
of
circumventing t h i s problem i s by v a r y i n g t h e pH o f t h e m o b i l e phase. The pH p l a y s an important r o l e i n t h e metal b i n d i n g s t r e n g t h o f t h e l i g a n d . Oxine s i l i c a s a r e prime examples of complexing s i l i c a s i n f l u e n c e d by pH. These s i l i c a s were f i r s t mentioned i n 1979 ( r e f . 53) and a r e g i v e n i n Table I 1 ( s i l i c a 8). pH adjustment i s necessary f o r a p r o p e r separation. I f the solution i s too acidic,
l e a c h i n g occurs, and t h e metal i s n o t r e t a i n e d whatsoever. Adversely, if t h e s o l u t i o n i s t o o b a s i c t h e metals are n o t eluted. Hence an i n t e r m e d i a r y pH g r a d i e n t has been f r e q u e n t l y
22 recommended. I n f a c t , d i f f e r e n t m e t a l s (Mn, Cd, Pb, Zn, aqueous s o l u t i o n s have been s e p a r a t e d u s i n g t h i s method. 1:
-
and Co)
in
Val
b
I
0 10 20 30 40 71".
0 10 20 min.
2 1: Val
2 : Met
3 : Tyr 4 : His 5 : Phe
-
Y
C
0 10 20 30 40 min.
.
Fig 3
E n r i chment-chromatographic s e p a r a t i o n o f n a t u r a l s o l u t i o n s c o n t a i n i n g amino a c i d s a t ppb l e v e l . a: u r i n e sample; b: serum sample; c: r i v e r w a t e r sample. P r e c o n c e n t r a t i o n step: a) 5 m l o f 2000 t i m e s d i l u t e d u r i n e (>lo0 ppm f o r each amino a c i d ) i n d i s t i l l e d wat er. b) 5 m l o f 250 t i m e s d i l u t e d serum ( M o n i t r o l I - E , Merz + Dade , 10-30 ppm) c ) 5 m l o f s pik ed r i v e r w a t e r (60 ppb o f V a l , Met and Phe, 50 pb of T y r and H i s ) , a l l e n r i c h e d on Si-diol-DTC-Cu precolumn [lo x 2 ~III I.D.; p a r t i c l e s i z e 10 p m ) . S e para t i o n s t e p : Column: L i c h r o s o r b RP-18, 5 p m (125 x 4.6 mm I.D.) G r a d i e n t e l u t i o n o f s o l v e n t s A and B. A: 50/50 ( v / v ) m i x t u r e o f methanol and w$er containing M. pH o f t h e d i n a t r i u m c i t r a t e 0.04 M, l a u r y l s u l f a t e 4.10 m i x t u r e a d j u s t e d a t 2.25 w i t h c o n c ent rat ed HC1. 6: 10/90 ( v / v ) o f t h e same m i x t u r e a d j u s t e d a t pH = 2.25 w i t h c o nc en t r a t e d HC1. F l u o r i m e t r i c d e t e c t i o n Aex = 345 nm; kern > 460 nm.
23
Another factor affecting metal separation in this chromatographic technique is metal-ligand complex formation kinetics. Slow kinetics are reflected by broadening of elution peaks. This is observed in the case of nickel with oxine silica stationary phases. Before the development of HPLC, thin-layer chromatography was used for the separation of metal ions. Eight different types of silicas were tested for the separation of iron, nickel, copper and zinc. Best results were obtained with a diacetone silica (see No. 12 in Table 11). The eluant in this case was a mixture of acetone and trifluoroacetyl-acetone (ref. 16). Diamine silicas (ref. 76) were also found to be suitable for the separation of numerous metals (Cu, Cd, Fe, Mn, Ni, Pd, Zn). Before discussing the development and application of these chelating silicas in detail, a brief mention should be made concerning high performance 1 iquid chromatography (HPLC) of metal complexes. The metal separation by means of this technique is achieved by forming organometallic complexes in the analytical solution which is then introduced into a reversed-phase silica column. Details concerning this technique are described in several reviews (refs. 73, 77, 78). 5.2 LIGAND EXCHANGE CHROMATOGRAPHY The application of chelating silicas to ligand exchange chromatography is currently being widely developed. Although this technique has been known for the past 20 years, it has only recently been applied to the separation of enantiomers. Several chelating silicas containing different metals have been developed for this purpose.
LIGAND EXCHANGE PRINCIPLES The term "ligand exchange" was first coined in 1961 by Helfferich (ref. 79). It refers to the process occurring between the metal and the ligand i .e. organo-metallic complexes are first formed and then dissociated by the mobile phase. I n most cases, the metal is bound to the stationary support while the ligand is found in the mobile phase. Sometimes, the metal may be found both in the stationary phase as well as the mobile phase. In this case, complexing silicas do not offer any particular advantage. Transition metals such as Cu, Zn, Cd, Co, etc. bind with these chelating silicas. These metals usually form complexes with compounds containing electron donor functional groups (Lewis bases). In contrast to ion exchange where the interaction takes place in the outer coordination sphere, ligand exchange takes place in the inner coordination sphere of the metal. 5.2.1
24 This technique offers a number of advantages as opposed to other chromatographic procedures. First of all , the possibility of varying the metal in the stationary phase makes it possible to easily optimize the separation of a large number of solutes. Secondly, the chromatography may be performed at very low solute concentrations, due to the high stability of the ligand-metal complex. This is particularly useful in separating 1 igands in natural aquatic systems. Thirdly, 1 igands having different coordination numbers as well as isomers and isotopes may be separated. This technique has been optimized to separate amines, carboxylic acids, alcohols as well as other compounds. A review, published in 1977 (801, may serve as a standard reference for all practical purposes. 5.2.2 TYPES OF STATIONARY PHASES Choice of the support should be such that the metal remains irreversibly bound i.e. either by forming an ionic or covalent bond. Sulfonic ion exchange resins were among the first o f these supports tested but the bonds were not strong enough to retain the metals. Subsequent 1 y, other compl exi ng resins (eg imi nodi acetate, phosphonate, etc.) showing higher metal retention were synthesized. However, as in the case of preconcentration, these resins have two major disadvantages: - they are deformed under applied pressures - their exchange kinetics are very slow. Consequently, they have received little interest. More recently, metal and chelating silicas have been employed as supports. Chelating silicas have proved to be the most promising since they offer several advantages, namely: - high metal retention capacity - high mechanical stability - fast exchange kinetics - relatively low cost. These latter two types of supports are discussed in some detail.
.
5.2.2.1 METAL SILICAS A number of metals have been bound to silicas for ligand exchange purposes. Silver was the first metal to be bound with silicas (refs. 8790). It was used for separating several isomers (olefins, unsaturated esters, unsaturated organic acids and prostaglandins). Other examples include the use o f rhodium for separating butene isomers (ref. 87); cadmium silicas for separating chloroaniline and toluidine isomers (refs. 91-92); and copper-silicas for separating amino acids and peptides (refs. 81 -84)
.
25 Copper s i l i c a s have r e c e i v e d growing i n t e r e s t due t o t h e i r a b i l i t y o f separating a n a l y t i c a l l y important compounds such as amino a c i d s and i s therefore peptides. The p r e p a r a t i o n o f these c o p p e r - s i l i c a s schematized below. SCHEME I 1
The metal s i l i c a i s s i m p l y prepared by p e r c o l a t i n g an ammoniacal s o l u t i o n o f copper s a l t through t h e s i l i c a ( r e f .
75).
The s t a b i l i t y ,
s t r u c t u r e and r e t e n t i o n mechanisms o f these s i l i c a s have been t h o r o u g h l y studied ( r e f . 85). The r e t e n t i o n c a p a c i t y o f t h e s e s i l i c a s i s approximately 0.6 mmole of copper p e r gram o f s i l i c a . T h i s k i n d o f s i l i c a was f i r s t used i n a 15 cm long column t o separate 15 n a t u r a l amino a c i d s ( r e f . 81). Subsequently, they
were
used
to
separate
purine
and
pyrimidine
bases
b i o l o g i c a l media and f o r t h e s e p a r a t i o n o f osamines
found
(ref.
85).
in More
r e c e n t l y , these supports have found a p p l i c a t i o n s i n t h e s e p a r a t i o n of h y d r o l y s i s products o f p r o t e i n s , amino a c i d s and d i p e p t i d e s ( r e f . 86). These s i l i c a s have one main disadvantage i n t h a t they l o s e p a r t of t h e bonded metals d u r i n g e l u t i o n . Consequently, i n o r d e r t o r e p l a c e t h e l o s t metal, a small q u a n t i t y o f copper i s added t o t h e e l u e n t . 5.2.2.2
COMPLEXING METAL SILICAS
The f i r s t complexing s i l i c a s a t u r a t e d w i t h metal t o be used f o r l i g a n d exchange chromatography was
first
mentioned
consisted o f a propylamine f u n c t i o n a l
in
1977
(ref.
93).
It
group which was s a t u r a t e d w i t h
copper. However, t h e complexing bond was n o t s t r o n g enough t o be employed i n aqueous s o l u t ions. To r e s o l v e t h i s problem, i t was necessary t o f i n d another f u n c t i o n a l group capable o f forming a s t r o n g e r bond w i t h t h e m e t a l . B i d e n t a t e d ligands, eg. diamines, were chosen f o r t h i s purpose. Diamine s i l i c a s had already been used f o r p r e c o n c e n t r a t i o n a p p l i c a t i o n s
(ref.
14).
These
s i l i c a s were loaded w i t h cadmium f o r chromatographic l i g a n d s e p a r a t i o n .
In s p i t e o f t h e f a c t t h a t copper o r n i c k e l form s t r o n g e r bonds w i t h t h e diamine, f a s t e r separations as w e l l as f i n e r chromatographic peaks may be
26 obtained with cadmium. Sulfurcontaining drugs have been separated by this means (ref. 94). Nevertheless, copper-loaded diamine silicas have been employed for the separation of amino acids (ref. 95). Copper loss may be incurred if proper pH conditions are not selected. Minimum copper loss occurs Over the pH range 5 to 9. I n addition, this loss may be compensated by adding a small quantity of copper to the mobile phase. Subsequently, other chelating agents (ref. 96) have been used which bond more strongly with metals. For instance, dithiocarbamate silicas (silica 2 in Table 11) and diketone silicas have been synthesized to bind copper. These copper-loaded silicas enable the separation of aromatic amines (ref. 96). The metal loss in this system is considerably lower than that incurred with the diamine silicas. The preparation of metal chelating silicas, their stability and their application to ligand exchange chromatography has been described in detail (ref. 13). For example, copper-loaded silicas 6 and 7 (Table I ) are suitable for separation of carboxylic acids, amino acids as well as triphenylphosphonium salts. These separations are achieved both through metal -1 igand complexat i on and through electrostatic interactions. Other examples o f metal-loaded silicas include iron(II1)-loaded oxine silicas which have been utilized to separate phenols in aqueous solutions (ref. 56). In this case iron is irreversibly retained by the silicas and therefore no metal losses are incurred in the mobile phase. The phenols are retained through complex formation with the iron and by hydrophobic interactions with the cross-bonded hydrocarbons of the silica. More recently new chelating silicas (ref. 97) are being developed to separate dialkyl sulfides. These copper-loaded chelating silicas include the following functional groups: diamines and monoamines, oxines as well as two other special functional groups (Fig. 4).
a: ISi-O-kiI -( C H z ) NH-C-Ph-N=N-Ph-CH2-N-CSj ~ I t; Bu
Fig. 4
Chelating silicas; a: N-n-butyl-N-(1-naphthylmethy1)carbodi thi oate (BNMDTC) , b: 2-amino-1-cyclopentene-1-d i thi ocarboxylic acid (ACDA) (ref. 97).
27
An excel lent separation of sulfur compounds in hexane is achieved with the copper-1oaded 2-amino-1-cyclopentene-1-dithi ocarboxyl ic acid (ACDA) si 1 icas. The separation is based on: - copper complexation - steric hindrance - hydrophobic interactions By replacing copper with silver, separation of geometric sulfur isomers is possible using this support. All of these metal complexing silicas have two major problems: - low column efficiency - asymetric peaks. These problems are due to slow complexing and dissociation kinetics in the internal coordination sphere. To overcome this problem, a separation based on outer sphere complex formation seems to be more promising (ref. 94) as the formation and dissociation kinetics are much more rapid. Cobalt-loaded diamine silicas i n which all o f the coordination sites of the metal are occupied were the first species to be used for outer sphere coordination (ref. 98) (see Fig. 5). Negatively charged species such as phosphates, nucleotides, etc. may be separated with this phase. This silica has high stability in aqueous solutions. Using the same reasoning, a macrocyclic chelating group was cross-bonded to a silica. Copper was then trapped within the cycle and therefore was inaccessible to the ligands. Hence, only the outer coordination sphere was available (ref. 71).
I
n N 3'
fS i-0 - SI i -(CH2)3 N
Fig. 5 5.3
Bonded silica containing a C~(en)~~'moiety
(ref. 98).
ENANTIOMER SEPARATION Recently, there has been an enormous development for the application of metal complexing silicas i n separating enantiomers by ligand exchange chromatography. Polystyrene resins were first employed to separate enantiomers (refs. 99-103). Later, i n 1979 (ref. 104), chelating silicas containing a chiral center (see Fig. 6) were found to be suitable for
28
enantiomer separation. Once loaded with copper this silica was able to separate L and D isomers of tryptophane as we1 as tyrosine. A simi ar type of silica was synthesized in the same year (ref. 83) for separat ng amino acid enantiomers.
dcooH
a: Z Si-0-ki -(C H z ) ~ O C H ~ C H2 H N I OH I
b: ZSi-O-hi-(CH2)3NHC I
Fig. 6
B
Chelating silicas containing a chiral center (*). L-Proline is the functional group bonded to the silica. a: (ref. 1041, b: (ref. 83).
These two silicas differ in the way in which the functional group, L-proline, is bonded to the silica structure. Several reviews concerning enantiomer separation, particularly amino acids, using ligand exchange chromatography (refs. 105-107) have recently been published. Enantiomer separation necessitates the presence of a cross-bonded functional group containing a chiral center (asymetric carbon) in the chelating silica. Optically active amino acids containing a chiral center are then bonded strongly with transition metals. Consequently, they are suitable for cross-linking to the silicas. The separation o f two enantiomers is based on the three point rule (ref. 108), i.e. a three-point bond between the complexating silica and the solute to be analyzed. Numerous chiral complexing silicas are now commercially available, namely: L-proline, L-hydroxyproline and L-valine (ref. 109). Other amino acids as well as hydroxy-carboxylic acids have also been cross-bonded to silicas (refs. 110-112). All o f these silicas when loaded in copper permit the separation of amino acid enantiomers, catecholamines and hydroxycarboxyl ic acids. More recently, copper-loaded silicas containing L-pro1ine functional groups have been applied to the separation of primary amine alcohols. However, it requires a derivatization step with a Schiff base (ref. 113). Finally, a more recent development is the synthesis of a polystyrene silica containing two different amino acid functional groups, L-proline and L-hydroxyproline (ref. 114). This type o f silica is more hydrophobic
29
than those w i t h o u t p o l y s t y r e n e f u n c t i o n a l groups. L i k e t h e o t h e r s i l i c a s , they a r e a l s o loaded i n copper. 6.
CONCLUSION As t h i s d i s c u s s i o n has shown, a wide v a r i e t y o f a p p l i c a t i o n s have been
found f o r c h e l a t i n g s i l i c a s . as :
These s i l i c a s o f f e r many advantages,
-
good physico-chemical p r o p e r t i e s
-
m o d i f i c a t i o n i s r e l a t i v e l y simple low c o s t
-
Consequently, tration,
such
they have been chosen f o r t h e purpose o f preconcen-
l i q u i d - s o l i d e x t r a c t i o n as w e l l as h i g h performance chromato-
graphy. They have received i n c r e a s i n g i n t e r e s t i n t h e f i e l d o f enantiomer separation
u s i n g l i g a n d exchange chromatography.
This
technique
has
become e s s e n t i a l t o t h e p u r i f i c a t i o n and t h e a n a l y s i s o f o p t i c a l l y a c t i v e compounds i n t h e areas o f o r g a n i c chemistry, pharmacy and biochemistry. The p r e c o n c e n t r a t i o n of o r g a n i c products by l i q u i d - s o l i d e x t r a c t i o n i s a f i e l d which has n o t been t h o r o u g h l y s t u d i e d as o f y e t . New s i l i c a s have r e c e n t l y been developed f o r t h i s purpose. These s i l i c a s c o n t a i n a metal which s e l e c t i v e l y r e t a i n s Lewis bases such as amino acids. example,
on-line
Hence, f o r
amino a c i d analyses can be c a r r i e d o u t by
c o u p l i n g t h e metal
s i l i c a p r e c o n c e n t r a t i o n columns
simply
t o an a n a l y t i c a l
column. This technique o f f e r s two advantages, namely: analyses o f t r a c e organics i n n a t u r a l systems.
-
automation.
The use o f c h e l a t i n g s i l i c a s as s t a t i o n a r y phase f o r t h e chromatography o f metals, however, does n o t seem t o be s u i t a b l e owing t o t o o many i n t e r f e r e n c e s . Morover, s i m p l e r techniques such as i o n chromat o g r a p h i c techniques u s i n g s i l i c a s
as we1 1 as complex chromatography
u s i n g reversed phases a r e a v a i l a b l e f o r metal a n a l y s i s .
7.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS The authors wish t o thank M.L.
P e l a p r a t and N. Parthesarathy f o r t h e i r
comments. REFERENCES 1.
2.
Hercules, L. E. Cox, S . O n i s i c k , G.D. N i c h o l s , J.C. Carver, Anal. Chem., 45 (1973) 1973. E. Grushka ( E d i t o r ) Bonded S t a t i o n a r y Phases i n Chromatography, Ann Arbor S c i . Publ., Ann Arbor, Mich., 1974. D.M.
30 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
9. 10. 11.
12. 13. 14. 15 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22 * 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48.
G.V. L i s i c h k i n , A. Ya. Yuffa, Heterogeneous Complex-Metal Catalyst, Khimiya, Moscow (1981). W.A. Aue, P.M. T e l i , J. Chromatogr., 6 2 (1971) 15. M.D. Mattenci, M.H. Caruthers, Tetrahedron L e t t . 2 1 (1980) 719. A.I. Kestner, Usp. Khim., 43 (1974) 1480. R.S.S. Murthy, J. Holzbecher, D.E. Ryan, Rev. Anal. Chem., 6 (1982) 113. K.K. Unger, N. Becker, P. Roumeliotis, J. Chromatogr., 125 (1976) 115. H. Engelhardt, G. Ahr, Chromatographia, 14 (1981) 227. G.E. Berendsen, L. De Galan, J. Chromatogr., 196 (1980) 21. K.K. Unger, Porous S i l i c a , E l s e v i e r (1979). G.V. L i s i c h k i n , G.V. Kudryavtsev, Zh. Anal. Khim., 3 8 (1983) 1684. M. Gimpel, K.K. Unger, Chromatographia, 16 (1982) 117. D.E. Leyden, G.H. L u t t r e l , Anal. Chem., 47 (1975) 1612. M. Okamoto, J. Chromatogr., 202 (1980) 55. K.T. Den Bleyker, T.R. Swett, Chromatographia, 13 (1980) 114. J.M. H i l l , J. Chromatogr., 76 (1973) 455. M.Okamoto, J. Chromatogr. , 212 (1981) 251. T. Seshadri, A. Kettrup, Fresenius Z. Anal. Chem., 296 (1979) 247. H. Jenett, J. Knecht, G. Stork, i b i d . 304 (1980) 362. D.E. Leyden, G.H. L u t t r e l , A.E. Sloan, N.J. de Angelis, Anal. Chim. Acta, 8 4 (1976) 97. D.E. Leyden, G.H. L u t t r e l , T.A. Patterson, Anal. L e t t e r s 8 (1975) 51. D.E. Leyden, G.H. L u t t r e l , W.K. Nonidez, D.B. Werho, Anal. Chem. 48 (1976) 67. D.W. Leyden, M.L. Steele, B.B. Jablonski, R.B. Somoano, Anal. Chim. Acta, 100 (1978) 545. S.E. Northcott, D.E. Leyden, Anal. Chim. Acta, 126 (1981) 117. L.W. Burrgraf, D.S. Kendall, D.E. Leyden, F.J. Pern, Anal. Chim Acta, 129 (1981) 19. R.J. Kvitek, M.W. Watson,J.F. Evans, P.W. Carr, i b i d . 129 (1981) 269. T.G. Waddel, D.E. Leyden, D.M. Hercules, Middl. Macrom. Monogr., 7 (1980) 55. G. Gubitz, F. Juffmann, W. J e l l e n z , Chromatographia, 16 (1982) 103. G. Gubitz, W. Jellenz, W. S a n t i , J. L i q . Chrom. 4 (1981) 701. S.H. Chang, K.M. Gooding, F.E. Regnier, J. Chromatogr., 120 (1976) 321. M. Glad, S.Ohlson, L. Hansson, M.O. Mansson, K. Mosbach, i b i d 200 (1980) 254. F.E. Regnier, R. Noel, J. Chrom. Sci., 14 (1976) 316. D.E. Schmidt, J.R.W. Grese, D. Couron, B.L. Karger, Anal. Chem., 52 (1980) 177. T.G. Waddel, D.E. Leyden, J:Org. Chem., 46 (1981) 2406. P.A. Asmus, C.E. Low, M. Novotny, J. Chromatogr. 119 (1976) 25. P.A. Asmus, C.E. Low, M. Novotny, i b i d . , 123 (1976) 109. M. Novotny, S.L. Bektesh, K.B. Denson, Anal. Chem., 45 (1973) 971. M. Novotny, S.L. Bektesh, K. Grohmann, J. Chromatogr., 83 (1973) 25. E. Grushka, E.J. Kikta, Anal. Chem., 46 (1974) 1370. E. Grushka, R.P.W. Scott, ibid., 45 (1973) 1626. M.A. Marshall, H.A. Mottola, i b i d . , 55 (1983) 2089. D.E. Leyden, Middl. Macrom. Monogr., 7 (1980) 321. D.E. Leyden, W.K. Nonidez, P.W. Carr, Anal. Chem., 47 (1975) 1449. J.C. Meranger, K.S. Subramanian, C.H. Langford, Rev. Anal. Chem., 5 (1980) 29. A.T. E l l i s , D.E. Leyden, W. Wegsheider, B.B. Jablonski, W. Bodnar, Anal. Chim. Acta., 142 (1982) 73. J. Smits, J. Nelissen, R. Van Grieken, i b i d . , 111 (1979) 215. T. Yao, M. Akino, S. Muska, Bunseki Kaguku, 3 1 (1982) 409.
31
49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54.
55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. 61. 62.
63. 64. 65. 66. 67. 68. 69. 70. 71 72. 73. 74. 75 * 76. 77. 78. 79. 80. 81. 82. 83. 84. 85. 86. 87. 88. 89. 90. 91. 92. 93. 94.
T. Yao, M. Akino, S. Muska, i b i d . , 30 (1981) 740. P. Grossmann, W. Simon, J. Chromatogr., 235 (1982) 351. T. Seshadri, A. K e t t r u p , Fr e s e n i u s Z. Anal. Chem., 310 (1982) 1 K.F. Sugawara, H.H. We e t a l l , G.D. Schucker, Anal. Chem., 46 ( 974) 489. J.R. Jezorek, H. F r e i s e r , i b i d . , 5 1 (1979) 366. C. F ulc her, M.A. C r o w e l l , R. B a v l i s s . K.B. Holland, J.R. Jeza ek I Anal. Chim; Acta, 129 (1981) 29: J.R. Jezorek, C. Fu l c h e r , M.A. C r o w e l l , R. B a y l i s s , B. Greenwood, J. Lyon, i b i d . , 131 (1981) 223. G.J. Shahwan, J.R. Jezorek, J. Chromatogr., 256 (1983) 39. R.E. Sturgeon, S.S. Berman, S.N. W i l l i e , J.A.H. Desaulniers, Anal. Chem., 53 (1981) 2337. J. Chmielowiec, Chrornatographia, 11 (1978) 99. J.R. Jezorek, K.H. F a l t y n s k i , L.G. B l a c kburn, P.J. Henderson, H.D. Medina, T a la n t a , 32 (1985) 763. M. V erz e le, M. De P o t t e r , J. Gh s e l s , HRC & CC 2 (1979) 151. J.J. K i r k l a n d , A n a l y s t 99 (19743 859. H.P.M. Van V l i e t , T.C. Bootsman, R.W. F r e i , U.A.T. Brinkman, J. Chromatogr., 185 (1979) 483. W.A. Saner, Trace Anal., 2 (1982) 151. R.W. F r e i , U.A.T. Brinkman, TrAC, 1 (1981) 45. R.W. F r e i , Swiss Chem., 6 (1984) 55. C.E. Goewie, Thesis, Free U n i v e r s i t y Amsterdam (1983). C.E. Goewie, P. Kwakman, R.W. F r e i , U.A.T. Brinkman, W. Maasfeld, T. Seshadri, A. K e t t r u p , J . Chromatogr., 284 (1984) 73. M.W.F. N i e l e n , R. Bleeker, R.W. F r e i , U.A.T. Brinkman, i b i d . , 358 (1986) 393. J.L. Veuthey, M.A. Bagnoud, W. H a e r d i , I n t . J. Env. Anal. Chem., 26 (1986) 157. J.L. Veuthey, M.A. Bagnoud, W. H a e r d i , Chimia, 40 (1986) 353. M.A. Bagnoud, J.L. Veuthey, W. H a e r d i , Chimia, 40 (1986) 432. J.L. Veuthey, M.A. Bagnoud, W. H a e r d i , J. Chromatogr., 393 (1986) 51. R.M. Cassidy, Trace Anal., 1 (1981) 121. H.F. Walton, J. Chrom. L i b r . , 22 (1983) A225. R. Rosset, M. Caude, A. J a r d y , Manuel P r a c t i q u e de Chromatographie en Phase L i q u i d e , Masson (1982). J.B. Henry, T.R. Sweet, Chromatographia, 17 (1983) 79. G. Schwedt, i b i d . , 12 (1979) 613. B.R. W i l l e f o r d , H. Veening, J. Chromatogr., 251 (1982) 61. F. H e l f f e r i c h , N a t u r e (London) 189 (1961) 1001. V.A. Davankov, A.V. Semechkin, J. Chromatogr., 141 (1977) 313. M. Caude, A. Fo u c a u l t , Anal. Chem., 5 1 (1979) 459. E. Schmidt, A. Fo u c a u l t , M. Caude, R. Rosset, A n a l y s i s , 7 (1979) 366. A. F ouc ault , M. Caude, L. O l i v e r o s , 3. Chromatogr., 185 (1979) 345. F. Guyon, A. Fo u c a u l t , M. Caude, i b i d . , 186 (1979) 677. F. Guyon, M. Caude, R. Rosset, A n a l y s i s , 12 (1984) 321. A. F o uc ault , R. Rosset, J. Chromatogr., 317 (1984) 41. F. Mikes, V. S c h u r i g , E. G i l - A v , i b i d . , 8 3 (1973) 91. R. A igner, H. S p i t z y , R.W. F r e i , Anal. Chem., 48 (1976) 2. R.R. Heath, P.E. Sonnet, 3. L i q . Chromatogr., 3 (1980) 1129. R. V i v i l e c c h i a , M. Thiebaud, R.W. F r e i , J. Chrom. S c i . , 10 (1972) 411. D. Kunzru, R.W. F r e i , i b i d . , 12 (1974) 191. C. R. Vogt, T.R. Ryan, J.S. B a x t e r , J. Chromatogr., 136 (1977) 221. F.K. Chow, E. Grushka, Anal. Chem., 49 (1977) 1756. N.H. Cooke, R.L. V i a v a t t e n e , R. Eksteen, W.S. Wong, G. Davies, B.L. Karger, J. Chromatogr., 149 (1978) 391.
32 95. 96. 97. 98. 99. 100. 101, 102. 103. 104. 105. 106. 107. 108. 109. 110. 111. 112. 113. 114.
R.G. Masters, D.E. Leyden, Anal. Chim. Acta, 98 (1978) 9. F.K. Chow, E. Grushka, Anal. Chem., 50 (1978) 1346. H. Takayanagi, 0. Hatano, K. Fujimara, T. Ando, Anal. Chem., 57 (1985) 1840. F.K. Chow, E. Grushka, J. Chromatogr., 185 (1979) 361. V.A. Davankov, S.V. Roghozhin, J. Chromatogr., 60 (1971) 280. V.A. Davankov, S.V. Roghozhin, A.V. Semechkin, T.P. Sachkova, i b i d . . 82 (1973) 359. --V.A. Davankov, Y.A. Zolotarev, i b i d . , 155 (1978 285. V.A. Davankov, Y.A. Zolotarev, ibid., 155 (1978 295. V.A. Davankov, Y.A. Zolotarev, ibid., 155 (1978 303. G. Gubitz, W. Jellenz. G. L t i f l e r , W. Santi, HRC & CC 2 (1979) 145. W. Lindner, Chimia, 35 (1981) 294. V.A. Davankov, A.A. Kurganov, A.S. Bochkov, Adv Chrom. , Vol 22, M. Dekker (1983). G. Gubitz, G.I.T. Fachz. Lab. Suppl. Chrom., 4 1985) 6. C.E. Dalgliesh, 3. Chem. Soc., (1952) 3940. R. Damen. H. Arm. V. Mever. i b i d 373 (19861 21 G. Gubjtz; S. Mihellyes,-Chromato raphi’a, 19 (1984) 257. N. Watanabe, J. Chromatogr., 260 71983) 75. H.G. K i c i n s k i , A. Kettrup, Fresenius Z. Anal. Chem., 320 (1985) 51. L.R. Gelber, B.L. Karger, J.L. Neumeyer, B . Feibush, J. Am. Chem. SOC., 106 (1984) 7729. A.A. Kurganov, A.B. Tevlin, V.A. Davankov, J. Chromatogr., 261 (1983) 223.
.---.
.
33 CHAPTER
I1
SAMPLE HANDLING I N I O N CHROMATOGRAPHY P. R. HADDAD
1. 2. 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 3. 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 4. 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 5. 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 5.3.5 5.3.6 5.4 6. 6.1 6.2 6.3 7. 8.
Introduction Sample c o l l e c t i o n and d i s s o l u t i o n Sample c o l l e c t i o n E x t r a c t i o n methods Sample d i g e s t i o n Combustion methods Sample cleanup methods Introduction F i 1t r a t ion Chemical m o d i f i c a t i o n o f t h e sample Batch methods u s i n g ion-exchange r e s i n s D i a l y t i c techniques D is pos a b l e c a r t r i d g e columns Chemical r e a c t i o n o f s o l u t e s Contamination e f f e c t s Introduction Contamination from p h y s i c a l h a n d l i n g o f t h e sample Contamination from f i l t r a t i o n d e v i c es and c a r t r i d g e columns Contamination from chromatographic hardware components Contamination o f t h e column Sample h a n d l i n g f o r u l t r a - t r a c e a n a l y s i s Introduction Use o f l a r g e i n j e c t i o n volumes Use o f p r e c o n c e n t r a t i o n columns Hardware c o n s i d e r a t i o n s Choice o f e l u e n t Co nc en t r a t o r column c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s A p p l i c a t i o n t o samples o f l o w i o n i c s t r e n g t h A p p l i c a t i o n t o samples o f h i g h i o n i c s t r e n g t h Conclusions Use o f d i a l y t i c p r e c o n c e n t r a t i o n methods M a t r i x e l i m i n a t i o n methods Introduction On-column m a t r i x e l i m i n a t i o n Post-column m a t r i x e l i m i n a t i o n Conc 1us ion Acknowledgement References 1.
INTRODUCTION
The t e r m " I o n Chromatography" was f i r s t i n t r o d u c e d i n 1975 and was o r i g i n a l l y i n t e r p r e t e d t o mean t h e chromatographic a n a l y s i s (by i o n exchange) o f i n o r g a n i c i o n s . Throughout t h e e a r l y y e a r s o f i t s development,
i o n chromatography was concerned c h i e f l y w i t h t h e d e t e r -
m i n a t i o n o f i n o r g a n i c anions because i t p r o v i d e d t h e most convenient
34
means of analysis for these species. However, the technique now embraces a much wider range of solutes and separation methods and some overlap with alternative liquid chromatographic methods currently exists. It is fair to say that ion chromatography can be considered to include any liquid chromatographic procedure used for the determination of ionic and ionisable solutes. Fig. 1 shows the main separation modes applicable to i on chromatography.
ION SUPPRESSION
A Weak Acids
Fig. 1
Weak Bases
ION INTERACTION
A Anions
Cations
ION EXCHANGE
ION 1:XCI.USION
rJl Anions
Cations
Weakly Ihsrociaad Anions
OrpllC
Acids
Separation modes for ion chromatography.
Ion suppression involves adjusting the pH o f the mobile phase so that the solutes of interest are non-ionised (or at least only partially ionised). In this form, these solutes can be separated by conventional reversed-phase 1 iquid chromatography and the technique of ion suppression is most successful for weak acids or bases. Ion-interaction methods are applied to the separation of fully ionised solutes by reversed phase HPLC and involve addition to the mobile phase of a relatively hydrophobic ionic species with a charge opposite to that of the solutes of interest. This species is called the "ion-interaction reagent" and serves to convert the non-polar stationary phase into an ion-exchanger suitable for the separation of the desired ionic solutes. Ion-exchange chromatography is a well established technique in which the stationary phase contains ionic functionalities and the solute ions are separated using an eluent which contains a competing ion of the same charge sign as the solute ions. Classical ion-exchangers are not suitable for ion chromatography because their high ion-exchange capacities require the use of high ionic strength eluents, and this creates problems with detection of the eluted ions. For this reason, a new generation of high efficiency, low capacity ion-exchangers has evolved for ion chromatography. It has been common to subdivide ion-exchange methods into those using chemical means to suppress the background conductance of the eluent, and those using electronic means to achieve the same result. Since this classification is
35 somewhat a r b i t r a r y , no d i s t i n c t i o n between t hese two approaches w i l l be made i n t h i s c ha p t e r . The f i n a l s e p a r a t i o n mode, i o n - e x c l u s i o n chromatography, i n v o l v e s t h e s e p a r a t i o n o f s o l u t e i o n s u s i n g an ion-exchanger w i t h f u n c t i o n a l i t i e s h a v i n g t h e same charge s i g n as t h e s o l u t e s . Donnan e x c l u s i o n , s i z e e x c l u s i o n and hydrophobic i n t e r a c t i o n s a l l p l a y a r o l e i n t h e s e p a r a t i o n o f t h e i n j e c t e d s o l u t e s , and t h e t e c h n i q u e i s most successful
for
partly
i o n i s e d species.
Full
details of
all
o f the
above
s e p a r a t i o n modes can be found elsewhere ( r e f s . 1, 2). There e x i s t s a g r e a t v a r i e t y o f d e t e c t i o n methods f o r i o n chromatography and t h e main approaches
a r e l i s t e d i n F ig.
2.
Conductivity
d e t e c t i o n i s most p o p u l a r because i t i s u n i v e r s a l l y a p p l i c a b l e , s e n s i t i v e and convenient t o use, however a l t e r n a t i v e u n i v e r s a l methods such as i n d i r e c t UV a b s o r p t i o n a r e becoming w i d e l y used.
I n many i o n chromato-
gra phic d e t e c t i o n modes, t h e e l u e n t p r o v i d e s a s i g n i f i c a n t d e t e c t o r s i g n a l and i t i s t h e r e f o r e h e l p f u l t o d i f f e r e n t i a t e between d i r e c t d e t e c t i o n ( i n which t h e d e t e c t o r s i g n a l f o r t h e s o l u t e exceeds t h a t o f the eluent)
and
indirect
detection
( i n which t h e r e v e r s e s i t u a t i o n
a p p l i e s ) . Indeed, most o f t h e d e t e c t i o n methods shown i n F ig. 2 can be employed i n e i t h e r a d i r e c t o r i n d i r e c t mode w i t h an a p p r o p r i a t e c h o i c e o f e l u e n t . A d e t a i l e d d i s c u s s i o n o f t h e t h e o r y and a p p l i c a t i o n s of
ion
chromatographic d e t e c t i o n methods i s a v a i l a b l e elsewhere ( r e f . 3 ) . I n t h e c o n t e x t o f sample h a n d l i n g i n i o n chromatography, a p r i m e c o n s i d e r a t i o n i s t h e d i v e r s i t y of s e p a r a t i o n and d e t e c t i o n methods des c ribed above.
A j u d i c i o u s s e l e c t i o n o f t h e s e p a r a t i o n and d e t e c t i o n
modes, and t h e e l u e n t used, can o f t e n mean t h a t sample p r e p a r a t i o n i s minimal.
For example, ion-exchange p r o v i d e s good s e p a r a t i o n of charged
species, w i t h uncharged o r p a r t i a l l y charged species e l u t i n g as a group a t t h e column v o i d volume. I n c o n t r a s t , t h e r e v e r s e a p p l i e s t o i o n e x c l u s i o n chromatography where f u l l y i o n i s e d species a r e u s u a l l y t o t a l l y excluded and e l u t e a t t h e v o i d volume, uncharged s o l u t e s a r e r e t a i n e d .
whereas p a r t i a l l y charged and
I n o t h e r words, t h e t wo t echniques a r e
b e s t s u i t e d t o d i f f e r e n t sample m a t r i c e s . The same can be s a i d f o r t h e d e t e c t i o n mode used, s i n c e many s o l u t e s can be d e t e c t e d s e l e c t i v e l y and t h i s g r e a t l y reduces t h e r e q u i r e m e n t f o r sample p r e p a r a t i o n . F or example, n i t r a t e and n i t r i t e can be determined i n cured meats u s i n g a s i m p l e aqueous e x t r a c t i o n coupled w i t h ion-exchange
s e p a r a t i o n and d i r e c t UV
a b s o r p t i o n d e t e c t i o n a t l o w wavelength. Under t hese c o n d i t i o n s o t h e r i o n s i n t h e sample, p a r t i c u l a r l y t h e v e r y h i g h l e v e l s o f c h l o r i d e p r e s e n t , a r e n o t d e t e c t e d ( F i g . 3). separation
s hould
Finally, the
e l u e n t f o r t h e i o n chromatographic
be s e l e c t e d on t h e b a s i s o f e l u o t r o p i c s t r e n g t h , SO-
36
lubility of the sample, pH, compatibility with the detection mode used, and chemical reactivity with the sample.
Fig. 2
Detection modes for ion chromatography.
[OOSA"
L I
I)
I
5
10
Time lmml
la1
Fig. 3
I
I
15
0
[0054"
L 5
10
Time lminl
Ibl
1
I
15
0
I
10 5 lfme imlnl
15
ICI
Separation of nitrite (A) in nitrate (B) in standards (a), bacon sample (b), and spiked bacon sample (c). The sample f o r (c) was spiked with 0.5 ~9 of both nitrite and nitrate in a 25 jd injection. Column: Vydac 302 IC 4.6. Eluent: 11.0 mM methanesulphonic acid at pH 5.0. For chromatogram (a), 10 pl o f a 50 ppm solution of nitrite and nitrate were injected. Reproduced with permission from ref. 4.
It is thus pertinent to begin this discussion of sample handling in ion chromatography by emphasising that the correct choice of separation and detection modes is imperative if laborious sample preparation
37 procedures are t o be avoided. The chromatographer must t h e r e f o r e be f u l l y conversant w i t h the a l t e r n a t i v e s a v a i l a b l e . The sample handling methods discussed i n t h i s chapter should be viewed as a secondary means o f ensuring the success o f t h e i o n chromatographic analysis. SAMPLE COLLECTION AND
2.
DISSOLUTION
SAMPLE COLLECTION
2.1
The main concerns when c o l l e c t i n g a sample f o r any a n a l y t i c a l method are t h a t the sample taken i s representative o f t h e m a t e r i a l t o be analysed and t h a t no contamination occurs during the sampling process. S t a t i s t i c a l l y based procedures f o r a c q u i s i t i o n o f a representative sample have been t r e a t e d extensively i n numerous t e x t s and f u r t h e r discussion i s beyond the scope o f t h i s chapter. Contamination i s a very important issue and i s discussed separately i n section 4. Some sampling procedures used f o r i o n chromatography are det a i 1ed be1ow. Gas samples can be conveniently c o l l e c t e d using s o l i d sorbents packed i n t o s u i t a b l e sampling tubes, A known volume o f gas i s drawn through t h e tube and the desired sample components a r e s t r o n g l y adsorbed. One example o f t h i s approach i s the adsorption o f formaldehyde onto charcoal impregnated w i t h an o x i d i s i n g s o l u t i o n o f p r o p r i e t a r y composition ( r e f . 5 ) . The adsorber tube (Fig.
4) comprises a main adsorbent and an a u x i l i a r y o r
back-up adsorbent designed t o detect breakthrough o f formaldehyde from the main adsorbent. Formaldehyde reacts w i t h t h e o x i d i s i n g s o l u t i o n t o produce formate ion, which i s desorbed using d i l u t e hydrogen peroxide s o l u t i o n , p r i o r t o i o n chromatographic analysis. An important aspect of gas analysis i s the procedure used t o provide c a l i b r a t i o n standards. Some standards are a v a i l a b l e commercially, o r a l t e r n a t i v e l y a sample generator can be employed.
Fig.
5 shows one type o f sample generator i n which
standard s o l u t i o n s are i n j e c t e d
i n t o a f l o w i n g stream o f
subsequent evaporation and deposition onto an adsorber tube.
100 mg
50'mg
Impregnated charcoal
Fig. 4
S o l i d sorbent tube f o r sampling o f formaldehyde i n a i r . Reproduced w i t h permission from r e f . 5.
air
for
38
INJECTION PORT
sFbl!?,
11
GLASSWOO’L PLUG
n
n
L.
^. ..
I
PUMP
GLASSBEADS
&
U
WATER BATH NEEDLE VALVE
Fig. 5
Sample generator f o r c a l i b r a t i o n o f sorbent tubes. Reproduced w i t h permission from r e f . 5.
D i r e c t absorption o f a sample gas i n t o a l i q u i d f i l m has been reported f o r t r a c e l e v e l s o f ambient n i t r o g e n d i o x i d e ( r e f . 6 ) . Here the absorber s o l u t i o n was guaiacol which was deposited as a methanolic s o l u t i o n i n t o the annular c a v i t y between two c o a x i a l glass tubes, before evaporation o f the methanol t o leave a t h i n f i l m o f guaiacol on the f r o s t e d surface o f the glass.
A f t e r passage of a known volume o f a i r , t h e apparatus was
dismantled and the absorbing s o l u t i o n removed w i t h water and analysed f o r n i t r i t e by i o n chromatography.
Complete absorption o f n i t r o g e n d i o x i d e
was observed and t h e r e was no detectable o x i d a t i o n t o n i t r a t e i o n i n t h e absorbing s o l u t i o n . I n a more simple approach, pyruvic a c i d and methane sulphonic a c i d have been determined i n a i r by passage o f t h e sample through a microimpinger, using e i t h e r d i s t i l l e d water o r d i l u t e potassium hydroxide as the absorbing s o l u t i o n ( r e f . 7 ) . 2.2
EXTRACTION METHODS
The removal o f i o n i c species from s o l i d samples p r i o r t o i o n chromatographic analysis can o f t e n be achieved by aqueous e x t r a c t i o n o f t h e homogenised sample. This process r e l i e s on t h e high s o l u b i l i t y o f i o n i c species i n water. Generally a weighed amount o f t h e d r y sample i s mixed w i t h a known volume o f water, e x t r a c t a n t s o l u t i o n o r eluent, and homogenised i n a blender o r an u l t r a s o n i c c e l l d i s r u p t e r f o r a s p e c i f i e d time. The d i g e s t i s then f i l t e r e d , required
and
injected
onto
the
subjected t o f u r t h e r cleanup where ion
chromatograph.
The
choice
of
e x t r a c t i n g s o l u t i o n i s very dependent on t h e sample m a t r i x and t h e nature of the s o l u t e ions t o be extracted, however water i s t h e prefered ext r a c t a n t whenever possible because a l t e r n a t i v e e x t r a c t a n t s o f t e n i n t r o duce extraneous peaks i n t o t h e chromatogram.
Use o f
eluent as
the
e x t r a c t a n t i s successful o n l y when small i n j e c t i o n columes are t o be used
39 i n t h e f i n a l a n a l y s i s s i n c e t h e presence o f e l u e n t i o n s i n t h e sample prec ludes band compression a t t h e head o f t h e column, w i t h subsequent l o s s of chromatographic e f f i c i e n c y t h r o u g h s o l u t e d i s p e r s i o n . Some samples r e q u i r e e x t r a c t i o n w i t h o r g a n i c s o l v e n t s b e f o r e t h e y a r e s u i t a b l e f o r a n a l y s i s . Fo r example, commercial bromine s o l u t i o n s produced from seawater c o n t a i n h i g h l e v e l s o f c h l o r i d e i o n and t h e a n a l y s i s o f t h e c h l o r i d e can be performed a f t e r d i s s o l u t i o n o f t h e sample i n pot assium bromide s o l u t i o n , f o l l o w e d by e x t r a c t i o n w i t h carbon t e t r a c h l o r i d e ( r e f .
8). Free bromine i s e x t r a c t e d and t h e r e m a i ning aqueous s o l u t i o n can be analysed d i r e c t l y by i o n chromatography u s i n g c o n d u c t i v i t y d e t e c t i o n . Methanol e x t r a c t i o n o f tetramethylammonium i o n f rom s h e l l f i s h has been r e p o r t e d ( r e f . 9), b u t t h e methanol must b e evaporated and t h e sample r e dissolved i n hydrochloric a c i d before i n j e c t i o n .
2.3.
SAMPLE DIGESTION
When samples ( p a r t i c u l a r l y s o l i d s ) a r e n o t amenable t o simple aqueous e x t r a c t i o n , i t becomes necessary t o d i g e s t t h e sample t o o b t a i n a q u a n t i t a t i v e measure o f t h e i o n i c components. T r a d i t i o n a l l y , sample d i g e s t i o n p r i o r t o a n a l y s i s has been performed u s i n g c onc ent rat e d a c i d s , used e i t h e r a l o n e o r i n m i x t u r e s . T h i s approach i s g e n e r a l l y i n a p p l i c a b l e t o i o n chromatography because o f t h e l a r g e
excess o f t h e a c i d a n i o n ( s ) i n t r o d u c e d and t h e r e s u l t i n g low pH of t h e sample d i g e s t . The excess a n i o n r e s u l t s i n column o v e r l o a d i n g and t h e appearance o f a m a j o r peak i n t h e f i n a l chromatogram, w h i l s t t h e low pH o f t h e d i g e s t can cause d i s r u p t i o n o f t h e m u l t i p l e e q u i l i b r i a e x i s t i n g between t h e e l u e n t s p e c i e s and t h e column, l e a d i n g t o severe b a s e l i n e perturbations. One s uc c es s f u l
F o r t h e s e reasons,
a c i d d i g e s t i o n has been r a r e l y used.
a p p l i c a t i o n however i s t h e d i s s o l u t i o n o f g e o l o g i c a l
samples i n phos p h o r i c a c i d p r i o r t o t h e d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f f l u o r i n e (as fluoride)
by
i o n chromatography
(ref.
10).
The
fluorosilicic
acid
produced i n t h e d i g e s t i s v o l a t i l i s e d and c o l l e c t e d on a s i m p l e condenser apparatus i n s e r t e d i n t o t h e d i g e s t i o n tube. The condensed f l u o r o s i l i c i c a c i d i s removed w i t h sodium h y d r o x i d e and i s convert ed t o f l u o r i d e i o n which i s t h en determined by i o n chromatography. An a t t r a c t i v e a l t e r n a t i v e t o a c i d d i g e s t i o n o f samples i s t h e use of f u s i o n techniques.
I n t h i s process t h e sample i s mixed w i t h a s u i t a b l e
f l u x m a t e r i a l and i s heated u n t i l t h e f l u x becomes molt en. The m i x t u r e i s then allow ed t o c o o l and t h e f u s i o n cake d i s s o l v e d i n a s u i t a b l e s o l v e n t and t h en analysed. T y p i c a l f l u x m a t e r i a l s i n c l u d e sodium h y d r o x i d e , sodium carbonate and l i t h i u m t e t r a b o r a t e ( r e f . 11). Once again, t h e main
40 problem with this method is the compatibility of the final digest solution with the ion chromatographic eluent, but in this case some of the fluxing materials are identical to eluent components. For example, sodium hydroxide (ref. 12) and sodium carbonate-bicarbonate (ref. 1) are common eluents in ion chromatography. Thus fluoride (ref. 13) and chloride (ref. 14) have been successfully determined in geological materials after fusion with sodium carbonate and injection onto an ion chromatograph using a carbonate-bicarbonate eluent, and boron and fluoride have been determined in glasses after fusion with sodium hydroxide (ref. 15). Fusion methods are generally quite time-consuming because of the necessity to redissolve the fusion cake and in some cases the high pH of the digest presents a problem. Further disadvantages are the limited applicability of the method, possibile interference from the high level of sodium or lithium present, and the loss of nitrate from the sample during fusion, presumably due to the formation of volatile oxides of nitrogen
.
COMBUSTION METHODS Analysis of some non-metallic elements in organic samples can be achieved by total combustion of the sample, conversion of the desired elements into gaseous compounds, collection of these gases in a suitable absorber and finally, i o n chromatographic analysis of the absorber solution. This approach is suited to the determination of halides (to form such products as HF, HCl, HBr and HI) and sulphur and phosphorus (which form SO2 and P205, respectively). The experimental conditions employed for the combustion determine the nature of the final products and in some cases, multiple products are formed for the same element. When this occurs, the composition of the absorber solution should be carefully chosen to convert all forms of an element to a single species suitable for ion chromatographic determination. The simplest apparatus for combustion of organic samples is a Schoeniger flask, as shown in Fig. 6. A Pyrex glass or quartz vessel containing absorber solution and a small amount of sample (about 0.1 g) in a paper cup is filled with oxygen and inverted. The sample is then electrically ignited and the gases produced are trapped in the absorber solution which provides a gas-tight seal at the mouth of the flask. After an appropriate amount of time has elapsed, the absorber solution is removed and analysed. The advantages of this method are that it is inexpensive, rapid and simple, whereas the major disadvantage is that the 2.4
41
oxygen pressure is limited to atmospheric pressure. This in turn limits the size of the sample which can be analysed and ultimately renders the method fairly insensitive.
/
h\
Absorption Liquid
Fig. 6
Schoeniger combustion flask.
Larger samples (up to 1 g) can be accommodated in a bomb combustion apparatus such as that shown schematically in Fig. 7. Here high pressures of oxygen (e.g. 40 atm) are used to facilitate complete combustion of the sample. Because of the high pressure generated within the bomb, obvious safety considerations apply and analysis is relatively lengthy because o f the time taken to achieve complete absorption of combustion products in the absorber solution. Absorption may be monitored by a pressure gauge or using a collapsible expansion bag which inflates during combustion and deflates during absorption. As stated earlier, the absorber solution must be carefully selected to ensure that each element is present in a single form suitable for ion chromatographic analysis. Elements such as fluorine and chlorine are converted quantitatively to hydrogen fluoride and hydrogen chloride, respectively, and so can be absorbed with water or dilute sodium hydroxide. Hydrogen halides are also produced from bromine and iodine, but other more oxidised products such as HBr03 and HI03 are also formed. For these species, a reducing agent such as hydrazine sulphate should be added to the absorber solution so that only bromide and iodide are present in the final solution. For sulphur and phosphorus, it is desirable that they be quantitated as sulphate and phosphate, respectively, and therefore the absorber solution should contain an oxidant such as dilute hydrogen peroxide. Some samples, particularly those of a geological origin, may be combusted using furnace techniques. In this method, the sample i s mixed with a suitable combustion accelerator (such as a mixture of iron and
42
copper, o r i r o n , t i n and vanadium pentoxide) and heated i n a ceramic c r u c i b l e i n an i n d u c t i o n furnace w h i l s t oxygen i s passed over t h e sample. The combustion products are c o l l e c t e d i n a s u i t a b l e absorbing s o l u t i o n . Furnace combustion i s very r a p i d due t o t h e h i g h temperature used and l a r g e numbers o f samples can be handled w i t h ease. I n a d d i t i o n , r e s u l t s are very precise and c a l i b r a t i o n does n o t r e q u i r e the use o f a l a r g e number of geochemical standard materials. Fig. 8 shows a furnace combustion apparatus.
Oxygy
charging valve
Pressure relief valve
W steel container with inert liner
Ignition wire
Samplecup
\ Fig. 7
/
High pressure combustion bomb.
Table I l i s t s some a p p l i c a t i o n s o f i o n chromatographic analysis of samples prepared by combustion techniques. 3.
SAMPLE CLEANUP METHODS
3.1
INTRODUCTION
When the sample has been dissolved, i t i s o f t e n necessary t h a t some m o d i f i c a t i o n o f the sample d i g e s t be performed before an i n j e c t i o n can be made onto t h e i o n chromatograph. f i l t r a t i o n step,
T h i s m o d i f i c a t i o n may i n v o l v e a simple
o r i t may be more extensive and i n v o l v e s e l e c t i v e
removal of t h e analyte from t h e sample o r removal o f i n t e r f e r i n g m a t r i x components.
Alternatively,
i t may be necessary t o change the chemical
form of t h e analyte t o improve i t s separation o r d e t e c t i o n i n t h e f i n a l analysis.
43
Fig. 8
Furnace combustion apparatus. Reproduced w i t h r e f . 19
TABLE I
permission
from
A p p l i c a t i o n s o f combustion methods
Matrix
Species determined
Plant materials
c1,
s
Reference
16
B i ol og ic a l sampl es
F , C1, S
Fuels, o i l s and c o a l
S
17 17, 23
Foods
I , F, C1, S F, C1, S F, C1, Br, I , S, P
18, 21 19, 20 22
Geological samples Organic reagents
These sample cleanup procedures o f t e n t a k e t h e m a j o r i t y o f t h e t o t a l a n a l y s i s time and c o n t r i b u t e s i g n i f i c a n t l y t o t h e f i n a l c o s t o f t h e a n a l y s i s , b o t h i n terms of l a b o u r and t h e consumption o f m a t e r i a l s .
In
a d d i t i o n , m a n i p u l a t i o n o f t h e sample can o f t e n i n t r o d u c e a major source of
imprecision
which
can
greatly
chromatographic process i t s e l f .
outweigh
any
variables
in
the
Often, t h e degree o f success achieved i n
t h e sample cleanup step determines t h e u l t i m a t e success o f t h e a n a l y s i s . Sample cleanup can be performed o f f - l i n e ,
p r i o r t o t h e chromatographic
44
analysis, or can be incorporated as an on-line process linked with the chromatographic hardware. The goals of cleanup are to achieve: (ref. 1) reduction of the overall loading of sample on the column in order to prevent peak distortion and loss of chromatographic efficiency, (ref. 2) removal of matrix interferences, (ref. 3) concentration or dilution of the analyte, and (ref. 4) preparation of the sample in the solution most appropriate to the analysis. With the exception of sample preconcentration which is discussed in section 5, the achievement of these goals is discussed below.
3.2 FILTRATION As with a1 1 other liquid chromatographic methods, ion chromatography requires that the sample be free from particulate matter to prevent fouling of capillary tubing, column end frits and other hardware components. Many samples, such as water samples, are obtained in a fairly clean form which might appear to require no further treatment prior to injection. Despite appearances, all samples must be filtered through a membrane filter of porosity 0.45 lpl or less. Failure to perform this simple step will invariably decrease the column lifetime. Fortunately, sample filtration is very straightforward if disposable filter units are employed. Careful attention must be paid t o sample contamination (see section 4 . 3 ) , particularly by nitrate ion released from the filter membrane. Ultrafiltration devices wherein the sample is forced under pressure through a membrane, can also be applied to difficult samples, for example, the removal of free calcium and magnesium ions from protein material i n biological samples such as serum, milk and egg white (ref. 24). 3.3 CHEMICAL MODIFICATION OF THE SAMPLE 3.3.1 BATCH METHODS USING ION-EXCHANGE RESINS Perhaps the most common chemical modification o f the sample performed in ion chromatography is adjustment of pH of strongly acidic or alkaline samples. Injection of such samples without pH adjustment usually produces an unacceptable chromatogram because of baseline disturbances. Some ion chromatographic detection modes are particularly prone to the formation of system peaks which appear as spurious peaks in the chromatogram. These peaks appear as a direct result of the fact that with some detection methods, such as indirect UV absorption (ref. 3) (or "indirect photometric chromatography"), (ref. 25), a characteristic of the eluent (such
as absorbance) i s being monitored by the detector. Any change i n t h e form of t h e eluent can t h e r e f o r e lead t o a baseline disturbance o r system peak. For example, an eluent comprising potassium hydrogenphthalate a t pH 4 i s commonly employed w i t h i n d i r e c t UV d e t e c t i o n f o r t h e determination of anions. This eluent i s favoured because i t i s an e f f e c t i v e b u f f e r and provides e x c e l l e n t separation o f many inorganic anions.
A t pH 4,
the
phthalate i s present as a m i x t u r e o f p h t h a l i c a c i d and hydrogenphthalate ions, both o f which e x h i b i t d i f f e r e n t UV absorption behaviour. It f o l l o w s therefore t h a t i n j e c t i o n o f a s t r o n g l y a c i d i c o r a l k a l i n e sample w i l l temporarily a l t e r the r a t i o e x i s t i n g between t h e two eluent species and w i l l u l t i m a t e l y produce a system peak ( r e f . 26). The same can be s a i d f o r other detection modes. I t i s u s u a l l y n o t possible t o a d j u s t t h e sample pH by simple a d d i t i o n
of acid o r base because o f contamination o f t h e sample by t h e a c i d anion o r base c a t i o n , since these species may be o f i n t e r e s t i n t h e sample. In such cases i t i s o f t e n p o s s i b l e t o use an ion-exchange r e s i n i n t h e hydrogen form can be added t o an a l k a l i n e sample i n order t o lower t h e pH. The usual procedure i s t o s t i r a known weight o f r e s i n (e.g. a known volume o f sample (e.g.
1 g) w i t h
5 m l ) and t o monitor t h e pH of t h e
s o l u t i o n , n o t i n g t h e time required f o r t h e sample t o reach the desired pH (which i s u s u a l l y t h a t o f t h e e l u e n t t o be used). When t h i s r e a c t i o n time i s determined, t h e process i s repeated w i t h a second sample a l i q u o t b u t w i t h the pH electrode removed. This prevents contamination o f t h e sample by c h l o r i d e from t h e electrode f i l l i n g s o l u t i o n . Whilst t h i s approach i s simple and r e l a t i v e l y e f f e c t i v e , i t s u f f e r s from a number o f drawbacks. F i r s t t h e sample volume r e q u i r e d i s l a r g e and the r e a c t i o n time must be adjusted whenever t h e composition o f t h e sample changes. Second, the r e s i n used must be cleaned thoroughly t o prevent contamination o f t h e sample by ions leached from the r e s i n m a t e r i a l . Third, the sample volume may change due t o uptake o r release of solvent from the resin. F i n a l l y , some l o s s of sample components may occur due t o adsorption 3.3.2
on the resin.
D i a l y t i c techniques
O i a l y t i c techniques i n which selected sample components a r e transfered across a membrane may be subdivided i n t o passive d i a l y s i s and a c t i v e ( o r Donnan) d i a l y s i s procedures. Passive d i a l y s i s involves d i f f u s i o n o f p a r t i c l e s of a s p e c i f i e d molecular weight range through a n e u t r a l membrane.
On the other hand, a c t i v e o r Donnan d i a l y s i s i s t h e
46
transfer of ions of a specified charge sign through an ion-exchange membrane. Both approaches have been applied to the cleanup of samples for ion chromatography. Passive dialysis is a very slow process, requires appreciable volumes of sample (e.g. 5 ml) and normally results in severe dilution of the sample. These factors have mitigated against its widespread use. Nordmeyer and Hansen (ref. 27) have described an automated device for the rapid dialysis of very small samples (e.g. 40 ml) which enables direct injection of the dialysate onto an ion chromatograph. This device is shown schematically in Fig. 9, from which it can be seen that the sample is introduced into the annular cavity formed between a hollow dialysis fibre and an external concentrically mounted small diameter PTFE tube. The eluent is contained inside the fibre and flow is stopped whilst solute components from the sample dialyse into the interior of the hollow fibre. Because o f the small volumes involved, dialysis time is very short (typically less than 1 min), and the sample is then injected directly onto the ion chromatograph. When applied to the removal of free calcium from human serum, linear calibration curves were obtained and peak heights showed a relative standard deviation of less than 5% over a two-week period. The process of Donnan dialysis can be illustrated by reference to a dialysis system comprising 0.1 M NaCl (solution 1) separated from 0.001 M KC1 (solution 2) by a cation-exchange membrane. This experimental arrangement is shown in Fig 10. Cations can diffuse rapidly through the membrane, according to the following equilibrium: Na
+
+
+
K m-Na+m
+ K+
..........(1)
where the subscript m refers to the membrane phase The equilibrium constant for this exchange is given by:
.........(2) where the brackets denote the activity of the species. Since the equilibrium must exist at both surfaces of the membrane, then:
47
......... . ( 3 1 where t h e s u b s c r i p t s 1 and 2 r e f e r t o t h e two s o l u t i o n s on e i t h e r s i d e of t h e membrane. There can be no c o n c e n t r a t i o n g r a d i e n t s f o r t h e same i o n across t h e membrane, t h e r e f o r e (Na
+
=
+
..........(4)
(Na J2
and
Eqn (3) can be s i m p l i f i e d t o g i v e eqn ( 6 ) , o r eqn ( 7 ) i f t h e a c t i v i t y c o e f f i c i e n t i s assumed t o be u n i t y .
........ ..(7)
I n t h e system under c o n s i d e r a t i o n , t h e r e i s a s t r o n g tendency f o r t h e sodium i o n s t o d i f f u s e from t h e h i g h c o n c e n t r a t i o n zone ( s o l u t i o n 1) t o the
low c o n c e n t r a t i o n
zone
(solution
2).
As
this
process
occurs,
corresponding t r a n s f e r o f potassium i o n s from s o l u t i o n 2 t o s o l u t i o n 1 proceeds i n o r d e r t o preserve e l e c t r o n e u t r a l i t y . Thus d i f f u s i o n o f 1% of t h e sodium i n t o s o l u t i o n 2 i s accompanied by t r a n s f e r o f 99% o f t h e potassium i n t o s o l u t i o n 1. I f t h e volume o f s o l u t i o n 1 i s l e s s than t h a t o f s o l u t i o n 2, then t h e c o n c e n t r a t i o n of
potassium i n s o l u t i o n 1 i s
g r e a t e r than t h a t o r i g i n a l l y p r e s e n t i n s o l u t i o n 2. I n t h i s way, sample preconcentration can be accomplished. chemical e q u i l i b r i u m ,
E v e n t u a l l y t h e system w i l l a t t a i n
b u t t h i s s t a t e i s achieved o n l y s l o w l y because
t r a n s f e r o f c h l o r i d e across t h e membrane i s hindered. I n t h e s h o r t t e r m t h e r e f o r e , sample m o d i f i c a t i o n occurs.
Sample in
L To
column
e Eluent
e
II
4
Sample out
Hollow dialysis fibre
Fig. 9
Schematic representation of a passive d i a l y s i s - i n j e c t i o n device. Adapted with permission from r e f . 27.
Solution 1
Solution 2
0.1 M NaCl
0.05 M NaCl 0.0005 M KCI
Fig. 10
I
0.05 M NaCl
0.0005 M KCI
Equilibrium (days)
Schematic representation o f Donnan d i a l y s i s .
49 I n terms o f i o n chromatographic sample cleanup, Donnan d i a l y s i s can be used t o remove a selected species from a sample, o r a l t e r n a t i v e l y t o s e l e c t i v e l y add an i o n t o a sample. An example o f t h e f i r s t a l t e r n a t i v e i s the removal o f metal cyano complexes from a p l a t i n g bath by Donnan d i a l y s i s i n t o a sodium c h l o r i d e r e c e i v e r s o l u t i o n ( r e f . 28). The second a l t e r n a t i v e can be i l l u s t r a t e d by t h e d i a l y s i s o f sodium hydroxide s o l u t i o n using sulphuric a c i d as t h e r e c e i v e r s o l u t i o n . Here hydrogen ions from t h e sulphuric a c i d s o l u t i o n d i f f u s e i n t o t h e sodium hydroxide through a cation-exchange membrane. The pH o f t h e sample i s t h e r e f o r e lowered, w h i l s t t h e anion content i s t h e o r e t i c a l l y unaltered, a l l o w i n g subsequent determination o f these anions by i o n chromatography. The
second o f
the
above
alternatives
suffers
from
a
practical
1 i m i t a t i o n which s e r i o u s l y d e t r a c t s from i t s r o u t i n e use. This l i m i t a t i o n t h a t t h e cation-exchange
is
membrane i s n o t e n t i r e l y
impervious t o
sulphate ions from the r e c e i v e r s o l u t i o n , which means t h a t the sample u l t i m a t e l y becomes contaminated w i t h sulphate
during d i a l y s i s .
This
problem could be minimised by increasing t h e p e r m s e l e c t i v i t y o f t h e membrane ( i e . i t s a b i l i t y t o permit t h e t r a n s f e r o f ions o f o n l y one charge sign) however t h i s requires c a r e f u l c o n t r o l over t h e manufacturing process. A more a t t r a c t i v e procedure has been reported by Cox and Tanaka ( r e f . 29) wherein a s l u r r y o f ion-exchange r e s i n i n the hydrogen form i s used t o replace t h e sulphuric a c i d employed as t h e r e c e i v e r s o l u t i o n i n the above example. This method i s c a l l e d "dual ion-exchange'' and s i n c e the counter anion i n the r e c e i v e r s o l u t i o n i s the r e s i n bead i t s e l f , t r a n s f e r across t h e membrane i s eliminated f o r physical
reasons.
It
should be noted t h a t the ion-exchange membrane may a l s o be used i n t h e form o f tube i n s e r t e d i n t o t h e r e s i n s l u r r y ( r e f . 30).
Table I 1 shows
some a p p l i c a t i o n s o f Donnan d i a l y s i s sample cleanup i n i o n chromatography. 3.3.3
DISPOSABLE CARTRIDGE COLUMNS
One o f the most v e r s a t i l e and convenient means a v a i l a b l e f o r sample cleanup i s the use of commercially a v a i l a b l e disposable c a r t r i d g e columns. These devices o f f e r r a p i d sample treatment and can u s u a l l y be employed i n tandem w i t h disposable f i l t e r s so t h a t f i l t r a t i o n and sample cleanup can be performed i n a s i n g l e operation. Table I 1 1 l i s t s some of the common s t a t i o n a r y phases a v a i l a b l e as c a r t r i d g e column packings from a range o f manufacturers.
50 TABLE I1
Applications o f donnan d i a l y s i s cleanup
Sample
Membrane
Reference
Metal cyano
anex
28
catex
30
Anions in Na2C03
catex
30
S042- i n NaCl
anex
30
C1- i n p o l y e l e c t r o l y t e s
anex
31
complexes i n a p l a t i n g bath C1-, NO3
- , SO42-
i n conc. NaOH
e.g..
polyacrylic acid
Table I11
Typical s t a t i o n a r y phases f o r cleanup c a r t r i d g e columns 1. 2.
S i 1i c a
3. 4.
Alumina ( a c i d i c , basic and n e u t r a l )
5.
Cation-exchange (H' o r metal form)
6.
Polymer (e.9.
7.
Activated carbon
C18
Ani on-exchange styrene divinylbenzene and
p o l y v i n y l p y r r o l id i ne) 8.
Chelating agents
9.
Amino
Cartridge columns can be employed i n one o f two ways. The f i r s t method i s s e l e c t i v e removal of t h e s o l u t e ions from t h e sample m a t r i x and t h e solvent used t o e l u t e the sample through t h e c a r t r i d g e should provide chromatographic conditions g i v i n g very strong r e t e n t i o n o f t h e s o l u t e
ions. That i s , t h e capacity f a c t o r s f o r these solutes should be very large. The a l t e r n a t i v e operational mode f o r
c a r t r i d g e columns i s t o
s e l e c t i v e l y r e t a i n m a t r i x components under conditions where the s o l u t e
51 i o n s a r e unretained. That i s , t h e i r c a p a c i t y f a c t o r s approach zero. I t i s g e n e r a l l y i n a d v i s a b l e t o use a c a r t r i d g e column t o achieve chromatographic s e p a r a t i o n o f s o l u t e s which have c a p a c i t y f a c t o r s i n t e r m e d i a t e between t h e abovementioned extremes. The reasons f o r t h i s a r e t h a t experimental f a c t o r s a r e very v a r i a b l e (e.g.. column e f f i c i e n c y , f l o w - r a t e , and packing r e p r o d u c i b i l i t y ) and i n most cases t h e passage o f s o l u t e s along t h e column cannot be v i s u a l l y monitored. Thus even i f a chromatographic separation i s optimised on a p a r t i c u l a r s t a t i o n a r y phase, i t i s probable t h a t t h e separation would be i r r e p r o d u c i b l e due t o changes i n t h e experimental c o n d i t i o n s used. Keeping i n mind t h a t we wish t h e s o l u t e t o be e i t h e r w e l l r e t a i n e d o r not
retained
at
all,
then
several
possibilities
emerge
from
the
s t a t i o n a r y phases l i s t e d i n Table 111. S t a t i o n a r y phases which show some ion-exchange a b i l i t y (such as s i l i c a , alumina, anion and c a t i o n exchangers, and amino phases), and s t a t i o n a r y phases which show c h e l a t i o n a b i l i t y should be s u i t a b l e f o r t h e s e l e c t i v e r e t e n t i o n o f i o n i c s o l u t e s from a m a t r i x composed l a r g e l y o f n e u t r a l ,
organic
species.
Alter-
n a t i v e l y , hydrophobic s t a t i o n a r y phases such as o c t a d e x y l s i l a n e and t h e polymeric phases should be useful
f o r t h e removal o f n e u t r a l o r g a n i c
components w h i l e showing l i t t l e r e t e n t i o n o f i o n i c s o l u t e s .
A further
p o t e n t i a l a p p l i c a t i o n o f c a r t r i d g e columns i s t h e i r use f o r a d j u s t i n g t h e pH o f a sample i n t h e same manner as t h a t described e a r l i e r f o r i o n exchange r e s i n s used i n t h e b a t c h mode.
Most o f t h e abovementioned
p o s s i b i l i t i e s have been r e a l i s e d i n p r a c t i c e and Table I V l i s t s some examples o f successful a p p l i c a t i o n s . Several
practical
c a r t r i d g e columns,
aspects
should
namely column
receive
pretreatment,
attention flow-rate,
when
using
method
of
sample a p p l i c a t i o n , and sample pH. F i r s t , t h e columns almost i n v a r i a b l y r e q u i r e pretreatment packing m a t e r i a l ,
to
i n o r d e r t o remove very f i n e p a r t i c l e s of elute
any
contaminants,
or
to
condition
the the
s t a t i o n a r y phase t o improve t h e e f f i c i e n c y o f sample b i n d i n g . S i g n i f i c a n t l e v e l s o f i n o r g a n i c contaminants a r e commonly encountered i n c a r t r i d g e columns (see s e c t i o n 4 . 3 ) , g e n e r a l l y as a r e s u l t o f r e s i d u a l reagents from t h e manufacturing process. Hydrophobic s t a t i o n a r y phases u s u a l l y r e q u i r e pretreatment w i t h an o r g a n i c s o l v e n t such as methanol i n o r d e r t o wet t h e s t a t i o n a r y phase surface so t h a t e f f e c t i v e b i n d i n g o f hydrophobic s o l u t e s i s achieved from aqueous sample s o l u t i o n s . The f l o w r a t e o f sample o r f l u s h i n g s o l u t i o n through t h e precolumn should be kept as low as p r a c t i c a b l e so t h a t mass t r a n s f e r e f f e c t s minimised, and as r e p r o d u c i b l e as p o s s i b l e . Most column c a r t r i d g e s a r e
are
52 designed f o r use w i t h disposable syringes and t h e low packing density of the s t a t i o n a r y phase permits very h i g h flow-rates (e.9.
50 ml/min) t o be
e a s i l y achieved. Experience w i t h a n a l y t i c a l chromatographic columns suggests t h a t such a high f l o w - r a t e i s u n l i k e l y t o produce t h e degree of s e l e c t i v e separation required, so i t i s advisable t o use flow-rates l e s s than 10 ml/min. TABLE I V
Applications o f cleanup w i t h c a r t r i d g e columns
Matrix
Solute ions
P1ant e x t r a c t
NO2-, NO3 , SOq 2-
-
Stationary phase
Reference
t h i o s u l phate
C18 C18
4,34
Urine Urine
oxalate
C18
33
Soil extract P1asma
sot-
34
32
High c h l o r i d e
anions
NaOH Leachate
anions A s ( I I I ) , As(V)
C18 C18 silica AG+ catex H+ catex catex
Brine
sodium anions
H+ catex charcoal
43 40
metal 0x0-anions anions
anex
41
amino
42
anions anions
polymer
43 43
Plant e x t r a c t
A i r samples
Digests Natural waters Surf act ants Aromatics
polymer
36 35 37 38 39
The t h i r d important p r a c t i c a l consideration i s t h e manner i n which t h e sample i s applied t o and e l u t e d from t h e c a r t r i d g e column. It i s p o s s i b l e t o apply a known volume o f t h e sample t o t h e head o f t h e column and t o e l u t e the sample band through t h e column w i t h a s u i t a b l e eluent. However, t h i s method i s d i f f i c u l t
i n p r a c t i c e because o f the d i f f i c u l t y
in
applying an accurate volume o f sample using t h e syringes compatible w i t h the c a r t r i d g e column, and i s recommended o n l y when the sample volume i s small o r t h e concentration o f t h e sample i s h i g h enough t o q u i c k l y saturate t h e c a r t r i d g e . I t i s g e n e r a l l y more appropriate t o pass sample continuously through t h e column, d i s c a r d i n g t h e f i r s t two o r t h r e e column volumes and then c o l l e c t i n g s u f f i c i e n t e f f l u e n t f o r analysis. F i n a l l y , the sample pH has an important bearing on t h e s e l e c t i o n of a
s u i t a b l e s t a t i o n a r y phase. Apart from t h e obvious c o n s i d e r a t i o n t h a t some s t a t i o n a r y phases a r e i n t o l e r a n t o f a c i d i c o r a l k a l i n e s o l u t i o n s , sample pH i s o f t e n a very useful
the
i n d i c a t o r o f the i o n i c strength.
cases where t h e i o n i c s t r e n g t h i s unacceptably high, i t may
In
be necessary
t o use a second c a r t r i d g e column, o r an a l t e r n a t i v e cleanup procedure, t o remove some o f t h e i o n i c components from t h e sample. I n conclusion, i t should a l s o be noted t h a t c a r t r i d g e columns packed w i t h hydrophobic s t a t i o n a r y phases can a l s o be used t o r e t a i n i o n i c
s o l u t e s ( r a t h e r than n e u t r a l , o r g a n i c s o l u t e s ) i f they a r e f i r s t cond i t i o n e d w i t h an i o n - i n t e r a c t i o n reagent. The success o f t h i s approach i s dependent on r e t e n t i o n o f t h e i o n - i n t e r a c t i o n reagent on t h e s t a t i o n a r y phase d u r i n g sample e l u t i o n , t h u s i t i s d e s i r a b l e t h a t r e l a t i v e l y hydrophobic i o n - i n t e r a c t i o n reagents be used and t h e sample volume be limited. Tetramethylammonium hydroxide employed as i o n - i n t e r a c t i o n
and pentanesulphonic
acid
have been
reagents f o r t h e removal o f a n i o n i c and
c a t i o n i c s u r f a c t a n t s , r e s p e c t i v e l y , u s i n g a c a r t r i d g e column packed w i t h a polymeric divinylbenzene s t a t i o n a r y phase ( r e f . 43). CHEMICAL REACTION OF SOLUTES
3.3.4
f o r some samples, cleanup can be b e s t achieved u s i n g an a p p r o p r i a t e chemical r e a c t i o n t o e l i m i n a t e a m a t r i x component. A l t e r n a t i v e l y , i t may be necessary t o d e r i v a t i s e a s o l u t e i n o r d e r t o enhance i t s d e t e c t a b i l i t y o r t o convert i t i n t o a form s u i t a b l e f o r separation.
Much has been
w r i t t e n on t h e p r i n c i p l e s o f chemical d e r i v a t i s a t i o n o f o r g a n i c s o l u t e s ( r e f . 44), and t h e same p r i n c i p l e s apply here t o i n o r g a n i c s o l u t e s . Table V
l i s t s some r e a c t i o n s which have been employed as sample t r e a t m e n t
methods f o r i o n chromatography, o r as m o b i l e phase r e a c t i o n s designed t o modify t h e n a t u r e o f t h e s o l u t e i n an i o n chromatographic d e t e r m i n a t i o n . 4. 4.1
CONTAMINATION EFFECTS
INTRODUCTION One o f t h e most important c o n s i d e r a t i o n s i n sample h a n d l i n g i s t h e
p o s s i b i l i t y o f contamination a r i s i n g from v a r i o u s sources such as t h e h a n d l i n g procedures used, t h e v o l u m e t r i c ware employed,
filtration or
cleanup
itself.
devices
and
the
chromatographic
hardware
Such
contamination may a l t e r t h e t r u e c o n c e n t r a t i o n o f s o l u t e s o f i n t e r e s t , e i t h e r d i r e c t l y by c o n t r i b u t i n g d e t e c t a b l e l e v e l s o f t h e a n a l y t e s t o t h e f i n a l s o l u t i o n , o r by promoting chemical r e a c t i o n s which cause l e v e l s o f analytes t o a l t e r . F u r t h e r t h e sample i t s e l f may be a source of
contamination of the chromatographic system, causing column poisoning or memory effects resulting from adsorption of sample constituents on chromatographic components. In this section, the chief sources of contamination are discussed. TABLE V
Chemical modification of the sample
Additive
Effect
Reference
Boric acid
prevent oxidation of ascorbic acid H3B03 in suppressor) (borate
N, N dimethylphenylenedi amine
reacts with H2S to form methylene blue 46
Boric acid
fluoride=+BF4to eliminate interference of F- on silica analysis
47
Iodine
I2 + HCN*H+ + I- + ICN iodide used as a measure of CN-
48
EDTA
complex interfering metal ions
49
Formaldehyde
S032-*
50
Methanol
oxidised to formate by Cr042-
51
Barium ions
precipitate sulphate
52
4.2
+
hydroxymet hane-su 1 phonate
45
CONTAMINATION FROM PHYSICAL HANDLING OF THE SAMPLE The prime sources of sample contamination in physical operations such as weighing and volumetric manipulations are contact of the sample or apparatus with the skin, and leaching of contaminants from volumetric ware. Contact with the skin introduces detectable levels o f sodium and chloride to the sample and in cases where trace determination of these solutes is desired, high background levels will invariably occur unless protective gloves are worn. Volumetric ware should be made from polyethylene or some other inert material and should be washed in non-ionic detergent (sulphate-free) and
rinsed thoroughly before use. Standard solutions used for calibration of the ion chromatograph should be stored in inert containers. There is ample evidence to show that even brief exposure of aqueous solutions to conventional 1 aboratory glassware results in significant contamination, particularly by sodium and silicate. It is also noteworthy that samples for anion analysis can be readily contaminated by bicarbonate ion produced by absorption of carbon dioxide from the atmosphere, particularly under alkaline conditions. Care should therefore be taken to exclude carbon dioxide wherever possible. 4.3
CONTAMINATION FROM FILTRATION D E V I C E S AND CARTRIDGE COLUMNS As mentioned in the earlier discussion on the use of disposable filtration devices and cartridge columns for the clarification and chemical cleanup of samples for ion chromatography, contamination from these devices must be considered. In most cases, these devices have been manufactured for the general HPLC market where sample contamination by inorganic ions would be a minor problem unless the particular contaminants involved were capable of participating in chemical reactions with the sample components. For this reason, it is not uncommon for inorganic reagents to be employed during the manufacturing process. Disposable filters and both C18 and alumina cartridge columns produced by the major HPLC supplier have been evaluated for contamination effects (refs. 53, 54) and some of the results obtained are summarised in Tables VI and V I I . Whilst the results shown are specific to one brand of product, it is expected that similar contamination levels would exist in alternative products, unless specific means were employed by the manufacturer t o remove inorganic contaminants. Table V I shows that disposable filtration devices release appreciable quantities of nitrate, and lesser amounts o f chloride and sulphate, into the initial fraction of solution passed through them. However, the leachable ions are very labile and are essentially removed completely if the filter is pre-washed with 20 ml of water. Care should therefore be taken that such filters are adequately washed before they are used on samples to be subsequently analysed by ion chromatography. Detectable levels of chloride, nitrate, sulphate and lead are leached from C 1 8 cartridge columns by water (Table V I I ) , and a reduced, but still detectable, level of these ions persists after the column has been washed with 20 ml of water. The levels of ions leached from the cartridge are sufficiently low that that they would present a problem only for ultratrace analyses using sample preconcentration methods. I n such cases, it
56
would be necessary to run a blank solution. Alumina columns produce much more severe contamination, undoubtedly due to residues of the reagents used to modify its surface properties during manufacture. TABLE VI
Contamination from filtration devices Data taken from ref. 53 ~~
ION
~
~~
Conc. (ppb) in successive 20 ml fractions HA filters Fraction
Fraction
Fraction
Fraction
1
2
1
2
F-
<0.2
c1-
84.6 698.8 17.8
N03;so4
TABLE V I I Ion
HA filters
c0.2 13.6 c0.4 2.2
23.4 73.2 409.5 111.9
Contamination from cartridge columns Conc. (ppb) in successive 20 ml fractions Fraction 1
Fraction 2
c0.2
c0.2
c1-
101.2
29.4
NOg-
69.9
36.4
so42-
99.4
39.0
Pb2+
76.3
21.4
F-
c0.2 13.2 c0.4 8.7
Notes 1. No contamination observed for Cd2+, Cu2+, Mn2+, Ni2+ and Zn2+ 2. Other stationary phases (particularly alumina) contain significant quantities of 1 eachabl e materi a1 3. Data taken from ref. 53. 4.4
CONTAMINATION FROM CHROMATOGRAPHIC HARDWARE COMPONENTS Over recent years there has been considerable discussion relating to the suitability of conventional HPLC hardware components for use in ion chromatographic applications. It i s clear that the major instrumental components of an ion chromatograph, namely the pump, injector, data
57 management system, and o f t e n a l s o t h e detector, are i d e n t i c a l t o those used i n a t y p i c a l HPLC system.
The c h i e f d i f f e r e n c e between t h e two
techniques l i e s i n the column used f o r each method. I n view o f t h i s , i t has been common f o r HPLC hardware t o be used i n i o n chromatographic systems and t h i s raises t h e question o f t h e s u i t a b i l i t y o f s t a i n l e s s s t e e l components f o r use w i t h t h e aqueous eluents and sample types employed i n i o n chromatography. Types 304 and 316 s t a i n l e s s s t e e l s are t y p i c a l l y used i n t h e construction o f solvent-wetted HPLC components. Studies w i t h reversedphase eluents ( r e f . 55) have shown t h a t components w i t h small diameter openings,
such
as
capillary
tubing,
are
susceptible
to
corrosion
r e s u l t i n g from mechanical erosion o f t h e p r o t e c t i v e surface oxide l a y e r due t o high f l u i d v e l o c i t y . There i s a l s o evidence t h a t sample components such as p r o t e i n s and metal chelates can undergo complexation o r l i g a n d exchange reactions a t s t a i n l e s s s t e e l surfaces ( r e f s . 5 6 , 57). Aqueous buffers used f o r the analysis o f anions and cations i n i o n chromatography provide a s u i t a b l e environment f o r corrosion and i n some cases a l s o e x h i b i t strong complexation p r o p e r t i e s .
It i s therefore possible t h a t
contamination e f f e c t s could a r i s e from t h e use o f these eluents on s t a i n l e s s steel hardware components. Several p o s s i b i l i t i e s e x i s t where contamination o f t h e eluent by metal ions leached from m e t a l l i c components i n t h e chromatographic system could present serious problems. The f i r s t o f these i s the d i r e c t e l e v a t i o n o f detector baseline l e v e l s i n c a t i o n analyses using post-column r e a c t i o n detection.
Secondly,
i n t e r f e r e n c e e f f e c t s r e s u l t i ng from complexat i o n
reactions w i t h solutes can be expected t o occur i n some anion-exchange separations.
For example, i r o n (111) forms a strong complex w i t h many
common inorganic anions and t h i s complex would have d i f f e r e n t chromatographic and detection c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s t o those e x h i b i t e d by t h e f r e e anions. A f u r t h e r e f f e c t r e s u l t i n g from eluent contamination occurs
in the ion-exchange separation o f monovalent cations where t h e presence o f m u l t i p l y charged cations i n t h e eluent would lead t o r a p i d column d e t e r i o r a t i o n caused by i r r e v e r s i b l e b i n d i n g o f these ions onto t h e exchange s i t e s o f the low capacity cation-exchange columns used. I n such methods, i t i s common p r a c t i c e t o include an ion-exchange guard column between the pump and i n j e c t o r i n order t o remove any m u l t i v a l e n t c a t i o n s from the eluent. However, t h i s approach would be i n e f f e c t i v e against ions produced as corrosion products w i t h i n t h e i n j e c t o r o r t h e column i t s e l f . Table V I I I shows t h e compositions o f types 304 and 316 s t a i n l e s s s t e e l . These m a t e r i a l s are corrosion r e s i s t a n t by v i r t u e o f a p r o t e c t i v e
58
coating of chromium-rich oxides which forms on the surface (ref. 55). This coating can develop gradually during usage or can be formed rapidly by exposing the surface to relatively strong nitric acid solutions. If the latter method is used, the surface is said to be "passivated". Consideration of the composition of the steel suggests that the species most likely to be produced by corrosion reactions are iron, chromium, manganese, molybdenum and nickel. These metal ions could be leached from the metallic surface through either direct oxidation or by complexation reactions with eluent components. The latter mechanism could be expected to be most prevalent with eluents containing strong complexing agents such as citrate, tartrate, phthalate and ethyl enedi ami ne. Side-react i on coefficients for compl exat i on of the above metal ions with the eluents typically used for ion chromatography suggest that significant complexation of iron, chromium and, to a lesser extent, nickel can be expected (ref. 58). TABLE
VIII
Typical composition o f types 304 and 316 stainless steel Data taken from ref. 58 ~
Element
Carbon Manganese Phosphorus Sulphur S i 1 icon Ch romi um Nickel Molybdenum
~
~~~
~~
Percentage Type 304
0.08 (max) 2.00 0.045 0.030 1 .oo 18.00 - 20.00 8.00 12.00
-
-
Type 316 0.08 (max) 2.oo 0.045 0.030
1 .oo 16.00 - 20.00 10.00 - 14.00 2.00 - 3.00
In a recent study (ref. 58), corrosion products were allowed to accumulate to detectable levels by recirculating aqueous eluents through a HPLC system, and the eluents were then analysed by inductively coupled plasma atomic emission spectrometry. The experiment was performed on the chromatographic hardware alone and with a stainless steel column included in the flow-path. The results o f this study are summarised in Table IX, and show clearly that the levels of contaminant metal ions (especially iron) found in the eluent were extremely low when the eluent passed only through the chromatographic hardware (pump and injector), but increased
59 markedly when t h e column was incorporated i n t o t h e flow-path. I t i s i n t e r e s t i n g t o speculate on t h e source o f t h e c o r r o s i o n products
observed w i t h t h e s t a i n l e s s s t e e l column. The most probable source i s t h e column f r i t s which have a very high surface area i n comparison t o t h e r e s t o f the column and the external chromatographic system and i n e v i t a b l y a l s o contain s t r e s s p o i n t s a t which t h e r a t e o f c o r r o s i o n would be accelerated. Calculations show t h a t i f t h e e l u e n t wets t h e e n t i r e surface o f the column f r i t s , then these f r i t s account f o r approximately 96% o f t h e t o t a l metal surface i n contact w i t h t h e eluent and should t h e r e f o r e be the prime source o f eluent contamination. The l e v e l s o f metal ions given i n Table I X should be viewed from a standpoint which considers t h e t o t a l l e v e l s o f these species from a l l sources. The reagents used f o r t h e preparation o f eluents can be expected t o contain residual l e v e l s o f metal ions: examination o f t h e manufact u r e r s ' s p e c i f i c a t i o n s shows t h a t t h e l e v e l s o f i r o n and n i c k e l would be i n the range o f 1-5 ppb i n t h e eluents tested.
I t can t h e r e f o r e be
concluded t h a t o x i d i s i n g o r complexing eluents used f o r cation-exchange separations can be contaminated w i t h detectable l e v e l s o f i r o n , chromium and n i c k e l
from s t a i n l e s s
steel
column
frits.
Accordingly,
cation-
exchange columns designed f o r use w i t h these eluents should be f i t t e d w i t h non-metallic
frits,
or alternatively,
m e t a l l i c f r i t s should be
deactivated by passivation o r s i l a n i s a t i o n reactions. Eluents t y p i c a l l y used f o r i o n chromatography o f anions do n o t show any contamination from t h e metal 1 i c components o f t h e chromatographic system and t h i s r e s u l t indicates t h a t m e t a l l i c f r i t s are s u i t a b l e f o r use i n anion-exchange columns
.
Chromatographic hardware components such as pumps and i n j e c t o r s do n o t c o n t r i b u t e any s i g n i f i c a n t l e v e l s o f t h e metal ions. It should be noted t h a t the contamination l e v e l s shown i n Table I X were obtained on an unpassivated HPLC system and lower l e v e l s occurred when m e t a l l i c surfaces were passivated by treatment w i t h n i t r i c a c i d ( r e f .
58). Corrosion of
these components therefore does n o t represent a problem i n i o n chromatographic methods. 4.5
CONTAMINATION OF THE COLUMN I n t h e preceding section i t was pointed out t h a t metal ions introduced
i n t o the eluent from the chromatographic hardware could cause poisoning of
cation-exchange
columns
through
irreversible binding o f
exchange
s i t e s . This example serves t o i l l u s t r a t e t h e p o s s i b i l i t y of column contamination, and i n the f o l l o w i n g discussion such contamination from the sample w i l l be considered.
TABLE IX
Contamination from stainless steel Data taken from ref. 58.
Eluenta
Metal concentration (ppb) per eluent cycle FE Cr Mn Mo Ni
HN03 HN03
311.8 <1 .o
4.0
EDA-TA EDA-TA EOA-CA EDA-CA KHP
9.5 1.9 20 .Q
4.5 c1.3 4.4 4.6
3.8 4.2
4.4
3.2
Column
33.6 c0.3 c0.3
c0.8 4.5
11.7 4.5
c1.6
4.6
yes no yes
0.4
c1.5 4.7 4.2 4.7
4 . 5
no
4.7 <3.2
yes
4.7
yes
c0.3
c0.6 c0.3
no
a. Kev to eluent identities. HN03: 10 mM nitric acid. EDA-TA: 0.5 mM ethylenediamine and 1.3 mM tartaric acid. EDA-CA: 3.5 mM ethylenediamine and 10 mM citric acid. KHP: 1 mM potassium hydrogen phthalate. Perhaps the most commonly encountered example of column poisoning by the sample is the binding on the column of organic sample components. This problem can be easily circumvented by pretreatment of the sample with a cartridge column, use of an ion-exchange guard column, and periodical flushing of the analytical column with a water-methanol mobile phase when the column packing is sufficiently resistant to the use of organic solvents. A more insidious problem is the effect of metal ions on both anion and cation separations. I n the former case, metal ions such as calcium and magnesium may form complexes with mobile phase components (e.9.. gluconate), leading to system peaks or an unstable baseline in the final chromatogram (ref. 59). Silica-based anion-exchangers can also show retention of metal ions, with iron (111), aluminium (111) and mercury (11) being strongly retained, whilst copper(II), lead(I1) and zinc(I1) may elute at retention times similar to those observed for anions on the same column (ref.60). It has recently been shown (ref. 61) that the latter group of metal ions form complexes with phthalate eluents which are retained to varying degrees on silica and polymeric anion-exchangers. It i s therefore evident that polyvalent metal ions should be removed from samples on which anion determinations are to be performed, and this may be achieved conveniently by passage o f the sample through a cation-exchange cartridge column. Fig. 1 1 shows the effect of treating a drinking water sample in this manner and it is clear that the removal of calcium and magnesium resulted in an improved baseline.
61
I
0
"
1
I
I
10
5
15
Time (minl
Fig. 11 E f f e c t o f calcium and magnesium on t h e baseline produced i n t h e determination o f anions i n d r i n k i n g water. Chromatogram (a) i s f o r a Sam l e contaminated w i t h calcium and magnesium and chromatogram (by i s the same sample a f t e r treatment by passage through a cation-exchange c a r t r i d g e column. Column: Waters I C PAK A. Eluent: 1.3 mM Na2Bq07 5.8 mM3B03 1.4 mM K-gluconate in w a t e r - a c e t o n i t r i l e (88:12).
-
-
Polyvalent cations can e x e r t a detrimental e f f e c t on t h e determination of monovalent cations by cation-exchange. The r e l a t i v e l y weak eluents used f o r the monovalent cations are unable t o e l u t e p o l y v a l e n t cations, w i t h the r e s u l t t h a t these species remain s t r o n g l y bound t o t h e column. The n e t r e s u l t o f t h i s i s t h a t chromatographic performance o f t h e column f o r monovalent cations i s degraded i n terms of decreased r e t e n t i o n , l o s s o f e f f i c i e n c y , poor r e s o l u t i o n and reduced peak heights ( r e f . 62).
The
l a t t e r three c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s are d i r e c t l y a t t r i b u t a b l e t o t h e f a c t t h a t the s o l u t e ions do not compress i n t o a compact band a t t h e head o f t h e column when ion-exchange s i t e s are occupied by polyvalent metal ions. For these reasons i t i s therefore advisable t h a t a cation-exchange
guard
column be i n s e r t e d i n t o the flow-path p r i o r t o t h e a n a l y t i c a l column. 5.
SAMPLE HANDLING FOR ULTRA-TRACE ANALYSIS
5.1
INTRODUCTION
The s e n s i t i v i t y o f an i o n chromatographic method i s s t r o n g l y dependent
on the type o f detector used, w i t h amperometric and d i r e c t UV absorption detection being among t h e most s e n s i t i v e ,
and r e f r a c t i v e index being
r e l a t i v e l y i n s e n s i t i v e ( r e f . 3). Most o f the universal d e t e c t i o n modes such as c o n d u c t i v i t y and i n d i r e c t UV absorption have comparable p r a c t i c a l detection l i m i t s o f about 100 ppb f o r a 100 pl i n j e c t i o n . This means t h a t f o r r e l i a b l e q u a n t i t a t i o n t o be achieved, analysis by d i r e c t sample i n j e c t i o n can be most conveniently used f o r s o l u t e concentrations
of
about 1 ppm o r higher. Below t h i s concentration l e v e l , e i t h e r very l a r g e i n j e c t i o n volumes must be employed o r a sample preconcentration method i s
62 necessary. Fig. 12 shows a schematic representation o f t h e sample concent r a t i o n ranges applicable t o t h e abovementioned approaches, each o f which i s discussed below.
5.2
USE OF LARGE INJECTION VOLUMES Because o f t h e zone compression e f f e c t occurring on
ion-exchange
columns, i t i s possible t o i n j e c t very l a r g e volumes o f sample onto an a n a l y t i c a l column without s i g n i f i c a n t l o s s o f chromatographic e f f i c i e n c y . Several authors have u t i l i s e d t h i s approach ( r e f s .
63
-
65) and t h e
r e s u l t s suggest t h a t an upper p r a c t i c a l l i m i t o f 2 m l e x i s t s f o r t h e sample i n j e c t i o n volume, otherwise t h e l a r g e solvent peak i n t h e f i n a l chromatogram may mask e a r l y e l u t i n g solutes.
Moreover,
i n d i r e c t UV
absorption d e t e c t i o n has been shown t o be superior t o c o n d u c t i v i t y detection because t h e former method shows a more r a p i d r e t u r n t o baseline a f t e r passage o f the l a r g e i n j e c t i o n peak ( r e f s . 64, 65). Fig. 13 shows a chromatogram obtained using i n d i r e c t UV absorption d e t e c t i o n and a 1 m l sample i n j e c t i o n volume. To increase the volume of sample above t h e p r a c t i c a l l i m i t mentioned above, i t i s essential t h a t t h e s i z e o f t h e solvent peak be decreased so t h a t interference w i t h e a r l y e l u t i n g solutes does n o t occur. One method t o achieve t h i s i s t o f l u s h t h e i n t e r s t i t i a l sample from t h e column by pumping a measured volume o f eluent through t h e column i n t h e reverse d i r e c t i o n t o t h a t used f o r sample e l u t i o n ( r e f . 65).
The s o l u t e ions
remain bound t o t h e column during t h i s operation, b u t t h e i n j e c t i o n peak i s reduced because t h e sample solvent has been displaced from t h e column. This method permits t h e use o f sample volumes up t o 5 m l , b u t requires the use o f two switching valves and t h e r e f o r e seems t o o f f e r
little
advantage over t h e use o f s i m i l a r hardware w i t h preconcentration columns, as discussed below. 5.3
USE OF PRECONCENTRATION COLUMNS The most widely used approach t o t r a c e enrichment i n i o n chromato-
graphy involves the use o f a separate precolumn designed t o t r a p t r a c e l e v e l s o f solutes from a l a r g e volume o f sample ( r e f . 5). The precolumn method i s popular because i t i s simple and convenient t o apply, amenable t o automation and o f f e r s h i g h enrichment f a c t o r s .
is
I n precolumn sample enrichment, an accurately known volume of sample i s pumped a t a p r e c i s e f l o w - r a t e through a small ion-exchange precolumn ( o r a reversed-phase precolumn coated w i t h an i o n i c i o n - i n t e r a c t i o n reagent), c a l l e d the concentrator column. Solute ions contained i n t h e
63 sample are s e l e c t i v e l y trapped on t h e concentrator column and are then e l u t e d onto an ion-exchange a n a l y t i c a l column f o r separation and q u a n t i t a t i o n . This procedure can be e f f e c t i v e
as an a n a l y t i c a l method
only i f t h e processes o f b i n d i n g o f s o l u t e ions on t h e concentrator column and t h e i r
subsequent
transfer
to
the analytical
column
are
quantitative.
> 100
ppm
DIRECT INJECTION ZONE (sample z 100 i t l )
1 PPm
100 ppb
Fig. 12 Working concentration ranges i n i o n chromatography.
5.3.1
HARDWARE CONSIDERATIONS
The simplest form o f sample preconcentration device u t i l i s e s a s i n g l e , six-port,
high pressure, switching valve which can be actuated e i t h e r
manually
or
automatically
(ref.
66).
14 shows
Fig.
the
plumbing
In t h e f i r s t step,
the
concentrator and a n a l y t i c a l columns are e q u i l i b r a t e d w i t h eluent.
The
arrangement
and operation
of
this
system.
valve i s then r o t a t e d and t h e concentrator column i s removed from t h e flow-path w h i l s t eluent continues t o be pumped through t h e a n a l y t i c a l column. A measured volume o f sample i s passed through t h e concentrator column using e i t h e r a pump o r a l a r g e volume syringe, w i t h t h e e f f l u e n t being d i r e c t e d t o waste. A t t h i s stage, t h e s o l u t e ions from t h e sample are assumed t o be retained on t h e concentrator column and i n t h e subsequent step, r o t a t i o n o f the valve permits eluent t o be pumped i n t h e reverse d i r e c t i o n ( i e . the f l o w d i r e c t i o n opposite t o t h a t used f o r sample loading) through t h e concentrator column. This operation i s known as backflushing and i s designed t o t r a n s f e r t h e s o l u t e ions t o t h e a n a l y t i c a l column i n a small volume of eluent.
I n t h e f i n a l step, t h e
valve i s again r o t a t e d and eluent then c a r r i e s t h e s o l u t e ions through the a n a l y t i c a l column f o r separation and detection.
64 This system has the advantages of simplicity and ease of operation. The backflush volume is generally selected to be high enough to guarantee that all the ions are transfered. It should be noted here that the volume of eluent used to backflush the solute ions to the analytical column will necessarily have lower concentration of eluent ions than that present in the bulk eluent. This is because some eluent ions are required to reequilibrate the concentrator column which has been depleted of eluent ions during the passage of sample. The result of this is that severe baseline disturbances often occur in the final chromatogram when the detection method employed is sensitive to the background level of eluent ions in the mobile phase. Conductivity detection falls into this category and when this is used, the initial baseline disturbance in the chromatogram often masks early eluting solutes. A more flexible preconcentration system is produced by the combination of a single, programmable pump with two high pressure switching valves and a low pressure solvent selection valve (refs. 67, 68). Here, the same pump can be used to deliver eluent and to load the sample onto the concentrator column. Fig. 15 shows the interconnections used for these valves and Fig. 16 illustrates some of the flow-paths achievable with this system. Using a suitable configuration of the valves, the pump tubing and interconnecting lines can be flushed with sample solution or eluent with both the concentrator and analytical columns removed from the flow-path. In Fig. 16a a measured volume of sample is loaded onto the concentrator column at a precise flow-rate, after which a small, accurately known volume of eluent is pumped through the concentrator column in the same flow direction as that used for sample loading (Fig. 16b). This is termed a "wash" step and serves to partially re-equilibrate the concentrator column with eluent ions without loss of bound solute ions. Fig. 16c shows the sample stripping step in which the solute ions are backflushed from the concentrator column onto the analytical column using an accurately known volume of eluent. In the final step of the analysis, the concentrator column is removed from the flow-path and the eluent is pumped directly to the analytical column. Clearly, this multi-valve system is more complex than the single-valve approach and requires the use of a sophisticated pump. It does however offer the advantages of unlimited and precise control over the volumes of eluent used for the washing and stripping steps, and these may be readily manipulated to adapt to the requirements of a particular sample. In addition, the baseline produced in the final chromatogram is superior to that obtained with a single-valve preconcentration system.
65 1A
H
0 001 AU
LI I
0
1
I
8
L
12
16
Time ( m i n )
F i g . 13
Use o f l a r g e i n j e c t i o n volumes f o r anion a n a l y s i s . Column: Vydac 302 IC 4.6. Eluent: 2.5 mM potassium hydrogen p h t h a l a t e a t pH 4.0. I n j e c t i o n volume: 1 m l . Detection: UV a b s o r p t i o n a t 285 nm. S o l u t e concentrations: 50 - 200 ppb. Peak i d e n t i e s : A - s o l v e n t peak, B - dihydrogenphosphate, C - c h l o r i d e , D - n i t r i t e , E -bromide, F - n i t r a t e , G - i o d i d e , H - system peak.
w j i E ! i ) cJk3L-o nConcenlrator
Concenlrala
Column Detecio~
P"V"
Pump
Equilibrale
Column Delecior
Load Sample
A Sample
wa
Concentratof
Pump
Column
Backllush
F i g . 14
Concenlralor
Detector
Column Deleclor
Pump
Analysis
Sample p r e c o n c e n t r a t i o n u s i n g two pumps, a s i n g l e s w i t c h i n g v a l v e and a c o n c e n t r a t o r column.
high-pressure
66
--
‘SAMPLE TO DETECTOR
Fig. 15 Apparatus for sample preconcentration using a single pump, a low pressure solvent selection valve ( A ) , two high-pressure switching valves (B and C) and a concentrator column ( D ) . E is the analytical column.
I
F i g . 16
WASTE
I
67
WASTE
I
B
C
I I
i
PUMP
(c)
TO DETECTOR
Fig. 16 Important flow-paths in the preconcentration o f a sample using the apparatus shown in Fig. 15. (a) sample loading, (b) concentrator column washing, (c) sample stripping. Reproduced with permission from ref. 68.
68 5.3.2 CHOICE OF ELUENT
The most important realisation in selection of an appropriate eluent for a preconcentration method is that eluents which are perfectly suitable for direct injection ion chromatography may be quite inappropriate for use with preconcentration techniques. In the latter case, the eluent must perform three distinct functions: it must permit solute ions to bind onto the concentrator column during the sample loading step, it must transfer quantitatively these solute ions from the concentrator column to the analytical column during the stripping step, and it must provide adequate resolution of the sample components on the analytical column. Clearly these multiple requirements will limit the number of eluents which are suitable for preconcentration methods. The following desirable eluent characteristics may be enumerated for preconcentration using conductivity detection: (1) Selectivity. The solute ions should elute within a range of capacity factors of 4-30. The lower limit is chosen to minimise interference of early eluting solutes from the relatively large solvent peak which invariably results in preconcentration chromatograms, whilst the upper limit ensures that excessive retention does not preclude re1 i able quanti tation. (2) Sensitivitv. Since the purpose of sample preconcentration is to improve the sensitivity of an ion chromatographic method, the eluent should be chosen to maximise the detectability of the solute ions. For this reason, an eluent anion with low limiting equivalent ionic conductance is prefered. In addition it is desirable that the eluent anion be singly charged in order to provide the greatest detector response to the elution o f univalent solute anions. (3) Eluent DH. Apart from the above considerations, the pH of the eluent exerts two additional important effects on the final chromatogram. In the first place, the presence of neutral, protonated forms of the eluent can result in the appearance of system peaks due to elution of these neutral components under a reversed-phase mechanism. Secondly, bicarbonate ion is present in the majority of samples due to absorption o f carbon dioxide from the atmosphere and if quantitation of this species is not required, the resultant large peak can represent a major interference to early eluting solutes. Both of these problems can be circumvented through the use of a fully ionised eluent operated at pH <6. Under these conditions, bicarbonate becomes fully protonated and elutes from the column with the solvent front.
69 A l a r g e number o f aromatic c a r b o x y l i c and sulphonic a c i d s has been evaluated f o r use as e l u e n t s i n p r e c o n c e n t r a t i o n methods ( r e f . 69).
Aromatic
monosulphonic
acids
such
as
p-toluenesulphonic
acid
and
2-naphthylamine-1-sulphonic a c i d have proved t o be t h e most s u i t a b l e f o r
use w i t h c o n d u c t i v i t y d e t e c t i o n , methyl-,
heptyl- o r octyl-side
w h i l s t a l i p h a t i c sulphonic acids w i t h chains a r e a p p l i c a b l e when d i r e c t UV
absorption d e t e c t i o n i s employed. I n a d d i t i o n t h e l o n g e r c h a i n a l i p h a t i c sulphonic acids can a l s o be used w i t h c o n d u c t i v i t y d e t e c t i o n , p r o v i d e d that t h e i r surfactant properties are not intrusive.
5.3.3
CONCENTRATOR COLUMN CHARACTERISTICS
I t i s c l e a r t h a t sample p r e c o n c e n t r a t i o n i s n o t an open-ended technique and t h a t p r a c t i c a l l i m i t a t i o n s must e x i s t on t h e amount o f
sample which can be loaded and recovered q u a n t i t a t i v e l y . I t i s d e s i r a b l e t h a t l a r g e sample volumes can be accommodated and t h a t t h e sample be loaded a t a h i g h f l o w - r a t e i n o r d e r t o minimise t h e t i m e r e q u i r e d f o r t h e analysis.
Studies w i t h f i x e d - s i t e
anion exchange c o n c e n t r a t o r columns
( r e f . 70) have shown t h a t t h e maximum p e r m i s s i b l e f l o w - r a t e s and sample volumes
are
dependent
on
the
nature
of
the
ion-exchange a f f i n i t y o f t h e e l u e n t increases, retained solutes
eluent
used.
As
the
then b i n d i n g o f weakly
onto t h e c o n c e n t r a t o r column reduces markedly w i t h
l a r g e r sample volumes. However i f t h e e l u e n t conforms t o t h e requirements l i s t e d above,
sample volumes
as h i g h as
100 m l may be loaded a t a
f l o w - r a t e o f 8 ml/min w i t h q u a n t i t a t i v e b i n d i n g o f s o l u t e i o n s b e i n g maintained. I t might appear a t f i r s t s i g h t t h a t t h e ion-exchange c a p a c i t y o f t h e
c o n c e n t r a t o r column should be as h i g h as p o s s i b l e i n o r d e r t o p r o v i d e ample ion-exchange s i t e s f o r t h e b i n d i n g of s o l u t e ions. C e r t a i n l y t h i s s i t u a t i o n does encourage q u a n t i t a t i v e b i n d i n g , b u t as t h e ion-exchange c a p a c i t y o f t h e c o n c e n t r a t o r column increases, i t becomes more d i f f i c u l t t o t r a n s f e r t h e bound i o n s o n t o t h e a n a l y t i c a l volume o f e l u e n t .
column u s i n g a small
Attempts t o use a h i g h e l u e n t s t r e n g t h f o r sample
s t r i p p i n g and a lower s t r e n g t h f o r sample e l u t i o n have n o t
proved
68), thus t h e same e l u e n t should be used f o r b o t h case, t h e optimal ion-exchange c a p a c i t y o f t h e c o n c e n t r a t o r column i s approximately 40% o f t h a t o f t h e a n a l y t i c a l column ( r e f . 71). I n c r e a s i n g t h e ion-exchange c a p a c i t y o f t h e c o n c e n t r a t o r column beyond t h i s value leads t o t h e requirement f o r l a r g e r s t r i p successful
purposes.
(ref.
In this
volumes, causing i n t e r f e r e n c e broadening e f f e c t s
.
with
early
eluting
solutes
and
band
70
The n a t u r e of
t h e r e s i n used t o support t h e bonded ion-exchange
f u n c t i o n a l i t i e s can a l s o e x e r t a c o n s i d e r a b l e e f f e c t on t h e preconcent r a t i o n . Studies have shown ( r e f . 71) t h a t c o n c e n t r a t o r columns packed w i t h aminated methacrylate and aminated s t y r e n e - d i v i n y l benzene r e s i n s of s i m i l a r ion-exchange breakthrough
in
c a p a c i t y gave markedly d i f f e r e n t performance
experiments
using
a
mixture
of
chloride,
nitrate
and
sulphate. Both c h l o r i d e and n i t r a t e showed very poor r e t e n t i o n on t h e styrene-divinylbenzene methacryl a t e r e s i n .
r e s i n i n comparison t o t h a t obtained u s i n g t h e
F i n a l l y , i t i s p e r t i n e n t t o comment on t h e p o s s i b i l i t y o f r e p l a c i n g t h e f i x e d - s i t e ion-exchanger i n t h e c o n c e n t r a t o r column w i t h a n e u t r a l I reversed-phase m a t e r i a l which has been coated w i t h a v e r y hydrophobic i o n - i n t e r a c t i o n reagent.
I n t h e case o f
anion p r e c o n c e n t r a t i o n ,
this
i o n - i n t e r a c t i o n reagent c o u l d be c e t y l p y r i d i n i u m i o n o r c e t y l t r i m e t h y l ammonium
ion.
Provided
that
the
ion-interaction
reagent
remains
permanently bound t o t h e s t a t i o n a r y phase s u r f a c e d u r i n g sample l o a d i n g , then an ion-exchange column can be produced. The main a t t r a c t i o n s o f t h i s approach a r e t h a t t h e n a t u r e o f t h e f u n c t i o n a l group may be v a r i e d by r e c o a t i n g t h e s t a t i o n a r y phase w i t h an a l t e r n a t i v e i o n - i n t e r a c t i o n reagent, and t h e ion-exchange c a p a c i t y o f t h e c o n c e n t r a t o r column can be e a s i l y manipulated by a l t e r i n g t h e c o n d i t i o n s under which t h e concentrator column i s coated.
I t has been shown ( r e f . 72) t h a t concen-
t r a t o r columns prepared i n t h i s way do n o t show t h e degree o f b i n d i n g o f s o l u t e ions expected from c o n s i d e r a t i o n o f t h e i r ion-exchange c a p a c i t i e s alone. A comparison o f a f i x e d - s i t e c o n c e n t r a t o r column w i t h one prepared by t h e permanent c o a t i n g method showed t h a t e q u i v a l e n t s o l u t e i o n s was obtained o n l y when t h e ion-exchange
retention o f
capacity o f the
l a t t e r column was a f a c t o r o f f i f t e e n times h i g h e r t h a n t h a t o f t h e former column. 5.3.4
APPLICATION TO SAMPLES OF LOW I O N I C STRENGTH
Most o f t h e samples used f o r p r e c o n c e n t r a t i o n methods c o n s i s t o f very d i l u t e aqueous s o l u t i o n s . Examples i n c l u d e r a i n water, p u r i f i e d water and b o i l e r feed water f o r power s t a t i o n generators. I n each case t h e sample contains p a r t s - p e r - b i l l i o n
l e v e l s o f i o n i c species and i s r e l a t i v e l y f r e e
from organic i m p u r i t i e s . Despite t h e low l e v e l s o f i o n s present, accurate a n a l y s i s may be e s s e n t i a l i n o r d e r t o prevent damage t o expensive p l a n t such as steam t u r b i n e s . For such samples I a f i x e d - s i t e ion-exchange c o n c e n t r a t o r column used w i t h a s i n g l y charged aromatic sulphonic a c i d e l u e n t a t pH 6 p r o v i d e s optimal r e s u l t s , e x p e c i a l l y when coupled w i t h c o n d u c t i v i t y d e t e c t i o n . A
71 typical chromatogram obtained for the preconcentration of a standard mixture of anions is shown in Fig. 17, which illustrates the excellent separation obtained with this eluent. When applied to the analysis of deionised water containing low ppb levels of ions (Fig. 18), peaks were evident for chloride, nitrate and sulphate. it is noteworthy that the peak widths are similar for Figs. 17 and 18, despite the wide disparity in sample volumes used. An alternative eluent, 2-naphthylamine-lsulphonic acid, has been applied in Fig. 19 t o the determination o f anions in water purified by reverse osmosis. The analysis of samples of the above type is relatively straightforward and provided that the correct eluent is chosen, the condition of the concentrator column is periodically monitored, and the performance of the system is routinely assessed using recovery experiments, then a high level of confidence can be assigned to the results.
r
O
1
1
G
I
8
12
16
20
24
Time (min.)
Fig. 17 Preconcentratim o f a trace solution of anions. Waters IC PAK A analytical column and anion concerttrator. Eluent: 3 . 5 mM toluenesulphonic acid at pH 6.0. Wash volume: 100 p1 . Strip volume: 500 pl . Sample: 10 ml of a solution contaicing 100 ppb of each of the indicated anions, except acetate (Ac ) which was present at 503 ppb. Detection: conductivity. Reproduced with permission from ref. 73.
72
CI-
I
0
1
1
1
1
1
8
1
1
1
1
12 16 Time (min.)
1
1
20
1
1
21
Fig. 18 Preconcentration o f anions i n d e i o n i s e d water. Sample volume: 100 ml. S o l u t e c o n c e n t r a t i o n s : 4 ppb c h l o r i d e , 0.5 ppb n i t r a t e and 3 ppb sulphate. Other c o n d i t i o n s as f o r F i g . 17. Reproduced w i t h permission from r e f . 73. CI’
F i g . 19 Preconcentration o f anions i n water p u r i f i e d by reverse-osmosis. Eluent: 0.4 mM 2-naphthylamine-1-sulphonic a c i d a t pH 6.0. Sample volume: 6 ml. S o l u t e c o n c e n t r a t i o n s : 5 ppb f l u o r i d e , 20 ppb c h l o r i d e and 3 ppb n i t r a t e . Other c o n d i t i o n s as f o r F i g . 17. Reproduced w i t h permission from r e f . 73.
73 5 .3 .5
APPLICATION TO SAMPLES OF H I G H IONIC STRENGTH
It i s a challenging prospect t o attempt preconcentration analysis o f
t r a c e components
i n samples which c o n t a i n h i g h l e v e l s o f o t h e r i o n i c
species. I n such cases i t i s l i k e l y t h a t b i n d i n g o f t h e t r a c e components t o t h e c o n c e n t r a t o r column w i 11 be a d v e r s e l y a f f e c t e d by m a s s - a c t i o n influences o f t h e bulk constituents.
Indeed, s u c c e s s f u l p r e c o n c e n t r a t i o n
can be a n t i c i p a t e d o n l y a f t e r sample cleanup o r when t h e i o n s o f i n t e r e s t have a much h i g h e r a f f i n i t y f o r t h e ion-exchange r e s i n t h a n do t h e m a t r i x components. An example o f t h e l a t t e r case i s t h e d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f phosphate, s u l p h a t e and o x a l a t e vegetation ( r e f .
in a
leaf
litter
extract
taken
from
coastal
7 3 ) . P r e l i m i n a r y a n a l y s i s o f t h e e x t r a c t showed h i g h
l e v e l s o f c h l o r i d e and n i t r a t e . Two s t r a t e g i e s were t h e r e f o r e employed t o s u c c e s s f u l l y a n a l y s e t h i s sample. F i r s t , a h i g h e l u e n t pH was s e l e c t e d i n o r d e r t o c o n v e r t t h e phosphate t o HP04’-and
so i n c r e a s e i t s a f f i n i t y f o r
t h e ion-exchange r e s i n i n t h e c o n c e n t r a t o r column. Second, a s t y r e n e - d i vinylbenzene based ion-exchange m a t e r i a l was used i n t h e c o n c e n t r a t o r column because t h i s r e s i n has been shown t o have p o o r a f f i n i t y
for
c h l o r i d e and n i t r a t e . The f i n a l chromatogram o b t a i n e d u s i n g g l u c o n a t e b o r a t e b u f f e r a t pH 8.5 as e l u e n t w i t h a c o n c e n t r a t o r column packed w i t h aminated polystyrene-divinylbenzene r e s i n i s shown i n F i g . 20. I n many cases i t i s b e n e f i c i a l t o c o u p l e s e l e c t i v e d e t e c t i o n w i t h sample p r e c o n c e n t r a t i o n t o a c h i e v e t h e d e s i r e d s e n s i t i v i t y . An example o f t h i s approach i s t h e d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f a n i o n s u s i n g d i r e c t UV a b s o r p t i o n d e t e c t i o n i n t h e wavelength range 200-220 nm. Only a r e l a t i v e l y sma number o f anions show absorbance under t h e s e c o n d i t i o n s and i f a s u i t a b UV-transparent e l u e n t i s chosen, t n e n s e l e c t i v e a n a l y s i s i s p o s s i b l e .
5 .3 .6
CONCLUSIONS
Sample p r e c o n c e n t r a t i o n
i s a complex procedilre and s h o u l d n o t
c o n s i d e r e d t o be a s i m p l e e x t e n s i o n o f d i r e c t i n j e c t i o n i o n chromatography. Care must be a p p l i e d t o t h e s e l e c t i o n o f t h e e l u e n t and t h e c o n c e n t r a t o r column t o ensure q u a n t i t a t i v e r e t e n t i o n on t h e c o n c e n t r a t o r column o f t h e s o l u t e i o n s of i n t e r e s t , and t h e i r subsequent q u a n t i t a t i v e t r a n s f e r o n t o t h e a n a l y t i c a l column. The a b i l i t y t o o p t i m i s e t h e wash and s t r i p volumes o f e l u e n t f o r i n d i v i d u a l samples p r o v i d e s a h i g h l e v e l o f f l e x i b i l i t y i n a t t a i n i n g these g o a l s .
The t e c h n i q u e can be a p p l i e d t o
v e r y d i l u t e aqueous samples o f low i o n i c s t r e n g t h and t o more complex samples c o n t a i n i n g h i g h l e v e l s o f i n t e r f e r i n g i o n i c s p e c i e s .
74 5.4
USE OF DIALYTIC PRECONCENTRATION METHODS
Trace enrichment using c o n c e n t r a t o r columns s u f f e r s from t h e d i s advantage o f being m a t r i x dependent. I t i s t h e r e f o r e o f i n t e r e s t t o n o t e t h a t preconcentration can a l s o be performed by Oonnan d i a l y s i s ; moreover, t h i s approach r e s u l t s i n t h e sample i o n s b e i n g t r a n s f e r r e d t o a s o l u t i o n o f known composition,
regardless of
t h e n a t u r e o f t h e sample m a t r i x
i t s e l f . That i s , m a t r i x n o r m a l i s a t i o n occurs. The p r i n c i p l e s o f Donnan d i a l y s i s wherein s o l u t e ions a r e t r a n s f e r r e d from t h e sample t o a r e c e i v i n g e l e c t r o l y t e s o l u t i o n v i a an ion-exchange membrane have been discussed i n s e c t i o n 3.3.2.
When a p p l i e d t o preconcen-
t r a t i o n , a l l t h a t needs t o be done i s t o ensure t h a t t h e volume of t h e r e c e i v e r s o l u t i o n i s considerably l e s s than t h a t o f t h e sample. T r a n s f e r o f t h e s o l u t e i o n s i s never q u a n t i t a t i v e ,
so t h e enrichment f a c t o r s
achieved a r e somewhat l e s s than t h e volume r a t i o e x i s t i n g between t h e sample and r e c e i v e r s o l u t i o n s . The volume o f t h e r e c e i v e r s o l u t i o n should t h e r e f o r e be kept as low as p o s s i b l e and t y p i c a l apparatus ( r e f s . 74, 75) c o n s i s t s of a membrane-covered t u b e i n s e r t e d i n t o t h e s t i r r e d sample (as shown schematically i n Fig. 21).
Fig. 20
I
I
1
1
0
4
8
12
I
16 l i m e Imin.)
Z'O
$4
z'8
Preconcentration o f an aqueous e x t r a c t o f c o a s t a l v e g e t a t i o n l e a f l i t t e r . Concentrator column packed w i t h aminated styrenedivinylbenzene r e s i n . E l u e n t : 1.0 mM t e t r a b o r a t e , 4.2 mM b o r i c a c i d and 1.0 mM g l u c o n i c a c i d . Wash volume: 200 PI Strip volume: 650 pl , Solute concentrations: 50 p p i phosphate, 150 ppb sulphate and 200 ppb o x a l a t e . A n a l y t i c a l column and d e t e c t i o n as f o r F i g . 17. Reproduced w i t h permission from ref. 73.
.
75
Receiver
0
solution
Sample solution Ion-exchange membrane
Fig. 21 Schematic r e p r e s e n t a t i o n o f apparatus f o r Donnan d i a l y s i s concentration.
pre-
W h i l s t sample p r e c o n c e n t r a t i o n i s r e l a t i v e l y s t r a i g h t f o r w a r d t o accomplish, some important steps must be taken b e f o r e t h e r e c e i v e r s o l u t i o n can be i n j e c t e d onto an i o n chromatograph. The reason f o r t h i s i s the high i o n i c strength o f the receiver, e f f e c t i v e Donnan d i a l y s i s t o occur.
which i s e s s e n t i a l
for
I n t h e case of c a t i o n s , t h e o p t i m a l
r e c e i v e r s o l u t i o n c o n s i s t s o f 0.1 M A12(S04)3 adjusted t o pH 0.5 w i t h s u l p h u r i c a c i d ( r e f . 74). When i n j e c t e d i n t o an e l u e n t comprising 0.01 M t a r t r a t e b u f f e r a t pH 5 , t h e b u f f e r c a p a c i t y o f t h e e l u e n t g r e a t l y reduces t h e hydrogen i o n c o n c e n t r a t i o n and t h e aluminium(II1)
forms a
strong, a n i o n i c complex w i t h t a r t r a t e and so i s e f f e c t i v e l y e l i m i n a t e d from i n t e r a c t i n g w i t h t h e cation-exchange column. Anions may b e d i a l y s e d i n t o a r e c e i v e r s o l u t i o n comprised o f 0.04 M Na2C03 and 0.16 M NaHC03 ( r e f . 75) and a f t e r d i a l y s i s , t h e r e c e i v e r s o l d t i o n i s s u b j e c t e d t o dual ion-exchange treatment (see s e c t i o n 3.3.2)
w i t h a cation-exchange r e s i n
i n t h e hydrogen form. This process c o n v e r t s t h e r e c e i v e r components t o water and carbon d i o x i d e , which i s removed by a p p l i c a t i o n o f a vacuum. The f i n a l s o l u t i o n t h e r e f o r e c o n s i s t e d o f t h e s o l u t e anions i n water. The enrichment
factors
achieved
i n the
above
examples
were
ap-
proximately 80 f o r c a t i o n s a f t e r 1 hour o f d i a l y s i s , and approximately 15 for anions a f t e r 30 min o f d i a l y s i s . Donnan d i a l y s i s t h e r e f o r e o f f e r s u s e f u l preconcentration b u t i s c l e a r l y very l i m i t e d i a i t s a p p l i c a t i o n because of c o n s t r a i n t s on t h e n a t u r e o f t h e r e c e i v e r s o l u t i o n and t h e e l u e n t t o be used f o r t h e f i n a l i o n chromatographic a n a l y s i s .
76 6.
M A T R I X ELIMINATION METHODS
6.1
INTRODUCTION To conclude t h i s c h a p t e r , t h e t e c h n i q u e o f m a t r i x e l i m i n a t i o n w i l l b e
b r i e f l y discussed. M a t r i x e l i m i n a t i o n can be d e f i n e d as any i n s t r u m e n t a l method whereby m a t r i x components a r e removed f r o m t h e sample.
It i s
t h e r e f o r e q u i t e d i s i i n c t f r o m t h e removal o f m a t r i x components u s i n g such sample t r e a t m e n t procedures as t h e use o f c a r t r i d g e columns. M a t r i x u s u a l l y w i t h t h e a i d of s w i t c h i n g
e l i m i n a t i o n can be a p p l i e d on-column,
v a l v e s , o r post-column, and has t h e c h i e f advantage t h a t i t can be e a s i l y automated. These approaches a r e d e s c r i b e d below. ON-COLUMN M A T R I X ELIMINATION
6.2
One s i m p l e way of e ' i m i n a t i n g t h e d e t e c t o r s i g n a l produced b y i n t e r f e r i n g m a t r i x compor.ents i s t o d i v e r t t h e column e f f l u e n t t o waste d u r i n g e l u t i o n of t h e s e m a t r i x com?onents. T h i s approach has been d e s c r i b e d f o r t h e d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f ppm l e v e l s of chloride (ref.
761, Here,
s u l p h a t e i n t h e presence o f 0.05%
t h e sample was i n j e c t e d o n t o an a n a l y t i c a l
column anti a s i x - p o r t v a l v e was used t o d i r e c t t h e column e f f l u e n t e i t h e r t o waste o r t o a second a n a l y t i c a l column. The e l u e n t f r a c t i o n c o r r e s ponding
LO
c h l o r i o e was vented t o waste, w h i l s t t h a t c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o
s u l p h a t e was passed t o t h e second column and t h e n c e t o t h e d e t e c t o r . M a t r i x e l i m i n a t i o n can be combined w i t h s a n p l e p r e c o n c e n t r a t i o n u s i n g a c o n c e n t r a t o r column, p r o v i d e d t h e m a t r i x components do n o t i n t e r f e r e w i t h t h e c o n c e n t r a t i o n process. The method i s t h e r e f o r e e s p e c i a l l y s u i t e d t o samgles in which t h e a n a i y t e s show v e r y s t r o n g r e t e n t i o n on t h e concent r a t o r coiumn. P.n example o f such an a p p l i c a t i o n i s t h e d e t e r m i n a t i o n of aurocyanide i n t a i l i n g s s o l u t i o n s produced f r o m a c y a n i d a t i o n process f o r t h e e x t r a c t i o n o f g o l d from i t s o r e s . These t a i l i n g s s o l u t i o n s c o n t a i n v e r y low l e v e l s o f z u r o r y a n i d e (10-20 ppb) i n t h e presenc? o f much h i g h e r l e v e l s o f o t h e r metal cyano complexes,
and r e q u i r e sample preconcenliable a n a l y s i s . P r e c o n c e n t r a t i o n of t h e t a i l i n g s s o l u t i o n on a C18 c o n c e n t r a t o r column c o n d i t i o n e d w i t h tetrabutylammonium i o n as t h e i o n - i n t e r a c t i o n reagent y i e l d s q u a n t i t a t i v e b i n d i r i g o f g o l d f o r sample vo1dmc.s l e s s than 2 m l ( r e f . 7 7 ) . T h i s occurs becduse o f t h e v e r y s t r o n g a f f i n i t y of aiirocyanide f o r t h e ion-exchange s i t e s on t h e column t r a t i o n fs:.
(ref.
78j, h o i w e r stile,- metal c y a n i d e s a r e a l s o r e t a i n e c t o some e x t e n t
and producs severe i n t e : * f e r e n c e i n t h e f i n a l chromatcgran: ( F i g . 22a). M a t r i x e l i m i n a t i o n on t h e c o n c e n t r a t o r
column
CE,I
be achieved u s i n g
s i m i l a ? apparatus t r J t h a t shcwn i n F i g . 15, b u t adapced t o p e r m i t t h e use o f two e i u e n t s . By c a r e f u l c o n t r o l o f t h e s t r e n g t h o f t h e e l u e n t and t h e volume de:ivet-ed
t h e c o n c e n t r a t o r column, i t i s possib;e t o l a r g e l y
77 e l i m i n a t e t h e i n t e r f e r e n c e s w i t h o u t loss o f aurocyanide ( F i g . 22b). process can be r e a d i l y a p p l i e d t o a v a r i e t y o f o t h e r sample t ypes.
This
0
.;Fi g. 22
M a t r i x e l i m i n a t i o n i n t h e a n a l y s i s of g o l d ( 1 ) cyanide i n mine process l i q u o r s . Chromatogram(a) shows t h e i n t e r f e r e n c e o f 5 ppm o f bexacyanocobalt ( I I I ) on t h e p r e c o n c e n t r a t i o n d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f 2 m l o f 50 ppb g o l d ( 1 ) cyanide. Chromatogram (b) shows a process l i q u o r c o n t a i n i n g 25 ppb g o l d and l a r g e excesses o f o t h e r metal cyano complexes p r e c o n cent rat ed u s i n g t h e two v a l v e system shown i n F i g . 15. S e p a r a t o r column: Waters Nova Pak C18. C onc ent r a t o r column: Waters C18 Guard Pak. E l u e n t : 30:70 ( v / v ) a c e t o n i t r i l e - w a t e r c o n t a i n i n g 5 mM Waters Low UV PIC A . Wash volume: 800 pl S t r i p volume: 1600 pl D e t e c t i o n : UV abs o r p t i o n a t 214 nm. Reproduced w i t h p e r m i s s i o n f rom r e f . 77.
.
.
6.3.
POST-COLUMN M A T R I X ELIMINATION
I n some cases, i t i s p o s s i b l e t o e l i m i n a t e a rr.atrix peak a f t e r i t has e l u t e d from t h e a n a l y t i c a l column. For example, Brown e t a l . ( r e f . 79) have observed t h a t t h e i n t e r f e r e n c e o f doparnine on t h e d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f anions i n a pharmaceutical p r o d u c t u s i n g a p h t h a l a t e e l u e n t and i n d i r e c t UV
absorption
detection
could
be e l i m i n a t e d
by passing
the
column
e f f l u e n t through a h o l l o w - f i b r e suppressor device. Under t h e c o n d i t i o n s used, t h e dopamine became p r o t o n a t e d and d i f f u s e d t hrough t h e c a t i o n exchange membrane c o m p r i s i n g t h e h o l l o w f i b r e suppressor, and no i n t e r f e r i n g peak was m o n i t o r e d by t h e UV d e t e c t o r . When t h e i n t e r f e r i n g m a t r i x component i s UV absorbing and t h e i n d i r e c t UV a b s o r p t i o n d e t e c t i o n mode i s employed, i t may be p o s s i b l e t o e l i m i n a t e t h e m a t r i x peak by a j u d i c i o u s c h o i c e o f d e t e c t i o n wavelength. The
78 d e t e c t o r response i s given by r e f . 3. A
=
( € s -€E).
..........(8)
CS.1
where A s t h e absorbance change monitored by t h e d e t e c t o r d u r i n g passage o f t h e sample, and a r e t h e molar a b s o r p t i v i t i e s o f t h e s o l u t e and e l u e n t ions, r e s p e c t i v e l y , Cs i s t h e molar c o n c e n t r a t i o n of t h e s o l u t e and 1 i s t h e path l e n g t h o f t h e d e t e c t o r f l o w c e l l . I f a
4
9
d e t e c t i o n wavelength i s s e l e c t e d such t h a t : E s =
......... . ( 9 )
€ E
then no peak should be observed f o r t h a t p a r t i c u l a r s o l u t e . For example, t h e peak f o r n i t r a t e i o n i n samples prepared by n i t r i c a c i d d i g e s t i o n can be e l i m i n a t e d u s i n g a benzenesulphonate e l u e n t and a d e t e c t i o n wavelength of 239 mn ( r e f . 80). F i g . 23 shows t h e chromatograms o b t a i n e d f o r a m i x t u r e o f anions a t 239 nm and 225 nm. Note t h a t t h e d e t e c t i o n s e n s i t i v i t i e s f o r c h l o r i d e and n i t r i t e change w i t h wavelength and t h a t t h e peak d i r e c t i o n f o r n i t r i t e reverses a t 239 nm because o f a change i n s i g n f o r eqn. 8 a t t h i s wavelength.
I A
B
L
Time
Fig. 23
_ic
E l i m i n a t i o n o f t h e peak o f an absorbing anion ( n i t r a t e ) . Column: TSK-GEL I C Anion PW. E l u e n t : 1 mM benzenesulphonate. Detection: UV absorption a t 225 nm (a0 and 239 nm (b). Peak i d e n t i t i e s : ( l ) c h l o r i d e , (2) n i t r i t e , (3) n i t r a t e . The arrow i n (b) shows t h e e l u t i o n p o s i t i o n o f n i t r a t e . Reproduced w i t h permission from r e f . 80.
79
7.
CONCLUSION Sample hand1 i n g i n i o n chromatography i n c o r p o r a t e s many o f t h e same
p r i n c i p l e s gov ern i n g c o n v e n t i o n a l HPLC methods. Nevert heless, some u n i q u e procedures a pply t o i o n chromatography i n terms o f t h e sample d i s s o l u t i o n methods employed, use o f c a r t r i d g e columns f o r sample cleanup, cont am i n a t i o n e f f e c t s from cleanup d e v i c e s and f r o m chromatographic hardware, and sample p r e c o n c e n t r a t i o n u s i n g ion-exchange c o n c e n t r a t o r columns o r d i a l y t i c methods. Coupling o f t h e s e sample h a n d l i n g methods w i t h t h e powerf u l s e p a r a t i o n a b i l i t y o f i o n chromatography
should ensure t h a t t h e
tec hnique can be a p p l i e d t o a v e r y wide range o f sample t ypes. 8.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS The a u t h o r wishes t o thank O r .
A l l a n Heckenberg o f t h e M i l l i p o r e
C o r p o r a t i o n and O r . A r t F i t c h e t t o f t h e Dionex C o r p o r a t i o n f o r t h e p r o v i s i o n o f unpublis h e d documents r e l a t i n g t o sample h a n d l i n g . REFERENCES
1. 2. 3. 4.
5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21.
D.T. G je rd e and J.S. F r i t z , I o n Chromatography, Huet hig, He idelberg , 1987. J.G. T a r t e r (Ed.), I o n Chromatography, Dekker, New York, 1987. P.R. Haddad and P. J a n d i k , i n J.G. T a r t e r (Ed.) I o n chromatography, Dekker, New York, 1987, Ch. 4, p. 87. P.E. Jackson, P.R. Haddad and S. D i l l i , J. Chromatogr., 295 (1984)
471. W.S. K i m , C.L. Geraci Jr., and R.E. Kupel, Am. Ind. Hyg. Assoc., J., 41 (1980) 334-339. P. B u t t i n i , V. D i P a l o and M. P o s s a n z i n i, Sci. Tot. Envir. , 61 (1987) 59-72. 0. Grosjean and J.D. Nies, Anal. L e t t . , 17(A2) (1984) 89-96. P.F. R e i g l e r , N.J. Smith and V.T. Tu r k e l son, Anal. Chem., 54 (1982) 84-87. H. S a i t o h , K. Oikawa, 1. Takano and K . Kamimura, J. Chromatogr., 281 (1983) 397-402. W.T. Kennedy, W.B. Hubbard and J.G. T a r t e r , Anal., L e t t . , 16(A15) ( 1983) 1133- 1148. J. Do lez al, P. Povondra and Z. Sulcek, Decompositon Techniques i n I n o r g a n i c A n a l y s i s , E l s e v i e r , New York 1968. T. Okada and 1. Kuwamoto, Anal. Chem., 55 (1983) 1001. S.A. Wilson and C.A. Gent, Anal. L e t t . , 15(A10) (1982) 851-864. S.A. Wilson and E.A. Gent, Anal. Chim. Acta, 148 (1983) 299-303. C. Mc Crory-Joy, Anal. Chim. Acta, 181 (1986) 277-282. L.M. Busman, R.P. D i c k and M.A. Ta b a t a b i, S o l i Sci. SOC. Am. J., 47 (1983) 1167-1170. H. S a i t o h and K. Oikawa, Bunseki Kagaku, 31 (1982) E375-E380. W.J. H u r s t , K.P. Snyder and R.A. M a r t i n Jr. , J. L i q . Chromatogr., 6 (1983) 2067-2077. K.L. Evans and C.B. Moore, Anal. Chem., 52 (1980) 1908-1912. K.L. Evans, J.G. T a r t e r and C.B. Moore, Anal. Chem., 53 (1981) 925-928. V. Abraham and J.M. de Man, J. Assoc. O f f . Anal. Chem., 64 (1987) 384-387.
80 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44.
45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. 61. 62. 63. 64.
J.R. Kreling, F. Block, G.T. Louthan and J. DeZwaan, Microchem. J., 34 (1986) 158-165. P. Viswanadham, 0. Smick, J. Pisney and 0. D i l w o r t h , Anal. Chem., 54 (1982) 2431-2433. S. Matsushita, Anal. Chim. Acta, 172 (1985) 249-255. H. Small and T. E. M i l l e r Jr., Anal. Chem., 54 (1982) 462. P.E. Jackson and P.R. Haddad, J. Chromatogr., 346 (1985) 125. F.R. Nordmeyer and L.D. Hansen, Anal. Chem., 54 (1982) 2605-2607. H.F. Hamil, USA Environmental P r o t e c t i o n Agency P r o j e c t Summary EPA/600/S2-85/08OI 1985. J.A. Cox and N. Tanaka, Anal. Chem., 57 (1985) 385-387. J.A. Cox and N. Tanaka, Anal. Chem. 57 (1985) 383-385. J.A. Cox and E. Dabek-Zlotorzynska, Anal. Chem., 59 (1987) 534-536. B. Kagedal, M. Kallberg, J. Martensson and B. Sorbo, J. Chromatogr. , 274 (1983)95-102. P.R. Haddad and M.Y. C r o f t , Chromatographia, 21 (1986) 648-650. N.M. Ferguson, S.E. Lindberg and J.D. Vargo, I n t . J. Environ. Anal. Chem., 11 (1982) 61-65. A.R. Wellburn, New. Phytol., 100 (1985) 329-339. J. Osterloh and 0. G o l d f i e l d , J . Liq. Chromatogr., 7 (1984) 753-763. 0.0. Siemer, Anal. Chem., 52 (1980) 1874-1877. R.A. H i l l , J. High Res. Chrom. & Chrom. Comm., 6 (1983) 275-277. L.K. Tan and J.E. Dutrizac, Anal. Chem., 57 (1985) 2615-2620. T. Kamiura, Y. Mori and M. Tanaka, Anal. Chim. Acta, 154 (1983) 319-322. Yu. A. Zolotov, G.I. Malofeeva, O.M. Petrukhin and A.R. Timerbaev, Pure & Appl. Chem., 59 (1987) 497-504. G. Marko-Varga, I . Csiky and J.A. Jonsson, Anal. Chem., 56 (1984) 2066-2069. R.A. Slingsby, Sample Pretreatment w i t h Dionex OnGuard Cartridges, Dionex Corporation I n t e r n a l Report, 1987. R.W. F r e i and J.F. Lawrence (Eds.), Chemical D e r i v a t i s a t i o n i n A n a l y t i c a l Chemistry, Vol. 1, Plenum, New York, 1981. W.G. Robertson and D.S. Scurr, C l i n . Chim. Acta, 140 (1984) 97 99. P.R. Haddad and A.L.Heckenberg, unpublished r e s u l t s . T. Okada and T. Kuwamoto, Anal. Chem., 57 (1985) 258-262. D.L. DuVal, J.S. F r i t z and D.T. Gjerde, Anal. Chem., 54 (1982) 830-832. G.J. Sevenich and J.S. F r i t z , Anal. Chem., 55 (1983) 12-16. P.R. Haddad, unpublished r e s u l t s . A.L. Heckenberg, M i l l i p o r e Corporation I n t e r n a l Report, 1987. D. Bunk, M i l l i p o r e Corporation I n t e r n a l Report, 1987. R. Bagchi and P.R. Haddad, J. Chromatogr., 351 (1986) 541-547. P.R. Haddad, unpublished r e s u l t s . R.A. Mowery, Jr., 3. Chromatogr. Sci., 23 (1985) 22. C.N. Trumbore, R.D. Trembley, J.T. Penrose, M. Mercer and F.M. Kelleher, J. Chromatogr., 280 (1983) 43. S.R. Hutchins, P.R. Haddad and S. D i l l i , J. Chromatogr., 252 (1982) 185. P.R. Haddad and R.C.L. Foley, J. Chromatogr., 407 (1987) 133. C. Erkelens, H.A.H. B i l l i e t , L. de Galan and E.W.B. de Leer, J. Chromatogr., 404 (1987) 67. D.R. Jenke and G.K. Pagenkopf, Anal. Chem., 55 (1983) 1168. A. S i r i r a k s , J.E. G i r a r d and P.E. B u e l l , Anal. Chem., i n press. D.R. Jenke, J. Chromatogr., 370 (1986) 419-426. A.E. Bucholz, C . I . Verplough and J.L. Smith, J. Chromatogr. Sci., 20 (1982)499. A.L. Heckenberg and P.R. Haddad, J. Chromatogr., 299 (1984) 301-305.
-
81 65. 66. 67. 68. 69. 70. 71. 72. 73. 74. 75. 76. 77. 78. 79.
T. Okada and T. Kuwamoto, J. Chromatogr., 350 (1985) 317-323. R.A. Wetzel, C.L. Anderson, H. S c h l e i c h e r and G.D. Crook, Anal. Chem., 51 (1979) 1532-1535. P.R. Haddad and A.L. Heckenberg, J . Chromatogr., 318 (1985) 279. A.L. Heckenberg and P.R. Haddad, J . Chromatogr., 330 (1985) 95. P.E. Jackson and P.R. Haddad, J. Chromatogr., 355 (1986) 87. P.R. Haddad and P . E . Jackson, J. Chromatogr., 367 (1986) 301. P.E. Jackson and P.R. Haddad, J . Chromatogr., 389 (1987) 65. P.R. Haddad and P.E. Jackson, J . Chromatogr., 407 (1987) 121. P.E. Jackson and P.R. Haddad, J. Chromatogr., submitted f o r publication. J.E. OiNunzio and M. Jubara, Anal. Chem., 55 (1983) 1013-1016. J.A. Cox and N. Tanaka, Anal. Chem., 57 (1985) 2370. P.J. Naish, Analyst (London), 109 (1984) 809-812. P.R. Haddad and N.E. Rochester, J . Chromatogr., submitted f o r pub1 i c a t i o n . D.F. H i l t o n ar;d P.R. Haddad, J. Chromatogr., 361 (1986) 141 150. D. Brown, R. Playton and D. Jenke, Anal. Chem., 57 (1985)
-
2264-2267. 80.
T. Okada and T . Kuwamoto, J . Chromatogr.,
325 (1985) 327.
CHAPTER 111
WHOLE BLOOD SAMPLE CLEAN-UP FOR CHROMATOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS U.
CHRISTIANS AND K.-FR. SEWING
Introduction Extraction procedures for blood samples Liquid-liquid extraction Solid-liquid extraction Col umn-switch i ng 3. Blood sample reparation and HPLC analysis o f SandimmunR (cyclosporine! 3.1 Introduction 3.2 Blood sample preparation for SandimmunR (cyclosporine) measurement 3.2.1 Liauid-1 iauid extraction orocedures 3.2.2 Solid-liquid extraction piocedures 3.2.3 Extraction and analysis by col umn-swiiching 3.3 Chromatographic analysis of Sandimmun (cyclosporine) and ts metabolites 4. Trouble shooting in development of blood sample clean-up p ocedures References
1. 2. 2.1 2.2 2.3
INTRODUCTION From all biological fluids, blood is of the greatest analytical interest, since it is the most important transport medium in the human body and blood levels of most therapeutic and diagnostic substances correlate with their function. This chapter is divided into two main parts: in the first part, general strategies for blood sample handling for various drugs are presented: in the second part, as an example measurement of cyclosporine and its metabolites is discussed in detail. Cyclosporine proved to be a good example since blood level measurement is of high clinical impact and the whole spectrum of sample preparation strategies has been applied for cyclosporine determination. 1.
Developing an adequate sample preparation method several factors must be considered: 1. the chemical properties of the constituents
in question.
2. the biological matrix.
The substance of interest must be extracted from its biological matrix prior to chromatographic analysis. Proteins and other macromolecules may interfere with detection and columns may get plugged or rapidly inactivated. A good extraction procedure should be reproducible with little
l o s s o f t h e m a t e r i a l o f a n a l y t i c a l i n t e r e s t . I t should b e r a p i d and a l l o w several samples t o be analyzed i n a s h o r t p e r i o d o f t i m e and i t should be inexpensive. Because o f b e t t e r h a n d l i n g t h e use o f plasma or serum as b i o l o g i c a l m a t r i x i s p r e f e r a b l e over blood. Plasma and serum i s produced by removing t h e c e l l u l a r components o f b l o o d by c e n t r i f u g a t i o n o r n a t u r a l c l o t t i n g . This s t e p must be regarded as a p r e - a n a l y s i s p u r i f i c a t i o n . However, t h e r e a r e some c o n d i t i o n s under which drugs r e q u i r e measurement i n blood r a t h e r than plasma o r serum: 1. The p a r t i t i o n between c o r p u s c u l a r components and plasma depends on
c o n d i t i o n s which cannot be e a s i l y c o n t r o l l e d and/or when t h e drug i s p r e f e r e n t i a l l y bound t o b l o o d c e l l s (e.g. 2. The sample volume i s small (e.g.
cyclosporine).
i n p e d i a t r i c s , experimental animals
o r i n v i t r o systems).
3. Blood samples a r e dehiscent and decomposed so plasma o r serum i s impossible (e.g.
t h a t t h e production o f
i n f o r e n s i c medicine).
4. The drug develops i t s e f f e c t s i n t h e b l o o d c e l l s (e.9.
chloroquine).
5 . Blood l e v e l s r e f l e c t t h e t h e r a p e u t i c and t o x i c e f f e c t s b e t t e r t h a n plasma o r serum l e v e l s (e.g. some drugs a c t i n g on t h e c e n t r a l nervous system) ( r e f . 1 ) . For development of
an e x t r a c t i o n procedure pK,,
p a r t i t i t i o n coef-
f i c i e n t s i n organic solvents and b i n d i n g t o blood components should be a v a i l a b l e . The d i s t r i b u t i o n i n t h e blood components i n f l u e n c e s t h e c h o i c e o f an adequate m a t r i x , Basic drugs o f t e n have a l a r g e volume of tribution
and a r e d e t e c t a b l e
i n blood only
in
low
dis-
concentrations,
e s p e c i a l l y when administered a t low doses (4 mg/kg body weight) ( r e f . 2 ) . Most a c i d i c and amphoteric drugs can be q u a n t i t a t i v e l y determined i n serum, plasma o r u r i n e . They u s u a l l y remain i n t h e i n t r a v a s a l compartment and have a h i g h a f f i n i t y t o plasma p r o t e i n s . Serum i s produced by n a t u r a l c l o t t i n g o f f i b r i n o g e n acquainted w i t h a removal o f hemo- and l i p o p r o t e i n s , which bears t h e r i s k o f l o o s i n g drugs i n t o t h e c l o t . On t h e o t h e r hand plasma, which must be a n t i c o a g u l a t e d , i s r i c h i n l i p i d s and l i p o p r o t e i n s ,
s i n c e these compounds cannot be
removed by c e n t r i f u g a t i o n . F r e s h l y drawn b l o o d w i t h i t s c o r p u s c u l a r components, l i p i d s , l i p o p r o t e i n s and p r o t e i n s r e q u i r e s a p u r i f i c a t i o n s t e p b e f o r e f u r t h e r e x t r a c t i o n , u s u a l l y hemolysis and p r o t e i n p r e c i p i t a t i o n .
84
The f o l l o w i n g steps o f t h e e x t r a c t i o n procedure a r e s i m i l a r t o those used f o r e x t r a c t i o n from plasma o r serum. To remove remaining m a t e r i a l i n t e r f e r i n g w i t h t h e a n a l y s i s u s u a l l y more extended p u r i f i c a t i o n steps a r e requ ired. The e x t e n t of sample p u r i t y r e q u i r e d depends on t h e a n a l y t i c a l system used and how much i m p u r i t i e s t h e d e t e c t i o n system t o l e r a t e s . For blood sample p r e p a r a t i o n v a r i o u s s t r a t e g i e s have been a p p l i e d : liquid-liquid
extraction
and
solid-liquid
extraction
including
column-switch techniques. I n most cases a n t i c o a g u l a n t s a r e added t o b l o o d samples.
Anticoagulants
a c i d - c i t r a t e dextrose
l i k e ethylenediamine t e t r a a c e t a t e (ACD)
c o n t a i n u l t r a v i o l e t - a b s o r b i ng
which can i n t e r f e r e w i t h t h e m a t e r i a l t o be detected
(EDTA)
and
impurities ,
(ref.
3).
The
a n t i c o a g u l a n t can a l s o i n f l u e n c e t h e accuracy o f t h e measurement ( r e f . 4), s i n c e w i t h EDTA a n t i c o a g u l a t e d b l o o d can be p i p e t t e d more r e p r o d u c i b l y than heparin a n t i c o a g u l a t e d b l o o d p a r t i c u l a r l y a f t e r storage f o r several days. The e f f e c t i v e n e s s o f t h e sample p r e p a r a t i o n procedure depends on t h e completeness o f p r o t e i n removal. Thus a s t e p o f hemolysis and p r o t e i n p r e c i p i t a t i o n i s e s s e n t i a l f o r a l l e x t r a c t i o n procedures from blood, plasma and serum. However, although i t i s almost mandatory t o remove a l l i n e r t proteins,
t h e components o f a n a l y t i c a l
i n t e r e s t should be recovered.
Hemolysis w i t h o u t p r o t e i n p r e c i p i t a t i o n i s achieved by
1. freezing (<-2O"C) 2. ultra-sound
and subsequent thawing o f t h e sample,
3. osmotic shock.
Other techniques 1 i k e mechanical membrane d i s r u p t u r e and enzymes a r e seldom i n blood a n a l y s i s . The f o l l o w i n g d e p r o t e i n a t i o n techniques a r e used ( r e f . 5 ) : 1. Change i n pH by adding a s t r o n g a c i d t o t h e sample (e.g.
.
tri-
c h l o r o a c e t i c a c i d , p e r c h l o r i c a c i d , h y d r o c h l o r i c acid) 2. Change i n t h e i o n i c s t r e n g t h by a d d i t i o n o f s a l t s (e.g. ammonium sulfate).
3. Change i n temperature by h e a t i n g t h e sample and d e n a t u r a t i n g t h e proteins. 4. Change i n t h e d i e l e c t r i c constant by a d d i t i o n o f o r g a n i c s o l v e n t s (e.9.
a c e t o n i t r i l e , methanol, e t h a n o l ) .
5. F i l t r a t i o n and u l t r a - f i l t r a t i o n .
a5 During o r a f t e r p r o t e i n p r e c i p i t a t i o n t h e pH r e q u i r e d f o r t h e ext r a c t i o n procedure has t o be adjusted. 2.
EXTRACTION PROCEDURES FOR BLOOD SAMPLES
2.1
LIQUID-LIQUID EXTRACTION
Blood sample p r e p a r a t i o n procedures u s i n g l i q u i d - l i q u i d e x t r a c t i o n can be d i v i d e d i n t o f o u r main steps: 1. hemolysis and p r o t e i n p r e c i p i t a t i o n ,
2. e x t r a c t i o n o f t h e components o f i n t e r e s t ,
3. p u r i f i c a t i o n and removal o f i n t e r f e r i n g m a t e r i a l s , 4. volume r e d u c t i o n and r e c o n s t i t u t i o n f o r chromatographic a n a l y s i s . Generally d e p r o t e i n a t i o n and hemolysis a r e associated w i t h pH adjustment f o r t h e f o l l o w i n g e x t r a c t i o n s t e p i n t o an o r g a n i c s o l v e n t . Thus t h e method chosen f o r d e p r o t e i n a t i o n depends on t h e pKa of
the
m a t e r i a l t o be analysed. A c i d i c drugs a r e e x t r a c t a b l e a t pH < 5.5
and
b a s i c drugs a t a pH > 5.5. I n blood one f r a c t i o n o f drugs i s bound t o plasma p r o t e i n s and t h e o t h e r blood components and t h e o t h e r f r a c t i o n i s free. By d e p r o t e i n a t i o n and e x t r a c t i o n t h e p r o t e i n bonds must be broken o r t h e recovery may be decreased. A decrease i n recovery can a l s o occur if t h e compounds o f i n t e r e s t a r e c o - p r e c i p i t a t e d o r p h y s i c a l l y entrapped i n the protein precipitate.
Basic drugs can be e x t r a c t e d from b l o o d
w i t h o u t p r i o r procedures by t h e use of a p p r o p r i a t e b u f f e r s o l u t i o n s w i t h a pH ranging from 6 t o 14. U s u a l l y t h e pH t o be chosen i s 3 u n i t s above t h e pKa because then more than 99% of t h e b a s i c drug i s i n i t s u n i o n i z e d form and can be e x t r a c t e d i n t o an o r g a n i c solvent.
Due t o t h e i r i o n i c
s t r e n g t h s these b u f f e r s o l u t i o n s cause p r o t e i n d e n a t u r a t i o n w i t h minimal
loss o f t h e drug (refs. a d j u s t i n g t h e pH < 5.5.
2,6,7). A c i d i c drugs can be e x t r a c t e d a f t e r The low pH causes p r o t e i n p r e c i p i t a t i o n w i t h t h e
r i s k o f c o - p r e c i p i t a t i n g t h e compounds of i n t e r e s t . For l i q u i d - l i q u i d p u r i f i c a t i o n o f blood samiles f o u r s t r a t e g i e s a r e used: 1. The drug i s converted i n t o i t s i o n i z e d form by changing t h e pH and can be e x t r a c t e d i n t o an aqueous phase. The o r g a n i c l a y e r i s removed and discarded. I n a second s t e p t h e l i p o p h i l i c , u n i o n i z e d form o f t h e drug i s r e - c o n s t i t u t e d by changing t h e pH i n t o t h e o p p o s i t e d i r e c t i o n and t h e drug can be back-extracted i n t o an organic s o l v e n t ( F i g . 2, s i d e columns)
.
86
2. The drug is dissolved in an aqueous/organic solvent, e.g. water/ acetonitrile, and the interfering compounds are removed by washing the sample with a lipophilic solvent, that is not miscible with the aqueous layer e.g. hexane. Compounds of interest dissolved in a lipophilic solvent can also be purified by washing with an aqueous solution (Fig. 1, middle column).
Liquid-liquid extraction can be combined with solid-liquid purification steps: 1. The extracted sample is spread on a TLC plate. After development the circle of silica adsorbing the compounds of interest is scraped off the plate and the silica gel is extracted (ref. 8). 2. Interfering materials are removed by adsorption on a solid phase or after liquid-liquid extraction the compounds of interest are adsorbed on a solid phase and thus separated from interfering materials.
Fig. 1 i s a schematic flow-diagram of steps used for liquid-liquid sample clean-up of basic and acidic drugs. The diagram demonstrates the way of blood sample preparation for GC and HPLC analysis. For reversed phase chromatography the aqueous back-extracts can be directly injected into the HPLC system The side columns of the diagram show purification steps by basic or acidic back-extraction, the middle column the removal of interfering materials with an organic solvent, inmiscible with the aqueous layer containing the compounds of interest, in which these materials are insoluble. Table 1 shows an overview of blood sample extraction strategies with subsequent chromatographic analysis. The extraction procedures 1 isted are used for sample preparation prior to chromatographic analysis (HPLC, GC, TLC). Usually the authors describe the extraction from several different kinds of biological matrices but only procedures and values for blood sample preparation and analysis are listed here. The procedures are divided into the four main steps as discussed above. In addition de Silva (refs. 9 and 10) describes schematically the extraction of various 1,4-benzodiazepines and Foerster et al. (ref. 11) the extraction of multiple acidic and neutral drugs from blood. Basic back-extraction describes the following procedure: the sample is acidified and the drugs are extracted into an aqueous phase. Then the pH is raised and the drugs are re-extracted into an organic solvent. If the solvents used for extraction and back-extraction are identical the solvent used for back-extraction is not mentioned.
a7
blood sample c o n t a i n i n g a c i d i c druas
blood sample c o n t a i n i n g
rn
I
protei n precipitation (pH < 5.5)
protein denaturation
I
extraction into’ organic solvent
e x t r a c t i o n i n t o organic s o l v e n t shake,
I centrifuge
I
shake, c e n t r i f u g e
I I
I
d i s c a r d aqueous 1ayer
d i s c a r d a ueous l a y e r
pH r a i s e d > 7 + organic s o l v e n t
+ orga’nic s o l v e n t
decrease pH < 5.5 + organic s o l v e n t
shake,
shake, c e n t r i f u g e
shake, c e t r i f u g e
I centrifuge I
9
I I
I I
d i s c a r d organic l a y e r
discard organic layer
discard organic layer
decrease pH < 5.5 + organic s o l v e n t
HPLC,‘ GLC
increase PH > 7 + organic s o l v e n t
I
I
I I
I
shake, c e r h r i f u g e
shake, 2ent r i f uge
I
I I
d i s c a r d a ueous l a y e r
d i s c a r d aqueos l a y e r evaporate o r g a n i c l a y e r -evaporate reconstitution
9
organic layer
I
HPLC. GLC Fig. 1
L i q u i d - l i q u i d clean-up procedures f o r blood sample a n a l y s i s .
rABLE I
m m
Liquid-liquid extraction of blood samples
Substance ( s ) Acebutolol
l-a acetyl-methadol Acetazol amide
Ant i pyrine Atenolol
pKa Ref. Deproteinization/ pH adjustment
Extraction
Purification/ Derivatization
%
rec. Analysis/ Detection
det. .g/l 10
distilled water, 2 N NaOH
ethylacetate
acidic backextraction
n.r. HPLC / UV (240 nm)
pH 9.2
n-butylchloride
basic back-extraction with CHCl,
>90 GC / MS
5
7.2 14 9.0
acetate buffer pH 5
CH C1 /diethylether methylation with /2zprGpanol (6/4/2) trimethylphenylammonium hydroxide
80- Gd3NiECD 90
25
15
filtration, ethanol
9095 HPLC / UV 9.9 (254nm)
6
9.4 12
13
9.6 16
0.1
N ammoniumhydroxide
CH2C12/n-pentane (50/50) n-butanol/cyclohexane (70/30)
basicbackextraction
55
GC/63NiECD
Bacmecillinam
6.8 17
CH3C1 /hexane (1/9)
Barbiturates
4.0 18
CH2C1
acidic back-extrac- 83- GC/FID tion, methylation 113
Barbiturates
4.0 19
acetone/ether (50/50)
derivatization with methyl iodide and KJO,
Benzodi azepine derivative
20
phosphate buffer PH 9
diethyl ether/ CH3C1 (70/30)
96- HPLC/UV 104 (230 nm)
70
GC/FID
925 HPLC/UV 5.4 (230 nm)
10 0.6 100 16 ng/l
50
TABLE I
(continued) 21
Benzodiazepine derivatives Butaperazine
1
Carbamazepine
22
Carprofen
23
Chloroprocaine
8.7 24
distilled water, ammonium hydroxide
diethyl ether
70- HPLC / UV 100 (240 nm)
n.r.
distilled water, sodium carbonate
n-pentane/ isopropanol (97/3)
82- HPLC/UV 95
<40 n.r.
CH2C1
hexane wash, methyl ati on
94+ 12
acetate buffer pH 5
diethyl ether
TLC, deri vati zati on
42% HPLC/UV 83 (254 nm)
1.8% barium hydroxide
CH3C1
GC/FID
270
94105
GC/FID
10 25
Chl oroquine
8.4 25 10.8
buffer pH 10
diethyl ether
basic back-extraction n.r. from heptane
GC/FID
Chl oroquine
8.4 26 10.8
distilled water NaOH (pH >11)
hexane/ 1-pentanol (90/10)
basic back-extraction 85in CHC13 105
GC/NSD
10
nMol /1
Chl oroquine
Chloroquine
8.4 27 10.8
8.4 28 10.8
Cimetidine
6.8 29
distilled water, dipotassium hydrogen phosphate pH 9.5
CH2C12
acidic extraction into the aqueous phase
7397
HPLC/UV (254 nm)
3-4
deionized water, 0.001 N HC1
hexane
basic backextraction
95103
GC/NSD
5-15
freeze and thaw, 1 N NaOH pH 9.0
1-octanol
basic back-extraction 98in ethanol 106
HPLC/UV (228 nm)
50
cn
W
TABLE
I
(continued)
L o
0
Clonazepam
1.5 10.5
30
b o r a t e b u f f e r pH 10
isoamyl a l c o h o l / hexane (10/90)
hydrolysis
3550
GC/ECD
5
Debri soqu ine
11.9
31
d i s t i l l e d water
diethyl ether
b a s i c back-extraction n.r. i n cyclohexane
GC/FID o r NSD
3
Diazepam
3.3
32
1 M phosphate b u f f e r pH 7.0
diethyl ether
b a s i c back-extraction 91116
HPLC/UV (240 nm)
20 30
Diazepam
3.3
33
phosphate b u f f e r pH 7.0
n-heptane
b a s i c back-extraction 9095
GC/63NiECD
sodium hydroxide
diethyl ether
93.9 HPLC/FD(285/ 1 430 nm)
n-heptane
98- GC/TCD 100
D i py r idamol e
6.4
Enf 1urane
34 35
50
4.1 pMo 1
/1 Flestolol
4.0 36
acetonitrile
acetoni t r i 1e/ CH2C12 ( U 5 )
acidic extraction i n t o aqueous phase
38
HPLC/UV (229 nm)
10
Tetrahydrocannabinol
10.6
37
2 N HC1 (pH 4)
hexane/ iso-amyl a1coho1 (98/2)
a c i d i c back-extract i o n i n t o hexane
n.r.
TLC/FD
0.4
116-9-tetrahydrocannabinol
10.6 10.4
38
CHC13
f i l t r a t i o n , TLC
98- GC/MS 100
diethyl ether
e x t r a c t i o n o f the organic l a y e r i n t o a c e t o n i t r i l e and phosphoric a c i d
85
Hydroxychloroquine
39
d i s t i l l e d water, ammonia (pH 13)
0.5
HPLC/FD 1 (337/370 nm)
TABLE I
(continued)
Imipramine
9.5 40
ammonium hydroxide
butanol/hexane (20/80)
92.5 HPLC/FD 25 (240/370nm)
Ketamine
7.5 41
ammonium hydroxide pH 10.1
CHC13: isopropanol (75:25) isopropyl acetate
n.r. GC/FI
100
86% GC/MS 9
3
Mef 1 oquine
42
freeze and thaw
Mef 1 oquine
43
phosphate buffer pH 7.4
ethyl acetate
Mefloquine
44
0.2 N H2S04
diethyl ether
1005 HPLC/UV 9.9
wash acidified sample with ether, derivati zation
935 GC/63Ni ECD 9.7 and FID
50
1
Methadone
8.3
45
4 M Na2C03
1-chlorobutane
basic back-extraction 935 GC/FID into CHC13 2
5
Morphine
8.0
46
phosphate buffer pH 8.7 - 9.0
ethyl acetate
aluminium oxide, deri vatization
1
47
acetate buffer pH 5 , B-glucuronidase
ethylacetatelisopropanol (90/10)
basic back-extraction 81
7.9 48
1 M carbonate buffer pH 10
diethyl ether
distilled water, 5M HC1 glacial acetic acid
9.9
Morphine-3glucuronide Naloxone Pentacaine Phenobarbital , Phenytoin, Primidone
49 7.4 50 8.3
83
GUb5Ni ECO HPLC/ECD
0.5
acidic extraction in aqueous phase
78+ HPLC/UV 3.2 (214 nm)
1
1,2 dichloroethane
heptane, Nap C03 fi 1 trati on
75- G U M S 92
5
CHC13
basic back-
90- HPLC/UV 110 (254 nm)
extraction
100 200
ID
300
c
TABLE I
W
(continued)
N
Phentolamine
7.7
51
1 M amnonium hydroxide
diethyl ether
acidic extraction in aqueous phase
83
Promethazine
9.1
52
borax buffer pH 10
n-heptane/isopentanol (99/1)
basic backextraction
97- GC/NSD 99
5
Propranolol
9.5
53
5 N NaOH
isoamyl-alcohol: nheptane (1.5: 98.5)
n.r. HPLC/FD
5
54
4.8 M KC1 pH 6.1
benzene
98 5 GC/ECD 8.9
2
glacial acetic acid
CHC13
90- GC/FID 110
1000
phosphate buffer pH 5.5
CH2C1
n.r. HPLC/UV (290 nm)
200
67- HPLC/UV 90 (225 nm)
0.03 ppm
Pyramidobenzazepine Theophylline Thiopental
c1 55 8.1
56
Tocainide
7.8 57
1 N NaOH, destilled water
CH3Cl
Warfarin
5.0 58
5 N HC1
CHCl
deri varization
fi 1 tration , wash with aqueous sodium pyrophosphate
HPLC/UV (280 nm)
HPLC/UV (270 nm)
ECD: electron capture detector, FD: fluorescence detector, FID: flame ionization detector, GC: gas chromatography HPLC: high performance 1 iquid chromatography, MS: mass spectrometry, NSD: nitrogen selective detector, TCD: thermal conductivity detector, TLC: thin layer chromatography, UV: ultraviolet absorbance detector, n. r. : not reported.
15
Another f o rm o f l i q u i d - l i q u i d e x t r a c t i o n i s t h e use o f s i l i c a m a t e r i a l l i k e E x t r e l u t R ( r e f s . 59-62). Though t h e e x t r a c t i o n columns c o n t a i n s o l i d phase m a t e r i a l , t h e b a s i c p r i n c i p l e i s a l i q u i d - l i q u i d e x t r a c t i o n . E x t r a c t i o n w i t h diatomaceous e a r t h obeys t h e same b a s i c mechanism ( r e f s . 63-65).
Silica
gels
are
porous
carrier
materials.
Water
molecules
d i s t r i b u t e on t h e s u r f a c e of t h e s i l i c a g e l and become t h e s t a t i o n a r y phase. Compounds a r e d i s s o l v e d i n t h e w a t e r phase and a r e e l u t e d f rom t h e columns by o r g a n i c s o l v e n t s , u n m i s c i b l e w i t h wat er. Such columns can be used a t a pH range f r o m 1-13. A f t e r p r o t e i n p r e c i p i t a t i o n by a c i d o r b u f f e r t h e aqueous b l o o d sample i s p u l l e d by vacuum t h r o u g h t h e column ( r e f s . 61,62). S i l i c a g e l can a l s o be used f o r sample p u r i f i c a t i o n ( r e f s . 46,59) by a bs or b i n g i n t e r f e r i n g m a t e r i a l s from b l o o d w i t h o u t absorbing t h e components t o be e l u t e d . 2.2
SOL ID-L I Q U ID EXTRACTION Several methods f o r t h e e x t r a c t i o n o f compounds f rom b l o o d have been
r e p o r t e d u s i n g s o l i d s o r b e n t s as an a l t e r n a t i v e t o l i q u i d - l i q u i d extraction.
F or t h e e x t r a c t i o n of b l o o d samples t h e use o f s o l i d phase
m a t e r i a l has t h e f o l l o w i n g advantages ( r e f s . 66,67): 1. The f o r m a t i o n o f emulsions d i s t u r b i n g e x t r a c t i o n i s avoided. 2. L i t t l e volume o f s o l v e n t s a r e necessary. 3. A c i d i c drugs can be e x t r a c t e d w i t h h i g h r ecovery. 4. F a t t y a c i d s , t h e i r e s t e r s and c h o l e s t e r o l a r e n o t c o - e x t r a c t e d .
The s o l i d - l i q u i d e x t r a c t i o n procedures o f b l o o d samples can be d i v i d e d i n t o 4 main s t e p s : 1. hemolysis, d e p r o t e i n a t i o n and pH-adjustment,
2. a d s o r p t i o n o f t h e compounds of i n t e r e s t on t h e s o l i d phase m a t e r i a l , 3. p u r i f i c a t i o n b y washing t h e adsorbent w i t h l i p o p h i l i c o r h y d r o p h i l i c solvents, 4. e l u t i o n o f t h e drugs f r o m t h e adsorbent, 5. volume r e d u c t i o n and i f necessary d e r i v a t i z a t i o n . L i q u i d - l i q u i d e x t r a c t i o n of a c i d i c drugs i s sometimes complicat ed by the co-extraction
o f 1 i p i d s and 1 i p o p r o t e i n s .
Co-extraction
of
these
compounds i s l e s s i n s o l i d - l i q u i d e x t r a c t i o n and t h u s f u r t h e r clean-up st e ps 1 ike b a c k - e x t r a c t i o n s
o f t e n r e d u c i n g recovery a r e u s u a l l y n o t
r e q u i r e d . For s o l i d - l i q u i d e x t r a c t i o n t h e f o l l o w i n g s o l i d sorbent s a r e used :
94 1. Bonded phase s i l i c a gels, a l s o a v a i l a b l e as pre-packed disposable columns ( r e f s . 68-70), 2. anion and c a t i o n exchange r e s i n s ( r e f . 71), 3. n o n - i o n i c r e s i n s l i k e a c t i v a t e d charcoal ( r e f . 72) and A m b e r l i t e XAD-2 ( r e f s . 73-75)
.
Blood samples must be prepared f o r e x t r a c t i o n on bonded phase s i l i c a gel columns by hemolysis and p r o t e i n p r e c i p i t a t i o n
b e f o r e sucked by
vacuum through t h e e x t r a c t i o n columns. The columns a r e p r e v i o u s l y primed w i t h t h e same s o l v e n t , as used f o r e l u t i o n o f t h e drugs from t h e columns, i n o r d e r t o remove i n t e r f e r i n g substances. With a p o l a r s o l v e n t ( u s u a l l y water) t h e c o n d i t i o n s used f o r e x t r a c t i o n a r e e s t a b l i s h e d by l o a d i n g t h e columns with p o l a r groups. The drugs a r e r e t a i n e d by t h e column and can f u r t h e r be p u r i f i e d by washing t h e adsorbed m a t e r i a l s w i t h l i p o p h i l i c o r h y d r o p h i l i c s o l v e n t s i n which t h e y have a small p a r t i t i o n c o e f f i c i e n t . The columns are a l s o s u i t a b l e f o r an e x t r a c t i o n by i o n - p a i r chromatography ( r e f . 68) and can be cleaned and reused. The l i f e span of e x t r a c t i o n columns used f o r e x t r a c t s from blood i s s h o r t e r than f o r those from serum o r plasma,
s i n c e l a r g e amounts o f blood components
like
l i p o i d s and l i p o p r o t e i n s a r e c o - e x t r a c t e d and can p l u g t h e columns. The columns should n o t be c o n f r o n t e d w i t h s o l v e n t s w i t h a pH > 9. The ext r a c t i o n procedure w i t h disposable s o l i d phase e x t r a c t i o n columns can be automated u s i n g e x t r a c t i o n systems such as an advanced automated sample processing u n i t (AASP,
Varian, Walnut Creek, CA, USA). The p r e - e x t r a c t e d
blood samples a r e a u t o m a t i c a l l y loaded on t h e e x t r a c t i o n columns, p u r i f i e d and i n j e c t e d i n t o t h e HPLC-system ( r e f s . 76,77). I o n i c and non-ionic r e s i n s can be added t o t h e b l o o d sample i n ext r a c t i o n columns ( r e f s . 78-80), bags ( r e f .
i n capsules ( r e f . 69),
78) o r as r e s i n s l u r r y ( r e f s . 74-75).
i n nylon f a b r i c
Anion exchange r e s i n s
are s u i t a b l e f o r t h e e x t r a c t i o n of a c i d i c drugs such as b a r b i t u r a t e s , sal i c y l a t e s and phenylbutazone, c a t i o n exchange r e s i n s f o r t h e e x t r a c t i o n of basic drugs such as q u i n i d i n e , chlorpromazine, s t r y c h n i n e , and morphine. Charcoal i s i n e f f e c t i v e i n b i n d i n g most b a s i c drugs except s t r y c h n i n e and proved v a l u a b l e i n b i n d i n g n o n - i o n i c o r g a n i c compounds l i k e gluthetimide,
meprobamate and carbromal
(ref.
71).
I o n exchange
r e s i n s are a l s o used t o remove i o n i c i m p u r i t i e s from b l o o d samples ( r e f . 81)
.
The a n i o n i c r e s i n Amber1 i t e XAD-2, i n t r o d u c e d i n t o pharmacological and t o x i c o l o g i c a l a n a l y s i s by F u j i m o t o e t a l . ( r e f . 82) i s a nonpolar styrene-divinylbenzene copolymer w i t h a p a r t i c l e s i z e o f 50-100 p ( r e f .
66).
It a l l o w s t h e e x t r a c t i o n of
deproteination
( r e f . 80).
The
drugs from b l o o d w i t h o u t preceeding
resin
s l u r r y i s prepared by washing t h e
95 r e s i n subsequently w i t h water, methanol and acetone. The r e s i n i s s t o r e d i n water o r a b u f f e r s o l u t i o n ( r e f s . 66,73,75).
A f t e r adsorption o f the
compounds o f i n t e r e s t t h e XAD-2 p a r t i c l e s a r e f i l t e r e d and e x t r a c t e d w i t h an organic s o l v e n t . S c h l i c h t e t a l . ( r e f . 66) and I b r a h i m e t a l . ( r e f . 79) described t h e e x t r a c t i o n o f several drugs from b l o o d samples u s i n g XAD-2 r e s i n s , Ford e t a l . t h e e x t r a c t i o n o f a c i d i c drugs from blood u s i n g CI8 bonded s i l i c a columns ( r e f . 67) and Missen e t a l . ( r e f . 75) compared t h e e x t r a c t i o n of benzodiazepines w i t h various r e s i n s . The e x t r a c t i o n o f drugs from b l o o d using s o l i d phase m a t e r i a l s i s acquainted w i t h some disadvantages t h a t must be taken i n t o account. 1. The e x t r a c t i o n may g i v e v a r i a b l e r e c o v e r i e s
o f the e l u t i n g solvent
and
due t o t h e pH and n a t u r e
t h e sorbent.
2 . The r e s i n s and column m a t e r i a l s loose t h e i r a d s o r p t i o n e f f i c i e n c y t h e
more o f t e n t h e y are reused. 3. The f r i t s and t h e column m a t e r i a l can b e plugged by n o t s u f f i c i e n t l y
d e p r o t e i n i z e d samples o r i f t h e columns a r e reused t o o o f t e n . Since i t i s o f t e n n o t p o s s i b l e t o perform ' d i g i t a l chromatography' on t h e e x t r a c t i o n columns, an i n t e r n a l standard may h e l p t o c o r r e c t recovery o f a compound and t o make e x t r a c t i o n more r e l i a b l e and r e p r o d u c i b l e . A good i n t e r n a l standard should 1. s t r u c t u r a l l y be as s i m i l a r t o t h e compound o f i n t e r e s t as p o s s i b l e , 2. have t h e same d i s t r i b u t i o n c o e f f i c i e n t s i n organic s o l v e n t s ,
3. have t h e same b i n d i n g c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s t o t h e blood compounds as t h e compound o f i n t e r e s t , 4. have a r e t e n t i o n time i n chromatographic a n a l y s i s c l o s e t o t h e compound o f i n t e r e s t , 5. be c l e a r l y separated from t h e compound o f i n t e r e s t d u r i n g a n a l y s i s , 6. have t h e same p r o p e r t i e s concerning t h e d e t e c t i o n system used. The i n t e r n a l standard i s added i n a known amount t o t h e sample p r i o r t o sample p r e p a r a t i o n and a n a l y s i s . A good i n t e r n a l standard i s a b l e t o e l i m i n a t e t h e b i a s caused by losses and compensates random e r r o r s d u r i n g e x t r a c t i o n o r a n a l y s i s ( r e f . 83). F i g . 2 shows a f l o w - c h a r t of s o l i d - l i q u i d e x t r a c t i o n procedures.
If
XAD-2 m a t e r i a l f o r t h e e x t r a c t i o n o f n e u t r a l and b a s i c drugs i s used i t can be renounced a t t h e d e p r o t e i n a t i o n s t e p ( r e f . 80). The p u r i f i c a t i o n s t e p can a l s o be performed a f t e r e l u t i o n o f t h e drugs from t h e s o l i d sorbent u s i n g l i q u i d - l i q u i d e x t r a c t i o n .
2-3
COLUMN-SWITCHING On-line sample preparation using column-switching has been applied to plasma, serum and urine samples and is discussed in detail i n Volume I. Blood sample analysis requires a preceeding purification step and is basically equal to analysis in plasma, serum or urine. Column-switching techniques for cyclosporine blood samples are described in part 3 . 2 . 3 of this chapter.
3. 3.1
BlOOD SAMPLE PREPARATION AND HPLC ANALYSIS OF SandimmunR (CYLOSPORINE) INTRODUCTION SandimmunR (Cyclosporine A, cyclosporine, Sandoz OL 27-400 N) is an immunosuppressive agent and i t s application after organ transplantation has proved to be of great value (refs. 84-85). Due to its narrow therapeutic range and its pharmacokinetic properties, blood level monitoring is mandatory. (ref. 86). Simultaneous measurement of the parent compound and the cyclosporine metabolites in blood by HPLC is of great clinical relevance, since the
97
commercially available and commonly used monoclonal radioimmuno assay (RIA) kits (Sandoz) (ref. 86) measure the parent compound or all metabolites to an mostly unknown extent. With HPLC it is possible to determine the metabolites and to quantify each of the metabolites separately. This will be of special value if one or more of the metabolites prove to be responsible for the cyclosporine adverse effects especially nephrotoxicity. Cyclosporine is a neutral, lipophilic and cyclic undecapeptide with a molecular weight of 1202.6. All its amino acids are S-configurated except D-alanine in position 8 (Fig. 1). Amino acids in positions 1, 3, 4, 6, 9, 10, and 11 are N-methylated. The amino acid in position 1 is a O-hydroxilated, N-methylated and unsaturated C9-amino acid. The tertiary structure of cyclosporine is an antiparallel R-pleated sheet conformation. Its partition coefficient octanol/water is 120/1. The cyclosporine molecule lacks of chromophoric substituents, making UV-detection more unspecific and demanding more extensive extraction procedures. The molar absorption coefficient at the wave-length maximum (195 nm) is 66 000 l/mol x cm. It shows good solubility in alcohols, ether, acetone and chlorinated hydrocarbons and poor solubi1 i ty in water and saturated hydrocarbons (refs. 88-91). Cyclosporine is metabolized by microsomal cytochrome P450 (ref. 92) in the liver to more than 30 metabolites (ref. 93). The structures of the metabolites 1, 8, 9, 10, 13, 16, 17, 18, 21, 25, 26 (refs. 94 and 95), 203-218 (ref. 96) and two aldehyde metabolites (ref. 97) have been elucidated. All metabolites retain the cyclic undecapeptide structure and prove to be more hydrophilic than the parent compound. The reactions involved in cyclosporine degradation are demethylation, hydroxilation, oxidation and cyclization (Table 11). Choice of the bioloaical matrix (ref. 98) For routine drug monitoring cyclosporine is usually measured in blood. However, the question of the biological matrix is still under discussion. 58% of cyclosporine are bound to the erythrocytes in blood, 10 to 20% to the lymphocytes. In plasma cyclosporine is bound to lipoproteins, preferentially those of high and low density (refs. 99-103). The free fraction is 1-1.5% at 37OC (ref. 104). The distribution between blood and plasma is temperature dependent and is lowered from 37OC to room temperature (refs. 99, 105-108). Binding of cyclosporine to the lipoproteins i s also temperature dependent being highest at body temperature and decreasing linearly with lower temperature. The cyclosporine metabolites 1 and 17 are associated with the erythrocytes
98 (>go%) ( r e f s . 109-111). The r e l a t i v e d i s t r i b u t i o n i n b l o o d i s constant u n t i l c y c l o s p o r i n e c o n c e n t r a t i o n s > 1000 ~ / 1 . Furthermore t h e r e l a t i o n between c o n c e n t r a t i o n i n b l o o d and plasma v a r i e s s i g n i f i c a n t l y w i t h t h e hematocrit ( r e f s . 112 and 113). The reasons f o r choosing blood as t h e b i o l o g i c a l m a t r i x are: 1. There a r e no t e c h n i c a l problems because o f t h e temperature dependent
d i s t r i b u t i o n between e r y t h r o c y t e s and plasma. 2. Measurement i s independent o f t h e hematocrit.
3. Plasma l e v e l s a r e considerably increased i n hemolysed b l o o d samples. The choice o f t h e a n t i c o a g u l a n t used f o r c y c l o s p o r i n e blood samples proved t o be o f importance. I n r o u t i n e h e p a r i n i z e d specimens s t o r e d > 1 days c o n t a i n small blood c l o t s .
Since c y c l o s p o r i n e i s bound t o a g r e a t
percentage t o t h e corpuscular blood components c l o t t i n g causes a decrease i n t h e c o n c e n t r a t i o n measured and t h e c l o t s p l u g t h e e x t r a c t i o n columns i n solid-phase e x t r a c t i o n procedures ( r e f s . 4, 98, 114-116). The
methods
developed
for
the
quantitative
determination
of
cyclosporine and i t s m e t a b o l i t e s i n blood cover almost t h e whole spectrum o f blood sample p r e p a r a t i o n s t r a t e g i e s .
99
I
CH2
I
AA8 Fig. 3
AA2
AAll AA1 -
AAlO
CH3
CH3
I
I
AA 7
CH-OH
I
AA6 -
I CH2
CH3
I
I
AA5
Structural formula of cyclosporine.
AA4
100
TABLE I 1
Structures o f the cyclosporine (Cs) metabolites, hitherto characterized (refs. 94-96) with their molecular weights.
I R
R1
R2
H
CH3
1 8
OH
CH3
CH3 CH3
OH
CH20H
CH3
9 10 13
OH
CH3
H
H
OH
OH
CH3
CH3
OH
H
16 17
OH
CH3
CH3
H
H H
CH20H CH20H
CH3
H
H
1234.64 1218.64
CH3
H
H AA1:cyclization
1218.64
H H
CH3 CH20H
H
H
H
1188.62
25
H
H
H
1204.64
26
OH
CH20H
CH3
H
H AA1:cyclization
1234.62
203-218
H
COOH
CH3
H
H
1232.62
Metabolite cs
18 21
modifications weight
R3
R4
H H
H
1202.64
H
1218.64 1234.64
hydroxyl ated and N-demethyl ated derivative of cs OH
1220.62 1234.64 1204.62
TABLE 111 Characteristics of various HPLC procedures for quantitative determination of cyclosporine
Extraction Ref. matrix preparation
extraction
117 plasma + water urine
diethyl ether
118 plasma
cv
HPLC clean-up recovery column elution det.-limit (pg/1 1
-
76+5% 10455%
RP8
gradient
extraction identical with ref. 117
n.r.
RP8
isocratic
5
119 blood + distilled plasma water
diethyl ether
hexane
74% 49%
RP18
isocratic
25
9.2
120 serum
C18 cartridge (Sep-Pak, Waters)
water/ 90+10% methanol
RP18
isocratic
n.r.
n.r.
step gradient
25
3
RP18
gradient
50
77.356%
TMS
isocratic
100
n.r.
83-99%
RP8 isocratic ultrasphere
31
3.6-
methanol
121 plasma heat (55OC), blood freeze + thaw
column-switching
122 serum
CN cartridge (Baker)
123 plasma
Clin Elut
91.9+0.9% RP8, RP18
water/ 50-70% methanol
20
comments
%
n.r.
4.4 derivatization o f cyclosporine with 2naphthyleneselenylchloride
9.314.1
cartridge (Fisher) 124 plasma acidification diethyl ether blood (HC1)
NaOH
6.0
TABLE I I I 125
blood serum
Tris-buffer pH 9.8
126/ plasma 127 blood
81 blood
c
(conti nued)
0 N
diethyl ether/ aceton- 34.7% C N cartridge nitrile/ (Baker) water, hexane
acetonitri le/water, column-switching freeze + thaw acetonitrile acetonitrile
128
blood freeze+thaw diethyl ether plasma buffer pH 10
129
serum
phosphoric colum-switching acid in acetonitri le
130
blood
freeze+thraw charcoal slurry acetonitrile ethyl acetate
131 blood,
plasma 132
blood
-
diethyl ether
10% isoC18 cartridge propanol in (Baker Bond) acetonitri le
RP8
isocratic
25
21
RP8, RP18
columnswitching
5 15
0.511.1
hexane, 90%+5% Dowex ion exchange resin
RP18
isocratic
25
acidifi- 74% cation, 85% hexane
RP18
isocratic
25
n.r.
RP8, RP18
columnswitching
n.r.
RP18
isocratic
50
CN
isocratic 100
6.04
isocratic
n.r.
hexane
100%
80%
alkalized 96+6% acidi fi ed met h ano 1 70%
methanol
automated sample preparation
0.38.0
86+108% C N
50
7.0
2.512.5
8.6
modification of refs. 126, 127
TABLE 111
(continued)
110 blood acetonitrile/ CN cartridie serum, water (Bond Elut ) plasma (30/70,v/v)
acetonitrile/ acetic acid
133 blood
acetonitrile/ C18cartridfle di methy 1 (Bond Elut ) sulfoxide
acetoninitrile water, hexane
134 blood
--
acidification, hexane
n.r.
135 blood
acetonitrile columnswitching
acetonitrile/ water
75~3% Ultrfl- columnpore switching RPSC (Altex) RP18, 3 vm
136 blood
HC1
NAOH
diethyl ether
diethyl ether
90% 98%
CN
isocratic
15
75-
CN
i socrati c
6.46.6
isocratic
n.r. modification o f ref. 119
80% ultrahere
n.r.
RP18
RP8
isocratic
n.r.
2
20
2.6- determination of a 6.5 cell-bound metabolite
0.16.2
1.8
4.5 137 blood
HCl
138 blood
acetonitrile
139 blood
freeze+thaw
diethyl ether
column-switching diethyl ether
RP8, 3 Ilm
isocratic
10
98.4100.2%
CN,
columnswitching
5
TMS
108%
RP6, RP18
columnswitching
25
heptane ~ 9 0 %
hexane
3.9 ion-pair chromato5.7 graphy (ammonium su 1 fate) 0.71 .8
5.7- extraction equal to 6.3 ref. 119, microbore analytical column c-l
0
w
c 0
TABLE 111
(continued)
140, blood 141
acetonitrile/ C18 cartridge methanol(9/1) (Bond Elut )
142 blood
HC1
76 blood
77 serum
145 blood, pl asma, bile
hexane, n.r. silica gel cartridge
25
4.9
88-90% RP8 isocratic methyl-t-butyl- NaOH, ether heptane mi crobore
1.5
4.8- small sample volume 5.9 (0.2-0.5 ml)
hexane, 98-104% aceton i tri 1 e/ water
RP18, 3 Pm
isocratic
20
4.5- extraction with ad7.8 vanced automatic sample unit AASP (Varian)
95-108%
CN
isocratic
15
6.6- modification of 6.9 ref. 135
75-83.9
RP18
isocratic
50
18.45.6
hexane, 87% aceton i tri 1 el water
CN,
isocratic
20
NaOH
RP18 3 Clm
gradient
22
C18 cartridge (Bond Elut ) HC1
RP1
isocratic
acetonitrile/ C8 cartridRe dimethyl(Bond Elut ) su 1 foxi de
143 blood 144 plasma, bile, urine
P
diethyl ether
NaOH
+7.7%
acetonitrile C8 cartridge (Analytichem)
HC1
diethyl ether
>96%
3 ccm
3.8- extraction with ad12.5 vanced automatic sample unit AASP (Varian), normal phase chromatography 5.6
determination of metabolite 1, 17, 18, 21
TABLE
II I
(conti nued)
I.46 blood,
diethyl ether
silica 45~2% cartridge (Sep Pak, Waters), acetylacetate/ hexane
RP18
isocratic
1020
6
diethyl ether
heptane, 70% NaOH , hexane
RP8, 3 Pm
isocratic
25
5.311.5
acetoni- 47trile/ 95% water
CN isocratic 15a1 ternat i vely 25 RP 8, silica gel semi-preparative isolation of metabolites
acetoni- 73trile/ 85% water, hexane
RP8
plasma
147 blood
148 blood
HC1
acetonitrile/ CN cartridRe water (30/70) (Bond Elut )
149 blood, acetonitrile/ C8 extraction 150 bile, water(30/70) columns 151 urine
n.r.: not reported, RP: reversed phase.
gradient
25
7.1 determination of 9.6 metabolite 1 , 8, 13, 17, 18, 21, 25, 26, 203-218 and 1 yet unidentified metabolite
5.6 12.6
determination o f metabolite 1, 8, 9, 10, 13, 16, 17, 18, 21, 25, 26, 203-218 and 7 yet unidentified metabolites
106
BLOOD SAMPLE PREPARATION FOR SANDIMMUN~ (CYCLOSPORINE) MEASUREMENT 3.2 3.2.1 LIQUID-LIQUID EXTRACTION PROCEDURES A l l methods published u n t i l now use
c y c l o s p o r i n e C o r 0 as i n t e r n a l
standard. The e x t r a c t i o n procedures c o n s i s t o f f o u r steps:
1. hemolysis and d e p r o t e i n a t i o n , 2. e x t r a c t i o n o f cyclosporine, 3. sample p u r i f i c a t i o n , 4. volume r e d u c t i o n and t r a n s f e r i n t o t h e m o b i l e phase Hemolysis was achieved by r a p i d thawing and f r e e z i n g ( r e f . adding d i s t i l l e d water ( r e f . c h l o r i c a c i d (137).
119), a c e t o n i t r i l e ( r e f .
129) o r by
81) and hydro-
I n r o u t i n e a n a l y s i s c y c l o s p o r i n e was e x t r a c t e d from b l o o d by d i e t h y l methyl-t-butyl ether (ref. e t h e r ( r e f s . 117,119,124,127,128,136-138),
142) and a c e t o n i t r i l e ( r e f . 81). The advantage o f m e t h y l - t - b u t y l e t h e r over d i e t h y l e t h e r a r e i t s r e s i s t a n c e t o peroxide f o r m a t i o n and c l e a n e r e x t r a c t s than obtained by d i e t h y l e t h e r e x t r a c t i o n ( r e f . 142). The use of
acetonitrile
combines
s o l v e n t and i t s p r o t e i n
i t s p r o p e r t i e s as
an e f f e c t i v e e x t r a c t i o n
p r e c e p i t a t i n g potency
(ref.
81). Since t h e
e x t r a c t s c o n t a i n i n t e r f e r i n g l i p o p h i l i c m a t e r i a l and a c i d i c , b a s i c and i o n i c contamination ( r e f .
81) which may cause damage t o t h e column,
p u r i f i c a t i o n steps are required. P u r i f i c a t i o n was achieved by washing t h e sample w i t h hexane o r heptane ( r e f s . 119,128,134,137,139,142)w i t h a c i d i c and basic s o l u t i o n s ( r e f s . 124,128,131,134,142) o r by adding i o n exchange r e s i n s ( r e f . 81). A f t e r e v a p o r a t i o n o f t h e p u r i f i e d l a y e r and resuspension i n t h e mobile phase, some methods use a second p u r i f i c a t i o n s t e p by e x t r a c t i n g i n t e r f e r i n g substances w i t h a f i n a l wash ( r e f s .
hexane o r heptane
137, 142). Back e x t r a c t i o n o f c y c l o s p o r i n e from an aqueous
phase by changing pH i s n o t p o s s i b l e because o f i t s chemical p r o p e r t i e s . Thus t h e organic l a y e r c o n t a i n i n g c y c l o s p o r i n e i s washed by b a s i c and a c i d i c s o l u t i o n s and t h e aqueous l a y e r has t o be discarded i n e i t h e r case. G f e l l e r e t . a l . ( r e f . 118) used a d e r i v a t i z a t i o n o f c y c l o s p o r i n e w i t h 2-naphthylselenylchloride t o improve t h e d e t e c t i o n l i m i t . The method o f Sawchuck and C a r t i e r ( r e f .
119) i n t r o d u c e d a hexane
washing s t e p i n t o c y c l o s p o r i n e a n a l y s i s and many l a t e r p u b l i s h e d l i q u i d l i q u i d e x t r a c t i o n methods used a m o d i f i c a t i o n o f t h i s e x t r a c t i o n p r o cedure ( r e f s . 128,137,139,142). Blood, d i s t i l l e d water and t h e i n t e r n a l standard Cyclosporine D were g i v e n i n t o a c e n t r i f u g e tube. D i e t h y l e t h e r was added and t h e sample shaken and c e n t r i f u g e d . The aqueous phase was discarded and t h e organic l a y e r was evaporated. The sample was taken up
107 i n methanol and was washed w i t h hexane t w i c e . The hexane l a y e r s were removed, t h e aqueous l a y e r was b a s i f i e d w i t h NaOH and c y c l o s p o r i n e was e x t r a c t e d by d i e t h y l e t h e r . The d i e t h y l e t h e r phase was evaporated and t h e re ma ining m a t e r i a l s were r e c o n s t i t u t e d w i t h t h e m o b i l e phase. Most
of
these
extraction
Cy c los porin e D o r C.
procedures
use
an
internal
st andard:
Cyclosporine D i s cyclosporine w i t h v a l i n
and
c y c l o s p o r i n e C w i t h t h r e o n i n e as amino a c i d 2 (F ig. 3 ) . These c y c l o s p o r i n e d e r i v a t i v e s r e p r e s e n t o n l y a s m a l l m o d i f i c a t i o n o f t h e whole molecule. They
have
distribution
coefficients
in
organic
solvents
equal
to
c y c l o s p o r i n e and almost t h e same UV-absorbing p r o p e r t i e s . The use of t h e s e i n t e r n a l s t a ndar d s f o r t h e q u a n t i f i c a t i o n o f c y c l o s p o r i n e m e t a b o l i t e s i s critical
(ref.
152).
The b e h a v i o r d u r i n g e x t r a c t i o n
i s considerably
d i f f e r e n t f rom t h e m e t a b o l i t e s as shwon i n b i l e i n r e f . 151 and Table V . 3.2.2 SOLID-LIQUID EXTRACTION PROCEDURES U n t i l now a l l column e x t r a c t i o n
methods described f o r c y c l o s p o r i n e i n -
cl uded 5 s t e ps : 1. Hemolysis o f t h e c o r p u s c u l a r b l o o d i n g r e d i e n t s and d e p r o t e i n a t i o n , 2. sample l o a d i n g on t h e e x t r a c t i o n column, 3. sample p u r i f i c a t i o n , 4. e l u t i o n o f c y c l o s p o r i n e and i t s m e t a b o l i t e s f rom t h e e x t r a c t i o n column,
5 . volume r e d u c t i o n f o r HPLC a n a l y s i s . Yee e t a l . ( r e f . 122) used a p r o t e i n p r e c i p i t a t i o n s t e p w i t h a c e t o n i t r i l e c o n t a i n i n g t h e i n t e r n a l s t a n d a r d C y c l o s p o r i n e D. The sample was t h e n p u l l e d by vacuum through a prepacked d i s p o s a b l e cyanopropyl column, b e i n g washed w i t h a c e t o n i t r i l e and w a t e r . The column was washed w i t h methanol/ wat e r 40/60 ( v / v ) and c y c l o s p o r i n e was e l u t e d u s i n g methanol. Kates e t a l . ( r e f . 125) combined a d i e t h y l e t h e r e x t r a c t i o n w i t h p u r i f i c a t i o n on
prepacked d i s p o s a b l e cyano columns.
Blood samples were
a d j u s t e d a t pH 9.8 and e x t r a c t e d w i t h d i e t h y l e t h e r . D i e t h y l e t h e r was evaporated, t h e sample d i s s o l v e d i n methanol/water was d i l u t e d w i t h w a t e r and drawn t hro ug h t h e column w i t h water. The sample was subsequent ly cleaned by a c e t o n i t r i l e / w a t e r 25/75 ( v / v ) and hexane was t hen e l u t e d f r o m t h e column w i t h methanol. The method developed i n o u r l a b o r a t o r y
(refs.
149,150,151,
Fig.
4)
uses 3 m l g l a s e x t r a c t i o n columns f i l l e d w i t h 25-40 p RP 8 m a t e r i a l R (L iC hro pre p , Merck, Darmstadt, FRG). The i n t e r n a l st andard C y c l o s p o r i n e D was d i s s o l v e d
in
a c e t o n i t r i l e / w a t e r (pH 3.0) 50/50 ( v / v ) a t a concen-
108
tration of 10 @/ml. 25 pl of the internal standard solution were pipetted into a 10 ml centrifuge tube. Subsequently 1 ml blood and 2.1 ml acetonitrile/water (pH 3.0) (30/70 v/v) were added. Each sample was vortexed for 20 s and centrifuged for 5 min at 2 500 rpm. The supernatant was pulled by vacuum through the extraction columns. The extraction columns were previously primed with 3 ml acetonitrile and 3 ml water. The samples were washed with 3.2 ml acetonitrile /water (pH 3.0) (20/80 V/V) and with 0.5 ml hexane. The column was dried by sucking air through it for 1 min. To elute cyclosporine and its metabolites the extraction column was set into a diethyl ether cleaned 10 ml centrifuge tube and 2 ml dichloromethane was centrifuged through the extraction columns (700 rpm, 5 min). Dichloromethane was evaporated and the remaining materials were taken up in 300 pl acetonitrile/ water (pH 3.0) (50/50 v/v). 500 d hexane were added and the sample was vortexed for 10 s. Phases were separated and 100 ml of the aqueous phase were injected into the HPLC system. This extraction procedure is a modification of the method pub1 ished by Lensmeyer and Fields (ref. 110). The first step of the extraction procedure consists of adding a mixture of acidified water (pH 3.0) /acetonitrile (30/70 v/v) resulting in a final acetonitrile concentration of 20% in the sample. According to ref. 110 gross protein precipitation occurs at a final acetonitrile concentration of more than 21%. At the acetonitrile concentrations reached in the sample blood cells are hemolysed and some protein blood components precipitate. The recovery is considerably lower at a higher pH of the dilution mixture. The recovery drops to about 20% when gross protein precipitation occurs due to plugged extraction columns. Critical conditions for gross protein precipitation are high temperatures over 25OC as reached when centrifuging the sample in a warm centrifuge. Another reason for a decreased recovery is the extraction of deep frozen or samples stored at +4OC for more than 1 week. The first step also adjusts the sample to the conditions required for column extraction. After centrifugation the supernatant which has a clear red color is given onto the extraction columns. We chose no commercially available disposable prepacked columns but refillable glas columns with removable teflon frits for the following reasons: 1. To reduce costs of external column extraction procedures the ex-
traction columns are reused. The more often they are reused the more reproducibility and recovery decrease and the chance of loosing a
109 sample because o f a plugged column increases. A f t e r a n a l y s i s t h e s o l i d phase o f t h e g l a s s columns i s removed and t h e f r i t s reusable f o r a t l e a s t t h r e e times a r e cleaned by u l t r a - s o u n d i n a c e t o n i t r i l e . 2. One o f t h e main problems o f c y c l o s p o r i n e a n a l y s i s a r e i n t e r f e r i n g m a t e r i a l s l i k e p l a s t i c s o f t e n e r s which have s i m i l a r chromatographic and s p e c t r a l p r o p e r t i e s l i k e c y c l o s p o r i n e i t s e l f . I t has been r e p o r t e d t h a t i n t e r f e r i n g m a t e r i a l can be leached from t h e e x t r a c t i o n columns. Glass i s an i n e r t m a t e r i a l . A ' d i g i t a l chromatography' o f c y c l o s p o r i n e on t h e e x t r a c t i o n columns i s
n o t p o s s i b l e r e s u l t i n g i n v a r i a b l e r e c o v e r i e s o f 7 0 4 5 % i n o u r system. I n our method t h i s v a r i a b i l i t y can be compensated by u s i n g an i n t e r n a l standard (Table I V ) . The columns a r e f i l l e d w i t h 100 mg RP 8 s o l i d phase m a t e r i a l . V a r i a t i o n o f t h e packing volume up t o 50% does n o t i n f l u e n c e recovery. pH adjustment o f t h e sample t o an a c i d pH increases r e t e n t i o n on t h e columns e s p e c i a l l y o f t h e c a r b o x y l a t e d m e t a b o l i t e 203-218.
After
l o a d i n g c y c l o s p o r i n e and i t s m e t a b o l i t e s o n t o t h e e x t r a c t i o n columns, t h e
(80/20 v / v ) m i x t u r e , decreasing t h e amount o f p o t e n t i a l l y i n t e r f e r i n g m a t e r i a l . During t h i s s t e p t h e recovery i s n o t reduced when t h e water i s a c i d i f i e d . The n e x t sample i s washed w i t h an a c e t o n i t r i l e / w a t e r (pH 3.0)
step, washing t h e column w i t h hexane i s t o remove l i p o h i l i c i m p u r i t i e s . c y c l o s p o r i n e and i t s m e t a b o l i t e s a r e almost i n s o l u b l e i n hexane. Up t o t h i s s t e p t h e s o l v e n t s are sucked through t h e column by vacuum. To e l u t e t h e compounds o f i n t e r e s t from t h e e x t r a c t i o n column t h e columns a r e s e t i n c e n t r i f u g e tubes.
The e l u e n t dichloromethane i s c e n t r i f u g e d t h r o u g h
t h e e x t r a c t i o n columns and t h e e l u a t e c o n t a i n i n g c y c l o s p o r i n e and i t s metabolites
i s collected a t
the
bottom o f t h e c e n t r i f u g e
tube.
In
c o n t r a s t t o o t h e r e l u e n t s l i k e methanol o r a c e t o n i t r i l e dichloromethane can f a s t e r be evaporated, The amount o f c o e l u t e d i n t e r f e r i n g m a t e r i a l i s equal t o an e l u t i o n by o t h e r s o l v e n t s . For evaporation o f dichloromethane an apparatus equipped w i t h g l a s s tubes f o r n i t r o g e n i n s u f f l a t i o n should be used, s i n c e p l a s t i c tubes a r e a p o t e n t i a l source o f p o l l u t i o n of t h e sample w i t h p l a s t i z i s e r s (Fig.
10). The f i n a l hexane wash used i n o u r
method removed i n t e r f e r i n g m a t e r i a l , stemming from t h e l a b o r a t o r y equipment. This step was n o t e s s e n t i a l b u t i t made e x t r a c t i o n more re1 i a b l e . With s l i g h t m o d i f i c a t i o n s t h e method c o u l d be adapted t o analyse u r i n e and b i l e samples. 1 m l u r i n e was p i p e t t e d i n t o a 10 m l c e n t r i f u g e t u b e and 300 pl a c e t o n i t r i l e were added. A f t e r c e n t r i f u g a t i o n t h e supernatant
110 was passed through t h e e x t r a c t i o n columns. 1 m l o f a b i l e sample and 2 m l a c e t o n i t r i l e / w a t e r (pH 3.0) acetonitrile/water
(pH 3.0)
discarded.
loading
After
(30/70 v/v) were washed w i t h 3 m l hexane. The phase was separated and t h e hexane l a y e r cyclosporine
and
its
metabolites
on
the
e x t r a c t i o n columns the e x t r a c t i o n procedure was continued as described f o r blood samples.
1 m l blood + 25 pl i n t e r n a l standard (containing 250 ng cyclosporine D) + 2.1 m l a c e t o n i t r i l e / w a t e r (pH 3.0) 30/70 (v/v)
I I e x t r a c t i o n column
+ 3.2 m l a c e t o n i t r i l e + 3.2 m l water (pH 3.0)
shake 20 s (vortex-mixer) c e n t r i f u g e 5 min, 2500 rpm
I I
I draw supernatant through t h e e x t r a c t i o n column
I
-
+ 3.2 m l a c e t o n i t r i l e / w a t e r (pH 3.0) (20/80 v/v) + 0.5 m l hexane d r y column by a i r stream
I
c e n t r i f u g e 2.0 m l dichloromethane through t h e column
I
remove column m a t e r i a l teflon f r i t s
I clean
I evaporate e l u a t e a t 50°C under a stream o f n i t r o g e n
I + 0.3 m l a c e t o n i t r i l e / w a t e r (pH 3.0)
(50/50 v/v)
+ 0.5 m l hexane
I shake 20 s (vortex-mixer) c e n t r i f u g e 2 min, 2500 rpm
I i n j e c t 75 pl i n t o HPLC-system Fig. 4
Extraction o f cyclosporine and i t s metabolites from blood by s o l i d l i q u i d e x t r a c t i o n ( r e f s . 149, 150, 151)
111
Modifications for the extraction of urine samples 1 ml urine + 25 pl internal standard
+ 300
pl
acetonitrile
I vortex mix (40s) centrifuge 2 min 2500 x g
I (extraction continued like blood) Modifications for the extraction o f bile samples 1 ml bile + 25 pl internal standard + 2.1 ml acetonitrile/water (pH 3.0) + 2 ml hexane
(30/70 v/v)
I vortex mix (1 min) centrifuge 2 min 2500 x g
I discard hexane layer
suck acetonitrile/water phase through extraction columns
I (extraction continued like blood) Reproducibility, linearity and detection limit of the method used in our laboratory are listed in Table I V . TABLE I V
Calibration curve, detection limit and CV of the method described above Calibration curve range checked
blood bile urine
0-3
mg/l 0-6 mg/l 0-30 mg/l
r 1.o
0.989 0.996
detection limit 25 c9/1 50 @/1 50 d l
cv 6.3% 7.2% 12.3%
112
The CV includes the variation of the cyclosporine metabolites. The recovery in blood ranged from 72-85% with an average of 79.2%. The recoveries of the metabolites 8 , 26, 17 and the internal standard Cyclosporine D are shown i n table V. The cyclosporine metabolites, the parent compound and the internal standard differ i n their lipophilic properties. Thus, the possibility must be taken into account that the recoveries of these compounds are not identical during the extraction procedure. In the table it is shown that the recovery of the internal standard i s signi fi cantly (p
Recoveries of the cyclosporine metabolites and the internal standard Cyclosporine D from bile and urine samples urine
Metabolite Cyclosporine D Metabolite 8 Metabolite 26 Metabolite 17 AV (metabolites)
bile
Recovery % 2 SD 78
-+
18
n
Recovery
8
15.2
+
4.2
7
3 2
78.7 71.8 69.4 73.3
t 8.2
3 3
73.4 78.1
8.9
85.1 79.5
2 4.2
3
6.9
8
%
5 SD
-t 5.2 + 16.6 + 10.7
n
3 9
AV: average. Kabra et al. (ref. 76) described an automated external column extraction by using an advanced automated sample processing unit (AASP, Varian, Walnut Creek, CA, USA) online with the LC. Blood samples were preextracted with acetonitrile/dimethyl sulfoxide (94/4 v/v) and hexane. C8 extraction columns were found to give a good recovery and
precision (refs. 76 and 77). The columns were primed w i t h a c e t o n i t r i l e / w a t e r (2/3 v / v ) and t h e aqueous phase + 1 m l water f o l l o w e d
(2/3 v/v)
by a c e t o n i t r i l e / w a t e r columns were
were passed through t h e columns.
loaded on t h e AASP
and purged w i t h
The
acetonitrile/water
(12/13 v / v ) . Wallemacq e t a l .
(ref.
77) a l s o described a c y c l o s p o r i n e e x t r a c t i o n
procedure u s i n g t h e AASP, combines
the
standard
a p p l i c a t e d t o serum samples.
reversed
phase
extraction
with
This method normal
phase
chromatography. With a m o d i f i c a t i o n i t i s p o s s i b l e t o e x t r a c t and analyse already
structurally
metabolites.
elucidated
and
u n t i 1 now unknown
The authors t e s t e d C18, C8, C2, 2-OH,
cyclosporine
CN and S i e x t r a c t i o n
column f o r t h e i r e x t r a c t i o n procedure summarized below and found C8 m a t e r i a l t o g i v e t h e b e s t r e s u l t s . The r e c o v e r i e s f o r these columns were
73% (C18), 70% (C2), 64% (CN), 64% (2-OH),
20% (SI) and 87% f o r C8. F o r
p r o t e i n p r e c i p i t a t i o n a c e t o n i t r i l e and t h e i n t e r n a l standard were added to
a
serum
sample.
The
sample
was
washed
with
hexane
and
the
a c e t o n i t r i l e / w a t e r phase was separated and d i l u t e d w i t h water i n t o t h e AASP
cartridges.
acetonitrile/water
Using
the
(33/67
v/v)
AASP
the
sample
are
purified
with
and hexane and d r i e d by sucking a i r
through t h e e x t r a c t i o n columns p r i o r t o i n j e c t i o n i n t o t h e HPLC system. To move i n t e r f e r i n g components of t h e b l o o d samples Moyer e t a l . ( r e f s . 140 and 141) developed a double c a r t r i d g e s o l i d phase e x t r a c t i o n procedure u s i n g two subsequent e x t r a c t i o n columns f i l l e d w i t h C18 bonded phase
and
silica
gel.
After
protein
precipitation
with
a c e t o n i t r i le/methanol ( 9 : l ) t h e supernatant i s r i n s e d through t h e C18 e x t r a c t i o n column by vacuum and i s washed w i t h waterhnethanol (70/30 v/v) and acetone/hexane
(1/99 v / v ) .
The c y c l o s p o r i n s were e l u t e d w i t h i s o -
propanol and e t h y l a c e t a t e ( 1 / 3 V / V ) and t h e e l u a t e was passed through a s i l i c a g e l e x t r a c t i o n column, which d i d n o t r e t a i n t h e c y c l o s p o r i n s b u t i n t e r f e r i n g m a t e r i a l s . A f t e r evaporation and r e c o n s t i t u t i o n i n t h e m o b i l e phase t h e sample was i n j e c t e d i n t o t h e HPLC. Another approach was t h e e x t r a c t i o n o f c y c l o s p o r i n e by charcoal r e s i n s ( r e f . 133). A f t e r hemolysis by f r e e z i n g and thawing and e x t r a c t i o n w i t h a c e t o n i t r i l e 5 m l aqueous s l u r r y c o n t a i n i n g 10 mg charcoal were p i p e t t e d t h e supernatant. A f t e r c e n t r i f u g a t i o n t h e aqueous to
a g i t a t i n g t h e m i x t u r e on p o r t i o n was decanted and
a shaker and t h e remaining
charcoal e x t r a c t e d w i t h e t h y l a c e t a t e . The e t h y l a c e t a t e was evaporated and t h e r e s i d u e r e c o n s t i t u t e d i n t h e mobile phase.
114
EXTRACTION AND ANALYSIS BY COLUMN-SWITCHING On-line column-switching techniques have been applied in most cases in the analysis of drugs in plasma or serum and urine (refs. 153 and 154). Blood sample clean-up with this technique has been developed to determine cyclosporine. On-1 i ne col umn-switchi ng techniques have the fol 1 owing advantages compared with liquid-liquid and solid-liquid extraction procedures (ref. 155) : 3.2.3
minimal loss of the material to be analysed, 2. short total analysis time, 3. highly selective and reproducible analysis because of fully automated sample preparation, 4. facilitated concentration in trace analysis. 1.
Column-switching techniques for purification and analysis of blood samples consist of the following four steps: 1. hemolysis, deproteinization and pH-adjustment, 2. sample purification on a precolumn,
3. separation on the analytical column, 4. column wash procedures and reequilibration of the system.
In contrast to plasma or serum blood contains more lipids and proteins, which cause column overloading and an increase in column back-pressure if the sample is injected directly requiring a short sample preparation prior to injection. Hemolysis and deproteinization is achieved by adding equal amounts of acetonitrile to the blood samples. This mixture is shaken and centrifuged and the supernatant containing the material to be analysed i s loaded on the extraction column inside the HPLC-system (refs. 121, 135, 138). On the pre-column the sample is purified by washing with non-eluting organic solvents or organic solvent/water mixtures. By combining front-cut and end-cut procedures (ref. 155) early and late eluted components are eliminated and only the relevant part of the chromatogram is switched to the analytical column (heart-cut) (ref. 155). Most column-switching blood sample clean-up techniques for cyclosporine use a heart-cut procedure (ref. 121, 135, 138). Most column-switching techniques described f o r cyclosporine analysis use no internal standard but an actual calibration curve for cyclosporine quantification. They show excel lent reproducibi 1 i ty , recovery and detection limit (Table 111).
115 The column-switching technique described by Nussbaumer e t a l .
(ref.
121) was a m o d i f i c a t i o n o f t h e column-switching technique proposed by E r n i e t a l . ( r e f . 155). A f t e r p r o t e i n p r e c i p i t a t i o n w i t h a c e t o n i t r i l e t h e sample was i n j e c t e d onto a 40 x 4.6 mm 30-40 p RP 8 column kept a t room temperature where i t was washed. P u r i f i c a t i o n and a n a l y s i s o f t h e sample was performed by a step g r a d i e n t u s i n g subsequently m e t h a n o l l w a t e r l acetonitri le, water/acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran and methanol as eluents. A f t e r clean-up t h e c y c l o s p o r i n e c o n t a i n i n g f r a c t i o n was switched by forward f l u s h i n g t h e pre-column ( r e f , 156) t o t h e 150 x 4.6 mm 5 f l RP
18 a n a l y t i c a l column by h e a r t - c u t .
The a n a l y t i c a l
column was kept a t
70°C. The method described by Schran e t a l .
(ref.
127) and Smith e t a l .
( r e f . 126) i n c l u d e d an automated o n - l i n e l i q u i d - l i q u i d p u r i f i c a t i o n step. P r o t e i n p r e c i p i t a t i o n was achieved by adding acetoni t r i l e / w a t e r (97.5/2.5 v/v)
t o t h e blood sample. The supernatant was i n j e c t e d i n t o t h e m i c r o -
processor c o n t r o l l e d Technicon system (Technicon Instruments, Tarrytown, NY, USA), wherein t h e sample was washed a u t o m a t i c a l l y w i t h hexane and was i n j e c t e d o n t o a C8 column, which was kept a t 75°C. The h i g h temperature
of t h e e x t r a c t i o n column improves s e p a r a t i o n r e s u l t i n g i n s m a l l e r c u t times and l e s s i n t e r f e r i n g m a t e r i a l on t h e a n a l y t i c a l column. Cyclosporine was e l u t e d w i t h a c e t o n i t r i l e / w a t e r o n t o a C18 column u s i n g a h e a r t - c u t
55/45
procedure.
(v/v)
and was loaded
From t h e C18 column
c y c l o s p o r i n e was e l u t e d i s o c r a t i c a l l y by a c e t o n i t r i l e / w a t e r 75/25 ( v / v ) . The b a s i c s t r a t e g i e s of two l a t e r p u b l i s h e d methods ( r e f s . were s i m i l a r t o t h a t of
Nussbaumer e t a l .
(ref.
121).
135,138)
After protein
p r e c i p i t a t i o n w i t h a c e t o n i t r i l e samples were loaded on t h e e x t r a c t i o n columns and p u r i f i e d by a c e t o n i t r i l e / w a t e r .
During e l u t i o n from t h e
e x t r a c t i o n column t h e c y c l o s p o r i n e c o n t a i n i n g f r a c t i o n was switched t o t h e a n a l y t i c a l column by h e a r t - c u t .
The main d i f f e r e n c e t o t h e e a r l i e r
method was t h e use of a p r o t e i n s e p a r a t i o n column, 5 p , 75 x 4.6 mm and a subsequent 75 x 4.6 mm,
3 p octadecyl column as a n a l y t i c a l column ( r e f . 135) and 30 x 4 mm cyano-propyl 5 p precolumn combined w i t h a CLC-TMS, 5 p column (Shimadzu, Kyoto, Japan) which a l l o w lower oven temperatures (60
OC)
f o r b o t h a n a l y t i c a l and e x t r a c t i o n column and low
f l o w r a t e s t o o b t a i n a s u f f i c i e n t separation. The pre-columns were k e p t a t t h e same temperature as t h e a n a l y t i c a l columns. 3.3
CHROMATOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS
OF SANDIMMUN~ (CYCLOSPORINE) AND ITS
METABOLITES Chromatography o f c y c l o s p o r i n e and i t s m e t a b o l i t e s i s discussed i n d e t a i 1 i n t h i s chapter s i n c e chromatography of c y c l o s p o r i n e i s acquainted
116
with some interesting analytical problems that must also be considered in chromatographic analysis of other drugs. However, the measurement of cyclosporine metabolites is currently under discussion and will be of great impact when one or more of the metabolites will prove to be biologically active, which seems to be very likely. One of the chromatographic difficulties in HPLC analysis of cyclosporine is the characteristic peak broadening. It is the result of an interconversion of several cyclosporine conformers exhibiting different chromatographic characteristics. Chromatography at 4OC results in a splitting into single conformer peaks. High temperatures accelerate interconversion of the conformers resulting in sharper peaks, representing an average conformer composition (ref. 157). Further analytical conditions to overcome separation of cyclosporine conformers resulting in peak broadening are: 1. low pH at 3.0 - 5.0 of the mobile phase, composition o f the mobile phase, e.g. gradient elution, 3. using a more polar stationary phase for example C1, C2, or CN. 2.
Further positive effects of HPLC at elevated temperatures are (ref. 158) : 1. High temperatures decrease viscosity of the eluents allowing the use of sorbents with a smaller particle size and/ or pellicular sorbents, resulting in a greater column efficiency. 2. Increasing temperature accelerates sorption by increasing mass transfer and kinetic rates. This effect is of special benefit for chromatography of large or very lipophilic molecules, as which cyclosporine must be regarded.
Adverse effect of increased temperatures are: 1. Faster degradation of the stationary phase. 2. Acceleration of not desirable on-column reactions, as expressed by the dimensionless Damkohler number (ref. 159).
Both effects are of practical value for HPLC analysis of cyclosporine as discussed below. Assessment of cyclosporine analysis by supercritical fluid chromatography (SFC) will be the subject of further investigations. Some authors (ref. 119, 123) observed a fast degradation of their
117 a n a l y t i c a l columns w i t h i n 100-150 h. Other authors r e p o r t e d c o n s i d e r a b l y l o n g e r column l i f e times up t o 3000 i n j e c t e d samples ( r e f s . 137, 157). Reversed phase columns can be operated by temperatures up t o 100°C w i t h o u t degradation (personal communication, Merck, Darmstadt, FRG) the
beginning
of
a n a l y t i c a l columns
cyclosporine
measurement
in
our
laboratory
(C8) had a l s o a very reduced l i f e span.
.
At
our
The main
reasons turned o u t t o be t o o f a s t and f r e q u e n t h e a t i n g and c o o l i n g o f t h e column and t h e i n j e c t i o n o f p o o r l y p u r i f i e d samples. Thus o u r a n a l y t i c a l column was kept a t 75 "C w i t h a small f l o w o f 0.1 ml/min d u r i n g p e r i o d s w i t h o u t analysis.
The a n a l y t i c a l column was guarded by a
precolumn and
a f t e r each a n a l y s i s t h e column was f l u s h e d w i t h a c e t o n i t r i l e / w a t e r
3.0)
(pH
(90/10 v/v) t o remove peaks n o t b e i n g e l u t e d d u r i n g a n a l y s i s t i m e .
We found 2 peaks e l u t i n g a f t e r i n j e c t i n g b l o o d sample e x t r a c t s t h a t c o u l d n o t be detected a f t e r i n j e c t i o n o f c y c l o s p o r i n e standard s o l u t i o n s which were e l i m i n a t e d by t h e a c e t o n i t r i l e f l u s h .
Without t h e column f l u s h i n g
s t e p degradation o f t h e a n a l y t i c a l column occurred a f t e r a few hundred analyses r e s u l t i n g i n a proceeding decrease o f t h e t h e o r e t i c a l p l a t e s of t h e column and an i n c r e a s i n g back pressure o f t h e a n a l y t i c a l system. I n our system t h e r i s e i n pressure was caused by plugged i n l e t f r i t s of t h e precolumn and t h e a n a l y t i c a l column. I t disappeared a f t e r exchanging t h e metal f r i t s by t e f l o n f r i t s ( r e f s . 149 and 150). Lensmeyer e t a l . ( r e f s . 110,148) s e t a s i l i c a s a t u r a t i n g column between t h e pumps and t h e i n j e c t o r v a l v e t o minimize d i s s o l u t i o n o f t h e s i l i c a based sorbent i n t h e a n a l y t i c a l columns. Another approach t o extend column l i f e t i m e was t h e use o f a cyanopropyl
analytical
column which a l l o w s r e d u c t i o n of
the
column temperature t o 60°C as described above. U l t r a v i o l e t absorption from compounds n o t d e r i v e d from c y c l o s p o r i n e can produce peaks i n t h e chromatograms.
E s p e c i a l l y p l a s t i c s o f t e n e r s from
l a b o r a t o r y equipment and from r o t o r seals, valves and f r i t s i n s i d e t h e HPLC-system can d i s t u r b c y c l o s p o r i n e a n a l y s i s . I n our e x t r a c t i o n procedure o n l y d i e t h y l e t h e r cleaned c e n t r i f u g e tubes and i n j e c t o r v i a l s were used a f t e r t h e e l u t i o n step from t h e e x t r a c t i o n column and t h e f i n a l hexane wash removed remaining contaminations (2.2). I n our l a b o r a t o r y t h e f o l l o w i n g chromatographic system was developed and i s c u r r e n t l y i n use ( r e f . 150): R The column used a r e two s e q u e n t i a l 250 x 4.0 mm C8, 7 f l LiChrosorb f i l l e d manu-fix R c a r t r i d g e s guarded by a 50 x 4 mm pre-column f i l l e d w i t h t h e same m a t e r i a l ( a l l Merck, Darmstadt, FRG). Analysis were performed on an HP 1090 HPLC system (Hewlett Packard, Karlsruhe, FRG). Solvent A was water adjusted t o pH 3 w i t h phosphoric acid; s o l v e n t B a c e t o n i t r i l e . The
118
eluents were degassed by ultra-sound and vacuum prior to use and during run by helium insufflation. The flow rate was set at 1.4 ml/min, the detector wavelength at 205 nm and the oven temperature at 75OC. For elution three superimposed sequential linear gradients with increasing steepness resulting in an almost concave gradient were used. The gradient began at 43/57 (v/v) acetonitrile/water (pH 3.0) and increasing to acetonitrile/water (PH 3.0) 49/51 (v/v) until 20 min after injection, to acetonitrile/water (PH 3.0) 59/41 (v/v) until 35 min after injection and to acetonitrile/water (PH 3.0) 80/20 (v/v) until 45 min after injection to stay at this level for 5 min. The gradient was followed by a column clean-up step to remove late eluting lipophilic material otherwise occupying the binding sites of the column material resulting in decreasing efficiency of the column. The column was flushed with acetonitrile/water (pH 3.0) for 5 min and then reequilibrated to the start conditions with an eluent composition of acetonitrile/water (pH 3.0) 43/57 (v/v). Cycle time between two injections was 60 min. The stationary phase used for HPLC analysis ranged from silica gel to RP18 material. For our system C8 sorbent gave the best results. With more polar sorbents like C4, C 1 or CN a reasonable resolution especially of the metabolites 1 and 17 was not possible in our system. Wang et al. compared different columns of the same length and diameter filled with CN, phenyl and four different C18 packings under the same conditions analysing bile samples (ref. 160). In the study C18 columns gave the best results in resolving cyclosporine metabolites, especially 1 and 17. C8 columns were not included i n the study. Rocher et al. (ref. 161) found C8 columns superior to C18 columns in cyclosporine measurement. The two columns were tested under the same conditions and the concentrations measured with the C18 column were higher than those measured with the C8 column due to an interfering peak that was present in high concentration in patients with renal insufficiency and could be separated from the cyclosporine peak using a C8 column. Moyer et al. (refs. 140 and 141) proposed the use of a more polar phase to minimize cyclosporine band broadening. Unfortunately more polar columns are less effective in separating cyclosporine metabolites (ref. 160). One of the major problems in HPLC analysis of cyclosporine and its metabolites is the great number of metabolites. Until now more than 30 could be isolated in our laboratory (Fig. 5 ) . To increase the resolving power of our chromatographic system gradient elution and an elongated analytical column were used. The gradient consists of three linear gradients, since the cyclosporine metabolites detectable with our system
119
are eluted in three main groups (Metabolite 8, 9, 26; 13, 25; 203-218, 17, 1, 18, 21). Each of the linear gradients was designed to get the best resolution possible o f each metabolite group. Superposition o f the three linear gradient resulted in the concave gradient described (Fig. 6 ) . Mass spectrometric data of cyclosporine metabolites corresponding to Fig. 5, isolated from human bile or generated by human liver microsomes.
TABLE V I
metabol i te
molecular weight
f ormu 1 a Cs+2 cs + c s + 2 CS + 2 CS+ c s + 2
1
H355
1234.4
2
17
1218.4
3 4
8
1234.6 1232.4
5
H410/420
6 7 8
203-218
9 10 11
H230
1216.4 1220.4 1217.4
0 0 0
-2H 0 - 2 H 0 0
CS + 2 0
1232.4
CS + 2 0
1250.4
c s + 3 0
1264.4
CS + 4 0
1248.4
CS + 3 0 cs + 0 c s + 2 0
-
2 H
-
2 H
-
CH3
CH3
2 H
2 H
12
18
1218.4
13 14 15
H310 26
1234.6 1234.6 1394.2
c s + 2 0 Cs + 0 + glucoronic
1219.4
c s + 2 0
1250.4
c s + 3 0
H235
acid 16 17
-
18
1
1218.4
cs +
19
10
1234.4
20
1251.4
21
1248.4
CS + 3 0
1234.6 1188.4
c s + 2 0 cs
1203.4
cs +
0
1203.4
cs +
0
1219.4
c s + 2 0
1219.4
c s + 2 0
23 24 25 26 27
16 21 13
9
28 29
25
1235.4
c s + 3 0
1204.4
cs
+
CH3
-
CH3
-
CH3
-
CH3
-
CH3
0
c s + 2 0 c s + 4 0
22
-
0
-
2 H
CH3
CH3
CH3 CH3
120
26 -81 -
28 4 24 5 23 --
2---12 18
10
7
20 -
-
9 17 1115
27
3---14
I
0
1
10
I
20
I
I
1
30
40
50 time (min)
Fig. 5
Shows a chromatogram of a sample containing human microsomes at a concentration o f 3 mg protein/ml and cyclosporine. Cyclosporine and the microsomes were incubated for 2 h prior to extraction and analysis as described in the text (2.2, 3.3) and refs. 149151. Cyclosporine D was used as internal standard. The corresponding fractions were isolated by HPLC and further analysed by FABMS. The mass spectrometric data are listed in Table V I . The numbers of the metabolites in the Table correspond to the fraction numbers in the chromatogram. The nomenclature as proposed by refs. 94, 95 and 151 is used in the metabolite column o f Table V I . HPLC parameters Figure 5: Detector wavqlength: 205 nm, oven temperature: 75OC, plot attenuation: 2 , flow: 1.4 ml/min. Abbreviation Cs: cyclosporine
121
I
0
0
I
10
10
20
30
40
50 0
20
30
40
50 0
10
20
30
4 0 0 time (min)
fi, 10
20
30
40
50
time (min)
I
0
-.-Q
.
10
20
30
40
50
122
With the HPLC procedure described, 11 structurally elucidated as well as 7 not yet structurally known cyclosporine metabolites could be quantified and isolated from urine and bile of grafted patients (Fig. 7 ) . For peak identification the chromatogram was fractionated and the corresponding materi a1 was isolated by semi -preparative HPLC. Constituents of an isolated fraction were regarded to be identical with authentic cyclosporine metabolites if: 1. no peak with an equal retention time was found in blank samples of not cyclosporine treated patients, 2. the unspecific cyclosporine radioimmunoassay cross-reacted with the fraction in question, 3. the material in the fraction showed mass spectrometric properties implying the structure of a cyclosporine derivative, 4 . the isolated fraction and the authentic metabolite have the same retention time under the chromatographic conditions described above (Fig. 8)
J I
0
I
10
I
20
I
30
I
I
40
50 tima (min)
Fig. 7
Chromatogram of a urine extract of a liver grafted patient. The sample was extracted and analysed according to 2.2, 3.3, refs. 149-151. The HPLC system and parameters were the same as described in Fig. 6. The numbers indicate cyclosporine metabolites not yet structurally identfied using the nomenclature developed in our laboratory (ref. 151). These metabolites could be i s o lated by semi-preparative HPLC and their biological activity was evaluated. They can be quantitatively determined from the chromatograms using the internal standard cyclosporine D (Cs D). The corresponding FAB-MS data are listed in Table 6. Cs: cyclosporine. Arrow indicates injection.
123 1
fraction 21
L A . 1 10 20
I
30
0
(0
timo (min)
I 0
I
I
1
1
10
20
30
40
time (min)
Fig. 8
Chromatograms o f f r a c t i o n 21 ( t o p ) i s o l a t e d from a u r i n e e x t r a c t of a l i v e r g r a f t e d and c y c l o s p o r i n e t r e a t e d p a t i e n t and t h e a u t h e n t i c m e t a b o l i t e 16 (bottom), i s o l a t e d and i d e n t i f i e d as described i n r e f s . 94 and 95. The chromatographic c o n d i t i o n s and HPLC parameters were t h e same as described i n 3.3 and r e f . 150. The a n a l y s i s were s t o ped a f t e r 40 min. Arrow i n d i c a t e s i n j e c t i o n . Both peaks a r e e l u t e d from t h e column w i t h a r e t e n t i o n t i m e o f 33.7 min.
(i)
I n HPLC a n a l y s i s considered:
o f cyclosporine
the following
problems must
be
1. The l a r g e number o f c y c l o s p o r i n e m e t a b o l i t e s and t h e i r o n l y small s t r u c t u r a l d i fferences make a reasonable r e s o l u t i o n almost impossible. Figure 5 shows t h e m e t a b o l i t e s
that
c o u l d be i s o l a t e d by
semi-
p r e p a r a t i v e HPLC from a suspension o f human l i v e r microsomes (3 mg/ml p r o t e i n ) a f t e r i n c u b a t i o n w i t h 10 19 c y c l o s p o r i n e f o r 2 h. The numbers i n d i c a t e t h e peaks o r r e g i o n s i n t h e chromatogram where t h e c o r r e s ponding
metabolite
structural
data
as
could
be
isolated
elucidated
by
and
fast
are atom
assigned
to
bombardment
the mass
spectrometry (FAB-MS). These d a t a i n d i c a t e t h a t several peaks i n t h e chromatogram represent a conglomerate o f several m e t a b o l i t e s . AS
124 example t h e i s o l a t e d f r a c t i o n c o n t a i n i n g m e t a b o l i t e 9 i s shown i n F i g . 9. Although t h e peaks seem symmetric and pure a f t e r i n j e c t i n g t h e i s o l a t e d f r a c t i o n i n t o t h e HPLC, FAB-MS d e t e c t s t h r e e peaks r e p r e s e n t i n g d i f f e r e n t cyclosporine derivatives.
Fraction 8
HPLC
1 /
r
0
’“1
10
30
20
40
50 time (min)
12181 11230
Qh
-
1
0 1000
.
1200
- FAB - ms 0
1400 molacular weight
Fig. 9
The chromatogram (top) shows f r a c t i o n 8 c o n t a i n i n g m e t a b o l i t e 9 (nomenclature r e f . 94) , i s o l a t e d by semi -preparat ive HPLC from u r i n e o f a l i v e r g r a f t e d p a t i e n t and r e i n j e c t e d i n t o t h e HPLC system. The chromatographic c o n d i t i o n s and HPLC parameters a r e t h e same as described i n 3.3, Fig. 6, r e f s . 150 and 151. Although t h e peak i s symmetric and seems t o be caused by a monosubstance, t h e corresponding FAB-MS (negative mode) (bottom) a n a l y s i s showed a t l e a s t 3 d i f f e r e n t c y c l o s p o r i n e d e r i v a t i v e s ( r e f . 151). Arrow i n d i c a t e s i n j e c t i o n .
2. I t i s very l i k e l y t h a t t h e chromatographic c o n d i t i o n s (pH 3.0,
75OC)
change t h e c y c l o s p o r i n e m e t a b o l i t e p a t t e r n detected. Henricsson e t a l . ( r e f . 162) r e p o r t e d t h e i d e n t i f i c a t i o n o f a s u l f a t e d c y c l o s p o r i n e d e r i v a t i v e , i s o l a t e d by ion-exchange chromatography. Unter HPLC c o n d i t i o n s described above t h e b i n d i n g of s u l f a t e d o r glucuronated d e r i v a t i v e s can be hydrolyzed.
3. P l a s t i c m a t e r i a l leached from l a b o r a t o r y t o o l s have s i m i l a r s p e c t r a l properties
as
the cyclosporins
and s i m i l a r r e t e n t i o n times. F i g . 10
125 shows a chromatogram o f a b l o o d sample o f a l i v e r g r a f t e d p a t i e n t w i t h o u t c y c l o s p o r i n e therapy. The sample had c o n t a c t w i t h a p o l y p r o p y l e n t u b e o f t h e evaporation apparatus. Several peaks i n t h e range o f t h e c y c l o s p o r i n e m e t a b o l i t e s were detected. The chromatogram below i n t h e same Fig. shows a chromatogram o f p l a s t i c material.
t h e same r e - e x t r a c t e d
sample w i t h o u t
interfering
I n t e r f e r e n c e o f o t h e r drugs w i t h t h e HPLC assay has
been reported f o r sulfamethoxazole ( r e f . 163). 4. The q u a n t i f i c a t i o n o f c y c l o s p o r i n e m e t a b o l i t e s i s i n f l u e n c e d by t h e chromatograpic system used. A peak s e p a r a t i o n down t o t h e b a s e l i n e i s n o t p o s s i b l e f o r most o f t h e c y c l o s p o r i n e m e t a b o l i t e s . The peak area t h e r e f o r e depends on t h e i n t e g r a t i o n s o f t w a r e and i n t e g r a t i o n method used. As o u t l i n e d above most peaks do n o t represent a monosubstance. Using an HPLC system w i t h a g r e a t e r r e s o l v i n g power may r e s u l t i n two o r more s m a l l e r peaks ( r e f . 161). Therefore t h e r e p r o d u c i b i l i t y i s good f o r one HPLC system b u t comparison o f t h e m e t a b o l i t e concent r a t i o n s measured w i t h o t h e r l a b o r a t o r i e s i s d i f f i c u l t . Lensmeyer e t a l .
(ref.
148) compared t h r e e chromatographic systems
u s i n g a 80 x 4 mm 5 p o c t y l column, a 160x4 mm 5 p s i l i c a g e l column and a 250 x 4.6
mm cyano-propyl
column.
p r e f e r r e d and r u n w i t h water/ acidln-butylamine (600/390/20/0.16/ r e s u l t s i n t h e systems t e s t e d .
The cyano propyl-column
was
a c e t o n i t r i leltetrahydrofuranelacetic 0.1 v/v/v/v/v/) gave t h e b e s t
The chromatograms
show an incomplete
separation o f t h e m e t a b o l i t e s 1 and 18. Bowers e t a l .
( r e f . 145) simultaneously analysed c y c l o s p o r i n e and i t s
m e t a b o l i t e s on a 50x4.6 mm 3 p octadecyl column u s i n g an i s o c r a t i c g r a d i e n t w i t h waterlmethanollacetonitrile temperature o f 70°C.
(34120146
v/v/v/)
a t an oven
Incomplete s e p a r a t i o n o f t h e h y d r o p h i l i c group of
cyclosporine metabolites
was
achieved and t h e m e t a b o l i t e s
were
not
q u a n t i t i v e l y determined i n b i l e . Burckart e t a l . ( r e f . 164) e x t r a c t e d c y c l o s p o r i n e and i t s m e t a b o l i t e s from pooled b i l e u s i n g a m o d i f i e d e x t r a c t i o n procedure according t o Sawchuk e t a l . ( r e f . 111). c y c l o s p o r i n e and i t s m e t a b o l i t e s were e l u t e d from t h e a n a l y t i c a l column by an a c e t o n i t r i l e l w a t e r g r a d i e n t . Rosano e t a l .
(ref.
109) e x t r a c t e d c y c l o s p o r i n e and i t s m e t a b o l i t e s
from blood u s i n g a l i q u i d - l i q u i d e x t r a c t i o n procedure w i t h d i e t h y l e t h e r . Cyclosporine and i t s m e t a b o l i t e s 1, 17 and 21 were seperated i s o c r a t i c l y . Wallemacq e t a l .
( r e f s . 77 and 165) used a normal phase HPLC system
f o r a n a l y s i s o f c y c l o s p o r i n e and i t s m e t a b o l i t e s . A 3 p p a r t i c l e s i z e CN column
and
hexane:
isopropanol
(85115 v/v)
as m o b i l e phase were used
126 ( r e f s . 77 and 165). Column temperature was 50
OC.
separated by semi-preparative p r o p e r t i e s were evaluated.
their
I
0
I
0
HPLC
and
28 m e t a b o l i t e s c o u l d be
mass
spectrometric
,
10
20
30
40 50 time (min)
10
20
30
40
50 time(min)
Fig. 10 The chromatograms show t h e HPLC a n a l y s i s o f t h e same blood sample received from a l i v e r g r a f t e d p a t i e n t w i t h o u t c y c l o s p o r i n e therapy f o r 10 days. The e x t r a c t i o n procedure, t h e chromat o g r a p h i c c o n d i t i o n s and HPLC parameters were t h e same as described b e f o r e (2.2, 3.3, F i g . 6, r e f s . 149-151). During e x t r a c t i o n , t h e sample showed i n t h e chromatogram above had come i n t o c o n t a c t w i t h a p o l y p r o p y l e n t u b e o f t h e evaporation apparatus r e s u l t i n g i n contamination w i t h p l a s t i c m a t e r i a l . The arrows w i t h t h e numbers according t o Maurer's nomenclature ( r e f s . 94 and 95) i n d i c a t e t h e r e t e n t i o n times o f t h e c y c l o s p o r i n e metabolites. The chromatogram shows t h e a n a l y s i s o f t h e same blood sample w i t h o u t contaminating m a t e r i a l s . Both samples c o n t a i n t h e i n t e r n a l standard c y c l o s p o r i n e D (CsD). Arrow i n d i c a t e s i n j e c t ion. 4.
TROUBLE SHOOTING I N DEVELOPMENT OF BLOOD SAMPLE CLEAN-UP PROCEDURES Unexpected losses o f t h e compounds o f i n t e r e s t d u r i n g blood sample
clean-up can be caused by t h e f o l l o w i n g f a c t o r s ( r e f . 2 ) : 1. Chemical breakdown o r a d s o r p t i o n o f t h e compounds o f i n t e r e s t because of a t o o l o n g s t o r i n g p e r i o d o r inadequate s t o r i n g c o n d i t i o n s , 2. adsorption o f t h e drugs on m e t a l , g l a s s o r p l a s t i c surfaces of
1 aboratory equipment,
127 3. c o - p r e c i p i t a t i o n d u r i n g d e p r o t e i n i z a t i o n , 4. inadequate pH o f t h e b u f f e r s and s o l v e n t s used, 5 . low p a r t i t i o n c o e f f i c i e n t i n t h e o r g a n i c e x t r a c t i o n s o l v e n t , 6. i n s u f f i c i e n t adsorption on t h e s o l i d phase m a t e r i a l used, 7. chemical breakdown because o f chemical, b i o l o g i c a l , photochemical and/or thermal i n s t a b i l i t y , 8. c h e l a t i o n e.g. w i t h heavy metals o r i n t e r c a l a t i o n ,
9. l o s s d u r i n g t h e evaporation s t e p because o f v o l a t i l i t y o f t h e drug, 10. i n s o l u b l e r e s i d u e a f t e r evaporation, 11. i n s u f f i c i e n t d e r i v a t i z a t i o n because o f an incomplete r e a c t i o n , by-products and removal o f excess reagents Contamination o f t h e sample d u r i n g e x t r a c t i o n and a n a l y s i s can be caused by: 1. c o e x t r a c t i o n o f i n t e r f e r i n g m a t e r i a l such as 1 i p o p r o t e i n s and 1 ip i d s / l ip o i ds , 2. use o f contaminated s o l v e n t s o r s o l v e n t s o f a minor p u r i t y , 3. i n t e r f e r i n g residues i n glass-ware and l a b o r a t o r y t o o l s , 4. leached p l a s t i c s o f t e n e r s from l a b o r a t o r y t o o l s and e x t r a c t i o n columns, 5. unadequately primed s o l i d phase column m a t e r i a l , 6. contaminated i n j e c t o r needle o f t h e i n j e c t i o n system, 7. s o l u b i l i s e d p l a s t i c m a t e r i a l from t h e v i a l s and t h e v i a l caps o f t h e i n j e c t i o n system, 8. s o l u b i l i s e d p l a s t i c s o f t e n e r s from t h e valves, r o t o r s e a l s and c a p i l l a r i e s o f t h e HPLC-system. REFERENCES 1.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
9. 10. 11.
O.L. Garver, H. Dekirmenjian, J.M. Davis, R. Casper, and S.
Ericksen, Am. J . P s y c h i a t r y , 134 (1977) 304-307. J.A.F de S i l v a , i n : Trace o r g a n i c sample handling, E. Reid (ed.), E l l i s Horwood, Chichester, 1981, pp 192-204. M. Zakaria and P.R. Brown, Anal. Biochem., 25 (1982) 120. R. Prasad, M.S. Maddux, M.F. Mozes, N.S. Bishop and A. Maturen, T r a n s p l a n t a t i o n , 39 (1985) 667-669. P.R. Brown, Chromatogr. Sci., 28 (1984) 31-48. J.A.F. de S i l v a J . Chromatogr., 273 (1983) 19-42. W.O. Pierce, T.C. Lamoreaux, F.M. Urry, .L. Kopjak and B.S. F i n k l e , J. Anal. Toxicol., 2 (1978) 26-31. 0. Sohn, J. Simon, M.A. Hanna and G. G h a l i , J. Chromatogr. S c i . , 10 (1972) 294-296. J.A.F. de S i l v a , J. Chromatogr., 340 (1985) 3-30. J.A.F. de S i l v a , Anorexigenics, a n t i p s y c h o t i c s , and a n t i a n x i e t y drugs, i n K. T s u j i (ed.), GLC and HPLC d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f t h e r a p e u t i c agents, v o l . 2, Chromatogr. S c i . , Marcel Dekker, 1978, pp. 581-636. E.H. F o e r s t e r , J. Dempsey and J.C. G a r r i o t t , J . Anal. T o x i c o l . , 3 (1979) 87-91.
12. T.W. Guentert, G.M. Wientjes, R.A. U ton, D.L. Combs and S. Riegelman, J. Chromatogr. , 163 (1979p 373-382. 13. T.A. Jennison, B.S. F i n k l e , D.M. Chinn and D.J. Crouch, J. Chromatogr. Sci., 17 (1979) 64-74. 14. S.H. Wallace, V.P. Shah and S . Riegelman, J. Pharm. Sci., 66 (1977) 527-530. 15. S. Loche, A.B. Rifkind, E. Stoner, A. Faedda, M.C. Garabedian and M.I. New, Ther. Drug Monit., 8 (1986) 214-218. 16. B. Scales and P.B. Copsey, J. Pharm. Pharmacol., 27 (1975) 430-433. 17. D. Westerlund, B. Petterson and J. C a r l q v i s t , J. Pharm. Sci., 71 (1982) 1148-1151. 18. R.D. Budd and D.F. Mathis, J. Anal. Toxicol., 6 (1982) 317-320. 19. W. Duenges, E. Bergheim-Irps, H. Straubs and R.E. Kaiser, J. Chromatogr., 145 (1978) 265-274. 20. C.V. P u g l i s i and J.A.F. de S i l v a , J. Chromatogr., 226 (1981) 135-146. 21. H.M. Stevens, J. Forensic Sci. Sot., 25 (1985) 67-80. 22. K. Worm, 2 . Rechtsmed., 77 (1975) 41-45. 23. J.K. Stoltenborg, C.V. P u g l i s i , F. Rubio and F.M. Vane, J. Pharm. Sci., 70 (1981) 1207-1212. 24. J.E. O'Brien, V. Abbey, G. Hinsvark, J. Perel and M. F i n s t e r , J. Pharm. Sci., 68 (1979) 75-78. 25. A. Viala, J.P. Can0 and A. Durand, J. Chromatogr., 111 (1975) 299-303. 26. Y. Bergqvist and S . Eckerbom, J. Chromatogr., 306 (1984) 147-153. 27. E. Pussard, F. Verdier and M.C. Blayo, J. Chromatogr., 374 (1986) 111-118. 28. F.C. C h u r c h i l l , D.L. Mount and I.K. Schwartz, J. Chromatogr., 274 (1983) 111-120. 29. W.C. Randolph, V.L. Osborne, S.S. Wal kenstein and A.P. I n t o c c i a , J. Pharm. Sci., 66 (1977) 1148-1150. 30. D. Shapcott and B. Lemieux, C l i n . Biochem., 8 (1975) 283-287. 31. M.S. Lennard, J.H. S i l a s , A.J. Smith and G.T. Tucker, J. Chromatogr., 133 (1977) 165-166. 32. P.M. Kabra, G.L. Steven and L.J. Marton, J. Chromatogr., 150 (1978) 355-360. 33. N. Scagliola, R. J u l i e n and C. Dreux, Ann. B i o l . C l i n . (Paris), 34 (1976) 27-32. 34. K.M. Wolfram and T.D. Bjornsson, J. Chromatogr., 183 (1980) 57-64. 35. M.S. M i l l e r and A.J. Gandolfi, Anaesthesiology, 51 (1979) 542-544. 36. P. Moore, K. Mai and C.M. Lai , J. Pharm. Sci., 75 (1986) 424-426. 37. J. A. Vinson, D.D. Patel and A.H. P a t e l , Anal. Chem., 49 (1977) 163-175. 38. J.N. P i r l , V.M. Pappa and J.J. Spikes, 3. Anal. Toxicol., 3 (1979) 129-132. 39. S.E. T e t t , D.J. C u t l e r and K.F. Brown, J. Chromatogr., 344 (1983) 241-248. 40. S.A. Stout and C.L. De Vane, Psychopharmacology ( B e r l i n ) , 84 (1984) 39-41. 41. M.M. Kochar, L.T. Bavda and R.S. Bushan, Res. Commun. Chem. Pathol. Pharmacol , 14 (1976) 367-376. 42. D.E. Schwartz and U.B. Ranalder, Biomed. Mass Spectrom., 8 (1981) 589-592. ... 43. J.M. Grindel, P.F. T i l t o n and R.D. Shaffer, J. Pharm. Sci., 68 (1979) 718-721. 44. T. Nakagawa, T. Higuchi, J.L. Haslam and R.D. Shaffer, J. Pharm. Sci., 68 (1979) 718-721. 45. R.K. Lynn, R.H. Leger, W.P. Gordon, G.D. Olsen and N. Gerber, J. Chromatogr., 131 (1977) 329-340. 46. S. Felby, Forensic Sci. I n t . , 13 (1979) 145-150. 47. M.W. White, J. Chromatogr., 178 (1979) 229-240.
.
129 48. 49. 50.
51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. 61. 62. 63. 64. 65. 66. 67. 68. 69. 70. 71. 72. 73. 74. 75. 76. 77. 78. 79. 80. 81. 82. 83.
84. 85.
L.A. A s a l i , R.L. N a t i o n and K.F. Brown, J. Chromatogr., 278 (1983) 326-335. M. S t ef e k , L. Benes and V. Kovac k, Biomed. Mass Spectrom., 12 (1985) 388-392. P.M. Kabra, G. G o t e l l i , R. S t a n f 11 and L.J. Marton, C l i n . Chem., 22 (1976) 824-827. F. de Bros and E.M. Wolshin, Anal. Chem., 50 (1978) 521-525. C.J. Reddrop, W. Riess and T.F. S l a t e r , J. Chromatogr. 192 (1980) 3 7 5 -386. A.J. Wood, K. C a r r , R.E V e s t a l , S. B e l c h er, G.R. W i l k i n s o n and D.G. Shand, B r . J. C l i n . Pharmacol., 6 (1978) 345-350. C.V. P u g l i s i , F.J. F e r r a r a Jr., J.A.F. de S i l v a , J. Chromatogr., 275 (1983) 319-333. H. Sheehan and P. Haythorn, J. Chromatogr., 117 (1976) 392-398. 6. Levine, R. Blanke and J. V a l e n t o u r , J. Anal. T o x i c o l . , 7 (1983) 207-208. E.M. Wolshin, M.H. Cavanough, C.V. Manion, M.B. Meyer, E. Milano, C.R. Reardon and S.M. Wolshin, J. Pharm. Sci. , 67 (1978) 1962-1695. D.E. Mundy, M.P. Q u i c k and A.F. Machin, J. Chromatogr., 121 (1976) 335-342. H.S. Chun Hong, R.J. Steltenkamp and N.L. Smith, 3. Pharm. Sci., 64 (1975) 2007-2008. P.O. Edlund, J. Chromatogr., 206 (1981) 109-116. J. B r e i t e r , R. H e l g e r and H. Lang, F o r e n s i c Sci. , 7 (1976) 131-140. J. B r e i t e r , Arzneim. Forsch., 28 (1978) 1941-1944. A.W. Missen, C l i n . Chem., 22 (1976) 927-928. H.H. McCurdy, J. Anal. T o x i c o l . , 4 (1980) 82-85. H.H. McCurdy, L.J. Lewellen , J.C. Cagle and E.T. Solomons, J. Anal. T o x ic ol , 5 (1981) 253-257. H.J. S c h l i c h t and H.P. Gelbke, Z. Rechtsmed, 81 (1978) 25-30. 6. Ford, J. Vine and T.R. Watson, J. Anal. T oxicol. , 7 (1983) 116-118. J.A. A p f f e l , U.A.T. Brinkman and R.W. F r e i , J. L i q . Chromatogr., 5 (1982) 2413-2422. T.R. Mac Gregor, P.R. Fa r i n a , M. Hagopian, N . Hay, H.J. Esber and J.J. K e i r n s , Ther. Drug M o n i t . , 6 (1984) 83-90. S . N . Rao, A.K. Dhar, K. Kutt and M. Okamoto, J. Chromatogr., 231 (1982) 341-348. K.D.G. Edwards and M. McCredie, Med. J. A u s t r a l i a , 54 (1967) 534-539. N. E l a h i , 3 . Anal. To x i c o l . , 3 (1979) 35-38. J.M.F. Douse, J. Chromatogr., 301 (1984) 137-154. G. Cimbura and E. Koves, J. Anal. T o x i c o l . , 5 (1981) 296-299. A.W. Missen and J.F. Lewin, C l i n . Chim. Acta, 53 (1974) 389-390. P.M. Kabra and J.H. Wa l l , J. Chromatogr., 385 (1987) 305-310. P.E. Wallemacq and M. Lesne, J. Chromatogr., 413 (1987) 131-140. M. Bogusz, J. G i e r z and J. B i a l k a , F o r e n s i c Sci. , 12 (1978) 73-82. G. I b ra him, S. Andryauskas and M.L. Bastos, J. Chromatogr., 108 (1975) 107-116. G. Machata and W. V y c u d i l i k , Arch. T o x i c o l . , 33 (1975) 115-122. N.E. Hoffman, A.M. Rustum, E.J. Quebbeman, A.A.R. Hamid and R.K. Ausman, J. L i q . Chromatogr., 8 (1985) 2511-2520. J. F u jimo t o and R. Wang, T o x i c o l . Appl. Pharmacol., 16 (1970) 186-193. H. KO and E.N. P e t z o l d , I s o l a t i o n o f samples p r i o r t o chromatography, i n K. T s u j i and W. Morozowich (ed.), GLC and HPLC d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f t h e r a p e u t i c agents, v o l . 1, Chromatogr. S c i . , Marcel Dekker, (1978), pp 278-299. Canadian M u l t i c e n t r e T r i a l Group, N. Eng. J. Med., 309 (1983) 809. European M u l t i c e n t r e T r i a l Group, L a n c e t , ii (1983) 986.
.
130 86.
K. Uchida, T. Morimoto, N. Nakanisi, N. Yamada, Y. Tominaga, A. Orihara, T. Kondo, T. Morimoto, K. Morozumi, T. Kano and H. Takagi, Dev. Toxicol. Envir. Sci., 14 (1986) 163-166. 87. P. Donatsch, E. Abisch, M. Homberger, R. Traber, M. Trapp and R. Voges, J. Immunoassay, 2 (1981) 19-32. 88. A. Ruegger, M. Kuhn, H. R. L i c h t i , R. Hu uenin, C. Quiquerez and A . von Wartburg, Helv. Chim. Acta, 59 (19767 1075-1092. 89. H.R. L o o s l i , H. Kessler, H. Oschkinat, H.P. Weber, T.J. Petcher and A. Widmer, Helv. Chim. Acta, 68 (1985) 682-703. 90. T.J. Petcher, H.P. Weber and A. Ruegger, Helv. Chim. Acta, 59 (1976) 1480 1488. 91. R.M. Wenger, Helv. Chim. Acta, 67 (1984) 502-525. 92. T. Kronbach, V. Fischer and U.A. Meyer, C l i n . Pharmacol. Ther., 43 (1988) 630-635. 93. R.J. Ptachcinski, R. Ventkataramanan and G. J. Burckart, C l i n . Pharmacokinet., 11 (1986) 107-132. 94. G. Maurer, H.R. L o o s l i , E. Schreier and B. K e l l e r , Drug. Metab. Dispos. , 12 (1984) 120-126. 95. G. Maurer and M. Lemaire, Transplant. Proc., 18 (1986) 25-34. 96. N.R. Hartman, L.A. Trimble, J.C. Vederas and I . Jardine, Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. , 133 (1985) 964-971. 97 * H. Hashem. R. Ventkataramanan, G.J. Burckart, L. Makowka, T.E. S t a r z l , E. Fu and L.K. Wong, Transplant. Proc., 20 (1988) 176-178. 98. Members o f t h e National Academy o f C1 i n i c a l BiochemistrylAmerican Association f o r C l i n i c a l Chemistry Task Force on Cyclosporine, C l i n . Chem., 33 (1987) 1269-1288. 99. M. Lemaire and J.T. Tillement, J. Pharm. Pharmacol., 34 (1982) 715-718. 100. W. Mraz, R.A. Zink and A. Graf, Transplant. Proc., 15 (1983) 2426-2429. 101. B.S. Zaghloul, R.J. Ptachcinski, G.J. Burckart and R. Ventkataramanan , J. C1 i n . Pharmacol , 27 (1987) 240-2. 102. J. Gurecke, V. Warty and A. Sanghvi, Transplant. Proc., 17 (1985) 1997-2002. 103. W.M. Awni and R. J. Sawchuck, Drug. Metab. Disp., 13 (1985) 127-132. 104. S. Henricsson, J. Pharm. Pharmacol., 39 (1987) 384-385. 105. S. Robson, J. Neuberger, G. Alexander and R. Williams, B r . med. J., 288 (1984) 1317-1318. 106. H. Dieperink, Lancet, i (1983) 416. 107. M. Wenk, F. F o l l a t h and E. Abisch, C l i n . Chem., 29 (1983) 1865. 108. P. S u i t , F. van Lente and C. E. Pippenger, C l i n . Chem., 34 (1988) 597. 109. T.G. Rosano, B.M. Freed, 3. C e r i l l i and Lempert N., Transplantation, 42 (1986) 262-266. 110. G.L. Lensmeyer and B.L. F i e l d s , C l i n . Chem., 31 (1985) 196-201. 111. D.J. Freeman, A. Laupacis, P.A. Keown, C.R. S t i l l e r and S.G. Carruthers, B r i t . J. C l i n . Pharmacol., 18 (1984) 887-893. 112. T.G. Rosano, C l i n . Chem., 31 (1985) 410-412. 113. R.W. Yatscoff, D.N. Rush and J.R. J e f f r e y , C l i n . Chem., 30 (1984) 1812-1814. 114. R.P. Agarwal, R.A. McPherson and G.A. Threatle, Ther. Drug Monit., 7 (1985) 61-65. 115. J.M. P o t t e r and H. S e l f , Ther. Drug Monit., 8 (1986) 122-123. 116. A. Johnston, J.T. Marsden and D.W. H o l t , Ther. Drug. Monit., 8 (1986) 200-204. 117. W. Niederberger, P. Schaub and T. Beveridge, J. Chromatogr., 182 (1989) 454-457. 118. J. C. G f e l l e r , A.K. Beck and D. Seebach, Helv. Chim. Acta, 63 (1980) 728-732. 119. R.J. Sawchuk and L.L. C a r t i e r , C l i n . Chem., 27 (1981) 1368-1371. 120. R. Lawrence and M.C. Allwood, J. Pharm. Pharmacol., 32 (1980) 100.
-
.
131 121. 122. 123. 124. 125. 126. 127. 128. 129. 130. 131. 132. 133. 134. 135. 136. 137. 138. 139. 140. 141. 142. 143. 144. 145. 146. 147. 148. 149. 150. 151.
K. Nussbaumer, W. N i e d e r b e r g e r and H.P. K e l l e r , J. H i g h Resol. Chromatogr., Commun., 5 (1982) 424-427. G.C. Yee, D.J. Gmur and M.S. Kennedy, C l i n . Chem. 2 8 (1982) 2269-2271. B. Leyland-Jones, A. C l a r k , W. K r e i s , R. Dinsmore, R. O ' R e i l l y and C.W. Young, Res. Commun. Chem. P a t h o l . Pharmacol., 37 (1982) 431-444. S.G. C a r r u t h e r s , D.J. Freeman, J.C. K o o g l e r , W. Howson, P.A. Keown, A. Laupacis and C. R. S t i l l e r , C l i n . Chem. 29 (1983) 180-183. R.L. Kates and P. L a t i n i , J. Chromatogr., 309 (1984) 441-447. H.P. Smith and W.T. Robinson, J . Chromatogr., 305 (1984) 353-362. H.F. Schran, W.T. Robinson and E. Abisch, B i o a n a l y t i c a l c o n s i d e r a t i o n s , i n J.F. Bore1 (ed.), C i c l o s p o r i n , Progress i n A l l e r g y , Karger, Basle, v o l . 38, (1986) pp 73-92. R. G a r a f f o and P. Lapalus, J. Chromatogr., 337 (1985) 416-422. D.J. Gmur, G.C. Yee and M.S. Kennedy, J. Chromatogr., 344 (1985) 422-427. M.K. A r a v i n d , J.N. M i c e l i and R.E. Kauffman, J. Chromatogr., 344 (1985) 428-432. K. Takada, N. Shibata, H. Yoshimura, H. Yoshikawa and S . M u r a n i s k i , Res. Commun. Chem. Pathol Pharmacol., 48 (1985) 369-380. A.K. S h i b a b i , J. Scaro and R.M. David, J. L i q . Chromatogr., 8 (1985) 2641-2648. P.M. Kabra, J.H. Wall and N. B l a n c k e a r t , C l i n . Chem., 3 1 (1985) 1717-1720. A . Sanghvi, H. Seltman and W. Diven, Arch. P a t h o l . Lab. Med., 109 (1985) 1072-1075. G. Hamilton, E. Roth, E. W a l l i s c h and F. T i c h y , J . Chromatogr., 341 (1985) 411-419. V. T o u l e t , M.C. Saux, C. Rouquette, F. P e n o u i l and A. B r a c h e t L i e r m a i n , Ann. B i o l . Chem. ( P a r i s ) , 44 (1986) 517-521. G.C. Kahn, L.M. Shaw and M.D. Kane, J. Anal. T o x i c o l . , 10 (1986) 28-34. H. Hosotsubo, J. Takezawa, N. Taenaka, K. Hosotsubo, and I. Yoshiya, J. Chromatogr., 383 (1986) 349-355. G. Schumann, M. O e l l e r i c h , K. W o n i g e i t and M. Wrenger, F r e s e n i u s Z. Anal. Chem., 324 (1986) 328-329. T.P. Moyer, J.R. Charlson and L.E. Ebnet, Ther. Drug M o n i t . , 8 (1986) 466-468. T.P. Moyer, P. Johnson, S.M. Faynor and S. S t e r i o f f , C l i n . Biochem. (Ottawa), 19 (1986) 83-89. T. Annesley, K. Matz, T. Balogh, L. C l a y t o n and D. G i a c h e r i o , C l i n . Chem., 32 (1986) 1407-1409. J. Klima, R. Petrasek and V. Kocandrle, J. Chromatogr., 385 (1987) 357-361. R.G. Buice, F.B. S t e n t z and B.J. G u r l e y , J . L i q . Chromatogr., 10 (1987) 421-438. L.D. Bowers and J. Singh, J. L i q . Chromatogr., 10 (1987) 411-420. S. Maguire, F. Kyne and U.O. C o n a i l l , Ann. C l i n . Biochem. (Warwick), 24 (1987) 161-166. L. S a n g a l l i and M. B o n a t i , Ther. Drug. M o n i t . , 9 (1987) 353-357. G.L. Lensmeyer, D.A. Wiebe and I.M. C a r l s o n , C l i n . Chem., 33 (1987) 1841-1850. U. C h r i s t i a n s , K.O. Zimmer, K. W o n i g e i t and K.F. Sewing, J. Chromat o g r . , 413 (1987) 121-129. U. C h r i s t i a n s , K.O. Zimmer, G. Maurer, K. W o n i g e i t , and K.F. Sewing, C l i n . Chem., 34 (1988) 34-39. U. C h r i s t i a n s , H.J. S c h l i t t , J.S. B l e c k , H.M. S c h i e b e l , R. Kownatzki , G. Maurer, S.S. Strohmeyer, R. Schottmann, K. W o n i g e i t , R. P i c h l m a y r and K.F. Sewing, T r a n s p l a n t . Proc., 20 (1988) 609-613.
.
132 152. 153. 154. 155. 156. 157. 158. 159. 160. 161. 162. 163. 164.
165.
G.J. B u r c k a r t , C.P. Wang, R. Venkataramanan and R.J. P t a c h c i n s k i , T r a n s p l a n t a t i o n , 43 (1987) 932. J.A. A p f f e l , T.V. Alfredson and R.E. Majors, J. Chromatogr., 206 (1981) 43-57. P. Schauwecker, R.W. F r e i and F. E r n i , J. Chromatogr., 136 (1977) 63-72. F. Erni, H.P. K e l l e r , C. M o r i n and M. Schmitt, J. Chromatogr., 204 (1981) 65-76. J.C. G f e l l e r and M. Stockmeyer, J. Chromatogr., 198 (1980) 162-168. L.D. Bowers and S.E. Mathews, J. Chromatogr. , 333 (1985) 231-238. F.D. A n t i a and C. Horvath, J. Chromatogr., 435 (1988) 1-15. W.R. Melander, H.J. L i n , J. Jacobson and C. Horvath, J . Phys. Chem., 88 (1984) 4527-4536. C.P. Wang, G.J. B u r c k a r t and R. Ventkataramanan, Ther. Drug Monit., 10 (1988) 1988. L.L. Rocher, D. Giacherio and T. Annesley, Transplant. Proc., 18 (1986) 652-654. S . Henricsson and A. Lindholm, Transplant. Proc., i n press. P.L. Kimmel, T.M. P h i l i p s , N.C. Kramer and A. M. Thompson, Kidney I n t . , 27 (1985) 343. G.J. Burckart, T.E. S t a r z l , R. Venkataramanan, H . Hashim, L. Wong, P. Wang, L. Makowka, A. Zeevi, R.J. P t a c h c i n s k i , J.E. Knapp, S . I w a t s u k i , C. Esquivel , A. Sanghvi and D.H. van T h i e l , Transplant. Proc., 6 (1986) 46-49. P.E. Wallemacq, G. Lhoest, D. L a t i n n e and M. Bruyere, Transplant. Proc., i n press.
133
CHAPTER I V RADIO-COLUMN LIQUID CHROMATOGRAPHY A.C.
VELTKAMP
Introduction The use o f r a d i o i s o t o p e s i n chemical a n a l y s i s C h a r a c t e r i s t i c s of radio-column l i q u i d chromatography O b j e c t i v e s and o u t l i n e P r i n c i p l e s o f s c i n t i l l a t i o n c o u n t i n g i n column l i q u i d chromatography I n t r o d u c t o r y comments on n u c l e a r r a d i a t i o n and d e t e c t i o n 2.1 2.2 P r i n c i p l e s o f flow-through Y-counting P r i n c i p l e s o f 8 - c o u n t i n g i n column l i q u i d chromatography 2.3 2.3.1 I n t r o d u c t i o n 2.3.2 O f f - l i n e l i a u i d s c i n t i l l a t i o n c o u n t i n g- (LSC) . 2.3.3 Flow-through LSC 2.3.4 F1ow-through heterogeneous s c i n t i 11a t i o n c o u n t i n g (HSC) 2.3.5 Flow-through Cerenkov c o u n t i n g 2.4 Data a n a l y s i s 2.4.1 D e f i n i t i o n s o f d e t e c t i o n l i m i t s 2.4.2 Data a c q u i s i t i o n , p r o c e s s i n g and p r e s e n t a t i o n Commerci a1 1y a v a i 1a b l e f 1ow-through r a d i o a c t i v i t y d e t e c t o r s 2.5 O p t i m i z a t i o n parameters f o r f l o w - t h r o u g h B - c o u n t i n g 3. 3.1 Introduction 3.2 The c o u n t i n g e f f i c i e n c y E; g e n e r a l aspects 3.2.1 E i n LSC 3.2.2 E i n HSC The background count r a t e CPM(b); g e n e r a l aspects 3.3 3.3.1 CPM(b) i n f l o w - t h r o u g h LSC 3.3.2 CPM(b) i n f l o w - t h r o u g h HSC 3.4 Other parameters 3.4.1 S e l e c t i n g t h e f l o w c e l l volume Vd i n LSC 3.4.2 S e l e c t i n g t h e f l o w c e l l volume Vd i n HSC 3.4.3 Reproducibi 1 i t y and 1i n e a r i t y 3.5 S p e c i a l methods 4. Applications 4.1 Preparation, p u r i f i c a t i o n , i d e n t i f i c a t i o n 4.2 D i s t r i b u t i o n and metabolism of exogenic compounds 4.3 D i s t r i b u t i o n and metabolism of endogenic compounds 4.4 Radioassays 4.5 Miscellaneous 5. Concluding remarks 6. Acknowledgements References 1.
1.1 1.2 1.3 2.
L i s t o f A b b r e v i a t i o n s and Symbols CLC
: Column L i q u i d Chromatography
RP-HPLC
: Reversed-Phase High-Performance L i q u i d Chromatography
8
:
Eb
r sc
Beta p a r t i c l e ( n e g a t r o n )
: End-point energy o f R-spectrum
: Gamma ( e l e c t r o m a g n e t i c r a d i a t i o n > 30 keV) : S c i n t i l l a t i o n Counting
134 LSC
L i q u i d Sci n t i1 1 a t i on Counting
HSC
Heterogeneous ( s o l i d ) S c i n t i l l a t i o n Counting
0 PM
Desintegration per minute
C PM
Counts p e r minute
Bq Ci
Curie; 1 C i = 37 GBq
CPM(b)
Becquerel = d e s i n t e r g r a t i o n p e r second (DPS) : Background count r a t e
NCA
'No C a r r i e r Added'
Spec. Act.:
Bq/mmol ( o r DPMhol)
DPM(s) E FM
Td Tb
:
Absolute a c t i v i t y sample Counting e f f i c i e n c y ; E = CPM/DPM(s) 2 Figure o f M e r i t ; FM = E /CPM(b) Counting t i m e (min) Counting t i m e o f background Background counts accumulated i n Tb
'b CS
RSD(Cs) Ft
Fe FS
Net peak area i n radiograms ( i n counts) : R e l a t i v e standard d e v i a t i o n i n Cs
T o t a l f l o w r a t e through r a d i o a c t i v i t y d e t e c t o r (ml/min) Flow r a t e e l u e n t (ml/min) Flow r a t e l i q u i d s c i n t i l l a t o r (ml/min)
S
S p l i t r a t i o o f column e l u a t e
"d
Flow c e l l volume r a d i o a c t i v i t y d e t e c t o r (ml)
dP TW
Jw
Particle size Peak-base w i d t h (min) Time between neighbouring peaks (min)
0
Standard d e v i a t i o n peak
h
Reduced p l a t e h e i g h t
N
P l a t e number Column v o i d volume ( m l )
W
"0
KO
Solvent v i s c o s i t y (kg/ (m x Permeabi 1 i t y constant
5))
C e l l l e n g t h ( i n m)
L P
Pressure drop
1.
INTRODUCTION THE USE OF RADIOISOTOPES I N CHEMICAL ANALYSIS Since i n t h e l a t e f o u r t i e s c y c l o t r o n - and reactor-produced r a d i o isotopes became a v a i l a b l e on a commercial s c a l e , t h e y have proven t o be
1.1
an indispensable t o o l f o r s o l v i n g a wide v a r i e t y o f a n a l y t i c a l problems ( r e f s . 1, 2). The main advantages r e s i d e i n t h e s e n s i t i v i t y (Table I ) and
135 selectivity of radioactivity determinations. Basically, applications in radioanalysis can be categorized as activation analysis, tracer and assay techniques. TABLE I
Approximate detection 1 imits for various analytical techniques"*
Ana 1 y t i ca1 techn i que
Detection limit (9)
Radioactivity detection Mass spectrometry Fluorimetry El ectrochemi s t ry U1 t rav i ol et spectrometry Infrared spectrometry Refractive index NMR spectrometry
10-l2 10-12
-
10-6
For an ideal compound under ideal conditions
* Adapted from refs. 3, 4
In activation analysis, stable elements are activated to form Y-emitting radioisotopes, from which the elemental compositon o f biochemical or geological samples can be established by y-spectrometry (Fig. 1). Radiotracers provide a means to selectively study, for instance, the distribution and metabolic pathways of organic and inorganic analytes. Finally, radiolabeled compounds are extensively used in assay techniques for local izat ion, i dent i ii cat i on or quantification o f biol ogical ly active analytes. Examples in this category include immuno assay, receptor assay and enzyme assay. Many radioanalytical procedures rely upon the separation o f radioelements or radiolabeled compounds in one or more stages o f the experiment. For example, in tracer or assay experiments, it is normally mandatory to use a radiochemically pure component, which necessitates isolation of the desired compound from radiolabeled impurities formed during preparation or storage of the conpound. Radioenzyme assays require separation of substrates and products. In the elucidation o f metabolic pathways, metabol i tes have to be separated from parent compounds. Although the actigity o f the radioanalytes can be quite high, corresponding amounts are relatively low, normally less than 1 mg, depending on the specific activities involved. As a consequence, chromatographic techniques play a major role in the isolation and separation o f
136 radiolabeled analytes. Applications in these areas, and the role of column liquid chromatography in radioanalysis are considered in more detail in section 4.
Fig. 1
1.2
Y-spectrum of mushroom sample after neutron activation, either before (A) or after (B) radiochemical group separation on Dowex 1 X 8. (Reprinted by permission from Fresenius Z. Anal. Chem., Springer-Verlag, ref. 5)
CHARACTERISTICS OF RADIO-COLUMN LIQUID CHROMATOGRAPHY Radio-column liquid chromatography, by definition, involves the separation of radioelements or radiolabeled compounds by ion exchange, size exclusion or HPLC, and does not necessarily imply radioactivity determination o f the column eluate. In preparative radio-chromatography, for
137 instance, quantitative radioactivity determination may be hampered by limitations in the dynamic range of the radioactivity detector used due to the high activities involved, while U V , fluorescence, or electrochemical detectors mag still respond linearly to increasing amounts of the radioactive compound. Most applications, however, depend on the combination of a chromatographic separation and radioactivity counting, for instance by scintillation counting (SC) techniques. Since this chapter deals with radio-column liquid chromatography, it is of interest to briefly summarize its main characteristics (Table 11), some of which are more thoroughly dealt with in following sections. TABLE I1
Characteristics of radio-column 1 iquid chromatography
Selectivity,
optimal as with other isotope techniques.
Sensitivity,
strongly determined by the counting time and efficiency of the detector system.
Quantitation,
normally based on determination of single radioisotope only (one calibration curve); for short-lived isotopes, correction factors have to be used to account for decay during chromatography.
Chromatography, occasionally, isotope effects on retention behaviour may occur (refs. 164, 165, 172); differences between elution of 'no carrier added' and 'carrier added' may also be observed (refs. 8-10) Hazards, normally negligible with low to medium energy O-emitters (3H, 14C); proper lead shielding of apparatus required for higher energy &emitters ( 32P) and y-emitters. Sel ecti vi ty Under optimal conditions, activity eluting from the column will be detected if it is in excess over a stable background signal, with no interference from non-radioactive endogenous material or gradient elution (Fig. 2 ) . Apparently, selectivity in detection is the major advantage of radiotracers, especially for pharmaceutical and biochemical studies. In contrast to most other detection principles, analyte preconcentration becomes very effective because the corresponding preconcentration of
138
(unlabeled) components from the matrix normally does most applications an additional advantage is that only isotope has to be determined; therefore a single suffices for the quantitation of all compounds labeled It thus avoids the need for standards.
not interfere. In one type of radiocalibration curve with that isotope.
I 40
-
30 -
I
k 0" 20d
10 -
0
20
4c
MIN
Fig. 2
Gradient HPLC-YY and 14C-determination of nonconjugated fecal metabolites of C-doxylamine succinate in rats. Column, Supelco LC-CN (250 x 4.6 mm); gradient elution with methanol/O.Ol M phosphate buffer (containing 0.01-0.02 M triethylamine, pH 7.8); detection, UV (254 nm) and off-line liquid scintillation counting of 1 ml fractions, respectively. (Reprinted by permission from the J. Anal. Toxicol., Preston Publications, Inc., ref. 6).
Sensitivity The sensitivity of radioactivity counting i s defined as the product of counting efficiency, El and the counting time, Td, of the sample. E represents the efficiency by which the radioactive desintegrations are collected in the counting device (0 < E < 1). The number of counts, cs+b, of a radioactive sample accumulated in Td minutes i s given by
139
where DPM(s) i s t h e a b s o l u t e a c t i v i t y o f t h e sample ( i n d e s i n t e g r a t i o n s p e r minute) and Cb t h e number o f background counts. The column e l u a t e may be f r a c t i o n a t e d
f o r subsequent o f f - l i n e c o u n t i n g ,
t h e s e n s i t i v i t y of
which can be inc r e a s e d a t w i l l v i a Td. I n f l o w - t h r o u g h ( ' o n - l i n e ' ) d e t e c t i o n , Td equals t h e mean r e s i d e n c e time i n t h e f l o w c e l l o f t h e r a d i o a c t i v i t y d e t e c t o r ( a l s o c a l l e d c e l l t r a n s i t o r c e l l - c l e a r a n c e t i m e ) and i s c a l c u l a t e d f rom
i n which Vd i s t h e f l o w c e l l volume ( i n m l ) and Ft t h e t o t a l f l o w r a t e through t h e f l o w c e l l compromise
between
( i n ml/min).
the
It t h u s f o l l o w s t h a t one has t o
sensitivity
of
flow-through
counting
and
chromatographic c r i t e r i a such as t h e maximum a1 lowable band broadening from t h e r e l a t i v e l y l a r g e c e l l volume and t h e t o t a 1 r u n t i m e . F i g . 3 shows t h e impact o f Td on t h e s e n s i t i v i t y o f f l o w - t h r o u g h r a d i o a c t i v i t y de t erminat io ns .
After
their
separation
by
RP-HPLC,
the
14C-labeled
p e s t i c i d e s c a r b a r y l and p a r a t h i o n were t r a n s p o r t e d t hrough t h e r a d i o a c t i v i t y m o n i t o r a t v a r y i n g f l o w r a t e s Ft. Td were 0.026 (3 A ) , 0.51 (38) o r 6.60
Corresponding c o u n t i n g t i m e s
(3C) min (see a l s o s e c t i o n s 2.4.1
and 3.5). Ot her c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s I n working w i t h i s o t o p e s w i t h s h o r t h a l f - l i f e t imes as compared t o t h e t i m e needed t o r e c o r d t h e chromatogram, c o r r e c t i o n f a c t o r s have t o be used t o account f o r t h e decay d u r i n g chromatography. T h i s i s t h e case, f o r in s t a nc e,
i n the determination o f rare-earth
ra diopharmac eut i c a l s l a b e l e d w i t h "C, pharmaceuticals conditions.
f i s s i o n products o r
13N, 150 o r 18F.
These r a d i o -
a r e n o r m a l l y p r e p a r e d under 'No C a r r i e r Added'
(NCA)
T h i s i n e f f e c t means t h a t a l l molecules o f i n t e r e s t a r e
l a b e l e d and t h e s p e c i f i c a c t i v i t y
obtained(
i n DPM/mol
o r Bq/mmol)
approaches t h e t h e o r e t i c a l maximum. The c o rresponding masses a r e low, o f t e n l e s s t h an 0.1 @. Under such circumstances t h e o n l y expedient t o c h a r a c t e r i z e t h e r e a c t i o n p r o d u c t s i s by chromatography, i n p a r t i c u l a r HPLC, f o r example by comparing t h e c a p a c i t y r a t i o s o b t a i n e d f rom t h e r a diogram w i t h t h os e o f ' c o l d ' ( u n l a b e l e d ) standards. Care has t o be t a k e n in
this
comparison,
because t h e r e t e n t i o n behaviour o f i s o t o p i c a l l y
140 labeled compounds may differ from their unlabeled analogues (refs. 164, 165, 172), especially under NCA conditions (refs. 8-10).
601
-TIME-
Fig. 3
Flow-through radiograms of 14C-labeled pesticides, recorded at Column, Brownlee Cyano Spheri-5 different counting times T (100 x 4.6 mm); fduent, a$etonitri1e/watef4 (30/70, v/v), 1.0 ml/min); sample, C-carbaryl (5 Bq) and C-parathion (4 Bq) (for structural formuleas see Fig. 19); detection after post-column extraction and segmentation of the eluate with water-immiscible 1 iquid scinti 1 lator. During the separation, the segmented stream i s stored in a capillary storage loop. After the separation has finished, the contents of the loop is introduced into the R-detector ( V = 0.065 ml) at lower flow rate to increase T In these exaflples, T is 0.026 (A), 0.51 (B) or 6.60 (C) m h . (Reproduced from ref. 7; see also refs. 89-93).
.
.
Finally, it should be noted that in general some sort of written permit from the authorities is needed in order to work with certain types and amounts of radioactivity. Such permission will depend on the level of organization and facilities of the institute. Stringent laboratory planning, the use of dedicated apparatus (preferable automated) and an
141 experienced s t a f f i s r e q u i r e d f o r most r a d i o a n a l y t i c a l procedures. Automation and s h i e l d i n g o f apparatus used i n h i g h l y r a d i o a c t i v e environments are discussed i n r e f . 11. OBJECTIVES AND OUTLINE
1.3
-
Radio-chromatography ( e l e c t r o p h o r e s i s , paper, t h i n - 1 ayer, column 1 i q u i d and gas chromatography) o f B-labeled compounds has been reviewed i n 1978 by Roberts ( r e f . 12).
Since t h a t time,
a number o f flow-through
r a d i o a c t i v i t y d e t e c t o r s have become commercially a v a i l a b l e and t h e r e has been an increase o f p u b l i c a t i o n s on procedures and a p p l i c a t i o n s of flow-through r a d i o a c t i v i t y d e t e c t i o n . More recent d i s c u s s i o n s o f r a d i o column l i q u i d chromatography can be found i n r e f s . 13-16. A n a l y t i c a l and chromatographic techniques in radiopharmaceutical chemistry a r e t r e a t e d i n r e f . 17. This book g i v e s updated and expanded c o n t r i b u t i o n s from a symposium, organized i n 1984 i n Los Angeles, CA, USA, and i s concerned mainly w i t h s h o r t - l i v e d , n u c l e a r medicine.
y - e m i t t i n g isotopes f o r
It thus appears t h a t t h e r e i s a need f o r a l i t e r a t u r e
survey o f r e c e n t developments i n radio-column
1 i q u i d chromatography,
covering i t s broad range o f procedures and a p p l i c a t i o n s . I n s e c t i o n 2, t h e o u t l i n e and mathematical aspects o f s c i n t i l l a t i o n counting (SC) i n radio-column l i q u i d chromatography a r e considered. Some parameters f o r o p t i m i z a t i o n o f flow-through 8-counting a r e discussed i n s e c t i o n 3, w i t h emphasis on methods f o r decoupling t h e chromatographic and counting steps o r ,
i n o t h e r words,
p o s s i b i l i t i e s t o overcome t h e
u l t i m a t e problem o f c o u p l i n g a f a s t s e p a r a t i o n w i t h slow c o u n t i n g steps. I n s e c t i o n 4, a p p l i c a t i o n s a r e reviewed. I n s e c t i o n
5, some conclusions
a r e drawn from t h e discussions i n t h e preceding sections. 2.
PRINCIPLES OF SCINTILLATION COUNTING I N COLUMN LIQUID CHROMATOGRAPHY
2.1
INTRODUCTORY COMMENTS ON NUCLEAR RADIATION AND DETECTION
Radioisotopes a r e defined
as
isotopes
having l i m i t e d l i f e t i m e s ,
caused by excess o f energy i n t h e nucleus. By spontaneous decay, t h i s energy i s released as r a d i a t i o n and, e v e n t u a l l y , s t a b l e isotopes a r e formed. The a c t u a l l i f e t i m e of a s i n g l e nucleus i s u n p r e d i c t a b l e and v i r t u a l l y independent o f i t s p h y s i c a l o r chemical s t a t e . The r a d i a t i o n appears as electromagnetic
r a d i a t i o n or as p a r t i c l e s .
Examples from t h e f i r s t category a r e X-ray and y - r a d i a t i o n (photons w i t h energies l e s s than 30 keV and over 30 keV, r e s p e c t i v e l y ) . Examples of t h e last
kind
include positrons
and
negatrons ( p a r t i c l e s o f mass 0.911 x
142 kg, with single positive and negative electrical charge, respectively). Negatrons are normally indicated as betas (represented by R).
In many cases decay is via the simultaneous emission of electromagnetic radiation and particles, In that case, determination of u-radiation is normally more convenient. Furthermore, positron emitters can be detected via annihilation photons of 511 keV that are produced after recombination of the emitted positrons with electrons. Commonly used positron emitters are ”C, 13N, 150, or 18F. Radioisotopes are characterized by their half-life time, T1/2 - that is the time-lapse during which a population of radioisotopes decreases by a factor of two the maximum theoretical specific activity (expressed as Bq/mmol) and the type(s) and energies of radiation. The main properties of commonly used radioisotopes have been summarized in table 111. TABLE I11
Main properties of commonly used radioisotopes
Ey(MeV) 3 “C 0.511 l4C 13N 0.511 150 0.511 18F 0.511
Eb(keV) 19 155
T 1/2
Spec. act .l
1 TBq/mmol 12.4~ 20.4111 2 GBq/mmol 5760y 9.96111
Range (m)’ 4
264
2.03111
109.7111 32P 1710 14.3d 35s 167 07.4d 3 6 ~ ~ 700 3x105y 258 164d 45~a 59Fe 1.1;l.Z 500;1600 44.6d 63Ni 67 l0Oy 67Ga 0.18;0.30 78h 99mTc 0.14 6h lZ51 0.035(~-ray) 60d 0.36 610 8d 140La 0.49;1.6 1380 40h
200 TBq/mmol
30 3 45 40 20 25
TBq/mmol k Bq/mmo 1 GBq/mmol GBq/mmol GBq/mmol TBq/mmol
7870 302 2707 636 54
75 TBq/mmol 550 TBq/mmol 5 GBq/mmol
Specific activities given are about the maximum values specified for commercially available radiolabeled compounds or elements. The maximum range given is calculated for pure 8-emitters in water as described in ref. 18.
143 The d e t e c t o r s
used
in
radio-column
l i q u i d chromatography
can
be
c l a s s i f i e d e i t h e r as charge c o l l e c t o r s o r s c i n t i l l a t i o n count ers. W i t h charge c o l l e c t o r s , t h e e l e c t r i c charge produced on t h e i n t e r a c t i o n o f n u c l e a r r a d i a t i o n w i t h t h e d e t e c t o r medium i s c o l l e c t e d and c o n v e r t e d i n t o e l e c t r i c a l p u l s e s . The p u l s e h e i g h t and p u l s e r a t e can be r e l a t e d t o t h e i n c i d e n t n u c l e a r energy and a c t i v i t y . Examples o f charge c o l l e c t o r s ar e gas i o n i z a t i o n chambers (Geiger-Mu1 l e r c o u n t e r s ) and semiconductors (Ge(Li) c ount e rs) . I n s c i n t i l l a t i o n c o u n t i n g , n u c l e a r r a d i a t i o n i s absorbed i n l i q u i d o r s o l i d s c i n t i l l a t o r m a t e r i a l and c o n v e r t e d i n t o photons w i t h wavelenghts from between 360 t o 600 nm t h a t a r e d e t e c t e d by p h o t o m u l t i p l i e r tubes. Although most d e t e c t o r s a r e c a p a b l e o f d e t e c t i n g b o t h y ' s and B ' s (e.g. E > 0 ) , t h e y a r e n o r m a l l y r e f e r r e d t o as e i t h e r y-or & d e t e c t o r s , m a i n l y because o f l a r g e d i f f e r e n c e s i n E f o r t h e two t y p e s o f r a d i a t i o n . The c hoic e o f d e t e c t o r f u r t h e r depends on t h e s t a t e o f t h e sample (gaseous, l i q u i d o r s o l i d ) t o b e counted, t h e n u c l e a r e n e r g i e s o f t h e r a d i o i s o t o p e s i n v o l v e d and, w i t h m i x t u r e s o f y - e m i t t i n g i s o t o p e s , a b i l i t y t o d i s c r i m i n a t e between d i f f e r e n t y-energies.
the
For t h e l a t t e r ,
Ge (L i) spectroscopy i s n o r m a l l y p r e f e r r e d above NaI ( T l ) because o f i t s s u p e r i o r e n e r g y - r e s o l v i n g power ( F i g . 1). De t e rminat io n o f & r a d i o a c t i v i t y
i n l i q u i d s i s r e l a t i v e l y inconvenient
because o f ( i ) t h e small range o f B p a r t i c l e s (see T able 111) which f o r e f f i c i e n t d e t e c t i o n n e c e s s i t a t e s c l o s e c o n t a c t between sample and d e t e c t o r medium, and (ii)t h e c o n t i n u e o u s energy d i s t r i b u t i o n (F ig. 4A, B,
C).
The I3 s p e c t r a a r e s p e c i f i e d by t h e maximum end p o i n t energy
E (max) , and r a d i o i s o t o p e s a r e c o r r e s p o n d i n g l y c l a s s i f i e d as ' l o w ' ( 3 H I 6'Ni),
'medium' (14C,
35S) o r ' h i g h ' (32P, 3 6 C l ) energy e m i t t e r s . As a
consequence, i n d i v i d u a l q u a n t i f i c a t i o n i n m i x t u r e s o f p u r e & e m i t t e r s
is
possible only f o r isotopes w i t h l a r g e differences i n E as i s t h e case 3 32 3 14' i n t h e d u a l - i s o t o p e d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f , f o r example, H/ C o r H/ P. 8 - s c i n t i 11a t i o n c o u n t i n g Low t o medium energy
a r e n o r m a l l y determined by l i q u i d o r heterogeneous ( s o l i d ) s c i n t i l l a t i o n c o u n t i n g (LSC and HSC, r e s p e c t i v e l y ) . I n LSC ( r e f s . scintillator
0's
18, 19), t h e sample i s t h o r o u g h l y mixed w i t h a l i q u i d c o c k t a i l . The c o c k t a i l i s u s u a l l y based on t o l u e n e ,
pseudocumene o r dioxane t o which f l u o r o f o r s such as 1. 4-diphenyloxazole (PPO)
and/or
1.4-bis-2(5-phenyloxazolyl)benzene(POPOP)
and s o l u b i 1 i z e r s
have been added, t h e i r n a t u r e depending on t h e sample t y p e t o be i n c o r p o ra t e d: a l c o h o l s o r n o n - i o n i c d e t e r g e n t s such as T r i t o n X-100 can be used
144 as solubilizers for aqueous samples. The sovent molecules absorb the incident nuclear energy to form an electronically excited state. This energy is transferred to the fluorofor (the scintillator) which returns to its electronic ground-state by emission of photons (scheme 1). Within several nanoseconds, 20-30 (depending on the incident C-energy) photons are produced per desintegration which are isotropical ly emitted. This enables coincidence counting techniques to be used (Fig. 10): The sample is placed between two opposite PM tubes, the signals of which are fed to an electronic circuit and checked for coincidence within a pre-set coincidence time. Coincident pulses are counted only. To some extent it is thus possible to distinguish between scintillation pulses and one-photon events, such as chemi luminescence. The overaleffect of the coincidence circuit i s to lower the background count rate, CPM(b). The coincidence time may be chosen from several tens to hundreds of ns, depending on the type of scintillator and sample. Too short times, however, may adversely affect the counting efficiencies, and a compromise between optimum E and CPM(b) must be found experientally. Energy pulse height analysis is another means to improve the E/CPM(b) ratio, by setting lower and upper energy discriminators of the window. The lower discriminator is used for reducing low-energy back-ground pulses. Pulse height analysis is also used in dual-isotope detection with two-energy windows chosen, in which counts are collected (Fig. 4A; see also refs. 20, 127). The activity from both isotopes is determined after correction for counts, collected from the high-energy isotope in the low-energy window (cross-over correction). The same detection device can be used for HSC. In HSC, the sample is in contact with solid scintillator, for example granular anthracene, inorganic glasses such as yttrium silicate or europium-doped calcium fluoride or plastic scintillator, doped with organic fluorofors. The C-spectra from the glasses (see Fig. 4C) are distinctly different form spectra recorded in LSC, with the maxima shifted to higher energy. This facilitates discriminating radioactivity signals and low-energy pulses arising from PM darkcurrent or chemi luminescence. Cerenkov counting High energy 0's with Eb(max) of over about 0.3 MeV can be detected by scintillation and also at satisfactory efficiencies (0.2 < E < 0.4) via 24 Cerenkov radiation, produced on the interaction of these R ' s ( Na, 32P, 36Cl, 40K) with solvents of high dielectric constant such as, e.g., water
(refs.
18, 19). The wavelength range o f t h i s t y p e o f r a d i a t i o n i s from i n t o the v i s i b l e , but with largest i n t e n s i t y i n the
the u l t r a v i o l e t
short-wavelength
region.
Therefore,
t h e PM tubes should p r e f e r a b l y be
equipped w i t h UV-transparent q u a r t z windows. can be added t o t h e sample,
Alternatively,
fluorofors
t h e f u n c t i o n o f which i s t o accept t h e
Cerenkov r a d i a t i o n and s h i f t t h e emission wavelength t o h i g h e r values i n o r d e r t o match t h e maximal s e n s i t i v i t y o f t h e PM tubes. Cerenkov c o u n t i n g has t h e obvious advantage t h a t no s c i n t i l l a t o r c o c k t a i l i s needed and t h e sample can be recovered unmodified. 40-
,..- 30-
'E
m
-0 ;
20-
$
1
s
3 10
-
, OLS,
Scheme 1
2.2
-
Coupled energy t r a n s f e r and energy l e v e l diagram f o r t h e components i n a t e r n a r y l i q u i d s c i n t i l l a t i o n system (Reproduced w i t h permission from r e f . 19, Amersham, England, 1977).
PRINCIPLES OF FLOW-THROUGH y-COUNTING As w i l l be i l l u s t r a t e d below i n s e c t i o n 4.1 i t f o l l o w s t h a t y -column
l i q u i d chromatography i s used p r i m a r i l y f o r p u r i f i c a t i o n and i d e n t i f i c a t i o n purposes i n t h e s y n t h e s i s o f r a d i o t r a c e r s . a c t i v i t i e s loaded on t h e column,
Due t o t h e h i g h
flow-through y - d e t e r m i n a t i o n
becomes
s t r a i g h t f o r w a r d , a l l o w i n g t h e use o f f l o w c e l l volumes i n t h e o r d e r of 10
4 . Thereby, t h e chromatographic i n t e g r i t y i s preserved w h i l e m a i n t a i n i n g s u f f i c i e n t p r e c i s i o n i n c o u n t i n g r e s u l t s . As o n l y one r a d i o i s o t o p e has t o be detected, energy r e s o l u t i o n i s o f l e s s concern. I n these s i t u a t i o n s , s c i n t i l l a t i o n c o u n t i n g (SC) i s adequate.
146
I
i
n
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I I
I
Fig. 4A, B Liquid scintillation spectra o f 3 H (A) and 14C ( B ) , recorded for unquenched and quenched samples on a Philips PW 4700 scintillation counter.
147
C ? $
1
7-
0
----I
IW
50
260 ----
150
250
Pulsa Heiphl (Channel)
F ig. 4C
CaF (Eu) s c i n t i l l a t i o n spectrum f o r 14C, recorded w i t h o u t COi n c f d e n c e ( A ) , t h r o u g h c o i n c i d e n c e (0) and a n t i - c o i n c i d e n c e (X) ( R e p r i n t e d from t h e J . Chromatogr., E l s e v i e r , f rom r e f . 21).
.
T h a l l i u m - a c t i v a t e d sodium i o d i d e (NaI(T1)) i s by f a r t h e most p o p u l a r s c i n t i l l a t o r ( r e f . 22).
I t i s r e l a t i v e l y i nexpensive, r e a d i l y a v a i l a b l e
i n d i f f e r e n t geometries and i s a p p l i c a b l e t o a broad range o f y-energies a t s a t i s f a c t o r y c o u n t i n g e f f i c i e n c i e s . The p e n e t r a t i o n power o f t h e y-rays i n t h e c r y s t a l i n c r e a s e s w i t h i n c r e a s i n g energy, and high-energy 7's may escape f r o m t h e m a t e r i a l w i t h o u t g e n e r a t i o n o f s c i n t i l l a t i n g p u l ses. Large c r y s t a l s i z e s , however, a r e i n c o n v e n i e n t because o f t h e ext ens i v e s h i e l d i n g necessary t o reduce t h e background count r a t e , CPM(b). A c y l i n d r i c a l 7.6 values
x 7.6 cm NaI(T1) c r y s t a l can y i e l d e f f i c i e n c i e s w i t h
0.10-0.30
of
for
energies
of
90-600
keV,
with
an
optimum
performance a t 90-160 keV. Flow c e l l s can b e c o n s t r u c t e d f r o m PTFE w i t h low y-energies (up t o 100 keV) o r s t a i n l e s s - s t e e l c a p i l l a r i e s w i t h h i g h e r y - e n e r g i e s . They s h o u l d be f i x e d p r e f e r a b l y i n t h e c e n t r a l d e p l e t i o n ( w e l l ) o f t h e c r y s t a l f o r h i g h and r e p r o d u c i b l e c o u n t i n g geometry ('471 I c o u n t i n g ) . Because o f t h e h i g h p e n e t r a t i o n power o f y - r a d i a t i o n , t h e c r y s t a l should be l e a d shielded
from
artificial capi 11a r i es
band
.
the
environment.
broadening
Improper
originating
shielding
f rom
activity
may
result
in
in
connecting
An i l l u s t r a t i v e b l o c k diagram o f t h e apparatus i s g i v e n i n F i g . 5 . A f t e r i n j e c t i o n , t h e i n j e c t e d p l u g i s f i r s t transported through a
148 stainless-steel flow cell which measures the total radioactivity of the injected sample. Subsequently, separation takes place and the column eluate is led through a second flow cell to monitor the radiogram. By comparison of the signals from the first and second flow cell, the recovery of activity from the column can be established. The principle can also be used to indicate detector overload resulting from deadtime losses in the radioactivity detector. It is therefore recommended that the count rate in the flow cell should not exceed 10,000 CPS.
Fig. 5
Apparatus for flow-through NaI (T1)-scintillation counting with pre- and post-column y-counting. 1 = injector, optional: 2 = fraction collector, 3 = strip-chart recorder, 4 = ratemeter, 5 = multi-or single-channel analyzer, 6 = frequency/voltage converter. (Pinciple adapted from ref. 22).
In Fig. 6, an HPLC chromatogram of rare-earth radionuclides i s given with flow-through NaI(T1) counting. The system was used in the investigation o f the short-lived fission products of 252Cf. Some alternatives for flow-through NaI (Tl) detection have been published. Simonnet et al. (ref. 24) adapted a commercially available flow-through radioactivity detector for the determination of lZ5I-labeled proteins. It was made of a 0.76 mm i.d. polyethylene capillary,
149 p o s i t i o n e d i n a 20 m l sample v i a l f i l l e d w i t h l i q u i d s c i n t i l l a t o r
in
f r o n t o f two c o i n c i d e n t PM t u b e s ( e x t e r n a l SC). A c o u n t i n g e f f i c i e n c y of 0.42 was found a t CPM(b) = 465. It i s a n t i c i p a t e d t h a t t h i s p r i n c i p l e can be a p p l i e d f o r d e t e c t i o n o f o t h e r low-energy
- o r X-ray
emitters.
I PI
I 0
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
T ~ m e(nun)
F ig. 6
Flow-through+i$I(Tl) radiogram o f s h o r t - l i v e d pro duc t s o f C f . Column, Aminex A-9 (150 x pH- and c o n c e n t r a t io n - g r a d i e n t e l u t i o n w i t h a c i d f ro m 0.65 M (pH 3.6) t o 0.95 M (pH (Re prin t e d w i t h p e r m i s s i o n f r o m t h e J . E l s e v i e r , r e f . 23).
rare earth fisaion 3.2 mm, a t 95 C); w h y d r o x y i s o b u t y r ic 4.8), 1.0 ml/min. Radioanal. Chem.,
Nowadays most commercial f l o w - t h r o u g h d e t e c t o r s have p r o v i s i o n f o r e x t e r n a l SC, which a r e n o r m a l l y s p e c i f i e d f o r 1251 and 9gmTc o n l y . The f l o w c e l l s a r e made o f PTFE c a p i l l a r y , encapsuled i n l i q u i d , p l a s t i c o r NaI(T1) s c i n t i l l a t o r .
Few papers on t h e i r use have been published.
A
c o u n t i n g e f f i c i e n c y o f 0.05 o n l y has been c a l c u l a t e d f o r t h e 511 keV a n n i h i l a t i o n r a d i a t i o n of 13N w i t h a p l a s t i c s c i n t i l l a t o r f l o w c e l l ( r e f . 25) a t CPM(b) = 60. Th i s p r i n c i p l e was a l s o used i n t h e d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f homogeneous [ m o n ~ - ~ ~ ~ I - T y rand l ~ ] - [ m ~ n o - ~ ~ - ~ I - T y r ~ ~ - ] - g l u c a( ag fot ne r HPLC s e p a r a t i o n ) ( F i g . 25). Langstrom and
Lundqvist
stainless steel f o i l
(ref.
(thickness,
27)
0.07
constructed
a flow
cell
from
mm) surrounded by 1.5 mm t h i c k
p l a s t i c s c i n t i l l a t o r f o r t h e d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f high-energy p o s i t r o n e m i t t e r s , which f o r "C
r e s u l t e d i n E = 0.40 a t CPM(b) < 180.
150 Flow-through y -determination based on semiconductor detectors is rather rare (refs. 28, 29). Needham and Delaney (ref. 28) utilize a small-volume CdTe semiconductor (2.6 x 2.6 x 2.0 mm housed in a 5 mm i.d. x 12 mm long aluminium cylinder). The compactness of this detector device even allowed positioning against the heat exchanger coil of an RI detector. Unfortunately, the counting efficiencies are rather low and decrease rapidly with increasing energy; E values of 0.10, 0.02 and 0.013 are found for the 93, 185 and 300 keV photopeaks of 67Ga, respectively, and of 0.24 for the 140 keV photopeak of 99mTc. For this isotope, the relative quantitative sensitivity RSQ (as defined in ref. 30) was 30-fold worse as compared to that in NaI(T1) detection. This was attributed to the better counting geometry of the flow cell in the NaI(T1)-well. 2.3 PRINCIPLES OF 8-COUNTING IN COLUMN LIQUID CHROMATOGRAPHY 2.3.1 INTRODUCTION Except for the most important radioisotopes for biomedical and pharmaceutical research, notably 3H, 14C, 35S and 32P, are pure (100%) 8-emitters. Their relatively long half-lifes facilitate the radiosynthesis of a wide variety o f compounds with no time restrain on subsequent experiments, which makes them excellent radiotracers in recovery and metabolic profiling studies of organic compounds. Developments in 8-column liquid chromatography up to 1976 have been reviewed by Roberts (ref. 12). Until then, most workers used off-line LSC. Flow-through detectors, when available, were assembled largely from readily available electronic components, such as high-voltage supply, PM tubes, amplifiers, pulse height channel analyzers and coincidence circuits. The remaining equipment (flow cells, light-tight housings) were home-made. In the following sections, basic principles and apparatus for 8determination in column liquid chromatography are given. A more detailed treatment of performances and alternative methods is given in section 3. 2.3.2 OFF-LINE LIQUID SCINTILLATION COUNTING (LSC) In off-line LSC, successive eluate fractions are collected in sample vials on a regular time basis. After thorough mixing of the fractions or of aliquots of the fractions with LC, the vials are placed on a tray and counted separately. Plotting of the counts/fraction or the count rate/fraction versus the fraction number gives the radioactivity distribution (radiogram) in the column eluate.
151
Despite its relatively simple operation and good counting performance, the total procedure of collection, counting and data analysis is rather laborious and difficult to automate. Moreover, the preservation of the chromatographic resolution strongly depends on the fraction volume chosen, as is illustrated in Fig. 7 and refs. 25, 32, 33, 34. Small fraction columes are beneficial in this respect, but increased counting times/fraction are required to maintain precision in the counting results, and the total analysis time may become immoderate. For these reasons, it may be concluded that, in general, off-line LSC is not applicable to high-efficiency HPLC, especially when high sample throughputs are required. It has further been shown in reversed-phase HPLC, that collection of small (< 0.2 ml) aqueous fractions becomes more capricious if increasing percentages of water are present in the eluent (ref. 35). This has been explained by fluctuations in surface tension of the droplets, which led to significant differences in the collected volume/fraction. Some of these difficulties can at least partially be avoided by collecting total peak volumes. For this, the output of any type of flow-through detector may be triggered to recognize the beginning and end of an eluting peak, which controls an automatic fraction collector. However, the number and positions of peaks normally identified by liquid chromatography detectors are by no means representative for the actual radioactivity distribution in the chromatogram, as can be seen from Figs. 2, 9 and 11. Of course, no problems in selectivity exist when using flow-through radioactivity counting for this purpose, and most commercial &detectors have a provision for controlling the fractionation of column eluates. 2 . 3 . 3 FLOW-THROUGH LSC
The apparatus needed for flow-through LSC is shown in Fig. 8. A reference detector is used for the determination of mass (if specific activities have to be determined) and facilitates the development of separation conditions. A splitter is included if part of the eluate must be recovered unmodified. In most applications, reversed-phase HPLC is used (see section 4). Efficient mixing of the aqueous eluate with the organic scintillator cocktail then is of crucial importance for reproducible and efficient counting. Pulse-free pumping of the cocktail to the eluate is accomplished by using a packed 'dummy' column or pressure resistor in the scintillator solvent line. In some examples, mixing is accomplished in a low-volume mixing chamber with magnetic stirrer (refs. 36-38), but it has
152 now been accepted that small-bore (0.25 mn i.d.) T-pieces work equally well, giving efficient mixing with virtually no extra column peak broadening under normal conditions. Under more demanding circumstances, such as 3H counting in eluents o f high ionic strength or with high water contents, a specially designed high-efficiency mixing unit may be helpful (ref. 39). Depending on the type of eluent, the mixing ratio scintillator /eluate and the mixing efficiency, typical E values are 0.20-0.35 for 3H and 0.50-0.90 for 14C. Typical background count rates vary from 10 to 60 CPM.
I"
121 10
la1
8 6
4 2
_____
1
2
3
- Time lrninl
Fig 7a-c
-
4
5
(a) Flow-through LSC of 14C-labeled amino acids. Column, Brownlee RP-18 Spheri-5 (100 x 4.6 mm); eluent, methanol/ water (5/95, v/v) pH 4.2 with 0.02 M acetate buffer containing 0.03 M sodium hexylsulphonate, 1.0 ml/min; liquid scintillator, 1.0 mjjmin; flow cell volume, 63 4; sample (b, c) represent corresponding frequency, 0.6 s simulations for off-lipe detection with sample frequencies of 3.0 (b) and 6.0 (c) s- , respectively; at eluent flow rate of 1.0 ml/min, this corresponds to fraction volumes of 0.05 and 0.1 ml, respectively. (Reproduced by permission from Eur. Chromatogr. News, John Wiley & Sons, ref. 31).
.
153
SCINTILLATOR PUMP
REFERENCE DETECTOR
1
-
ELUENT
B-DETECTOR
;
MIXING COIL
I
Fig. 8
WASTE
Apparatus for flow-through liquid scintillation counting. 1 = injector, 2 = fraction collector. For detailed diagram of 8detector, see Fig. 10
The flow cell in the 8-detector consists of a spiral made out of wound 1 ight-transparent material (normally PTFE), which is closely held between two PM tubes for coincidence counting. Dilution of eluate with scintillator allows cell columes Vd to be somewhat larger as compared to cell columes commonly used in, e.g., UV or RI detectors, while maintaining most of the chromatographic integrity. This is illustrated in Fig. 9 , in which vd = 1.0 ml at Fe = 1.0 ml/min and Fs = 4.0 ml/min. 2 . 3 . 4 FLOW-THROUGH HETEROGENEOUS SCINTILLATION COUNTING (HSC)
Compared to LSC, the set-up for flow-through HSC is considerably simpler because no LS-pump or eluate splitting is needed (Fig. 10). Three approaches may be distinguished: (1) the flow cell is constructed of UVtransparant glass or PTFE capillary, packed with finely divided, solid scintillator; (2) it is made of plastic scintillator capillary; or (3) it is constructed from a PTFE capillary encapsuled in a liquid or plastic scintillator for external SC. Little information on 8 counting with the latter two approaches is available. However, due to the small range of 8 particles in liquids as compared to the dimensions of these cells, counting efficiencies are relatively low. For instance, with a 0.7 mm i.d. NE102A plastic scintillator cell, an efficiency of 0.057 has been claimed for 14Clabeled solvents (ref. 41). The corresponding efficiency for 14C-labeled gaseous carbon dioxide was 0.58. Plastic scintillators are not inert to oxidising acids and most organic solvents, such as acetonitrile and tetrahydrofuran. Their use is therefore restricted to qualitative SC with
154 aqueous eluates. The performance for higher energy 0 ’ s from 32P is significantly better; values of over 0.70 may then be obtained (ref. 41).
A
Fig. 9
Representative UV (A) and radiogram (6) o f tyrosine containing metabolites of enkephalin. (B) was obtained after incubation o f an hyogenate of rat-astrocytes with added carboxypeptidase A and [ H-Tyrlenkephalin. Column, Spherisorb ODs I1 (60 x 4.1 mm); gradient elution with mobile phases consisting o f methanol and citric acid/phosphate buffer to which 0.3 mM sodium n-octanesulphonate was added; detection, UV (254 nm) and flow-through LSC, respectively; flow cell volume of the radioactivity detector was 1 ml; peaks: 1 = Tyr, 2 = Tyr-Gly-Gly, 3 = Tyr-Gly, 4 = Tyr-Gly-Gly-Phe, 5 = Met-enkephalin and 6 = Leu-enkephalin. (Reprinted with permission from the J. Chromatogr., Elsevier, ref. 40).
Of the heterogeneous modes, the packed cell (1) guarantees the most intense contact between eluate and scintil lator and, thus, optimum geometric counting efficiencies. This approach was first used in amino acid analyzers, with anthracene- (ref. 42) or POPOP-packed cells (ref. 43). The main disadvantages o f these types o f scintillators are their solu-
155
bility in organic solvents and the relatively low (< 0.02) counting efficiencies for 3H. These materials have now been replaced by inorganic scintillator glasses, such as cerium-activated lithium silicate or yttrium silicate, or salts such as europum-doped calcium fluoride. The new types of scintillators are virtually inert to most solvents used in column liquid chromatography. It is, however, recommended to avoid pH values of less than 2 or greater than 8 . Furthermore, the calcium fluoride material is normally not compatible with solvents containing ammonia. Depending on the particle size and the packing density of the cell, counting efficiencies are around 0.05 ( 3 H), 0.70 ( 14C) and 0.90 ( 32PI. Fig. 11 shows that a relatively large cell volume can be used without deterioration of the chromatographic resolution in the radiogram as obtained from the reference detector. In this case, the HSC cell has a volume of 0.6 ml, and is packed with yttrium silicate particles.
SAMPLE
Fig. 10 Schematic diagram for flow-through heterogeneous scintillation counting. AMP = Amplifier, SCA = Single-Channel Analyser, MCA = Multi-Channel Analyser. (Reprinted from the J. Chromatogr., Elsevier, ref. 21).
156 2.3.5 FLOW-THROUGH CERENKOV COUNTING To the author's knowledge, o n l y one paper dealing w i t h flow-through Cerenkov counting has been published ( r e f . 45). This i s r a t h e r s u r p r i s i n g i n view o f some d i s t i n c t advantages o f t h i s technique i n t h e determination o f high-energy 8's (see s e c t i o n 2.1).
In t h e paper, inorganic
pyrophosphate (PPi) produced i n a c e l l c u l t u r e medium was determined by incubation w i t h r a d i o a c t i v e orthophosphate ( 32 Pi). I n t r a - and e x t r a c e l l u l a r 32PPi
was measured using a weak anion exchange HPLC separation of
from Pi and other phosphor-containing compounds, w i t h flow-through Cerenkov counting a t E > 0.99 (Fig. 12). PPi
ATP
1
'(002)
2
Fig. 11 HPLC-UV and HPLC-radioactivity p r o f i l e s o f a p e r c h l o r i c a c i d extracf40f human lymphoblastic c e l l l i n e MOLT-3 a f t e r incubation with C-uridine f o r 2 h. The extracted nucleotides were separated on P a r t i s i l - 1 0 SAX r a d i a l l y compressed modules (100 x 8 mm) a t 2.0 ml/min; d e t e c t i o n was by UV (254 nm) and flowthrough HSC, respectively. For t h e l a t t e r , the f l o w c e l l was packed w i t h modified y t t r i u m s i l i c a t e granules, r e s u l t i n g i n an empty volume o f 0.6 m l . Under these conditions, a d e t e c t i o n l i m i t o f 5 Bq was found ( a t E = 0.43); peaks: 1 = UDP-Nacetylglucosamine and/or UDP-N-acetylgalactosamine, 2 = UDPglucose and/or UDP-galactose. (Reprinted w i t h permission from t h e J . Chromatogr., E l s e v i e r , r e f . 44).
157
a
n
a
0.5 01
03 0 N ID
02
W
01
lOOr
250
125
0
0
1
2
3
1
time
5
6
7
8
9
10
[rninl
F i g . 12 Chromatographic s e p a r a t i o n o f phosphate-containing compounds. Column, radial-pack Bondapak-NH (100 x 8 mm); m o b i l e phase, 0.1 M c i t r i c a c i d ( b u f f e r A) and M c i t r i c a c i d c o n t a i n i n g 0.1 M potassium sulphate p l u s 0.02 M magnesium s u l p h a t e (6) ( g r a d i e n t e l u t i o n ) ; d e t e c t i o n bY2UV (260 nm; up e r t r a c e ) and flow-through Cerenkov counting o f P (lower t r a c e r . (Re r i n t e d by permission from Anal. Biochem., Academic Press r e f . 4 5 r
03
2.4.
DATA ANALYSIS
2.4.1
DEFINITIONS OF DETECTION LIMITS
Relatively
few
papers
have
been
concerned
with
definitions
of
d e t e c t i o n l i m i t s i n flow-through c o u n t i n g i n terms o f chromatographic parameters and t h e p r o p e r t i e s o f t h e d e t e c t o r device, such as t h e c o u n t i n g
30, 32, 46-49). Algorithms d e r i v e d by Sieswerda e t a l . ( r e f . 46) and K l e i n and Hunt ( r e f . 47) a r e b r i e f l y summarized i n t h i s section. F o r convenience, symbols and a b b r e v i a t i o n s as used by these authors have been changed t o
efficiency,
c o u n t i n g t i m e and background count
rate
(refs.
conformity. A more fundamental treatment on d e t e c t i o n 1 i m i t s i n r a d i o a c t i v i t y d e t e r m i n a t i o n can be found i n r e f s . 50 and 51. The n e t peak area Cs ( i n counts) i s given by:
i n which cs+b represents t h e t o t a l counts c o l l e c t e d i n t h e peak and cb t h e t o t a l background counts c o l l e c t e d i n t i m e Tb ( i n min). Tw i s t h e t o -
158 t a l peak counting t i m e ( i n min), which i n flow-through c o u n t i n g equals t h e base peak w i d t h ( i n min). SD ( C s ) , i s I f i t i s assumed t h a t t h e standard d e v i a t i o n i n C, determined by t h e s t a t i s t i c s of t h e r a d i o a c t i v e decay alone, SD(Cs) can be c a l c u l a t e d from Poisson s t a t i s t i c s , and f o l l o w s from:
This assumption i s v a l i d f o r low l e v e l s o f a c t i v i t y only. A t h i g h a c t i v i t y l e v e l s , c o n t r i b u t i o n s from o t h e r sources, such as v a r i a t i o n s i n i n j e c t i o n volume, c o u n t i n g considered as w e l l .
efficiency
or
counting
time
should
be
Sieswerda ( r e f . 46) then defines t h e p r e c i s i o n as t h e s i g n a l - t o - n o i s e r a t i o i n C,, i n C,,
which i s t h e r e c i p r o c a l o f t h e r e l a t i v e standard d e v i a t i o n Combining eq. (3) and (4) y i e l d s :
RSD(Cs).
SD(Cs)
RSD(Cs) =
--
1 [-x
‘bxTw (1 + -x ‘sxTb
CS
Since Cs = becomes :
TW
(1
E x DPM(s) x Td and Cb
1
=
+
0.5
+)I
Tb
CPM(b) x Tb, from eq.
CPM(b)xTw
ExTdxDPM( s)
( 5 ) RSD(Cs)
TW
x (1 +
RSD(Cs) = [
(5)
(I++)IO*~ E x Td x DPM(s)
(6)
Tb
Assuming Tb >> Tw, eq. (6) s i m p l i f i e s t o :
1 RSD(Cs) = [
CPM(b) x Tw x (1
E x Td x DPM(s)
+ I)-
Oe5
(7)
E x Td x DPM(s)
From eq (7) d e t e c t i o n l i m i t s have been c a l c u l a t e d as f u n c t i o n of Td and RSD(Cs), they have been p l o t t e d i n F i g . values f o r Tw and CPM(b).
E x
1 3 , assuming t y p i c a l
159
s -
0001
001
01
10
EiTd
F i g . 13 D e t e c t i o n l i m i t s ( i n DPM) vs. ExTd, c a l c u l a t e d f rom eq. (7) a t RSD(C,) = 0.33, 0.10 and 0.05, w i t h CPM(b) = 30 CPM and Tw = 0.5 min.
K l e i n and Hunt ( r e f . 47) i n t e r p r e t t h e d e t e c t i o n l i m i t as t h e a c t i v i t y DPM ( m i n ) t h a t must b e p r e s e n t i n t h e e l u t i n g peak i n o r d e r t o o b t a i n a peak h e i g h t c oun t r a t e o f t w i c e t h e background count r a t e . Assuming a t r i a n g u l a r peak shape, an e x p r e s s i o n f o r DPM (min) i s d e r i v e d : CPM(b) x [(Fex S + Fs)] x [Tw + vd/ (Fex
s
+ F,)]
DPM(min) =
(8) SXEXVd
i n which S i s t h e f r a c t i o n of t h e e l u a t e t r a n s p o r t e d t hrough t h e r a d i o a c t i v i t y d e t e c t o r . Td t h u s f o l l o w s f r o m Td = Vd/[Fe x S + Fs].
160
At this point it should be noted that in practice, Td is the Only parameter which the analytical chemist can vary at will to improve precision in the measurement. Methods other than off-line counting that are intended to improve precision via Td have been compiled in sections 3.4 and 3.5. 2.4.2 OATA ACQUISITON,PROCESSING AND PRESENTATION In order to adequately represent the shape of an eluting peak it is normally advised to collect 20-30 data points (samples) in the peak. For peak widths of about 0.5 min, this requires sample frequencies of 1 s to be used. However, the total number of counts accumulated per sample decreases with decreasing sample frequency, which results in noisy signals.
I
CAR.
[PAR.
20
I
-TIME
-
Fig. 14 Radiograms of the 14C-labeled pesticides carbaryl (1.0 Bq) and parathion (0.8 Bq). Chromatographic conditions, see Fig. 3; raw (A) and filtered (by Fast Fourier Transform; B) data. (Reproduced from ref. 7; see also refs. 89-93). Therefore, the use of data filtering techniques is of prime importance in low-level flow-through radioactivity counting in order to be able to recognize small peaks recorded at short sampling frequency. An electronic filter for radiochromatography has been described (ref. 52). With the introduction of data collection, storage and hand1 ing by personal computers, the use of filtering algorithms has eliminated much of the need for electronic filtering. Filtering can thus be performed in real time during
the collection of data samples or, alternatively, after storage of the raw data. The latter is preferred, mainly because it allows more sophisticated filtering programmes such as Savinsky-Golay moving average (ref. 53) or Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) (ref. 54) to be used. Fig. 14 illustrates the effectiveness o f FFT on a detection limit determination of 14C-labeled pesticides with flow-through LSC. No peak broadening occurs after filtering, allowing a more simple peak detection algorithm to be used.
2.5. COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE FLOW-THROUGH RADIOACTIVITY DETECTORS At present, at least six detectors for flow-through &counting are commercially available (Table IV). Most of these systems can be purchased with an (optimal) LS-pump, eluent-splitter system, built-in micro processor, software packages for control ling data collection and data handling of digital and analogue signals, flow cells with volumes ranging from 0.05 to about 1.5 ml and different types of solid scintillators. TABLE IV Commercially available flow-through radioactivity detectors TYPe ( s )
Manufacturer
MODEL 171/170
Beckman Instruments, Inc., Fullerton, CAI USA
LB 506 (A, 6, D)
Berthold Lab., Wildbad, FRG
FLO-ONE (IC, CR, CT, BD)
Radiomatic Instruments and Chemical Co., Inc. Tampa, F1, USA
ISOFLO
Nuclear Enterprizes Limited, Edinburgh, GB
BETACORD 1208
LKB WALLAC, Turku, Finland
RAMONA radioactivity detectors Isomess Isotopenmessgerate, Straubenhardt, FRG IN/US, Fairfield, NJ, USA
B-MAT
Depending on the configuration, the costs of these instruments vary between Hfl. 20,000-25,000* for basic set-ups (without LS-pump), splitter and computer system, and one analogue output from a ratemeter provided) to about Hfl. 40,000-60,000for more complex systems. These prices are, of course, subject to variation and give rough indications only. *(Hfl
. 1,000 = about $500)
162
3.
3.1
OPTIMIZATION PARAMETERS FOR FLOW-THROUGH 8-COUNTING INTRODUCTION
I n t h i s section, t h e o p t i m i z a t i o n of E, CPM(b) and Td i s considered i n more d e t a i l . I t should be stressed t h a t most o f t h e v a r i a b l e s t h a t can be used t o improve t h e counting r e s u l t s are t o some extent i n t e r r e l a t e d ; t h i s requires c a r e f u l s e l e c t i o n o f t h e operating conditions. I n section 3.5, some a l t e r n a t i v e methods f o r monitoring o f &labeled compounds i n column l i q u i d chromatography are discussed, most of which deal w i t h t h e increase i n s e n s i t i v i t y v i a Td by decoupling separation from counting 3.2
.
THE COUNTING EFFICIENCY E; GENERAL ASPECTS I n flow-through SC, E i s determined by the product o f t h r e e indepen-
dent e f f i c i e n c i e s : t h e e f f i c i e n c y w i t h which t h e s c i n t i l l a t o r / e l u a t e mixture converts t h e 8-energy i n t o photons ( t h e i n t r i n s i c e f f i c i e n c y ) , the e f f i c i e n c y w i t h which these photons reach t h e photocathode of the PM tubes (the geometric e f f i c i e n c y )
,
and t h e e f f i c i e n c y o f t h e e l e c t r o n i c
c i r c u i t ( i n c l u d i n g the PM tubes) t o convert the photons i n t o e l e c t r i c a l pulses t h a t pass through t h e coincidence c i r c u i t . The coincidence time and t h e s e t t i n g s o f t h e lower and upper pulse height discriminators may be chosen t o improve E. However, increasing t h e coincidence time o r decreasing t h e lower pulse height d i s c r i m i n a t o r may adversely a f f e c t t h e background count r a t e . set-up,
To characterize a given
i t therefore i s n o t s u f f i c i e n t t o quote E but r a t h e r t h e Figure
of M e r i t , FM, defined as: FM = E2/CPM(b)
(9)
E can be s p e c i f i e d under dynamic f l o w conditions o r a t zero flow. Differences i n dynamic and s t a t i c E values have been reported ( r e f s . 35, 55-57). Dynamic e f f i c i e n c i e s appear t o be somewhat smaller. One explanat i o n f o r t h i s phenomenon i s t h e decrease i n e f f e c t i v e f l o w c e l l volume w i t h increasing f l o w r a t e , as observed by Van Nieuwkerk e t a l . ( r e f . 58); i n other words, t h e actual dynamic and s t a t i c e f f i c i e n c i e s then are about equal. For the determination o f dynamic e f f i c i e n c i e s ,
i t i s more convenient
t o perform plug i n j e c t i o n s (without column i n s t a l l e d ) f o r greater choice i n r a d i o a c t i v e standard,
Possible radiochemical i m p u r i t i e s then do n o t
i n t e r f e r e w i t h the measurement.
This a l s o f a c i l i t a t e s t h e recording o f
gradient curves y i e l d i n g E as a f u n c t i o n o f the gradient parameters which
163 are normally needed when combining gradient elution with flow-through LSC . It turns out that the strongest influence the user can have on E is via the intrinsic efficiency, and experimental data from flow-through LSC and HSC on this subject are given in the next two sections. 3.2.1 E in LSC Scintillator cocktails, especially formulated for dynamic flow counting have become available only recently. Their main properties are fast sample incorporation and high sample hold capacity. With these scintillators, LS/eluate rations of about 3-5 will normally give satisfactory performance. Nitrogen purging of the scinti 1 lator may reduce oxygen quenching by about 50% (ref. 59). Some precautions with respect to the eluent composition should be taken. Halogenated solvents such as chloroform and dichloromethane act as strong quenchers of the LS fluorescence and must be avoided. The applicability of types of solvents to LSC may be judged from table V, which gives the relative quenching properties of some aliphatic substituents. TABLE V Relative quenching properties in LSC of aliphatic groups1 Diluter
Mild quencher
Strong quencher
-H
-CH=CHR
-F
-c1
-0CO.COR - I > Br
-NH2 -OH
-COOH
-NHR -NO2 -CHO -SH=SR -C12 -C13
'Reproduced by permission of Friedr. Vieweg & Sohn, ref. 59. E can further be affected by gradient elution. Roberts and Fields
(ref. 35) determined dynamic counting efficiencies for 3H with acetonitrile-water gradients at an LS/eluent ratio of 3 . Values of 0.21, 0.13 and 0.22 were found for 0.60 and 100% (v/v) acetonitrile, respectively. Webster and Whaun (ref. 57) examined the effect of methanol
164 or salt gradients on static efficiencies for 14C in RP-HPLC. NO significant influence on E was found for the methanol-water gradient (0-35% methanol in 0.01 M phosphate buffer, pH 5.6, which is in accordance with the observation made by Causey et al. (ref. 60). Salt gradient elution resulted i n a slight decrease in E from 91 to 77%, with a 0.01-0.7 M phosphate buffer at pH values of 3.4 and 4.3,respectively. Finally E can be influenced by the injected sample. This was illustrated in ref. 61, where preconcentration of a 900 ml pool of hamster urine on a conical pre-column resulted in heavy quenching by endogeneous material in parts of the radiogram. These extreme conditions, though, are not likely to be met in routine work. 3.2.2 E I N HSC The influence of scintillator particle size on E has been studied for various materials (refs. 21, 62-64). Some results are given in Table VI. Mutual comparison of the scintillators is hampered because o f differences in mesh sizes (or mesh-size distributions) and packing densities of the cells. TABLE V I Counting efficiencies o f solid scintillators for 3 H and 14C Particle size Im Mesh
Type
3H1
14C1
Ref.
0.44 0.57 0.62 0.16(D) 0.40(D) 0.38(S) 0.62 0.71 0.20(S) 0.57(S)
62 62 62 67 68 64 64 64 21 21 63 63
~~
Ce(Li)
EuCaF2
'0
=
90-125 63-90 38-63 250-350 250-350
60-80 140-160 160-180 150 150-250 45-100 100-150
dynamic, S
=
static
0.018-0.014 0.041-0.044 0.069-0.062
O.O35(S) 0.086 ( S )
165 Nevertheless,
i t can be concluded t h a t E increases w i t h decreasing
mesh sizes. A t t h e same time, however, t h e pressure build-up, d P , across the c e l l increases. A P can be approximated from t h e well-known equation: A P =
[ rjx LL]/[Ko x Td x dpZ] (bar)
I n which L i s t h e c e l l length ( i n m),
q t h e eluent v i s c o s i t y ( i n Kg/(m x
s ) ) , d the s c i n t i l l a t o r p a r t i c l e s i z e ( i n m) and KO t h e p e r m e a b i l i t y P constant ( w i t h values o f 0.001-0.002). S u b s t i t u t i n g t y p i c a l values o f L = 0.04 m, TI= 0.001 kg/(m x s ) , KO = 0.0015, Td = 10 s and d = 2 5 ~ 1 0 - ~ m P 3P i s 1.7 bar. The
lower
limit
of
d i s f u r t h e r determined by t h e adsorption P behaviour o f t h e s c i n t i l l a t o r m a t e r i a l , which becomes e s p e c i a l l y evident a t increasing s p e c i f i c surface areas, A t present, counting e f f i c i e n c i e s of over 0.80 and 0.11 have been claimed by some manufacturers f o r 14C and 3H, respectively. For 3H, apart from few exceptions ( r e f s . 39, 55, 651, such impressive f i g u r e s have n o t been confirmed i n t h e l i t e r a t u r e as y e t . Although w i t h HSC i t i s normally assumed t h a t E i s n o t a f f e c t e d by t h e eluent composition, some evidence o f t h e opposite i s a v a i l a b l e . Giersch ( r e f . 66) determined t h e counting e f f i c i e n c i e s o f 14C-labeled sugars and corresponding esters w i t h a l i t h i u m glass s c i n t i l l a t o r . With an aqueous s a l t gradient o f 5-400 mM phosphate, E was 0.22,
which increased t o 0.39
f o r a c e t o n i t r i l e / w a t e r (80/20, v/v, pH = 3.0). The d i f f e r e n c e was a t t r i b u t e d t o a l t e r a t i o n s i n t h e p a r t i t i o n c o e f f i c i e n t s o f t h e analytes between mobile
phase and s c i n t i l l a t o r
surface,
and r e l a t i v a t e s
HSC
counting e f f i c i e n c i e s c a l c u l a t e d from equation (1). F i n a l l y , compounds i n t h e eluent may absorb photons emitted from t h e s c i n t i l l a t o r . Colour quenching by p-nitrophenol has been observed by Mackey e t a l .
( r e f . 62).
Mori reported c o l o u r quenching from reagents
used i n the post-column n i n h y d r i n d e r i v a t i z a t i o n o f amino acids (ref. 67) and the bromocresolpurple d e r i v a t i z a t i o n o f c a r b o x y l i c acids (ref. 68).
3.3
THE BACKGROUND COUNT RATE CPM(b); GENERAL ASPECTS I d e a l l y , a s t a b l e background countrate should be observed,
which
o r i g i n a t e s from the thermally generated PM dark c u r r e n t , cosmic rays and 40 r a d i o a c t i v i t y present i n t h e glass envelope o f t h e PM tubes ( K, 232Th and 238U) ( r e f . 69). I n p r a c t i s e , a number o f user-determined sources c o n t r i b u t e t o CPM(b) as w e l l . These include t h e l a b o r a t o r y environment and i n t e r f e r i n g processes i n the f l o w c e l l of t h e r a d i o a c t i v i t y monitor. Examples from the f i r s t category
are
external
r a d i o a c t i v e sources,
166 stray light, spikes from electric apparatus and temperature fluctuations. Proper lead shielding can give a 3-fold reduction in CPM(b) (ref. 70). Connections to and from the detector should be light-tight. For this the use of stainless-steel or blackened PTFE capillary is recommended. Dark counts from the PM tubes can be reduced substantially by cooling, but only one example of this effect is found in the literature on radiocolumn liquid chromatography (ref. 63). Contributions to CPM(b) arising from cross-talk of two opposite PM tubes can be diminished by using paper masks (ref. 62). The second category is perhaps of more importance because it refers more to the daily routine. Radioactive contamination in the flow cell is the most abundant example in this class, but chemiluminescence and phosphorescence have also been shown to add to CPM(b). Although onephoton events, these processes may pass the coincidence circuit if the pulse rate exceeds the coincidence resolving time and thus be counted (ref. 59). Differences in the pulse-height distribution of luminescence and scintillator fuorescence enable corrections to be made for pulses not originating from scintillator fluorescence (ref. 71) and some radioactivity monitors have provisions to perform such correction. From the above reflections it can be argumented that CPM(b) should be specified under realistic conditions, i .e. between successive measurements with the flow cell filled with the scintillator-eluate mixture. It is good practice to run 'blank' chromatograms, prefereably at short sample frequency to observe spikes and thus be able to identify possible background sources. The following sections summarize some observations described in the literature on background contributions arising in the flow cell. 3.3.1 CPM(b) in flow-through LSC Chemiluminescence may occur after mixing alkaline solvents or ethers with liquid scintillators (refs. 19, 30, 36, 55, 59). The effect is especially pronounced for dioxane-based cocktails. Peroxides in ether or dioxane are believed to play a major role. It can be suppressed by cooling of the LS/eluate mixture to 10 OC before entering the flow cell (refs. 30, 36) or electronically corrected for after pulse height analysis. Because of the relatively short lifetimes of most chemiluminescence processes, increasing the time lapse between mixing and counting may also be used. Radioactive contamination of the flow cell is not expected to be a major problem, yet adsorption of radiolabeled peptides (ref. 351, pesticides
167 (ref. 72) and anions (refs. 73, 74) on PTFE-capillary flow cells has been observed. 3.3.2. CPM(b) I N FLOW-THROUGH HSC Contamination of packed cells has been observed for a large variety of solutes, some of which are collected in Table VII. These observations are not always consistent. For instance, Schutte (ref. 77) explained the observed adsorption of 14C-labeled nucleotides on calcium fluoride by the low solubility of calcium-salts of nucleotides, whereas Nakamura and Koizumi (ref. 21) found no adsorption for the same types of materials. TABLE VII
Observations o f adsorption on solid scintillator particles
Sc i nti1 1 ator
Samp 1 e
Yt2Si05 CeLi
phospholipids sugars
CeLi CeLi EuCaF2 EuCaF2 EuCaF2 EuCaF2
Remedy
HN03 flush (20%) hot detergent and 0.1 M HC1 flush carboxylic acids repacking after 50 inj. phosphates, acetates repacking polymers -glucuronides methanol, water or detergent flush ri bonucleotides si 1 anizat ion nucleotides --
Ref.
75 66 68 62 63 76
44 77
In general, HSC i s not compatible with solutes having molecular weights larger than about 600, such as proteins and polymers. The increase in CPM(b) observed with these solutes is explained both by filtering processes and the adsorption of radioactivity to the scintillator due to the relatively large number of reactive sites in these molecules (ref. 78). As a general rule one should avoid injecting radioactive samples of unknown identity or samples with radiolabeled solutes with large differences in polarity. Before starting flow experiments, the adsorption behavior of the solutes should be established using test-tubes filled with the scintillator powder (ref. 39). These test tubes also facilitate developing washing procedures for the packed cell. Other precautions that can be taken are presaturation of the scintillator with non-labeled analogs or silanization of the scintillator surface (ref. 44).
168 Some o f t h e disadvantages i n HSC may be circumvented by t h e p r i n c i p l e introduced by Rucker e t a l . (ref. 78), who employed f l o w c e l l s f i l l e d w i t h a x i a l l y aligned 0.1 mm i.d.
Ce(Li) glass f i b e r s . Computer models
were developed f o r t h e p r e d i c t i o n of t h e geometric counting e f f i c i e n c i e s o f R-emitters.
Except f o r 3H, t h e p r e d i c t e d values agreed w e l l w i t h t h e
experimental counting e f f i c i e n c i e s . For 14C and 32P, E values o f 0.55 and 0.93 were found, respectively. For 3 H, E was o n l y 0.001 (predicted 0.10). The system was compared w i t h a HSC c e l l packed w i t h Yt2Si05 powder ( w i t h
< 25 m). As compared t o t h e packed c e l l , s u b s t a n t i a l reductions i n P pressure build-up and contamination were observed using t h e glass f i b e r c e l l (Table V I I I ) . No radiograms demonstrating t h e f l o w c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s of t h e g l a s s - f i b e r c e l l were given as y e t . d
3.4
OTHER PARAMETERS
3.4.1 SELECTING THE FLOW CELL VOLUME vd I N LSC Some authors simply r e l a t e t h e maximum permitted Vd t o the minimum time A W , observed between two neighbouring peaks o f i n t e r e s t i n t h e reference detector (refs. 47, 55). Vd(max) i s then c a l c u l a t e d according to:
Obviously, only those peaks are detected which r e f e r t o radiolabeled products. For instance, i n metabolism studies o n l y the parent compound and i t s metabolites are labeled and t h e r e f o r e detected i n t h e radiogram. I t may then be worthwhile t o optimize r e s o l u t i o n o f r a d i o a c t i v e peaks,
which allows l a r g e r c e l l volumes t o be used. A l t e r n a t i v e l y , Vd(max) may be r e l a t e d t o the e f f e c t i v e base peak w i d t h Tw ( r e f . 30). For most p r a c t i c a l purposes, a Tw/Vd r a t i o o f about 10 i s acceptable w i t h respect t o e x t r a column peak broadening ( r e f . 79). Vd(max) then becomes: Vd(max) = [0.4 x Vo x (1 x k')]/[X
x NOs5] ( m l )
(12)
in which X i s t h e eluate f r a c t i o n i n t h e e l u a t e / s c i n t i l l a t o r mixture. S u b s t i t u t i n g t y p i c a l values o f N = 3000, Vo = 0.5 m l and X = 0.25,
maxi-
mum permitted f l o w c e l l volumes o f 0.030 and 0.073 m l are calculated f o r
k ' = 1.0 and 4.0, respectively. The c r i t e r i a given above do n o t i n c l u d e losses i n r e s o l u t i o n caused by
poor flow dynamics in the mixing-T, connecting capillaries or flow cell. To minimize the extra-column peak broadening, eluate segmentation techniques can be used. These are treated in section 3.5. 3.4.2 SELECTING THE FLOW CELL VOLUME Vd IN HSC The criteria for Vd(max) given in section 3.4 may be adapted to flowthrough HSC if additional band broadening from the packed cell can be neglected. To some extent the packed cells can be treated as packed-bed reactors. For analytes that do not adsorb to the scintillator particles (no retention), the added variance in peak volume uW arising from axial molecular diffusion and convective mixing in a cylindrical packed cell can in that case be approximated by: uw =
[(h x d x Td2)/L]Oa5 (ml)
P
in which h is the reduced plate height (2 < h < 6 ) . From this equation it follows that it is advantageous to use long, small-bore capillaries rather than short, large-bore ones in constructing the cell. Substituting m and L = 0.04 m, the typical values of Td = 1.0 s , h = 4, d = 25 x P added variance is 0.05 s. A 20-fold decrease i n Fe(Td = 20 s) gives uw = 1.0 s, which still seems quite acceptable for most applications. Large differences between experimental and theoretical values for uw may be explained by adsorption of the analyte on the scintillator material, resulting in asymmetric tailing peaks (ref. 80). 3.4.3 REPRODUCIBILITY AND LINEARITY Limited data are available on reproducibilities and linear dynamic ranges in flow-through R-counting. For high levels of activity, statistical and background fluctuations can be neglected (refs. 46, 60, 81) and reproducibility is expected to be determined primarily by E. This has not been thoroughly evaluated yet. Both for E and Td, pulse-free pumping of solvents and (with LSC) efficient mixing of eluent and scintillator are probably the most important requirements. RSD values, as determined from repetitive injections of high 14C-levels, can be as low as 1-2% for the LSC mode (refs. 57, 60) and 2.2% for the HSC mode (ref. 82). The effect of replacing packed cells on reproducibility must also be considered; repacking a single HSC cell resulted in static 14C E of 0.716
170 2 0.003 (n = 3), while packing of five HSC cells of about the same geometric dimensions resulted in static 14C E values of 0.688 f. 0.024 (ref. 62). The linear dynamic response is determined primarily by the dead time of the electronic circuit and the maximum number o f counts per sample frequency which the computer can accumulate (ref. 83). A linearity of up to about 4x103 Bq/peak can easily be obtained (ref. 44).
TABLE V I I I Adsorption (%) on granular Yt2Si05 and fiber scinti 1 1 ators 1
Compound
Eluting solvent
Glycine
0.5 M acetate 50% ethanol benzene 50% ethanol 0.01 M phosphate 0.01 M phospahte 50% ethanol 0.01 M phosphate
61 ucose
Cholesterol UDP
ATP Inul in Insulin Cytochrome C
Retained % Yt2S i O5 Fiber 0.5 1.6 2.1 382 5EI2 1.4 832 86'
0.7 0.2 1.4 1 .o 9.9 0.1 24 84
Reproduced by permission of Friedr. Vieweg & Sohn, ref. 78 Irreversible sorption 3.5
SPECIAL METHODS Bakay (refs. 74, 84-86) suppressed peak broadening in flow-through LSC of 14C-labeled amino acids by using post-column gel segmentation. For this, a polyacrylamide gel is pumped by motor-driven high-pressure syringes to the scintil lator/eluate mixture. The benefits of segmentation on the clearance of the flow cell is clearly demonstrated in Fig. 15. Schutte (ref. 77) used air segmentation, but data of its effect on suppresion of peak broadening were not given. Snyder (ref. 87) suggested the usage of post-column segmentation and buffer storage systems for decoupl ing separation and counting steps. In addition, in comparing post-column reactors (open tubular, liquid- or gassegmented flow and packed bed), Scholten et al. (ref. 88) showed that when dealing with capillaries with internal diameters o f over 0.3 mm and residence time of over about 20 s , segmentation techniques should be
171 applied in order to prevent peak broadening. Van Nieuwkerk (ref. 89) adapted the principle of solvent segmentation and extraction of aqueous column eluates for subsequent storage of the segmented stream in a capillary storage loop (Fig. 1 6 ) . During the separation, the analytes are extracted from the aqueous eluate into water-immiscible LS plugs. The LS plugs act both as detection medium and segmentator. The segmented flow is transported through a flow-through 8-detector for recording the direct radiogram and subsequently stored in a capillary storage loop. After storage of the complete chromatogram the contents of the loop are re-introduced into the detector at low flow rates by turning the switching valve. These flow rates can be selected according to the counting time Td and, therefore, the sensitivity needed, independently from the separation (reverse radiogram).
A
WITHOUT SPACER USING Iml FLOW CELL
0 w i i n SPACER USING I mi FLOW CELL
XI# 40”l 4ooo
3000 c
2 a c
2000
a U’
1000
L
0
~~
0
1
2
3 YIfIUTES
4
5
0
I
2
3
4
MINUTES
Fig. 15 Tracings of radioactivity of samples containing 14C-labeled amino acids. Samples were injected at 0.5 min intervals, without (A) and with (B) gel segmentation. Total flow rate of column eluate and liquid scintillator is 2.5 ml/min to which the gel spacer is added at 0.044 ml/min ( B ) . (Reprinted with permission from Anal. Biochem., Academic Press. ref. 84) The principle was applied in the determination of 14C-pesticides (refs. 7, 90) and 14C-amino acids (ref. 91). For extractable analytes, a 0.75 mm i.d. stainless-steel capillary was used as storage loop, and it was shown that segmentation effectively suppressed peak broadening in the
172 c a p i l l a r i e s , p e r m i t t i n g Td values o f over 5 min t o be used (see a l s o Figs. 3 and 14).
I I
injector
NdUn AnJvticel 662
C 0
I
U
m n
interface
~si-n/z computer
dual disk driua
Fig. 16 Schematic diagram o f HPLC equipment w i t h flow-through B-detector and e x t r a c t ion/segmentat ion/storage system. (Reproduced w i t h permission from Chromatographia, F r i e d r . Vieweg and Sons, ref.
90.) For non-extractable analytes,
the stainless-steel
capillary led t o
s i g n i f i c a n t peak broadening, which was explained by aqueous w e t t i n g on the inner w a l l o f t h e s t a i n l e s s - s t e e l c a p i l l a r y and t r a n s p o r t o f t h e
non-
extracted analytes through t h e aqueous f i l m . This e f f e c t was suppressed by using a 0.80
mm i.d.
PTFE loop instead.
For t h e
non-extracted
analytes, as compared t o corresponding d i r e c t measurements, a s i g n i f i c a n t decrease in E was observed i n t h e reverse measurements. This could be explained by the increase i n the volumes o f t h e aqueous and s c i n t i l l a t o r segments during t h e t r a n s p o r t and storage i n t h e c a p i l l a r i e s . consequence, reverse mode.
less & p a r t i c l e s In this
As a
reach t h e s c i n t i l l a t o r segments i n t h e
case, reverse
counting
efficiencies
could be
173 improved by homogenizing the contents of the storage loop just before reintroduction into the 8-detector while still maintaining the peak broadening suppression effect. A second scintillator pump was installed for this purpose for the addition of water-miscible LS to the contents of the storage loop (Fig. 17). For some selected amino acids the performance of the system for non-extractable analytes is illustrated in Fig. 18. Alternatively, the principle can be adapted for non-extractable analytes by using post-column ion-suppression or ion-pair extraction techniques as shown by Veltkamp et al. (refs. 92, 93), thereby avoiding the need for a second scintillator pump. This was demonstrated in the determination of the 14C-labeled, amine-containing pharmaceuticals remoxipride (ref. 92) and urapidil (ref. 93). Urapidil and its main metabolites (Fig. 19) were separated on a cyano-bonded phase, using an aqueous eluent consisting of acetonitrile/water (12/88, v/v, pH = 2.2). Under these conditions, the analytes are non-extractable because of protonation of the amine substituents, which resulted in counting efficiencies for 14C of less than 0.05 for the direct radiogram. Addition of the ion-pair reagent sodium dodecylbenzenzesulphonate to the water-immiscible LS increased the counting efficiency to over 0.80 (Figs. 20, 21). The principle was applied in the determination of urapidil and its main metabolites in rat plasma. An additional advantage of using water-immiscible LS for flow-through LSC in reversed-phase systems is that water is excluded from the scintillator segments, and that the LS/eluate ratio may be chosen such as to optimize the sensitivity E x Td. Extraction into the scintillator plugs, and thus E, improves at high ratios. At the same time, however, the total flow rate Ft increases, and Td decreases proportionally (and vica versa). This is shown in Fig. 21 for remoxipride. Repetitive injections of the analyte were made at Fe = 1.0 ml/min while varying the scintillator flow rate F,. For extractable compounds, the sensitivity was normally at its maximum at Fs/Fe = 0.2 (ref. 31). This compares favourably to water-miscible scintillators for which ratios of over 3 are recommended in order to obtain a homogeneous phase (refs. 30, 59). Baba et al. (refs. 48, 94, 95) developed a flow-through synchronized accumulating radioisotope detector for GC and HPLC. It consists of five flow cells connected in series. The signals from each cell are synchronized and accumulated. As a result, a five-fold increase in sensitivity is obtained. Additional peak broadening in the fifth cell was negligible as compared to the first cell with Vd = 1.1 ml each, Fe = 1.5 ml/min and Fs = 8.3 ml/min (Fig. 22). In the HSC mode considerable peak
174
broadening took place with yttrium silicate packed cells with volumes of 0.39 ml each (ref. 48), which hampered synchronization of the signals. The high cost of the counting equipment required for data collection of five different cells will probably prevent other workers to adapt this principle.
SOLVENT FILTER
STwlAOE CACIILARV lPTFEl
HOMOOLNlZlNO CAPILLARY
lREVE118€0
FLOW1
Fig. 17 Schematic diagram of HPLC equipment with flow-through 8-detector and segmentation/storage system, adapted for the determination o f radiolabeled, non-extractable analytes. (Reproduced from J. Chromatogr., Elsevier, ref. 91).
175
R-direct FFT-fllter
I
L 200
100
L
n V
I
I
I Rieverse
200-
FFT-1 ilter
150100-
50-
0
-. 20
40
60
TIME (MINI
Fig. 18 Radiograms of 14C-labeled amino acids. Chromatographic conditions, see Fig. 7; sample, alanine (65 Bq), valine (77 Bq), isoleucine (82 Bq) and leucine (41 Bq); upper trace, radiogram recorded during separation at T = 0.03 min; lower trace, radiogram recorded after storage o f the complete chromatogram by reintroduction of the contents of the storage loop into the 8-detector at lower flow rate (Td = 0.15 min); both traces filtered by FFT. (Reproduced from J . Chromatogr., Elsevier, ref. 91).
Karmen et al. (ref. 96) adapted an automatic micro-fraction collector for fractionation of the column eluate on filter paper and subsequent autoradiography. Fractions with volumes of up to 0.30 ml are collected into wells, formed in non-wetting fluorocarbon film. After evaporation to near-dryness, the remaining spots are transferred to a filter paper placed over the wells by using a vacuum technique. Depending on the volatility of the fractions, the time needed to evaporate and quantitatively transfer the spots to the paper is about 5-10 min. The volume of the remaining spots was controlled by the addition of 0.0005% glycerol to the eluent. The performance of the system was tested i n the determination o f selected 14C-labeled amino acids, with 0.125 ml fractions and at Fe = 1.0 ml/min (Fig. 23). The sensitivity and the linear dynamic range was strongly determined by the exposure time of
176 the filter paper to the X-ray photographic film. The widest linear range (250-5000 DPM/spot) was obtained for a 6 h exposure time. Exposure for 7 2 h permitted the determination o f 5-80 DPM/spot. With this method, a high sample throughput may be obtained even for extended exposure times at moderate costs. The reproducibility was satisfactory. Since autoradiography is normally used for qualitative purposes only (ref. 97), care should be taken when quantitatively interpreting autoradiographs with large differences in acti vi ty/spot
.
ir
Fig. 19 Structural formulae of 14C-labeled pesticides (parathion and carbaryl) and pharmaceuticals (remoxipride and urapidil and main metabolites). The positions of the labels are indicated by the dsteri sk.
177
I
1
.6
Ibl
1°1
103,
Fig. 20
t
cpm
Re pre s e n t a t i v e UV chromatogram (269 p$) o f u r a p i d i l and i t s main C - u r a p i d i l (730 Bq) under m e t a b o l i t e s (A) and radiograms o f n o n - e x t r a c t i v e (B) and e x t r a c t i v e (C) c o n d i t i o n s . Column, P i e r c e Cyano S p h e r i - 5 (100 x 4.6 mm); e l u e n t , a c e t o n i t r i l e / w a t e r (15/85, v / v ) , pH = 2.2 w i t h p h o s p h o r i c a c i d , 1.0 ml/min; w a t e r - i m m i s c i b l e l i q u i d s c i n t i l l a t o r , Ready-Solv NA, 0.2 ml/min. F o r F ig. ZOC, 1.0 mM sodium dodecylbenzenesulphonate was added t o t h e s c i n t i 11a t o r .
4.
APPLICATIONS
4.1
PREPARATION, PURIFICATION, IDENTIFICATION
I n most experiments i n v o l v i n g t h e use o f r a d i o i s o t o p e s , t h e v a l i d i t y o f t h e r e s u l t s i s s t r o n g l y dependent on t h e radiochemical p u r i t y o f t h e compound used, which i s d e f i n e d as t h e t o t a l r a d i o a c t i v i t y p r e s e n t as t h e n u c l i d e o f i n t e r e s t i n a s p e c i f i c chemical form. Furthermore, knowledge
o f t h e s p e c i f i c a c t i v i t y i s normally also required. Repeated a n a l y s i s j u s t p r i o r t o t h e use o f t h e s t o r e d m a t e r i a l i s recommended because, a p a r t f r o m i t s expected chemical and m i c r o b i o l o g i c a l decomposition, i t s r a d i o c h e m i c a l p u r i t y decreases upon s t o r a g e due t o r a diolysis. I n
particular
R-labeled
compounds
are
prone
t o radiolysis
178 because the 0 ' s emitted form high density spurs of reactive radicals in the surrounding matrix. A detailed discussion on radiolysis can be found in ref. 98.
"1
7'
k
so04
LintH.to!-
-
Fig. 21 14C-peak area (in counts) as function o f the scintillator flqy Crate. Chromatographic conditions, see Fig. 20; sample, remoxipride (600 Bq); liquid scintillator, water-immiscible (+), water-immiscible with 1.0 mM sodium dodecylbenzenesulphonate (0) and water miscible ( Y ) . (Reproduced by permission from Eur. Chromatogr. News, John Wiley & Sons, Ref. 31.) Of the various methods for purification, isolation and identification, HPLC is the most convenient because of its superior selectivity, easy operation (which is important from the standpoint of safety in handling high levels of radioactivity), and speed of analysis which even allows the purification of compounds labeled with shortlived isotopes. Examples have been collected in Table IX, some of which are described below in more detail, with emphasis on the benefits o f using HPLC in the procedures. Chasko and Thayer (ref. 99) considerably simplified isolation of cyclotron-produced 13N-labeled nitrite or nitrate from water targets by using a reductor, a concentrator and two analytical columns in series, packed with copperized cadmium and Partisi 1-10 SAX anion exchanger, respectively (Fig. 24A, B ) . As compared to the alternative method of rotary evaporation, an increase in concentration of the radiolabeled material of at least 10-fold is obtained, with the additional advantages o f
179
less sample handling and higher radiochemical purities of the material. Boothe et al. (ref. 100) used RP-HPLC with mobile phases containing the ion-pairing reagent n-octylamine for separation of anions labeled with "C, 13N or 18F. A significant influence o f carrier addition on the elution patterns was observed. For example, NCA 18F- only eluted form the column after the addition of carrier F-. These observations are consistent with results by other workers (refs. 8-10).
5
4
6
7
8
7
h a l f w i d t h (m) f l r l t Cel I
flfth
d
16 rnl"
cell
A
19.1+0.8
22.4+0.4
B
25.9tl.0
40.7+3.4
Fig. 22 Peak broadening using a synchronized accumulating radioisotope detector in liquid (upper trace) and heterogeneous (lower trace) scintillation counting. For explanation, see text. (Reprinted from J . Chromatogr., Elsevier, ref. 48).
In the determination of specific activities of radiohalogenides, Kloster and Laufer (ref. 101) used pre-column derivatization of the halides with 2-naphthol in the presence o f the oxidizing agent chloramine-T and subsequent HPLC. The detection limit o f the halonaphthol reaction products was 0.5 pmol (at 220 nm), which allowed the determination of specific activities of NCA radioiodine or radiobromine using only 5% of the total radioactivity.
A
0 a2
TABLE IX
Preparation, purification and identification in radio-CLC
Sample(s)
Column and mobile phase
13N-anions ( 13NO3-, 13N0 -, 13NH4+) radioanions (llC, 13N, "F, 82Br, 1311, 99m~c) radio-halogenides (38Cl, 8oBr, 82Br, 1281, 13h) lZ5r, lZ5~-proteins radioanions (13N, 77Br, lZ81O3-, mixture) 1251-monoiodoglucagon lZ5I/ 14C-pept i des 99mTc-diphosphonates 14C-S-adenosylmethionine 14C-ch 1orofo m , 14C-di bromoethane 14C-proteinhydrosylate 14C-butoprozi ne
f.t.
=
flow-through; 0.1.
=
off-line
Detection'
Ref.
Partisil-10 SAX, 30 mM phosphate buffer (pH = 3.0) f.t. C18, 0.01 M octylamine (aqueous; 4.5 < pH < 6.5) f.t.NaI(T1)
100
TSK LS-222, acetone/sodiumnitrate (1.5 N) (l/l,v/v) f.t.GM
108
Sephadex 6-25 YEW AX-1, 4 mM Na2C03/NaHC03 58' n-propanol/phosphate buffer (lOmM, pH
external LSC f.t .Ge( i) = 2.5) externa plastic C18, acetonitrile/trifluoroacetic acid (0.05%), 0.1. Aminex A28, 0.7 M sodium acetate f.t.NaI T1) C18, methanol/phosphate buffer (45/55, v/v) f. t .HSC C18, mathanol/water (75/25, v/v) f.t LSC SCX (preperative), lithium/sodium citrate, gradient f.t.HSC C8, methanol/dichloromethane/water (100/35/15, v/v/v) + 0.5% diethylamine (v/v) 0.1.
.
99
24 29 26 103 106 109 110 111
112
1 W
5 .. U
W u)
Fig. 23
W
E-I
0
U
CL
W
z
J
<
'J
Autoradiogram obtained after HPLC separation of 14C-labeled amino acids and subsequent fractionation of the column eluate on wells formed in fluorcarbon film. After evaporizing the droplets in the wells, autoradiography of this film was carried out for 6 h. (Reprinted from J. Chromatogr., Elsevier, ref. 96.) A
43
182
MINI-
COLUMNS
RESERVOIRS
A PUMP
DRAIN
Fig. 24A Schematic diagram f o r confQntration and p u r i f i c a t i o n o f cyclotronproduced 13NO' and NO2 from water t a r g e t s . (Reprinted by permission from In$. J . Appl. Radiat. Isot., Pergamon Press, r e f . 99).
0
1
2 3 TIME ( MIN 1
4
5
Fig. 248 Radiograms o f unreduced (upper t r a c e ) and reduced (lower trace) t a r g e t solutions. Column, P a r t i s i l - 1 0 SAX (250 x 4.6 mm): mobile phase, 30 mM phosphate b u f f e r , pH 3.0, 3.0 ml/min. (Reprinted by permission from I n t . J . Appl. Radiat. Isot., Pergamon Press, r e f . 99).
183 Radioiodine can be introduced via covalent binding to tyrosine-groups into peptides and proteins by reaction of the radiolabel with the biomolecule in the presence of chloramine-T or lactoperoxidase (ref. 102). However, if the biomolecule contains two or more tyrosine groups, heterogeneous mixtures may be formed, even if single-labeled compounds are obtained. Pingoud (ref. 26) analyzed the intramolecular distribution of lZ5I incorporated into the 29-amino acid polypeptide hormone glucagon which contains two tyrosine residues (at positions 10 and 13). TWO monoiodinated products were obtained that could be separated by RP-HPLC (Fig. 25). Receptor binding ability of these isomers to isolated intact rat hepatocytes was shown to differ by a factor of two. The intramolecular distribution of 1251 was confirmed after enzymatic cleavage of the isolated products, followed by reinjection into the chromatograph. Judd and Caldwell (ref. 103) studied the level of 1251-incorporation after in-gel chloramine-T iodination into fragments of the major outer membrane proteins of chlamydia trachomatis strain L2/434. After enzymatic cleavage o f the proteins, RP-HPLC with radioactivity determination was used for peptide mapping (Fig. 26). Since peptides could not be detected by UV-monitoring, the L2 strain was intrinsically labeled with a mixture of 14C-amino acids to ensure that each peptide fragment would be radiolabeled and could be detected. Dual isotope detection of the eluting fragments then gives the level of radioiodination. Most of the fragments contained the 1251 label, which indicated that amino acid groups other then tyrosine are also iodinated. To overcome some of the drawbacks involved in radioiodination of proteins, such as the need to expose the protein to oxidizing agents and the in vivo instability of the radiolabeled material, the use of metallic radionuclides has been suggested (ref. 104). They can be incorporated into proteins by complexation with chelating agents covalently attached to the protein. For this purpose, Hnatowich et al. (ref. 105) used diethylenetriaminepentaacetic acid (DTPA) as chelating group. To determine the coupling efficiency of DTPA to IgG antibody, a radio-HPLC method was developed for the separation of the 'free' and 'protein-bound' DTPA-metal was used as radiotracer (Fig. 27). Since DTPA forms strong complex. '"In complexes with a large number of metals, the principle can be extended to other metallic radionuclides. However, this necessitates the use of ultrapure reagents and deionized water in the preparation of the labeled proteins i n order to avoid the introduction of non-radioactive metals. Finally, radio-column liquid chromatography is used for the characterization of complex mixtures of radiopharmaceutical preparations.
184 The work on 99mTc-diphosphonate complexes may serve as an example because the carrier itself (99Tc) is radioactive which hinders handling the amounts of material needed for alternative methods, such as X-ray crystallography. These complexes are widely used as bone-imaging agents. Their synthesis involves the reduction of 99mTc-pertechnetate electrochemically or with reductants such as SN2+ or BHq in the presence of the diphosponate ligand. The preparations normally result in a mixture of 99mTc-complexes. Because these complexes may exhibit different in vivo distribution, the usage of a single complex is recommended in order to obtain a clear picture of the distribution. After sodiumborohydride reduction of "Tc in the presence of hydroxyethyl idene diphosphonate, at least twelve complexes could be separated by anion exchange HPLC on Aminex A-29 (ref. 106), which were shown to interconvert on standing. The charges on eluting species could be established by correlation of the retention times with the activity of the counter ion used for the anion-exchange separation. In addition, relative molecular sizes were determined by size exclusion chromatography.
t
I
E
P 0
I 0
1
60
1
120
lh
TIME (min) Fig. 25 Radiogram of [mor~o-~~~I-Tyr'~]-and [ m ~ n o ~ ~ ~ I - T y r : ~ ~ l u c a q ~ n (upper trace) and commercially available [mono- I-Tyr 3 glucagon (lower trace). Column, LiChrosorb C (250 x 4.6 mm); eluent, n-propanol/phophate buffer (10 mM, pHl9.5) (19/81, v/v); detection was by flow-through external scintillation counting, using plastic scintillator. (Reprinted from J. Chromatogr., Elsevier, ref. 26).
185 When using tin as reductant, '13Sn can be used to determine whether tin incoorporates into the Tc-diphosphonate complexes. The absence of tin as tracer from peaks containing "Tc (or 99mTc) then indicates that no tin is incoorporated (Fig. 28). Finally, the metal-ligand ratio can be established by using 32P-labeled 1 igands and dual isotope determination in eluting peaks, as was illustrated in ref. 107.
ll Fig. 26 HPLC elution profiles of lZ5I- and 14C-labeled peptides of C. trachomatis L2 MOMP, generated by a-chymotrypsin digestion. Column, Bondapak C (300 x 3.9 mm); gradient elution with acetonitrile/water,lpontaining 0.05% trifluoroacetic acid (v/v); dual isotope detection was performed by off-line scintillation counting techniques on 0.2 ml fractions. (Reprinted by permission from J . Liq. Chromatogr., Marcel Oekker Journals, ref. 11 103) . CouPcfD
UlIleOOV
?.
. .
. .
RETENTION
F i g . 27 HPLC-UV (280 nm) and
TIME
radioactivity trace of a ll)lPA-coupled In and its antibody sample (human IgG) after labeling with corresponding hydrolyzed control. Separation was performed using a protein column (I125 or 1250, Waters Associates). Early eluting peaks contain protein material. (Reprinted from J . Immun. Methods, Elsevier, ref. 105)
186
....& . _ _ A
.t
.
_ A _ _
20
0
40
60
80
TIME (min) Fig. 28
4.2
-
Separation o f t i n-reduced t e c h n e t i um-hydroxyethyl idene d i sphonatylfomplexes, prepared a t pH 10 i n presence of mTc responce, '"Tc and Sn. The s o l i d l i n e represepff the while the dotted l i n e indicates the Sn responce. Column, Aminex A28 anion exchange (150 x 4 mm); m o b i l e phase, 0.70 M sodium a c e t a t e a t 0.2 ml/min; d e t e c t i o n , flow-through dualchannel d e t e c t i o n by NaI(T1) s c i n t i l l a t i o n counting. (Reprinted by ermission from Anal. Chem., American Chemical Society, r e f . 106P.
t$s
DISTRIBUTION AND METABOLISM OF EXOGENIC COMPOUNDS From t h e numerous examples i n t h e f i e l d o f drug and p e s t i c i d e a n a l y s i s
some t h a t
employ
flow-through
summarized i n Table X.
r a d i o a c t i v i t y determination
14C-
3H-,
have been
o r 35S-labeled p a r e n t compounds a r e
r e a d i l y a v a i l a b l e from commercial sources, o r can be s u p p l i e d as custom preparation. One example i s quoted below. I n the
study
on
the
metabolism
Pt-diaminocyclohexane (Pt-DACH),
of
the
chemotherapeutic
a c t i v i t y by r e d u c t i v e t r i t i a t i o n o f 1,2-diaminocyclohexene The s e n s i t i v i t y o f o f f - l i n e
agent
t h e l i g a n d was l a b e l e d t o h i g h s p e c i f i c LSC was
better
by about
(ref.
113).
one o r d e r o f
magnitude as compared t o atomic a b s o r p t i o n determination. Metabolism took p l a c e by complexation o f t h e agent w i t h amino acids. By using l4C-or 35S-labeled amino a c i d s i t was p o s s i b l e t o determine t h e
st o ich iomet r y o f products (Fig. 29).
some
major
ami no
a c i d -p 1a t inum
b io t ransf ormat ion
Radio-CLC of exogenic compounds
TABLE X Sample ( s )
Column and mobile phase
Detection'
Ref.
14C-doxylaminesuccinate 4~-omeprazo1 e 14C-felopidi ne 3H-and 14C-labeled drugs Pt-3H-diaminocyclohexane 14C-MDL 257 l4c-g1yceryl tri ni trate 14C-carbaryl and 14C-parathion 14C-del tarnetrin
CN bonded phase, methanol/phosphate buffer C8, SI-60 or amberlite XAD column switching techniques C18, aqueous acetonitrile mostly C18 and SCX subsequently C18, acetonitrile/acetate (0.01 N) , gradient C18, methanol/water (50/50, v / v ) CN bonded phase, acetonitrile/water (70/30, v / v ) SI-60, hexane/pentane/acetonitrile/dioxane/ 2-propanol/lumaflow
f.t .HSC
6 114 115 116 113 117 94 90 118
14C-ethyldi propyl thiocarbamate 14c-caffeine 14c-nicotine
c18 CN bonded phase, acetonitri le/methanol CN bonded phase, acetonitrile/methanol/water gradient C8, methanol/tetrabutylamnonium bromide (0,04M ) , gradient
3H-benzo[a] pyrene 33S-g1utathionoconjugate of 2-bromohydroquinone 13N-ni tri te/ -n i trate
C18' methanol/water/acetic acid (9/90/1, v / v / v ) Partisil-10 SAX, 30 mM phosphate buffer (pH: 3.1)
I,
f.t.HSC/LSC 0.1 .LSC
f.t.HSC f.t.LSC I
f.t.HSC f.t.HSC
119 120 121
0.l.LSC
122
to
123 124
I,
f.t.NaI(T1)
c
'f.t.
=
flow-through; 0.1.
=
off-line
cn
U
188
RETENTION TIME (Min)
Fig. 29 Use of dual isotope detection and cation exchange HPLC in the determination of the stoichiometry of amino acid complexes of the chemotherapeutic agent Pt-lI2-diaminoc clohfxane. The complexes were prepared by incubation of 4,5- H] (cis-1,2di am’ oc c1ohexane)mal onatjy 1atinurn( I I) with ”C-met higni ne (A B), “C<erine (C, D) or S-glutathione ( E l F) at 37 C. Afte; purification by ion-pair reversed-phase chromatography, peak fractions were concentrated and subsequently chromatographed on Partisil-10 SCX (250 x 4.5 mn), with aqueous mobile phases containing acetonitrile (15%, v/v) and 50 mM phosphate (at pH 4 in Figs. A, C, and E and pH 2.3 in Figs. B, D and F). Radioactivity was determined in 1 ml fractions. (Reprinted by permission from Anal. Biochem., Academic Press, ref. 113). 4.3
DISTRIBUTION AND METABOLISM OF ENDOGENIC COMPOUNDS Isotopic techniques often are the only resource by which studies on the distribution and biotransformation of endogeneous materials at physiological concentration can be undertaken. Examples in this area deal with amino acids, peptides, catecholamines, nucleotides, sugars, fatty acids, lipids, steroids and vitamins. A broad range o f high-purity radiolabeled endogeneous compounds are available from various commercial sources. These also include simple precursors, such as 32P-pyrophosphate or 14C02 which can be used for incubation studies. Some recent examples on the use of flow-through radioactivity determination in metabolism studies of endogeneous materials have been collected in Table XI. Nieves et al. (ref. 25) studied the distribution of 13Nglutamate i n rats and its metabolic products in rat liver. Separation o f radiolabeled products was evaluated using cation-, and anion exchange
189 and amino columns (Fig. 30), or RP-18 columns following pre-column derivatization. For the 1atter 0-phthaldialdehyde (OPA) derivatization was chosen because it could be carried out under the time constraints imposed by the short-lived isotope (T1/2 = 9.96 min). Problems were observed, however, in the reaction of OPA with glutamate and ammonia. HPLC SEPARATION OF "N-METABOLITES SCX
20
00 00""
i /
05'00''
N
-
\
c
\
-\
10'00''
15'00'' SAX
10
8
02
OOt 00""
2-'
05'00''
10'00''
L -
15 '00"
MINUTES
Fig. 30 Separation of 13N-labeled metabolites in ra$ liver formed 1 min after hepatic portal vein injection of L- N-glutamate. Columns used were Partisil-10 SCX (upper), Particil-10 SAX (middle) and RSIL-NH2 (lower) (250 x 4.6 mm, all). In this case, detection was by flow-through external scintillation counting using a plastic scintillator. Urea and amino acid metabolites were identified enzymatically and by coelution with unlabeled standards. (Reprinted from J . Chromatogr., Elsevier, ref. 25). 4.4
RADIOASSAYS In radioassays, radiolabeled analytes are used in order to determine a property of an unlabeled compound, such as the concentration, localization or biological activity. Examples in this category are enzyme activity determinaitons and the 32p post-labeling of DNA adducts (Table XII).
w
TABLE XI
L a
Radio-CLC of endogeneous compounds
0
Samp 1 e ( s )
Column and mobile phase
3H/14C-steroids, -nucleotides, -proteins
various
Detection'
f.t.vs. LSC acetonitrile/0.005% phosphoric acid (gradient) f.t. HSC f.t. LSC acetonitrile/water (90/10, v/v)
Ref. 34
0.1.
3H-arachidonic acid metabolites 14C-fatty acid methyl esters 14C-steroid metabolites 3H-cholesterol/ 14C-pregnenolone 3H/ 14C-puri ne nucl eoti des 3H/14C-puri ne nucl eoti des and bases 3H-enkephal in metabolites 14C-amino acids 14C-amino acids 14C-carboxyl ic acids 32P-pyro (PPi)- and orthosphophate (Pi) 14C-sugar degradation 'f.t.
=
flow-through; 0.1.
=
off-line
'18' '18'
'18' C8, acetonitrile (95/5, v/v) Partisil-10 SAX '18 C18, methanol/phosphate buffer (gradient) Durrum-Dc 4A resin, Lithium/citrate buffer Aminex A9 Diaion-CKOBS, 3mM HC104 (aqueous) NH 2bonded phaie, citric acid/Mg2+ (gradient) ion-exchange, water
I,
I,
8,
f. t .HSC ,I
f.t.c@renkov f.t. HSC
75 125 126 127 57
57 40 67 42 68 45 128
TABLE
XI1
Radioassay techniques and enzyme activity determinations
Radioassay
Detection'
Ref.
Characterization o f deoxyribonucleoside phosphates in DNA adducts by 32P-postlabeling Determination of: 5'-methyldeoxycytidine in DNA by 32P-postlabeling estradiol-17-fatty acid esters by acylation with 3H-acetic anhydride ADP-ribose by 3H-borohydride reduction of corresponding ketones in vitro and in vivo receptorbinding with 3H-steroids anions in column eluates by indirect detection with 35S042- mobile phases
f .t .LSC 0.l.LSC
131 134 135 132 136 133
f.t.HSC f.t .LSC
137 138 139 140 141 142 130
Enzyme
Substrate( s )
Purine (in intact and lysed cells) a-Amy1ase
various 14C-starch 14C-L-3, 4-dihydroxyphenylalanine 14c-amines 3H-adenosinetriphosphate (ATP) 35 2so4 UDP-[U-14C]g1 ucuronic acid and 3H-substrates
Aromatic-L-aminodecarboxylase
Dog-liver N-methyltransferase Brain adenylate cyclase ATP-sulfurylase UDP-glucuronosyltransferase
'f.t.
=
flow-through; 0.1
=
0.1 .LSC
off-line
c u3 Y
TABLE X I 1 1
c-'
Tracer applications in radio-CLC
W
N
--3H-steroids 3H-dopamine 0-sulphate (DAS) 3H-vitarnin D
i.s. for determination o f : selected steroids in human urine DAS in human plasma vitamin D in various milk powders
143 144 155
14C-benzo[a] pyrene (BaP) 14C-carboxylic acids
BaP in refined coal- and petroleum fuels conversion into 4'-bromophenacyclester derivatives determination of retention behaviour on: normal-phase packing
156
3H/14C-phospholi pi ds 14C-methylated aprotin 1251 -a1 bumi n 1251-cytochromec and -ovalbumin alkali-and transition metal ions 53Gd (DTPA) 140~a 59Fe-ferri tin 14C-hypoxanthine =
8 ' reversed-phase packings ion-exchanger 18 study of memory effects from components of the LC set-up determination of intracellular, ferritin associated iron study of hypoxantine transport in human erythrocytes
-'i.s.
'18
internal standard
157 33
145 146 147 151 148 152 153
154
193 Abeijon e t a l . ( r e f . 129) measured t h e enzymatic a c t i v i t y of c y t i d i n e
monophosphate-N-acetylneuraminic a c i d (CMP-NeuAc) synthetase. I n t h e experiment, t h i s enzyme c a t a l y z e s t h e r e a c t i o n CTP + [3 HINeuAc <---> CMP-[ 3 HINeuAc + PPi
(CTP = c y t i d i n e t r i p h o s p h a t e ) . The l a b e l e d products were separated by anion-exchange HPLC w i t h o f f - l i n e LSC. The s p e c i f i c a c t i v i t y o f [3 HINeuAc (0.8 TBq/mmol) enabled t h e d e t e c t i o n o f about 160 fmol CMP-NeuAc, which i s approximately t h r e e orders o f magnitude more s e n s i t i v e than a l t e r n a t i ve methods such as c o l o r i m e t r y o r f l u o r i m e t r y . The use o f flow-through SC i n radioenzyme assay i s r a t h e r l i m i t e d . Coughtrie e t a l .
(ref.
130) d e s c r i b e a method f o r t h e assay o f UDP-
g 1ucuronosy 1t r a n s f e r a s e
activity
endogeneous
Metabolites
substrates.
towards
various
xenob io t ic
and
i d e n t i f i e d by double l a b e l i n g a n a l y s i s , u s i n g 3H-labeled s u b s t r a t e s w i t h UDP[ 14C]-glucuronic a c i d (GA) as co-substrate: 3H-substrate + UDP[ 14C]GA -->
could
be
[3 H-14 Clglucuronide-metabolite
HPLC on a p o l a r amino-cyano bonded phase column was used i n s e p a r a t i n g the radiolabeled
glucuronide
conjugates
from UDP[14C]GA,
with
flow-
through LSC. An example i s g i v e n i n F i g . 31, where 3 H-androsterone was used as substrate.
For most o f t h e s u b s t r a t e s t e s t e d , t h e corresponding
glucuronide conjugates e l u t e d between 8-10 min a f t e r i n j e c t i o n , and c o u l d be detected a t t h e 100-200 pmol l e v e l . Flow-through r a d i o a c t i v i t y det e r m i n a t i o n considerably s i m p l i f i e d t h e procedure, and t h e authors t h e r e f o r e suggest t h a t t h e assay can be extended i n t h e i n v e s t i g a t i o n of many o t h e r compounds. R e l a t i v e l y few papers a r e concerned w i t h t h e use o f r a d i o i s o t o p e s i n p r e - o r post-column d e r i v a t i z a t i o n r e a c t i o n s f o r HPLC, probably because o f t h e hazards i n v o l v e d i n h a n d l i n g h i g h l e v e l s o f r a d i o a c t i v i t y and t h e small masses o f radiochemicals a v a i l a b l e , which make i t d i f f i c u l t t o obtain satisfactory reaction y i e l d s a t a t high specific a c t i v i t i e s . Dietrich
et
al.
(ref.
131)
adapted
t h e method
of
c h a r a c t e r i z a t i o n o f DNA adducts by 32P-postlabeling based on t h e r e a c t i o n o f DNA w i t h t h e chemical ( i . e .
Randerath
for
(Scheme 2).
the
It i s
c a r c i n o g e n i c agent)
under study f o l l o w e d by enzymatic h y d r o l y s i s o f t h e r e s u l t i n g m o d i f i e d DNA t o form deoxyribonucleoside-3'-phosphates, which a r e subsequently
194 radiolabeled by r e a c t i o n w i t h 32P-ATP i n t h e presence o f T4 polynucleotide kinase. The r e s u l t i n g [3' ,5'-32P]biphosphates are charact e r i z e d by HPLC e i t h e r d i r e c t l y o r a f t e r enzymatic h y d r o l y s i s w i t h Nuclease 1 t o [5'-32P]monophosphates. Figs. 32A-C g i v e chromatograms of products obtained a f t e r r e a c t i o n o f 3'-dGMP w i t h t h e e t h y l a t i n g agent d i e t h y l s u l f a t e (DES) followed by 32P-postlabel i n g w i t h UV and radioa c t i v i t y detection by flow-through LSC.
6
25 20 T
0
r X
E n u
15
-
10
I
m -
2 5 a
1-0
I
5
10
15
I
I
20
25
30
35
40
I
45
min
Fig. 31 HPLC assay of UDP-glucuronosyltransferase a c t i v i t towards androsterone, using UDP-glucuronic a c i d (UDP-GAY as COsubstrate. Column, P a r t i s i l - 5 PAC (Polar Amino-Cyano) (260 X 4.5 mm); gradient e l u t i o n from 100% a c e t o n i t r i l e t o 100% 0.01 M TBAHS; detection by flow-through l i q u i d s c i n t i l l a t i o n counting: incubations, performed s e p a r a t e l y j contained e i t h e r unlabeled androsterone and UDP-14C-GA o r H-androsterone and unlabeled UDP-GA (---); peak i d e n t i f i c a t i o n , (A) androsterone; 1 = androsterone glucuronide; 2 = glucuronic acid: 3 and 4, u n i d e n t i f i e d ; 5 = UDP-GA (UDP = u r i d i n e diphospho). Reprinted by permission from Anal. Biochem., Academic Press, r e f . 130). Hakam e t a l . ( r e f . 132) used 3H-labeling i n t h e simultaneous determin a t i o n o f mono- and poly-ADP-ribose. The c i s - d i o l s o f these molecules a r e w p r t i v.e l.,v n ~." i A.--" i 7 e d" hv,n n d a t e treatment hv,rerliiction "-l .---. r -e,r i,.,"""" ". .."-....,..- fnllnwerl .-. .-..-- . - - - - - .-. . w .. .i t-.h. 3 sodium- H-borohydride. The t r i t i a t e d products were separated by RP-HPLC
--
w i t h o f f - l i n e LSC (Fig. 33), and could be detected a t t h e subpicomol l e v e l . I n p r i n c i p l e , t h i s r e s u l t can be improved by using borohydride w i t h higher s p e c i f i c a c t i v i t y .
195 A G C T B
Nd-44
Scheme 2
1
DNA Modifying Agent
1
1 ) Micrococcal Nuclease 2) Spleen Phosphodiesterase
1
Y"P ATP T4 Polynucleotide Kinase
1
Nuclease P1
Outline of the DNA postlabeling method. (Reprinted with permission from Chromatographia, Friedr. Vieweg and Sons, ref. 131).
(A)
I
~
10
20
TIME (Min.)
Fig. 32.
30
10
20
TIME (Min.)
10 20 TIME (Min.)
HPLC characterization of products QPtained from the reaction of dGMP with diethyl sulphate and P postlabeling (Scheme 2) as deoxyribonucleoside-5'-phosphates ( A ) , as deoxyribonucleoside-3,5' -phosphates (B) and as deoxyri bonucleoside-5' phosphates (C). Column, Spherisorb ODs-2 (250 x 4.6 m); gradient elution from 0-4096 ( v / v ) methanol in 0.075 M potassium phosphate (pH 3.0); detection by UV (at 260 nm, A) and flow-through liquid scintillation counting (B, C); peaks: a = 3'-dGMP, a' = 3',5'-dGbisP, a" 5'-dGMP; b = N-7 ethyl-3'-dGMP, b'= N-7 ethyl-3',5'-dGbisPI b" = N-7 ethyl-5'-dGMP; c = ethyl ester of 3'-dGMP, c' = ethyl ester of 3 ' .5'-dbisP. (Reprinted by permission from Chromatographia, Friedr. Vieweg & Sohn, ref. 131).
-
196
35
Fig. 33 RP-HPLC analysis of products obtained after 3 H-borohydride reduction of poly(ADP-ribose) (B). Before reduction, the cisdiols in the ribose are sel tively oxidised by using eriodate. In (6) , in vitro-generated ‘$-labeled poly(ADP-ribose! was used to determine whether all riboje compounds are tritiated. In (A), the products obtained after H-borohydride reduction of AMP is given, which is used as primary external standard. Column, Ultrasphere ODS (250 x 4.6 mm); gradient elution from 100% 0.10 M potassium phosphate (pH 4.25) to 100 % methanol/O.lO M potassium phosphate (20/80, v/v) to 100% acetonitrile/l.O M urea (50/50, v/v); dual isotope detection by off-line liquid scintillation counting of 0.75 ml fractions. (Reprinted from J. Chromatogr., Elsevier, ref. 132).
Banerjee and Steimers (ref. 133) developed a method for indirect detection of anions in ion chromatography, based on the use o f 35S-sulfate in the eluent. When an anion elutes, a simultaneous decrease in sulfate concentration occurs; hence, the decrease in radioactivity s i gnal in collected fractions can be used to quantitate eluting anions. Chloride was used as test analyte with plug injections. With a mobile phase containing 3.4 nM sulfate (13.4GBq/mmol), the detection limit o f
197
a.
C 1 - was about 0.1
I n p r i n c i p l e , t h e d e t e c t i o n l i m i t s can be brought
down t o the low nanogram region when using higher s p e c i f i c a c t i v i t i e s . For c a t i o n analysis, t h e use o f 45Ca i s suggested. I t i s very u n l i k e l y , however, t h a t t h e p r i n c i p l e w i l l be adapted by other workers because a l t e r n a t i v e s f o r i o n determination which a r e n o t based on r a d i o a c t i v i t y detection are r e a d i l y available. I t i s worth mentioning here t h a t t h e s e l e c t i v i t y o f many radioassay
techniques
can
be
significantly
improved
by
using
column
liquid
chromatography i n sample clean up p r i o r t o t h e actual assay o f t h e pooled f r a c t i o n s , f o r example i n a c t i v a t i o n analysis and HPLC-RIA ( r e f s . 159-163). 4.5
MISCELLANEOUS I n t h i s section a p p l i c a t i o n s on radio-column l i q u i d chromatography
have been c o l l e c t e d i n which radiolabeled compounds are used as t r a c e r s f o r which no change i n the chemical expected (Table
from o f the compound i s t o be
XIII).
Radiotracers are excellent i n t e r n a l standards t h a t a r e i d e n t i c a l t o the compound t o be determined except f o r t h e r a d i o l a b e l . They are most frequently applied i n optimizing sample preparation steps, based on one radiolabeled t r a c e r only. The advantages are best exploited, however, by using mixtures o f radiolabeled i n t e r n a l standards f o r radio-CLC. Depending on t h e s p e c i f i c a c t i v i t i e s ,
t h e mass o f t h e standard can
normally be neglected as compared t o t h e mass t o be determined. The added signal i n t h e reference detector may then be neglected. The amounts of a c t i v i t y may be chosen as h i g h as t o a l l o w s a t i s f a c t o r y q u a n t i t a t i o n of the
radioactivity
by
flow-through
radioactivity
counting.
This
was
i l l u s t r a t e d by Frey and Frey (ref. 143) i n t h e simultaneous determination o f prednisone, prednisolone and 6-hydroxyprednisolone i n u r i n e samples using RP-HPLC, w i t h 3H-labeled prednisolone and 6-hydroxycortisol as i n t e r n a l standards. The r a d i o a c t i v i t y i n t h e HPLC e f f l u e n t was monitored by flow-through HSC (Fig. 34).
Benedict ( r e f . 144) developed a clean-up
procedure f o r t h e determination of catecholamines i n u r i n e and plasma samples.
14C-labeled catecholamines were used t o c o r r e c t f o r
losses
during the sample treatment step and t o i d e n t i f y e l u t i n g peaks a f t e r HPLC.
198
0.
MINUTES 8 16
1 ' 1 '
0
8
24
32
'
16 24 MNUTES
32
Fig. 34 HPLC chromatogram of prednisone ( P ) , prednisolone (Po), 68tjydroxycortjsol (68-HC) and 68-hydroxyprednisolone (68-Po) , with H-Po and H-6B-HC) as internal standards. Column LiChrosorb SI-60 (250 x 3.2 mn); mobile phase, hexane/diethyl ether/tetrahydrofuranlethanollgl aci a1 acid (55.9/31/6.5/2.3/0.3) ; detection by UV (254 nm; lower trace) and flow trough heterogeneous scintillation counting (upper trace). (Reprinted from J. Chromatogr., Elsevier, ref. 143). A second type o f radiotracer work for CLC is the study on the chromatographic behaviour of analytes, i .e. the study of retention characteristics of proteins (refs. 145-147) and Gd-DTPA (ref. 148) on reversed-phase packings, phospholipids on normal-phase packings (ref. 331, progesteronesuccinyltyrosine methyl esters on Sephadex LH-20 (refs. 149, 150) or alkali and transition metal ions on a silica-supported zirconium phosphate ion exchanger (ref. 151). In all examples, radionuclides were used to facilitate detection. 140La was used by Cassidy et al. (ref. 152) to identify the sources o f memory effects in the HPLC of lanthanides on dynamically generated ion exchangers. Apart from the normal peak broadening, major sources for tailing found in eluting peaks were sorption on metal surfaces and retention within sample loops (Fig. 35).
199 By using PTFE loops and tubing, most of the tailing could be eliminated, which resulted in cross-contamination of collected fractions of less than 0.006%. Finally, examples of radio-column liquid chromatography can be found in biochemical transport studies. Josic et al. (ref. 153) determined the kinetics of intracellular uptake of iron by ferritin, for which 59Fe was used as tracer. In this case, ferritin-bound and free radioactivity were separated by ion-exchange HPLC (Fig. 36). Boulieu et al. (ref. 154) studied the transport of the purine base hypoxanthine in human erythrocytes using 14C-hypoxanthine. This enabled the determination of the analyte at physiological concentrations in erythrocytes and incubation medium. Radio-HPLC with flow-through LSC confirmed that no metabolism of the analyte took place during the experiments.
RETENTION VOLUME
Fig. 35 Removal rate of 140La from sample loops:(A) metal loop and 0.01N HNO eluent, (6) metal loop and 0.01 N ehydroxyisobutyric acid at a H 4.6, (C) teflon loop and 0.01 N HNO eluent; flow rate, 2 ml/min. Curves (B) and (C) are shifted qrom origin for visibility (Reprinted by permission from Anal. Chem., American Chemical Society, ref. 152).
200
1
PP
Fig. 36 ,&n-exchange HPLC of K562 cell lysate after incubation with Fe-transferrin. Column, Mono Q (50 x 5 mm); salt gradient elution from 5 mM Hepes (pH 6.0) (buffer A) with 1 M NaCl (buffer B); after the salt gradient, 0.5 ml of 60% acetic acid was injected (arrow HAc); Ft = ferritin-bound radioactivity; detection by UV (280 nm) and off-line NaI(T1) scintillation counting of 0.5 ml fractions. (Reprinted by permission from Anal. Biochem., Academic Press, ref. 153) 5.
CONCLUDING REMARKS Compared to the flow-through mode, off-line counting in radio-column liquid chromatography is inherently more sensitive, with better control over the precision in counting results and the background count rate. The sensitivity of the off-line procedure can be obtained by using different methods which are also based on the decoupling of the separation and counting step, for example by the deposition of the column eluate on fluorocarbon films followed by autoradiography (ref. 961, or by using flow-programming as in refs. 89-93. The principle of the latter is based on solvent segmentation of the column eluate and temporary storage of the segmented stream in a capillary storage loop. After reintroduction of the contents of the loop and flow-programming, counting times of over 5 min can be used in selected regions of the radiogram, which is comparable with counting times comnonly used in off-line determinations. The chromatographic integrity, however, is somewhat better preserved i n f low-through counting.
20 1 When comparing flow-through LSC and HSC, i n t h e authors'view, t h e liq u i d mode i s t h e more v e r s a t i l e because o f lower r i s k s o f ( r a d i o a c t i v e ) contamination o f t h e f l o w c e l l and t h e absence o f r e s t r i c t i o n s on t h e t y pe of samples. I n addtion, f o r 3 H t h e c o u n t i n g e f f i c i e n c y n o r m a l l y i s b e t t e r by a f a c t o r o f 3-5 f o r t h e l i q u i d mode. The r a d i o l a b e l e d s o l u t e s can sometimes be recovered from t h e l i q u i d s c i n t i l l a t o r . For example, Devine ( r e f .
158)
used Sep-pak
androstenedione and c a r o t i n e :
cartridges
f o r t h e recovery o f
14C-
Q u a n t i t a t i v e recovery c o u l d be o b t a i n e d
provided t h e p o l a r i t y o f t h e s c i n t i l l a t o r compounds and t h e s o l u t e s o f i n t e r e s t were d i f f e r e n t and no detergents had been used i n t h e s c i n t i 11a t o r . The main drawback
of
flow-through
scintillator/eluate ratios of
at
LSC o r i g i n a t e s
from t h e
high
least three normally required w i t h
corresponding h i g h f l o w r a t e s ( s h o r t c o u n t i n g time) i n t h e r a d i o a c t i v i t y detector; t h i s r e s u l t s i n h i g h volumes o f r a d i o a c t i v e waste. For e x t r a c t a b l e analytes, however, i t has been shown t h a t r a t i o s o f about 0.2 can be a p p l i e d when u s i n g post-column
extraction
techniques
with
a
water-immiscible l i q u i d s c i n t i l l a t o r ( r e f . 31). The a p p l i c a t i o n s presented i n s e c t i o n 4 show t h a t
column
liquid
chromatography i s o f g r e a t value i n t h e p r e p a r a t i o n and c h a r a c t e r i z a t i o n of
r a d i o l a b e l e d solutes.
I n addition,
t h i s chromatographic technique
becomes i n c r e a s i n g l y important as sample pretreatment s t e p i n o r d e r t o f u r t h e r improve s e l e c t i v i t y o f w e l l - e s t a b l i s h e d r a d i o - a n a l y t i c a l methods ( r e f s . 159-163).
Examples a r e found i n a c t i v a t i o n a n a l y s i s (Fig. 1) and
HPLC-RIA. Continuous a t t e n t i o n i s however, a l s o g i v e n t o t h e development
o f non-radio HPLC procedures as an a l t e r n a t i v e t o radioanalyses ( r e f s . 166-171). For example, Stevens e t a l . ( r e f . 170) s t u d i e d t h e s o r p t i o n and d e s o r p t i o n o f t h e p r e s e r v a t i v e c h l o r h e x i d i n e on s o f t c o n t a c t lenses by radioassay o r , a l t e r n a t i v e l y ,
by HPLC-UV. The former procedure i n v o l v e s
t h e c a t a l y t i c o x i d a t i o n o f t h e l e n s m a t r i x which c o n t a i n s 14C-chlorh e x i d i n e t o 14C-carbon d i o x i d e and water which a r e trapped i n a c o c k t a i l and analyzed by l i q u i d s c i n t i l l a t i o n counting. Although t h e s e n s i t i v i t y , accuracy and p r e c i s i o n of
b o t h methods were s a t i s f a c t o r y ,
t h e HPLC
procedure has t h e advantages o f being more s e l e c t i v e , e a s i l y automatable and a l l o w i n g m o n i t o r i n g o f a n a l y t e degradation. The combination of
column l i q u i d chromatography and r a d i o a c t i v i t y
d e t e c t i o n has proven t o be an indispensable t o o l
i n many areas,
in
p a r t i c u l a r i n t h e e l u c i d a t i o n o f complex biomedical problems, such as t h e d i s t r i b u t i o n and metabolism o f endogenous compounds i n b i o l o g i c a l samples ( r e f . 173). F u t u r e work should be focussed on t h e combination of o n - l i n e preconcentration o f r a d i o l a b e l e d s o l u t e s f o r radio-column l i q u i d chroma-
202 tography, thereby rendering flow-through q u a n t i t a t i o n f e a s i b l e . There can be no doubt t h a t t h e use of flow-through r a d i o a c t i v i t y detectors which are now commercially a v a i l a b l e from several manufacturers - w i l l stimulate the u t i l i z a t i o n of radioisotopes i n t h e various areas of research mentioned above.
-
6. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The author would l i k e t o thank Prof. O r . U.A.Th. Brinkman, Prof. D r . 1r.H.A. Das and Prof. Or. R.W. F r e i f o r s t i m u l a t i n g discussions and t h e i r many h e l p f u l suggestions i n t h e preparation o f t h i s chapter. REFERENCES 1 H.J.M. Bowen, Chemical Applications o f Radioisotopes, Muthuen i3 CO. Ltd, London (1969). 2 W. Geary, Radiochemical Methods, published on b e h a l f o f ACOL, London, by John Wiley & Sons, Chichester (1986). 3 D.D. Breimer, Rational Selection o f Methods f o r Therapeutic Drug Monitoring. I n : Therapeutic Relevance o f Drug Analysis, F.A. DeWolff, H. M a t t i e and 0.0. Breimer (Eds.), Martinus Nijhoff, The Hague (1979) pp. 9-21. 4 H.C. Dorn, Anal. Chem., 56 (1984) 747A-758A. 5 H.F. Haas and V. Krivan, Fresenius Z. Anal. Chem., 324 (1986) 13-18. 6 C.L. Holder, H.C. Thompson, Jr, A.B. Gosnell, P.H. Siitonen, W.A. Korfmacher, C.E. C e r n i g l i a , D.W. M i l l e r , D.A. Casciano and W. S l i k k e r , Jr., J. Anal. Toxicol., 11 (1987) 113-121. 7 A.C. Veltkamp, H.A. Das, U.A. Th. Brinkman and R.W. F r e i , p o s t e r presented a t t h e 9 t h I n t e r n a t i o n a l Symposium on Column L i q u i d Chromatography, Edinburgh (1985). 8 G. K l o s t e r and P. Laufer, I n t . J. Appl. Radiat. I s o t . , 35 (1984) 545. 9 D.S. Wilbur, Development o f No-Carrier-Added Radiopharmaceuticals w i t h the Aid o f Radio-HPLC. In: A n a l y t i c a l and Chromatographic Techniques i n Radi opharmaceutical Chemistry , D.M. W i e l and, M.C. Tobes and T.J. Mangner (Eds.), Springer-Verlag, New York, 1986, Ch. 11. 10 T.J. Manger, P o t e n t i a l A r t i f a c t s i n t h e Chromatography of Radiopharmaceutic a l s. I n : A n a l y t i c a l and Chromatographic Techniques i n Radiopharmaceutical Chemistry, D.M. Wieland, M.C. Tobes and T.J. Manger (Eds.), Springer-Verlag, New-York, (1986), Ch. 13. 11 T.J. Beugelsdijk and D.W. Knobeloch, J. Liq. Chromatogr., 9 (1986) 3093-3131. 12 T R Roberts , Radioc hromat ograp hy , t h e C hromat ograp hy and Electrophoresis o f Radiolabel l e d Compounds, Elsevier, Amsterdam, (1978), Ch. 6. 13 P.C. White, Analyst, 109 (1984) 976-979. 14 R.P.W. Scott, L i q u i d Chromatography Detectors, Elsevier, Amsterdam (1986) 15 H.G. Barth, W.E. Barber, C.H. Lochmuller, R.E. Majors and F.E. Regnier, Anal. Chem., 58 (1986) 211R-250R. 16 H.G. Barth, W.E. Barber, C.H. Lochmuller, R.E. Majors and F.E. Regnier, Anal. Chem. , 60 (1988) 387R-435R. 17 D.M. Wieland, M.C. Tobes and T.J. Mangner (Eds.), A n a l y t i c a l and Chromatographic Techniques i n Radiopharmaceut ic a l Chemistry , Springer-Verlag, New York, 1986.
..
.
203 18
G. Simonnet and M. Oia, Les Mesures de R a d i o a c t i v i t e a 1'Aide des Compteurs a S c i n t i l l a t e u r Liquide, E d i t i o n s Eyrolles, Paris (1977)
p . 19.
19
C.T. Peng, Sample Preparation i n L i q u i d S c i n t i l l a t i o n Counting, Review 17, The Radiochemical Centre, Amersham, Bucks., England
20 21 22
M.J. Kessler, J. Liq. Chrornatogr., 5 (1982) 313-325. Y. Nakamura and Y. Koizumi, J. Chromatogr., 333 (1985) 83-92. C.A. Mathis, R.M. Jones and J.H. Chasko, Overall Radio-HPLC Design. In: A n a l y t i c a l and Chromatographic Techniques i n Radiopharmaceutical Chemistry, D.M. Wieland, M.C. Tobes and T.J. Mangner (Eds.), Springer-Verlag, New-York (1986) Ch. 6. J.D. Baker, R.J. Gehrke, R.C. Greenwood and D.M. Meikrantz, J. Radioanal. Chem., 74 (1982) 117-124. F. Simonnet, J. Combe and G. Simonnet, I n t . J. Appl. Radiat. ISOtOp., 38 (1987) 571-572. E. Nieves, K.C. Rosenspire, S. Filc-DeRicco and A.S. Gelbard, J Chromatogr., 383 (1986) 325-337. V. Pingoud, J. Chromatogr., 331 (1985) 125-132. 6. Langstrom and H. Lundqvist, Radiochem. Radioanal. L e t t e r s , 41
23 24 25 26 27
(1977).
.
(1979) 375-381.
28 29 30 31
33
R.E. Needham and M.F. Delaney, Anal. Chem., 55 (1983) 148-150. K. Susuki, I n t . J . Appl. Radiat. Isot., 35 (1984) 801-804. D.R. Reeve and A. Crozier, J. Chromatogr., 137 (1977) 271-282. A.C. Veltkamp, H.A. Das, R.W. F r e i and U.A.Th. Brinkman, Eur. J. Chromatogr. News, l ( 2 ) (1987) 16-21. B.F.H. Drenth, T. Jagersma, F. Overzet, R.T. Ghijsen and R.A. de Zeeuw, Meth. Surv. Biochem. Anal., 12 (1983) 75-80. H.Alam, J.B. Smith, M. J. S i l v e r and D. Ahern, J. Chromatogr., 285
34 35
M.J. Kessler, J. Chromatogr. Sci., 20 (1982) 523-527. R.F. Roberts and M.J. F i e l d s , J. Chromatogr., Biomed. Appl.,
32
(1982) 218-222. 342
(1985) 25-33.
40 41
J.A. Hunt, Anal. Biochem., 23 (1968) 289-300. D. Westerlund, J . C a r l q v i s t , M. Ovesson and B. G. Pring, Acta Pharm. Suec., 21 (1984) 93-102. H.A. Dugger and B.A. Orwig, Drug. Metab. Rev., lO(2) (1979) 247-269. S.W. Wunderley, poster presented a t t h e 11th I n t e r n a t i o n a l Symposium on Column L i q u i d Chromatography, Amsterdam (1987). H. Lentzen and R. Simon, J. Chromatogr., 389 (1987) 444-449. Brochure 126L, Nuclear Enterprises, Edinburgh, Great B r i t a i n ,
42
S.J. Potashner, N. Lake and J.D.
36 37 38 39
(1980). Knowles, Anal. Biochem., 112 (1981)
82-89. 43 44 45 46
G.B. Sieswerda and H.L. Polak, J. Radioanal. Chem., 11 (1972) 49-58. 0. de Korte, Y.M.T. Marijnen, W.A. Haverkort, A.H. van Gennip and D. Roos, J. Chromatogr., 415 (1987) 383-387. A.P.A. Prins, E. K i l j a n , R.J. van de Stadt and J.K. van de Korst, Anal. Biochem., 152 (1986) 370-375. G.B. Sieswerda. H. PoDoe and J.F.K. Huber, Anal. Chim. Acta, 78
..
(1975) 343-3581 47
F.K.
Hunt, I n t . J. Appl. Radiat. I s o t . , 32 (1981)
K l e i n and C.A.
669-671. 48
S. Baba. Y. Suzuki. Y. Sasaki and M. Horie, J . Chromatogr.,
(1987) i57-164. 49
50 51
392
'
H.J. van Nieuwkerk, Thesis: On-line Radiometry i n High-Performance L i q u i d Chromatography using a Storage Loop, Petten, The Netherlands, 1987, pp. 68-71. L.A. Currie, Anal. Chem., 40 (1968) 586-593. P.R. Bevington, Data Reduction and E r r o r Analysis f o r t h e Physical Sciences, McGraw-Hill Book Co., New York, (1969).
204 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70
71 72 73
74 75 76
77 78 79 80 81 82 83
84 85 86 a7
D.J. Malcolme-lawes, S. Massey and P. Warwick, J. Radioanal. Chem., 57 (1980) 335-361. A. Savitsky and M.J.E. Golay, Anal. Chem., 36 (1964) 1627-1639. G.J. de Groot, Trends i n Anal. Chem., 4 (1985) 134-137. B.M. Frey and F.J. Frey, Clin. Chem., 28 (1982) 689-692. M.J. Kessler, J. Chromatogr., 255 (1983) 209-217. H.K. Webster and J.M. Whaum, J. Chromatogr., 209 (1981) 283-292. H.J. van Nieuwkerk, A.C. Veltkamp, H.A. Das, U.A.Th. Brinkman and R.W. F r e i , J. Radioanal. Nucl. Chem., 100 (1986) 165-176. N.G.L. Harding, Y. Farid, M.J. Stewart, J. Shepherd and D. N i c o l l , Chromatographia 15 (1982) 468-474. A.G. Causey, B. Middleton and K. B a r t l e t t , Biochem. J., 235 (1986) 343-350. H.M. Ruijten, P.H. van Amsterdam and H. de Bree, J. Chromatogr., 314 (1984) 183-191. L.N. Mackey, P.A. Rodriguez and F.B. Schroeder, J. Chromatogr., 208 (1981) 1-8. K. Shirahashi, 6. Izawa, Y. Murano, Y. Muramastu and K. Yoshihara, J. Radioanal. Nucl. Chem., Letters, 86 (1984) 1-10. L.J. Everett, Chromatographia, 15 (1982) 445-448. M.H. Simonian and M.W. Capp, Chromatogram 8 (1987) 5-6 (HPLC newsletter published by Beckman Inc. , F u l l e r t o n , CA, USA). C. Giersch, J . Chromatogr., 172 (1979) 153-161. S. Mori, Plant & C e l l Physiol., 23 (1982), 703-708. S. Mori, Agric. B i o l . Chem., 45 (1981) 1881-1884. B.H. Candy, Rev. Sci. Instrum., 56 (1985) 183-193. K. Strandgarden and P.O. Gunnarson, poster presented a t t h e 11th I n t e r n a t i o n a l Symposium on Column L i q u i d Chromatography, Amsterdam (1987). G. Dietzel, G I T Fachz. Lab., 28 (1984) 909-913. B. Detjens, K. Figge and H. Martinen, G I T Fachz. Lab., 22 (1978) 578-585. A.D. Nunn and A.R. Fritzberg, in: A n a l y t i c a l and Chromatographic Techniques i n Radi opharmaceut i c a l Chemistry D.M. W i e l and, M.C. Tobes and T.J. Mangner (Eds.), Springer-Verlag, New York, 1986, p. 116. B. Bakay, E.Nissinen and L. Sweetman, Anal. Biochem., 86 (1978) (65-77). M.A. Clark, T.M. Conway and S.T. Crooke, J. Liq. Chromatogr., 10 (1987) 2707-2719. P.W. Albro, J. Lorenzo and J. Schroeder, LC. Liq. Chromatogr. HPLC Mag., 2 (1984) 310-312. L. Schutte, J. Chromatogr., 72 (1972) 303-309. T.L. Rucker, H.H. Ross and G.K. Schweitzer, Chromatographia, 25 (1988) 31-36. J.C. Sternberg, i n J.C. Giddings and R.A. K e l l e r (Eds.), Advances i n Chromatography, Vol. 2, Dekker, New York, USA, 1966, p. 205. L. Nondek, U.A.Th. Brinkman and R.W. F r e i , Anal. Chem., 54 (1983) 1466-70. P.R. Bewington, Data Reduction and E r r o r Analysis f o r the Physical Sciences, McGraw-Hill Book Co., New York, 1969, p. 78. D.W. Roberts, Meth. Surv. Biochem. Anal., 12 (1983) 81-88. C.A. Mathis, R.M. Jones and J.H. Chasko, Overall Radio HPLC Design. In: A n a l y t i c a l and Chromatographic Techniques i n Radiopharmaceutical Chemistry, D.M. Wieland, M.C. Tobes and T.J. Manger (Eds.), Springer-Verlag, New York, (1986) p. 133-137. B. Bakay, Anal. Biochem., 63 (1975p 87-98 B. Bakay, Clin. Chem., 21 (1975) 1212-1216. B. Bakay, in: Liquid S c i n t i l l a t i o n Counting. H.A. Crook and P. Johnson, Vol 4, p. 133, Heyden Press, London, 1977. L.R. Snyder, J. Chromatogr., 149 (1978) 653-668.
.
.
88
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117
118 119 120 121
A.H.M.T. S c h o l t e n , U.A. Th. Brinkman and R.W. F r e i , Anal. Chem., 54 (1982) 1932-38. H.J. van Nieuwkerk, Thesis: O n - l i n e Radiometry i n High-Performance L i q u i d Chromatography u s i n g a Storage Loop, Pet t en, The Net herlands (1987). H.J. van Nieuwkerk, H.A. Das, U.A. Th. Brinkman and R.W. F r e i , Chromatographia, 19 (1984) 137-144. H.J. van Nieuwkerk, H.A. Das, U.A.Th., Brinkman and R.W. F r e i , J. Chromatogr., 360 (1986) 105-117. A.C. Veltkamp, H.A. Das, R.W. F r e i and U.A.Th. Brinkman, J. Chromatogr., 384 (1987) 357-369. A.C. Veltkamp, H.A. Das, R.W. F r e i and U.A.Th. Brinkman, J. Pharm. Biomed. Anal. 6 (1988) 609-622. S. Baba, Y. Shinohara, H. Sano, T. Inoue, S. Masuda and M. Kurono, J. Chromatogr., 305 (1984) 119-126. S. Baba, M. H o r i e and K. Watanabe, J. Chromatogr., 244 (1982) 57-64. A . Karmen, G. M a l i k i n , L. F r e u n d l i c h and S. Lam, J. Chromatogr., 349 (1985) 267-274. H.C. T r e u t l e r and K. Fr e y e r , Z f I - M i t t . , 103 (1985) 18-32. E.A. Evans, S e l f - d e c o m p o s i t i o n o f Radiochemicals: P r i n c i p l e s , C o n t r o l , Observations and E f f e c t s , Review 16, Amersham I n t e r n a t i o n a l Ltd., Amersham, Bucks., England, 1976. J.H. Chasko and J.R. Thayer, I n t . J. Appl. Radiat . I s o t . , 32 (1981) 645-649. T.E. Boothe, A.M. Emran, R.D. Fi n n , P.J. K o t h a r i and M.M. Vora, J. Chromatogr., 333 (1985) 269-275. G. K l o s t e r and P. L a u f e r , J. Lab. Comp. Radioph., 20 (1983) 1305-1315. A.E. B o l t o n , R a d i o i o d i n a t i o n Techniques, Review 18, Amersham. Bucks., England (1985). R.C. Judd and H.D. C a l d w e l l , J. L i q . Chromatogr., 8 (1985) 1109-1120. S.J. Wagner and M.J. Welch, J. Nucl. Med., 20 (1979) 428. D.J. Hnatowich, R.L. C h i l d s , D. L a n t e i g n e and A. N a j a f i J. Immun. Meth., 65 (1983) 147-157. M.V. M i k e ls o n s and T.C. P i n k e r t o n , Anal. Chem. , 58, (1986) 1007-1013. J.A.G.M. van den Brand, H.A. Das, 6. G. Dekker and C.L. de L i g n y , I n t . J . Appl. R a d i a t . I s o t . , 33 (1982) 917. D. I s h i i , A. H i r o s e and I. H o r i u c h i , J. Radioanal. Chem., 45 (1978) 7-14. J. Vockova and V. Svoboda, J. Chromatogr., 410 (1987) 500-503. D.A. W e lls , G.A. Garbolas and G.A. D i q e n i s , J. Chromatogr., 356 (1986) 367-371. I.Kleinmann, V. Svoboda and J. Vockova, J. Chrornatogr., 411 (1987) 335-344. B.F.H. D re n t h and R.A. de Zeeuw, I n t . J. Appl. Radiat . I s o t . , 33 (1982) 681-683. S.K. Mauldi n , F.A. Richard, M.Plescia, S.D. Wyrick, A. Sancar and S.G. Chaney, Anal. Biochem., 157 (1986) 129-143. K.J. Hoffman, Drug Metab. Disp., 14 (1985) 341-348. L. W eidolf , J . Chromatogr., 343 (1985) 85-97. K.O. Vollmer, W. Klemisch and A. von Hodenberg, Z. N a t u r f o r s c h . , C: B i o s c i . , 41 (1986) 115-125. J.E. Coutant, R.J. Barbuch, D.K. S a t o n i n and R.J. Cregge, Biomed. Environ. Mass Spectrom. , 14 (1987) 325-330. C. Meinard, P. Bruneau and M. Roche, J. Chromatogr., 349 (1985) 105- 108. G.L. Lamoureux and D.G. Rusness, J. Agr. Food. Chem., 35 (1987) 1-7. M.J. Arnaud, Drug Metab. Oisp., 13 (1985) 471-478. G.A. Kyerematen, L.H. T a y l o r , J.O. d e B e t hizy and E.S. V e s e l l , J. Chromatogr., 419 (1987) 191-203.
206 122
126 127
I . Plakunov, T.A. Smolarek, D.L. Fischer, J.C. Wiley J r . and W.M. Bai r d , Carci nogenesi s , 8 (1987) 59-66. T.J. Monks, S.S. Lau, R.J. Highet and J.R. G i l l e t t e , Drug. Metab. Disp., 13 (1985) 553-559. N.J. Parks, K.A. Krohn, C.A. Mathis, J.H. Chasko, K.R. Geiger, M.E. Gregor and N.F. Peek, Science, 212 (1981) 58-60. R.S. Chapkin, V.A. Ziboh, C.L. Marcel0 and J.J. Voorhees, J. L i p i d Res., 27 (1986) 945-954. P.I. Lundmo and A. Sunde, J. Chromatogr., 308 (1984) 289-294. D.L. T r i b b l e , M.R. Glover and J.D. Lambeth, J. Chromatogr., 414
128 129
G.Bonn, J. Chromatogr., 387 (1987) 393-398. C. Abeijon, J.M. Capasso and C.B. Hirschberg, J. Chromatogr., 360
130
M.W.H;
123 124 125
(1987) 411-416. (1986) 293-297. Coughtrie, B. Burchell and J.R.
Bend, Anal. Biochem.,
159
(1986) 198-205. 131 132 133 134 135
M.W. D i e t r i c h , W.E. Hopkins, K.J. Asbury and W.P. Ridley, Chromatographia, 24 (1987) 545-551. A. Hakam, J. McLick and E. Kun, J. Chromatogr., 359 (1986) 275-284. S. Banerjee and J.R. Steimers, Anal. Chem., 57 (1985) 1476-1477. V.L. Wilson, R.A. Smith, H. Autrup, H. Krokan, D.E. Musci, Ngoc-Nga-Thi Le, J. Longeria, D. Ziska and C.C. H a r r i s , Anal. Biochem., 152 (1982) 275-284. L. Janocko and R.B. Hochberg, J. S t e r o i d Biochem., 24 (1986)
1049-1052. 136
138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146
E.W. Bergink, P.S.L. Janssen, E.W. T u r p i j n and J. van der Vies, J. Steroid Biochem., 22 (1985) 831-836. L.D. Fairbanks, A. Goday, G.S. M o r r i s , M.F.J. Brolsma, H.A. Simmonds and T. Gibson, J. Chromatogr., 276 (1983) 427-432. R . T . M a r s i l i and H. Ostapenko, J. Agr. Food Chem., 35 (1987) 304-308. E. Nissinen, J. Chromatogr., 342 (1985) 175-178. K.L.L. Fong and B.Y.H. Hwang, Biochem. Pharmac., 32 (1983) 2781-2786. S.R. Childers, Neurochem. Res., 11 (1986) 161-171. F.A. Hommes and L. Moss, Anal. Biochem., 154 (1986) 100-103. B.M. Frey and F.J. Frey, J. Chromatogr., 229 (1982) 283-292. C.R. Benedict, J. Chromatogr. , 385 (1987) 369-375. G. Raspi, A. LO Moro and M. S p i n e t t i , Ann. Chim., 77 (1987) 525-532. F.L. de Vos, D.M. Robertson and M.T.W. Hearn, J. Chromatogr., 392
147
P.C.
137
(1987) 17-32. Sadek, P.W. Carr.,
L.D.
Bowers and L.C. Haddad, Anal. Biochem.,
153 (1986) 359-371. 148 149 150 151 152 153
M.M. Vora, S . Wukovnig, R.D. Finn, A.M. Emran, T.E. Boothe and P.J. Kothari , J. Chromatogr. , 369 (1986) 187-192. G. Toth and J. Zsadanyi, J. Chromatogr., 329 (1985) 264. G. Toth, J. Chromatogr., 404 (1987) 258-260. L. van So and L. S z i r t e s , J. Radioanal. Nucl. Chem., 99 (1986) 55-60. R.M. Cassidy, F.C. M i l l e r , C.H. Knight, J.C. Roddick and R.W. S u l l i v a n , Anal. Chem., 58 (1986) 1389-1394. D. Josic, E. Mattia, G. Ashwell and J. van Renswoude, Anal. Biochem.,
152 (1986) 42-47. 154
158 159
R. Boulieu, C. Bory, P. Baltassat and C. Gonnet, J. L i q . Chromatogr., 7 (1984) 1013-1021. H. van den Berg, P.G. Boshuis and W.H.P. Schreurs, J. Agr. Food Chem., 34 (1986) 264-268. B.A. Tomkins and W.H. G r i e s t , J. Chromatogr., 386 (1987) 103-110. S.T. I n g a l l s , P.E. Minkler, C.L. Hoppel and J.E. Nordlander, J. Chromatogr., 299 (1984) 365-376. P.C. Devine and B.V. Milborrow, J. Chromatogr., 325 (1985) 323-326. J.J. Fardv, G. D. McOrist and T.M. Florence, Anal. Chim. Acta, 159
160
G.V.
155 156 157
(1984) 1991209. Iyengar, J. Radioanal. Nucl. Chem.,
110 (1987) 503-517.
20 7 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170
171 172 173
E. G e l p i , Trends i n Anal. Chem., 4 (1985) XIII-XIV. O.B. Holland, M. R i s k , H. Brown, K. Komes, P. Dube and C. Swann, J. Chromatogr., 385 (1987) 393-396. G.H. F r i d l a n d and D.M. D e s i d e r i o , L i f e S c i . , 41 (1987) 809-812. J.J. P r a t t , Ann. C l i n . Biochem., 23 (1986) 251-276. P.K.F. Yeung, J.W. Hubbard, B.W. Baker, M.R. Looker and K.K. Midha, J. Chromatogr., 303 (1984) 412-416. J. Krska, G.M. Addison and S.D. Soni, Ann. C l i n . Biochem., 23 (1986) 340-345. 0. L a n t t o , Clin. Chem., 28 (1982) 1129-1132. G.J. Peters, E. Laurensse, A. Leyva and H.M. Pinedo, Anal. Biochem., 161 (1987) 32-38. P. Hjemdahl, M. Daleskog and T. Kahan, L i f e Sci., 25 (1979) 131-138. L.E. Stevens, J.R. Durrwachter and 0.0. H e l t o n , J. Pharm. Sci., 75 (1986) 83-86. F. Overzet and R.A. de Zeeuw, J. Pharma. Biomed. Anal., 2 (1984) 3-17. J.A. van d e r K r o g t , C.F.M. van Valkenburg and R.D.M. B e l f r o i d , J. Chromatogr. Biomed. Appl., 427 (1988) 9-17. E. Buncel and J.R. Jones (Eds.), I s o t o p e s i n t h e P h y s i c a l and Biomedical Sciences, Volume 1 L a b e l l e d Compounds ( P a r t A), E l s e v i e r , Amsterdam, 1987.
208 CHAPTER V
MODERN POST-COLUMN RE CT ON DETECTION LIQUID CHROMATOGRAPHY
HIGH-PERFORMANCE
H. JANSEN and R. W. FREI
1. 2. 2.1 2.2 2.3 3. 4. 5. 5.1 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.3.1 5.2.3.2 5.2.3.3 5.2.3.4 5.2.3.5 5.2.3.6 5.2.3.7 5.2.3.8 5.2.3.9 5.2.4 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.2.1 5.3.2.2 5.3.2.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 6.
General i n t r o d u c t i o n Types o f post-column r e a c t o r s Open t u b u l a r r e a c t o r s Packed bed r e a c t o r s Segmented stream t u b u l a r r e a c t o r s Choice o f r e a c t i o n d e t e c t o r A p p l i c a t i o n s o f post-column r e a c t i o n d e t e c t i o n New approaches t o post-column r e a c t i o n d e t e c t i o n I n t r o d u c t ion The use o f immobilized enzymes i n post-column r e a c t o r s Introduction Enzyme i m n o b i l i z a t i o n A p p l i c a t i o n s o f immobilized enzymes E a r l y work Urease Hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases A c e t y l c h o l i n e esterase and c h o l i n e oxidase Glucuronidase and glycosidase Xanthine oxidase L-Amino a c i d oxidase Cholesterol o x i dase A1 k a l i n e phosphatase Concluding remarks Other solid-phase c h e m i s t r i e s Introduction A p p l i c a t i o n s o f s o l id-phase c h e m i s t r i e s E a r l y work C a t a l y t i c s o l id-phase c h e m i s t r i e s N o n - c a t a l y t i c s o l id-phase c h e m i s t r i e s The use o f electrochemical reagent p r o d u c t i o n The use o f photochemical and thermo i n i t i a t e d r e a c t i o n s Miniaturization Hollow f i b e r s as post-column r e a c t o r s Conc 1us ions References
1.
GENERAL INTRODUCTION I n many a n a l y t i c a l l a b o r a t o r i e s a l l over t h e world, h i g h performance
l i q u i d chromatography (HPLC) i s used f o r t h e a n a l y s i s o f a wide v a r i e t y
o f samples. A p p l i c a t i o n s i n c l u d e , e.g.,
environmental a n a l y s i s , c l i n i c a l
a n a l y s i s , food a n a l y s i s , pharmaceutical a n a l y s i s and q u a l i t y c o n t r o l . I n many cases, t r a c e l e v e l c o n c e n t r a t i o n s o f t h e a n a l y t e s o f i n t e r e s t a r e
of t h e o f t e n inadequate s e n s i t i v i t y and/or s e l e c t i v i t y i n t h e d e t e c t i o n process i n HPLC needed f o r t r a c e a n a l y s i s i n
encountered.
Because
209 comp 1ex m a t r i c e s (b io l o g i c a l f 1u ids , heav i1y contaminated env ironmenta 1 samples) methods have been developed t o overcome t h i s problem. Two powerf u l approaches can be d i s t i n g u i s h e d : The use o f small precolumns f o r s e l e c t i v e o n - l i n e sample handling.
-
With t h e proper s e l e c t i o n o f sorbents, clean-up and t r a c e enrichment can be achieved. An e x c e l l e n t review showing t h e p o s s i b i l i t i e s o f t h i s
-
method was published r e c e n t l y ( r e f . 1). The use o f chemical d e r i v a t i z a t i o n techniques w i t h t h e goal o f improving t h e d e t e c t a b i l i t y o f t h e compounds o f i n t e r e s t .
C u r r e n t l y , t h e b e s t and most r e l i a b l e d e t e c t o r s f o r HPLC t h a t a r e w i d e l y used a r e UV-VIS, fluorescence and e l e c t r o c h e m i c a l d e t e c t o r s . I t i s d e s i r a b l e t o use these d e t e c t o r s f o r t r a c e a n a l y s i s which i s p o s s i b l e when s u i t a b l e chemical d e r i v a t i z a t i o n techniques a r e i n c o r p o r a t e d t o convert t h e a n a l y t e s o f i n t e r e s t w i t h t h e i r o r i g i n a l l y poor d e t e c t i o n p r o p e r t i e s i n t o compounds t h a t can be detected w i t h h i g h s e n s i t i v i t y w i t h these detectors. Apart from an increase i n d e t e c t a b i l i t y , t h e d e r i v a t i z a t i o n s t e p can a l s o improve t h e s e l e c t i v i t y o f t h e t o t a l a n a l y t i c a l method. i.e.,
The d e r i v a t i z a t i o n can be c a r r i e d o u t i n t h e precolumn mode,
b e f o r e t h e separation takes p l a c e and u s u a l l y o f f - l i n e ,
recent advances revival
of
i n automation o f pre-column
pre-chromatographic
on-1 i n e d e r i v a t i z a t i o n
techniques.
although
l a b e l l i n g has caused a
However,
t h e m a j o r i t y of
procedures a r e c a r r i e d o u t i n t h e post-column
mode. Both approaches have t h e i r i n h e r e n t advantages and disadvantages which have been discussed p r e v i o u s l y ( r e f . 2) and t h e c h o i c e f o r one of t h e two modes w i l l g e n e r a l l y depend a l o t on t h e a n a l y t i c a l problem t h a t i s t o be solved. This paper w i l l deal w i t h post-column d e r i v a t i z a t i o n . HPLC-system w i t h an o n - l i n e r e a c t i o n 1. Pump 1 i s used f o r t h e m o b i l e phase supply. A f t e r separation o f t h e compounds i n t h e sample on t h e a n a l y t i c a l column, t h e reagent i s added w i t h pump 2 v i a a s u i t a b l e m i x i n g device. The combined streams a r e passed through t h e post-column r e a c t o r , p r o v i d i n g t h e d e s i r e d c.q. r e q u i r e d holdup t i m e f o r t h e r e a c t i o n t o occur, and f i n a l l y through t h e d e t e c t o r . Several advantages o f post-column r e a c t i o n can be given: - As opposed t o d e r i v a t i z a t i o n p r i o r t o t h e s e p a r a t i o n , t h e r e a c t i o n does n o t have t o y i e l d a s i n g l e d e t e c t a b l e species, s i n c e t h e r e a c t i o n products a r e n o t separated anymore. A
schematic
diagram o f
an
d e t e c t o r can be found i n Fig.
-
The r e a c t i o n does n o t have t o go t o completion and t h e r e a c t i o n products do n o t have t o be s t a b l e .
As l o n g as t h e r e a c t i o n i s r e -
producible, i t can, i n p r i n c i p l e , be used.
2 10
-
The technique can be used with different detectors in series, i.e., an UV-detector directly at the column outlet followed by a fluorescence detector after a post-column reactor. Because the compounds are separated in their original form it is possible to use separation procedures from the literature.
sampling valve analytical column
D--i
T -piece post -column reactor detector
Fig. 1
General schematic of an HPLC system with reaction detector.
There are also distinct disadvantages of the technique: - Additional pumps are needed for reagent supply. A stable, nonpulsating flow is required. - Mixing problems can be encountered, e.g., when the mobile phase and the reagent have very different viscosity. - The addition of reagent gives a dilution o f the mobile phase. - Frequently, the mobile phase needed for the separation is not the best medium for the derivatization reaction. Therefore, compromises must be made for those cases. - The post-column reactor gives a contribution to total band broadening with a resultant loss in chromatographic resolution. - In some cases, the excess of reagent interferes in the detection process. When using post-column reaction detection, it i s necessary to have a reactor suitable i n terms of chemical resistance, holdup time, band broadening etc. for the reaction involved. In principle, three basically
different reactor types can be distinguished, viz. straight, coiled or knitted open tubular reactors (OTRs), packed bed reactors (PBRs) and segmented stream tubular reactors (SSRs). Band broadening can, as far as OTRs and PBRs are concerned, be predicted by the use of simple equations as will be outlined below. Huber et al. have published a good comparison between OTRs and PBRs (ref. 3). Special attention was given to the loss of resolution caused by the reactor and to the mixing process. 2.
TYPES OF POST-COLUMN REACTORS
2.1
OPEN TUBULAR REACTORS
The simplest post-column reactor is a piece of stainless steel or PTFE tubing. Coiling or knitting is attractive since it effects an increase in radial mass transfer resulting in a decrease in band broadening (refs. 4, 5). A good discussion of different types of these deformed OTRs can be found in ref. 6. Band broadening in time units in open tubes is described by tr t
0
:d
'
0.5
1
= (x
96
'
D,
In this equation, x (0 < x < 1) accounts for the reduced band broadening for coiled or knitted as compared to straight ( x = 1) tubes, tr ist the mean residence time in the reactor, dt is the tube inner diameter and D, is the molecular diffusion coefficient in the carrier (mobile phase + reagent) stream. A thorough investigation o f the influence of coiling has been given (refs. 5, 6). T o demonstrate the influence of coiling of open tubular reactors, x is calculated to be 0.14 by using the equations given (ref. 5) for the following set of parameters, which are typical for a post-column reactor coupled to a 4.6 mm I.D. chromatographic column: p (solvent density) = 103 kg/m3 , 7 (viscosity) = kg/m.s, h (coil to tube diameter ratio) = 0.01, 0, = lo-' m2/s, F (total volumetric flow m. For a 30 s residence time, rate) = 30 . 10- 9 m3/ s , and dt = 500 . ut is calculated to be 3 . 3 s which is lower by 62 % when compared with the value for a straight tube. It is possible to get less band broadening by using smaller inner diameter tubing but a larger pressure drop is the price that must be paid. Pressure drop (dp) in the tubular reactor is described by the poiseuille equation
212
For the set o f parameters given above, p is calculated to be 0.9 bar, m which is fully acceptable but a reduction in tube diameter to 200 . would lead to a pressure drop of over 200 bar for the same residence time. PACKED BED REACTORS Packed bed reactors are glass or stainless-steel columns that are packed with small, inert nonporous glass beads. They can be considered as chromatographic columns operated under non-retention conditions. Therefore, band broadening in these reactors essentially follows the theory for HPLC columns, which yields:
2.2
h stands for the reduced plate height with values
o f between 2 and 6 roughly dependent on the packing quality, d is the particle diameter and P L is the reactor length. From Eq. 3 it can be concluded that reducing the particle size and increasing the reactor length while keeping the residence time unchanged will result in less band broadening. It is important not to have excessive pressure drop over the reactor. The pressure drop is given by . L
Ap
2 (4)
=
. 2 '
tr
dp
where KO is the permeability constant which has a value o f 0.001 to 0.002. SEGMENTED STREAM TUBULAR REACTORS Using this type of post-column reactor, the mixed mobile phase + reagent stream is segmented either with gas (air) bubbles or with
2.3
213 non-miscible s o l v e n t plugs. I f t h e r e i s no c a r r y - o v e r from one segment of another, which can be achieved by t h e proper c h o i c e o f t h e r e a c t o r m a t e r i a l ( r e f . 7 ) , t h e a x i a l d i s p e r s i o n i s determined by t h e s i z e o f t h e segment. With s u f f i c i e n t l y small segments, band broadening can be k e p t very low. Band broadening u s i n g t h i s t y p e o f r e a c t i o n d e t e c t i o n system i s u s u a l l y determined mainly by t h e phase separator o r debubbler, needed t o c r e a t e a homogeneous f l o w through t h e d e t e c t o r , r a t h e r than t h e r e a c t o r i t s e l f . The t h e o r e t i c a l treatment of band broadening i n segmented stream r e a c t o r s i s r a t h e r complex. Pressure drop over a gas segmented stream r e a c t o r should be low due t o c o m p r e s s i b i l i t y o f t h e gas bubble hence, r e l a t i v e l y l a r g e i n n e r diameter t u b i n g (0.8 t o 1 mm I.D.)
i s commonly
used i n combination w i t h 4.6
mm I.D. a n a l y t i c a l columns. For s o l v e n t segmented systems h i g h e r back pressures can be t o l e r a t e d hence, a h i g h e r
f l e x i b i l i t y e x i s t s f o r t h e c h o i c e o f c o i l geometries and some degree of miniaturization i s possible ( r e f . 9). 3.
CHOICE OF REACTION DETECTOR For t h e e f f e c t i v e use o f post-column r e a c t i o n d e t e c t i o n systems, i t i s
o f outmost
importance t o have a r e a c t o r attuned t o t h e p a r t i c u l a r r e a c t i o n c o n d i t i o n s . The choice o f one o f t h e r e a c t o r types g i v e n above
i s mainly i n f l u e n c e d by t h e r e a c t i o n t i m e needed. One can s t a r t c a l c u l a t i n g band broadening and pressure drop f o r open t u b u l a r and packed bed r e a c t o r s u s i n g Equations 1 through 4. For open t u b u l a r r e a c t o r s , band broadening w i l l be r a t h e r h i g h f o r l o n g e r r e a c t i o n times (above ca.
1
min.) when pressure drop should n o t be t o o high. Therefore, t h i s r e a c t o r t y p e i s commonly recommended f o r s h o r t e r r e a c t i o n times.
i.e.,
below
about 30 s . With a k n i t t e d r e a c t o r , somewhat l o n g e r r e a c t i o n times, up t o several minutes according t o Engelhardt ( r e f s . 4, 6 ) , a r e f e a s i b l e . reactions w i t h intermediate kinetics,
For
packed bed r e a c t o r s a r e t o be
prefered. They a r e mainly used f o r r e a c t i o n times between about 0.5 and 5 minutes. I n t h i s regions, they o f f e r an a t t r a c t i v e compromise between band broadening and pressure drop.
For r e a c t i o n times l o n g e r than 5
minutes a l s o as an a l t e r n a t i v e t o packed bed r e a c t o r s segmented stream r e a c t o r s are used. Reaction times up t o 20 minutes have been r e p o r t e d . This r e a c t i o n t i m e can be considered as an upper p r a c t i c a l l i m i t
in
post-column r e a c t i o n d e t e c t o r systems. Apart from band broadening and pressure drop c o n s i d e r a t i o n s , o t h e r aspects might have t h e i r i n f l u e n c e on t h e r e a c t o r choice. For i n s t a n c e , an open t u b u l a r r e a c t o r can be p r e f e r e d f o r i t s simple c o n s t r u c t i o n ,
f o r t h e f a c t t h a t c l o g g i n g problems a r e
almost never observed o r because an a l k a l i n e r e a c t i o n medium would cause
214
the glass particles in a packed bed reactor to dissolve. On the other hand, segmented stream reactors must be used when reactions on liquidliquid interfaces are used for the derivatization. As an example, ion-pair formation can be carried out. With this technique an ion-pair is extracted to one phase while the excess of reagent, i.e., the counter ion, remains in the other phase. This post-column ion-pairing is part of the so-called post-column extraction detection techniques. Another example of post-column extraction is extracting the analyte to the segmenting solvent thereby separating it from interferring compounds. After phase separation, the segmentation solvent phase is guided through the detector. Post-column extraction and ion-pairing techniques are in their appearance closely related to post-column reaction techniques and have been reviewed in the recent past (refs. 8, 9). Several papers dealing with the optimal choice of reaction detectors and giving a more detailed theoretical treatment of the various reactor types have appeared during the last years (e.9. refs. 3, 5, 6, 8, 10) and are suggested for additional reading. 4.
APPLICATIONS OF POST-COLUMN REACTION DETECTION In Table I , a list is given of some of the possibilities of postcolumn reaction detection. The table is intended to give an idea of the broad applicability in various analytical fields and problem areas rather than to give a complete review of all the applications published during the past few years. Examples of the use of the different reactor types discussed above and coupled to different detection modes are included in the table. Though not always the best choice in terms of band broadening, it appears from the literature that the open tubular reactor is most frequently used for post-column derivatization. This is most probably a result of the simplicity o f construction and of the reliability during operation.
215
TABLE I
Some a p p l i c a t i o n s o f post-column r e a c t i o n d e t e c t o r s i n HPLC
Compounds A f 1atoxins
Aldehydes and ketones Amino a c i d s Ant hraqui nones
Reagent (s)
I2 semicarbazide hydrochloride o-phthal a1 dehyde
Catechol amines
sodium d i t h i o n i t e / sodi um hydroxide borate b u f f e r (PH 10) NaOH, o-phthal aldehyde Ethylenediamine
Ch 1oroan i1ines
R F1uram
Phenols
Hydroperoxides
p o t a s s i um f e r r i c y a n i de 4 -am in oan t ipy r ine acetyl acetonel ammon ia NaOH, phenanthrenequi none NaI
&Lac t am a n t i b i o t ics
Barbiturates Carbamates
Formaldehyde
Reactor
Detection*
Reference
OTR
F
11
PBR
E
12
OTR PBR OTR
F F VIS
13 5 14
no r e a c t o r UV
15
OTR
F
16
SSR
F
17
OTR, PBR F and SSR no r e a c t o r V I S
18 19
20
knitted OTR OTR
VIS and F F
21
PBR
uv
22
o-phthalaldehyde
OTR
F
23
Organosul phur compounds
Pd( I I ) - c a l c e i n
SSR
F
24
Penici 11 i n s
sodium hydroxide/ mercury ( I I) c h l o r i d e / e t h y l ened i ami n e t e t r a a c e t i c acid
OTR
uv
25
OTR
E
26
OTR OTR OTR OTR
E F UV and V I S F
27 28 29 30
SSR
F
31
Guani d i nes
Pros tag1 andi ns
Br2
Reducing carbohydrates
2-cyanoacetamide
Thiamine and thiamine phosphate e s t e r s
various reagents p o t a s s i um f e r r i c y a n i de/ sodium hydroxide
Vitamin K,
sodium borohydride
J
*
F: Fluorescense E: Electrochemical UV: U l t r a v i o l e t absorption
VIS: V i s i b l e l i g h t absorption
216 5. 5.1
NEW APPROACHES TO POST-COLUMN REACTION DETECTION
INTRODUCTION Post-column
reaction detection
in
its
straight
forward
form
as
discussed above has developed i n t o a powerful method o f d e t e c t i o n f o r various analytes and i s used i n many a n a l y t i c a l l a b o r a t o r i e s . Since t h e a d d i t i o n a l hardware needed i s q u i t e simple, problems i n operating an HPLC/reaction detection system are seldom encountered. However, t h e r e are s i t u a t i o n s i n which conventional r e a c t i o n d e t e c t i o n i s n o t successful o r where other approaches y i e l d b e t t e r r e s u l t s , lower operation Cost, simpler
systems
or
other
advantages.
These
facts
have
stimulated
researchers t o develop new techniques i n post-column r e a c t i o n d e t e c t i o n f o r l i q u i d chromatography.
There are a number o f d i s t i n c t trends
in
research being done a t present times. These trends, demonstrated w i t h several applications, w i l l be discussed below and include a) t h e use of immobilized enzymes i n post-column reactors;
b) t h e use o f solid-phase
chemistries (other than reactions on immobilized enzymes), i.e., c a t a l y s i s and the use of s o l i d supported reagents; c) t h e use o f e l e c t r o chemical reagent production; d) t h e use o f photochemical and thermo i n i t i a t e d reactions;
e) m i n i a t u r i z a t i o n ,
as a l o g i c a l
necessity when a
microbore column i s p r e f e r r e d o r when expensive and/or h i g h l y t o x c chemicals and solvents are used, and f) t h e use o f hollow f i b e r s as pos
-
column reactors.
5.2 THE USE OF IMMOBILIZED ENZYMES I N POST-COLUMN REACTORS 5.2.1 INTRODUCTION Enzymes are a t t r a c t i v e for use i n r e a c t i o n d e t e c t i o n systems because o f t h e i r inherent s e l e c t i v i t y . When the product formed i n the enzymatic reaction i s w e l l detectable, an i n t e r e s t i n g h i g h l y s p e c i f i c a n a l y t i c a l method can be obtained, Much research i s being done on the use of i m mobilized
enzymes
since,
as
cited
below,
there
are
some
distinct
advantages as compared t o enzymes i n s o l u t i o n : the e l i m i n a t i o n o f enzyme s o l u t i o n pumps and mixing u n i t s and, hence,
-
-
-
the reduction o f cost and the absence o f mixing and d i l u t i o n problems the p o s s i b i l i t y o f working w i t h enzymes t h a t would otherwise i n t e r f e r e i n the detection process immobilized enzymes can be re-used. immobilization o f t e n improves the stabi 1it y o f t h e enzymes.
storage
p r o p e r t i e s and the pH
There are many methods f o r immobilizing enzymes on a wide v a r i e t y o f supports ( r e f s . 32-34). Supports t h a t are widely used include agarose,
217
cellulose, polyacrylamide, nylon, glass, silica and ion exchangers. Binding can take place either by physical adsorption or by covalent attachment. Physical adsorption has the disadvantage that loss of enzyme due to desorption can take place. For this reason, covalent attachment is generally preferred.The binding capacity of a support is an important parameter to consider. High surface area is advantageous. On the other hand, this should not be the result of very small pore diameters. Relatively large pore diameters (> ca. 40 nm) are needed for enzymes to enter into the pores. ENZYME IMMOBILIZATION Two types of enzyme reactors can be found in the literature, viz. a wall-coated open tubular reactor and a reactor packed with enzyme immobilized on beads. A major disadvantage of the first reactor type is its unfavourable ratio of active surface to mobile phase volume, leading to low activity per unit volume. For this reason, the latter reactor type i s primarily used in combination with HPLC. The first type is sometimes used in flow injection analysis. Good mechanically stable packed-bed reactors can be obtained when the enzyme is bound on glass, silica or alumina particles. Other materials are quite soft and can easily be deformed in flow systems, leading to high pressure drop and excessive peak broadening due to voids. Small particles should be used if possible for reasons of band broadening as discussed before. Besides the band broadening that occurs in any packed bed reactor, the reaction itself on the enzymatic layer may give rise to band broadening. This phenomenon has been discussed in the literature (refs. 35-37). No additional band broadening due to the reaction is observed either when reactant and product move at the same velocity through the reactor or when the reaction occurs instantaneously. When using enzymes in a post-column reactor, it is necessary to be careful with the mobile phase composition. Since enzymes are usually active in only a relatively small pH range and usually can not withstand high organic modifier concentration, development of a separation with a mobile phase directly compatible with the enzyme reactor is mandatory. If this is not possible, an adaptation of the mobile phase by adding a make-up flow, e.g., a buffer, prior to entering the reactor is possible. However, this has the disadvantage that an additional pump is needed and that dilution occurs. Therefore, direct coupling is prefered if possible.
5.2.2
2 18 5.2.3 5.2.3.1
APPLICATIONS OF IMMOBILIZED ENZYMES EARLY WORK
Preliminary work i n t h e use o f immobilized enzymes i n post-column reaction d e t e c t i o n systems was done by Schlabach and Regnier ( r e f . 38). A column w i t h glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase immobilized on glass beads was used t o react glucose-6-phosphate w i t h the formation o f NADH which i s detected f l u o r i m e t r i c a l l y . 5.2.3.2
UREASE
A schematic diagram of
an HPLC-system equipped w i t h an enzymatic
reactor i s given i n Fig. 2. The system i s used f o r t h e determination of urea and ammonia, which i s based on i o n - p a i r HPLC w i t h o n - l i n e postcolumn d e r i v a t i z a t i o n
on immobilized urease ( r e f . 39). In t h e urease
solid-phase reactor (SPR), urea i s q u a n t i t a t i v e l y converted i n t o ammonia, which reacts w i t h o-phthalaldehyde
and i s detected by
fluorescence
monitoring. The method i s very s p e c i f i c due t o t h e inherent s e l e c t i v i t y
o f the enzyme combined w i t h t h e s e l e c t i v i t y o f t h e OPA reaction. This i s shown i n Table I 1 which gives t h e response f o r compounds r e l a t e d t o urea t h a t are present i n t h e samples from an urea p l a n t f o r which t h e method was developed. Later, t h e same method was adapted t o t h e determinati
n of
urea and ammonia i n u r i n e and i n serum Fig. 3. An o f f - l i n e sample pretreatment procedure w i t h an anion exchanger was needed t o e l i m i n a t e n t e r f e r i n g amino acids ( r e f . 40).
TABLE I 1 Response o f by-products r e l a t i v e t o response o f urea (Reprinted from r e f . 39) Compound
S t r u c t u r a l formula
Urea
H2N
-$
R e l a t i v e response
100
-NH2
0 B iuret
H2N
- f - 0 -F - NH2 0
Guani d i ne
H2N
H
0.29
O
- F - NH2
0
NH Cyanamide
H2N
- CNI
1.5
Dicyandiamide
H2N
- F - t/ - C=N
0.64
NH
H
jn Pump
219
pulse"damper
guard column
Q
l
pressure trans ducer Sampling
valve
R P 18 anal column
urease SPR
wlse damper OPA reactor OPA reagent
fluorimeter
'.a 'I
waste
Fi g . 2
integrator
0
recorder
Schematic diagram o f an HPLC/urease reactor/OPA r e a c t o r / f lu ore s c e n c e d e t e c t o r system. R e p r i n t e d f rom r e f . 39.
220
urine 1000 x diluted without sample pretreatment
urine 1000x diluted with sample oretreatment
without sample pretreatment
with sample pretreatment
UREA
AMMON I A
AMMONIA
x '112
(1
r r L 4-
JL
X1'P
4
8
i
L-
(a)
0
xl
r
I
I
0
-
X l
r-
4
,
,
,
0 0 time (min )
(b)
4
(C )
I
,
8
I
,
0
,
4
,
,
8
(d)
Fig. 3
(a) Chromatogram o f a 1000-fold d i l u t e d u r i n e sample w i t h o u t p r e treatment procedure. Column, 5 - p n Spherisorb ODs-2; e l u e n t , 0.05 M potassium phosphate b u f f e r (pH 6.9) w i t h 0.005 M s o d i m o c t y l s u l phonate. Urease-SPR, s t a i n l e s s - s t e e l column packed w i t h immobilized urease. Fluorescence d e t e c t i o n . Note: X 1/12 means t h a t t h e actual peak h e i g h t i s t w e l v e times t h e peak h e i g h t as i n d i c a t e d i n t h e f i g u r e . (b) As F i g . 3a but with a urine sample cleaned by pretreatment procedure. (c) As F i g . 3a, b u t w i t h o u t urease-SPR. (d) As F i g . 3b, b u t w i t h o u t urease-SPR. Reprinted from r e f . 40.
5.2.3.3
HYOROXYSTEROID DEHYDROGENASES
Several papers discuss t h e use o f 3 w h y d r o x y s t e r o i d dehydrogenase i n a post-column r e a c t o r f o r t h e d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f b i l e acids. A f t e r t h e e a r l y work by Okuyama e t a1 ( r e f . 41) methods f o r t h e r o u t i n e d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f b i l e acids i n serum were developed.
B i l e a c i d s r e a c t w i t h NAD i n t h e
enzyme column w i t h t h e f o r m a t i o n o f NADH; NADH i s r e a c t e d w i t h phenazine methosulphate s o l u t i o n which i s followed by electrochemical d e t e c t i o n a t + 0.1 V ( r e f . 42). D i r e c t o x i d a t i o n o f NADH was n o t successful due t o t h e
h i g h e r p o t e n t i a l needed (+ 0.33 V ) which c o n s i d e r a b l y decreased t h e
221 s e l e c t i v i t y o f t h e method. Another approach i s t h e f l u o r e s c e n c e d e t e c t i o n o f NADH ( r e f . 43). The a u t h o r s succeeded i n t h e use o f t h e same a l k a l i n e pH (9.7) f o r b o t h s e p a r a t i o n and enzyme r e a c t i o n . Besides t h e e l u e n t pump t h e system needs a second pump f o r NAD a d d i t i o n , b u t compared t o e l e c t r o chemical
detection
cellulose
(ref.
beads were
42)
chosen
one as
pump
less
support
is
required.
because o f
Spherical
their
chemical
s t a b i l i t y a t a l k a l i n e pH. L a t e r , t h e system was equipped w i t h an o n - l i n e sample p r e t r e a t m e n t system t o e l i m i n a t e t e d i o u s manual p r e c e s s i n g s t e p s and make aut o ma t i c c o n t r o l 1 p o s s i b l e ( r e f . 44). Now, NAD was added t o t h e m o b i l e phase so t h a t a s i n g l e pump system was obt ained. Hayashi e t a l . ( r e f . 45) succeeded i n t h e s e p a r a t i o n o f t h e b i l e a c i d s i n r a t b i l e . Rats possess s ev era l p e c u l i a r b i l e a c i d s which c o m p l i c a t e t h e s e p a r a t i o n . A C8 column was used f o r s e p a r a t i o n and a second pump was used f o r a d d i t i o n o f NAD and f o r pH a d a p t a t i o n a f t e r t h e s e p a r a t i o n . A chromatogram o f a r a t b i l e e x t r a c t i s g i v e n i n F i g . 4. Another h y d r o x y s t e r o i d dehydrogenase was used i n a s i m i l a r a n a l y t i c a l system ( r e f . 46). A column packed w i t h 3 8 , 1 78-h y dro x y s t e ro i d dehydrogenase immobi 1 i z e d on g l a s s beads was used t o react
J
5 -3 8-h y dr o x y s t e r o i d s u l p h a t e s w i t h NAD w i t h t h e f o r m a t i o n o f NADH
which was d e t e c t e d by f l u o r e s c e n c e m o n i t o r i n g . The method was s u c c e s s f u l f o r serum a n a l y s i s and good c o r r e l a t i o n between t h e HPLC method and r a d i o immuno assay was found. 5.2.3.4
ACETYLCHOLINE ESTERASE AND CHOLINE O X I D A S E
A method f o r d e t e r m i n a t i o n of c h o l i n e and a c e t y l c h o l i n e i n neuronal
t i s s u e was i n t r o d u c e d by Damsma e t a l . choline
are
ad a pt a t io n,
separated
by
means
of
(ref.
47).
cation
C h o l i n e and a c e t y l -
exchange
HPLC.
W it hout
t h e m o b i l e phase e n t e r s t h e r e a c t o r packed w i t h a c e t y l -
c h o l i n e s t e r a s e and c h o l i n e o x i d a s e co-immobil i z e d on sepharose beads. The latter
enzyme
releases
hydrogen
peroxide
f rom c h o l i n e ,
the
former
co nv ert s a c e t y l c h o l i n e t o c h o l i n e . The hydrogen p e r o x i d e formed i s de t e c t e d e l e c t r o c h e m i c a l l y . A v e r y s i m i l a r method was d e s c r i b e d by Asano e t al.
( r e f . 4 8 ) , t h e d i f f e r e n c e b e i n g t h e use o f g l a s s beads as t h e
su pport f o r i m m o b i l i z i n g t h e enzyme.
Instead o f d e t e c t i n g t h e evolved
hydrogen p e r o x i d e e l e c t r o c h e m i c a l l y , t h e r e i s a l s o t h e p o s s i b i l i t y t o use pe rox y ox alat e chemiluminescence ( r e f . 49). Three pumps were needed t o p r o v i d e f o r t h e o p t i m a l media f o r s e p a r a t i o n , enzymatic r e a c t i o n and chemiluminescence d e t e c t i o n . Only s t a n d a r d m i x t u r e s were analyzed. L a t e r , a more e l e g a n t system w i t h chemiluminescence d e t e c t i o n was p u b l i s h e d ( r e f . 50).
The system has an enzyme r e a c t o r coupled d i r e c t l y t o t h e
analytical
column
and
uses
solid
phase c h e m i s t r i e s
in
the
chemi-
222
luminescence detection step. Determination of chol ine and acetylcholine in urine and in serum (Fig. 5) was reported. Due to the selectivity of the chemiluminescence detection system, the sample pretreatment was simplified. An alternative immobilization method is the use of adsorption on an anion exchange cartridge (refs. 51, 52). This is a very simple way of preparing a reactor; just by injection of an enzyme solution on the cartridge at the proper pH. If low ionic strength mobile phases are used the reactor can be used for ca. 3 weeks before it needs to be reloaded. Problems arise when the reaction product that is to be detected is strongly retained on the ion exchanger. Strong retention o f hydrogen peroxide formed in a reactor containing glucose oxidase immobilized on an ion exchanger was reported by Van Zoonen et al. (ref. 5 3 ) .
Fig. 4
Typical chromatogram of bile acids extracted from normal rat bile. Peaks: 1 = a -muricholic acid; 2 = 0-muricholic acid; 3 = cholic acid; 4 = ursodeoxycholic acid; 5 = hyodeoxycholic acid; 6 = chenodeoxycholic acid; 7 = deoxycholic acid; 8 = 50-androstane-3% 1 1 4 170-trio1 (internal standard); = unknown. Fluorescence detection. Reprinted from ref. 45.
223
@
@
Ch Ch
In
0
I
X
e V
~
0
4
8
t(min)-
Fig. 5
(a) Chromatogram o f a d e p r o t e i n a t e d pooled serum sample, (b) serum sample spiked w i t h 200 pmole o f Choline and A c e t y l c h o l i n e . Chemiluminescence d e t e c t i o n . R e p r i n t e d w i t h permission from r e f . 50.
5.2.3.5
GLUCURONIDASE AND GLYCOSIDASE
End products
from metabolic
pathways
i n plants
and
animals
are
d e t e c t a b l e by means o f immobilized enzyme post-column r e a c t i o n d e t e c t i o n systems. R-glucuronidase from bovine l i v e r was immobilized on agarose and on g l a s s
beads
glycosides w i t h
and was
used
electrochemical
for
post-column
detection o f
cleavage o f the phenolic
phenoiic compounds
formed ( r e f . 54). A f t e r enzymatic cleavage, lower d e t e c t i o n p o t e n t i a l s can be used. Though t h e system can work w i t h a s i n g l e pump, t h e s e n s i t i v i t y can be improved by changing t h e pH p r i o r t o t h e enzymatic
reaction.
Almost t h e same system was used f o r t h e d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f g l u c u r o n i d e conjugates f o r fenoldopam, an a n t i h y p e r t e n s i v e agent i n human plasma and u r i n e ( r e f . 55). The diastereomeric fenoldopam glucuronides a r e cleaved by t h e enzyme and t h e r e s u l t a n t catechol moiety ca be d e t e c t e d e l e c t r o chemically. Chromatograms obtained w i t h t h e system a r e g i v e n i n F i g . 6.
224
The reactor containing the enzyme immobilized on glass beads is coupled directly between the analytical column and the detector. Dalgaard and Brimer (refs. 56,57) developed a method of analysis for xyanogenic glycosides. Glycosidase from Helix pomatia immobilized on glass beads was used in the post-column reactor. After the enzymatic reaction, base i s added and the evolved cyanide is detected amperometrically at a silver electrode. The reactions involved are Enzymatic reaction: R1-
9
9
Glycosidase C-- CN + H 2 0 LR1-- C-CN I b l y OH
+ GlyOH
C1 eavage by base :
9
Rl-C--CN AH
+ OH- > -
R I R ~ C O+ CN- + H 2 0
Anodic reaction : Ag(CN)Z + e-
Ag + 2CN-
A Fig. 6
Chromatograms of plasma extracts from a human subject before (A) and 0.5 h after (B) oral administration of fenoldopam. The concentrations of 1(R)- and 1(S)-fenoldopam-7-0-R-glucuronide are 156 and 160 ng/nl, resprectively. Electrochemical detectiori. Reprinted from ref. 55.
Introduction of a split between the analytical column and the reactor was used to create a longer residence time in the reactor, useful for slower reacting substrates. The method was used for the determination of
225 cyanogenic glycosides i n human u r i n e , serum and i n crude p l a n t t i s s u e e x t r a c t s (see Fig. 7 ) .
C IS
A
I
I
s
1
L
L
J
0 3 6 9 12 15 182; 2Lmin
~
I
I
I
L
'
J
C 3 6 9 12 15 l @ 2 1 ~ 1 1 n
Fig. 7
Chromatograms o f cyanogenic g l y c o s i d e s i n p l a n t e x t r a c t s a f t e r s u i t a b l e d i l u t i o n . (A) S . n i g r a L ( d i l u t i o n f a c t o r 50); (B) P. Lauracerasus L.; (C) T. baccata L. ( d i l u t i o n f a c t o r 50). Amygdalin added as i n t e r n a l standard ( i s ) . Electrochemical d e t e c t i o n . Reprinted from r e f . 57.
5.2.3.6
XANTHINE OXIDASE
The simultaneous d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f hypoxanthine
(Hyp)
and Xanthine
(Xan) i n b i o l o g i c a l f l u i d s i s important f o r v a r i o u s pharmacological and p h y s i o l o g i c a l reasons. An HPLC method w i t h o n - l i n e post-column enzymatic d e r i v a t i z a t i o n was developed ( r e f s . 58, 59). Hyp and Xan were o x i d i z e d by t h e enzyme: x a n t h i ne Xan + H202
Hyp + H20 t O2 oxidase x a n t h i ne Xan t H20 t
O2
u r i c a c i d + H202 oxidase
226 The resulting uric acid was detected by UV-absorption at 290 nm. However this detection mode did not offer the selectivity and sensitivity needed for serum analysis. An alternative was found by using fluorescence monitoring of the product formed in the reaction between H202 and p-hydroxyphenylacetic acid on immobilized peroxidase (ref. 60). A reactor with immobilized catalase was used in the reagent stream prior to the mixing in order to remove H202 and thereby reduce background fluorescence. A chromatogram obtained with this method applied to urine analysis is given in Fig. 8 and demonstrates the high selectivity and sensitivity of this approach. Later, the system was modified to be able to also determine inosine (ref. 61). Four enzyme reactors and three pumps were needed. A schematic diagram of the experimental set-up is given in Fig. 9. In the first reactor inosine is converted into Hyp by immobilized purine nucleoside phosphorylase. A1 1 four enzymes were immobi 1 ized on glass beads. Although the system is claimed to work reliably, the detection approach looks quite complicated for routine analysis. a h
u 0
Fig. 8
10
20
30
mi*
L
I
I
0
10
20
I
I
30
Chromatograms of a urine extract from a normal subject obtained by the present method (see text) ( A ) , when the immobilized xanthine oxidase reactor i s removed from the system ( B ) , and with UV absorbance at 254 nm when all reactors are removed (C). Reprinted from ref. 60.
*in
227
Fig. 9
Flow diagram o f an HPLC system f o r Hyp, Xan and i n o s i n e . (1) Eluent pump, (2) i n j e c t o r , (3) guard column, (4) a n a l y t i c a l column, ( 5 ) immobilized p u r i n e nucleoside phosphorylase r e a c t o r , (6) immobilized xanthine oxidase r e a c t o r , (7) immobilized p e r oxidase r e a c t o r , (8) fluorescence d e t e c t o r , (9) pump f o r pH adaptation, (10) reagent pump, (11) immobilized c a t a l a s e r e a c t o r , (12) i n t e g r a t o r . Reprinted w i t h permission from r e f . 61.
5.2.3.7
L-AMINO A C I D OXIDASE
Another
system
i n which
H202
i s detected v i a
homovanillic
acid
r e a c t i o n on coimmobil i z e d peroxidase was i n t r o d u c e d f o r t h e s e l e c t i v e detection o f
L-amino
acids
(ref.
62).
The immobilized L-amino
acid
oxidase catalyses t h e s t e r e o - s e l e c t i ve deami n a t i o n o f L-amino acids: L-amino a c i d +
O2
+ H20
9
2-keto a c i d + NH3 + H202
0-amino acids do n o t r e a c t a n d ' w i l l n o t be detected.
F l a v i n e adenine
d i n u c l e o t i d e was added i n t h e i m m o b i l i z a t i o n process i n o r d e r t o o b t a i n a more s t a b l e and h i g h l y a c t i v e r e a c t o r . The use of s t e r e o - s e l e c t i v e enzymes i n t h e d e t e c t i o n process offers attractive alternative t o chiral
separations.
Unfortunately,
an
in this
system t h e f a c t t h a t t h e m o b i l e phase should be compatible w i t h t h e enzyme r e a c t o r r e s u l t e d i n i n s u f f i c i e n t r e s o l u t i o n o f some o f t h e amino acids. An a l t e r n a t i v e i n t h e d e t e c t i o n o f amino acids a f t e r t h e enzymatic reaction i s t o monitor the conductivity o f the reactor e f f l u e n t ( r e f . 63). The System works w i t h a s i n g l e pump b u t , compared w i t h fluorescence detection ( r e f . 62), l i m i t s o f detection are i n f e r i o r .
228 5.2.3.8. CHOLESTEROL OXIDASE Cholesterol oxidase immobilized on g l a s s beads was used i n t h e detection
of
cholesterol
and some a u t o - o x i d a t i o n
products
(ref.
64).
Cholesterol has o n l y moderate UV a b s o r p t i o n a t a s h o r t wavelength whereas t h e o x i d a t i o n product formed i n t h e enzymatic r e a c t i o n can be d e t e c t e d w i t h h i g h a b s o r p t i v i t y a t 241 nm. A h i g h flow o f b u f f e r was added t o t h e column e f f l u e n t t o reduce t h e ethanol
content p r i o r t o e n t e r i n g t h e
enzyme r e a c t o r . The optimum d i l u t i o n r a t i o was found by b a l a n c i n g t h e loss o f s e n s i t i v i t y due t o t h e d i l u t i o n versus t h e decreased conversion e f f i c i e n c y w i t h increased ethanol c o n t e n t i n t h e r e a c t o r . I n o r d e r t o reduce t h e flow r a t e through t h e r e a c t o r f o r l o n g e r r e a c t i o n time, p a r t o f t h e f l o w was s p l i t o f f .
UV-monitoring a t 241 nm w i t h t h e r e a c t o r was
found t o y i e l d ca. 4 times h i g h e r s e n s i t i v i t y than a t 211 nm w i t h o u t reactor. 5.2.3.9
ALKALINE PHOSPHATASE
Inorganic phosphate r e s u l t i n g from i n o s i t o l b i s - and t r i p h o s p h a t e s and o t h e r organic phosphates i n a r e a c t o r packed w i t h immobilized a l k a l i n e phosphatase was
detected
by
reacting with
a molybdate s o l u t i o n
2s
described by Meek and N i c o l e t t i ( r e f . 65). The enzyme was immobilized by simple adsorption on a hydrophobic support.
No mobile phase a d a p t a t i o n
between t h e anion exchange a n a l y t i c a l column and t h e enzyme r e a c t o r was needed. The method was demonstrated w i t h t e s t m i x t u r e s b u t t h e authors claim s u f f i c i e n t s e n s i t i v i t y f o r t i s s u e analysis. 5.2.4
CONCLUDING REMARKS
Up t o now,
immobilized enzymes i n post-column
r e a c t o r s a r e almost
uniquely used f o r t h e d e r i v a t i z a t i o n o f m o s t l y p o l a r a n a l y t e s t h a t can be separated on t h e a n a l y t i c a l column w i t h a h i g h l y aqueous mobile phase. I n t h i s way, t h e enzymatic r e a c t i o n can t a k e p l a c e under c o n d i t i o n s t h a t a r e s i m i l a r t o those i n nature. Although immobilized enzymes a r e r e p o r t e d t o be more s t a b l e than enzymes i n s o l u t i o n they can u s u a l l y n o t w i t h s t a n d h i g h m o d i f i e r concentration. On t h e o t h e r hand, t h e r e a r e examples of a c t i v e enzymes i n s o l u t i o n s w i t h a r e l a t i v e l y h i g h c o n t e n t o f o r g a n i c modifier. b i l e acids
I n t h e system described by Okuyama f o r t h e d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f (ref.
41)
a 22% a c e t o n i t r i l e s o l u t i o n f l o w s through t h e
r e a c t o r and a 80% a c e t o n i t r i l e s o l u t i o n was used i n a f l o w i n j e c t i o n a n a l y s i s system w i t h immobilized glucose oxidase ( r e f . 53). Ethanol a t h i g h c o n c e n t r a t i o n (17.3%) was pumped through t h e r e a c t o r w i t h i m m o b i l i z e d c h o l e s t e r o l oxidase ( r e f . 64). However, most a n a l y t i c a l systems
229 w i t h an immobilized enzyme r e a c t o r c o n t a i n o n l y a few p e r cent o f o r g a n i c m o d i f i e r and p r e f e r a b l y a l c o h o l s r a t h e r than a c e t o n i t r i l e s i n c e o t h e r w i s e t h e enzymes l o s e a c t i v i t y i n e i t h e r a r e v e r s i b l e o r i n an i r r e v e r s i b l e The i n f l u e n c e o f v a r i o u s o r g a n i c s o l v e n t s i n d i f f e r e n t concect r a t i o n s on r e a c t i o n k i n e t i c s was i n v e s t i g a t e d by Bowers and Johnson f o r
way.
66). When p-nitrophenylglucuronide i s used as t h e s u b s t r a t e , i n c r e a s i n g t h e methanol content r e s u l t s f i r s t in an increase i n a c t i v i t y up t o ca. 10% methanol f o l l o w e d by a steep decrease whereas w i t h e s t r i o l - 3 - g l u c u r o n i d e as t h e s u b s t r a t e t h e r e i s o n l y a decrease i n r e a c t i o n r a t e upon i n c r e a s i n g t h e methanol content. The r e a c t i o n r a t e on t h e enzyme was a l s o i n v e s t i g a t e d w i t h e t h a n o l , a c e t o n i t r i l e and e t h y l e n e g l y c o l as t h e o r g a n i c c o s o l v e n t (see Fig. 10). The above r e s u l t s reveal t h a t an enzyme can r e a c t i n d i f f e r e n t ways when i t i s brought i n c o n t a c t w i t h non-natural compounds. Also t h e s u b s t r a t e t o be converted i s an important parameter. Other enzymes b e i n g i n v e s t i g a t e d i n 2 s i m i l a r way can show very d i f f e r e n t behaviour. T h i s makes i t imp o s s i b l e t o p r e d i c t whether a c e r t a i n m o b i l e phase needed f o r 2 p a r t i c u l a r separation w i l l be compatible w i t h t h e immobilized enzyme r e a c t i o n . It i s very questionable whether such a p r e d i c t i o n w i l l be p o s s i b l e i n t h e future. For t h e time being, i n each p a r t i c u l a r a n a l y t i c a l system i n v o l v i n g an immobilized enzyme some t r i a l and e r r o r work w i l l be needed. However, t h e compiled a p p l i c a t i o n s above (see Table 111) c l e a r l y r e v e a l t h a t t h e r e are d i s t i n c t p o s s i b i l i t i e s f o r s u c c e s s f u l l y c o u p l i n g HPLC w i t h immobilized enzyme r e a c t o r s and i t i s l i k e l y t h a t more a p p l i c a t i o n s w i l l be published i n t h e coming years. immobilized 8-glucuronidase
(ref.
230
TABLE 111
The use of immobilized enzymes in post-column reactors
Anal yte( s)
Glucose-bphosphate
Enzyds)
Idil i z e d on
Product detected
Detection*
Ref.
gucosed-phosphate
glass
WDH
F
30
dehydrogenase urea
urease
silica
NH
after 3: d e n vat izat ion with OPA reagent
F
39, 40
B i l e acids
3 a-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase
glass
WDH
F
41
81 l e
3 a-hydroxystemid dehydrogenase
glass
NADH, a f t e r
E
42
B i l e acids
3 a-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase
eel l u lose
derivatization with phenazine nrthosulphate NADH
F
43, 44
B i l e acids
3 a-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase
glass
NADH
F
45
-3C-hydroxysteroid sulphates
30,1713-hydroxysteroid dehydrogmase
g Lass
NADH
F
46
Choline and acetylcholine
acetylchol inesterase and choline oxidase
sepharose
H 0
E
47
Choline and acetylcholine
acetylcholinesterase and choline oxidase
glass
no
E
48
Choline and acetylcholine
acetylcholinesterase and choline oxidase
silica
H O
CL
49
Choline and acetylcholine
acetylcholincsterase and choline oxidase
sepharose
CL
50
Choline and acetylcholine
choline oxidase and cholinesterase
H 0
E
51
Acetylcholine
choline oxidase and cholinesterase
i o n exchange
H 0
E
52
0-glucuronidase
agarose, glass phenolic
E
54
E
55
d
acids
5
Phenolic glycosides
ion exchange resin
resin
2 2
2 2
2 2
“O2
2 2
2 2
conrxwnds Glucuronide con] ugates of fenoldupam
R-glucuronidase
glass
fenoldcpm
23 1
TABLE I 1 1
(Continued)
Analytds)
Enzyme($)
Inrnobilized on
Product detected
Detection*
Ref.
Cyanqeni c glycosides
glycosidase
glass, s i l i c a
cyanide, f o r d a f t e r basic cleavage of product from enzyme reaction
E
56, 57
Hypoxanthi ne and xanthine
xanthine oxidase
g Lass
u r i c acid
uv
58, 59
Hypoxanth i ne and xanthine
xanthine oxidase
glass
“24. reaction .after with
F
60
F
61
F
62
p-hydroxypheny 1acetic acid on imnwbi l i z e d w r o x i dase
22: :At tit
Hypoxanthine, xanthine and inos ine
xanthine oxidase and purine nucleoside phosphorylase
glass
L-amino acids
L-amino acid oxidase
glass
L-amino acids
L-amino acid
glass
change i n the i o n i c strenght created by the react im
C
63
Cholesterol and autooxidation products
cholesterol oxidase
glass
oxidized
uv
64
:nositol bis- and triphosphates and other organic phosphates
alkaline phosphatase
UV
65
XF:
E: CL: UV: C:
i h p-hydroxypheny 1acetic acid on imnwbi l i z e d peroxidase H20z, .after reaction with honovanillic acid on coimmobi lized peroxidase
cholesterol
Fluorescence Electrochemical Chemi luminescence U l t r a v i o l e t absorption Conductivity
pheroxyacetyl- Inorganic phoscellulose
phate a f t e r reaction with a mlybdate solution
232
% Acetonitrile
% Ethanol
% Ethylene Glycol
Fig. 10 Normalized reaction rate as a function of vol. percent organic cosolvent. In the methanol panel, curves A and B represent the behaviour observed for immobilized and soluble enzyme, respectively, with p-nitrophenyl glucuronide substrate, while curve C represents the reaction of estriol-3-glucuronide with immobilized enzyme. The acetonitrile and ethanol panels are the results of p-nitrophenyl glucuronide hydrolysis by immobilized 8-glucuronidase. The ethylene glycol panel illustrates the difference observed between the immobilized (A) and soluble (B) enzyme with p-nitrophenyl glucuronide substrate. In all cases the buffer was 0.1 mol/l phosphate, pH. 6.7. Reprinted from ref. 66. 5.3 OTHER SOLID-PHASE CHEMISTRIES 5.3.1 INTRODUCTION In common reaction detection, reagent solution is added to the column effluent by means of a pump as outlined before. An alternative is to introduce the chemicals needed for the derivatization reaction in a heterogeneous way. The reactor, usually a short column packed with active material, can act as a catalyst or provide reagents for the reaction. In the latter case the reactants can come directly in contact with the solid
reagent o r reagent i s d i s s o l v e d g r a d u a l l y b e f o r e t h e r e a c t i o n takes place. The r e a c t o r has t o be recharged p e r i o d i c a l l y . The former approach i s i n t e r e s t i n g s i n c e t h e r e a c t o r keeps i t s a c t i v i t y w i t h o u t t h e need f o r reloading,
provided no c a t a l y s t p o i s o n i n g takes place. The use of
im-
m o b i l i z e d enzyme i n a post-column r e a c t o r as o u t l i n e d i n t h e p r e v i o u s s e c t i o n i s an example o f t h i s approach. T h i s s e c t i o n w i l l discuss t h e o t h e r uses
of
solid-phase
i n the f i e l d o f
chemistries
post-column
reaction detection. 5.3.2
APPLICATIONS OF SOLID-PHASE CHEMISTRIES
5.3.2.1
EARLY WORK
The f i r s t a p p l i c a t i o n s of solid-phase chemistry i n a post-column r e a c t o r were published by Studebaker e t a l . ( r e f s . 67, 68). The method i s designed f o r t h e d e t e c t i o n o f t h i o l s , d i s u l f i d e s and p r o t e o l y t i c enzymes. I n each case, t h e compound of i n t e r e s t releases a d e t e c t a b l e species from t h e packing m a t e r i a l i n a column downstream from t h e a n a l y t i c a l column. The
d e t e c t i o n system
for
disulfides
is
outlined
in
Fig.
11.
The
d i s u l f i d e s r e l e a s e t h i o l s i n t h e upper r e a c t o r and t h e t h i o l s r e l e a s e t h e d e t e c t a b l e species which i s i n i t i a l l y bound t o t h e polymer i n t h e l o w e r r e a c t o r . L a t e r , t h e system was m o d i f i e d by M i l l o t e t a l . ( r e f . 63), t h e main d i f f e r e n c e being t h e use o f s i l i c a i n s t e a d o f a polymer as t h e support i n o r d e r t o minimize band broadening.
5.3.2.2
CATALYTIC SOLID-PHASE CHEMISTRIES
The concept o f s o l id-phase c a t a l y s i s i n post-column d e r i v a t i z a t i o n was f i r s t introduced f o r the determination
o f non-reducing
carbohydrates
( r e f s . 29, 79, 71). Several s t r o n g l y a c i d i c c a t i o n exchangers were used as t h e c a t a l y s t f o r conversion o f t h e non-reducing carbohydrates
into
reducing
Best
carbohydrates which
a r e d e t e c t a b l e by
r e s u l t s were obtained u s i n g 4% c r o s s - l i n k e d r e a c t o r (6 cm i n length)
several
polystyrene
was operated a t 85
OC
means. resins.
t o ascertain
The 10G%
conversion. The separations were c a r r i e d o u t a t a sulphonic a c i d t y p e 2+ (Ca ) c a t i o n exchanger w i t h water as t h e mobile phase. A thorough i n v e s t i g a t i o n o f band broadening i n t h i s r e a c t o r t y p e was p u b l i s h e d by Nondek e t a l .
( r e f . 35). Apart from t h e band broadening t h a t occurs i n
any packed bed, a d d i t i o n a l band broadening i s observed when r e a c t a n t and product have d i f f e r e n t r e t e n t i o n i n t h e r e a c t o r column. A mathematical model was proposed t h e v a l i d i t y o f which was t e s t e d w i t h t h e decocp o s i t i o n o f diacetone alcohol on alumina and t h e c a t a l y t i c h y d r o l y s i s of
1-naphthyl-N-methylcarbamate/Carbaryl) on a s t r o n g l y b a s i c anion ex-
234
changer. Later, the reactivity of other N-methylcarbamates on the ion exchange resin and the applicability t o residue analysis were investigated (refs. 36, 72). Upon decomposition of the N-methylcarbamates, methylamine is splitt off which, after labelling with o-phthalaldehyde (OPA), i s detected by fluorescence monitoring. The reactor is operated at high temperature (100 OC or slightly above) in order t o keep reacticjn band broadening low and to obtain high conversion. The method was applied to the analysis of river water samples (ref. 36) and, after having been combined with on-1ine preconcentration and clean-up, to the analysis of heavily polluted water samples with detection limits well below 1 ppb (ref. 72). FROM ANALYTICPL COLUMN
RSSR'
j
FLOW
R'SSD
OPTICAL DETECTOR
Fig. 11 Diagram of the solid-phase apparatus for detection of disulfides. RSSR' represents a disulfide in the eluate. P-S is a polymer with a bound thiol, P-SSD is a polymer with a bound detectable species. Reprinted from ref. 68.
235
5 3 - 2 a3 NON-CATALYTIC SOLID-PHASE CHEMISTRIES The use o f n o n - c a t a l y t i c solid-phase c h e m i s t r i e s has r e s u l t e d i n d i f f e r e n t approaches i n t h e f i e l d o f post-column r e a c t i o n d e t e c t i o n . The e a r l i e s t p u b l i c a t i o n d e a l t w i t h t h e use o f a column packed w i t h z i n c powder ( r e f . 73). By pumping an a c i d i c m o b i l e phase through t h i s column, hydrogen i n s t a t u nascendi i s produced t h a t s p l i t s o f f i o d i n e from i o d i n a t e d thyronines. The i o d i d e i o n was detected by means o f a c a t a l y t i c p r i n c i p l e based on t h e i o d i d e - c a t a l y z e d r e a c t i o n o f chloramine-T and N , N'-tetramethyldiaminodiphenylmethane i n an a i r segmented t u b u l a r r e a c t o r . Chromatograms o f plasma e x t r a c t s a r e g i v e n i n Fig. 12. The z i n c column should be repacked d a i l y . Another i n t e r e s t i n g use o f a r e a c t o r packed w i t h z i n c was i n t r o d u c e d by Sigwardson and B i r k s ( r e f . 74). N i t r o p o l y aromatic hydrocarbons (nitro-PAHs) were on-1 i n e reduced t o t h e c o r r e s ponding amino-PAHs t h a t c o u l d be detected w i t h h i g h s e n s i t i v i t y u s i n g peroxyoxalate chemi luminescence d e t e c t i o n . The r e a c t o r can be placed e i t h e r b e f o r e o r a f t e r t h e a n a l y t i c a l column so t h a t t h e a n a l y t e s e l u t e e i t h e r as t h e amino-PAHs o r as t h e nitro-PAHs. useful f o r i d e n t i f i c a t i o n . carbon b l a c k e x t r a c t s .
This was found t o be
The method was a p p l i e d t o t h e a n a l y s i s of
3
-+---+ 0 5 ~
rnin
4
t
+
0
5
10
mm
F i g . 12 Chromatographic d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f i o d i n a t e d t h y r o n i n e s w i t h c a t a l y t i c d e t e c t i o n . Column, C-18; mobile phase, methanol-water (67:33) p l u s 0.05% o f methanesulphonic acid; f l o w - r a t e , 0.5 m l / min; d e t e c t i o n wavelength, 600 nm. (A) Determination o f t o t a l T ( t h y r o x i n e ) . I n j e c t i o n volume, 50 m l o f e t h a n o l i c serum efttract. 1, Free h a l i d e ions; 2, 10 ng o f T ( t r i - i o d o t h y r o n i n e , i n t e r n a l standard); 3,8 ng o f T (6) S t e r e a - s p e c i f i c d e t e r m i n a t i o n L-T i n serum a f t e r d e h v a t i z a t i o n . I n j e c t i o n volume, 30 m l . 1, Fr%e h a l i d e ions; 2, 10 ng o f T ( i n t e r n a l standard); 3 and 4, n o t i d e n t i f i e d ; 5, L-Leu-L-T co?respondin t o 7 ng of L-T ) ; 6, L-Leu-D-T4 (corresponding 7 ng o f D - T j . R e p r i n t e d f r o 4 r e f . 73.
.
td
236 Krull et al. (refs. 75-78) described various reactors containing sol id-supported reagents for on-1 ine reduction and oxidation. Most of the applications, e.g., the on-line reduction o f aldehydes to the corresponding alcohols using solid supported borohydride (ref. 75) and the oxidation of primary and secondary alcohols, aldehydes and ketones using an anion exchanger in the permanganate form (ref. 78), deal with precolumn derivatization using difference chromatography to study the extent of reaction. This i s mainly done for identification purpose since no significant changes in detector response are reported which limits, though possible and described (e.9. for the post-column reduction of a variety of aldehydes, ketones and acid chlorides on solid-supported borohydride in normal-phase HPLC) (ref. 76), the applicability in post-column derivatization. All reactors described by Krull et al. can be used for hundreds o f analyses before they loose activity. Solid-phase reactors containing either lead dioxide or manganese dioxide precipitated on silica were compared for use in the pcst-column oxidation of catecholamines to the respective adrenochromes (ref. 79). This was followed by homogeneous reduction to the fluorescent trihydroxyindoles. The two reactors yield similar results in all respects and allow for a simpler, more economic and more reliable post-column reaction system as compared to an all homogeneous approach. The number of analyses possible before depletion of the reagent occurs is more than 300 for both reactors. The same lead dioxide reactor was used to oxidize lower oxidation state chromium ions to chromate which is detected by complexation with 1,5-diphenylcarbazide (ref. 80). As applications, wastewaters and samples from a steel company were analyzed. A solid-phase reactor used in a sulphate selective post-column derivatization system was developed for the analysis of wastewaters of the potato starch industry (ref. 81). The solid-phase reactor is packed with a mixture of silica and barium chloranilate. The solubility of barium sulphate is less than that of barium chloranilate. The sulphate eluting from the ion exchange analytical column will precipitate as barium sulphate and an equivalent amount of the highly coloured acid chloranilate ion is released:
-:OS
+
BaC6C1204 + Ht
+ ByS04 J+ HC6C1204-
Irth et al. (ref. 82) developed a post-column solid-phase derivatization for the selective detection of thiram and disulfiram. These
23 7 t h i u r a m d i s u l f i d e s undergo c o m p l e x a t i o n i n a v e r y s h o r t ( 4 mm i n l e n g t h ) c a r t r i d g e - t y p e r e a c t o r packed w i t h f i n e l y d i v i d e d m e t a l l i c copper t o form a c oloure d copper complex w i t h an a b s o r p t i o n maximum a t 435 nm. The
post-column
complexation
enhances
the
selectivity
of
the
a n a l y t i c a l method w i t h almost t h e same s e n s i t i v i t y as UV d e t e c t i o n a t 254 nm. The post-column r e a c t o r was found t o cause o n l y l i t t l e a d d i t i o n a l band broadening s i n c e no r e t e n t i o n t a k e s p l a c e and t h e r e a c t o r i s s h o r t . The method was demonstrated w i t h t h e d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f t h i r a m i n surf ace wat e r and w i t h t h e d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f d i s u l f i r a m i n u r i n e ( F i g . s h o r t precolumn was used f o r o n - l i n e t r a c e enrichment.
13).
A
When nanogram
amounts o f a n a l y t e a r e i n j e c t e d i n t h e a n a l y t i c a l system,
t h e copper
r e a c t o r can be used f o r more t h a n 200 analyses. Another use o f s o l i d - s u p p o r t e d r e a g e n t was i n t r o d u c e d by Jansen e t a l . ( r e f . 83). The a n a l y t i c a l system c o n t a i n s an anion exchange column i n t h e hydroxy form i n s e r t e d para1 l e l t o t h e i n j e c t o r and a n a l y t i c a l column ( F i g . 14). One p a r t o f t h e a c e t a t e - c o n t a i n i n g m o b i l e phase f l o w s t h r o u g h t h e i n j e c t i o n v a l v e and a n a l y t i c a l column t o achieve t h e s e p a r a t i o n , t h e o t h e r p a r t f l o w s through t h e anion-exchange column where t h e a c e t a t e i o n causes t h e r e l e a s e o f i o n exchanger-bound hydroxide i o n s . F i n a l l y , t h e a l k a l i n e stream from t h e anion-exchange column i s recombined w i t h t h e a n a l y t i c a l column e f f l u e n t . The r e s u l t a n t a l k a l i n e d e t e c t i o n medium i s fav oura ble f o r t h e UV d e t e c t i o n o f b a r b i t u r a t e s a t 254 nm. O nly one pump i s needed f o r t h e s e p a r a t i o n and t h e post-column pH m o d i f i c a t i o n .
A
low-
c o s t l a r g e p a r t i c l e i o n exchanger was used s i n c e t h e anion exchange column does n o t c o n t r i b u t e t o band broadening. Both t h e d e t e r m i n a t i o n c f b a r b i t u r a t e s i n u r i n e and i n plasma were shown. The anion-exchange c o l m n should be regenerated a f t e r a p p r o x i m a t e l y 17 hours use. B a s i c a l l y t h e same a n a l y t i c a l system was adapted f o r a f l a t o x i n d e t e r m i n a t i o n ( r e f . 8 4 ) . Now, t h e p a r a l l e l column was packed w i t h s o l i d i o d i n e and a k n i t t e d open t u b u l a r r e a c t o r was mounted between t h e m i x i n g T -piece and t h e flu o re s c enc e d e t e c t o r . m o b i l e phase;
Iodine i s only p a r t l y soluble
i n t h e aqueous
t h e r e f o r e , t h e p a r a l l e l column can be used i n t h e ana-
l y t i c a l system f o r t h e d e l i v e r y o f a s a t u r a t e d i o d i n e s o l u t i o n o v e r l o n g p e r i o d s of t i m e b e f o r e r e f i l l i n g i s necessary. For optimum response,
a
s p l i t t i n g r a t i o of ca. 30 t o 1 was used. I o d i n e attachment t o t h e double bond of a f l a t o x i n B1 and G I makes them about as f l u o r e s c e n t as a f l a t o x i n B2 and G2. As i n t h e system w i t h t h e p a r a l l e l i o n exchanger, o n l y one
h i g h - q u a l i t y pump i s needed making l o w - c o s t post-column d e r i v a t i z a t i o n p o s s i b l e w i t h o u t t h e need f o r a d a i l y p r e p a r a t i o n o f t h e i o d i n e s o l u t i o n as was necessary b e f o r e ( r e f . 11). The method was s u c c e s s f u l l y a p p i i e d t o
238
the analysis of peanut butter extracts as shown in Fig. 15. The parallel column approach was also found to be applicable in chemiluminescence detection (ref. 85). Bis-2,4,6-trichlorophenyloxalate (TCPO) is added from a solid reagent bed and the fluorophore is immobilized on glass beads packed in a flow cell. Hydrogen peroxide generated photochemically by quinone analytes is measured.
6
4
2
Time (min)
0
t-
Fig. 13 Determination of disulfiram in urine. HPLC conditions: analytical column packed with 5 m Hypersil ODs; pre-columc packed with 5-m LiChrosorb RP-18; eluent, acetonitrile-aqueous acetate buffer (10 mM, pH 5.0) (65:35); detection wavelength, 435 nm (0.02 a.u.f.s.). Pre-concentration of 1.0 ml of urine spiked with 87 ppb of disulfiram (sample stabilized with 10 mM EDTA-citrate). Reprinted from ref 82.
239
flow rcstr
anion exch. COI
splittingT
mixing T
uv flow rcstr
in) valve
anal
COI
Fi g. 14 Experimental s e t - u p o f a p a r a l l e l column d e r i v a t i z a t i o n system. R e p r i n t e d from r e f . 83.
F ig. 15
Chromatogram o f an e x t r a c t o f eanut b u t t e r s p i k e d (8 p p b ) , AfG (8ppb), A f B ( 4 ppb! and AfG 9 4 ppb);
AfBl
with
---_--- Chromatogkam o f an u n s t i k e d peanut b u t t & e x t r a c t . C ondit io n s : a n a l y t i c a l column packed w i t h 5-p LiChrosorb RP-18, p a r a l l e l column packed w i t h s o l i d i o d i n e , k n i t t e d open t u b u l a r reactor, fluorescence detection. Reprinted w i t h permission from r e f . 84.
240 Two systems w i t h TCPO a d d i t i o n from a s o l i d reagent bed, a dual pump design (Fig. 16a) and a p a r a l l e l column design ( F i g . 16b), r e s p e c t i v e l y , were compared and advantages and disadvantages were discussed. The dual pump has t h e advantage o f more f l e x i b l e f l o w r a t e r e g u l a t i o n b u t t h e s p l i t - f l o w has t h e advantage o f s i m p l i c i t y and economics. Much research i n post-column r e a c t i o n d e t e c t i o n has as goal t o render t h e equipment s i m p l e r and l e s s c o s t l y .
The development o f immobilized
enzyme r e a c t o r s and r e a c t o r s based on solid-phase c h e m i s t r i e s as o u t l i n e d i n t h e previous and i n t h i s s e c t i o n a r e c l e a r examples o f t h i s t r e n d since a l l
these systems c o n t a i n
a t l e a s t one pump l e s s than t h e i r
c l a s s i c a l homogeneous r e a c t i o n analogues o r p e r m i t r e a c t i o n types which a r e impossible by conventional means.
F u r t h e r approaches f o r pumpless
r e a c t i o n u n i t s are discussed i n t h e f o l l o w i n g s e c t i o n s .
b
F i g . 16 Schematic diagram o f t h e dual-pump system (a) and t h e s p l i t - f l o w system (b) f o r TCPO a d d i t i o n . Reprinted w i t h permission from r e f . 85.
241 5.4
THE USE OF ELECTROCHEMICAL REAGENT PRODUCTION
E lec t roc hemica l techniques can be used f o r on-1 i n e p r o d u c t i o n o f t h e reagent. One example i s t h e use of copper e l e c t r o d e s o r o t h e r s u i t a b l e metal e l e c t r o d e s a t which metal i o n s a r e generated. Complexing a n a l y t e s (amino a c i d s , d i c a r b o x y l i c a c i d s ) can t h e n be d e t e c t e d by amperometric techniques ( r e f s . 86, 8 7 ) . Another example o f o n - l i n e e l e c t r o c h e m i c a l reagent p r o d u c t i o n i s t h e use o f a m i c r o c o u l o m e t r i c p r o d u c t i o n c e l l downstream from t h e a n a l y t i c a l column i n which t h e p r o d u c t i o n o f bromine o r i o d i n e f ro m K B r o r K I d i s s o l v e d i n t h e m o b i l e phase i s e f f e c t e d . T h i s technique, i n t r o d u c e d by K i n g and K i s s i n g e r ( r e f . 88), i n v o l v e s r e a c t i o n of
bromine o r i o d i n e w i t h s u i t a b l e groups o f compounds such as un-
saturated
organics,
ganosulphur
phenolics,
methoxysubstituted
compounds and t h e decrease
det e c t e d a mp ero m e t r i c a l l y ( r e f s .
89,
90).
in
aromat ics
and
reagent c o n c e n t r a t i o n
A schematic
oris
diagram o f t h e
post-column system i s shown i n F i g . 17 and an a p p l i c a t i o n t o t h e d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f a m p i c i l l i n i n plasma i s g i v e n i n F ig. 18. The bromine o r i o d i n e produced i n t h e m i c r o c o u l o m e t r i c c e l l c o u l d a l s o be used f o r t h e d i r e c t oxidation o f the analyte t o y i e l d a fluorescent derivative. This p r i n c i p l e was demonstrated w i t h t h e d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f t h i o r i d a z i n e
in
plasma a f t e r o x i d a t i o n w i t h bromine ( r e f . 91) and w i t h t h e d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f a f l a t o x i n s i n c a t t l e f e e d f o l l o w i n g i o d i n e a d d i t i o n ( r e f . 9 2 ) . A more
d e t a i l e d d i s c u s s i o n on e l e c t r o c h e m i c a l r e a c t i o n t echniques f o r d e t e c t i o n i n HPLC can be found i n r e f . 93.
d--J; column
I
L _ - _ - _ - _ - - - - - ----J I production1 reaction detector cell COll waste
;
F i g . 17 Scheme o f t h e o n - l i n e r e a g e n t p r o d u c t i o n system: (A) a n a l y t e , (6) reagent (bromine), (R) p r e c u r s o r o f t h e reagent (bromide). R e p r i n t e d from r e f . 89.
242
\
u \ 0
F
. 18
5
2
10
L[min]
0
5 -+
10
15
t[min]
Chromatograms obtained with deproteinized plasma; (a) blank plasma; (b) plasma spiked with ampicillin (8 N/ml). Column: LiChrosorb RP-18; reagent production system as in Fig. 17. Reprinted with permission from ref. 90.
The extension of this principle to other reagents and particularly reactions involving noxious or unstable reagents offers interesting possibilities for the future.
5.5
THE USE OF PHOTOCHEMICAL AND THERMO INITIATED REACTIONS Instead of reagents, it is also possible to "pump" photons into a detection system and to explore the resulting reactions for detection purpose. Generally, some piece of UV-transparent tubing, usually teflon, is coiled or knitted (ref. 94) around a lamp. Also in this approach, a chemical modification of the analytes is achieved without having to use an additional reagent pump. Examples of photochemical derivatization have been discussed elsewhere (refs. 8, 95). In general, photochemical derivatization is not easy to control and the reaction products are not fully known. However, if the irradiation results in an increase in sensitivity and/or selectivity, this is not a drawback for use in a post-column system. In the more recent literature examples of better controlled photochemical derivatizations can be found. One way of improving the situation is to add small amounts of reagent to the mobile
243
phase to be able to conduct the reaction in the desired direction. An example is the photochemical reduction of Vitamin K1 (ref. 96). To ensure the conversion into the desired hydroquinone, a small amount of ascorbic acid is added t o the mobile phase and oxygen is carefully removed. The use of sensitizers is another means to expand the usefulness of photochemical reactions. A quinone can be used as sensitizer for the photochemical detection of reducing species (sugars, alcohols, aldehydes, etc.) (ref. 97). The resulting hydroquinone is detected fluorimetrically. Verbeke and Vanhee (ref. 98) used photochemical derivatization for the selective determination of diethylstilbestrol (DES). The photochemical reaction was followed by on-line oxidation to highly fluorescent products. The experimental set-up used is shown in Fig. 19. The metncd was successfully applied to the selective quantitation of DES residues a t the 1 ppb level in extracts of urine and animal tissues (Fig. 20).
lrom HPLC
A
~
”,
--C
-r ’
d
e
__
I
PHOTO REACTOR
I
r\
methanol-water
n-heplane phosphate buffer bisulphite HCI NaOH
:1
-
HEAT BATH 170C) I
COOL
FLUORIMETER
BATH
(15
I
CI k
I
rn
Fig. 19 Post-column reactor arrangement for the detection of DES: (1) methanol-water (65:35) (0.70 ml/min); (2) n-heptane (0.4 ml/min): (3) phosphate buffer, 0.02 M (0.1 ml/min); (4) hydrogen sulphite solution, 0.05 M (0.1 ml/min); ( 5 ) 3.7 HC1 (0.2 ml/min); (6) 4.8 M NaOH (0.2 ml/min: (7) organic solvent from phase separator (0.9 ml/min). Reprinted from ref. 98.
244
OES
I L
I
D
10
m
30
-
I 40
TWEIMIN'
Fig. 20 (a) Chromatogram of a DES-negative urine extract. (b) Chromatogram of an urine extract containing 1 ppb of DES. For details see Fig. 19. Reprinted from ref. 98.
An interesting extension of the use of photochemical techniques in HPLC was developed by De Ruiter et al. (ref. 99). Dansylated chlorophenols were, after separation on a RP-column, irradiated to knock off the dansyl group. This resulted in enhanced fluorescence since now, the fluorescence is not reduced anymore by inductive and intramolecular heavy atom effects originating from the chlorophenols. After sol id-phas? extraction and precolumn dansylation, chlorophenols can be determined at the ca. 100 ppt level in river water samples. Post-column thermolysis followed by photolysis and fluorescence detection was introduced for the trace-level determination o f ciprofloxacin and its metabolites in urine, serum/plasma, bile, faeces and tissue (ref. 100). Both the thermolysis step and the photolysis wer? optimized yielding fluorescence gain factors up t o 130 as compared t o
245 direct
fluorescence
detection,
i.e.,
without
the
thermolysis
and
p h o t o l y s i s step. Reaction times were very s h o r t , 2 s f o r t h e r m o l y s i s and 0.6 s f o r p h o t o l y s i s . Using t h i s d e t e c t i o n mode, o n l y minimal sample p r e p a r a t i o n , e x t r a c t i o n and/or d i l u t i o n , i s r e q u i r e d . Here, i t i s i n t e r e s t i n g t o mention t h a t another example o f t h e use of a temperature jump a f t e r t h e s e p a r a t i o n was r e p o r t e d by LePage and Rocha ( r e f . 101). They used t h e n i n h y d r i n r e a c t i o n f o r amino a c i d s and o t h e r amines which i s k i n e t i c a l l y slow a t ambient temperature. The reagent was added t o t h e mobile phase w i t h no r e a c t i o n t a k i n g p l a c e d u r i n g t h e separation. By a p p l y i n g a temperature jump a f t e r t h e column r e a c t i o n w i l l proceed a t a reasonable r a t e w i t h o u t n e c e s s i t a t i n g post-column a d d i t i o n o f reagents.
5.6
MINIATURIZATION
I n t h e p a s t decade, an i n c r e a s i n g i n t e r e s t has developed i n t h e use of narrow-bore separation columns (< 2 mm I.D.)
i n HPLC as evidenced by
several review p u b l i c a t i o n s and books i n t h i s f i e l d ( r e f s . 102
-
lG7).
These columns r e q u i r e a much lower v o l u m e t r i c f l o w r a t e than c o n v e n t i o n z l HPLC columns and savings i n s o l v e n t s , reagents and packing m a t e r i a l a r e obvious. I n o r d e r t o keep t h e chromatographic i n t e g r i t y o f t h e system, t h e sample volume must a l s o be reduced i n comparison t o conventional s c a l e HPLC, which can be an advantage when t h e sample volume i s l i m i t e d . Also t h e volumes o f t h e peaks e l u t i n g from a narrow-bore column a r e s m a l l e r than i n t h e case o f conventional s c a l e HPLC. T h i s r e s u l t s i n t h e necessity
t o use low volume
detectors.
When a post-column
reaction
d e t e c t i o n system i s used i n c o n j u c t i o n w i t h narrow-bore HPLC, a c a r e f u l design i s needed i n o r d e r t o a v o i d excessive band broadening and l o s s i n r e s o l u t i o n . Special a t t e n t i o n should be g i v e n t o t h e m i x i n g u n i t s used f o r t h e reagent a d d i t i o n and t o connections. These d i f f i c u l t i e s r e s u l t e d in
only
a
few
applications
of
post-column
reaction
detection
in
m i n i a t u r i z e d HPLC described i n t h e l i t e r a t u r e up t o now. H i r o s e e t a l , ( r e f , 108) were t h e f i r s t t o d e s c r i b e a t u b u l a r post-column r e a c t o r coupled t o a 0.5 mm I.D. a n a l y t i c a l column f o r r h e determination o f r a r e e a r t h metals by a c o l o u r r e a c t i o n w i t h x y l e n o i orange. Today t h i s post-column system can be considered as an o b s o l e t e device s i n c e a several-meter-long
tubular reactor o f r e l a t i v e l y large i n n e r diameter and a wide-bore m i x i n g u n i t were used. U n f o r t u n a t e l y , no
data on band broadening and d e t e c t i o n l i m i t s were given. Kucera and Umagat ( r e f . 109) described t u b u l a r post-column r e a c t o r s
246 f o r the
f a s t d e r i v a t i z a t i o n of
p r i m a r y amines w i t h o-phthalaldehyde
(OPA). A 30 cm x 1 mm I.D. a n a l y t i c a l column was used. The i n f l u e n c e s of t h e m i x i n g u n i t design and t h e pumps on m i x i n g n o i s e were c a r e f u l l y examined. The c o n t r i b u t i o n t o t o t a l band broadening o r g i n a t i n g from t h e t u b u l a r r e a c t o r was i n v e s t i g a t e d f o r d i f f e r e n t r e a c t o r l e n g t h s and i n n e r diameters. The authors' recommendation was t o zigzag t h e r e a c t o r t u b i n g i n o r d e r t o enhance r a d i a l m i x i n g due t o t h e secondary f l o w phenolnenon r e s u l t i n g i n lower band broadening.
K n i t t i n g t h e r e a c t o r as proposed by
Engelhardt and Neue ( r e f . 4) w i l l a l s o be very u s e f u l f o r t h i s purpose. The a n a l y s i s o f a m i x t u r e of primary amino a c i d s and a m i x t u r e of homologous n-alkylamines were presented as a p p l i c a t i o n s . Apffel e t a l . (ref.
110) used t h e same OPA r e a c t i o n i n t h e e v a l u a t i o n
of t u b u l a r and packed bed r e a c t o r s f o r narrow-bore HPLC from b o t h a t h e o r e t i c a l and an experimental p o i n t o f view. I n t h e model system, catecholamines were separated on a 1 mm I.D. a n a l y t i c a l column f o l l o w e d by OPA d e r i v a t i z a t i o n and fluorescence d e t e c t i o n . I n comparison w i t h t h e measurement o f t h e n a t u r a l fluorescence, t h e d e t e c t i o n l i m i t s were lowered by more than an o r d e r o f magnitude when u s i n g t h e post-column d e r i v a t i z a t i o n . The band broadening caused by t h e post-column system was acceptable b u t c o u l d have been
improved w i t h a b e t t e r m i x i n g u n i t .
Because o f t h e r e l a t i v e l y h i g h band spreading i n t h e m i x i n g u n i t , a Valco T-piece, no d i f f e r e n c e i n performance between a system w i t h a packed bed r e a c t o r ( p a r t i c l e s i z e 5 pn) and one w i t h a 100 pn I.D. t u b u l a r r e a c t o r could be found. Takeuchi e t a1 ( r e f . 111) described a solid-phase r e a c t o r c o n t a i n i n g 3mhydroxysteroid
dehydrogenase
immobilized
on
glass
beads
d e t e c t i o n o f b i l e acids a f t e r s e p a r a t i o n on a 0.26 mm I.D. column.
for
the
analytical
The 3mhydroxy group i n each b i l e a c i d was o x i d i z e d i n t h e
enzymatic r e a c t i o n , w h i l e NAD was reduced t o NADH which was subjected t o fluorescence monitoring.
Two experimental set-ups were compared ( f i g .
21). A d d i t i o n o f NAD t o t h e m o b i l e phase p r i o r t o t h e column avoided t h e need o f post-column baseline s t a b i l i t y .
reagent a d d i t i o n
and t h i s was found t o
improve
A chromatogram obtained w i t h t h e l a t t e r system i s
shown i n F i g . 22. Band broadening i n t h e immobilized enzyme r e a c t o r was relatively
large
because
sufficiently
small
glass
beads
were
not
a v a i l a b l e . The same equipment was used i n combination w i t h an o f f - l i n e t r a c e enrichment procedure f o r t h e d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f b i l e a c i d s i n s e w n ( r e f . 112).
247
rl 7
5
6
F i g . 21 Schematic diagrams o f t h e systems (see t e x t ) : (A) post-column m i x i n g system; (B) pre-mixing system. 1 = Pump (Micro Feeder); 2 = g r a d i e n t equipment; 3 = m i c r o v a l v e i n j e c t o r ; 4 = guard column; 5 = separation column; 6 = T-piece; 7 = immobilized enzyme column; 8 = spectrophotofluorimeter. R e p r i n t e d from r e f . 111. A d d i t i o n a l examples o f t h e use o f a solid-phase r e a c t o r i n post-column systems f o r narrow-bore HPLC can be found i n r e f . described
for
the determination o f
113. A system was pesticides v i a
N-methylcarbamate
separation on a 180 mm x 1.0 mm I . D . reversed-phase column, h y d r o l y s i s on an anion exchange r e s i n i n a solid-phase r e a c t o r k e p t a t 90 OC, and subsequent d e r i v a t i z a t i o n of t h e l i b e r a t e d methylamine w i t h I P A i n a v e r y s h o r t open t u b u l a r r e a c t o r ( F i g . 23). S i m i l a r equipment has been used f o r t h e r a p i d d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f urea and ammonia v i a t h e i r s e p a r a t i o n on a 40
mm x 1.0 mm I . D .
column, h y d r o l y s i s o f t h e urea on immobilized urease,
and f o l l o w e d by d e r i v a t i z a t i o n w i t h OPA i n a c o i l e d open t u b u l a r r e a c t o r . In this
system,
the analytical
column and t h e r e a c t o r were coupled
w i t h o u t connecting c a p i l l a r y ( F i g . 24). T h i s e l i m i n a t i o n o f a p o s s i b l e source o f band broadening
i s recommended i f column and r e a c t o r
are
operated a t t h e same temperature. Band broadening i n t h e m i x i n g u n i t c o u l d be kept s u f f i c i e n t y low by a s p e c i a l design (Fig. 25). This m i x i n g u n i t was constructed from two blocks; t h e upper one (B) contained t h e entrance and e x i t c a p i l l a r i e s (E)
t h a t ended i n a small groove
(D)
machined i n a PTFE p l a t e (C), supported by t h e lower p a r t (A). The same m i x i n g u n i t was used i n a m i n i a t u r i z e d v e r s i o n o f t h e s p l i t - f l o w
248 a n a l y t i c a l system f o r b a r b i t u r a t e s ( r e f . 83). A c r i t i c a l comparison between t h e conventional s c a l e (3 mm I.D. column) and t h e narrow bore (1 mm 1.13. column) system i s made i n r e f . 83. I t was found t h a t t h e concen-
t r a t i o n s e n s i t i v i t y i n narrow-bore system was lower than i n t h e conv e n t i o n a l s c a l e system. Although t h e peak broadening i n volume u n i t s i s l e s s i n t h e narrow-bore system, r e s u l t i n g i n more concentrated peaks i n comparison t o peaks e l u t i n g from t h e conventional s c a l e column i f t h e same mass i s i n j e c t e d on t h e column, t h i s does n o t y i e l d more d e t e c t o r s i g n a l s i n c e t h e peak i s now d e t e c t e d i n a c e l l w i t h a lower o p t i c a l p a t h length. Therefore, equal masses p u t on t h e two column types w i l l y i e l d roughly equal d e t e c t o r s i g n a l s . Since t h e mass a p p l i e d t o t h e narrow-bore column i s i n j e c t e d i n a low volume; t h e c o n c e n t r a t i o n s e n s i t i v i t y i s l e s s . A/B
100/0
5(3/50
0/100
I
0
1
2
T I 11. E l h \
Fig. 22
Separation o f b i l e a c i d s (each around 5 ng) by t h e p r e m i x i n g system Column; B i l e p a k , 250 x 0.26 mm 1.0. M o b i l e phase: g r a d i e n t p r o f i l e as i n d i c a t e d o f a c e t o n i t r i l e - 3 0 mM (A) o r 10 mM (B) potassium dihydrogen orthophosphate (pH 7.8) 10 mM potassium dihydrogen orthophosphate (pH 7.0) c o n t a i n i n g 6 mM NAD, 0.05% 2-mercaptoethanol and 1 mM EDTA, i n t h e p r o p o r t i o n s (A) 18:52:30 and (6) 35:35:30, each c o n t a i n i n g 0.1% ammonium carbonate. Samples: 1 = ursodeoxycholic a c i d , 2 = c h o l i c a c i d , 3 = g l y c o u r sodeoxycholic a c i d , 4 = g l y c o c h o l i c acid, 5 = tauroursodeoxycholic a c i d , 6 = t a u r o c h o l i c acid, 7 = chenodeoxycholic a c i d , 8 = deoxycholic a c i d , 9 = glycochenodeoxycholic a c i d , 10 = glycodeoxycholic a c i d , 11 = taurochenodeoxycholic a c i d , 12 = taurodeoxycholic a c i d , 13 = l i t h o c h o l i c a c i d , 14 = g l y c o l i t h o c h o l i c acid, 15 = t a u r o l i t h o c h o l i c a c i d . Wavelength o f detect i o n : e x c i t a t i o n 365 nm, emission 470 nm. Reprinted from r e f . 111.
-
249
1
2
aJ
m c 0 Cl m
f
L
0
3
4 4
aJ '13
L I
I
0
I
2 4
I
6
I
I
1
1
8101214
time(min1
F i g . 23
Chromatogram o f N-methylcarbamate p e s t i c i d e s . 1 = Methomyl, 2 = a l d i c a r b , 3 = propoxur, ca. 25 ng each; 180 mm x 1.0 mm I . D . column packed w i t h 5 Spherisorb ODs-2; 40 mm x 1.0 mn I.D. solid-phase r e a c t o r packed w i t h a s t r o n g anion exchange r e s i n ; 170 mm x 0.12 mm I . D . s t r a i g h t open-tubular r e a c t o r f o r OPAr e a c t i o n . Flow r a t e o f e l u e n t : 35.7 pl/min; f l o w r a t e o f OPA-reagent: 7.5 pl/min; fluorescence d e t e c t i o n . Reprinted w i t h permission from r e f . 113. /'I16
II
valco,connector\
I
I
flow direction-
F i g . 24
Construction o f t h e combination o f s h o r t a n a l y t i c a l column and urease-SPR (both 40 mm x 1.0 mm I.D., 1/16" O.D.) Reprinted w i t h permission from r e f . 113.
250
D
Fig. 25 Construction of the mixing unit. For explanation, see ex .. Reprinted with permission from ref. 113. miniaturized HPLC system with a tubular reactor was used with chemiluminescence detection for dansylated amino acids (ref. 114). The analytes are separated on a 250 mm x 1.0 mm I.D. column. The reagent, 1 mM bis(2,4,6-trichlorophenyl) oxalate in ethyl acetate-0.1 M H202 in acetone (1:3 v/v), was added at a relatively high flow-rate, thereby also working as a make-up flow. For this reason a cyclon-type mixing unit fGr conventional scale HPLC was used after a minor modification; a 0.1 mm I.D. stainless steel tube was inserted in the eluent inlet ((Fig. 26). The authors claim detection limits of 0.2 fmol. A chromatogram of four dansylated amino acids is given in Fig. 27. In a more recent publication (ref. 115), the authors replaced the 1 mm 1.0. column by a 2.1 mm I.D. column. This was done because two pump gradient elution on the 1 mm I.D. column was not successful due to pump irregularities, resulting in increased baseline noise. Van Vliet et al. (ref. 116) investigated the possibility of coupling a tubular post-column reactor to a 25 cm I.D. open tubular separation column. Using these extremely small bore columns, extra column volume is only tolerable on the nanoliter scale. Two A
251 s p e c i a l l y designed m i x i n g u n i t s ( F i g . 28) were proposed and e v a l u a t e d . 25 fl
I.D.
f u s e d s i l i c a t u b i n g was
used as
the reactor.
To make t h e
d e t e c t i o n i n a v e r y low volume, l a s e r - i n d u c e d f l u o r e s c e n c e was used. Even a t t h i s e x t r e m e l y low volume s c a l e , band b r o a d e n i n g i n t h e m i x i n g u n i t and r e a c t o r c o u l d be k e p t a t a l e v e l c o m p a t i b l e w i t h t h e column used. The O P A - d e r i v a t i z a t i o n o f a l a n i n e was g i v e n as an example.
T
F i g . 26
C y c l o n - t y p e m i x i n g u n i t f o r m i n i a t u r i z e d HPLC. R e p r i n t e d from r e f . 114.
W
In
Z
B
Ln
W
a: a: W
n
a:
(r
F i g . 27
1
1
1
I
0 15 30 RETENTION TIME (MIN
Chromatogram o f Dns-amino a c i d s , o b t a i n e d w i t h t h e m i c r o b o r e HPLC-chemi luminescence d e t e c t i o n system. The amount o f each amino a c i d i n j e c t e d was 3 fmol. E l u e n t f l o w - r a t e 0.03 m l / m i n . Reagent f l o w - r a t e 0.6 ml/min. R e p r i n t e d f r o m r e f . 114.
252
Fig. 28 Design of the mixing devices. 1 = Open-tubular column; 2 = reaction capillary; 3 = reagent delivery capillary; (A) based on a Valco 1/16-in zero dead volume connector, 4 = connector body, 5 = stainless-steel liner, 6 = PTFE ferrules, arrows indicate reagent flow; (B) based on Supelco butt-connector, 4 = vespel ferrule, 5 = connector body. Reprinted from ref. 116.
HOLLOW FIBERS AS POST-COLUMN REACTORS Hollow fiber membranes have been discussed for use as suppressors in i o n chromatography with conductometric detection and are commercialized by the Dionex Company (refs. 117-121). They can also be used as reactor and pumpless reagent addition device in post-column systems with fluorescence detection (ref. 122). The reactor was made of several parallel 325 lm I.D. sulphonated polyethylene hollow fibers, 8 inch in length each. This reactor was suspended in a container of the appropriate reagent. Permeation through the membrane should be small to avoid loss of analyte. The reagent concentration in the eluent can be made sufficiently
5.7
253 s t r o n g by u s i n g h i g h l y concentrated reagent s o l u t i o n i n t h e c o n t a i n e r . A t t e n t i o n should be given t o t h e choice o f s o l v e n t f o r t h e reagent as t h i s may have a b e n e f i c i a l o r a d e t r i m e n t a l i n f l u e n c e on t h e reagent f l u x through t h e membrane. Several model systems were discussed: t h e enhanced UV d e t e c t i o n o f n i t r o p h e n o l s and t h e enhanced fluorescence d e t e c t i o n o f phenols upon pH-adaptation, t h e fluorescence d e t e c t i o n o f amines a f t e r
d e r i v a t i z a t i o n w i t h fluorescamine and t h e n i n h y d r i n c o l o u r f o r m a t i o n w i t h amino acids.
A
6
- -
0
10
Time (rnin)
i i g . 29
20
0
10
20
Time (min)
Chromatograms o f c o n t r o l s a l i v a ( A ) and c o n t r o l s a l i v a s p i k e d w i t h amobarbital (B). 1 = h e x o b a r b i t a l (0.5 I g / m l , i n t e r n a l standard); 2 = amobarbital (0.5 a / m l ) . I n j e c t i o n volume: 50 m l . UV-detection a t 240 nm, 0.008 AUFS. Reprinted from r e f . 124.
Haginaka e t a l . ( r e f .
123) were t h e f i r s t t o d e s c r i b e t h e use o f a
h o l l o w f i b e r post-column r e a c t o r f o r t h e a n a l y s i s o f r e a l samples.
The
determination o f 8-lactamase i n h i b i t o r s ( c l a v u l a n i c a c i d and sulbactam) i n serum and u r i n e based on h o l l o w f i b e r pH adaptation and UV d e t e c t i o n
254 a t 270
-
280 nm was discussed. A 1.2 m l o n g h o l l o w f i b e r (0.3 mm
I.D.)
suspended i n a 1.0 M sodium hydroxide s o l u t i o n was used. The response of the
analytes
concentration.
was optimized
by changing
reactor
l e n g t h and
reagent
E s s e n t i a l l y t h e same a n a l y t i c a l system was used by these
authors f o r t h e d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f some s e l e c t e d b a r b i t u r a t e s whereby t h e determination o f amobarbital i n s a l i v a was g i v e n as t h e a p p l i c a t i o n ( r e f .
124). A 0.05 M ammonium hydroxide s o l u t i o n was taken as t h e reagent and t h e h o l l o w f i b e r r e a c t o r was o n l y 15 cm i n l e n g t h . T y p i c a l chromatograms obtained u s i n g t h i s method a r e g i v e n i n F i g . 29. Since t h e use o f h o l l o w f i b e r r e a c t o r s seems t o g i v e a wide range of p o s s i b i l i t i e s f o r simple reagent i n t r o d u c t i o n ,
i t i s l i k e l y t h a t more
a p p l i c a t i o n s w i l l be published i n t h e nearby f u t u r e . 6. CONCLUSIONS
HPLC i s a technique t h a t i s w i d e l y used i n many a n a l y t i c a l l a b o r a t o r i e s a l l over t h e world. When t h e HPLC s e p a r a t i o n i s combined with
on-line
post-column
reaction
detection
s e l e c t i v e a n a l y t i c a l systems can be obtained,
highly
sensitive
and
as r e f l e c t e d by a s t i l l
growing number o f p u b l i c a t i o n s d e a l i n g w i t h i n t e r e s t i n g a p p l i c a t i o n s . The success o f post-column r e a c t i o n d e t e c t o r s depends p r i m a r i l y on t h e proper choice o f t h e r e a c t o r i t s e l f , and where a p p l i c a b l e , on t h e m i x i n g u n i t used f o r reagent a d d i t i o n . If normal p r e c a u t i o n s a r e taken, t h e i n s e r t i o n o f a r e a c t i o n d e t e c t o r i n t o a HPLC system does n o t cause a s e r i o u s l o s s i n chromatographic r e s o l u t i o n ( l e s s than t w o - f o l d increase i n peak w i d t h i n most cases). Often, t h e l o s s i n r e s o l u t i o n w i l l be compensated by an increase i n s e l e c t i v i t y , hence one should n o t o n l y concentrate on keeping band broadening as low as p o s s i b l e s i n c e f r e q u e n t l y chemical s e l e c t i v i t y can be s u b s t i t u t e d
for
chromatographic
selectivity.
Sensitivity
ar;d
s e l e c t i v i t y are o f t e n improved t o such an e x t e n t t h a t sample pretreatment can be considerably s i m p l i f i e d and automated o r even omitted. Reaction d e t e c t i o n as such i s a l r e a d y a r e l a t i v e l y o l d technique t h a t
now, due t o i t s mature s t a t u s , i s used f o r many a n a l y t i c a l problems. Much i n t e r e s t e x i s t s f o r t h e newer developments i n t h e f i e l d o f r e a c t i o n d e t e c t i o n as discussed i n t h e present paper.
The use o f
immobilized
enzymes and, t o be more general , solid-phase c h e m i s t r i e s has r e s u l t e d i n simpler and more economical a n a l y t i c a l systems and o f t e n gave t h e p o s s i b i l i t y t o circumvent problems on c o m p a t i b i l i t y o f t h e reagent w i t h t h e d e t e c t i o n mode chosen, With e l e c t r o c h e m i c a l reagent p r o d u c t i o n and photochemical
r e a c t i o n d e t e c t i o n p o s t - c o l umn c h e m i s t r i e s
are possible
w i t h o u t t h e need f o r an a d d i t i o n a l reagent pump which, again, t h e economics o f t h e system.
improves
255 M i n i a t u r i z a t i o n o f r e a c t i o n d e t e c t o r has made them compatible f o r use w i t h narrow-bore (1 mm I . D . o r lower) a n a l y t i c a l columns. The major advantage o f m i n i a t u r i z e d r e a c t o r s being low reagent consumption hence p e r m i t t i n g t o work w i t h expensive m a t e r i a l s , reagents i s a l s o b e t t e r c o n t r o l l a b l e .
T o x i c i t y o f samples and
For such systems, t h e development
o f solid-phase r e a c t o r columns and o t h e r pumpless r e a c t i o n u n i t s seems promising because no m i x i n g o f column e f f l u e n t and reagent stream i s needed. Although p o s s i b l e , such m i x i n g i s somewhat d i f f i c u l t t o c o n t r o l i n m i n i a t u r i z e d HPLC. A very g e n t l e approach towards t h e m i x i n g problem i s t h e use o f h o l l o w f i b e r r e a c t o r s as i n t r o d u c e d o n l y a few years ago. With t h e ever i n c r e a s i n g developments i n membrane technologies,
rapid
development i n t h i s f i e l d seems t o be very l i k e l y . I n conclusion, i t can be s t a t e d t h a t post-column r e a c t i o n d e t e c t i o n has now been developed t o such a degree t h a t i t can b e used f o r many d i f f e r e n t types o f analyses, b o t h i n research and r o u t i n e l a b o r a t o r i e s . On t h e o t h e r hand t h e r e a r e s t i l l many d i f f e r e n t aspects f o r researchers t o work on t h e coming decade which w i l l no doubt r e s u l t i n even more i n t e r e s t i n g appl ic a t ions.
REFERENCES 1 M.W.F. Nielen, R.W. F r e i and U.A. Th. Brinkman, S e l e c t i v e Sample Handling and Detection ( E d i t o r s : R.W. F r e i and K. Zech), Vol. 1, E l sev ie r , Ams terdam, 1988. 2 R. W. F r e i , J. Chromatogr., 165, 75 (1979). 3 J.F.K. Huber, K.M. Jonker and H. Poppe, Anal. Chem. 52, 2 (1980). 4 H. Engelhardt and U.D. Neue, Chromatographia, 15 403 (1982). 5 R.S. Deelder, A.T.J.M. K u i j p e r s and J.H.M van den Berg, J. Chromatogr., 255, 545 (1983). 6 B. L i l l i g and H. Engelhardt, Reaction D e t e c t i o n i n L i q u i d Chroma tography, I.S. K r u l l ed., Marcel Dekker, New York, 1987, Ch. 1. 7 L. Nord and B. Karlberg, Anal. Chim. Acta, 164 233 (1984). 8 R.W. F r e i , Chemical D e r i v a t i z a t i o n i n A n a l y t i c a l Chemistry, Vol. 1 Chromatogra h y ' , R.W. F r e i and J.F. Lawrence eds., Plenum Press, New York, (1981!, Ch. 4 9 J.F. Lawrence, U.A. Th. Brinkman and R. W. F r e i , Reaction D e t e c t i o n i n L i q u i d Chromatography, I.S. K r u l l ed., Marcel Dekker, New York, (1987), Ch. 6. 10 J.H.M. van den Berg, R.S. Deelder and H.G.M. Egberink, Anal. Chim. Acta, 114, 91 (1980). 11 L.G.M.Th. T u i n s t r a and W. Haasnoot, J. Chromatogr., 282, 457 (1983). 12 C.J. L i t t l e , J.A. Whatley and A.D. Dale, J. Chromatogr., 171, 63 (1979). 13 P. Bohlen and R. Schroeder, Anal. Biochem., 126, 144 (1982). 14 N. Kiba, M. Takamatsu and M. Furusawa, J. Chromatogr., 328, 309 (1985) 15 C.R. C l a r k and J. Chan, Anal. Chem., 50, 635 (1978). 16 H.A. Moye, S.J. Scherer and P.A. S t . John, Anal. L e t t . , 10 1049 (1977) 17 G. Schwedt, Chromatographia, 10, 92 (1977).
. .
256 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
A.H.M.T. Scholten, U.A.Th. Brinkman and R.W. F r e i , J. Chromatogr., 218, 3 (1981). F.P. B i g l e y and R.L. Grob, J. Chromatogr., 350, 407 (1985). H. Engelhardt and R. K l i n k n e r , Chromatographia, 20, 559 (1985). M.D. Baker, H.Y. Mohammed and H. Veening, Anal. Chem., 53 1658 (1981). R.S. Deelder, M.G.F. K r o l l and J.H.M. van den Berg, J. Chromatogr., 125, 307 (1976). M.E. Rogers, M.W. Adlard, G. Saunders and G. H o l t , J. Chromatogr., 257, 91 (1983). C.E. Werkhoven-Goewie, W.M.A. Niessen, U.A.Th. Brinkman and R.W. F r e i , 3. Chromatogr., 203, 165 (1981). J.Haginaka and J. Wakai, Anal. Chem., 57, 1568 (1985). W.P. King and P.T. K i s s i n g e r , C l i n . Chem., 26 1484 (1980). S. Honda, T. Konishi and S. Suzuki, J. Chromatogr., 299 245 (1984). J.H.M. van den Berg, H.W.M. Horsels and R.S. Deelder, J. L i q . Chromatogr., 7 , 2351 (1984). P. Vratny, U.A.Th. Brinkman and R.W. F r e i , Anal. Chem., 57, 224 (1985) M. Kimura and Y. Itokawa, J. Chromatogr., 332, 181 (1985). A.J. Speek, J. S c h r i j v e r and W.H.P. Schreurs, J. Chromatogr., 301, 441 (1984) L.D. Bowers and W.D. B o s t i c k , Chemical D e r i v a t i z a t i o n i n A n a l y t i c a l Chemistry, Vol. 11, Separations and Continuous Flow Techniques, R.W. F r e i and J.F. Lawrence eds., Plenum, New York, 1982, Ch. 3. P.W. Carr and L.D. Bowers, Immobilized Enzymes i n A n a l y t i c a l and C l i n i c a l Chemistry, Wiley, New York (1980), Ch. 4 G.G. G u i l b a u l t , A n a l y t i c a l Uses o f Immobilized Enzymes, Marcel Dekker, New York (1984). L. Nondek, U.A.Th. Brinkman and R.W. F r e i , Anal. Chem., 54, 1466 (1983). L.Nondek, R.W. F r e i and U.A.Th. Brinkman, J. Chromatogr., 282 (1983) L.Nondek, Anal. Chem., 56 1192 (1984). T.D. Schlabach and F.E. Regnier, J. Chromatogr., 158, 349 (1978). H. Jansen, R.W. F r e i , U.A.Th. Brinkman, R.S Deelder and R.P.J. Snel 1 i n g s , J . Chromatogr., 325, 255 (1985). H. Jansen, E.G. van d e r Velde, U.A.Th. Brinkman and R.W. F r e i , J. Chromatogr. , 378, 215 (1986). S. Okuyama, N. Kokubun, S. Higashidate, 0. Uemura and Y. H i r a t a , Chem. L e t t . , 1443 (1979). S. Kamada, M. Maeda, A. Tsumji, Y. Umezawa and T. Kurahashi, J . Chromatogr., 239, 773 (1982). S. Hasegawa, R. Uenoyama, F. Takeda, J. Chuma and S. Baba, J. Chromatogr., 278, 25 (1983). S. Hasegawa, R. Uenoyama, F. Takeda, J. Chuma, K. Suzuki, F. Kamiyama, K. Yamazaki and S. Baba, J. L i q . Chromatogr., 7, 2267 (1984) M. Hayashi, Y. Imai, Y. Minami, S. Kawata, Y. Matsuzawa and S. Tarui, J. Chromatogr., 338, 195 (1985). M . 4 . Wu, K. Takagi, S. Okuyama, M. Ohsawa, T. Masahashi, 0. N a r i t a and Y. Tomeda, J . Chromatogr., 377, 121 (1986). G. Damsa, B.H.C. Westerink and A.S. Horn, J. Neurochem., 45, 1649 (1985). M. Asano, T. Miyanchi, T. Kato, K. F u j i m o r i and K. Yamamoto, J. L i q . Chromatogr., 9 , 199 (1986). K. Honda, K. Miyaguchi, H. Nishino, H. Tanaka, T. Yao and K. Imai, Anal. Biochem., 153, 50 (1986). P. van Zoonen, C. G o o i j e r , N.H. V e l t h o r s t , R.W. F r e i , J.H. Wolf, J. G e r r i t s and F. Flentge, J. Pharm. Biomed. Anal., 5, 485 (1987).
.
.
.
257 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80
C. Eva, M. H a d j u c o n s t a n t i o u , N.H. N e f f and J.L. Meek, Anal. Biochem., 143, 320 (1984). J.L. Meek and C. Eva, J . Chromatogr., 317, 343 (1984). P. van Zoonen, I de Herder, C. G o o j j e r , N.H. V e l t h o r s t , R.W. F r e i , E. Kuntzberg and G. G u b i t z , Anal. L e t t . , 19, 1949 (1986). L. Dalgaard, L. Nordholm and L. B r i m e r , J. Chromatogr., 265, 183 (1983). V.K. Boppana, K.-L.L. Fong, J.A. Ziemniak and R.K. Lynn, J. Chromatogr., 353, 231 (1986). L. Dalgaard and L. Brimer, J. Chromatogr., 303, 67 (1984). L. B rimer and L. Dalgaard, J. Chromatogr., 303, 77 (1984). R. Tawa, M. K i t o and S. H i r o s e , Chem. L e t t . , 745 (1981). M. K i t o , R. Tawa, S. Takeshima and S. H i r o s e , J. Chromatogr., 231, 183 (1982). M. K i t o , R. Tawa, 5. Takeshima and S. H i r o s e , J. Chromatogr., 278, 35 (1983). M. K i t o , R. Tawa, S. Takeshima and S. H i r o s e , Anal. L e t t . , 18, 323 (1985). N. Kiba and M. Kaneko, J . Chromatogr., 303, 396 (1984). D.W, T a y l o r and T.A. Nieman, J. Chromatogr., 368, 95 (1986). L. Ogren, I . C s i k y , L. R i s i n g e r , L.G. N i l s s o n and G. Johansson, Anal. Chim. Acta, 117, 71 (1980). J.L. Meek and F. N i c o l e t t i , J. Chromatogr., 351, 303 (1986). L.D. Bowers and P.R. Johnson, Biochim. Biophys. Acta, 661, 100 (1981). J.F. Studebaker, S.A. Slocum and E.L. Lewis, Anal. Chem., 50 1500 (1978). J.F. Studebaker, J. Chromatogr., 185, 497 (1979). M.-C. M i l l o t , 6. S e b i l l e and J.-P. Mahieu, J. Chromatogr., 354, 155 (1986) P. V ra t n y , J . Ouhrabkova and J. Capikova, J. Chromatogr., 191, 313 (1980). P. V ra t n y , R.W. F r e i , U.A.Th. Brinkman and M.W.F. N i e l e n , J . Chromatogr., 295, 355 (1984). K.-S. Low, U.A. Th. Brinkman and R.W. F r e i , Anal. L e t t . , 17, 915 (1984). E.P. Lankmayr, 6. M a i c h i n , G. Knapp and F. Nachtmann, J. Chromatogr., 224,239 (1981). K.W. Sigvardson and J.W. B i r k s , J. Chromatogr., 316, 507 (1984). I.S. K r u l l , K.-H. X i e , S. Colgan, U. Neue, T. I zod, R. King and B. D idlingme y e r , J. L i q . Chromatogr., 6, 605 (1983). I.S. K r u l l , S. Colgan, K.-H. X i e , U. Neue, R. King and 6. B idlingme y e r , J. L i q . Chromatogr., 6, 1015 (1983). K.-H. X ie , S. Colgan and I . X . K r u l l , J . L i q . Chromatogr., 6, 125 (1983). K.-H. X ie, C.T. Santasania, I.S. K r u l l , U. Neue, B. Bidlingmeyer and A. Newhart, L. L i q . Chromatogr., 6, 2109 (1983). J. R ut e r, U.P. Kurz and 6. N e i d h a r t , J. L i q . Chromatogr., 8, 2475 (1985). J. R ut e r, U.P. F i s l a g e and 6. N e i d h a r t , Chromatographia, 19, 62 11984). ,--K. B r u n t , Anal. Chem., 57, 1338 (1985). H. I r t h , G.J. de Jong, U.A.Th. Brinkman and R.W. F r e i , J. Chromatogr., 370, 439 (1986). H. Jansen, C.J.M Vermunt, U.A.Th. Brinkman and R.W. F r e i , J. Chromatogr., 366, 135 (1986). H. Jansen, R. Jansen, U.A.Th. Brinkman and R.W. F r e i , Chromatographia, i n p r e s s .
.
I
81 82 83 84
258 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119
J.R. Poulsen, J.W. B i r k s , P. van Zoonen, C. G o o i j e r , N.H. V e l t h o r s t and R.W. F r e i , Chromatographia, 21, 587 (1986). W.Th. Kok, U.A. Th. Brinkman and R.W. F r e i , J. Chromatogr., 256, 17 (1983) W.Th. Kok, G. Groenendijk, U.A. Th. Brinkman and R.W. F r e i , J. Chromatogr., 315, 271 (1984). W.P. King and P.T. K i s s i n g e r , C l i n . Chem., 26, 1484 (1980). W.Th. Kok, U.A. Th. Brinkman and R.W. F r e i , Anal. Chim. Acta, 162, 19 (1984). W.Th. Kok, J.J. Halvax, W.H. Voogt, U.A. Th. Brinkman and R.W. F r e i , Anal. Chem., 57, 2580 (1985). W.Th. Kok, W.H. Voogt, U.A.Th. Brinkman and R.W. F r e i , J. Chromatogr. , 354, 249 (1986). W.Th. Kok, Th.C.H. van Neer, W.A. Traag and L.G.M.Th. T u i n s t r a , J. Chromatogr., 367, 231 (1986). W.Th. Kok, R.W. F r e i and U.A. Th.Brinkman, S e l e c t i v e Sample Handling and Detection ( E d i t o r s : R. W. F r e i and K. Zech), Vol. 1, E l s e v i e r , Amsterdam (1988). J.R. Poulsen, J.W. B i r k s , G. Gubitz, P. van Zonnen, C. G o o i j e r , N.H. V e l t h o r s t and R.W. F r e i , J. Chromatogr., 360, 371 (1986). I.S. K r u l l and W.R. LaCourse i n Reaction D e t e c t i o n , L i q u i d Chromatography, I.S. K r u l l ed., Marcel Dekker, New York, 1987, Ch. 7. M.F. Lefevere, R.W. F r e i , A.H.M.T. Scholten and U.A.Th. Brinkman, Chromatographia, 15, 459 (1982). M.S. Gandelman, J.W. B i r k s , U.A. Th. Brinkman and R.W. F r e i , J. Chromatogr., 282, 193 (1983). R. Verbeke and P. Vanhee, J. Chromatogr., 265, 239 (1983). C. de R u i t e r , J.F. Bohle, G.J. de Jong, U.A.Th. Brinkman and R.W. F r e i , Anal. Chem., i n press. H. S c h o l l , K. Schmidt and B. Weber, J. Chromatogr., 416, 321 (1987). J.N. LePage and E.M. Rocha, Anal. Chem., 55, 1360 (1983). R.P.W. S c o t t , J. Chromatogr., Sci., 18, 49 (1980). M. Novotny, Anal. Chem., 53, 1294A (1981). F.J. Yang, HRC&CC, 6, 348 (1983). P. Kucera, ed., Microcolumn High-Performance L i q u i d Chromatography, E l sevi e r S c i e n t if ic Pub1 is h i ng Company , Amsterdam, 1984. R.P.W. Scott, ed. , Small Bore L i q u i d Chromatography Columns: T h e i r P r o p e r t i e s and Uses, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1984. H. Jansen, U.A. Th. Brinkman and R.W. F r e i , J. Chromatogr. Sci., 23 279 (1985). A. Hirose, Y. Iwasaki, I.Iwata, K. Ueda and D . I s h i i , HRC&CC, 4, 530 (1981) P. Kucera and H. Umagat, J. Chromatogr., 255, 563 (1983). J.A. Apffel, U.A. Th. Brinkman and R.W. F r e i , Chromatographia, 17, 125 (1983). 1. Takeuchi, S. S a i t o , D. I s h i i , J. Chromatogr., 258, 125 (1983). T. Takeuchi and 0. I s h i i , HRC&CC, 6, 571 (1983). H. Jansen, U.A.Th. Brinkman, R.W. F r e i , Chromatographia, 20, 453 (1985) K. Miyaguchi, K. Honda and K. Imai, J. Chromatogr., 316, 501 (1984). K. Miyaguchi, K. Honda, 1. Toyo'oka and K. I m a i , J. Chromatogr., 352, 255 (1986). H.P.M. van V l i e t , G.J.M. Bruin, J.C. Kraak and H. Poppe, 3 . Chromatogr. , 363, 187 (1986). T.S. Stevens, J.C. Davis and H. Small, Anal. Chem., 53, 1488 (1981). T.S. Stevens, G.L. Jewett, R.A. Bredeweg, Anal. Chem., 54, 1206 (1982) J. R i v i e l l o and C.A. Pohl, Dionex Technical Note 1983 and 1984, P i t t s b u r g h Conference.
.
.
.
.
259 120 121 122 123 124
R.M. Cassidy and B.D. Karcher, Reaction D e t e c t i o n i n L i q u i d Chromatography, I . $ . K r u l l ed., Marcel Dekker, New York, 1987, Ch. 3. D . T . Gjerde and J.S. F r i t z , I o n Chromatography, 2nd E d i t i o n , D r . A l f r e d H i i t h i g Verlag, Heidelberg, 1987 J.C. Davis, D.P. Peterson, Anal. Chem., 57, 771 (1985). J.Haginaka, J. Wakai and H. Yasuda, Anal. Chem., 59, 324 (1987). J. Haginaka and J. Wakai, J. Chromatogr., 390, 421 (1987)
260 CHAPTER V I
NEW LUMINESCENCE DETECTION TECHNIQUES
C. GOOIJER, N.H.
VELTHORST and R.W.
FREI
1. I n t roduct ion Chemiluminescence d e t e c t i o n w i t h s o l i d s t a t e reactors 2. Detection based on CL and BL 2.1 S o l i d s t a t e reactors i n CL 2.2 2.3 H O2 detection by peroxyoxalate CL 2.3.1 T i e TCPO reactor 2.3.2 Immobilized fluorophore 2.3.3 Coup1 ing w i t h photochemical reactors 2.3.4 Coupling w i t h IMERs 2.4 Use o f the s o l i d TCPO r e a c t o r f o r d e t e c t i o n o f fluorophores 2.5 Quenched peroxyoxalate chemi luminescence d e t e c t i o n On the mechanism o f peroxyoxalate CL 2.5.1 2.5.2 A p p l i c a b i l i t y o f quenched CL d e t e c t i o n The quenching a c t i o n 2.5.3 2.6 Concluding remarks L i q u i d phase phosphorescence d e t e c t i o n 3. Fundamental aspects o f phosphorescence 3.1 3.2 New developments i n phosphorimetry 3.2.1 Sol id-surface RTP 3.2.2 M i c e l l e - s t a b i l i z e d RTP RTP i n normal f l u i d s 3.2.3 3.2.4 Why RTP? Experimental aspects 3.3 Removal o f oxygen 3.3.1 Instrumentation 3.3.2 3.4 I n d i r e c t phosphorescence d e t e c t i o n 3.4.1 Sensitized ohosohorescence ' 3.4.1.1 I nt roduct ioh 3.4.1.2 Theoretical aspects 3.4.1.3 Appl i c a t i o n s 2.4.2 Quenched phosphorescence 3.4.2.1 I n t r o d u c t i o n 3.4.2.2 Theoretical aspects 3.4.2.3 Appl ic a t ions 3.5 A l t e r n a t i v e phosphorophores/luminophores 3.5.1 Immobi 1 ized phosphorophores 3.5.2 Rare earth metal ions as luminophores 3.6 Concluding remarks References 1.
INTRODUCTION
The use o f
luminescence d e t e c t i o n techniques
increasingly popular over
t h e years.
i n HPLC has become
Among these methods,
t h e most
frequently applied method i s fluorescence d e t e c t i o n due t o i t s s e n s i t i v i t y (refs.
1-3).
Furthermore i t can be n i c e l y adapted t o t h e demands of
miniaturized HPLC e s p e c i a l l y w i t h t h e help o f lasers as e x c i t a t i o n sources ( l a s e r induced fluorescence, LIF) Unfortunately, t h e number o f compounds
.
261 e x h i b i t i n g i n t e n s e n a t i v e fluorescence i s l i m i t e d . That i s t h e reason why chemical r e a c t i o n s p l a y an important r o l e i n HPLC fluorescence d e t e c t i o n : non- o r weakly f l u o r e s c e n t compounds a r e converted i n a p r e o r post-column mode i n t o h i g h l y f l u o r e s c e n t products. by chemical d e r i v a t i z a t i o n , ion-pair photochemical r e a c t o r ( r e f . 4 ) .
formation
or
T h i s can be done the
use
of
a
A w e l l known example o f chemical d e r i v a t i z a t i o n i s t h e r e a c t i o n o f Ophthalaldehyde (OPA) w i t h primary amino f u n c t i o n s i n a l k a l i n e media i n t h e presence o f t h e s t r o n g reducing agent 2-mercaptoethanol.
T h i s r e a c t i o n has
been a p p l i e d t o t h e d e t e c t i o n o f amino a c i d s and primary amines i n b i o logical fluids (refs.
5-8).
During t h e p a s t decade a l a r g e number of
reagents has been introduced f o r t h e r e a c t i o n d e t e c t i o n o f a wide v a r i e t y of compounds. Books and reviews on t h i s s u b j e c t a r e numerous ( r e f s . 9-17). With t h e i o n - p a i r formation method a n o n - f l u o r e s c i n g a n a l y t e forms an i o n - p a i r with a highly fluorescent
counter-ion.
Subsequently,
the apolar
i o n - p a i r i s e x t r a c t e d from t h e aqueous mobile phase t o an a p o l a r phase v i a s o l v e n t segmentation. The method can be used f o r b a s i c and a c i d i c a n a l y t e s under c o n t r o l l e d pH c o n d i t i o n s . ammonium type
drugs
(refs.
Several t e r t i a r y
18-20),
detergents
amine and quaternary (ref.
21)
and
alkyl-
sulphates and sulphonates ( r e f . 22) have been determined. With a photochemical r e a c t o r compounds a r e i r r a d i a t e d post-column
i n a quartz
or
t e f l o n c o i l by UV l i g h t and converted t o f l u o r e s c e n t r e a c t i o n products ( r e f s . 23, 24). Most a p p l i c a t i o n s have been i n t h e pharmaceutical area. I n p r i n c i p l e f l u o r e s c e n t a n a l y t e s can a l s o be d e t e c t e d v i a chemiluminescence (CL) o r bioluminescence (BL), provided t h a t t h e r e a r e chemical r e a c t i o n s which e f f i c i e n t l y
b r i n g them i n t h e e l e c t r o n i c a l l y
e x c i t e d s t a t e . A l o t o f research has been done i n t h i s f i e l d because i n chemiluminescence t h e l i g h t source can be e l i m i n a t e d from t h e d e t e c t i o n system ( r e f s . 3 , 25, 26). I n p r i n c i p l e , t h i s would be v e r y n i c e s i n c e t h e u l t i m a t e d e t e c t a b i l i t y i n fluorescence d e t e c t i o n i s l i m i t e d by background l i g h t and i t s n o i s e coming from t h e e x c i t a t i o n source ( r e f . 27). F o r a number o f compounds impressive r e s u l t s have been r e p o r t e d . However, i t i s obvious t h a t n o t i n a l l cases t h e CL d e t e c t i o n l i m i t s a r e s i g n i f i c a n t l y more favourable than those obtained v i a fluorescence d e t e c t i o n .
I n CL
d e t e c t i o n g e n e r a l l y background due t o c o m p e t i t i v e r e a c t i o n s o r i m p u r i t i e s f o r instance i n t h e e l u e n t determine t h e d e t e c t i o n l i m i t s t h a t can be reached ( r e f . 28). I n t h e present paper t h e main a t t e n t i o n i s t o t h e d e t e c t i o n o f nonf l u o r e s c e n t compounds v i a luminescence techniques o t h e r than fluorescence, i .e.,
1). Regarding chemiluminescence d e t e c t i o n i n l i q u i d chromatography, e s p e c i a l l y t h e s o - c a l l e d phosphorescence and chemiluminescence (Fig.
262
peroxyoxalate r e a c t i o n has g o t a l o t o f a t t e n t i o n i n t h e l i t e r a t u r e : s i n c e t h e f i r s t paper o f Kobayashi and Imai i n 1980 ( r e f . 29) more than 100 papers appeared on t h i s subject. A major c o n s t r a i n t i n a p p l y i n g CL i n r o u t i n e a n a l y s i s i s t h e r e l a t i v e complexity o f t h e equipment d e s p i t e of t h e f a c t t h a t t h e d e t e c t o r i t s e l f i s q u i t e simple. I n most cases more than two reagents have t o be added t o t h e a n a l y t e b e f o r e CL can be observed, so t h a t problems due t o m i x i n g and t o l i m i t e d s o l u b i l i t y and s t a b i l i t y of reagents may a r i s e . I n t h i s chapter t h e s o l i d - s t a t e r e a c t o r approach t o avoid these drawbacks i s discussed.
Use w i l l be made o f s o l i d o x a l a t e
( r e f s . 30, 31), immobilized f l u o r o p h o r e ( r e f . 32) and immobilized enzymes ( r e f . 33, 3 4 ) . I l l u s t r a t i v e f o r t h e eventual a p p l i c a b i l i t y o f t h e method i s t h e d e t e c t i o n o f c h o l i n e and a c e t y l c h o l i n e i n complex b i o l o g i c a l matrices (as u n d i l u t e d u r i n e and t h e d e p r o t e i n a t e d serum) w i t h o u t sample pretreatment ( r e f . 34).
- FLU
-___ -X-X-
Fig. 1
CL PHOS
S i m p l i f i e d diagram showing t h e Fluorescence, Chemiluminescence and Phosphorescence t r a n s i t i o n s . S and S1 are t h e lowest e l e c t r o n i c s i n g l e t s t a t e s and T1 'is t h e lowest e l e c t r o n i c t r i p l e t s t a t e o f t h e analyte.
Unl ike f 1 uorescence and chemi 1umi nescence,
phosphorescence i n t h e
l i q u i d s t a t e i s a r a r e phenomenon. A t a f i r s t s i g h t , t h i s f a c t severely l i m i t s t h e p o t e n t i a l a p p l i c a b i l i t y o f phosphorescence d e t e c t i o n i n HPLC. Nevertheless,
interesting
approaches ( r e f .
progress
has
been
advanced
following
two
35). The f i r s t makes use o f organized media, such as
m i c e l l a r s o l u t i o n s t o extend t h e number o f compounds t h a t do emit phosphorescence.
Such media
are
interesting
since
they
become
increasingly
important i n chemical separation problems. The second approach which w i l l be discussed e x t e n s i v e l y i n t h i s chapter i s focussed on phosphorescence o f
263
normal
l i q u i d s which can be u t i l i z e d as an i n d i r e c t d e t e c t i o n method
(refs.
2,36,37).
(refs.
38-41) and t h e quenched mode ( r e f s . 42-50).
Two modes can be d i s t i n g u i s h e d ,
i.e.,
the sensitized
I n most a p p l i c a t i o n s
developed thus f a r , t h e phosphorophore b i a c e t y l (2,3-butanedione)
i s added
t o t h e e l u e n t which needs t o be deoxygenated. Compounds a b l e t o quench t h e b i a c e t y l phosphorescence cause a decrease o f t h e monitored s i g n a l .
The
amount o f quenching i s dependent on t h e a n a l y t e , which i m p l i e s t h a t t h e method has an i n h e r e n t s e l e c t i v i t y i n i o n chromatography, s i n c e t h e UV absorption quenching
properties o f process.
t h e a n a l y t e s do n o t p l a y any
Furthermore,
unlike
indirect
UV
role i n the
absorption-
and
fluorescence d e t e c t i o n i n i o n chromatography, quenched phosphorescence i s n o t based on t h e displacement o f e l u e n t i o n s by a n a l y t e ions.
Instead i t
i s a dynamic process: t h e e f f i c i e n c y o f t h e phosphorescence i s reduced by t h e analyte. This d i f f e r e n c e has i n t e r e s t i n g consequences. The s e n s i t i z e d phosphorescence technique can be used f o r a n a l y t e s t h a t do absorb UV r a d i a t i o n b u t do n o t f l u o r e s c e because t h e y decay t o t h e first
excited t r i p l e t state.
I n presence o f b i a c e t y l
triplet-triplet
energy t r a n f e r from t h e a n a l y t e t o b i a c e t y l takes p l a c e a f t e r which t h e phophorescence o f t h e l a t t e r i s monitored. The s e n s i t i z e d phosphorescence method should be considered complementary t o UV and fluorescence detection. I n t h i s chapter t h e a p p l i c a b i l i t y o f b o t h s e n s i t i z e d and quenched phosphorescence w i l l be shown,
i n t h e o r g a n i c as w e l l as t h e i n o r g a n i c
f i e l d . An i n t e r e s t i n g aspect i s t h e r e l a t i v e ease compared t o fluorescence t o u t i l i z e time r e s o l u t i o n t o improve t h e r a t i o o f t h e phosphopescence s i g n a l and t h e background r a d i a t i o n . This i s n o t t o o complicated s i n c e t h e l i f t i m e s o f t h e phosphorescence s i g n a l i n t h e systems under c o n s i d e r a t i o n are i n t h e 0.1-1 msec range. furthermore a l t e r n a t i v e phosphorophores t o overcome some o f t h e disadvantages o f b i a c e t y l w i l l be t r e a t e d . The main disadvantages are t h a t b i a c e t y l i s p a r t o f t h e e l u e n t and, more i m p o r t a n t , t h a t t h e e l u e n t should be deoxygenated. I n one a l t e r n a t i v e method use i s made o f an immobilized phosphorophore packed i n t h e d e t e c t o r c e l l ( r e f . 49). I n another approach, r a r e e a r t h i o n s as Eu3+ and Tb3+ a r e u t i l i z e d as luminophores
(ref.
50).
They
emit
long-living
s o l u t i o n s w i t h o u t t h e need o f deoxygenation.
luminescence i n l i q u i d
Although i n a s t r i c t sense
luminescence o f r a r e e a r t h s i s no phosphorescence, i t i s a p p r o p r i a t e t o discuss
this
simi 1a r i t i e s .
technique
here
because
there
are
various
experimental
264 2. 2.1
CHEMILUMINESCENCE DETECTION WITH SOLID STATE REACTORS DETECTION BASED ON CL AND BL Various chemiluminescence (CL) and bioluminescence (BL) r e a c t i o n s have
been and a r e a p p l i e d i n a n a l y t i c a l chemistry ( r e f . 25).
O f course t h e y
commonly r e q u i r e more o r l e s s defined r e a c t i o n c o n d i t i o n s which g e n e r a l l y a r e n o t e q u i v a l e n t w i t h t h e o p t i m a l chromatographic circumstances i n LC. Hence f o r t h e development o f CL (and BL) as d e t e c t i o n technique i n HPLC, compatability i s a crucial point. W i t h i n t h i s c o n t e x t t h r e e CL r e a c t i o n s a r e t h e most important: (iso)luminol reaction;
reaction,
these w i l l
the
lucigenine reaction
the
and t h e peroxyoxalate
be discussed more e x t e n s i v e l y .
I n addition,
in-
c i d e n t a l l y use has been made o f t h e f i r e f l y BL r e a c t i o n , i . e . , f o r t h e isoenzymes o f c r e a t i n e kinase ( r e f . 51) and o f t h e l u c i f e r a s e b a c t e r i a l BL r e a c t i o n , i.e., f o r b i l e a c i d s producing NADH from NAD, which can be measured v i a b a c t e r i a l CL ( r e f . 2 5 ) . Furthermore, an areosol spray d e t e c t o r f o r LC based on ozon and s i n g l e t oxygen induced CL has been reported ( r e f s . 52, 53), a c e l l f o r e l e c t r o g e n e r a t e d CL ( r e f . 54) and a thermal energy analyzer CL d e t e c t o r ( r e f s . 5 5 , 56). To discuss t h e p o t e n t i a l o f t h e ( i s o ) l u m i n o l , t h e l u c i g e n i n e and t h e
peroxyoxalate r e a c t i o n f o r d e t e c t i o n i n LC i t should be r e a l i z e d t h a t t h e f i r s t two r e a c t i o n types d i f f e r e s s e n t i a l l y from t h e t h i r d one. Whereas f o r luminol and l u c i g e n i n e an e n e r g y - r i c h i n t e r m e d i a t e i s formed i n t h e e a r l y stage o f t h e r e a c t i o n which i t s e l f emits l i g h t , f o r peroxyoxalate t h e formation o f such an i n t e r m e d i a t e i s f o l l o w e d by energy t r a n s f e r t o a substance t h a t e v e n t u a l l y emits l i g h t . T h i s i m p l i e s t h a t t h e peroxyoxalate i n p r i n c i p l e can be invoked t o d e t e c t compounds w i t h n a t i v e fluorescence o r c a r r y i n g f l u o r e s c e n t l a b e l s . D e t e c t i o n o f f l u o r e s c e n t compounds v i a t h e ( i s o ) luminol o r t h e l u c i g e n i n e r e a c t i o n i s n o t a p p r o p r i a t e . The ( i s o ) l u m i n o l r e a c t i o n i s s c h e m a t i c a l l y d e p i c t e d as f o l l o w s :
0 + light (425 nm )
265 The r e a c t i o n r e q u i r e s s t r o n g a l k a l i n e c o n d i t i o n s ; t h e ( i s o ) l u m i n o l r e a c t s w i t h an o x i d a n t w h i l e metal i o n s c a t a l y z e t h e r e a c t i o n . T h i s i m p l i e s t h a t i n p r i n c i p l e i t can be used t o d e t e c t o x i d a n t s ( p o s s i b l y generated i n a post-column r e a c t i o n d e t e c t o r ) , metal i o n s (and metal c h e l a t i n g agents) and substances d e r i v a t i z e d w i t h ( i s o ) l u m i n o l . That c a t a l y z i n g metal i o n s (and i n d i r e c t l y a n a l y t e s t h a t reduce t h e f r e e metal i o n c o n c e n t r a t i o n ) can be detected i s r e a d i l y c l a r i f i e d . I n chemiluminescence t h e number o f e m i t t e d photons p e r second i s measured which i s p r o p o r t i o n a l t o t h e number of h i g h l y e n e r g e t i c indermediate compounds formed p r o second,
i n other
words t o t h e r e a c t i o n r a t e . The luminol CL r e a c t i o n has been f r e q u e n t l y a p p l i e d i n a n a l y t i c a l chemistry e s p e c i a l l y i n f l o w i n j e c t i o n a n a l y s i s , e.g.
f o r various c a t a l y z i n g metal c a t i o n s ( r e f s . 57-60), amino a c i d s and
proteins
acting
as
metal
chelating
agents
thus
suppressing
the
CL
i n t e n s i t y ( r e f s . 61-63) and hydrogenperoxide produced by enzymes ( r e f s . For HPLC d e t e c t i o n o n l y few a p p l i c a t i o n s o f l u m i n o l CL have been
64-69).
published. Metal i o n s have been determined a f t e r s e p a r a t i o n by i o n exchange ( r e f . 70); here c o m p a t a b i l i t y i s a s e r i o u s problem s i n c e metals are u s u a l l y separated under a c i d i c c o n d i t i o n s whereas t h e luminol CL r e q u i r e s h i g h pH values. The CL d e t e c t o r has been combined w i t h a photochemical r e a c t o r inducing photooxygenation o f a1 i p h a t i c a l c o h o l s , aldehydes, e t h e r s and saccharides under r e l e a s i n g o f H202 ( r e f . 71). Finally,
the
alkyl
substituted
i s o l u m i n o l , has been successfully and c a r o b o x y l i c a c i d s ( r e f . 72).
isoluminol,
N-(4-aminobutyl)-N-ethyl-
used f o r precolumn l a b e l i n g o f amines
The l u c i g e n i n e CL r e a c t i o n a l s o r e q u i r e s s t r o n g b a s i c s o l u t i o n s . Lucigenine r e a c t s both w i t h o x i d a n t s l i k e sodium p e r i o d a t e o r hydrogen peroxide as w i t h reductants
l i k e ascorbic
a c i d and glucose.
I n both
s i t u a t i o n s t h e e m i t t i n g species i s N-methylacridone:
Hence i t i s p o s s i b l e t o u t i l i z e l u c i g e n i n e CL t o measure b o t h o x i d a n t s and reductants.
For d e t e c t i o n i n HPLC i t has been used f o r a s c o r b i c and
dehydroascorbic a c i d , cortisol
f o r glucose,
( r e f s . 73-75).
creatinine,
heparin and s t e r o i d s as
Furthermore, carboxyl i c acids have been measured
266
indirectly after conversion to the p-nitrophenacyl esters (ref. 29). Obviously the peroxyoxalate C L reaction is applied by far the most extensively for detection in HPLC. Traditionally the reaction is presented in the following way, although results of various groups unambiguously show that this presentation cannot account for all experimental data (refs. 76-79):
[ :]
+
~
0
0
fluoNphnrr
-
fluoNphore' + 2C0,
I
Ar represents a substituted benzene nucleus: the most frequently used oxalate is TCPO, bis(2,4,6-trichlorophenyl) oxalate. Thusfar the peroxyoxalate C L reaction has been applied in HPLC for fluorescent or fluorescence-labeled compounds, for hydrogenperoxide (other oxidants are not appropriate) and for C L quenching analytes. The C L intensities appear to vary strongly with the fluorophore applied in the reaction so that not in all cases C L detection is more favourable than fluorescence detection. Furthermore detectability is generally limited by background luminescence, i .e., chemiluminescence due to impurities or competitive reactions observed when no fluorophore is added to the eluent. Interesting results have for instance been reported for polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons (refs. 80-82) but also for dansyl-labeled compounds as amino acids, amines, catecholamines and steroids (refs. 28, 29, 83-88). Furthermore, likewise dansylation, other labeling reactions originally developed for fluorescence detection have been examined as the reactions with OPA, orthophthalaldehyde, and NBD, 7-nitrobenzo-2-oxa-l,3-diazole (refs. 86, 88). An approach specifically directed on C L is the use of amino-substituted aromatics which have extremely high CL efficiencies for labeling carboxylic acids (ref. 89), aldehydes and ketones (ref. 90). 2.2
S O L I D STATE REACTORS I N CL Solid state reactors have been introduced in C L detection for various
267 reasons. I n t h e f i r s t p l a c e t h e y can be used t o e x t e n t t h e a p p l i c a b i l i t y o f t h e CL r e a c t i o n under c o n s i d e r a t i o n .
An example i s t h e Z n - r e d u c t o r
t r a n s f e r r i n g nitro-PAHs t o amino-PAHs; whereas t h e f o r m e r have v e r y l o w CL e f f i c i e n c i e s i n t h e p e r o x y o x a l a t e r e a c t i o n , t h e l a t t e r can be d e t e c t e d e x t r e m e l y s e l e c t i v e and s e n s i t i v e
i n complex samples
(ref.
81).
Also
enzymes can be i m m o b i l i z e d f o r t h i s purpose, as f o r i n s t a n c e i m m o b i l i z e d enzyme r e a c t o r s (IMERS) p r o d u c i n g H202 t h a t i n t u r n can be measured v i a CL ( r e f s . 91, 9 2 ) . Thus v a r i o u s
i m p o r t a n t s u b s t r a t e s can i n p r i n c i p l e b e
analyzed; s u c c e s s f u l r e p o r t s have been p u b l i s h e d f o r g l u c o s e ( r e f s .
33,
65) and c h o l i n e l a c e t y l c h o l i n e ( r e f s . 34, 93). A l t e r n a t i v e l y , IMERS can b e u t i l i z e d t o enhance t h e CL i n t e n s i t y v i a t h e r e a c t i o n r a t e . As an example we mention i m m o b i l i z e d oxidase c a t a l y z i n g t h e l u m i n o l r e a c t i o n ( r e f . 9 4 ) . Obviously, a v e r y f a v o u r a b l e p r o p e r t y o f b o t h r e a c t o r t y p e s i s t h a t t h e y i n p r i n c i p l e can be used d u r i n g l o n g t i m e p e r i o d s . Nevertheless as a t h i r d p o s s i b i l i t y of a p p l y i n g s o l i d - s t a t e r e a c t o r s a l s o i m m o b i l i z e d r e a g e n t s t h a t a r e consumed have been used, f o r i n s t a n c e immobilized l u m i n o l ( r e f . 9 5 ) . Because o f t h e l a r g e s u r f a c e area a v a i l a b l e on s m a l l s o l i d p a r t i c l e s t h i s o f f e r s a way t o employ t h e s e r e a g e n t s a t much h i g h e r e f f e c t i v e c o n c e n t r a t i o n s t h a n a l l o w e d by s o l u b i l i t i e s . I n o u r l a b o r a t o r y we have u t i l i z e d a packed b e d - t y p e r e a c t o r f o r TCPO i n t h e p e r o x y o x a l a t e CL r e a c t i o n t o s i m p l i f y t h e e x p e r i m e n t a l
set-up
and t o
reduce i n s t a b i l i t y problems ( r e f . 26). T h i s compound b e i n g p o o r l y s o l u b l e i n t h e s o l v e n t s u s u a l l y a p p l i e d f o r p e r o x y o x a l a t e CL, i s s l o w l y d i s s o l v e d i n t h e c a r r i e r stream. I n some cases i m m o b i l i z e d CL r e a g e n t s a r e used t o q u a n t i t a t e species t h a t q u a n t i t a t i v e l y l i b e r a t e s t h e CL r e a g e n t from i t s s u p p o r t ( r e f s . 96, 97). As an example a d e t e c t i o n system f o r t h i o l s has been developed: a t h i o l - m o d i f i e d l u m i n o l i s bound on p o l y s a c c h a r i d e b u t r e 1eased a f t e r t h io l -d is u l f i d e i n t e r c h a n g e . F i n a l l y , i t i s emphasized t h a t i n t h e p e r o x y o x a l a t e CL t h e l u m i n e s c i n g compound can be s u c c e s s f u l l y bound on c o n t r o l l e d p o r e g l a s s o r s i l i c a . It i s n o t consumed d u r i n g t h e r e a c t i o n . I n o u r l a b o r a t o r y we have i m m o b i l i z e d
3-aminofluoranthene,
one
of
the
most
efficient
p e r o x y o x a l a t e system known a t t h e moment ( r e f . important
CL 32).
reagents
in
the
Immobilization i s
since
t h i s compound has c a r c i n o g e n i c p r o p e r t i e s . Another f a v o u r a b l e p o i n t i s t h a t t h e CL r e a c t i o n can be l o c a l i z e d i n t h e d e t e c t o r c e l l which i s packed w i t h i m m o b i l i z e d f l u o r o p h o r e . 2.3
H202 DETECTION BY PEROXYOXALATE CL I t i s w o r t h w h i l e t o improve H202 d e t e c t i o n methods i n FIA and t o
develop d e t e c t i o n methods i n HPLC n o t o n l y because H202 i s an i m p o r t a n t analyte
itself,
but
also
because
a c o u p l i n g can be made w i t h
photo-
chemical ( r e f s . 98, 99) and enzymatic r e a c t i o n s ( r e f s . 34, 92, 93). Development o f such coup1 i n g t e c h n i q u e s i s n o t o n l y i m p o r t a n t concerning s e n s i t i v i t y ; i n some cases t h e s e l e c t i v i t y parameter i s even more im port ant . F or example, i t i s t h e s e l e c t i v i t y o f t h e IMER CL combinat ion t h a t a l l o w s t h e q u a n t i t a t i o n o f c h o l i n e and a c e t y l c h o l i n e i n ext remely complex m i x t u r e s ( r e f s . 3 4 ) . Furthermore, because o f t h i s s e l e c t i v i t y t h e a d d i t i o n a l band broadening caused by t h e r e a c t o r s i s l e s s i m p o r t a n t t h a n usual i n HPLC d e t e c t i o n .
-
TCPO
HP2
@-
PMT
~_____ P
7
TCPO
FLU
L___--.J +
Fig. 2
2.3.1
"202
PMT
D e t e c t o r c o n f i g u r a t i o n s i n v e s t i g a t e d : (A) convent ional system; (B) system w i t h s o l i d - s t a t e TCPO r e a c t o r ; (C) system w i t h s epar a t e TCPO and i m n o b i l i z e d f l u o r o p h o r e r e a c t o r s ; (D) mixed r e a c t o r system (FLU = f l u o r o p h o r e , P = pump and PMT = phot om u l t i p l i e r tube). THE TCPO REACTOR ( r e f s . 30,31)
The s i g n i f i c a n t r e d u c t i o n i n c o m p l e x i t y o f H202 d e t e c t i o n which can be achieved by a p p l y i n g
solid-state
reactors
is
readily
conceived
from
Fig. 2: m a n i f o l d A i s t h e c o n v e n t i o n a l one; i n B a (hand packed) s o l i d - s t a t e TCPO r e a c t o r i s used, i n C and D b o t h a s o l i d - s t a t e TCPO r e a c t o r and a r e a c t o r w i t h 3 - a m i n o f l u o r a n thene immobilized on c o n t r o l l e d pore g las s (CPG) a r e a p p l i e d . I n B and C t h e TCPO r e a c t o r i s t h e same. I t i s a precolumn o f t h e t y p e designed i n ou r l a b by Goewie e t a1 ( r e f . c a r t r i d g e o f 4.6 mm I . D .
100) u s i n g a t e f l o n c o a t i n g
and 22 mm l e n g t h . Various experiment al parameters
f o r i t s use i n F I A have been e v a l u a t e d on t h e b a s i s o f c o n f i g u r a t i o n B, u t i l i z i n g peryl e n e as f l u o r o p h o r e Parameters
as reagent
purity
and aqueous a c e t o n i t r i l e as e l u e n t .
and a c e t o n i t r i l e
t o wat er
ratio
p l a y an
269 imp ort ant r o l e . To achieve a background s i g n a l as low and as s t a b l e as p o s s i b l e , s p e c i a l a t t e n t i o n has t o be p a i d t o reagent p u r i t y and t o t h e a c e t o n i t r i l e t o w a t e r r a t i o . Optimal r e s u l t s were o b t a i n e d by p a s s i n g a c e t o n i t r i l e ov er an alumina column p r i o r t o use and f u r t h e r m o r e b y a d j u s t i n g t h e c om p o s i t i o n o f H202 i n j e c t i o n p l u g t o t h e composit ion o f t h e c a r r i e r stream as much as p o s s i b l e . D e t e c t i o n l i m i t s o f 6 x lo-' M 3 0 2 (0.2 @/1) were achieved combined w i t h a l i n e a r dynamic range up t o 10 and a good r e p r o d u c i b i l i t y (R.S.D.
2.8% a t 2 x
M
M f o r 10 i n j e c t i o n s ) .
Large i n j e c t i o n volumes were r e q u i r e d u s i n g t h e r a t h e r b i g TCPO r e a c t o r . I n a c e t o n i t r i l e / w a t e r 80:20 t h i s b i g r e a c t o r c o u l d be operat ed a t l e a s t 8 hours.
Unfortunately,
l a r g e sample i n j e c t i o n volumes a r e r e q u i r e d which
i n d i c a t e s t h a t t h e r e a c t o r has a l a r g e dead volume so t h a t i t cannot be used i n s e r i e s w i t h t h e a n a l y t i c a l column i n an HPLC system. To reach t h e maximum CL s i g n a l i n FIA an i n j e c t i o n volume o f a t l e a s t 650 was necessary. O b v ious ly f o r combining t h e H202 d e t e c t i o n system w i t h HPLC a s m a l l e r TCPO r e a c t o r i s r e q u i r e d t o c i r c u m v e n t d e s a st rous band broadening.
t h i s p o i n t o f view c o n f i g u r a t i o n
From
D i s more a p p r o p r i a t e t h a n c o n f i g u r a t i o n
C. Here, a dual l a y e r d e t e c t o r c e l l i s a p p l i e d o f t y p i c a l l y 3 mm i n t e r n a l
diameter and 27 mm l e n g t h ; about 1/3 o f t h e c e l l i s f i l l e d w i t h TCPO. Since TCPO i s consumed d u r i n g t h e r e a c t i o n i t i s a p p r o p r i a t e t o p l a c e a f r i t between t h e TCPO and t h e luminophore l a y e r .
A l s o an i n l e t f r i t i s
necessary t o spread t h e f l o w e v e n l y o v e r t h e whole r e a c t o r . The two l a y e r c e l l can be used d u r i n g ca. 3 h c o n t i n u o u s o p e r a t i o n a t f l o w r a t e s o f about 1 m l m i n - l ( a c e t o n i t r i l e / w a t e r 80:20)
w i t h o u t excessive a d d i t i o n a l
band broadening caused by v o i d s i n t h e TCPO l a y e r . Repacking w i t h TCPO i s extreme ly simple.
I n F I A experiments a p p l y i n g m a n i f o l d D,
maximum CL
s i g n a l s were reached a t i n j e c t i o n volumes n o t l a r g e r t han 100 t o 150 pl. Presumably t h i s i s n o t o n l y due t o t h e s m a l l s i z e o f t h e TCPO r e a c t o r , b u t a l s o t o t h e l o c a l i z a t i o n o f t h e CL r e a c t i o n ( t h e l i g h t emission ) i n t h e d e t e c t o r c e l l . The l a t t e r i m p l i e s t h a t no band-broadening
i s caused by
d e t e c t i o n o f CL o c c u r r i n g i n t h e i n l e t and o u t l e t c a p i l l a r i e s o f t h e f l o w cell. Another i m p o r t a n t d i f f e r e n c e between t h e e xperiment al c o n f i g u r a t i o n s C and D i s t h e i r dependence on f l o w r a t e ( f o r 80% a c e t o n i t r i l e as a model eluent).
I n C t h e r e i s a s i g n i f i c a n t dependence, whereas i n D i t i s
n e g l i g i b l e . Most p r o b a b l y t h i s i s due t o t h e t i m e l a g i n C between t h e r e a c t i o n o f hydrogen p e r o x i d e w i t h TCPO i n t h e f i r s t r e a c t o r and t h e a c t u a l e x c i t a t i o n s t e p i n t h e second r e a c t o r . During t h i s t i m e i n t e r v a l some o f t h e i n t e r m e d i a t e formed i n t h e f i r s t r e a c t o r decomposes, so t h a t
270 t h e amount o f i n t e r m e d i a t e t h a t reaches t h e second r e a c t o r depends on t h e flow rate. To t e s t t h e s o l v e n t c o m p a t a b i l i t y o f t h e TCPO r e a c t o r , i n a d d i t i o n t o a c e t o n i t r i l e , t e t r a h y d r o f u r a n (THF) , acetone and methanol were s t u d i e d a1 1 i n mixtures o f 20% aqueous T r i s b u f f e r and 80% o r g a n i c s o l v e n t . THF i s unsuitable; i t g i v e s a very h i g h CL background, presumably because of peroxide formation.
Acetone can be a p p l i e d w i t h o u t any problem;
alike
a c e t o n i t r i l e t h e CL s i g n a l i s n o t i n f l u e n c e d by t h e f l o w r a t e . T h i s i s n o t t r u e f o r methanol; i n 80% aqueous methanol (even i n m a n i f o l d D) a s t r o n g flow-rate
dependence i s observed t h a t v a r i e s from one TCPO batch t o
another. I t has been shown t h a t t h i s dependence can be e l i m i n a t e d by addition o f 2,4,6-trichlorophenol (TCP) which i s a p r e c u r s o r i n t h e synthesis of TCPO. It has been suggested t h a t i n methanol TCPO undergoes s i d e r e a c t i o n s i n c o m p e t i t i o n w i t h t h e TCPO/H202 r e a c t i o n ; i f a r e p r o d u c i b l e TCP c o n c e n t r a t i o n i s maintained,
the side
reactions are
c o n t r o l l e d and t h e f l o w dependence i s suppressed. Concerning t h e optimal pH, f o r a c e t o n i t r i l e and acetone t h e r e i s no s i g n i f i c a n t e f f e c t on t h e s i g n a l between pH 7.5 and 10; i n methanol ( a p a r t from t h e r o l e o f TCP) t h e f l o w r a t e dependence a t pH
7.5 i s s i g n i f i c a n t l y lower than a t pH 9.5.
The f l o w independence of c o n f i g u r a t i o n D ( a p a r t from methanol) and t h e low dead volume o f t h e t w o - l a y e r c e l l i m p l i e s t h a t i t can be a p p r o p r i a t e l y a p p l i e d i n HPLC. On t h e o t h e r hand i t has been s u c c e s s f u l l y a p p l i e d f o r H202 q u a n t i t a t i o n
i n r a i n and c l o u d water samples by FIA; manual i n j e c t i o n s can be r e a d i l y performed because o f i t s low back pressure. F o r
t h i s type o f samples f i e l d m o n i t o r i n g i s e s s e n t i a l because very d i l u t e aqueous peroxide samples a r e unstable. H202, which i s b e l i e v e d t o be one o f t h e key intermediates i n t h e atmospheric decomposition c y c l e o f t h e sulphur oxides causing a c i d r a i n ,
i s present i n r a i n water i n concen-
M) i n p o l l u t e d areas t o
t r a t i o n s v a r y i n g from about 1 p~ 1-1 (3 x more than about 1 p~ m l - I
(3 x
M)
i n r e l a t i v e l y c l e a n areas.
The
present q u a n t i t a t i o n method based on t h e TCPO-CL system i n Fig. 2D g i v e s a d e t e c t i o n l i m i t o f 1.5 x 10-8M and a l i n e a r i t y over 6 o r d e r s o f magnitude; t h e R.S.D. i s 3% ( a t 17 jg 1- 1) and by manual i n j e c t i o n 40 samples can b e analyzed p e r hour. TO sum up t h e r e s u l t s f o r t h e TCPO r e a c t o r described i n t h i s s e c t i o n , i t w i l l be obvious t h a t t h e two l a y e r c e l l can be combined e a s i l y w i t h
HPLC. U n f o r t u n a t e l y , i t can o n l y be used d u r i n g a l i m i t e d t i m e p e r i o d , t y p i c a l l y 3 hours, b u t repacking i s q u i t e easy. It i s noted, however, t h a t a l s o t h e b i g g e r r e a c t o r (as used i n B and C) can be f r u i t f u l l y a p p l i e d i n HPLC i f i t i s placed i n a separate f l o w
line,
not i n l i n e with the
a n a l y t i c a l column. I n a set-up o f t h i s type, f o r m a t i o n o f voids i n t h e
TCPO r e a c t o r i s n o t so c r i t i c a l .
F r e q u e n t l y t h e s o l i d f i n e l y ground TCPO
i s mixed w i t h g l a s s beads o f 40-80 p d i a m e t e r s t o reduce backpressure. 2.3.2
IMMOBILIZED FLUOROPHORE ( r e f . 32) It i s obvious f r o m t h e s i m p l i f i e d r e a c t i o n scheme f o r p e r o x y o x a l a t e CL
(see s e c t i o n 2.1)
that
the
fluorophore
r e a c t i o n . From t h i s p o i n t o f view,
is
n o t consumed
during
the
immobilization i s q u i t e appropriate.
With res pec t t o t h e c h o i c e o f t h e f l u o r o p h o r e , i t i s well-known from CL measurements on f l u i d s s o l u t i o n s t h a t 3-aminofluoranthene (3-AF) i s one o f t h e most e f f i c i e n t f l u o r o p h o r i c compounds ( r e f . 81).
Immobilization of
t h i s compound i s n o t o n l y u s e f u l i n o r d e r t o e x t e n t t h e freedom of s o l v e n t choic e ( t h e s o l u b i l i t y o f t h e f l u o r o p h o r e i s no l o n g e r a l i m i t i n g f a c t o r ) , b u t e s p e c i a l l y because o f i t s t o x i c p r o p e r t i e s . Various f a c t o r s determine t h e CL s i g n a l t o n o i s e r a t i o t h a t can be reached i n a per o x y o x a l a t e system u t i l i z i n g immobilized 3-AF. F i r s t o f a l l , a f t e r coupling t o t h e s o l i d support t h e e l e c t r o n i c s t r u c t u r e o f t h e f l u o r o p h o r e should n o t have changed b a s i c a l l y . Only i f t h i s c o n d i t i o n i s f u l f i l l e d a CL e f f i c i e n c y approaching t h a t o f l i q u i d s t a t e 3-AF w i l l be a t t a i n a b l e . Secondly, t h e c o u p l i n g t o t h e s u p port must be r e a l i z e d by a spacer,
t h us c r e a t i n g a p s e u d o - l i q u i d s o l u t i o n f o r 3-AF.
Thirdly,
the
s o l i d s upport i t s e l f should be a p p l i c a b l e under HPLC c o n d i t i o n s w i t h o u t any problems. C e l l u l o s e f o r i n s t a n c e i s n o t s u i t a b l e , because i t s w e l l s i n aqueous a c e t o n i t r i l e and methanol t h u s c a u s i n g back pressure problems i n a HPLC set-up.
F i n a l l y , on t h e one hand a h i g h s u r f a c e coverage should be
r e a l i z e d t o enhance t h e CL s i g n a l , w h i l e on t h e o t h e r hand t h e transparancy o f t h e system f o r t h e outcoming luminescence l i g h t should n o t be reduced. A s uc c es s f u l
glass
i m m o b i l i z a t i o n procedure f o r 3-AF on c o n t r o l l e d p o r e
(CPG) and s i l i c a g e l
s c h e m a t i c a l l y g i v e n i n Fi g .
developed by G u b i t z e t a l . 3.
I n the f i r s t
(ref.
32)
is
s t e p a r e a c t i o n w i t h 3-
glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane i n t o l u e n e
i s performed producing a support c a r r y i n g l o n g c h a i n s e n d i n g w i t h an e poxide group. I n t h e second
s t e p t h e epoxide group r e a c t s w i t h t h e amino group o f 3-AF. Although f o r s i l i c a h i g h e r s u r f a c e coverages have been found, t h e h i g h e s t CL s i g n a l s have been obt a ined f o r CPG. Using CPG g l a s s beads o f 200-400 mesh, good s t a b i l i t y ov er l o n g p e r i o d s was o b t a i n e d . Poulson e t a l . have compared t h e CL e f f i c i e n c i e s o f immobilized 3-AF (on g l a s s beads) and l i q u i d s t a t e rubrene Sigvardson
et
al.
(ref.
81)
on
liquid
( r e f . 98). state
From r e s u l t s o f
efficiencies
of
flu oro phore s one would expect a s i g n i f i c a n t h i g h e r e f f i c i e n c y f o r 3-AF.
both
272 However,
for
immobilized 3-AF
the
difference
i s only
20
per
cent,
i n d i c a t i n g t h a t i m m o b i l i z a t i o n a f f e c t s t h e r o l e o f 3-AF i n peroxyoxalate CL
i n a n e g a t i v e way.
Nevertheless,
despite o f
this
reduction the
e f f i c i e n c y o f immobilized 3-AF i s very favourable i n comparison t o o t h e r f 1uorophores. 0
/ \
I
Si
~
OH + (CH,O), - Si - (CH,), - 0 - CH, - CH - CHI
I 0
I
I
I
I
/ \
S I - 0 - Si - (CH,), - 0- CH, - CH - CH2
-Si
Fig. 3 2.3.3
I
I
I I
- 0 - Si - (CH,), - 0 - CH,
-
RNH,
- CH - CH, - NHR
I
OH
I m m o b i l i z a t i o n o f 3-aminofluoranthene (R-NH ) on s i l i c a g e l and g l a s s beads, d e r i v a t i z e d w i t h 3-glycidoxyprgpyl t r i m e t h o x y s i lane. COUPLING WITH PHOTOCHEMICAL REACTORS ( r e f s . 98, 99)
Poulson e t a l . have coupled t h e peroxyoxalate CL system w i t h a p o s t column photochemical r e a c t o r producing hydrogenperoxide f o r d e t e c t i o n i n HPLC. I t i s emphasized t h a t t h e photochemical r e a c t o r r e q u i r e s methanol, a q u i t e i n t e r e s t i n g p o i n t i n view o f t h e l i t t l e s t a b i l i t y o f TCPO i n t h i s s o l v e n t (see s e c t i o n 2.3.1).
The a n a l y t e s were quinones, commonly used i n
t h e wood p u l p i n d u s t r y . The r e a c t i o n i s i n i t i a t e d by a p r o t o n t r a n s f e r from methanol t o t h e e x c i t e d quinone. r e a c t i o n pathways can be followed
Then, (as
i n presence o f oxygen v a r i o u s i s visualized
i n Fig.
4)
all
e v e n t u a l l y producing H202, w h i l e quinone i s n o t consumed. I n t h a t sense the reaction i s a photocatalytic
one;
i n practice
up t o
100 H202,
molecules are produced f o r any a n a l y t e molecule. Regarding s e l e c t i v i t y i t i s noted t h a t o n l y a l i m i t e d c l a s s o f compounds undergoes t h e above t y p e o f photooxygenation. has an i n h e r e n t detection.
Thus photochemical
selectivity,
a clear
r e a c t i o n d e t e c t i o n f o r quinones advantage over conventional
I n a f i r s t study t h e t w o - l a y e r TCPO r e a c t o r (see s e c t i o n 2.3.1)
UV
was
simply placed i n t h e main stream o f t h e a n a l y t i c a l system. As a photochemical r e a c t o r PTFE ( p o l y t e t r a f l u o r e t h y l e n e " t e f l o n " ) t u b i n g crocketed i n t o c y l i n d e r s t h a t f i t over a f l u o r e s c e n t
poster ("black")
lamp was
applied; t u b i n g o f d i f f e r e n t l e n g t h s p r o v i d e s d i f f e r e n t residence times f o r t h e analytes.
273
Q'
(TI)+ CHlCHzOH
I
Fig . 4
P o s s i b l e photochemical r e a c t i o n pathways f o r quinones (Q) i n t h e presence o f a l c o h o l s and oxygen l e a d i n g t o H202 ( r e f s . 98, 99).
To dis c us s t h e performance o f t h i s d e t e c t i o n system, one must c o n s i d e r
t h a t t h e peaks a r e a1 ready broadened by t h e post-column photochemical r e a c t o r so t h a t a d d i t i o n o f t h e CL d e t e c t o r c e l l causes r e l a t i v e l y l i t t l e e x t r a r e d u c t i o n i n chromatographic r e s o l u t i o n . Furthermore, i t should be remembered t h a t f o r r e a l samples some l o s s o f s e p a r a t i o n e f f i c i e n c y due t o band broadening caused by t h e d e t e c t o r i s l e s s i m p o r t a n t i f t h e d e t e c t i o n system i s more s e l e c t i v e ; i f t h e d e t e c t o r shows o n l y a response f o r a few compounds, s e p a r a t i o n problems can more e a s i l y be solved. O f course t h e band broadening caused by t h e photochemical res idenc e t ime.
Poulson e t a l .
r e a c t o r depends on
a p p l i e d a f l o w r a t e o f 0.76
the
m l min-'
methanol (95%); t h e n f o r a r e a c t o r o f 9.8 m l o n g t h e r e s i d e n c e t i m e i s 69 s and a band broadening o f 600 p12 was observed, w h i l e f o r a 29 m l o o p 2 r e a c t o r w i t h a re s i d e n c e t i m e o f 187 s t h e broadening was 1400 PI Under t hes e c o n d i t i o n s t h e c o n t r i b u t i o n o f t h e TCP0/3-AF d e t e c t o r c e l l
.
(see F i g . 2D) t o t h e band broadening i s 4000 4'. Though such a c o n t r i b u t i o n i s f a i r l y h i g h , good chromatograms c o u l d b e obt ained. I n f a c t , Poulson e t a l . o n l y l o s t a f a c t o r o f 5 i n s e n s i t i v i t y compared t o t h e c omp lic at e d t h r e e pump l i q u i d - p h a s e system (see F i g . 2 A ) . Unfortunately,
i n t h e set-up
under c o n s i d e r a t i o n , a f t e r about 2.5
hours o f use t h e broadening caused by t h e d u a l - l a y e r d e t e c t o r c e l l becomes more s erio us .
S i n c e t h e photochemical r e a c t o r r e q u i r e s h i g h methanol
c o n c e n t r a t i o n s , a f t e r t h a t t i m e v o i d f o r m a t i on i n t h e TCPO l a y e r occurs and t h e dead volume and t h u s t h e peak v a r i a n c e increases s i g n i f i c a n t l y w i t h use. Longer l i f e t i m e s a r e observed a t lower methanol c o n t e n t s , b u t t h i s i s as s oc iat e d w i t h a s t r o n g r e d u c t i o n o f t h e CL s i g n a l .
274 To avoid these band broadening problems, i n a subsequent study t h e TCPO r e a c t o r was placed o u t s i d e t h e p a t h o f t h e a n a l y t i c a l column e f f l u e n t
(see Fig. 5 ) . Obviously i n t h i s set-up t h e constant c o n t r i b u t i o n of t h e immobilized f l u o r o p h o r e c e l l t o t h e peak variance remains: i n a 3 cm x 1.5 mm
I.D.
cell
packed w i t h 40-80
p
CPG g l a s s
beads
(derivatized
or
u n d e r i v a t i z e d ) t h e peak variance i s 1200 p12. Besides i t i s noted t h a t t h e c e l l would be reduced s t r o n g l y if
variance caused by t h e fluorophore smaller g l a s s beads were applied.
Since t h e a n a l y t e does n o t pass through t h e TCPO reagent a d d i t i o n bed, t h e l i f e t i m e o f t h e bed can be extended by i n c r e a s i n g i t s c a p a c i t y w i t h o u t causing an increase i n peak variance. I n p r a c t i c e a bed o f 4.6 mm x 4 cm was used, packed each day w i t h a m i x t u r e o f f i n e l y ground TCPO and 40-80 f l glass beads, 70:30 by weight. Depending on t h e d e s i r e d l i f e t i m e , t h e TCPO charge v a r i e d from 50-250 mg; t h e remaining space a t t h e i n l e t s i d e
of t h e r e a c t o r was simply f i l l e d w i t h g l a s s beads. The g l a s s beads improve
t h e flow c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s ,
reduce back pressure,
and s i p l i f y packing by
decreasing t h e s t a t i c e l e c t r i c a l charge on t h e s o l i d TCPO p a r t i c l e s . Two c o n f i g u r a t i o n s were developed t o i n v e s t i g a t e t h e p o s s i b i l i t i e s of TCPO a d d i t i o n from o f f - p a t h s o l i d reagent beds. I n t h e f i r s t , a dual-pump design (Fig. 5a), choice o f t h e s o l v e n t d e l i v e r e d t o t h e reagent bed does n o t a f f e c t t h e HPLC separation. With t h i s system t h e s o l v e n t dependences o f t h e photochemical r e a c t i o n and chromatography a r e i s o l a t e d from t h e chemi luminescent response, addition conditions.
f a c i 1 it a t i n g t h e o p t i m i z a t i o n o f t h e reagent
I n t h e second, TCPO i s s o l u b i l i z e d from t h e reagent
bed w i t h o u t any a d d i t i o n a l reagent pump. To accomplish t h i s , t h e f l o w from t h e HPLC mobile phase pump i s s p l i t i n t o a reagent a d d i t i o n -
and a
chromatographic stream (Fig. 5b). Flow s p l i t t i n g reduces equipment demands a t t h e expense o f f l e x i b i l i t y i n choice o f reagent a d d i t i o n s o l v e n t . The f l o w r a t e through t h e reagent bed i s
an important
parameter i n t h e
o p t i m i z a t i o n o f these systems. Concentration o f TCPO i n t h e d e t e c t o r f l o w c e l l i s determined by i t s s o l u b i l i t y i n t h e reagent bed s o l v e n t ,
the
r e l a t i v e f l o w r a t e s o f t h e two s o l v e n t streams, and t h e r a t e o f reagent decomposition i n t h e s o l v e n t . Residence t i m e o f t h e reagent and t h e a n a l y t e i n t h e d e t e c t o r c e l l decreases as t h e t o t a l f l o w r a t e increases. Peroxyoxalate chemiluminescence i s l o n g l i v e d r e l a t i v e t o t h e residence time i n t h e HPLC d e t e c t o r c e l l so t h a t t h e e f f i c i e n c y o f l i g h t c o l l e c t i o n w i l l be reduced by h i g h t o t a l f l o w r a t e s .
275
In Table I some d e t e c t i o n l i m i t s o b t a i n e d w i t h t h e dual pump system a r e compared w i t h t h o s e o b t a i n e d w i t h l i q u i d - p h a s e
TCPO a d d i t i o n ,
combined
w i t h t h e i m m o b i l i z e d 3-AF d e t e c t o r c e l l o r w i t h l i q u i d - p h a s e r u b r e n e as f l u o r o p h o r e . I t i s obvious t h a t t h e r e s u l t s o b t a i n e d w i t h s o l i d - s t a t e TCPO a d d i t i o n combined w i t h i m m o b i l i z e d AF compare f a v o u r a b l y w i t h t h e o t h e r data.
TO WASTE
1
DUAL -PUYP SYSTEY PRESSURE YETER INJECTOR
I y HPLC PUYP
h
CONFLUENCE TEE,
- p f Clg COLUWY
1
n
FUSE DAYPEYER
~~
PHOTOCHEY ICAL REACTOR
BE0
?\TCPO
H16H PRESURESYRINCE PUYP
YOBILE PHASE
TO YASTE
t INJECTOR
-
-
CONfLUEYCE TEE \ RECORDER
A
Y I
PHOTOCHEYICAL REACTOR
\-
TCPOBED
i
M C i PRESSURE COLUYNS
YOBILE PHASE
Fig. 5
Schematic diagram o f t h e dual-pump system (a) and t h e s p l i t - f l o w system (b) ( r e f . 99). F u r t h e r d e t a i l s see t e x t .
276
TABLE I
Dual-pump system d e t e c t i o n l i m i t s (S/N = 3) i n picomoles on column. Solvent dependence and comparison t o l i q u i d phase reagent a d d i t i o n ( r e f s . 98, 99). S o l i d s t a t e TCPO a d d i t i o n w i t h immobilized f l u o r o p h o r e ~~
Compound phase
-
~
Reagent a d d i t i o n s o l v e n t
100% CH30H 80% CH30H
L i q u i d phase a d d i t i o n o f TCPO Immobilized
Liquid
fluorophore (3-AF)
fluorophore (rubrene)
100% CH3CN
2-methyl 1,4-naphthoquinone ( v i t a m i n K-3)
0.29
1.8
0.31
2.0
0.84
9,lO-anthraquinone
0.29
1.6
0.30
1.8
0.68
2-t-butylanthraqui none
0.24
1.3
0.24
1.5
0.53
The HPLC mobile phase i s 95% methanol a t a f l o w r a t e o f 0.76 ml/min i n a l l cases. I n t h e dual-pump system, t h e TCPO bed f l o w r a t e i s 0.42 ml/min. For l i q u i d phase a d d i t i o n o f TCPO i t i s d e l i v e r e d i n acetone a t a concent r a t i o n o f 0.92 g/1 w i t h a f l o w r a t e o f 0.28 ml/min. Rubrene, 45 mg/l i s t h e l i q u i d phase f l u o r o p h o r e and i s d e l i v e r e d i n 9 9 : l acetone: T R I S b u f f e r (pH = 8.0) a t 0.15 ml/min. The f i n a l b u f f e r c o n c e n t r a t i o n i s 0.5 mM.
6 some chromatograms a r e shown. The d e t e c t i o n l i m i t s a t t a i n a b l e w i t h t h e s p l i t - f l o w system a r e o n l y l i t t l e h i g h e r than f o r t h e dual-pump system. O f course t h e percentage o f water i n t h e e l u e n t i n t h e s p l i t - f l o w system p l a y s an important r o l e : on t h e one hand i t i n f l u e n c e s t h e r e t e n t i o n times, on t h e o t h e r hand t h e peak h e i g h t s i n c e t h e TCPO r e a c t i o n g i v e s lower CL s i g n a l s a t h i g h e r water contents. We conclude t h a t a d d i t i o n o f TCPO from s o l i d - s t a t e reagent beds has c l e a r advantages over l i q u i d - p h a s e d e l i v e r y . I t widens t h e range of r e a c t i o n s a p p l i c a b l e t o HPLC d e t e c t i o n by r e l a x i n g t h e s t a b i l i t y requirements o f t h e reagent i n t h e d e l i v e r y s o l v e n t . Even i n t h e case of p a r t i a l decomposition as i n methanol, t h e decreasing response over t i m e associated w i t h reagent breakdown d u r i n g l i q u i d - p h a s e a d d i t i o n i s n o t observed. Since t h e time spent i n t h e l i q u i d phase remains constant, t h e In
Fig.
l e v e l s o f reagent and reagent breakdown products i n t r o d u c e d t o t h e c e l l
also remain constant over t h e l i f e o f t h e reagent bed. Thus any reagent of l i m i t e d s o l u b i l i t y which e x h i b i t s a reasonable degree o f s t a b i l i t y i n s o l u t i o n i s amenable t o t h i s method o f a d d i t i o n .
277
I
10
e
")"r"
4 MINUTES
2
C
Fig. 6
Liquid chromatograms of quinones detected via the post-column photochemical reactor/peroxyoxalate CL detection system (ref. 99). The four peaks belong to menadione (5.9 pmol), anthraquinone (4.5 pmol), 2-methylanthraquinone (3.6 pmol) and 2-t-butyl anthraquinone (4.7 pmol). For chromatogram "C" the amounts injected are 2.5 times higher. a) Dual-pump system; 94% CH OH HPLC flow of 0.72 ml/min. TCPO is added with CH OH + T R I S h f f e r 99:l at 0.42 ml/min. b) Split-flow syztem; 94% CH OH HPLC flow of 0.73 ml/min and the reagent bed flow is 0.32 r?il/min. c) Split-flow system; 80% CH OH HPLC flow of 0.73 ml/min and the reagent bed flow is 0.32 r?il/min.
278 2.3.4
COUPLING WITH IMERs The a p p l i c a b i l i t y o f immobilized enzymes i n chemical a n a l y s i s has been
discussed thoroughly by L.D.Bowers
(ref,
91). The most obvious advantage
o f i m m o b i l i z i n g these b i o c a t a l y s t s i s t h a t they can be r e a d i l y separated from t h e r e a c t i o n m i x t u r e and t h u s reused. Other important aspects a r e t h a t , as a r e s u l t of i m m o b i l i z a t i o n , t h e enzymes may be more s t a b l e than t h e r e s o l u b l e analogues and a p p l i c a b l e i n s o l v e n t s c o n t a i n i n g o r g a n i c
O f course t h e l a t t e r p o i n t i s o f p a r t i c u l a r i n t e r e s t if immobilized enzymes are a p p l i e d as post-column r e a c t o r s (IMERs) i n HPLC experiments. Besides i t i s noted t h a t i n a f l o w system t h e apparent enzymic a c t i v i t y i s n o t o n l y dependent on t h e c a t a l y t i c r a t e of t h e enzyme b u t a l s o on nonenzymic f a c t o r s as mass t r a n s p o r t o f t h e s u b s t r a t e . Most o f t h e a p p l i c a t i o n s o f IMERs i n HPLC presented so f a r have d e a l t w i t h p o l a r n a t u r a l products which a r e e l u t e d from t h e HPLC system w i t h a low content o f organic s o l v e n t i n t h e mobile phase ( r e f . 92). As an example we r e f e r t o t h e q u a n t i t a t i o n o f urea and ammonia i n samples from an urea p l a n t and i n waste water samples ( r e f . 101). Immobilized urease degrades post-column u r e a i n t o arbon d i o x i d e and ammonia. The l a t t e r product subsequently reacted w i t h o-phthalaldehyde t o form a compound t h a t can be very w e l l q u a n t i t a t e d by f uorescence d e t e c t i o n :
modifier.
(
a -
NI l,),CO + I1,O
urew
co + 2N€13
CHO
NH, +
fluorescentconlpourtd
CHO
Coupling of post-column IMERs w i t h CL d e t e c t i o n i m p l i e s an a d d i t i o n a l c o m p a t i b i l i t y problem, s i n c e t h e o p t i m a l c o n d i t i o n s o f t h e CL r e a c t i o n do n o t match w i t h those o f t h e enzymatic r e a c t i o n .
For example, t h e l u m i n o l
r e a c t i o n r e q u i r e s s t r o n g l y a l k a l i n e c o n d i t i o n s (pH about 12), w h i l e f o r peroxyoxalate CL i n h i g h l y aqueous media t h e CL e f f i c i e n c y i s extremely low so t h a t h i g h organic m o d i f i e r c o n c e n t r a t i o n s a r e needed (e.g.,
80%
a c e t o n i t r i l e ) . Coupling of t h e l u m i n o l r e a c t i o n t o enzymatic r e a c t i o n s has been reported ( r e f s . 65,
102). S c o t t e t a l . have shown t h e p o t e n t i a l of t h e peroxyoxalate CL r e a c t i o n i n combination w i t h immobilized u r i c a s e f o r t h e determination o f u r i c a c i d ( r e f . 103).
279 One o f t h e u l t i m a t e goals o f t h e combination o f IMERs and HPLC i s t h e
I f the e l u a t e from t h e a n a l y t i c a l column f l o w s through t h e IMER, t h e enzyme causes a r e a c t i o n s e l e c t i v e f o r t h e s u b s t r a t e molecules l e a d i n g t o t h e formation o f products which can be detected by s u i t a b l e methods. It i s emphasized t h a t , d e s p i t e o f t h e s e l e c t i v i t y o f t h e IMER i n complex application o f
(natural)
group-specific
samples
and/or
as u r i n e o r
serum,
stereoselective
t h e eventual
enzymes.
detection o f
the
products formed i n t h e IMER may b e hindered by i n t e r f e r e n c e s . That i s t h e reason why combination w i t h t h e h i g h l y s e l e c t i v e CL d e t e c t i o n techniques i s interesting. I n o r d e r t o i n v e s t i g a t e t h e c o m p a t i b i l i t y o f immobilized oxidases w i t h the s o l i d - s t a t e peroxyoxalate CL d e t e c t i o n system, Van Zoonen e t a l . have t e s t e d ( t h e low c o s t enzyme) glucose oxidase as a model system ( r e f . 33). Two i m m o b i l i z a t i o n procedures f o r glucose oxidase were examined, i.e., i m m o b i l i z a t i o n on an ion-exchanger simply by e l e c t r o s t a t i c i n t e r a c t i o n according t o Meek e t a l .
(ref.
104)
and i m m o b i l i z a t i o n
v i a chemical
bonding on g l a s s beads f o l l o w i n g t h e g l u t a r a l d e h y d e method according t o Weetall ( r e f . 105). I n t h e l a t t e r method t h e g l a s s m a t r i x , a f t e r a c t i v a t i o n , i s coated w i t h an amino f u n c t i o n a l group and subsequently t h e f o l l o w i n g steps a r e c a r r i e d o u t :
The ion-exchanger support appeared t o be u n s u i t a b l e f o r i m m o b i l i z a t i o n
of
oxidases:
it
strongly
retains
the
formed
hydrogenperoxide.
Such
problems a r e n o t encountered f o r t h e IMER based on g l a s s beads. Two
FIA experimental set-ups were compared. I n t h e former a s i n g l e
f l o w l i n e was a p p l i e d and t h e f l o w composition was s i m p l y optimized f o r t h e CL r e a c t i o n , i.e., 80% aqueous a c e t o n i t r i l e c o n t a i n i n g a small amount of T r i s b u f f e r . Even f o r such a h i g h m o d i f i e r c o n c e n t r a t i o n i n an IMER o f 6 cm length and 3.0 mm
15% was
achieved.
I.D., a t pH
Rather
= 8.0 a glucose conversion as h i g h as s u r p r i s i n g l y t h e conversions a r e almost
independent o f f l o w r a t e i n t h e range between 0.3 and 1.5 m l m i n - l .
The
l i m i t o f d e t e c t i o n f o r glucose was 8 x 10-8M.
To avoid t h e entrance o f h i g h a c e t o n i t r i l e c o n c e n t r a t i o n s i n t h e IMER,
280 i n the second set-up a c e t o n i t r i l e was added according t o t h e make-up flow p r i n c i p l e . The aqueous f l o w containing T r i s b u f f e r passes trough t h e IMER a t a r a t e o f 0.3 m l min-' and combines w i t h an a c e t o n i t r i l e f l o w of 1.0 m l min-' before entering t h e s o l i d - s t a t e CL r e a c t o r c e l l . Under these conditions t h e maximum conversion o f about 50% was found (only R-D glucose i s converted) and w i t h a smaller IMER (length 0.4 cm) f o r glucose a LOD of 5 x M was achieved and l i n e a r range up t o M. These encouraging solid-state r e s u l t s i n d i c a t e the f e a s i b i l i t y o f t h e (oxidase) IMER peroxyoxal a t e CL combination f o r HPLC.
-
Honda e t a l . have applied t h e combination o f IMERs and l i q u i d s t a t e peroxyoxalate CL i n HPLC f o r tylcholine
the simultaneous
(ACh) and c h o l i n e (Ch)
(ref.
determination
o f ace-
A mixed bed r e a c t o r of
89).
immobilized acetylcholine esterase and cholineoxidase was applied enabling the f o l l o w i n g r e a c t i o n pathway f o r acetylcholine:
0
(CfI,),NCH2CH,OCCH, + HzO
acetylcholine
II
0
esterase
0 (CH,)3NCH,CHZOH
+ CH3COOtl
choline
The optimum pH f o r these enzymes i s from 8.1 t o 8.5 so t h a t t h e r e i s no pH problem f o r the a p p l i c a t i o n o f TCPO CL. Nevertheless, t h e HPLC set-up requires t h r e e pumps as shown i n F i g . 7. The separation o f c h o l i n e and acetylcholine i s based on paired-ion chromatography: t h e column i s an RP-18 column and t h e eluent (10 mM p h t h a l i c acid, 1.2 mM t r i e t h y l a m i n e and
76 mM sodiumoctanesulfonate pH adjusted t o 5.0 w i t h KOH) has a pH t o o low t o be applicable t o the IMER. Hence, a f t e r the separation column a flow of T r i s b u f f e r (pH = 8.5) was provided; n i t r a t e was used instead o f c h l o r i d e as a counterion because c h l o r i d e i s known t o quench t h e CL r e a c t i o n (see section 2.5). The t h i r d pump d e l i v e r s TCPO and t h e fluorophore perylene i n a mixture o f ethylacetate and acetone. Flow r a t e s were chosen so t h a t i n the CL reaction medium t h e f l o w has t h e composition ethy1acetate:acetone: buffer:eluate i n 15:45:4:8.
Due t o t h e low s o l u b i l i t y o f TCPO i n t h i s
medium i t s concentration i n the second a d d i t i o n l i n e could not be higher than 1.2 mM i n order t o prevent p r e c i p i t a t i o n e f f e c t s . Good r e s u l t s were obtained f o r standard solutions: d e t e c t i o n l i m i t s f o r Ch and ACh of about
1 pmol w i t h l i n e a r ranges from 10 pmol t o 10 nmol.
eluent
t--1
4
injector
P
TCPO
28 1
column
+ perylene
7
CL monitcr
Fig. 7
Schematical r e p r e s e n t a t i o n o f t h e e x periment al s e t - u p f o r t h e simultaneous d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f a c e t y l c h o l i n e and c h o l i n e v i a IMER-peroxyoxalate CL d e t e c t i o n , a c c o r d i n g t o Honda e t a l . ( r e f . 89). F u r t h e r d e t a i l s , see t e x t .
I t i s i n t e r e s t i n g t o compare t h i s approach, based on l i q u i d - s t a t e p e r -
oxy ox alat e CL, w i t h t h e s o l i d - s t a t e p r i n c i p l e a p p l i e d t o t h e same problem, i.e .
t h e simultaneous d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f ACh and Ch ( r e f . 34). A d e t a i l e d
b l o c k diagram o f t h e e x p e r i m e n t a l set-up i s present ed i n F ig. 8. Another s e p a r a t i o n p r i n c i p l e has been a p p l i e d , ( d e r i v e d f rom Damsma e t a l .
(ref.
106) based on a (home-packed) cation-exchange column f o r t h e s e p a r a t i o n o f ACh and Ch: t h e m o b i l e phase i s aqueous 0.05 M potassium phosphate (pH = 7.4) c o n t a i n i n g tetramethylamnoniumnitrate (again n i t r a t e i n s t e a d o f c h l o r i d e t o p r e v e n t CL quenching).
A precolumn was p l a c e d b e f o r e t h e
i n j e c t o r as a guard column and p u l s e dampener. The IMER (ACh e s t e r a s e and Ch oxidase c o v a l e n t l y bonded t o sepharose,
dimension 75 x 2.1 mm) was
d i r e c t l y coupled t o t h e a n a l y t i c a l column by means o f a v a l c o union. An a c e t o n i t r i l e make-up f l o w was a p p l i e d c o n t a i n i n g 18-crown-6, a crown e t h e r that
efficiently
conditions
forms
complexes
with
potassium
even r e l a t i v e l y h i g h c o n c e n t r a t i o n s
ions.
Under
these
o f pot assium phosphate
b u f f e r s can be mixed w i t h a c e t o n i t r i l e w i t h o u t p r e c i p i t a t i o n problems. Furthermore t h e a c e t o n i t r i l e f l o w c o n t a i n s t r i e t h y l a m i n e (TEA), causing a 10-f o ld improvement o f S/N r a t i o . Optimal f l o w r a t e s were 0.5 m l min-' f o r t h e chromatographic and 1.5 m l m i n - l f o r t h e make-up f l o w . E s s e n t i a l i s t h e use o f an e f f i c i e n t v o r t e x m i x e r because m i x i n g - n o i s e i s t h e main f a c t o r d e t e r m i n i n g t h e d e t e c t i o n l i m i t s t h a t can be reached. F or t h e CL d e t e c t i o n t h e t w o - l a y e r bed r e a c t o r o f s o l i d TCPO and 3-AF i m m o b i l i z e d on g l a s s beads was used.
282
............... ............. .............. ..............
apeour
QumQ
,.I,d\,>,,.,W
m i o n eichmgu
h"llrn.TM
Fig. 8
1W.R
Block diagram of the experimental set-up for the simultaneous determination of acetylcholine and choline via IMER-perox oxalate CL detection, according to Van Zoonen et al. (ref. 347. Further details see text.
Chromatograms of untreated urine samples spiked with ACh and Ch are presented in Fig. 9; similar pictures on deproteinated serum samples are shown in Fig. 10. The detection limits are comparable with those reported by Honda et al. (ref. 89). However, the solid state set-up is easier to handle since only one post-column pump is utilized. The TCPO layer has a lifetime of about 4 hours, but repacking is quite easy and can be performed with a microspatula. The IMER can be applied for several hundred samples: if it is used continuously for two weeks, the sensitivity is decreased by about 50%.
8
Fig. 9
(a) Chromatogram of an undiluted' urine sample, (b) chromatogram of a urine sample spiked with 20 pmol of Ch and ACh detected with the set-up depicted in Fig. 8 (ref. 34). Further details, see text.
Summarizing this section, it is concluded that the combination of IMERs and solid state peroxyoxalate reactors have potential for analysis
283 of complex samples e s p e c i a l l y because o f t h e h i g h s e l e c t i v i t y i n h e r e n t t o the
combination
of
rather
specific
enzymatic
and
chemiluminescence
r e a c t i o n s . Developments along these l i n e s have t o be a n t i c i p a t e d .
Fig. 10
2.4
(a) Chromatogram o f a d e p r o t e i n a t e d pooled serum sample, (b) serum sample spiked w i t h 200 pmol o f Ch and ACh detected w i t h t h e set-up depicted i n F i g . 8 ( r e f . 34). F u r t h e r d e t a i l s , see text. USE OF THE SOLID TCPO REACTOR FOR DETECTION OF FLUOROPHORES ( r e f .
107) Although
in
this
chapter
we
are
primarily
concerned
with
non-fluorescent compounds, i t i s a p p r o p r i a t e t o p o i n t o u t t h a t t h e s o l i d s t a t e TCPO r e a c t o r has been invoked s u c c e s s f u l l y f o r t h e d e t e c t i o n of f l u o r o p h o r i c compounds.
Compared t o t h e conventional
peroxyoxalate
CL
d e t e c t i o n system, a s i g n i f i c a n t s i m p l i f i c a t i o n has been reached w i t h o u t a s u b s t a n t i a l loss
i n sensitivity.
reduced experimental complexity, least
partially
circumvents
As noted above,
i n addition t o the
reagent a d d i t i o n from a s o l i d bed a t the
chemical
decomposition
problems
encountered i n l i q u i d - p h a s e a d d i t i o n o f o x a l a t e s . I n t h i s way a l a r g e r range o f s o l v e n t s can be u t i l i z e d , because TCPO i s d i s s o l v e d very s h o r t l y before i t i s a c t u a l l y used i n t h e CL r e a c t i o n . Two experimental
set-ups
have been examined w i t h t h e s o l i d TCPO
reagent bed s i t u a t e d p a r a l l e l t o t h e a n a l y t i c a l column i n o r d e r t o reduce band broadening (see F i g . 11). The s p l i t - f l o w system, u t i l i z i n g o n l y t h e mobile phase pump, can be employed i f t h e chromatographic s e p a r a t i o n can be achieved under c o n d i t i o n s matching those o f t h e CL r e a c t i o n ( i n t h e model system presented more than 80% a c e t o n i t r i l e ) . A h i g h l y s o p h i s t i c a t e d system t o r e g u l a t e t h e s p l i t r a t i o was n o t necessary; r e t e n t i o n times were r e p r o d u c i b l e w i t h i n 2% (over 14 chromatograms). The two pump system c o u l d be used very w e l l f o r mobile phase compositions w i t h a t l e a s t 50%
284 acetonitrile.
In
more aqueous media p r e c i p i t a t i o n o f TCPO i n t h e mixing
tee-piece was encountered. The CL signal i s l i n e a r l y dependent on t h e H202 concentration i n t h e eluent. However, if the concentrations become t o o high a l s o background i s increased. For p r a c t i c a l reasons such as corrosion o f pumps and s t a i n l e s s s t e e l p a r t s o f t h e system, concentrations higher than 10-1 M H202 were n o t u t i l i z e d . Under these conditions t h e performance o f the a n a l y t i c a l Column (Spherisorb ODs-5 i n the present example) remained constant f o r a t l e a s t a month. The TCPO reactor ( i n t h e present example a 6 cm, 3 mm I.D.
stainless
s t e e l column w i t h a mixture o f s o l i d f i n e l y ground TCPO and 40-80
rm
glass
beads) could be employed a t l e a s t 8 hours without any d r i f t s ; each day TCPO was d i r e c t l y added t o the reactor. A f t e r about 2 weeks t h e r e a c t o r should be repacked completely since a f t e r i m p u r i t i e s can accumulate in the reactor.
Fig. 11
a prolonged time of
use
Schematical representation of t h e two-pump system I and t h e single-pump system I1 f o r t h e d e t e c t i o n o f fluorescers based on peroxyoxalate chemiluminescence. As r e s t r i c t o r a 25 cm Spherisorb ODs-5 column was applied. The luminescence was measured w i t h a Kratos FS 970 fluorescence d e t e c t o r ( r e f . 107).
TABLE I 1
Comparison o f d e t e c t i o n l i m i t s (pg) obtained by Sigvardson e t a1 ( r e f . 80) and van Zoonen e t a1 ( r e f . 107).
.
.
Sigvardson e t a l . Ana 1y t e
SIN
=
2 ~
p e r y l ene 3-ami nofluoranthene 9,lO-dephenylanthracene anthracene tetracene benz (a) pyrene II2-benzanthracene
Van Zooner e t a l . 2 pump system SIN = 3
0.77 0.30*
s p l i t system SIN = 3
~
1.6 0.6 30 150 860 80 53
20 130 735 45 20.5
2.0 0.7 35 200 980 120
65
*Calculated from t h e t e x t I n Fig. 12a a chromatogram obtained by t h e s p l i t - f l o w method i s shown. I n Table I 1 d e t e c t i o n l i m i t s o f t h e both s o l i d TCPO a d d i t i o n systems (see i i g . 11) w i t h those o f t h e conventional CL system determined by Sigvardson e t al.
( r e f . 80) a r e compared.
I t i s obvious t h a t t h e s i m p l i f i e d system
provides no s u b s t a n t i a l l o s s o f s e n s i t i v i t y .
O f course t h e v a r i a t i o n i n
d e t e c t i o n l i m i t s f o r t h e fluorophores under i n v e s t i g a t i o n r e f l e c t s t h e i r CL e f f i c i e n c y i n t h e peroxyoxalate r e a c t i o n , which i s n o t o n l y determined by t h e energy o f t h e lowest e x c i t e d e l e c t r o n i c s t a t e b u t a l s o by t h e o x i d a t i o n p o t e n t i a l . As such, f o r i m m o b i l i z a t i o n on g l a s s
3-aminofluoranthene, t h e compound a p p l i e d beads (see s e c t i o n 2.3.2) i s t h e most
e f f i c i e n t CL f 1uorophore. QUENCHED PEROXYOXALATE CHEMILUMINESCENCE DETECTION
2.5
Various compounds, a l s o i f present a t low c o n c e n t r a t i o n s , a r e a b l e t o quench peroxyoxalate chemiluminescence ( r e f s . important
to
acquire
some
knowledge
about
108-110). the
Obviously i t i s
background
of
this
phenomenon i n o r d e r t o be aware of p o s s i b l e and p o t e n t i a l i n t e r f e r e n c e s when peroxyoxalate CL i s a p p l i e d f o r d e t e c t i o n purposes i n HPLC and F I A .
On
the
other
hand
it
is
interesting
to
examine
the
potential
of
peroxyoxalate CL f o r d e t e c t i o n o f these quenching compounds, e s p e c i a l l y if o t h e r e x i s t i n g d e t e c t i o n techniques have some disadvantages. I n t h i s s e c t i o n f i r s t some p o i n t s r e g a r d i n g new i n s i g h t s i n t o t h e mechanism o f t h e peroxyoxalate CL r e a c t i o n a r e discussed. Such a d i s c u s s i o n i s needed s i n c e i n t h e mechanistic s t u d i e s r e p o r t e d thus f a r no a t t e n t i o n has been p a i d t o quenching phenomena a t very low c o n c e n t r a t i o n l e v e l s . Subsequently, t h e a p p l i c a b i l i t y of Quenched CL d e t e c t i o n i s considered and f i n a l l y an i n t e r p r e t a t i o n o f t h e quenching process i s presented.
286
1
I
0
.
4
.
.
8
.
.
1
.
2
.
.
%
t(min) +
Fig. 12
2.5.1
Chromatogram obtained by t h e s p l i t - f l o w method f o r t h e determination o f fluorophores v i a s o l i d - s t a t e TCPO a d d i t i o n (ref. 107). Mobile phase compo$tion: 90% a c e t o n i t r i l e , 10% aqueous T r i s (5 mM, pH = 8.0), 10 M H202. I n j e c t i o n volume: 20 4. 1. 25 pg 3-aminofluoranthene 2. 2 ng anthracene 3. 300 pg 1,2-benzanthracene 4. 30 pg perylene 5. 149 pg benz(a)pyrene 6. 350 pg 9,lO-diphenylanthracene. ON THE MECHANISM OF PEROXYOXALATE CL
By now i t i s unambiguous t h a t t h e r e a c t i o n scheme o f t h e peroxyoxalate CL reaction presented i n section 2.1 does not account f o r a l l experimental data a v a i l a b l e i n the l i t e r a t u r e .
There are two obvious reasons why a
d i r e c t energy t r a n s f e r between t h e 1,2-dioxetanedione and the fluorophore i s extremely u n l i k e l y .
F i r s t of
all,
t h e i n t e n s i t y o f CL i s s t r o n g l y
dependent upon t h e e l e c t r o n e g a t i v i t y o f the a r y l group o f t h e o x a l a t e esters which excludes a common intermediate. Secondly, i t i s n o t o n l y t h e energy o f the lowest excited e l e c t r o n i c s t a t e o f the fluorophore t h a t determines the CL i n t e n s i t y ; a l s o i t s i o n i z a t i o n p o t e n t i a l plays a r o l e . Catherall, Palmer and Cundall have pub1 ished a d e t a i l e d k i n e t i c study using b i s (pentachloropheny1)oxalate
(PCPO)
as
oxal ate,
9,lO-diphenyl-
anthracene (DPA) as fluorophore and sodiumsalicylate as base ( r e f . 76). They observed t h a t the decay of CL i s independent o f t h e DPA concentration while the quantum y i e l d increases l i n e a r l y w i t h (DPA) reaches a maximum.
The rate-determining
step
and e v e n t u a l l y
i s probably a r e a c t i o n
between PCPO and t h e hydrogenperoxide anion OOH-(which explains t h e r o l e
of base catalysts) and does not involve the fluorophore. The lifetime of the intermediate formed in this step was found to be about 5 x which is an indication for an unstable compound and is not consistent with attempts to identify a relative stable dioxetane. The same authors compared the efficiencies of a number of fluorophores. They were able t o show the existence of a relationship between the normalized CL quantum yields (pL/Fwhere pLand + are the chemiluminescence and fluorescence quantum yields, respectively) and the oxidation potentials of the fluorophores pointing to an electrontransfer mechanism. Formally, the mechanism according to Catherall et al. can be represented as follows: PCPO+OOH-
+
X
PCPO+OOH-
-+
non CL products
x
+
non CL decay
X+F
+
XF
XF
+
F* + products
XF
+
F +products
+ +
F +hvF
F* F*
F +heat
(la)
(4b)
where (OOH-) is proportional to the initial concentrations of both H202 and PCPO and X is a reactive intermediate (ref. 76). Conventional kinetic treatment, assuming that the lifetimes o f X, XF and F* are short, gives for the intensity of chemiluminescence at any time, t, defined as
I = d-( h ~=) k4a [F*] t dt
the following expression
if oxalate i s in excess. [PCPO], is the oxalate ester concentration which is effectively constant with time and [H202], is the concentration of hydrogenperoxide at any time t. The @ s are the efficiencies of the reaction steps (4a), (3a) and (2b), respectively; @4a of course being equivalent to the fluorescence quantum yield F. The time dependence of
288 the hydrogenperoxide concentration can be w r i t t e n as
The number o f quanta emitted (QE) i s given by
=I m
QE
(9)
Itdt
0
so t h a t QE i s equal t o
wherein
la i s the e f f i c i e n c y o f
Thus, i n excess o f oxalate,
r e a c t i o n step ( l a ) .
TL i s
equal t o the product o f f o u r eff i c i e n c i e s (i.e., those o f steps ( l a ) , (Zb), (3a) and 4a)) and t h e i n i t i a l i.e., H202 concentration. The r o l e o f F i s r e a d i l y v i s u a l i s e d v i a
which approximates (kZb/kza) [F]
under conditions where kza >>4k2b
[Fl.
This i s generally met f o r fluorophore concentrations below 10- M since 3 1 k2b/k2a z 5 x 10 M- ; as noted before kZa-' i s about 5 x lom7 s ( r e f .
76). Therefore, a t low fluorophore concentrations QE ( t h e CL s i g n a l ) i s proportional t o [F]. Furthermore Eq. ( r e f . 10) shows the l i n e a r dependence These two r e l a t i o n s h i p s underline t h e between QE and [H2O2Io. a p p l i c a b i l i t y o f t h e peroxyoxalate CL r e a c t i o n f o r fluorophore and H2OZ detection purposes. As the key intermediate X I C a t h e r a l l e t a l . assume 3-pentachlorophenoxy-3-hydroxy-l ,2-di oxetanone, denoted as
0-0
R -0-C-C
I I
OH
I
R =
No
CI
CI
289
which r e a c t s w i t h F t o a r a d i c a l i o n p a i r
R-0-C-C
.
.
OH
t h a t subsequently undergoes t h e f o l l o w i n g sequence
More r e c e n t l y A l v a r e z e t a l . ( r e f . 77) p u b l i s h e d a d e t a i l e d k i n e t i c study on t h e same r e a c t i o n u t i l i z i n g TCPO as t h e o x a l a t e , t r i e t h y l a m i n e as t h e base, DPA as t h e f l u o r o p h o r e i n e t h y l a c e t a t e as t h e s o l v e n t .
Their
r e s u l t s s t r o n g l y suggest t h a t i n s t e a d o f a s i n g l e i n t e r m e d i a t e a t l e a s t two i n t e r m e d i a t e compounds XI
and X2 p r o d u c i n g t h e same s i n g l e t e x c i t e d
s t a t e o f DPA, p l a y a r o l e , a c o n c l u s i o n based on a t wo-pulse i n t e n s i t y / time p r o f i l e occuring a t lower concentrations o f triethylamine. A p o s s i b l e s t r u c t u r e f o r X2 i s t h e i n t e r m e d i a t e X of C a t h e r a l l e t a l . g i v e n above. A p o s s i b l e s t u r c t u r e f o r XI i s
HO
-0 -C
-C -0 -R
; :
which i n C a t h e r a l l ' s work i s a p r e c u r s o r f o r X . Thus an i m p o r t a n t consequence o f A l v a r e z ' s t u d y i s t h e e x i s t e n c e o f an a d d i t i o n a l pathway f o r t h e f lu o r o p h o r e . Finally,
i t s h o u l d be r e a l i z e d t h a t
i n HPLC and FIA
reaction frequently
s o l v e n t s p a r t i a l l y composed o f w a t e r a r e a p p l i e d w h i l e f u r t h e r m o r e e l u e n t s as methanol a r e v e r y i m p o r t a n t . I n t h e s e s o l v e n t composit ions a d d i t i o n a l
290 reaction pathways such as a direct reaction of the oxalate with H20 or methanol may complicate the establishment of a reaction mechanism. Thus, for practical reasons it i s relevant to evaluate aryl oxalates in terms of maximum chemiluminescence intensity (maximum of It), decay rate, SOlubility in different solvents, stability in presence of hydrogenperoxide and pH working range as has been done by Honda, Miyaguchi and Imai (ref. 111). They have shown that among others bis(2-nitrophenyl) oxalate, 2-NPO, has favourable properties: it is six times more soluble in acetonitrile than TCPO, has a reasonable stability in presence of H202 and is optimally applicable in the pH range 4-6. At this point we emphasize that it is not only the solubility of the oxalate that hampers the success of the peroxyoxalate CL detection in aqueous solvents. Apparently, the CL efficiency is very low in water, which is readily conceived in view of the mechanism discussed above: an immediate dissociation of the radical ion pair as probably occurs in water obviously prevents the formation of F*. APPLICABILITY OF QUENCHED CL DETECTION (refs. 109, 110) Since electron transfer from F to X is initiating the formation of F*, it is appropriate to examine whether other easily oxidizable (but nonfluorescent) compounds are able to consume X thus reducing the overall CL quantum yield. Van Zoonen et al. have shown that various compounds are able to induce quenching of peroxyoxalate CL, even if present at low concentrations (refs. 109, 110). Some examples are presented in Table 1 1 1 . They do obey a Stern-Volmer type relationship, i .e. 2.5.2
I / r = l + k [Q O Q
Q
wherein k is a constant o f quenching (in M- 1) , [Q] is the quencher concenQ tration (in M) and I /I is the ratio of the CL signals in absence and O Q presence of Q , respectively. Obviously k determines the sensitivity of Q Quenched CL detection (QCL) for a particular (quenching) analyte, so that the method has an inherent selectivity. On the other hand it should be realized that QCL is based on a decrease of luminescence. Hence the noise of the luminescence signal in absence of quencher should be reduced as much as possible to achieve a favourable signal to noise ratio for QCL. This can be reached most easily under experimental conditions where I, is high.
291 TABLE 111
D e t e c t i o n l i m i t s (S/N = 3) f o r quenched CL u s i n g 2-NPO as o x a l a t e , d e r i v e d f r o m chromatograms
Anal y t e
1.o.d.
(ng)
~
bromide
1.5
iodide
0.3
sulphit e
1.1
nitrite
0.3
p-isopropylaniline
1.4
N ,N-dimet hy 1an i1ine
0.6
N -e t h y l - m - t o l u i d i n e
1.o 8.0 1.o
N, N -d ipro p y l a n i 1i n e
thiourea N-a1 l y l t h i o u r e a
1.6
e t h y ny l t h i o u r e a
2.0
met h imazol e
0.4
The i n f l u e n c e o f t h e H202 c o n c e n t r a t i o n and t h e n a t u r e and concent r a t i o n o f f l u o r o p h o r e on k have been examined. [H202] does n o t i n f l u e n c e Q k f o r c o n c e n t r a t i o n s between lo-* and M. T his i m p l i e s t h a t i n hydro-
Q
genperoxide d e t e r m i n a t i o n s s t r a i g h t c a l i b r a t i o n 1 i n e s w i 11 be observed i n t h e presence o f quenchers. O f c o u r s e t h e a s s o c i a t e d slopes w i l l depend on t h e c o n c e n t r a t i o n s o f quenchers,
so t h a t st andard a d d i t i o n procedures
should be a p p l i e d t o c i r c u m v e n t s y s t e m a t i c e r r o r s . F or QCL, t h e a p p l i e d H202 c o n c e n t r a t i o n s h o u l d be as h i g h as p o s s i b l e i n o r d e r t o reach a h i g h
I,;
i n p r a c t i c e concentrations from In fluid
to
M are appropriate.
samples b o t h c o n c e n t r a t i o n and n a t u r e o f
oxidation potential) hardly influence k
Q’
F (i. e. ,
its
As an example t h e r e s u l t s f o r
v a r i a b l e p e r y l e n e c o n c e n t r a t i o n s a r e g i v e n i n Table I V .
I n view o f t h e
achiev able s i g n a l t o n o i s e r a t i o t h i s means t h a t a f l u o r o p h o r e w i t h a h i g h CL e f f i c i e n c y i s a p p r o p r i a t e f o r QCL, so t h a t (immobilized) 3 - a m i n o f l u o r anthene s hould be a good c h o i c e . U n f o r t u n a t e l y ,
t h e quenching c o n s t a n t
appears t o be a f f e c t e d by t h e i m m o b i l i z a t i o n procedure o f 3 - a m i n o f l u o r ant hene. The r e p r o d u c i b i l i t y between d i f f e r e n t batches f o r t h e s y n t h e s i s o f imm o biliz ed f l u o r o p h o r e w i t h r e s p e c t t o t h e quenching c o n s t a n t s i s r a t h e r poor. As a genera l t r e n d i t m i g h t be concluded t h a t s i l i a n i z a t i o n i n d r y t o l u e n e (see s e c t i o n 2.3.2)
g i v e s t h e most s u i t a b l e p r o d u c t f o r QCL, s i n c e
i t y i e l d s t h e h i g h e s t quenching c o n s t a n t s a t i n t e r m e d i a t e CL i n t e n s i t y .
292 Nevertheless, the poor reproducibility is not a very serious problem, since a single batch of immobilized 3-AF can be used over long periods of time. TABLE IV
Effect of the concentration of the fluorophore (perylene) on the quenching constant of peroxyoxalate CL (applying soljg state TCPO addition) measured with methimazole (5.2 x 10 M)
Concentration
1, in relative units
k
4 4 x 10-6
40500 10000 1200
44 48 42
4
Q in 103M-l
For the development of QCL detection both solid TCPO (in a dual-cell configuration or in a separate make-up flow line) and liquid-state 2-NPO were applied. The latter can be mixed with H202 in acetonitrile without decomposition problems. It was found that for 2-NPO the QCL peak heights (and thus the kQ-values) were about 10 times higher than for TCPO.
aqueous butter
"PI
c
--,
1
LEI3
Detector containing immobilized fluorophore
pump 2-NPO and hydrogen peroxide
Fig. 13
Experimental set-up for HPLC with Quenched Chemi luminescence detection (ref. 110).
This explains the experimental set-up for QCL detection, see Fig. 13. For the analytes under study aqueous mobile phases were applied (for instance the chromatograms of iodide, bromide, sulphite and nitrite were obtained with the mobile phase aqueous ammoniumbenzoate, 10 mM, pH 5 and PRPX-100 column) as the mobile phase at a flow rate of 1 ml min-' and a reagent flow of 0.05 M H202 and 8mM 2-NPO in acetonitrile at a rate of 1.2 ml min-l. Thus,CL detection method is fully compatible with aqueous separation systems as for instance commonly used in ion chromatography. As
293 such,
the
limits
of
detection
presented
in
Table
111
are
quite
i n t e r e s t i n g , i n d i c a t i n g t h e p o t e n t i a l o f QCL d e t e c t i o n . I t s s e l e c t i v i t y i s s a t i s f a c t o r y as can be seen f r o m F i g . 14 where a chromatogram o f s p i k e d u r i n e i s shown; no p r e t r e a t m e n t o r d i l u t i o n o f t h e samples was necessary t o d e t e c t methimazole and N - a l l y 1 t h i o r u r e a i n t h i s m a t r i x .
time (min)
6 4
1412108
F ig. 14
2.5.3
2
0
Chromatogram o f a u r i n e sample s p i k e d w i t h 100 ng of Na l l y l t h i o u r e a (peak 1) and 25 ng methimazole (peak 2 ) w i t h Quenched CL d e t e c t i o n ; i n j e c t i o n volume 20 pl; chromatographic c o n d i t i o n s : RP-18 column; m o b i l e phase-fqueous ammoniumbenzoate (10 mM, pH 5) a t f l o w - r a t e 0.8 m l min ; reage-qt f l o w , 0.05 M ( r e f . 110). H202 and 8 mM 2NP0 i n a c e t o n i t r i l e a t 1.2 m l min THE QUENCHING ACTION ( r e f . 112)
The r e s u l t s d e s c r i b e d i n s e c t i o n 2.5.2
o b t a i n e d d u r i n g development of
t h e QCL d e t e c t i o n method have t o be d i s c u s s e d w i t h i n t h e framework of t h e pero x y ox alat e mechanism o u t l i n e d i n s e c t i o n 2.5.1. l o w i n g p o i n t s have t o be considered:
Summarizing, t h e f o l -
(1) r e a d i l y o x i d i z a b l e compounds a r e e f f i c i e n t quenchers; (2) t h e quenching c o n s t a n t k depends on t h e c h a r a c t e r o f t h e a r y l g r o u p i n Q t h e o x a l a t e ( f o r 2-NPO k i s about 10 t i m e s h i g h e r t h a n f o r TCPO);
(3) t h e quenching c o n s t a n t k
Q Q
i s independent o f t h e n a t u r e and t h e
concentration o f the fluorophore i n t h e l i q u i d state; (4) f o r immo biliz e d f l u o r o p h o r e , t h e i m m o b i l i z a t i o n procedure a f f e c t s kQ; (5) t h e quenching c o n s t a n t k i s independent of t h e c o n c e n t r a t i o n of H202.
Q
294
Point (5) rules out that the action of Q is connected with the reaction between oxalate and H202 (or OOH-), i.e., step (1) in the reaction scheme. At a first sight, the combination of points (1) and ( 3 ) is rather puzzling; as F and Q have similar properties concerning electrontransfer, why is the quenching effect of Q not attributable to a competition between F and Q? Fortunately, this paradox can be readily solved on the basis of Eq. (11). In presence of Q, the magnitude o f 9 b wi 1 1 be reduced to
where k2c is the rate constant of the reaction
X +Q
3
X-'Q+' 3 non CL decay
However, since kpb and kZc will have a comparable magnitude, also under these conditions kZa is commonly by far the largest term in the denumerator of Eq. (13) and thus effectively qb, = q,,. Summarizing the previous paragraph in terms of Eq. ( l o ) , @la and $b are not affected by [Q]. The same holds for @4a, the quantum yield of fluorescence; this is evident since fluorescence is not quenched under the experimental conditions under consideration. Thus, in terms of the Catherall reaction scheme only one possible explanation remains: Q is i .e., the fraction of XF that particularly influencing efficiency 3a, leads to F*.This is not unreasonable in view of Catherall mechanism; before F* is produced, X-*' undergoes rearrangement while F" is not changing. Collision with an electron donating compound would immediately destroy F" which explains that readily oxidizable compounds are good quenchers, point (1). Furthermore the lifetime of the radical ion pair determines the efficiency of the collisional quenching; this is in-line with point (2) since the nature o f X determines the lifetime of XF. Finally, it will be obvious that this interpretation can also account for the fact that the fluorophore immobilization procedure influences k 9: quenching requires a coll ision between Q and the fluorophore radical cation in the ion pair. In other words, k will be influenced by the Q ability of Q to approach immobilized 3-AF, which of course depends on the detailed structure of the surface layer on the solid substrate.
295
CONCLUDING REMARKS The recent results obtained for peroxyoxalate chemiluminescence as a chromatographic detection method for non-fluorescent analytes indicate a significant progress. The main line is the selective and sensitive detection of hydrogenperoxide produced in a post-column photochemical or immobi 1 ized enzyme reactor. The peroxyoxal ate CL reaction does not only provide favourable detection limits for H202 compared to other CL reactions, but even more important, also a high degree of selectivity. Only a minor amount of compounds do affect the CL efficiency o f the reaction and furthermore, if quenchers are present, the signal remains linearly related to the hydrogenperoxide concentrations. Also post-column systems as IMERS and photochemical reactors producing H202 generally have a good selectivity. This explains why the combination of such reactors and peroxyoxalate CL detection allows the quantitation of analytes in very complex matrices without elaborate sample pretreatment as has been shown for choline and acetyl choline in urine and serum. Thus it is expected that further interesting applications will be realized for instance by applying group-specific enzymes. Of course an important aspect of the applicability o f the described system is the reduction in the complexity of the experimental set-up that has been realized following the solid-state approach. On the one hand this is achieved by the development of the immobilized fluorophore reactor. Since the fluorophore is not consumed during the reaction one of the most efficient fluorophores, i .e., 3-aminofluoranthene, can be used despite o f its toxic properties. Furthermore, the emission of luminescence is localized in the detector cell. On the other hand the application of a solid state oxalate (TCPO) reactor simplifies the system. A disadvantage of such a reactor is its limited lifetime since the oxalate is consumed. Nevertheless, the system is easy to handle and in practice it can be used over 8 hours without any reduction of chromatographic integrity provided that it i s positioned not in line with the analytical column but in a flow addition line. An important positive aspect of solid state reactors is that instability of reagents is of minor importance. This is illustrated by the fact that in methanol/water eluents good results have been obtained. Of course for any particular application the compatability of the CL reaction conditions and the chromatographic separation conditions including the conditions required by the post-column reactor had to be considered. As such it i s interesting that the examples presented indicate 2.6
296 t h a t aqueous eluents do not exclude t h e a p p l i c a b i l i t y o f peroxyoxalate CL. I n f a c t the most i n t e r e s t i n g a p p l i c a t i o n s reported thus f a r are those r e q u i r i n g aqueous mobile phases.
3. 3.1
LIQUID PHASE PHOSPHORESCENCE DETECTION FUNDAMENTAL ASPECTS OF PHOSPHORESCENCE
Phosphorescence was i d e n t i f i e d i n 1944 by Lewis and Kasha as t h e emission o f r a d i a t i o n from t h e lowest t r i p l e t s t a t e o f a molecule t o t h e s i n g l e t ground s t a t e (ref.
113). Fig.
15 shows a s i m p l i f i e d Jablonski
energy diagram o f an analyte molecule (denoted as An).
s2
S1
SO
Fig. 15
Jablonski energy diagram
( n r = non r a d i a t i v e )
-
> -
---- *
absorption ( I )
f 1uorescence ( f ) i n t e r n a l conversion ( i c )
M”G- v i b r a t i o n a l re1a x a t i on ( v r ) HHI-Ht)
w
intersystem crossing ( i s c ) phosphorescence (p)
I r r a d i a t i o n w i t h l i g h t o f a s u i t a b l e wavelength t r a n s f e r s An from i t s e l e c t r o n i c ground s t a t e So t o an e x c i t e d e l e c t r o n i c s t a t e
Sn (Eq. 141,
w h i l e the s i n g l e t spin s t a t e i s conserved, Then a n o n - r a d i a t i v e decay process takes place, eventually ending i n the lowest v i b r a t i o n a l l e v e l of the f i r s t e x c i t e d s i n g l e t s t a t e S1(Eq 15). The e f f i c i e n c y o f t h i s decay process,
comprising
internal
conversion
of
energy
and
vibrational
r e l a x a t i o n v i a c o l l i s i o n s w i t h t h e solvent molecules surrounding An,
is
generally hundred per cent. T r a n s i t i o n from the S1 s t a t e back t o the So s t a t e can occur e i t h e r r a d i a t i o n l e s s v i a i n t e r n a l conversion and subsequent v i b r a t i o n a l r e l a x a t i o n (Eq. 16) o r by emission o f r a d i a t i o n
297
(Eq. 17). Furthermore, bimolecular quenching via reactions with a quencher q is a possible decay pathway (Eq 18). And finally, intersystem crossing from the S1 state to the lowest excited triplet state T1 is another nonradiative decay of the S1 state (Eq. 19). Once the analyte has reached the T1 state transition to the So state can take place via three competitive pathways, i.e., radiationless (Eq. ZO), by emission of radiation (Eq. Zl), called phosphorescence and by a bimolecular quenching reaction with a quenching compound Q (Eq. 22); the capital Q is utilized to emphasize that compounds quenching efficiently a T1 state of the analyte do not necessarily quench the analyte in its S1 state and vice versa.
3
An(S0)
The rate constants knf(S1 + So) and kisc(S1 + TI) usually range from 105-107 and 106-109 s-', respectively (ref. 114). The rate constant of the fluorescence process kf is in the order of 107-109 s (ref. 114). According to the rules of quantum mechanics the phosphorescence process is strictly forbidden as two electronic states of different spin multiplicities are involved. Nevertheless this process can be observed for certain molecules, as a result of spin-orbit coupling. When this mechanism occurs a triplet state is not pure but has some singlet character and a singlet state has some triplet character. The result is a triplet-singlet transition probability unequal zero, which means that the rate constant of the
298
phosphorescence process k is 10-l-1O2 s-'. The efficiencies of fluorP escence (q), intersystem crossing ( qsc) and phosphorescence ( 8 ) can be P readily expressed in terms o f the rate constants of the reactions Eqs. (16) to (22). The fluorescence efficiency is given by
0 =
kf = Qf kisc+kf+knf+xkq[q1 q
It i s equal to the fluorescence quantum yield q,since it gives the probability that An after absorption of radiation emits fluorescence. On the contrary, the quantum yield of phosphorescence is the product of the efficiency of intersystem crossing (the probability for An to reach the T1-state) and the efficiency of phosphorescence, i .e.,
t,
wherein k. 8.
=
lSc
+z
1sc
kisc + kf + knf
kq [ql
9
and
k
It i s appropriate t o invoke lifetimes in Eqs. (23) and (24). The lifetime of fluorescence Tf is equal to the lifetime of An(S), so that
299 This l i f e t i m e should be d i s t i n g u i s h e d from t h e r a d i a t i v e l i f e t i m e o f An(SI)
which i s d e f i n e d as kf-';
o n l y decay p a t h f o r An(S1),
they a r e o n l y equal i f r a d i a t i o n i s t h e
af i s hundred p e r cent.
i n o t h e r words i f
S i m i l a r l y t h e phosphorescence e f f i c i e n c y can be w r i t t e n as
eP = 5 i n which
z
P
t h e l i f e t i m e o f phosphorescence, i s equal t o t h e l i f e t i m e o f P' An(T1). Analogously w i t h t h e fluorescence l i f e t i m e , T < k where k P P P i s t h e r a d i a t i v e l i f e t i m e o f phosphorescence. Generally, b i m o l e c u l a r quenching o f An(S1) i s n e g l i g i b l e , i m p l y i n g t h a t molecular fluorescence i n f l u i d s o l u t i o n s i s a q u i t e common phenomenon. This i s due t o t h e h i g h values o f t h e i n t r a m o l e c u l a r decay r a t e constants so t h a t u s u a l l y
-'
T
-'
despite o f the f a c t that k
can be as h i g h as t h e d i f f u s i o n a l - c o n t r o l l e d q constant. I f both %kq[q] and knf p l a y a m i n o r r o l e f o r t h e decay o f An [S1] combination o f Eqs. (23) and ( 2 5 ) r e v e a l s t h a t
e.1SC = I - @ f This c l e a r l y shows phosphorescence.
the
For phosphorescent
complementary
character
of
fluorescence
eisc must be r e l a t i v e l y high.
compounds
and This
e f f i c i e n c y depends on t h e amount o f s p i n - o r b i t c o u p l i n g which increases w i t h decreasing d i f f e r e n c e between t h e energies o f t h e T1 and So s t a t e s . Moreover i t can be enhanced by t h e i n t r o d u c t i o n o f heavy atoms i n t o t h e phosphorescent
compound
itself,
but
also
i n t o the
s o l v e n t molecules
( i n t e r n a l , r e s p e c t i v e l y , e x t e r n a l heavy atom e f f e c t ) . Besides i t i s noted t h a t no e f f e c t i s encountered i f i n absence o f heavy atoms approximates hundred per cent. I n c o n t r a s t w i t h fluorescence, solutions requires special prerequisite
that
molecular
eisc a l r e a d y
phosphorescence i n f l u i d
experimental circumstances.
Only under t h e
t h e c o m p e t i t i v e i n t r a - and i n t e r m o l e c u l a r d e a c t i v a t i o n
processes o f An(T1) are diminished as much as p o s s i b l e t h e r e i s a substan-
t i a l probability for a radiative transition.
C o n f i n i n g our a t t e n t i o n t o
b i m o l e c u l a r d e a c t i v a t i o n i t i s r e a d i l y seen t h a t commonly
10 -1 -1 a and 0 i s n e g l i g i b l e . I f f o r example k = 10 s-l and kQ = 10 M s P quencher c o n c e n t r a t i o n as low as !l a l r e a d y f u l f i l s Eq. (31). AS a r e s u l t phosphorescence i n homogeneous s o l u t i o n s w i l l be q u i t e e x c e p t i o n a l . Only f o r compounds w i t h a h i g h k value t h e r a d i a t i v e t r a n s i t i o n may be P a b l e t o compete s u c c e s s f u l l y w i t h b i m o l e c u l a r quenching p r o v i d e d t h a t t h e s o l v e n t i s thoroughly p u r i f i e d and deoxygenated. A second requirement i s t h a t t h e i n t r a m o l e c u l a r r a d i a t i o n l e s s decay process does n o t dominate. This e x p l a i n s why f r o z e n glassy samples have been a p p l i e d e x t e n s i v e l y i n phosphorimetry. The r a t e constant k
:
e s p e c i a l l y f o r compounds w i t h f l e nP x i b l e s t r u c t u r e s , can be much h i g h e r i n a f l u i d s o l u t i o n than i n a frozen and k nP P l e a d i n g t o a r e d u c t i o n o f T w h i l e t h e n e t e f f e c t on 0 i s u n p r e d i c t a b l e , P' P see Eq. (26).
solution.
3.2
The i n c o r p o r a t i o n o f heavy
both k
atoms enhances
NEW DEVELOPMENTS I N PHOSPHORIMETRY I n t h e l a s t decade i n t e r e s t i n g new developments i n phosphorimetry have
been r e a l i z e d , d i r e c t e d on t h e p o s s i b i l i t y t o circumvent t h e need of freezing
samples.
solution-sensitized escence.
3.2.1
They and
include
sol i d - s u r f a c e - ,
solution-quenched
mice1 l e - s t a b i 1ized-,
room temperature
phosphor-
SOLID-SURFACE RTP
The observation o f room temperature phosphorescence (RTP) from o r g a n i c molecules adsorbed on a s o l i d m a t r i x has been done several times i n t h e
115-117). The a n a l y t i c a l p o t e n t i a l o f t h i s technique was shown by Schulman and W a l l i n g i n 1982 ( r e f s . 118-119). They s t u d i e d a
sixties (refs.
number o f organic compounds adsorbed on s i l i c a , alumina and f i l t e r paper. Important
research
in this
field
i s carried out
i n the
groups
of
Winefordner and Hurtubise. A considerable number o f s o l i d s u b s t r a t e s has been used t o induce phosphorescence from adsorbed compounds;
t h e most promising seems t o be
120, 121). Beside several q u a l i t i e s of f i l t e r paper 119, 122-133), a l s o s i l i c a g e l ( r e f s . 134, 135), alumina ( r e f . 136), sodium a c e t a t e (refs. 137-141), p o l y a c r y l i c a c i d sodium c h l o r i d e
f i l t e r paper ( r e f s . (refs.
-
30 1 m i x t u r e s ( r e f s . 142-144) and c e l l u l o s e ( r e f . 145) have been t r i e d . RTP has a l s o been observed from compounds adsorbed on streched polymer f i l m s ( r e f . 146).All substrates g i v e r i s e t o a broad band background emission (400-600 nm) which o f t e n i n t e r f e r e s w i t h q u a n t i t a t i v e and q u a l i t a t i v e measurements ( r e f s . 147-148). The i n f l u e n c e s of phosphorophorelsubstrate combination, sample p r e p a r a t i o n ,
amount o f m o i s t u r e and oxygen present
(refs.
149,
150), optimum pH value and presence o f heavy atoms ( r e f s . 151, 155) on RTP have been s t u d i e d e x t e n s i v e l y . Furtheron t h e n a t u r e o f t h e phosphorophores u b s t r a t e i n t e r a c t i o n has been i n v e s t i g a t e d ( r e f s . 156-160). RTP spectra a r e very s i m i l a r i n shape t o LTP (low temperature phosphorescence) s p e c t r a although i n t e n s i t i e s and l i f e t i m e s can be s i g n i f i c a n t l y a f f e c t e d by t h e a c t u a l experimental c o n d i t i o n s .
RTP emission has been
observed from i o n i c organic compounds ( r e f s . 119, 134, 137-140, 1571, nonp o l a r p o l y n u c l e a r aromatic hydrocarbons (PAH's) ( r e f s . 121, 130, 132, 135,
153, 156, 159, 160) and compounds o f pharmaceutical ( r e f s . 127, 133, 153, 161, 162) and b i o l o g i c a l ( r e f s . 120, 128, 154, 161) i n t e r e s t . The r o t a t i n g h o l l o w drum developed by M i l l e r ( r e f s . 163) and t h e r o t a t i n g - m i r r o r phosphorescence as developed by Vo-Dinh e t a l . ( r e f . 164) made i t p o s s i b l e t o scan t h i n l a y e r chromatograms f o r phosphorescent compounds. L l o y d ( r e f . 165) described a f l o w
cell
packed w i t h
paper-derived l i n t t o d e t e c t tographic separation.
a m i x t u r e o f crushed q u a r t z
a n a l y t e s w i t h RTP a f t e r
and
l i q u i d chroma-
Although RTP has a poorer s e n s i t i v i t y than LTP t h e a n a l y t i c a l p r o cedure i s very simple. A d d i t i o n a l l y , a chromatographic s e p a r a t i o n can be performed on t h e s o l i d s u b s t r a t e b e f o r e t h e a n a l y s i s . A considerable g a i n i n s e n s i t i v i t y i n phosphorimetry was obtained by
t h e i n t r o d u c t i o n o f t h e pulsed source-time r e s o l v e d d e t e c t i o n technique ( r e f . 166). With t h i s technique i t i s p o s s i b l e t o analyze m i x t u r e s of phosphorphores. A f t e r a s h o r t e x c i t a t i o n source f l a s h , t h e phosphorescence emission i s measured, a f t e r a c e r t a i n delay t i m e td, d u r i n g a g a t i n g t i m e t
9'
By
this
approach,
the
phosphorescence s i g n a l
can be
temporally
d i s c r i m i n a t e d from r a p i d l y decaying species (e.g., f l u o r e s c e n t i m p u r i t i e s ) and source l i g h t s c a t t e r . Because of t h e i r e x c e l l e n t temporal c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s t h e use o f pulsed l a s e r s i n s t e a d o f t h e n o r m a l l y a p p l i e d pulsed Xenon sources i s a promising development ( r e f s . 167-169). Another instrumental technique t o increase t h e s e l e c t i v i t y o f phosphori m e t r y i s synchronous scanning as proposed by Vo-Dinh
(ref.
170). The
e x c i t a t i o n and emission monochromators o f a phosphorimeter a r e s e t w i t h a constant wavelength difference
of ~h = hem
- hexc and
b o t h monochromators
are scanned a t t h e same r a t e , A phosphorescence peak o n l y occurs when b o t h
302 Axc and Aem correspond simultaneously t o wavelengths a t which e x c i t a t i o n and emission o f a p a r t i c u l a r compound occurs. I n t h i s way, sharper peaks
a r e obtained. Second d e r i v a t i v e phosphorimetry has a l s o been used by Vo-Dinh and workers ( r e f .
CO-
171). By means o f t a k i n g t h e second d e r i v a t i v e o f an RTP
emission spectrum, o v e r l a p between phosphorescence bands c o u l d be reduced and
the
phosphorescence
background
decreased.
Both
the
synchronous
scanning and t h e second d e r i v a t i v e technique have been a p p l i e d t o t h e anal y s i s o f PAH m i x t u r e s ( r e f s . 172, 173). 3.2.2
MICELLE-STABILIZED RTP
The use o f organic media such as m i c e l l a r s o l u t i o n s and c y c l o d e x t r i n s t o induce RTP i n c e r t a i n compounds has been i n t r o d u c e d by C l i n e Love e t al.
(refs.
174, 175). Reviews of t h e a n a l y t i c a l i m p l i c a t i o n o f m i c e l l e
chemistry i n phosphorimetry have appeared r e c e n t l y ( r e f s . 176, 177). The advantages o f t h i s method are: 1) an increase i n s e n s i t i v i t y because t h e organized environment reduces i n t r a m o l e c u l a r processes competing w i t h photoemission;
2) b e t t e r s o l u b i l i t y o f non-polar compounds w i t h respect t o
aqueous s o l u t i o n s ;
3) t h e p o s s i b i l i t y t o b r i n g a n a l y t e s and heavy atoms
together very e f f i c i e n t l y t o c r e a t e a heavy atom e f f e c t . A disadvantage i s t h a t oxygen s t i l l has t o be removed from m i c e l l a r s o l u t i o n s because t h e m i c e l l e s do n o t p r o t e c t t h e phosphorophores a g a i n s t quenching species. The a p p l i c a t i o n o f t h e p r i n c i p l e o f m i c e l l e enhanced phosphorescence as a d e t e c t i o n method i n 1 i q u i d chromatography has been proposed by Weinberger e t a l . ( r e f . 178) i n two ways. F i r s t by u s i n g a m i c e l l a r s o l u t i o n as t h e mobile phase and secondly by post-column a d d i t i o n o f t h e m i c e l l a r s o l u t i o n t o t h e column e f f l u e n t . not
always
easily
U n f o r t u n a t e l y , t h e use o f m i c e l l a r s o l u t i o n s i s
compatible
with
liquid
chromatography
conditions.
DeLuccia and C l i n e Love s t u d i e d t h e s e n s i t i z e d phosphorescence o f b i a c e t y l i n organized media ( r e f s . 179, 180). The p o t e n t i a l o f synchronous scan and second d e r i v a t i v e techniques i n m i c e l l a r RTP was examined by Femia and C l i n e Love ( r e f . 181).
3.2.3
RTP I N NORMAL FLUIDS It i s g e n e r a l l y accepted t h a t i n normal f l u i d s o l u t i o n s , where f a c t o r s
suppressing
the
phosphorescence
diffusion o f
triplet
i n t e n s i t i e s are
too
quenchers low
to
be
a r e commonly used
for
absent,
analytical
purposes. Several fundamental s t u d i e s i n t h i s f i e l d have been p u b l i s h e d d u r i n g t h e l a s t 20 years (refs,
182
-
185). The h i g h e s t phosphorescence
emission i n t e n s i t i e s a t room temperature have
been
reported
by
Almgren
303 ( r e f . 183) f o r b i a c e t y l i n benzene w i t h a phosphorescence quantum y i e l d o f 0.08
and by Parker and Joyce ( r e f .
fluorormethylcyclohexane w i t h a
%
%
184) f o r acetophenone i n per-
o f 0.0581.
For benzophenon, w i t h a
quantum y i e l d o f 1.0 and a t r i p l e t l i f e t i m e o f around 7 msec a t 77 K no RTP could be observed i n hexane; Turro ( r e f . 186) reported a 9.1 x
lom3
i n water, and Joyce ( r e f .
184) a
t
o f 0.097
$
o f only
i n perfluoro-
methylcyclohexane. Turro e t a l . ( r e f . 185) showed t h a t i n a c e t o n i t r i l e , a solvent widely used i n reversed phase l i q u i d chromatography, a phosporescence emission could be achieved f o r 1,4-dibromonaphthalene, quantum y i e l d
i n the order of
Table
V
includes
with a
a number of
exceptional compounds t h a t emit "strong" phosphorescence i n normal f l u i d solutions. From an a n a l y t i c a l p o i n t o f view, t h i s phenomenon can o n l y be u t i l i z e d i n an i n d i r e c t way. The phosphorophore i s present as a s o l u t e and the analyte acts e i t h e r as a s e n s i t i z e r o r as a quencher o f phosphorescence. Both techniques methods i n HPLC.
have been successfully
applied as d e t e c t i o n
Phosphorescence data f o r naphthalene (N) , 1-bromonaphthalene (1-BrN) , 2-bromonaphthalene (2-BrN), 1,4-bromonaphthalene (1,4-BrN), 4,4'-dibromobiphenyl ( 4 , 4 ' - B r B), 2-bromobiphenyl (2-BrB) and 4-bromobiphenyl (4-BrB) i n 2 % e t h y l t e t r a h y d r o f u r a n a t 77 K and i n n-hexane a t room temperature (295 K); from ( r e f . 187).
TABLE V
77 K
295
K
Compound
N
t
T
0.03
2.1
P
t
,msec
T
P
,msec
lo3
1-BrN
0.27
15.0
0.10
1.9
2-BrN
0.38
16.8
0.14
2.8
1, 4-Br2N
0.27
5.3
0.18
1.7
4,4'-Br2B
0.49
12.5
0.08
0.86
0 0.012
-
2-BrB
0.15
-
4-BrB
0.65
22.5
The s t a t e o f t h e a r t i n 1983 has n i c e l y been overviewed by Hurtubise (ref.
166)
and by Vo-Dinh
(ref.
188).
At
t h a t date t h e a n a l y t i c a l
p o t e n t i a l o f s o l u t i o n quenched phosphorescence was n o t y e t known; t h i s method has been introduced q u i t e r e c e n t l y and i t s p o t e n t i a l i s subject of current research.
304 3.2.4
WHY RTP?
The reason t h a t much e f f o r t has been devoted t o t h e extension of phosphorimetry undoubtly i s t h a t phosphorescence, as explained above, can be considered as complementary t o fluorescence.
Furthermore f o r
many
purposes no a d d i t i o n a l instrumentation i s required. O f course, compounds detectable by d i r e c t o r by s e n s i t i z e d phosphorescence are also measurable by U V - V I S absorption spectroscopy. Nevertheless, i n many a p p l i c a t i o n s luminescence measurements are e s s e n t i a l n o t o n l y because they are more selective,
but e s p e c i a l l y because f o r t r a c e analysis o f r e a l samples
frequently lower d e t e c t i o n l i m i t s are required than a t t a i n a b l e by absorpt i o n measurements. Solution quenched phosphorescence
i s applicable t o compounds t h a t
r a p i d l y react w i t h the e x c i t e d phosphorophore, t h e i r own absorption c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s are not relevant. Therefore t h i s technique i s e s p e c i a l l y of i n t e r e s t f o r analytes badly detectable by d i r e c t U V - V I S absorption spectroscopy, as f o r instance inorganic ions ( r e f s . 35-37). 3.3
EXPERIMENTAL ASPECTS
3.3.1 REMOVAL OF OXYGEN Essential f o r RTPL detection i s t h e long t r i p l e t s t a t e l i f e t i m e o f the phosphorophore under consideration. This imp1 i e s t h a t special experimental requirements have t o be met t o make phosphorimetry i n f l u i d s o l u t i o n s a useful a n a l y t i c a l method. To t h i s end t h e s o l u t i o n s have t o be deoxygenated as much as possible since oxygen acts as a very e f f i c i e n t quencher and the solvents have t o be p u r i f i e d c a r e f u l l y t o avoid i m p u r i t y quenching. Moreover, the experimental set-up has t o be cleaned thoroughly and d i r e c t contact between s o l u t i o n s and s y n t h e t i c m a t e r i a l s as t e f l o n should be minimized. I n p r a c t i c e , these conditions can be f u l f i l l e d r e l a t i v e l y easy.
For
a l l types o f experiments, i n batch, i n f l o w i n j e c t i o n analysis and i n liquid chromatography purging o f solvents w i t h n i t r o g e n gas reveals a sufficient
reduction
in
oxygen
a v a i l a b l e n i t r o g e n gas
concentration
(ref.
39).
Commercially
(containing about 5 ppm o f oxygen)
i s passed
through a column f i l l e d w i t h a heterogeneous reduction c a t a l y s t (i.e., pyrophorous copper) and kept a t a constant temperature of 100 OC. I n t h i s way the oxygen content o f t h e N2 gas i s reduced t o l e s s than 0.2 ppm. The p u r i f i e d N2 f l o w i s l e d through a washing b o t t l e and ( i n batch experiments) subsequently through t h e sample s o l u t i o n . A f t e r 5-10 minutes of purging the deoxygenation i s completed and a s t a b l e phosphorescence signal
i s obtained.
During t h e measurements a constant
N2
flow
maintained over t h e sample i n order t o prevent re-entrance o f oxygen.
is
305
In f l o w i n j e c t i o n a n a l y s i s and l i q u i d chromatography t h e deoxygenation of t h e s o l u t i o n s occurs i n t h e e l u e n t v e s s e l.
In F ig. 16 a s p e c i a l l y
c o n s t r u c t e d vessel as d e s c r i b e d i n r e f . 43 i s depict ed; t h e c r u c i a l p o i n t i s t h a t t h e use o f s y n t h e t i c m a t e r i a l s has been avoided so t h a t o n l y glas s , q u a r t z and/or s t a i n l e s s - s t e e l
have been a p p l i e d . A schematic d i a -
gram o f a HPLC system i s g i v e n i n Fi g . eluent
v es s el,
pump,
i n j e c t i o n valve,
17. The i n t e r c o n n e c t i o n s between column and d e t e c t i o n a r e
all
s t a i n l e s s s t e e l c a p i l l a r i e s . The o v e r a l l system i s c l o s e d by l e a d i n g t h e o u t p u t c a p i l l a r y back t o t h e e l u e n t v e s s e l , whereas d u r i n g e l u t i o n ,
the
v a l v e t o waste i s opened t o a v o i d c o n t a m i n a t i o n o f t h e e l u e n t . I n t h i s way t h e e l u e n t can b e used c o n t i n u o u s l y phosphorescence s e m i t i v i t y
F ig. 16
.
o v e r weeks w i t h o u t any l o s s o f
D e t a i l s o f t h e eluent vessel, c o n s i s t i n g o f a 3 1 glass b o t t l e and g l a s s s t o p p e r 855 which f i t s w e l l i n a ground g l a s s j o i n t . The n i t r o g e n gas used f o r deoxygenation t h e e l u e n t e n t e r s v i a a g l a s s Lube ( l ) , w i t h s p e c i a l g l a s s j o i n t (cup s i z e 13/5, R ot u lex ) , v i a an opening (2) and a g l a s s f i l t e r (3); t h e o u t l e t i s v i a a g l a s s t u b e ( 7 ) . The deoxygenated e l u e n t i s pumped i n t o t h e f l o w system v i a a s t a i n l e s s - s t e e l c a p i l l a r y ( 4 ) , which forms one u n i t w i t h a s t a i n l e s s - s t e e l b a l l p a r t (5) f o r t h e o u t l e t o f deoxygenated e l u e n t ; (6) r e p r e s e n t s a c o n s t r u c t i o n i d e n t i c a l t o 4 and 5 f o r t h e i n l e t o f e l u e n t ( r e f . 43).
In o r d e r t o b e s u r e t h a t t h e q u a l i t y o f t h e s o l u t i o n i s c o n s t a n t o v e r a l o n g e r p e r i o d o f t i m e , t h i s has t o be checked. I f b i a c e t y l i s a p p l i e d as phosphorophore, t o d a t e by f a r t h e most i n d i r e c t phosphorescence d e t e c t i o n measurements a r e based on t h i s compound, t h e phosphorescence t o f l u o r escence s i g n a l r a t i o (see F i g . 18) i s an i n d i c a t i o n f o r t h e q u a l i t y o f t h e
306 system regarding O2 and impurities and thus for the sensitivity that can be obtained in the measurements (ref. 38).
Fig. 17
Schematic representation of the dynamic system for liquid chromatography with phosphorescence detection. The broken 1 ines represent stainless-steel capillaries for the nitrogen gas stream that after being washed in a washing bottle containin some eluent is led into the eluent vessel (depicted in Fig. 167 and goes eventually to waste or is used to deoxygenate the sample solution. The solid 1 ines represent stainless-steel capillaries for the eluent stream, connecting eluent vessel, injection valve, analytical column and luminescence detector. The system is closed under normal conditions, to prevent entrance of oxygen or impurities; during the recording of the chromatograms the valve to waste is open. The inverter is not strictly necessary; it serves to record the inverted phosphorescence signal, which is useful in quenched phosphorescence (ref. 35)
I 'I
L .-
U
k-4
Fig. 18
biacetyl nm. The fluorescence
M
307 3.3.2
INSTRUMENTATION
The d e t e c t i o n devices t h a t
can be used f o r t h e measurements
of
phosphorescence i n f l u i d s o l u t i o n s a r e standard commercially a v a i l a b l e fluorescence d e t e c t o r s , though some simp1 i f i c a t i o n s a r e p o s s i b l e .
First,
use can be made o f a l e s s expensive d e t e c t o r , as o n l y a r e s t r i c t e d number of wavelengths are important. I n s e n s i t i z e d phosphorescence t h e choice of t h e e x c i t a t i o n wavelength A exc depends on t h e absorption c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s of t h e analyte, whereas t h e emission wavelength A e m can be fixed; i n quenched RTPL both A e x c and ,,,A, t h e d i f f e r e n c e between A e x c
a r e f i x e d . Secondly, f o r phosphorescence
and Aem i s l a r g e r than f o r fluorescence w i t h
t h e r e s u l t t h a t background r a d i a t i o n due t o s c a t t e r i n g and Raman e f f e c t s i s more r e a d i l y reduced.
For t h a t reason t h e emission g r a t i n g mono-
chromator can be replaced by simple c u t - o f f f i l t e r s , which a r e n o t o n l y l e s s expensive b u t a l s o a l l o w a h i g h e r l i g h t throughput t h u s r e v e a l i n g higher s e n s i t i v i t i e s . As already mentioned a g a i n i n s e n s i t i v i t y can be obtained w i t h t h e pulsed source-time resolved d e t e c t i o n technique. With a s h o r t e x c i t a t i o n source f l a s h t h e molecules a r e e x c i t e d . I n o r d e r t o e l i m i n a t e background due t o r a p i d l y decaying emission ( i m p u r i t y f l u o r escence and s c a t t e r ) t h e phosphorescence s i g n a l i s recorded d u r i n g a t i m e i n t e r v a l t ( g a t i n g time) which s t a r t s a t i m e i n t e r v a l td (delay time) 9 a f t e r t h e f l a s h (see Fig. 19). By choosing t h e s u i t a b l e l i g h t pulse, d e l a y
-
and g a t i n g time,
background luminescence and s c a t t e r i n g o f t h e l i g h t
source can be suppressed considerably. sowcepulse
sowcepulse
4
i
-
id t'3 I
0
Fig. 19
Time
-
E x c i t a t i o n and emission s i g n a l dependence o f t i m e a f t e r source delay f l a s h a t t = 0 o p e r a t i n g i n t h e phosphorescence mode: t gated time; t , gate w i d t h o f d e t e c t o r . The emission s i g n a l By choice o f an apa f t e r tffe source f l a s h by a delay t i m e t p r o p r i a t e value f o r t background emissign caused by s c a t t e r i n g anclSfluorescence i m p g i t i e s , which have l i f e t i m e s s h o r t e r than 10 s , i s n o t detected. This r e s u l t s i n a r e d u c t i o n i n t h e n o i s e o f t h e system.
.
fi
308 For l i q u i d s t a t e phosphorescence w i t h a l i f e t i m e o f 1 additional
instrumental
requirements
needed
for
/.LS
t o 10 ins t h e
time
resolution
measurements can be met more e a s i l y than f o r fluorescence w i t h a l i f t i m e o f 1-100 ns (refs. 40, 4 8 ) . Nowadays luminescence detectors w i t h a pulsed Xe-lamp (pulses i n the 50 Hz range, w i t h a width o f about 50 /.L S ) and a gated photomul t i p 1 i e r are commerci a1 l y avai 1able.
3.4
INDIRECT PHOSPHORESCENCE DETECTION
3.4.1
SENSITIZED PHOSPHORESCENCE
3.4.1.1 INTRODUCTION I n sensitized phosphorescence a f t e r e x c i t i n g a donor molecule energy t r a n s f e r t o an acceptor molecule takes place and t h e phosphorescence of the acceptor i s monitored. I n general t h i s i n d i r e c t method i s applied f o r non-fluorescent
analytes w i t h a high
phosphorescence i n l i q u i d s o l u t i o n s
(e
BiSc
which do n o t emit d i r e c t
i s n e g l i g i b l e ) . This means t h a t
P f o r these compounds the r a d i a t i v e phosphorescence t r a n s i t i o n i s t o o slow t o compete sucessfully w i t h non-radiative
decay.
It
i s the
aim
of
sensitized phosphorescence t o circumvent t h i s decay and t o r e a l i z e energy t r a n s f e r t o an acceptor, a compound w i t h an exceptional high phosphorescence e f f i c i e n c y i n l i q u i d s o l u t i o n s . This method has been applied both i n homogeneous and i n m i c e l l a r s o l u t i o n s . I n most a p p l i c a t i o n s t h e analyte i s the donor compound, however, a l s o an i n t e r e s t i n g example has been r e ported i n which t h e analyte acts as t h e acceptor.
3.4.1.2
THEORETICAL ASPECTS
The s e n s i t i z e d RTPL pathway i s depicted i n t h e energy diagram o f Fig. 20 and the s i m p l i f i e d r e a c t i o n scheme i n Table V I . The donor (0) i s excited by means o f l i g h t absorption and reaches eventually t h e lowest s i n g l e t excited s t a t e denoted as 'D*. Subsequently t h e molecule crosses over t o t h e t r i p l e t s t a t e 3D*. In absence o f t h e acceptor, the f o l l o w i n g step i s t h e r e t u r n t o t h e ground s t a t e . However, i n t h e presence o f an acceptor (A), energy t r a n s f e r t o t h e t r i p l e t s t a t e o f the acceptor may occur, so t h a t an acceptor molecule i n i t s lowest t r i p l e t e x c i t e d s t a t e 3A* i s produced:
3 D*
k
+
'A
-b 'D + 'A*
kt i s the bimolecular r a t e constant o f t h i s energy t r a n s f e r r e a c t i o n , expressed i n M-l s-'. 3A*.
The f i n a l step i s t h e phosphorescence emission from
309 I t i s r e a d i l y seen t h a t t h e i n t e n s i t i e s o f s e n s i t i z e d phosphorescence I (sens) can be expressed as a product o f f o u r independent f a c t o r s ( r e f . P 39), i.e., D D D A A $, (sens) = Iabs (33) ' 'isc ' ' t ' 'P
BiscD
i s t h e intersystem IabsD i s t h e r a t e o f l i g h t a b s o r p t i o n by 0, c r o s s i n g e f f i c i e n c y o f D and thus t h e e f f i c i e n c y o f t r i p l e t f o r m a t i o n o f A t h e donor, i s t h e e f f i c i e n c y o f energy t r a n s f e r from D t o A and 0 P i s t h e phosphorescence e f f i c i e n c y o f A.
aDA
I n absence o f i n n e r f i l t e r e f f e c t s I:bs i s p r o p o r t i o n a l t o t h e concent r a t i o n o f D:
wherein
D t h e i n t e n s i t y o f t h e l i g h t source a t hexc, {xc
absorptivity o f D a t Aexc
and 1 t h e o p t i c a l pathlength.
the molar
I f the analyte
I (sens) i s P l i n e a r l y dependent on t h e a n a l y t e c o n c e n t r a t i o n , as i s obvious from Eqs. (33) and (34). Obviously, t h e c r u c i a l f a c t o r i n s e n s i t i z e d phosphorescence d e t e c t i o n i s BDA.This e f f i c i e n c y depends on t h e r a t e constant kt, t h e acceptor c o n c e n t r a t i o n [A] and t h e l i f e t i m e of 3D* i n absence o f t h e acceptor, denoted as T~D : a c t s as a donor t h e s e n s i t i z e d phosphorescence s i g n a l
To approach a t r a n s f e r o f 100 p e r cent, t h e c o n d i t o n
D
k, [A] >> 1
TO
should be f u l f i l l e d . This means t h a t energy t r a n s f e r should be much f a s t e r than t h e o v e r a l l decay r a t e of t h e t r i p l e t s t a t e o f t h e donor. I n general, provided t h a t t h e energy t r a n s f e r r e a c t i o n i s exothermic, kt approximates t h e d i f f u s i o n a l - c o n t r o l l e d r a t e constant. Nevertheless some c a u t i o n should be taken. The t r a n s f e r r e a c t i o n i n v o l v e s a change o f s p i n s t a t e , which i s
310 only allowed in the electron exchange mechanism, requiring collisional interaction between 3D* and 1A. In this mechanism kt is proportional to the overlap between the normalized emission spectrum of D, i.e., 3D* +'0, and the normalized singlet-triplet absorption spectrum of A, 'A+ 3A*. In other words the intensities of the emission and the absorption band play no rule but nevertheless their shapes are important (ref.189). The problem is that S j T absorption spectra are not simply accessible. SO it might be possible that for exothermic energy transfer kt is much smaller than expected due to unfavourable overlap. Unidirectional energy transfer from 3D* to 1A takes place if the energy of 3D* is at least 20 J/mol higher than the energy of 3A* (ref. 190); if the difference is smaller back transfer of energy plays a role (ref. 191).
SO
I Fig. 20
Decay pathways in sensitizedlphosphorescence. kD kD and ko are the rate constants in s of the intramo1ecfiiarn6eactivhlFon of the donor via fluorescence, intynal cony,ersion and intersystem crossing, respectively. k and k are the phosphotescence Arate constants of the d&or and tfe acceptor, while k and k are the overall rate constqts of intra- and intermof&ular #&radiative deactivation in s of the T state of the donor and acceptor. k [A] is_Fhe apparent rate cbnstant of the energy transfer reactidn in s (ref. 39).
Furtheron it is obvious from Eq. (36) that for a high sensitized RTPL signal the concentration of the acceptor should be taken as high as possible. It should be realized, however, that direct excitation of the acceptor must be avoided, because it would lead to a background phosphorescence signal. Fortunately, biacetyl, a compound with a high 8 in a P variety of liquid solutions, has very low molar absorption coefficients over a wide range of excitation wavelegths. Nevertheless, its concentration must not be chosen too high, i.e., about 10-4M. Finally, it is emphasized that obviously the phosporescence efficiency of the acceptor is unfavourable influenced by impurity quenching. This
means
that
quenchers,
including
oxygen
should
be
removed
from
the
s o l u t i o n , as much as p o s s i b l e . TABLE V I
Reaction scheme o f s e n s i t i z e d RTPL by t r i p l e t - t r i p l e t energy transfer.
1. E x i t a t i o n o f t h e donor (D) ' 0 t hyex D +'D*
2. Intersystem c r o s s i n g t o t h e t r i p l e t s t a t e 'D*
3D*
3. Energy t r a n s f e r t o t h e acceptor (A) kt 3D* t 'A 0' '
+
3A*
4. Phosphorescence o f t h e acceptor 3A* + l A
3.4.1.3
+ h A
yP
APPLICATIONS
Various organic compounds w i t h low n a t i v e fluorescence can be sens i t i v e l y detected by s e n s i t i z e d RTPL; e s p e c i a l l y t h o s e compounds t h a t undergo an e f f i c i e n t n o n - r a d i a t i v e decay v i a i n t e r s y s t e m crossing. I n p r i n c i p l e s e n s i t i z e d RTPL i s g e n e r a l l y a p p l i c a b l e t o a l l compounds meeting t h e f o l l o w i n g two requirements: t h e i r T1 s t a t e energy must be h i g h e r than t h a t o f t h e acceptor and they must show phosphorescence i n r i g i d s o l u t i o n s a t 77 K, s i n c e t h e main c o n d i t i o n t o be f u l f i l l e d i s an e f f i c i e n t t r i p l e t formation. As s e n s i t i z e d RTPL i s an i n d i r e c t emission method, o n l y t h e e x c i t a t i o n p r o p e r t i e s o f t h e a n a l y t e ( a c t i n g as donor) p l a y a r o l e . A l l compounds a r e detected a t a s i n g l e wavelength, i.e., t h e emission wavel e n g t h o f t h e acceptor which i s r e l a t i v e l y long. M o n i t o r i n g o f t h e same phosphorescence s i g n a l f o r a l l a n a l y t e s imp1 i e s t h a t u s u a l l y chromatographic separations a r e necessary if complex matrices, c o n t a i n i n g s e v e r a l s e n s i t i z i n g and even quenching compounds have t o be analyzed. The commonly used phosphorophore i n HPLC i s b i a c e t y l ,
a compound w i t h favourable
phosphorescence e f f i c i e n c i e s i n v a r i o u s s o l v e n t s , used as e l u e n t i n HPLC. M i n order The c o n c e n t r a t i o n o f b i a c e t y l i s u s u a l l y n o t h i g h e r than t o avoid background emission due t o d i r e c t phosphorescence.
312 Compounds measured by s e n s i t i z e d phosphorescence are t h e we1 1 known polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) and naphthalenes (PCNs) (ref. detection l i m i t s are i n t h e low nanogram region.
43).
The
Furtheron, ortho-sub-
s t i t u t e d PCBs do n o t produce any RTPL signal. Therefore t h e combination of sensitized RTPL and UV absorption d e t e c t i o n provides perspectives f o r t h e identification
of
complex
PCB mixtures
as
frequently
enountered
in
i n d u s t r i a l samples. In Fig. 21 t h e UV and s e n s i t i z e d RTPL detected chromatograms o f Aroclor 1221 are depicted. A l l PCBs present in the sample are detected i n t h e UV-chromatogram. As expected t h e s e n s i t i z e d RTPL chromatogram i s more simple since the peaks o f t h e o r t h o - s u b s t i t u t e d biphenyls are missing. O f course t h e e x c i t a t i o n wavelength i s an a d d i t i o n a l select i v e l y parameter i n s e n s i t i z e d RTPL.
6
Fig. 21
4
2
0
tlme (min)
6
4
2
0
Reversed-phase chromatograms o f Aroclor 1221 obtained w i t h UV detection ( A= 224 nm), concentration 50 ppm and s e n s i t i z e d RTPL detection ( h = 265 nm, h = 520 nm), concentration 10 ppm. Peaks: 1 = biflgnyl I 2 = 2-ch%robiphenylI 3 = 4-chlorobiphenyl , 4 2,2'-dichlorobiphenyl and 6 = 4,4'-dichlorobiphenyl ( r e f . 43).
A number o f PCNs e x h i b i t n a t i v e fluorescence.
I n v e s t i g a t i o n s on mix-
tures o f PCNs reveal f o r most of t h e compounds a s e n s i t i z e d RTPL d e t e c t i o n
l i m i t comparable w i t h those obtained w i t h fluorescence d e t e c t i o n ( r e f . 191). Furtheron t h e l i n e a r range i s the same as u s u a l l y found by f l u o r escence, i.e.,
3 t o 4 decades. However, t h e t r i - and t e t r a - s u b s t i t u t e d
compounds have a d e v i a t i n g behaviour.
T h e i r t r i p l e t s t a t e energies are
lower than f o r b i a c e t y l , so t h a t these compounds do n o t a c t as s e n s i t i z e r s
313 but as quenchers o f the b i a c e t y l phosphorescence ( r e f . 43).
This aspect
w i l l be discussed thoroughly i n t h e next section.
Another i n t e r e s t i n g group o f compounds which can be detected w i t h RTPL are t h e parent compound dibenzofuran and i t s c h l o r i n a t e d d e r i v a t i v e s (refs. 32, 192). These compounds, known as environmetal hazards have a high t o x i c i t y depending on t h e numbers and p o s i t i o n s o f t h e c h l o r o subs t i t u e n t s . Sensitized RTPL d e t e c t i o n seems appropriate as t h e t r i p l e t formation e f f i c i e n c i e s are considerable and t h e t r i p l e t energies are h i g h enough t o guarantee an e f f i c i e n t energy t r a n s f e r
t o biacetyl.
As
an
example the chromatogram o f a m i x t u r e o f dibenzofuran (DBF) and 2,8-dichlorodibenzofuran (2,8-C12DBF)
i s given i n Fig. 22. Various c h l o r i n a t e d
dibenzofurans also e x h i b i t a n a t i v e fluorescence, a property t h a t has n o t received a l o t o f a t t e n t i o n i n t h e l i t e r a t u r e . Hence, i t i s i n t e r e s t i n g t o compare the s e n s i t i v i t i e s o f HPLC combined w i t h fluorescence, s e n s i t i z e d phosphorescence and UV-absorbance detection. I t became c l e a r t h a t t h e r e i s a need t o increase the s e n s i t i v i t y o f the HPLC method by applying a preconcentration procedure.
Furtheron,
the data revealed t h a t t h e f l u o r -
escence detection o f c h l o r i n a t e d dibenzofurans i s more s e n s i t i v e than t h e sensitized RTPL mode, i f a g r a t i n g instrument i s used, whereas w i t h a f i l t e r instrument the reverse i s t r u e ( r e f . 192). This may be a t t r i b u t e d t o t h e f a c t t h a t i n s e n s i t i z e d RTPL s c a t t e r i n g background plays a l e s s important r o l e . 3
2
I
1
10
8
6
4
2
0
t (min 1
Fig. 22
L i q u i d chromatogram o f a mixture o f dibenzofuran (DBF) and 2,8C1 DBF, separated on LiChrosotb RP-18 column, l e n g t h 11 cm; f l o w ra?e 1 ml/min; eluent; 10- M b i a c e t y l i n a c e t o n i t r i l e / w a t e r 83.7/ 16.3 ( v / v ) ; s e n s i t i z e d RTPL d e t e c t i o n ( hexc = 290 nm, h = 522 nm); 1 = solvent peak; 2 = DBF (34 ng); 3 = 2,8-C12DBF ($7 ng) ; 4 = unknown ( r e f . 39).
Another i n t e r e s t i n g a p p l i c a t i o n of s e n s i t i z e d RTPL i s t h e a n a l y s i s of biacetyl
i t s e l f . This
determination i s
important because
of
t h e great
314 influence o f b i a c e t y l on the f l a v o u r o f beer,
wine and several d a i r y
products. I n these samples b i a c e t y l concentrations i n t h e order of 1 ppb t o 1 ppm are relevant. Though b i a c e t y l i s a good phosphorophore in f l u i d solutions, i t i s very i n e f f i c i e n t l y e x c i t e d , because o f i t s extremely low molar a b s o r p t i v i t y (above 220 nm E < 20 M - l cm").
This implies t h a t t h e
detection l i m i t s f o r b i a c e t y l i n beer, achieved by UV/Vis absorption and by d i r e c t phosphorescence measurements are both very unfavourable. However, s e n s i t i z e d phosphorescence d e t e c t i o n can be invoked t o improve the e x c i t a t i o n o f b i a c e t y l i n an i n d i r e c t way ( r e f . 40, 41). Now b i a c e t y l , a c t i n g as acceptor i s the analyte and a s u i t a b l e donor compound has t o be found. The appropriate donor should have a high a b s o r p t i v i t y , i t should guarantee a high energy t r a n s f e r e f f i c i e n c y t o b i a c e t y l , i t should be nonphosphorescent i t s e l f , but i t s t r i p l e t s t a t e TI
should have a l a r g e l i f e -
time. For extremely low b i a c e t y l concentrations i t i s obvious t h a t
so t h a t the e f f i c i e n c y o f energy t r a n s f e r (see Eq. 22) can be approximated as
620
-
560
SO0
440
emirslon wsvelength(nm)
Fig. 23
Sensitized phosphorescence emission spectrum o f a mixture o f NDSA and b i a c e t y l i n a deoxygenated s o l u t i o n o f w a t e r / a c e t o n i t r i l e 70/ 30 ( v / v ) a t room temperature. The background fluorescence o f NDSA i s recorded without deoxygenation; keXC = 302 nm (a favourable wavelength t o e x c i t e NDSA) ( r e f . 35).
315 Under these c o n d i t i o n s t h e s e n s i t i z e d phosphorescence s i g n a l I (sens) i s P l i n e a r l y dependent on t h e b i a c e t y l c o n c e n t r a t i o n . A number o f p o t e n t i a l donors has been tested;
1,5-naphthalenedisulfonic a c i d disodium s a l t
(NDSA) i s an a p p r o p r i a t e donor. This compound has a f a v o u r a b l e s o l u b i l i t y i n p o l a r s o l v e n t m i x t u r e s and g i v e s no r e t e n t i o n on a reversed-phase column.
Fig.
23
shows
the
emission
spectrum
of
a
deoxygenated
4 w a t e r / a c e t o n i t r i l e 70/30 (v/v) s o l u t i o n o f 1.5 x 10- M NDSA and about 5 x M b i a c e t y l . A chromatogram f o r a beer sample c o n t a i n i n g 14 ppb b i a c e t y l i s given i n Fig. 24; t h e corresponding l i m i t o f d e t e c t i o n i s 0.5 PPb
. biacety I
I
1
6
4
1
2
0
t-tR(min)
F i g . 24
HPLC chromatogram o f a beer sample c o n t a i n i n g 14 ppb b i a c e t y l w i t h s e n s i t i z e d phosphorescence d e t e c t i o n ( h = 310 nm; h = 516 nm). Column: 25 cm x 4.6 mm I . D . 5 p f#kerisorl);l elu&!t: w a t e r l a c e t o n i t r i l e , 70/30 (v/v), pH = 6.5, w i t h 2 x 10 M NDSA. 1 = s o l v e n t f r o n t ; 2 = unknown ( r e f . 35).
QUENCHED PHOSPHORESCENCE INTRODUCTION
3.4.2 3.4.2.1
Another i n d i r e c t d e t e c t i o n method based on a dynamic p r i n c i p l e concerns t h e quenched phosphorescence i n 1 i q u i d s o l u t i o n s
at
room tem-
perature. Analytes a b l e t o quench t h e phosphorescence o f a compound, f o r example b i a c e t y l , cause a decrease of t h e monitored s i g n a l . As t h e amount o f quenching i s determined by t h e r a t e constant o f t h e r e a c t i o n , between a n a l y t e and e x c i t e d phosphorophore, t h e quenched phosphorescence method has an i n h e r e n t s e l e c t i v i t y . I t i s e s p e c i a l l y u s e f u l when one o r a few analytes have t o be determined i n presence o f a number o f o t h e r compounds, f o r example i n complex m a t r i c e s such as body f l u i d s o r environmental samples
.
THEORETICAL ASPECTS
3.4.2.2
The r e a c t i o n scheme showing t h e r e a c t i o n pathways f o r quenched RTPL i s given
in
Table V I I . For convenience
i t i s based on b i a c e t y l (B) as t h e
316 phosphorophore. F i r s t b i a c e t y l i s e x c i t e d by means o f l i g h t absorption d i r e c t l y i n an excited s i n g l e t s t a t e . Subsequently b i a c e t y l f a l l s down t o i t s t r i p l e t s t a t e T1. I n absence o f a quencher, t h e f o l l o w i n g step i s t h e r e t u r n t o t h e ground s t a t e by emission of phosphorescence. I n presence of a quencher which i s able t o r e a c t r a p i d l y w i t h 3B* t h e l i f e t i m e of b i acetyl i n t h e t r i p l e t s t a t e w i l l decrease, r e s u l t i n g i n a reduction of t h e monitored b i a c e t y l phosphorescence signal ( r e f . 42). TABLE V I I
Reaction scheme f o r quenched RTPL o f b i a c e t y l by tri p l e t - t r i p l e t energy t r a n s f e r . 1. E x c i t a t i o n of b i a c e t y l (B) 'B
+ hyB exc
+ 'B*
2. Intersystem crossing t o t h e t r i p l e t s t a t e 'B*
43B*
3. Phosphorescence o f b i a c e t y l 3B*+1B
+ hy
P
4 . Quenching o f b i a c e t y l phosphorescence by a quencher Q (the analyte)
I n absence o f quencher, t h e phosphorescence
1, o f b i a c e t y l can be ex-
pressed as
I =IB 0
eB eB
(39)
abs isc P
B where Iabs i s the r a t e o f l i g h t absorption by b i a c e t y l and QSc
represent
the
respective
efficiencies
of
intersystem
and e B P crossing and
phosphorescence (since o n l y the phosphorescence p r o p e r t i e s o f B p l a y a r o l e , i n the f o l l o w i n g t h e superscript e f f i c i e n c y i s given by
B w i l l be deleted).
The l a s t
317 i s t h e t r i p l e t s t a t e l i f e t i m e o f b i a c e t y l ( 5 ) . I f , however, a quencher i s present t h e l i f e t i m e w i l l be reduced, and t h e f o l l o w i n g r e l a t i o n holds
wherin
T~
kQ i s t h e b i m o l e c u l a r r a t e constant o f t h e quenching r e a c t i o n (M
-1 -1
s ) and
[ Q ] t h e c o n c e n t r a t i o n o f t h e quencher (M). As a r e s u l t t h e phosphorescence s i g n a l i n t e n s i t y w i l l decrease from 1, t o I . For t h e r a t i o Io/I a relation s i m i l a r t o t h e well-known Stern-Volmer derived
equation i n fluorescence can be
As t h e q u o t i e n t kQTo/Io f o r a chosen phosphorophore and a n a l y t e ( t h e
quencher) has a constant value i t i s c l e a r from Eq. (42) t h a t I - l - I o - ' d e pends l i n e a r l y from
[Q]. This i m p l i e s t h a t p l o t t i n g o f 1 - l versus [Q]
d e l i v e r s a s t r a i g h t l i n e w i t h a slope p r o p o r t i o n a l t o k
Q
and an i n t e r c e p t
equal t o t h e i n v e r t e d i n t e n s i t y o f t h e unquenched s i g n a l . I n o r d e r t o r e a l i z e a l i n e a r response between t h e c o n c e n t r a t i o n and t h e s i g n a l h e i g h t i n several experiments an e l e c t r o n i c s i g n a l i n v e r t e r has been i n t r o d u c e d between t h e photomul t i p 1 i e r t u b e and t h e recorder. Furtheron i t i s obvious from Eq.
(42)
t h a t t h e s e n s i t i v i t y of t h e
quenched RTPL method f o r a p a r t i c u l a r phosphorophore and quencher i s determined by t h e quenching r a t e constant k I f t h e l i f e t i m e T~ i s known t h e r a t e constant k
Q'
Q
can be c a l c u l a t e d from t h e s l o p e o f t h e Stern-Volmer
p l o t . I n s t a t i c experiments, t h e value o f
T~
i n d i f f e r e n t s o l v e n t s can be
r e a d i l y estimated i n an i n d i r e c t way from t h e r a t i o o f t h e phosphorescence and fluorscence i n t e n s i t i e s of b i a c e t y l , measured a t t h e i r r e s p e c t i v e maxima. O f course, i n time-resolved experiments
T~
can be d e r i v e d d i r e c t l y
from t h e decay o f t h e phosphorescence s i g n a l . Subsequently an e s t i m a t i o n o f t h e l i m i t s o f d e t e c t i o n f o r t h e a n a l y t e s can be obtained, s i n c e i t can be d e r i v e d t h a t f o r batch experiments approximately holds
3 18
10 (M1 s-1) 1.o.d. (M)=-
(43)
k
Q
This implies t h a t the quenched RTPL method would be o f i n t e r e s t f o r analytes quenching the b i a c e t y l phosphorescence w i t h r a t e constants lo7 t o
l o 9 M-l s-', depending on the a v a i l a b i l i t y o f a l t e r n a t i v e d e t e c t i o n methods. O f course the s e n s i t i v i t y depends a l s o on T~ and thus on t h e amount o f oxygen and i m p u r i t i e s present i n the s o l u t i o n . Furthermore, t h e achievable d e t e c t i o n l i m i t s improve w i t h increasing I,,
since a t higher I.
the signal t o noise r a t i o becomes more favourably. The quenched RTPL i s also a s e l e c t i v e method, because o n l y analytes w i t h s u f f i c i e n t l y high k
Q
values can be detected. Otherwise t h i s i s t h e o n l y requirement f o r d e t e c t -
a b i l i t y . The absorption spectra o f the analytes do not p l a y a r o l e . The same holds f o r the quenching mechanism. Quenched RTPL i s not l i m i t e d t o analytes w i t h t r i p l e t states l y i n g lower than t h e T1 s t a t e o f t h e phosphorophore. Other mechanisms, such as e l e c t r o n t r a n s f e r and proton a b s t r a c t i o n may be also involved i n t h e quenched RTPL. Especially t h e former seems t o be important.
This explains why f o r instance some inorganic ions are
s e n s i t i v e l y detectable w i t h quenched RTPL. F i n a l l y i t i s emphasized t h a t a l s o fluorescence quenching has been introduced
as
a detection
method
in
HPLC,
i.e.,
by
the
group
of
Winefordner i n 1981 (refs. 193, 194). However, i t should be r e a l i z e d t h a t t h i s detection p r i n c i p l e
i s essentially
phosphorescence method described
different
from the
i n t h e present chapter.
quenched
Fluorescence
quenching i s based on the s t a t i c quenching as a r e s u l t o f the i n t e r a c t i o n between the fluorophore and the analyte i n t h e i r e l e c t r o n i c ground s t a t e s and/or on the absorption o f fluorescence r a d i a t i o n by t h e analyte. Dynamic quenching o f fluorescence i s n o t e f f e c t i v e since the l i f e t i m e o f t h e lowest excited s i n g l e t states i s t o o short. 3.4.2.3
APPLICATIONS
The p o t e n t i a l o f quenched RTPL f o r t h e d e t e c t i o n of a l a r g e number o f both organic and inorganic compounds has been examined. The relevance o f quenched RTPL i s obvious since i t i s applicable f o r t h e s e n s i t i v e detection o f various groups of compounds w i t h otherwise poor d e t e c t i o n properties. The chromophoric p r o p e r t i e s of
t h e analyte do n o t play a r o l e i n
quenched RTPL; the analyte needs n o t t o be excited. Also t h e mechanism o f the quenching process i s n o t important. Besides energy t r a n s f e r reactions, a l s o electron t r a n s f e r reactions o r even proton a b s t r a c t i o n reactions may
319 be o p e r a t i v e . The o n l y c o n d i t i o n i s t h a t t h e quencher r e a c t s r a p i d l y w i t h biacetyl
i n t h e t r i p l e t state;
t h e r a t e constant
k
determines
Q
the
s e n s i t i v i t y o f quenched RTPL f o r a p a r t i c u l a r a n a l y t e . G e n e r a l l y , quenched RTPL d e t e c t i o n i s r e l e v a n t f o r a n a l y t e s w i t h r a t e c o n s t a n t s r a n g i n g f r o m
lo7 t o
lo9
M-l s - l ( r e f . 42).
A screening t e s t o f various types o f
compounds has re v e a l e d t h a t quenched RTPL can be used among o t h e r s f o r h i g h e r c h l o r i n a t e d naphthalenes, a r o m a t i c and a l i p h a t i c amines, s u l p h u r c o n t a i n i n g o r g a n i c s such as t h i o u r e a s and p henot hioazines and s e v e r a l i n o r g a n i c i o n s (e.g., NO2-, SCN-, S2032- , Sn2+ , Cr042-) and complexes (e.g., some a n t i t u m o r agents based on P t ( I 1 ) ) . It i s emphasized t h a t quenched RTPL has a l s o an i n h e r e n t s e l e c t i v i t y . T h i s i s i n t e r e s t i n g as i n t h e f i e l d o f i o n chromatography m o b i l e phases w i t h h i g h i o n i c s t r e n g t h s are
used.
In
ge n e r a l
only
those
ions
are
observed
by
quenched
phosphorescence t h a t e i t h e r have a l o w l y i n g t r i p l e t s t a t e energy o r a l o w o x i d a t i o n p o t e n t i a l . The o t h e r s can b e used as e l u e n t c o n s t i t u e n t s w i t h o u t i n d u c i n g any background s i g n a l . I n t h e f o r e g o i n g s e c t i o n we have seen t h a t PCNs can be d e t e c t e d by s e n s i t i z e d b i a c e t y l phosphorescence though t h e s e n s i t i v i t y f o r some h i g h e r c h l o r i n a t e d PCNs i s low. T h i s has t o be a s c r i b e d t o t h e t r i p l e t energy values of t h es e compounds, which a r e about t h e same as, o r even l o w e r , than t h e t r i p l e t energy o f b i a c e t y l . I n t h i s case a reversed energy t r a n s f e r r e a c t i o n f rom b i a c e t y l t o t h e PCN must b e t aken i n t o account, which leads t o a decrease i n t h e s e n s i t i z e d (and t h e d i r e c t ) RTPL s i g n a l o f b i a c e t y l . A re v erse d energy t r a n s f e r i m p l i e s t h a t i n a d d i t i o n t o UV abs o r p t i o n and s e n s i t i z e d phosphorescence a l s o quenched phosphorescence can be invoked f o r t h e analyses and i d e n t i f i c a t i o n o f i n d u s t r i a l PCN m i x t u r e s ( r e f . 43). I t i s emphasized t h a t t h e a p p l i c a t i o n o f quenched RTPL i n s t e a d s e n s i t i z e d RTPL r e q u i r e s o n l y an a d j u st ment o f t h e e x c i t a t i o n wavelength. I n F i g . 25 t h e r e v e r s e d phase chromatograms o f Halowax 1099 of
obta ined w i t h represented.
UV,
sensitized
RTPL
and
quenched
RTPL
detection
are
The s e n s i t i v i t y o f t h e quenched phosphorescence d e t e c t i o n i s demonstrated f o r thiourea derivatives.
I n Fi g . 26 a chromatogram d e t e c t e d by
quenched RTPL i s d e p i c t e d , u s i n g a s i g n a l i n v e r t e r ( r e f .
42).
Quenched
RTPL has been used t o d e t e c t some P t ( I 1 ) c o o r d i n a t i o n complexes, which a r e w e l l known agents w i t h a n t i t u m o r a c t i v i t y ( r e f . 46). The k values f o r t h e
8
‘ 8
quenching o f b i a c e t y l phosphorescence a r e 7 x 10 and 4 x 10 M-l s - l f o r CDOP ( c i s p l a t i n ) and CBDCA ( c a r b o p l a t i n ) , r e s p e c t i v e l y ; t h e s e values g i v e r i s e t o i n t e r e s t i n g LOD values. On t h e c o n t r a r y CHIP, a P t ( I V ) d e r i v a t i v e , does h a r d l y show any quenching (k c 106M- 1s- 1 ). T his r e s u l t may be an i n dication
that
the
quenching
Q
is
based on
electron
t r a n s f e r from t h e
320 platinum i o n t o t h e e x c i t e d b i a c e t y l molecule. I n Fig. 27 a chromatogram of a standard s o l u t i o n o f CDDP and CBDCA i s presented using quenched phosphorescence as d e t e c t i o n (
= 415
m, , ,A
= 520 nm). The l i m i t s of
detection c a l c u l a t e d from t h i s chromatogram are 3.0 x
M f o r CDDP and
M f o r CBDCA. These data compare favourably w i t h LODs obtained
3.3 x
v i a other detection methods (see Table V I I I ) . Experiments on u r i n e .and plasma samples showed i n t e r f e r i n g compounds c o - e l u t i n g w i t h the platinum species, so t h a t a clean-up procedure i s necessary ( r e f . 47). I n Fig. 28 a chromatogram f o r a blank plasma sample and a sample spiked w i t h CDDP i s depicted, obtained a f t e r applying such a sample hand1 i n g procedure; t h e chromatography i s based on a solvent generated anion exchanger system. I t
i s c l e a r t h a t i n t h i s way CDDP can be determined q u a n t i t a t i v e l y i n plasma. The same holds f o r CDDP i n u r i n e . The s e n s i t i v i t y o f t h e method i s s u f f i c i e n t f o r the monitoring o f therapeutic CDDP l e v e l s i n c l i n i c a l samples.
l
uv
SENSITIZED
9
14
18
16
14
12
l0
B
6
4
2
0
18
16
14
10 B timelrninl
12
6
L 4
2
0
OUE NCHED
Fig. 25
Reversed-phase chromatograms o f Halowax 1099 obtained w i t h UV detection ( A = 233 nm; 0.32 a.u.f.s.), s e n s i t i z e d RTPL detection ( hexc = 300 nm; hem = 520 nm) and quenched RTPL detection ( = 415 nm; A = 520 nm); i n j e c t e d amount o f sample i n a l l t%romatograms: qm @. The corresponding peaks i n t h e three chromatograms are i n d i c a t e d by the f i g s . 1 t o 15; i t i s obvious t h a t combination o f these t h r e e d e t e c t i o n modes i s h e l p f u l f o r i d e n t i f i c a t i o n purposes ( r e f . 43).
F i n a l l y , we w i l l consider t h e determination o f chromate as an example of quenched RTPL d e t e c t i o n i n ion-chromatography ( r e f . 48). The t r i v a l e n t c a t i o n Cr(II1) which i s an e s s e n t i a l t r a c e element t o man, hardly does quench b i a c e t y l phosphorescence.
The chromate ion Cr(V1) , an enzymatic
poison leading t o h e p a t i t i c and renal damage by exposure, can be determined s e l e c t i v e l y a f t e r separation on a paired-ion reversed phase HPLC system w i t h quenched phosphorescence detection.
In these measurements
321
the possibility o f time resolution in quenched phosphorescence detection has been invoked. The signal reduction caused by the quencher Cr04'depends on both the delay time td and the gating time t experimental pa9' rameters in a pulsed source detection system. This leads to a modified Stern-Volmer equation :
wherein the subscription "pulse" is used to denote that the pulsed phosphorescence detection mode i s applied. This equation applies provided that t is chosen long enough to guarantee that after t seconds less than 9 9 1 per cent o f the signal is recorded. It is obvious that is not linearly dependent on [Q]. The influence o f the exponential term decreases if td is shortened. Experiments on the biacetyl system have shown that for t is 0.9-1.0 ms the signal to noise ratio is the most 9 favourable and that the optimum value for td is about 0.10 ms. In Fig. 29 a chromatogram for a 1.7 x lom6 M chromate standard solution is given. The detection limit achieved is 1.4 x M, corresponding to 16 ppb, which underlines the relevance of the method as the maximum concentration allowed in drinking water is 50 ppb. The linearity of the method is three orders of magnitude provided that an electronic signal inverter is applied. From the data in Table I X it is clear that the sensitivity of the quenched RTPL method compares reasonably with other detection methods.
1
-
10 0 6
Fig. 26
4 2
6
tR(min)
Quenched -8TPL chromatogram o f some thiourea derivatives; eluent: 1.0 x 10 M biacetyl in water; column RP-18, 12 cm, d = 5 K flow rate = 1 ml/min; observed t (= t ) for NaN02 = 48 s; 1 = thourea (41 ng), 2 = thhhydanqoine (63 ng), 3 = ethylenethiourea (55 ng), 4 = methimazole (62 ng) (ref. 42).
322 TABLE V I I I
Comparison o f 1.o.d. values (ng/ml) f o r CDDP and CBDCA derived from l i q u i d chromatography w i t h d i f f e r e n t d e t e c t i o n methods.
Detection method
uv UV a f t e r d e r i v a t i z a t i o n
E l ectrochemi c i a1
CDDP
CBDCA
20,000 40 15
Chl o r i de-assi sted electrochemical
50
QRTPL
90
Ref.
20,000 1200 15 A f t e r precolumn d e r i v a t i z a t ion
195 195 196
Not measured
197
122
46
TABLE I X Comparison o f 1.o.d. values (ng/ml) f o r chromate obtained w i t h d i f f e r e n t HPLC methods. Detection method
1 .o.d.
Ref.
E 1e c t rochemi ca 1
4
198
100
199
7
200
16
48
(as diethyldithiocarbamate complex) Col orimet r ic (as l15-diphenylcarbazide comp 1ex) D i r e c t current plasma (DCP) emission spectroscopy Quenched RTPL
The chromatogram o f tapwater (Fig. 30) and surface water samples spiked w i t h chromate show the appl i c a b i 1 it y o f t h e quenched phosphorescence method f o r r e a l samples.
323
Fig 27
Quenched phosphvescence chromatogram of CDDP (6.1 . M) and CBDCA (8.3 , 10- M) in 0.15 M aqueous NaC1. 1 = chloride, 2 = unknown. Column: ODS Hypersil column 5 f l (10 cm x 4.6 mm) prepared with hexadecyltrimethylammonium bromide (HTAB). Mobile pha5e: water/methano$, 99/1 ( v / v ) , pH 5.0 (citrate buffer), 2 x 10 M HTAB and 10- M biacetyl. Aex = 415 nm, A, = 520 nm (ref. 46).
Fig. 28
Chromatogram of a blank N a s m a sample (A), and o f a plasma sample spiked with 5 x 10 M CDDP ( B ) . For chromatographic conditions, see Fig. 27 (ref. 47).
324
t
h
3 L
v
x
e C
01
r
c_
z 01
In J!
8
a 0
8 P
3
-
6
4
0
2
tR(min)
Fig. 29
Chromatogram o f a standard s o l u t i o n o f chromate (1.7 x 10'6M). 1 and 2 are quenching i m p u r i t i e s , 3 = chromate. Chromatographic cond i t i o n s : column 12 cm x 4.6 mm I.D. 5 IQI ODS Spherjsorb; mobile phase: w a t e r / a c e t o n i t r i l q 95/5 ( v / v ) , 2 x3 10- M phosphate b u f f e r , pH = 7.1,_{ x 10- M TBACl and 5 x 10- M b i a c e t y l ; flow Time-resolved phosphorescence detection: td r a t e = 1.9 m l min = 0.01 msec, t = 1.00 msec, lexc = 400 nm (broad band f i l t e r ) , A = 515 nm (Pef. 48). em
.
r 4
0
4
2
0
Chromatogram o f a blank tat water sample (A) and o f a t a p water sample spiked w i t h 1 x 10 M chromate ( B ) . The p o s i t i v e peaks are a t t r i b u t e d t o i m p u r i t i e s present i n t h e samples e x h i b i t i n g n a t i v e fluorescence o r s e n s i t i z e d phosphorescence o f b i a c e t y l . The negative peaks are caused by quenching compounds. Chromatographic and detection c o n d i t i o n s as i n Fig. 29 ( r e f . 48).
Fig. 30
3.5
2
ALTERNATIVE PHOSPHOROPHORES/LUMINOPHORES Though t h e i n d i r e c t phosphorescence detection,
quenched,
both s e n s i t i z e d and
has proved t o g i v e promising r e s u l t s i n HPLC experiments w i t h
325 biacetyl
as
phosphorophore
this
combination
has
some
inherent
dis-
advantages. F i r s t b i a c e t y l i s consumed d u r i n g t h e experiments as i t i s p a r t o f t h e e l u e n t . Secondly i t i s n o t s t a b l e a t pH values h i g h e r than 7. T h i r d l y , t h e measurements have t o be done under oxygen f r e e c o n d i t i o n s . The f i r s t drawback can be r a i s e d by u s i n g immobilized phosphorophores ( r e f . 49). I n o r d e r t o e l i m i n a t e t h e oxygen removal s t e p r a r e e a r t h metal ions, which a r e w e l l known luminophores have been s t u d i e d i n quenched luminescence d e t e c t i o n ( r e f . 50). I n t h i s case t h e t r a n s i t i o n r e s p o n s i b l e f o r t h e l i g h t emission does n o t i n v o l v e a t r i p l e t and s i n g l e t s t a t e . Therefore t h e more general term luminophore i s used. I n t h i s s e c t i o n a t t e n t i o n w i l l be p a i d t o two a l t e r n a t i v e phosphorophores/luminophores as d e t e c t i o n method i n f l o w systems as HPLC. 3.5.1
IMMOBILIZED PHOSPHOROPHORES There i s a number o f advantages i n employing immobilized phosphoro-
phores i n i n d i r e c t phosphorescence d e t e c t i o n . F i r s t t h e r e i s an e x t e n s i o n of
the solvent
compatability,
so t h a t
a p o l a r phosphorophores may be
combined w i t h aqueous mobile phases and reversed phase HPLC columns. Furtheron, because o f i m m o b i l i z a t i o n no losses o f phosphorophore occur and f i n a l l y , t h e l o c a l i z a t i o n o f t h e phosphorophore i n t h e c e l l makes i t poss i b l e t o apply o t h e r s i m p l e r oxygen removal procedures. Disadvantages a r e t h e background s c a t t e r i n g caused by t h e support and t h e l i m i t e d t r a n s parancy
of
the
cell
which
limits
the
excitation
range
of
the
phosphorophore down t o about 340 nm. F o r t u n a t e l y , t h e e f f e c t o f s c a t t e r i n g can be e f f i c i e n t l y
suppressed by u s i n g a pulsed source-time
resolved
luminescence d e t e c t i o n system. Results obtained w i t h 1-bromonaphthalene,
a compound known from i t s
RTPL p r o p e r t i e s (see Table V) have been reported. The phosphorophore i s c o v a l e n t l y bonded t o a s o l i d support v i a a spacer t o c r e a t e pseudo solution
conditions.
The
immobilization
reaction
(ref.
49)
is
schematically represented i n F i g . 31. The synthesized batches, which a r e very s t a b l e ,
c o u l d be used under f l o w c o n d i t i o n s a t l e a s t d u r i n g s i x
months. They c o u l d be a p p l i e d w i t h o u t problems between pH 2 and 8. The immobi 1 iz a t ion h a r d l y affects t h e spectroscopic emission c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s o f t h e phosphorophore. Although e x c i t a t i o n o f 1-bromonaphthalene i t s e l f i s almost impossible a t wavelengths h i g h e r than 340 nm, i n t r o d u c t i o n of t h e
C=O group on t h e 4- p o s i t i o n r e s u l t s i n a low a b s o r p t i v i t y i n t h e 340-375 nm region. The p o s s i b i l i t i e s o f t h i s system f o r quenched phosphorescence M n i t r i t e solution d e t e c t i o n have been t e s t e d by i n j e c t i o n of a 7 x on a HPLC column. The a n a l y t i c a l d a t a a r e comparable w i t h those o b t a i n e d M. w i t h t h e homogeneous b i a c e t y l system; t h e d e t e c t i o n l i m i t i s 2 x
326 For I - a lower signal was observed. According to the Stern-Volmer relation (see Eq. 42) the sensitivity of the quenched phosphorescence detector is determined by the product kQTo. As the phosphorescence 1 ifetime T~ depends mainly on the phosphorophore used ( T~ is about 0.9 ms) the lower signal for I- has to be described to the relatively low quenching constant k (k = 1 x 10'M-I s-l for I- and kQ = Q Q 3.3 x lo9 M - l s-l for NO2-). From the data represented, the potential of an immobilized phosphorophore in quenching phosphorescence detection i s clear. Until now an example, wherein the immobilized phosphorophore acts in the sensitized mode has not been reported. IJr
Fig. 31
a. Synthesis of 10-(4-bromo-l-naphthoyl) decylamine, intermediate I. b. Immobilization of intermediate I to silanized silica gel or CPG (ref. 49).
3.5.2 RARE EARTH METAL IONS AS LUMINOPHORES The spectroscopic properties of lanthanide ions have been subject of research since many years, but the application of the luminescence of these ions as detection method in liquid chromatography (LC) is still rather restricted. Wenzel at al., have developed an LC method for the determination of polynucleotides and nucleic acids with xanthine, guanine and thioridine unities (ref. 201). After chromatographic separation, a postcolumn complexation of the analytes with Eu(II1) or Tb(II1) leads to products that can be sensitively detected by lanthanide luminescence. The use of Eu(II1) and Tb(II1) as luminophores in LC in a sensitized detection mode has been described by Dibella et al. (ref. 202). The analytes
327 ( o r g a n i c compounds) a r e e x c i t e d by UV r a d i a t i o n , energy t r a n s f e r f rom t h e t r i p l e t s t a t e o f t h e a n a l y t e t o t h e l a n t h a n i d e i o n occurs and luminescence of t h e l a n t h a n i d e i s detected. I n t h i s s e t -up energy t r a n s f e r i s t h e c r u c i a l s t e p s t a r t i n g a t t h e donor i n t h e t r i p l e t s t a t e , which e x p l a i n s t h a t deoxygenation o f t h e s o l u t i o n i s r e q u i r e d . Baumann e t a l . have examined t h e use o f r a r e metal i o n s E u ( I I 1 ) and T b ( I I 1 ) as luminophores f o r quenched d e t e c t i o n i n LC ( r e f . 50).
from (for b idden) t r a n s i t i o n s between l e v e l s b e l o n g i n g t o t h e 4 fn e l e c t r o n c o n f i g u r a t i o n . As t h e 4 f e l e c t r o n s a r e s h i e l d e d by 5 s and 5 p e l e c t r o n s , t h e observed t r a n s i t i o n s a r e v e r y sharp, even f o r s p e c t r a o f l i q u i d sol u t i o n s . N o n - r a d i a t i v e decay u s u a l l y competes s t r o n g l y w i t h r a d i a t i v e r e l a x a t i o n , e s p e c i a l l y i n H20. The
long
living
lanthanide
luminescence
(9.1
ms)
arises
From a p r a c t i c a l p o i n t o f v i e w compared t o b i a c e t y l phosphorescence, E u ( I I 1 ) and T b ( I I 1 ) luminescence have t h e s t r o n g advantage t h a t oxygen quenching h a r d l y p l a y s any r o l e .
T h i s i m p l i e s t h a t j u s t a common HPLC
set- up i s c omp at i b l e w i t h t h e quenched l a n t h a n i d e luminescence d e t e c t i o n mode;
no s p e c i a l e x p e r i m e n t a l r e q u i r e m e n t s need t o be f u l f i l l e d . On t h e
o t h e r hand t h e f a c t t h a t oxygen does n o t i nduce s i g n i f i c a n t quenching i m p l i e s t h a t , i m comparison w i t h b i a c e t y l , o t h e r quenching mechanisms may be o p e r a t i v e so t h a t another s e l e c t i v i t y s h o u l d be expected. i n s e c t i o n 3.4.2.2 the detection l i m i t s achiev able i n dy n a m i c a l l y quenched luminescence d e t e c t i o n depend on t h e As has been p o i n t e d out
n o i s e on t h e luminescence s i g n a l and t h u s on t h e i n t e n s i t y o f t h i s s i g n a l . U n f o r t u n a t e l y f o r E u ( I I 1 ) i n p r a c t i c e a r e l a t i v e l y l o w luminescence l e v e l i s reached because o f i t s l o w a b s o r p t i v i t y ( € < 10 M - l cm-l and t h e ab-
s o r p t i o n peaks a r e narrow). For T b ( I I 1 ) t h e s i t u a t i o n i s more f avourable: f 75d 1 l y i n g a t 220 nm i s a l l o w e d ( € 300 M - l
t h e t r a n s i t i o n 4 f8 - 4
so t h a t r a t h e r e f f i c i e n t e x c i t a t i o n i s p o s s i b l e p r o v i d e d t h a t a lamp i s a v a i l a b l e w i t h a f a v o u r a b l e o u t p u t a t t h a t wavelength.
cm-l
i n a r a t h e r broad band)
P r e l i m i n a r y HPLC experiments have been r e p o r t e d f o r n i t r i t e s o l u t i o n s . The EuC13 c o n t a i n i n g m o b i l e w a t e r phase was pumped d i r e c t l y t hrough a L i Chrosorb RP-18 a n a l y t i c a l column. The t i m e r e s o l v e d measurement ( t d = 30 ps, tg = 2.0 ms) r e s u l t s i n a l i m i t o f d e t e c t i o n o f o n l y 2 x
M. As
expected f o r T b ( I I 1 ) t h e 1.o.d. i s more f a v o u r a ble. I t was found t o be 5 x 10- 8M, a q u i t e p ro m i s i n g r e s u l t ( r e f . 50). O b v ious ly t h e r e a r e s t i l l some aspects t o be examined. F i r s t of a l l , i t has been shown t h a t t h e E u ( I I 1 )
about
a
factor
o f 30
luminescence l i f e t i m e i s increased
upon g o i n g f r o m H20 t o D20; hence such an e l u e n t
328
might be very interesting assuming that microbore HPLC i s feasible. Secondly, the choice of buffers, frequently necessary in ion-chromatographic separation seems to be limited; some ions form stable complexes with the lanthanides thus reducing dynamic quenching of luminescence. Thirdly, the excitation efficiency of the lanthanides might be improved via cornplexation; on the other hand the ligands used in these complexes should not inhibit dynamic quenching processes. Sumnarizing this section, we do expect in the near future the publication of some interesting applications of lanthanide luminescence detection in LC especially for the measurements of inorganic ions. CONCLUDING REMARKS From the results described above it is obvious that phosphorescence detection has its particular applicability field in HPLC, despite of the fact that the phenomenon of phosphorescence in normal fluid solutions is quite exceptional. It is important to emphasize that the experimental requirements to be met are not difficult both to realize and to maintain and that the same equipment as applied in fluorescence detection can be utilized. The main requirement is to apply a closed chromatographic system based on stainless steel capillaries and to deoxygenate continuously the eluent by leading nitrogen gas through the eluent vessel. In sensitized phosphorescence detection, generally the analyte acts as a donor. Hence this detection mode is only appropriate for compounds with an absorption spectrum in the near UV and visible wavelength region. Therefore the results should be considered as additive to those obtained with absorption detection. As has been shown above, the combination of both detection techniques, and if relevant further combintion with fluorescence and / or quenched phosphorescence detection, is quite adequate for the analysis and identification of complex mixtures. The applicability of sensitized phosphorescence wherein the analyte is the acceptor, as for instance utilized for the determination of biacetyl in beer samples, i s limited since it requires a high phosphorescence efficiency for the analyte itself. The quenched phosphorescence detection mode presumably has a wider applicability range than the sensitized one. This indirect method is essentially different from indirect UV absorption- and fluorescence detection known in i o n chromatoraphy which both are based on displacement effects. In phosphorescence detection, a dynamic quenching effect i s monitored, i .e. , a decrease of the phosphorescence efficiency induced by the analytes. This explains the impressive detection limits obtained for 3.6
efficient
quenching
analytes.
Especially
in
i o n chromatography
this
d e t e c t i o n t ec hniqu e has a good p o t e n t i a l . Ne v ert heles s phosphorescence d e t e c t i o n i s n o t w i d e l y a p p l i e d y e t . Obviously, t h e need t o deoxygenate t h e e l u e n t i s a s e r i o u s hindrance f o r i t s genera l acceptance. describ ed i n s e c t i o n 3.5, and r a r e e a r t h
From t h i s p o i n t o f view t h e new developments namely t h e use o f immobilized phosphorophores
luminophores,
o f f e r new p e r s p e c t i v e s .
p r e l i m i n a r y r e s u l t s o b t a i n e d f o r E u ( I I I ) and T b ( I I 1 )
Especially
the
luminophores a r e
q u i t e pro mis in g s i n c e i n t h e s e systems oxygen removal i s n o t necessary i n t h e quenched mode.
It
i s emphasized t h a t ,
compared
to
fluorescence
d e t e c t i o n , phosphorescence has t h e g r e a t advantage t h a t background r a d i a t i o n due t o f l u o r e s c e n t i m p u r i t i e s and t o s c a t t e r i n g can be e l i m i n a t e d q u i t e e a s i l y w i t h o u t t h e need of expensive equipment; a p u l s e d Xe-lamp i n strument s u f f i c e s .
REFERENCES 1 H. Lingeman, W.J.M. Underberg, A. Takedate and H u l s h o f f , J. L i q . Chromatogr., 8, 789 (1985). 2 R.W. F r e i , N.H. V e l t h o r s t and C. G o o i j e r , Pure 81 Appl. Chem., 57, 483 (1985). 3 U.A.Th. Brinkman, G.J. de Jong and C. G o o i j e r , Pure 8I Appl. Chem., 59, 625 (1987). 4 U.A.Th. Brinkman, Chromatographia, 24, 190 (1987). 5 P. L i n d r o t h and K. Mopper, Anal. Chem., 51, 1667 (1979). 6 J. D'Souza and R.J. O g i l v i e , J. Chromatogr., 232, 212 (1982). 7 P. Kucera and H. Umagat, J. Chromatogr., 255, 563 (1983). 8 P. Boehlen and H. M e l l e t , Anal. Biochem., 94, 313 (1979). 9 J.F. Lawrence and R.W. F r e i , Chemical D e r i v a t i z a t i o n i n L i q u i d Chromatography, E l s e v i e r , Amsterdam (1976). 10 J. F. Lawrence, Prechromatographic Chemical D e r i v a t i z a t i o n i n L i q u i d Chromatography, i n Chemical D e r i v a t i z a t i o n i n A n a l y t i c a l Chemistry, Vol. 2: S epar a t i o n and Continuous Flow Techniques, R.W. F r e i and J.F. Lawrence Eds., Plenum Press, New York (1982). 11 R.W. F r e i and A.H.M.T. Scholten, J. Chromatogr. Sci., 17, 152 (1979). 12 R.W. F r e i , J. Chromatogr., 165, 75 (1979). 13 J.T. Stewart, Trends Anal. Chem., 1, 170 (1982) 14 G. Schwedt and E. Reh, Chromatographia, 14, 249 (1981). 15 G. Schwedt and E. Reh, Chromatographia, 14, 317 (1981). 16 E.C. Toren Jr. and D.N. Vacik, Anal. Chim. Acta, 152, 1 (1983). 17 R.W. F r e i , Chromatographia, 15, 161 (1982). 18 J.F. Lawrence, U.A.Th. Brinkman and R.W. F r e i , J. Chromatogr., 185, 473 (1979). 19 R.J. Reddingius, G.J. de Jon , U.A.Th. Brinkman and R.W. F r e i , J.Chromatogr., 205, 77 (19817. 20 J.H. Wolf, C. de R u i t e r , U.A.Th. Brinkman and R.W. F r e i , J. Pharm. Biomed. Anal., 4, 523 (1986). 21 C. de R u i t e r , J. Hefkens, U.A.Th. Brinkman, R.W. F r e i , M. Evers, E. M a t t h i j s and J.A. M e i j e r , I n t . J. E n v i r o n . Anal. Chem., 31, 325 (19871. 22 F. Smedes, J.C. Kraak, C.E. Werkhoven-Goewie, U.A.Th. Brinkman and R.W. F r e i , J. Chromatogr., 247, 123 (1982). 23 A.H.M.T. Scholten, U.A.Th. Brinkman and R.W. F r e i , Anal. Chim. Acta, 114, 137 (1980).
330 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
M. U i h l e i n and E. Schwab, Chromatographia, 15, 140 (1982). M.L. Grayeski, Anal. Chem., 59, 1243A (1987). P. van Zoonen, Thesis, Free U n i v e r s i t y Amsterdam, 1987. W.R. S e i t z and M.P. Neary i n Contemporary Topics i n A n a l y t i c a l Chemistry, Volume I . D.M. Hercules (Ed.), Plenum, New York (1977). G. Mellbin, J. Liq. Chromatogr., 6, 1603 (1983). S. Kobayashi and K. Imai, Anal. Chem., 52, 424 (1980). P. van Zoonen, D.A. Kamminga, C. Gooijer, N.H. V e l t h o r s t and R.W. F r e i , Anal. Chim. Acta, 167, 249 (1985). P. van Zoonen, D.A. Kamminga, C. Gooijer, N.H. V e l t h o r s t , R.W.Frei and G.Gubitz,Anal .Chim.Acta, 174, 151 (1985) G. Gubitz, P. van Zoonen, C. Gooijer, N.H. V e l t h o r s t and R.W. F r e i , Anal. Chem., 57, 2071 (1985). P. van Zoonen, I . de Herder, C. Gooijer, N.H. V e l t h o r s t , R.W. F r e i , E. Kuntzberg and G. Gubitz, Anal. Letters., 19, 1949 (1986). P. van Zoonen, C. Gooijer, N.H. Velthorst, R.W. F r e i , J. H. Wolf, J. G e r r i t s and F. Flengte, J. Pharm. & Biomed. Analysis, 5 , 485 (1987). C. Gooijer, R.A. Baumann and N.H. Velthorst, Progr. Anal. Spectrosc.,
10, 573 (1987). 36 37 38 39 40
J.J. Donkerbroek, Thesis, Free U n i v e r s i t y Amsterdam, 1983. R.A. Baumann, Thesis, Free U n i v e r s i t y Amsterdam, 1987. J.J. Donkerbroek, C. Gooijer, N.H. V e l t h o r s t and R.W. F r e i , Anal. Chem., 54, 891 (1982). J.J. Donkerbroek, N.J.R. van Eikema Homes, C. Gooijer, N.H. Velthorst and R.W. F r e i , Chromatographia, 15, 218 (1982). R.A. Baumann, C. Gooijer, N.H. V e l t h o r s t and R.W. F r e i , Anal. Chem.,
57, 1815 (1985). 41 42 43 44
R.A. Baumann, C. Gooijer, N.H. Velthorst. R.W. F r e i , J. S t r a t i n g , L.C. Verhagen and R.C. Veldhuyzen-Doorduin, I n t e r n . J. Environ. Anal. Chem., 25, 195 (1986). J.J. Donkerbroek, A.C. Veltkamp, C. Gooijer, N.H. V e l t h o r s t and R.W. F r e i , Anal. Chem., 5 5 , 1886 (1983). J.J. Donkerbroek, N.J.R. van Eikema Hommes, C. Gooijer, N.H. Velthorst and R.W. F r e i , J. Chromatogr., 255, 581 (1983). C. Gooijer, N.H. Velthorst and R.W. F r e i , Trends i n Anal. Chem., 3,
259 (1984). 45
52 53 54 55
C. Gooijer, P.R. Markies, J.J. Donkerbroek, N. H. V e l t h o r s t and R.W. Frei, J. Chromatogr., 289, 347 (1984). C. Gooijer, A.C. Veltkamp, R.A. Baumann, N.H. V e l t h o r s t , R.W. F r e i and W.J.H. van der Vijgh, J. Chromatogr., 312, 337 (1984). R.A. Baumann, C. Gooijer, N.H. V e l t h o r s t , R.W. F r e i , I . K l e i n and W.J.F. van der Vijgh, J . Pharm. Biomed. Anal., 5, 2, 165 (1987). R.A. Baumann, M. Schreurs, C. Gooijer, N.H. V e l t h o r s t and R.W. F r e i , Can. J. Chem., 65, 965 (1987). R.A. Baumann, C. Gooijer, N.H. V e l t h o r s t , R.W. F r e i , I . Aichinger and G. Gubitz, Anal. Chem., 60, 1237 (1988). R.A. Baumann, D.A. Kamminga, H. Derlagen, C. Gooijer, N.H. V e l t h o r s t and R.W. F r e i , J. Chromatogr., 439, 165 (1988). W.P. Bostick, M.S. Denton and S.R. Dinsmore i n Bioluminescence and Chemiluminescence, Instruments and Applications, K. van D i j k e (Ed.), CRC, Boca Raton, (1985) Vol. 11. J.W. B i r k s and M.C. Kuge, Anal. Chem., 52, 897 (1980). B. Shoemaker and J.W. B i r k s , J. Chromatogr., 209, 251 (1981). H. Schaper, J. Electroanal. Chem., 129, 335 (1981). R.C. Massey, C. Crews, D.J. McWeeny and M.E. Knowles, J. Chromatogr.,
56 57 58 59
W.C. Yu and E.U. Golf, Anal. Chem., 55, 29 (1983). A.V.Hartkopf and R. Delumya, Anal. Lett., 7, 79 (1974). M.P. Neary, W.R. Seitz and D.M. Hercules, Anal. Lett., 7, 583 (1974). R. Delumya and A.V. Hartkopf, Anal. Chem., 18, 1402 (1976).
46 47 48 49 50 51
236, 527 (1982).
33 1 60 61 62
63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76
77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101
J.L. Burguera, M. Burguera and A. Townshend, Anal. Chim. Acta, 127, 199 (1981). T.Hara, M. Toriyama and K. Tsukagoshi, B u l l . Chem. SOC. Japan, 56, 1382 (1983). T. Hara, M. Toriyama and T. Ebuchi, B u l l . Chem. SOC. Japan, 58, 109 (1985). A. MacOonald and T.A. Nieman, Anal. Chem. 57, 936 (1985). J.P. Auses, S.L. Cook and J.T. Maloy. Anal. Chem., 47, 244 (1975). O.T. B o s t i c k and D.M. Hercules, Anal. Chem., 47, 447 (1975). C. Ridder, E.H. Hansen and J. Ruzicka, Anal. L e t t . , 15, 1751 (1982). C.A. Koerner and T.A. Nieman, Anal. Chem., 58, 116 (1986). R. Fagerstroem, P. Seppanen and J. Janne, C l i n . Chim. Acta, 143, 45 .. (1984). U. Bachrach and Y.M. Plesser, Anal. Biochem., 152, 423 (1986) M.P. Neary, R.W. S e i t z and D.M. Hercules, Anal. L e t t . , 7, 583 (1974) M.L. Gandelman and J.W. B i r k s , J. Chromatogr., 242, 21 (1982) T. Kawasaki, M. Maeda and A. T s u j i , J. Chromatogr., 328, 121 1985). R.L. Veazey and T.A. Nieman, J. Chromatogr., 200, 153 (1980). R.A. Steen and T.A. Nieman, Anal. Chim. Acta, 155, 123 (1983) M. Maeda and A. Tsu.ji. J. ChromatoQr., 352, 213 (1986). C.L.R. C a t h e r a l l , T;F; Palmer and E.Bi Cundall, J . Chem. SOC. Far ad ay Trans. 2, 80, 823 (1984); 80, 837 (1984). F.J. Alvarez, N. J. Parekh, B. Matuszweski, R.S. Givens, T. Higuchi and R.L. Showen, J. Am. Chem. SOC. , 108, 6435 (1986). P. van Zoonen, D.A. Kamminga, C. G o o i j e r , N.H. V e l t h o r s t , R.W. F r e i and G. Gubitz, Anal. Chem., 58 1245 (1986). P. van Zoonen, H. Bock, C. G o o i j e r , N.H. V e l t h o r s t and R.W. F r e i , Anal. Chim. Acta, 200, 131 (1987). K.W. Sigvardson and J.W. B i r k s , Anal. Chem., 55, 432 (1983). K.W. Sigvardson, J.M. Kennish and J.W. B i r k s , Anal. Chem., 56 1096 (1984). M.L. Grayeski and A.J. Weber, Anal. L e t t . , 17, 1539 (1984). K. Miyaguchi, K. Honda and K. Imai, J. Chromatogr., 316, 501 (1984). K. Miyaguchi, K. Honda and K. Imai, J. Chromatogr., 303, 173 (1984). K. Miyaguchi, K. Honda, T. Toyo'oka and K. Imai, J. Chromatogr., 352, 255 (1986). G. M e l l b i n and B.E.F. Smith, J. Chromatogr., 312, 203 (1984). T. K o z i o l , M.L. Grayeski and R. Weinberger, J. Chromatogr., 317, 355 (1984). K. Kobayashi, J. Sekino, K. Honda and K. Imai, Anal. Biochem., 112, 99 (1981). K. Honda, K. Miyaguchi and K. Imai, Anal. Chim. Acta, 177, 111 (1985). 6. Mann and M.L. Grayeski, J. Chromatogr., 386, 149 (1987). L.O. Bowers, Anal. Chem., 58, 513A (1986). L. Dalgaard, Trends i n Anal. Chem., 5 , 185 (1986). K. Honda, K. Miyaguchi, H. N i s h i r o , H. Tanaka, T. Yao and K. Imai, Anal. Biochem., 153, 50 (1986). F.M. Freeman and W. R. S e i t z , Anal. Chem., 50, 1242 (1978). K. Hool and T.A. Nieman, Anal. Chem., 59, 869 (1987). R.O. Lippman, Anal. Chim. Acta, 116, 181 (1980). B.R. B r a n c h i n i , F.G. S a l i t u r o , J.D. Hermes and N.G. Post, Biochem. Biohpys. Res. Comm., 97, 334 (1980). J.R. Poulson, J.W. B i r k s , G. Gubitz, P. van Zoonen, C. G o o i j e r , N.H. V e l t h o r s t and R.W. F r e i , J. Chromatogr., 360, 371 (1986). J.R. Poulson, J.W. B i r k s , P. van Zoonen, C. G o o i j e r , N.H. V e l t h o r s t and R.W. F r e i , Chromatographia, 21, 587 (1986). C.E. Goewie, M.W.F. Nielen, R.W. F r e i and U.A.Th. Brinkman, J .Chromatogr., 301, 325 (1984). H. Jansen, R.W. F r e i , U.A. Th. Brinkman, R.S. Deelder and R.P.J. S n e l l i n g s , J. Chromatogr., 325, 255 (1985).
.
332 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111
112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139
D. P i l o s o f and T.A. Nieman, Anal. Chem., 54, 1698 (1982). G. Scott, W.R. Seitz and J. Ambrose, Anal. Chim. Acta, 115, 221 (1980). J.L. Meek and C. Eva, J. Chromatogr., 317, 343 (1984). H.H. Weetall i n "Immobilized Enzymes" (U. Moshbach Ed.) , Academic Press, New York (1976). G. Damsma, B.H.C. Westerink and A.S. Horn, J. o f Neurochem., 45, 1649 (1985) P. van Zoonen, D.A. Kamminga, C. Gooijer, N.H. V e l t h o r s t and R.W. Frei, J. Liq. Chromatogr. 10, 819 (1987). K. Honda, J. Sekino and K. Imai, Anal. Chem., 53, 940 (1983). P. van Zoonen, D.A. Kamminga, C. Gooijer, N.H. V e l t h o r s t and R.W. F r e i , Anal. Chem., 58, 1245 (1986). P. van Zoonen, H. Bock, C. Gooijer, N.H. V e l t h o r s t and R.W. F r e i , Anal. Chim. Acta, 200, 131 (1987). K. Honda, K. Miyaguchi and K. Imai, Anal. Chim. Acta, 177, 103 (1985). C. Gooijer, P. van Zoonen, N.H. V e l t h o r s t and R.W. F r e i , J. of Bioluminescence and Chemiluminescence, i n press (1989). G.N. Lewis and M. Kasha, J. Am. Chem. SOC., 66, 2100 (1944). N.J. Turro "Modern Molecular Photochemistry", The Benjamin/Cummings Publishing Co., CAI (1978). J.B.F. Lloyd and J.N. M i l l e r , Talanta, 26, 180 (1980). J.D. Brown, J. Chem. SOC., (1958). M. Roth, J. Chromatogr., 30, 276 (1967). E.M. Schulman and C. Walling, Science, 178, 53 (1972). E.M. Schulman and C. Walling, J. Phys. Chem., 77, 902 (1973). R.T. Parker, R.S. Freedlander and R.B. Dunlap, Anal. Chim. Acta, 119, 189 (1980). R.T. 'Parker, R.S. Freedlander and R.B. Dunlap, Anal. Chim. Acta, 120, 1 (1980). S.L. Wellons, R.A. Paynter and J.D. Winefordner, Spectrochim. Acta, 30A, 2133 (1974). T. Vo-Dinh, E. Lue Yen and J. D. Winefordner, Talanta, 24, 146 f 1977). jiS. McHale and P.G. Seybold, J. Chem. Ed., 53, 654 (1976). E. Lue Yen Bower and J.D. Winefordner, Anal. Chim. Acta, 101, 319 (1978) G.J. Niday and P.G. Seybold, Anal. Chem., 50, 1577 (1978). C.G. de Lima and E.M. de Nicola, Anal. Chem. , 50, 1658 (1978). R.T. Parker, R.S. Freedlander, E.M. Schulman and R.B. Dunlap, Anal. Chem., 51. 1921 119791. M.L. Meyers, R. Zellmer, R.K. Sorrel1 and P.G. Seybold, J. Lum., 20, 215 (1979). C.D. Ford and R.J Hurtubise, Anal. Chem., 51, 659 (1979). D.L. McAleese and R.B. Dunlap, Anal. Chem., 56, 836 (1984). D.W. Abbott and T Vo-Dinh, Anal. Chem., 57, 41 (1985). M.M. Andino and J D. Winefordner, J. Pharm. Biomed. Anal., 4, 317 (1986). C.D. Ford and R.J Hurtubise, Anal. Chem. 50, 610 (1978). C.D. Ford and R.J Hurtubise. Anal. Chem.. 52. 656 (1980). W. Homer, G. Krabichler, S.'Uhl and D. Oelkrug, J.'Phys; Chem., 87, 4872 (1983). R.M.A. von Wandruszka and R.J. Hurtubise, Anal. Chem., 48, 1784 f.~~ 1976). ~, R.M.A. von Wandruszka and R.J. Hurtubise, Anal. Chem., 49, 2164 (1977). R.M.A. von Wandruszka and R.J. Hurtubise, Anal. Chim. Acta, 93, 331 (1977).
.
.
333 140 141 142 143 144
S.M. Ramasamy and R.J. H u r t u b i s e , Anal. Chem., 59 432 (1987). V.P. S e n t h i l n a t h a n and R.J. H u r t u b i s e , Anal. Chem., 57, 1227 (1985). R.A. D a l t e r i o and R.J. H u r t u b i s e , Anal. Chem., 54, 224 (1982). R.A. D a l t e r i o and R.J. H u r t u b i s e , Anal. Chem. 5 5 , 1084 (1983).
147
V.P. S ent h iln a t h a n . S.M. Ramasamv and R.J. Hurt ubise, Anal. Chim. Acta, 157, 203 (1984). R.P. Bateh and J.D. Winefordner, Ta l a n t a , 29, 713 (1982). J.J. Dekkers. G.Ph. Hoornwea. K.J. T e r o s t r a . C. MacLean and N.H. V e l t h o r s t , Chem. Phys., 34,-253 (1978): J.L. Ward, E. Lue Yen-Bower and J.D. Winefordner, T alant a, 28, 119
148 149 150 151 152 153
D.L. McAleese and R.B. Dunlap, Anal. Chem., 56, 600 (1984). E.M. Schulman and R.T. P a r k e r , J. Phys. Chem., 81, 1932 (1977). D.L. McAleese and R.B. Dunlap, Anal. Chim. Acta, 162, 431 (1984). P.G. Seybold and W. White, Anal. Chem., 47, 1199 (1975). W. White and P.G. Seybold, J. Phys. Chem., 81, 2035 (1977). E. Lue Yen-Bower and J.D. Winefordner, Anal. Chim. Act a, 102, 1
154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164
M.L. Meyers and P.G. Seybold, Anal. Chem., 51, 1609 (1979). T. Vo-Dinh and J.R. Hooyman, Anal. Chem., 51, 1915 (1979). R.J. Hu rt ubis e , Talanta, 28, 145 (1981). R.J. H u r t u b i s e and G.A. Smith, Anal. Chim. Acta, 139, 315 (1982). D.L. McAleese and R.B. Dunlap, Anal. Chem., 56, 2244 (1984). S.M. Ramasamy and R.J. H u r t u b i s e , Anal. Chem., 54 2477 (1982). S.M. Ramasamy and R.J. H u r t u b i s e , Anal. Chim. Acta, 152, 83 (1983). C.M. O'Donnell and J.D. Winefordner, Clin. Chem. 21, 285 (1975). R.P. Bateh and J.D. Winefordner, Anal. L e t t . , 15, 373 (1982). J.N. M i l l e r , Trends Anal. Chem., 1, 31 (1981). T. Vo-Dinh, G.L. Walden and J.D. Winefordner, Anal. Chem., 49, 1126
165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173
J.B.F. L loy d, A n a l y s t , 103, 775 (1978). R.J. H u r t u b i s e , Anal. Chem., 5 5 , 669A (1983). G.D. B o u t i l i e r and J.D. Winefordner, Anal. Chem., 51, 1384 (1979). G.D. B o u t i l i e r and J.D. Winefordner, Anal. Chem., 51, 1391 (1979). R.M. Wilson and T.L. M i l l e r , Anal. Chem., 47, 256 (1975). T. Vo-Dinh, Anal. Chem., 50, 396 (1978). T. Vo-Dinh and R.B. Gammage, Anal. Chim. Acta, 107, 261 (1979). T. Vo-Dinh and P.R. M a r t i n e z , Anal. Chim. Acta, 125, 13 (1981). T. Vo-Dinh, R.B. Gammage and P.R. M a r t i n e z , Anal. Chim. Acta, 118,
145 146
(1981).
(1978).
(1977).
313 (1980). 174
L.J.
C l i n e Love, M. S k r i l e c and J.G.
Habarta, Anal. Chem., 52, 754
(1980).
175 176
M. S k r i l e c and L.J. C l i n e Love, Anal. Chem., 52, 1559 (1980). L.J. C l i n e Love and R. Weinberger, Spectrochim Acta, 38B, 1421
177
L.J. C l i n e Love, J.G.
(1983).
.
Habarta and J.G.
Dorsey, Anal. Chem., 56, 1132A
(1984)
C l i n e Love, Anal. Chem., 54, 1552
178
R. Weinberger, P. Yarmchuk and L.J.
179
F.J. DeLuccia and L.J. C l i n e Love, Anal. Chem., 56, 2811 (1984). F.J. DeLuccia and L.J. C l i n e Love, Ta l a n t a, 32, 665 (1985). R.A.Femia and L . J . C l i n e Love, Anal.Chem., 56, 327 (1984). H.L.J. Backstrom and K. Sandros, A c t a Chem. Scand., 12, 823 (1958). M. Algrem, Photochem. and P h o t o b i o l . , 6, 829 (1967). C.A. Parker and T.A. Joyce, Trans. Faraday SOC., 65, 2823 (1969). N.J. T u rro, L. Kou Chiang, C. Ming-Fea and P. Lee, Photochem. and P hot o biol. , 27, 523 (1978). N.J. T urro, Mol. Photochem., 4, 213 (1972). J.J. Donkerbroek, J.J. E l z a s , C. G o o i j e r , R.W. F r e i and N.H. V e l t h o r s t , T a l a n t a , 28, 717 (1981).
iao
181 182 183 184 185 186 187
(1982).
334 188
189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202
T. Vo-Dinh, "Room Temperature Phos horimetry for Chemical Analysis", Wiley-Interscience, New York (1984p. See e.g., J.A. Barltrop and J.D. Coyle, "Principles of Photochemistry", Wiley Interscience, New York, Chapter 4 (1978). N.J. Turro, Modern Molecular Photochemistry, Chapter 9, Benjamin/Cummings, CA (1978). J.J. Donkerbroek, N.J.R. van Eikema Hommes, C. Gooijer, N.H. Velthorst and R.W. Frei, Applied Spectr., 37, 188 (1983). E. Blanco-Gonzalez, R.A. Baumann, C. Gooijer, N.H. Velthorst and R.W. Frei, Chemosphere, 16, 1123 (1987). S.Y. Su, A. Jur ensen, D. Bolton and J.D. Winefordner, Anal. Lett., 14, A l l 1 (198lp. S.Y. Su, E.P.C. Lai and J.D. Winefordner, Anal. Lett., 15, A 5 , 439 (1982). K.C. Marsh, L.A. Sternson and A.J. Repta, Anal. Chem., 56, 491 (1984). 1,s. Krull, X . 4 . Ding, S. Braverman, C. Selevka, F. Hochberg and L.A. Sternson, J. Chromatogr. Sci., 21, 166 (1983). W.N. Richmond and R.P. Baldwin, Anal. Chim. Acta, 154, 133 (1983). A.M. Bond and G.G. Wallace, Anal. Chem., 54, 1706 (1985). J. Ruter, U.P. Fislage and B. Neidhart, Chromatographia, 19, 62 (1985). I.S. Krull, D. Bushee, R.N. Savage, R.G. Schleicher and S.B. Smith, Anal. Lett., 15 ( A 3 ) , 267 (1982). R.J.Wenze1 and L.M. Collette, J. Chromatogr., 436, 299 (1988). E.E. Dibella, J.B. Weissman, M.J. Jose h, J.R. Schultz and T.J. Wenzel, J. Chromatogr., 328, 101 (1985p.
335 CHAPTER V I I
CONTINUOUS SEPARATION TECHNIQUES I N FLOW- INJECTION ANALYSIS M. VALCARCEL and M. 0. LUQUE DE CASTRO
1. Introduction 2. Gas-1 i q u i d i n t e r f a c e s 2.1 Gas-diffusion 2.2 D i s t i 11a t i o n 2.3 Hydride generation 3. Gas-sol i d i n t e r f a c e s 4. L i q u i d-1 iqu id i n t e r f a c e s 4.1 Extraction 4.2 Dialysis 5. Solid-liquid interfaces I o n exchange 5.1 Adsorptive preconcentrat i o n 5.2 P r e c i p i t a t i o n and d i s s o l u t i o n 5.3 HPLC-FIA a s s o c i a t i o n 6. Pre-column assemblies 6.1 6.2 Post-column assemblies F i n a l remarks 7. Acknowl edqernent 8. References 1.
INTRODUCTION
Chromatographic
and non-chromatographic
continuous
separation pro-
cesses are c u r r e n t l y among t h e most r e l e v a n t aspects o f a n a l y t i c a l chemis t r y . Both a r e c h a r a c t e r i z e d by t h e continuous motion o f one o r b o t h liq u i d o r gas phases involved, accomplished by means o f a p r o p e l l i n g system (e.g.
a p e r i s t a l t i c o r p i s t o n pump, p r e s s u r i z e d gas, e t c . ) .
The l i q u i d
(gas) sample can be introduced i n t o t h e system e i t h e r by i n j e c t i o n o r i n s e r t i o n , o r by continuous a s p i r a t i o n , These systems g e n e r a l l y accommodate a continuous d e t e c t o r a l l o w i n g i d e n t i f i c a t i o n and/or q u a n t i t a t i o n o f t h e analytes
concerned.
One o f
their
most
interesting features
is
the
p o s s i b i l i t y t o decrease t o a g r e a t e r o r l e s s e r e x t e n t human p a r t i c i p a t i o n i n t h e a n a l y t i c a l process ( a u t o m a t i z a t i o n ) thanks t o t h e i r i n h e r e n t dynamism. This t r e n d towards a u t o m a t i z a t i o n has been r e i n f o r c e d w i t h t h e i n c r e a s i n g use o f t h e c u r r e n t l y i r r e p l a c e a b l e microprocessors, used b o t h t o c o n t r o l t h e process and f o r d a t a a c q u i s i t i o n and treatment purposes ( r e f . 1). Gas chromatography i s t h e obvious continuous s e p a r a t i o n technique t o be chosen whenever t h e c a r r i e r o r t h e sample i t s e l f i s a gas. There a r e three
analytical
hydrodynamic techniques o f widespread use, namely h i g h
336 performance l i q u i d chromatography (HPLC) ( r e f . Z), f i e l d f l o w f r a c t i o nation (FFF) (refs. 3, 4) and continuous f l o w analysis (CFA) i n i t s two c h i e f variants: segmented flow analysis (SFA) ( r e f . 5) and f l o w i n j e c t i o n analysis (FIA) (refs. 6, 7). The f i r s t two methodologies are based on t h e continuous separation of t h e analytes and i n t e r f e r e n t s present i n a chromatographic column o r i n t h e a p p l i c a t i o n o f a c e n t r i f u g a l f o r c e o r a thermal o r e l e c t r i c gradient. On t h e o t h e r hand, continuous f l o w analysis methods are n o t p r i m a r i l y intended f o r separation purposes, but f o r automatization o f a n a l y t i c a l determinations o f one o r more analytes; y e t , they do a1 low f o r r e a l i z a t i o n of continuous separations, although these are markedly l e s s e f f i c i e n t
-
p a r t i c u l a r l y as regards d i s c r i m i n a t i o n
between several analytes. FIA
is
a CFA
mode developed
along t h e
characterized by a number o f features, segmented by a i r bubbles;
past
namely:
twelve years
and
(a) t h e f l o w i s n o t
(b) t h e l i q u i d sample i s d i r e c t l y irljected o r
inserted i n t o a f l u i d stream; (c) t h e sample-reaction zone i s dispersed i n a p a r t i a l , c o n t r o l l e d fashion i n t h e f l o w and (d) n e i t h e r physical (homogenization) nor chemical e q u i l i b r i u m has been reached by t h e t i m e detection i s performed. FIA recordings resemble t y p i c a l chromatograms. On comparing t h e instrumental schemes i n Fig. 1 one may conclude t h a t HPLC and F I A are r e l a t i v e l y s i m i l a r : i n f a c t , both techniques use l i q u i d reservoirs, pumps, i n j e c t o r s and continuous systems. However, t h e r e are also a number o f differences between both, c h i e f l y as regards working pressure, use o f an i n t e r f a c e , v e r s a t i l i t y , type o f a n a l y t i c a l problems d e a l t with, cost, etc. I n any case, t h e greatest d i f f e r e n c e l i e s i n t h e continuous separation c a r r i e d out i n t h e chromatographic column, which i s essential t o HPLC and o n l y occasionally employed i n F I A ( r e f . 8). Interfaces are used i n F I A f o r one o f two c h i e f purposes. On t h e one hand, they can be employed t o develop continuous separation processes improving
on
others
formerly
carried
e x t r a c t i o n , ion-exchange, adsorption, etc.).
out
manually
(1 i q u i d - 1 i q u i d
On t h e other hand, they can
be used f o r non-separative purposes (e.g. t o improve o r f a c i l i t a t e t h e a n a l y t i c a l determination). I n t h i s case, advantage i s taken o f t h e chemical r e a c t i o n t a k i n g place between a s o l i d phase and a l i q u i d f l o w i n g through it. Thus,
redox columns have been used t o handle reagents
s e n s i t i v e t o atmospheric agents ( r e f .
9) and t o perform multidetermi-
nations (e.g. o f n i t r i t e and n i t r a t e ) . The use o f enzymes immobilized on packed columns o r tube w a l l s i s a l s o a very i n t e r e s t i n g a l t e r n a t i v e ( r e f . 11). Voltammetric and potentiometric s t r i p p i n g techniques performed i n a continuous fashion can a l s o be included here i n s o f a r as they pursue t h e
337 two aforesaid objectives in their two essential steps: preconcentration and determination (refs. 12 14).
-
H I G H PERFORMANCE LIQUID CHROMATOGRAPHY LIOUIO RESERVOIRS
H
PROPULSION SYSTEM
H
I NTROOUCTIO
H
CONTINUOUS
COLUMN
DETECTOR
F L O W INJECTION ANALYSIS
PROPULSION
R E SERVOIRS
REACTOR INJECTION
SEPARATOR
OET ECTOR i
Fig. 1 Basic components of HPLC and FIA. The different types of interfaces used in FIA and the corresponding continuous separation techniques employed are summarized in Table I. The second phase, which acts as an analyte or interference collector, can be continually introduced into the separation system (liquid-liquid extraction, dialysis and gas diffusion). Alternatively, it can be a permanent part of the FIA system (e.9. an adsorption or ion-exchange minicolumn) - in this case, FIA and HPLC are nearly identical and only differ appreciably in that retention-elution processes in the former are one-stage rather than multi-step. The second phase can also be created in the separation system itself through a physical change (distillation) or a chemical reaction (precipitation). Whenever an analytical reaction is required, this can be developed in the course of the separation process (e.g. metal chelate or ion-pair extraction) or at a later stage - by merging the line carrying the isolated analyte(s) with one or several reagent lines prior to the detector, in much the same way as in postcolumn HPLC reaction detectors. This chapter deals with the most relevant features and applications of continuous separation techniques used in FIA configurations. Especial emphasis is placed on the coupling o f FIA systems to liquid chromatographs. The objectives pursued and advantages offered by the incorporation of non-chromatograph i c separation techniques into unsegmented flow configurations are also critically discussed.
I
338 TABLE I
Continuous separation techniques used i n F I A Interface
Technique
gas-liquid
d i s t i 1l a t i o n
gas-di f f usion hydride generation gas-sol i d
extraction 1i q u i d - l i q u i d dialysis
ion-exchange adsorption liquid-solid precipitation others
2.
GAS-LIQUID INTERFACES The g a s - l i q u i d
separation systems
typically
used
c l a s s i f i e d i n t o t h r e e groups, namely (a) gas-diffusion,
i n FIA
can
be
i n which a gas
present i n the donor phase o r generated i n a chemical r e a c t i o n d i f f u s e s t o the other phase
-
also l i q u i d
-,
a c t i n g as acceptor;
(b) d i s t i l l a t i o n ,
where the gas phase i s formed by heating, condensation a t a s u i t a b l e temperature and c o l l e c t i o n i n t o a second l i q u i d phase and (c) hydride generation, i n which the gas phase i s t h e r e s u l t o f a chemical r e a c t i o n and the second one i s a gas d r i v i n g t h e sample t o t h e d e t e c t i o n system. 2.1
GAS-DIFFUSION
The t r a n s f e r o f a gas between two donor streams, s t i l l n o t t o o widely applied i n F I A , can be used w i t h a l a r g e v a r i e t y o f analytes, matrices and detection systems (Table 11). The analyte making the gas phase can be as a gas i n t h e donor (02, 03, C12) o r a l t e r n a t i v e l y be generated i n i t by a s t r a i g h t f o r w a r d chemical reaction induced by an a c i d (formation o f
SO2, C02 o r HCN) o r a base
(formation o f NH3), o r through t h e a c t i o n o f r e l a t i v e l y high temperatures (formation o f acetone from oxidized ketone bodies). Photometry has been so f a r
the
detection technique most f r e q u e n t l y used i n conjunction w i t h
339 these systems on account of its suitability for analytes with acid-base properties, which usually diffuse to a solution containing an indicator whose colour change is a function of the amount of analyte diffused. As a rule, phase separation is isotermal and is effected by passage through a suitable membrane - usually PTFE. Occasionally, there is no separation membrane, but this is produced between two parallel rubber sheets supported by PerspexR plates, The stream containing the sample spreads throughout the lower sheet and yields a film which traverses the entire length of the rubber before going to waste. During the transport, if the partial pressure of the gas in the liquid is higher than that in the surrounding atmosphere, it volatilizes and diffuses to and is absorbed by the stream where its partial pressure is lower (ref. 15). The chief analytical purpose of the FIA/gas-diffusion association is interference removal from complex matrices (biological fluids, foods, vegetable tissues, environmental samples, etc.); yet, enhanced selectivity can also be obtained - as demonstrated by Pacey et al. (ref. 16) - by incorporating kinetic discrimination in the system timing or the reagent concentrations and experimental conditions of a given method and using a gas diffusion unit. These authors describe two examples of kinetic discrimination, namely the determination of ozone with Indigo Blue and that of chlorine dioxide based on luminol chemiluminescence. Both compounds react with chlorine. In the batch determination of ozone with Indigo Blue, equilibrium measurements do not allow discrimination between ozone, chlorine and manganese (VII) (ref. 17); yet, the differences between the rates of reaction of these analytes with the reagent permit their discrimination by using a single-channel FIA system which increases the selectivity for ozone over chlorine by a factor of about 3 , and that over Mn (VII) by a factor of about 2 - these factors can be further increased by incorporating a gas-diffusion unit into the manifold (Fig. 2). The diffusion membrane completely overcomes the interference by Mn (VII), while that posed by chlorine is significantly decreased from 1 mg chlorine (corresponding to an apparent ozone concentration of 0.36 mg/ml) in the manual method to an apparent 0.008 mg 03/ml in the gas-diffusion method. Selectivity is enhanced by a factor of 2.5 as a result of the kinetic discrimination introduced by the reagent, and by a further factor of 45 resulting from the incorporation of the gas-diffusion unit, so that the overall selectivity enhancement factor amounts to 112. Such a selectivity level i s adequate to safely determine residual ozone in the presence of chlorine in disinfected water samples.
TABLE I 1
W P
Features of FIA methods involving gas-diffusion processes
Analyte NH3
Matrix whole blood b 1 ood plant
NH3, urea
Phase separation
pH change ,,
membrane
,I
none membrane
I,
,I
chemical reaction pH change
NOx. NO2so2
Gas-phase formation
wine, beer, fruit juice
0,
I,
COP c102
p,
P
I,
,I
11
,I
waste water,
Oxidized ketone bodies
milk
P: photometry
pot: potentiometry opt: optosensor
heat
11
Pot Pot opt Pot
I,
I1
amp.: amperometry
P
membrane
,I
pH change
Detection
,I
clop 02
CN-
Analytical purpose
I,
chemi ca 1 reaction wine, food, p 1 asma
0
use of an indicator
20 23
integrated microconduits ISE
15 22 19
24 28
amp. P
29 21
di scrimination- chem. separation P I .R. Pot I,
chem.: chemiluminescence I.R. interference removal
Ref.
chem.
I,
I,
Special features
P
25 16
26 30 27
341 The d i f f e r e n c e s i n t h e s i g n a l produced by C12 and C102 i n t h e chemiluminescence determination o f c h l o r i n e d i o x i d e w i t h l u m i n o l a r e t i m e and pH-dependent.
C h l o r i n e d i o x i d e r e a c t s extremely q u i c k l y w i t h l u m i n o l ,
w h i l e c h l o r i n e r e a c t s more s l o w l y and w i t h l o n g e r l i f e t i m e s . By use of a flow-injection
system,
both
the
timing
and
the
chemistry
can
be
c o n t r o l l e d i n such a way as t o minimize t h e s i g n a l y i e l d e d by c h l o r i n e . The added use o f pH 13 makes t h e reagent even more s e l e c t i v e c o n d i t i o n s t y p i c a l l y used i n F I A overall
selectivity
factor
-
is
-
under t h e
towards c h l o r i n e d i o x i d e . The observed over
500.
The
incorporation
of
a
g a s - d i f f u s i o n u n i t i n t o t h e system overcomes t h e i n t e r f e r e n c e posed by b o t h i o n i c and organic m a t e r i a l s absorbing
light i n the ultraviolet
r e g i o n ( r e f . 18). The s e l e c t i v i t y enhancement between C102 and C12 r e s u l t i n g from t h e use o f t h e membrane i s 3.1; t h i s , m u l t i p l i e d by t h e enhancement f a c t o r r e s u l t i n g from t h e d i f f e r e n c e i n molar a b s o r p t i v i t y between both species a t t h e wavelength used,
175, y i e l d s t h e o v e r a l l
f a c t o r o f 500, which can be f u r t h e r increased t o over 5,000 thanks t o t h e masking e f f e c t o f o x a l i c a c i d on c h l o r i n e ( r e f . 18).
s te
Fig. 2
M a n i f o l d f o r t h e d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f c h l o r i n e d i o x i d e based on luminol chemi luminescence. Both t h e donor and t h e acceptor stream a r e wa_ger a t pH 2, adjusted w i t h s u l p h u r i c a c i d . The reagent, 1 10 M l u m i n o l , i s merged a t t h e T - c e l l p r i o r t o t h e p h o t o m u l p l i e r tube (PMT). The membrane c o n s i s t s o f 0.45 pm PTFE and t h e t u b i n g (0.5 mm i.d.) i s a l s o PTFE. A l l f l o w - r a t e s a r e 1 ml/min. (Reproduced from ( r e f . 16) w i t h permission o f E l s e v i e r Science Pub1 i s h e r s ) .
M a r t i n and Meyerhoff ( r e f . 19) have developed a general procedure f o r enhancing t h e s e l e c t i v i t y of anion-responsive 1 iquid-membrane e l e c t r o d e s based on t h e use o f an acceptor channel r e c e i v i n g t h e f l o w through a gasd i f f u s i o n u n i t as t h e i n j e c t i o n membrane prevents
ionic
loop o f an F I A system.
interferents
from
reaching
A
suitable
an i o n - s e l e c t i v e
342 electrode in the final flow stream. The authors apply their highly selective semi-automated method to the determination of dissolved nitrogen oxides or nitrite at levels above 5 f l . Nitrogen dioxide is trapped across a PTFE membrane in the separation unit and converted to nitrate by a buffered peroxide recipient solution that is injected and carried to a tubular nitrate electrode. As noted by its proponents, the method excels the selectivity and detection capabilities of the nitrate electrode alone and of conventional sensing systems based on pH electrodes. Gas-liquid interfaces have been used in a number of interesting clinical determinations such as that of ammonia in whole blood and plasma (ref. 20) or that of carbon dioxide in plasma (ref. 21). The former, proposed by Evensson and Anfalt, uses the configuration depicted in Fig. 3, where the sample is injected into a distilled water stream later merged with a 0.5N NaOH solution converting ammonium ion to ammonia, which in turn diffuses across the PTFE membrane to a stream of Phenol Red in NaOH, the resultant process being monitored at 540 nm. The method is quite convenient, uses small sample volumes (90 pl) and features a relatively high sampling frecuency (60 h- 1) . According to its proponents, it yielded excellent results upon application to samples from 17 individuals. The use of plasma instead of whole blood makes coils A and B in Fig. 3 dispensable (refs. 15-30). holder - -Module -- - -1 I Perspex modules I
,-, -.--...- .......
5 od i u rn hydroxide
9
Sample Sample
0.35 mL /min I
III
I I
~
~
I
I
117 - 1
1.12 rnL lrnin
I I W
Gas-diffusion cell
---
'-
---
1 -I ' I
L - -
Fig. 3
I In1
+?I
I
Membran+k'-
Phenol Red
I
I
----
Photometer
Manifold for determination of ammonia in blood accommodating a gas-diffusion system. (Reproduced from (ref. 20) with permission of Elsevier Biomed. Press).
343 A s i m i l a r c o n f i g u r a t i o n i s used f o r t h e d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f C02 i n plasma, an a c i d stream a c t i n g as donor and one o f Red Cresol as acceptor.
Ruzicka and Hansen ( r e f . 2 2 ) have a p p l i e d r e f l e c t a n c e spectrophotometry t o f l o w - i n j e c t i o n measurements o f pH and ammonia and urea assays w i t h t h e aim o f demonstrating t h e p r i n c i p l e behind and t e s t i n g t h e p e r formance o f optosensors i n t e g r a t e d i n t o microconduits.
With pH measure-
ments, d e t e c t i o n i s based on commercial non-bleeding acid-base i n d i c a t o r papers placed i n t h e f l o w i n g stream a t t h e t i p o f t h e f i b r e o p t i c . The determination o f ammonia and urea ( v i a urease) i n v o l v e s t h e use of
a
Bromothymol Blue stream and a m i n i a t u r e g a s - d i f f u s i o n d e v i c e ( r e f . 8). 2.2
DISTILLATION Continuous m i c r o d i s t i l l a t i o n systems have l o n g been used i n c l a s s i c a l
continuous air-segmented
configurations f o r determination o f v o l a t i l e
v o l a t i l e a c i d i t y i n wine), and a r e commercially a v a i l a b l e
analytes (e.9.
from a number o f companies such as Technicon o r Skalar. On t h e o t h e r hand, t h e r e i s o n l y one FIA method u s i n g d i s t i l l a t i o n w i t h t h e c h i e f purpose of i n t e r f e r e n c e removal from such a complex m a t r i x as waste water u s u a l l y i s f o r t h e determination o f cyanide. proposed by P i h l a r and Kosta ( r e f . consisting
of
a
distillation
b o r o s i l i c a t e g l a s s half-packed heating wire,
and
The method i n q u e s t i o n ,
31), uses a d i s t i l l a t i o n system an
absorption
unit.
The
former,
w i t h g l a s s h e l i c e s and wrapped
in a
i s entered by t h e n i t r o g e n stream a t t h e bottom o f t h e
d i s t i l l a t i o n column and c a r r i e s hydrogen cyanide through t h e condenser i n t o t h e absorption u n i t . An 0.1M s o l u t i o n o f sodium hydroxide i s pumped to
the
of
top
the
absorption
column.
A
debubbler
voltammetric d e t e c t o r removes a l l gas from t h e system.
prior
to
the
Differentiation
between t o t a l and s t r o n g l y bound metal cyanide complexes i s achieved by UV photodecomposition o f t h e complexes. Cyanide i s thereby
recovered
quantitatively,
except when i t s c o n c e n t r a t i o n i s beyond t h e o p e r a t i n g
range
distillation
of
the
and/or
the
absorption
unit.
Either
a
c a l i b r a t i o n graph o r t h e s t a n d a r d - a d d i t i o n method can be used, though t h e l a t t e r i s t o be p r e f e r r e d when t h e sample v i s c o s i t y i s markedly d i f f e r e n t from t h a t o f t h e standards. Up t o 60 samples p e r hour can be thus assayed by a l t e r n a t i n g samples and washing s o l u t i o n s every 30 sec.
2.3
HYDRIDE GENERATION This i s a s u i generis example o f a g a s - l i q u i d s e p a r a t i o n process
c a l l i n g f o r a chemical agent
-
u s u a l l y sodium borohydride
-
t o yield a
v o l a t i l e compound which i s separated from t h e s o l u t i o n by a gas a c t i n g as the
second
phase and
transporting
the
a n a l y t e t o an atomic
optical
344 d e t e c t o r . Hydride generation i s u s u a l l y aimed a t i n t e r f e r e n c e removal ( r e f s . 32 38) and, secondarily, t o s p e c i a t i o n based on t h e d i f f e r e n t
-
r a t e o f formation of t h e h y d r i d e s o f t h e d i f f e r e n t chemical forms i n which a given a n a l y t e occurs ( r e f . 37, Table 3 ) . The F I A l h y d r i d e generation a s s o c i a t i o n has m a t e r i a l i z e d i n two types o f generic c o n f i g u r a t i o n d i f f e r i n g i n t h e way gas-separation i s e f f e c t e d , namely by means of
a conventional
debubler from which t h e generated
h y d r i d e i s d r i v e n t o t h e spectrophometer q u a r t z c e l l by a gas stream (Fig. 4) o r by use of one of t h e above-mentioned g a s - d i f f u s i o n u n i t s where t h e stream r e c e i v i n g t h e gas (hydride) t r a n s f e r r e d across t h e membrane i s another gas which f u n c t i o n s t o d r i v e i t t o t h e d e t e c t o r (Fig. 4 ) . The former t y p e o f c o n f i g u r a t i o n was used i n 1982 f o r d e t e r m i a n t i o n of bismuth by Astrom ( r e f . 32), who emphasized t h e promising advantages of F I A i n c o n t r o l l i n g i n t e r f e r e n c e e f f e c t s i n h y d r i d e g e n e r a t i o n systems. The c o n f i g u r a t i o n (Fig. 4 ) ,
designed t o avoid v o i d volumes as f a r as
p o s s i b l e , i n v o l v e s an a c i d stream i n t o which t h e sample (700 p l ) i s i n j e c t e d and l a t e r mixed w i t h sodium borohydride and sprayed w i t h n i t r o g e n
or argon i n t o t h e g a s - l i q u i d separator. The gas h y d r i d e i s swept i n t o t h e e l e c t r i c a l l y heated tube furnace and t h e c o n c e n t r a t i o n i s then measured a t 223.1 nm on an atomic a b s o r p t i o n spectrophotometer. Standard bismuth s o l u t i o n s a r e always i n j e c t e d before and a f t e r each i n t e r f e r i n g t e s t s o l u t i o n t o check f o r p o t e n t i a l changes i n s e n s i t i v i t y . C o n s u l t a t i o n of the l i t e r a t u r e , prompted t h e a u t h o r t o use t h e i n t e g r a l r a t h e r than t h e peak h e i g h t as a measure o f t h e h y d r i d e c o n c e n t r a t i o n
-
t h e peak h e i g h t
is dependent upon t h e o x i d a t i o n s t a t e o f t h e element i n q u e s t i o n because of
kinetic effects
involved,
while
the
integral
i s not
(ref.
34).
However, as bismuth does n o t pose t h a t o x i d a t i o n s t a t e problem, and on account o f t h e ease w i t h which a n a l y s i s ,
d e t e c t i o n and r e c o r d i n g a r e
performed i n FIA, t h e authors opted f o r making peak h e i g h t measurements, which i n a d d i t i o n made t h e method more w i d e l y a p p l i c a b l e i n s o f a r as many instruments are n o t equipped w i t h i n t e g r a t i n g f a c i l i t i e s .
The r e s u l t s
obtained show t h e e f f i c i e n c y of t h e F I A system i n m i n i m i z i n g t h e severe i n t e r f e r e n c e from copper and n i c k e l
(refs.
35, 36)
-
the interferent
concentrations t o l e r a t e d a r e 100 t o 1000 h i g h e r than those a f f o r d e d by conventional h y d r i d e generation systems f o r bismuth. Except f o r t h e i d e a l reagent concentrations used, t h e improvement i s t h e r e s u l t o f keeping t h e r e a c t i o n t i m e as s h o r t as p o s s i b l e i n o r d e r t o f a v o u r t h e main r e a c t i o n . The l a t t e r type o f c o n f i g u r a t i o n i s represented by a m a n i f o l d designed by Pacey e t a l . ( r e f . 33) f o r d e t e r m i n a t i o n o r a r s e n i c , which i s i n j e c t e d intended t o i n t o a water stream merging w i t h an a c i d and an I K stream
-
remove i n t e r f e r e n t s formed i n t h e h y d r i d e g e n e r a t i o n and t o
improve
the
345 arsenic s i g n a l
-
p r i o r t o m i x i n g w i t h t h e sodium borohydride stream. The
gas passing across t h e membrane o f t h e g a s - d i f f u s i o n u n i t i s d r i v e n t o t h e d e t e c t o r by a hydrogen stream. This dual-phase g a s - d i f f u s i o n system provides remarkably b e t t e r r e s u l t s than a conventional ( r e f s . 37
-
configuration
41).
GAS-SOLID INTERFACES
3.
There a r e few methodologies i n v o l v i n g gas-sol i d i n t e r f a c e s i n general and o n l y one d i r e c t determination o f c h l o r i n e and bromine i n F I A ( r e f . 4 2 ) . This i s based on t h e m o n i t o r i n g o f t h e t r a n s i e n t s i g n a l r e s u l t i n g from two consecutive r e a c t i o n s t a k i n g p l a c e a t a g a s - s o l i d i n t e r f a c e . The r e a c t i o n g i v i n g r i s e t o t h e increased s i g n a l i s t h a t o f t h e halogen and a-naphthoflavone, y i e l d i n g a red-brown complex. The b a s e l i n e r e s t o r a t i o n i s due t o a slower, simultaneous combination o f two processes, namely t h e
spontaneous decomposition o f t h e t r a n s i e n t complex and t h e r e a c t i o n of the
coloured
complex
with
As(III),
which
in
a-naphthoflavone
is
regenerated and t h e halogens are reduced t o t h e i r corresponding ha1 i d e s . A l l these r e a c t i o n s take p l a c e a t t h e s u r f a c e o f a p i e c e o f f i l t e r paper on which a l a y e r o f d r i e d r e a c t i n g m i x t u r e has been deposited. The course o f t h e r e a c t i o n i s monitored by t r a n s m i t t a n c e spectrophotometry. method i n v o l v e s no separation process indeed.
TABLE 111 Features o f FIA methods i n v o l v i n g h y d r i d e g e n e r a t i o n
Analyte
Hatrix
As ( I I I ) , A s W )
h a l y t ical prrpose I.R.
Detection A.A.S
Special features
Ref.
use of gas-
33
d i f f u s i o n membrane As,
Sb, 81, Se,
32 37
1.R
A.A.S
1.R
A.A.S
standard reference
I.R.
A.A.S
NBS orchard Leaves
I.R.
MECA
38 39
I.R.
ICP-AES
41
I.R.
AAS
40
81
termal water
speciation
Te AS
glycerine
H4
~~~~~
1.R.:
interference r m v a l
MECA: m l e c u l a r emission c a v i t y analysis
~~
AAS: atomic absorption spectrometry
ICP-AES: i n d u c t i v e l y carpled plasm-atomic emission spectromtry
The
346
7
Water
-
-
Pumps WaterSample
-
Water
Carrier-Waste
or
Reaged
Organic solvent
Fig. 4
-
L
(a) Flow-injection manifold for determination of bismuth by atomic absorption with hydride generation (S, injection port sample loop --;a, b and c, coils of i.d. 0.7, 0.5 and 0.5 mm, respectively; d, gas-liquid separator; W , waste). (b) Manifold for determination of As(II1) and A s ( V ) using gas diffusion. (Reproduced from (refs. 19, 20) with permission of the American Chemical Society).
347 LIQUID-LIQUID INTERFACES
4.
The way i n which t h e t r a n s f e r o f m a t t e r between two l i q u i d phases takes p l a c e i n continuous s e p a r a t i o n systems depends e s s e n t i a l l y on t h e t y p e of c o n t a c t between t h e phases i n v o l v e d and on t h e i r m i s c i b i l i t y . L i q u i d - l i q u i d e x t r a c t i o n r e l i e s on t h e i m m i s c i b i l i t y o f t h e two phases and t h e establishment o f a dynamic c o n t a c t zone between b o t h f a c i l i t a t i n g t h e t r a n s f e r o f matter. concerned
-
On t h e o t h e r hand,
g e n e r a l l y aqueous
-
i n dialysis,
t h e phases
a r e m i s c i b l e and t h e t r a n s f e r of m a t t e r
takes p l a c e across a semi-permeable membrane s e p a r a t i n g b o t h l i q u i d streams and accommodated i n t h e s e p a r a t i o n u n i t ( d i a l y s e r )
.
These two separation techniques have been used t o a d i f f e r e n t e x t e n t i n FIA. Thus, w h i l e e x t r a c t i o n has been employed r e l a t i v e l y f r e q u e n t l y ( r e f s . 43, 44), d i a l y s i s has been a p p l i e d t o a somewhat l e s s e r e x t e n t . 4.1
EXTRACTION
The o n - l i n e c o u p l i n g o f a l i q u i d - l i q u i d e x t r a c t i o n system t o an FIA c o n f i g u r a t i o n was simultaneously r e p o r t e d by K a r l b e r g and Thelander ( r e f . 45), and Bergamin e t a l . ( r e f . 46). I n b o t h cases, t h e e x t r a c t i o n system was l o c a t e d behind t h e i n j e c t i o n valve. C u r r e n t l y , t h e s e p a r a t i o n u n i t i s a l s o o c c a s i o n a l l y placed p r i o r t o t h e i n j e c t i o n system, so t h a t t h e separation process r e s u l t s
i n a continuous
stream o f o r g a n i c
phase
c o n t a i n i n g t h e a n a l y t e and f i l l i n g t h e i n j e c t i o n v a l v e ( r e f s . 46, 47). Less common i n FIA i s t h e o f f - l i n e p o s i t i o n i n g o f t h e system ( r e f s . 48
-
50). As a r e s u l t o f t h i s c o u p l i n g , a number o f c o n f i g u r a t i o n s o f v a r i a b l e complexity, s u i t e d t o s p e c i f i c needs, a r e now a v a i l a b l e , namely: (a)
Without phase separation.
I n t h i s mode
-
t h e simplest
-,
the
aqueous sample i s i n j e c t e d i n t o a single-channel m a n i f o l d c a r r y i n g t h e organic stream e x t r a c t a n t , which flows through t h e e x t r a c t i o n c o i l . This i s where t h e f o r m a t i o n o f an e x t r a c t a b l e complex between t h e a n a l y t e and t h e reagent d i s s o l v e d i n t h e o r g a n i c phase
-
measured as i t passes through t h e f l u o r i m e t r i c f l o w - c e l l ( r e f . 51) takes place. The a p p l i c a t i o n
o f ultrasounds t o t h e e x t r a c t i o n c o i l r e s u l t s i n t h e f o r m a t i o n o f a microemulsion t h a t increases c o n t a c t between t h e phases and hence t h e process
yield
and measurement
reliability
(ref.
52).
Microemulsion
formation p r i o r t o i n t r o d u c t i o n i n t o an FIA system has been i n v e s t i g a t e d by Worsfold ( r e f .
53).
This a u t h o r uses a s p e c i a l p r o p e l l i n g system
capable o f r e v e r s i n g t h e d i r e c t i o n of t h e f l o w i n o r d e r t o i n t r o d u c e an immiscible o r g a n i c phase p l u g i n t o t h e sample stream; t h e p l u g i s passed a l t e r n a t e l y i n b o t h d i r e c t i o n s through t h e d e t e c t o r , which a l l o w s c o n t r o l over t h e y i e l d o f t h e e x t r a c t i o n process and i t s e x t r a c t i o n k i n e t i c s t o be s t u d i e d ( r e f . 54).
3 48 (b) S i n g l e e x t r a c t i o n w i t h t h e s e p a r a t i o n system l o c a t e d p r i o r t o or after the injection unit. (c) M u l t i - e x t r a c t i o n , where t h e s e p a r a t i o n process i s repeated several times by u s i n g t h e same o r a d i f f e r e n t e x t r a c t a n t a t each stage ( r e f s . 55, 56), thereby i n c r e a s i n g t h e e f f ic i ency o f t h e o v e r a l l process.
selectivity,
sensitivity
and
(d) Back-extraction. This i s a m u l t i - s t a g e e x t r a c t i o n mode i n which t h e aqueous sample i s f i r s t e x t r a c t e d i n t o t h e organic medium and then back-extracted performed ( r e f . 57).
into
an
aqueous
phase where
measurements
are
The presence o f an organic phase i n an FIA system r e q u i r e s a s e r i e s of cautions t o be taken on account o f i t s c o r r o s i v e p r o p e r t i e s . Thus, t h e transport
tubing,
connectors
and
extraction
system must
be
steel,
platinum, g l a s s o r PTFE. An organic stream can be s e t i n motion by: (a) a t h e f l e x i b l e PVC t u b i n g commonly employed i n o t h e r p e r i s t a l t i c pump systems i s completely useless h e r e and i s t o b e replaced w i t h i n e r t
-
m a t e r i a l s such as m o d i f i e d PVC, s i l i c o n rubber o r f l u o r o p l a s t s ; (b) by t h e displacement technique, which i n v o l v e s pumping an aqueous stream i n t o a closed c o n t a i n e r - t h i s can be achieved w i t h a p e r i s t a l t i c pump and ordinary tubing
-
constant f l o w - r a t e
t h a t i s f i l l e d w i t h t h e o r g a n i c s o l v e n t and f e d a t a i n t o t h e FIA system;
(c)
by s e t t i n g a constant
pressure w i t h t h e a i d o f an i n e r t gas f o r c i n g t h e e x t r a c t a n t t o c i r c u l a t e along t h e F I A manifold. The most serious shortcoming a r i s i n g from t h e use o f F I A / l i q u i d - l i q u i d e x t r a c t i o n i s c u r r e n t l y t h e l a c k o f an e l a b o r a t e theory.
The s t u d i e s
c a r r i e d o u t so f a r i n t h i s area have o n l y d e a l t w i t h s p e c i f i c aspects of y e t , t h e number o f papers r e p o r t i n g new c o n t r i b u t i o n s i s t h e subject
-
f o r t u n a t e l y i n c r e a s i n g ( r e f s . 58
- 63).
I n t h e i r work on t h e hydrodynamic and i n t e r f a c i a l o r i g i n o f phase segmentation
, Sweileh and Cantwell
(ref,
60)
developed
a
semi-
q u a n t i t a t i v e physicochemical model f o r t h e process whereby a l t e r n a t i n g segments o f aqueous and immiscible o r g a n i c phases a r e produced on merging o f both phases. A growing "drop" o f one phase i s d i s l o d g e d t o produce a segment when t h e hydrodynamic f o r c e exerted by i t as a r e s u l t o f t h e f l o w o f t h e o t h e r s o l v e n t equals t h e i n t e r f a c i a l f o r c e h o l d i n g i t i n place. Hydrodynamic forces a r e expressed by Poi seui 11e' s and Bernoui 11 i ' s 1aws , w h i l e t h e i n t e r f a c i a l f o r c e i s expressed by a form o f t h e Tate equation ( r e f s . 64, 65) i n terms o f l i q u i d - l i q u i d i n t e r f a c i a l t e n s i o n and s o l i d l i q u i d c o n t a c t angle. These authors a l s o d e r i v e d a s e r i e s o f equations f o r c a l c u l a t i o n o f t h e e x t r a c t e d a n a l y t e f r a c t i o n , t h e dependence of t h e peak area on t h e f l o w - r a t e , t h e d i s t r i b u t i o n r a t i o and
a proportionality
349 constant c h a r a c t e r i s t i c o f t h e chemical system,
t h e peak h e i g h t as a
f u n c t i o n of t h e a n a l y t e c o n c e n t r a t i o n i n t h e i n j e c t e d sample, t h e f l o w r a t e r a t i o , t h e e x t r a c t e d a n a l y t e f r a c t i o n , spectrophotometer s e n s i t i v i t y and a f a c t o r s i m i l a r t o t h a t o f d i s p e r s i o n r e p o r t e d by Ruzicka ( r e f . 5) and adapted t o systems accommodating l i q u i d - l i q u i d e x t r a c t i o n . The e f f i c i e n c y o f a separation process has been s t u d i e d i n depth by Rossi e t a l . ( r e f . 58), who determined t h e optimum c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s o f t h e e x t r a c t i o n c o i l f o r d i f f e r e n t types o f phases and t h e i n f l u e n c e o f FIA v a r i a b l e s on t h e e f f i c i e n c y .
58) have i n v e s t i g a t e d t h e mechanism o f e x t r a c t i o n systems and determined i t s i n f l u e n c e on t h e peak w i d t h i n terms o f r e l a t e d v a r i a b l e s . I n a d d i t i o n , Backstrom e t a l . ( r e f . 62) have evaluated t h e e f f i c i e n c y achieved and t h e d i s p e r s i o n i n v o l v e d i n v a r i o u s phase separators. Laser-induced e x c i t a t i o n ( r e f . 63) and t h e a l t e r n a t e passage through t h e d e t e c t o r i n both d i r e c t i o n s ( r e f . 54) w i l l foreseeably a i d i n e s t a b l i s h i n g t h e t h e o r e t i c a l background o f t h i s technique. Every automatic s o l v e n t e x t r a c t i o n FIA system has t h r e e e s s e n t i a l components, namely: Nord and
dispersion
(a)
Karlberg
in
(ref.
flow-injection
Segmentor, i n which t h e streams o f t h e two phases i n v o l v e d
merge. I t s c h i e f aim i s t o o b t a i n i d e n t i c a l a l t e r n a t e segments o f b o t h immiscible l i q u i d s reaching t h e e x t r a c t i o n c o i l . (b)
Extraction c o i l ,
where t h e t r a n s f e r o f m a t t e r between t h e
segments o f b o t h phases i s e f f e c t e d . PTFE c o i l s r e p e l t h e aqueous phase, which i s c a r r i e d as bubbles; conversely, t h e w a l l s o f g l a s s c o i l s a r e wetted by t h e aqueous phase, so t h a t t h e o r g a n i c phase i s t r a n s p o r t e d by t h e former as bubbles. S e l l e y e t a l . ( r e f . 55) d e f i n e d some c r i t e r i a f o r c o i l s e l e c t i o n . Thus, c o i l s should i d e a l l y be made o f m a t e r i a l s a l l o w i n g t h e a n a l y t e t o pass i n t o t h e bubble phase. I n a d d i t i o n , t h e r a t i o between t h e i n t e r f a c i a l area and t h e i n i t i a l a n a l y t e volume should be as h i g h as p o s s i b l e and t h e a n a l y t e motion should be f a c i l i t a t e d t o achieve maximum efficiency. (c) Phase separator, which r e c e i v e s t h e segmented f l o w from t h e c o i l and c o n t i n u o u s l y s p l i t s i t i n t o two separate streams o f b o t h phases. O f a l l t h r e e elements, t h e most complex and i n t e r e s t i n g i s no doubt t h e phase separator, of which a v a r i e t y o f models have been designed w i t h
t h e aim t o improve on e a r l i e r ones ( r e f s . 44, 46, 63, 66 t h r e e c h i e f types o f continuous separator:
-
69). There a r e
(a) devices u s i n g a chamber
r e l y i n g on g r a v i t y t o separate t h e phases; (b) gravity-based devices w i t h a T-shaped separator and w i t h o r w i t h o u t a s o r t o f phase guide made of
m a t e r i a l wetted s e l e c t i v e l y
by
one
of
the
phases; (c) devices w i t h a
membrane separator based on the selective permeability of a microporous membrane towards the phase wetting it. This last type of separator features a number of advantages over the other two, namely: a smaller inner volume, which lessens the dispersion or dilution of the analyte or its reaction product and hence results in lesser band broadening and increased sensitivity; greater reliability in separating the phases at higher flow-rates, which redounds to shorter analysis times; flexibility for use with a variety of water-immiscible solvents as a result of no difference in density between the aqueous and the organic phase being required; greater separation efficiency. A recent publication (ref. 70a) has demonstrated that many of these above - mentioned advantages can also be achieved with a new generation of sandwich - type separators based on wetting . The joint use of FIA and liquid-liquid extraction has aided in solving a number of analytical problems in various areas - particularly environmental, clinical and pharmaceutical chemistry -, where this association has been chiefly applied for separation and occasionally - preconcentration o f the analyte. In Table IV are summarized the applications reported so far, classified according to the type of analyte determined (inorganic or organic) and, within each group, according to the detection system used. Fig. 5 shows the two basic types of FIA/liquid-liquid extraction assembly, namely with the extraction unit located prior to (a) or after (b) the injection system. The configuration including an extraction system prior to the injection valve is the most commonly used in the FIA/extraction/AAS association for analyte preconcentration and separation. The advantages offered by the joint use of this triad have been emphasized by several authors (refs. 6, 7, 70) (e.g. in the determination of copper, nickel, zinc and cadmium proposed by Nord and Karlberg (ref. 71), in that of zinc in biological and environmental samples (ref. 72) or iron matrices (ref. 591, or in that of perchlorate in serum and urine, based on the formation of an ion-pair between this anion and the Cu(I)/6-methylpicolinaldehyde azine complex (ref. 47). The sequential determination of nitrate and nitrite in foodstuff, also based on the formation of an ion-pair between nitrate and the Cu( II)/neocuproine complex which is extracted into MIBK is illustrative of the potential of this association for simultaneous analyses. In this determination, the samples are spiked with oxidant, Ce(IV), or inhibitor (amidosulphonic acid), for determination of the sum of both anions and nitrate alone, respectively (ref. 73).
-
351
To quartz cell 7
H CI
NaBHc
W
*
To quartz cell
I
Fig. 5
I
I
Generic types o f FIA/liquid-liquid extraction assemblies. (a) With the extraction system before the injection system ( 6 and B2, displacement bottles; S, segmentor; EC, extraction ioil; P, phase separator; I, injection system; AAS, atomic absorption photometer). (b) With the extraction system behind the injection system.
TABLE I V
Features o f FIA methods i n v o l v i n g l i q u i d - l i q u i d e x t r a c t i o n
w
vl
N
Ana 1y t e
Matrix
Mo
plant
Pb, Cd
water
Cd
urine
~
0
~
~
-
Anal y t e phase aqueous SCN/Fe system aqueous ,I
1,
Ga
water
aqueous/ lumogallion aqueous
NO2
,
NO;
cu Cd, Cu, Co, Pb, N i Ami nes
P
chlorofom/ d i t h izone
I,
tri b u t y l phosphate C C l 4/
soi 1
c104-
isoamyl alcohol chloroform
Special features
I,
biological, environmental ir o n urine, serum water food water diluted samples water
Ref. 46
calculation o f extraction constants new phase s e p a r a t o r
83 66
79
Zn
Zn, Cu, Pb, N i Zn
Detecti o n
biological I
U
Second phase
d ithizone isoamyl alcohol MIBK/APDC
m o d i f i e d T-piece I,
81
F
laser excitation
AAS
MIBK
59 I,
,I I,
,I
MIBK/APDC freon-113 H20 3 r d phase aqueous
47 sequential determination
FAAS back e x t r a c t i o n P
I
63 71 72
I,
aqueous/ SCNaqueous
80
calculation o f extraction constants aqueous/aqueous e x t r a c t i o n w i t h l i q u i d membrane
82 73 46 57 87 84
Caffeine
tablcts
Codeine, a c e t y l salicylic acid Anionic surfactants
,I
Cation i c surfactants Non-i o n i c surfactants Caf f e i ne, s u r f ac t a n t s 8-Dichlorotheop h y l 1ine, diphenyldramamine Procyclidine
industrial water sewage water waste water water
aqueous SCN-/ aqueous
ch 1oroform
,,
t o 1 uene
MIBK I1
tablets
cyclohexane ,I
biological tablets organic
Steroids
water
I,
chloroform
water
Drugs Vitamin B A1 kylaminh;
extraction membrane extraction membrane
increased s e n s i t i v i t y use o f v a r i o u s segmentors
85
86 95 48
a7 I,
chloroform
44
88 measurements i n b o t h phases
67
theoretical q u a n t i t a t i v i t y studies
89
iso-octane
74
n-heptane d i c h l oromethane
F
heptane
chloroform aqueous
aqueous/ 1u c i genin
1,Z-dichloroethane
chem
MBIK: methyl i s o b u t y l ketone
44
68
1,2-dichloroethane chloroform
beer, ma1t serum tablets
aqueous/aqueous with liquid aqueous/aqueous with liquid
,I
water
Bit t e r i n g compounds Terodiline Enal a p r i 1
P
gas chromatography
90 91
a d s o r p t i o n problems
92 93 53
microemulsions w i t h o u t phase s e p a r a t i o n
94
APDC: 1-pyrrolidinecarbodithioic a c i d
W Ln
W
354
The manifold depicted in Fig. 5b was developed and used by Ishibashi et al. (ref. 62) for the determination of gallium based on the formation of a fluorescent complex with lumogallion which is extracted into isoamyl alcohol. A similar configuration has been proposed by Karlberg et al. (ref. 70) for adaptation of the standard manual liquid-liquid extraction method for determination of bitterness by the FIA technique. The bittering compound is extracted into iso-octane and its absorption in the organic medium measured at 275 nm, thus making the separate solvent blank extraction, required in the batch procedure, unnecessary. The injected sample volume used in 100 pl and up to 60 samples can be assayed per hour with as little iso-octane consumption as 1 ml per sample. The method has been recently applied to the determination of this type of compounds in must as a means o f on-line monitoring of their evolution in the course of beer making (ref. 74). An interesting method for simultaneous determination of two organic compounds (diphenyldramamine and 8-chlorotheophylline) has been proposed by Fossey and Cantwell (ref. 67). These authors use a dual-membrane separator (1 ipophi 1 ic -PTFE- and hydrophi 1 ic -paper-) to obtain clear aqueous and organic phases, each being led to a different spectrophotometer. The aqueous portion, of pH 10, contains 8-~hlorotheophylline, while the organic phase (cyclohexane) contains dyphenyldramamine. The inherent versatility of FIA allows for adaptation of the configurations typically used to the particular characteristics of the system involved. Thus, the extraction efficiency can be improved through a salting-out effect by using further streams merging with the two-phase system (ref. 45). Also, the system can be adapted for changes in viscosity or pH scanning (ref. 78). The kinetic nature of this technique - measurements are made under non-equilibrium conditions, which allows FIA methods to be classed as fixed-time kinetic (ref. 72) is increased by joint use with liquid-liquid extraction, which further increases its selectivity (refs. 78, 80). This powerful association provides a number of valuable advantages such as lower sample, reagent and organic solvent consumption, higher determination rate, greater instrumental simp1 icity and reproducibility and less expensive instrumentation. The FIA/extraction association has also been applied for non-analytical purposes such as the calculation of the extracted analyte fraction (ref. 59) or that of the peak area (ref. 61) and height (ref. 59) -based on the use of a dual-membrane phase separator - as a function of other parameters typical of the chemical system such as acidity constants (ref. 78). The still small number of applications in this area
-
355 (Table IV) w i l l p r e d i c t a b l y be increased by t h e use o f laser-induced e x c i t a t i o n ( r e f . 62), m u l t i - e x t r a c t i o n systems ( r e f . 5 5 ) and f a s t - s c a n detectors (refs. 95). ( r e f s . 79
5 5 , 56) f o r s t u d y i n g r e a c t i o n mechanisms and k i n e t i c s
-
4.2
DIALYSIS Membrane-based F I A / l i q u i d separation systems have so f a r been almost
e x c l u s i v e l y used i n c l i n i c a l a n a l y s i s . T h e i r c h i e f use i s i n t e r f e r e n c e removal o n l y once have these been used f o r d i l u t i o n purpose ( r e f . 9 6 ) .
-
Table V l i s t s t h e most s i g n i f i c a n t achievements o f t h e F I A l d i a l y s i s assoc i a t i o n , o f which t h e work by Gorton and Ogren ( r e f . 97) i s a t y p i c a l example. These authors determine glucose and urea i n serum w i t h s u i t a b l e immobilized enzymes. I n t h e c o n f i g u r a t i o n used f o r d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f urea, depicted i n F i g , 6a, t h e sample i s i n j e c t e d i n t o a donor b u f f e r which i s d r i v e n t o waste once t h e a n a l y t e has passed through t h e membrane, wherefrom i t i s l e d by t h e acceptor stream (phosphate b u f f e r o f pH 6) t o t h e t u b i n g zone c o n t a i n i n g t h e r e a c t o r , packed w i t h urease immobilized on c o n t r o l l e d pore glass. The d e t e c t i o n system (ammonia-selective e l e c t r o d e ) c a l l s f o r t h e use o f a b a s i c stream merging w i t h t h e main l i n e a f t e r t h e enzymatic r e a c t o r i n order t o o b t a i n a sample p l u g o f a pH adequate f o r t h e r e l e a s e o f t h e monitored product ( r e f . 97). I n t h e i r r e p o r t , t h e s e authors evaluate t h e e f f e c t o f t h e d i a l y s e r , enzyme r e a c t o r and d e t e c t o r on t h e d i s p e r s i o n . Chang and Meyerhoff ( r e f . 98) used a membrane-dialyser i n j e c t i o n l o o p t o enhance t h e s e l e c t i v i t y o f anion-responsive 1 iquid-membrane e l e c t r o d e s i n FIA (Fig. 6b) and a p p l i e d t o t h e d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f s a l i c y l a t e . system c o n s i s t s
of
a tubular
polymer
membrane e l e c t r o d e
based
The on
manganese (111) t e t r a p h e n y l p o r p h y r i n c h l o r i d e t o sense s a l i c y l a t e i o n s formed i n a r e c i p i e n t b u f f e r s o l u t i o n h e l d w i t h i n t h e upper channel of t h e flow-through membrane d i a l y s e r assembly. Samples c o n t a i n i n g s a l i c y l i c a c i d a r e manually introduced i n t o t h e lower channel o f t h e d i a l y s i s u n i t , where a t h i n s i l i c o n e rubber membrane separates t h e two channels.
The
a n a l y t e i s trapped across t h e membrane as s a l i c y l a t e i o n s w i t h i n a s t a t i c layer o f a suitable recipient buffer. A f t e r a preselected trapping time, the
recipient
plug
is
flushed
to
the
electrode
in
the
typical
f l o w - i n j e c t i o n fashion. The peak p o t e n t i a l s obtained a r e l o g a r i t h m i c a l l y r e l a t e d t o t h e s a l i c y l i c a c i d c o n c e n t r a t i o n s i n t h e o r i g i n a l samples. A 2 near-Nernstian response i s obtained i n t h e range 10-4-10- M s a l i c y l a t e f o r a t r a p p i n g time o f 2 min. The d e t e c t i o n l i m i t s can be m o d i f i e d by changing t h i s t r a p p i n g time. The r e s u l t a n t system i s h i g h l y s e l e c t i v e towards s a l i c y l a t e (as s a l i c y l i c a c i d ) over most i n o r g a n i c and o r g a n i c anions commonly found i n blood.
TABLE V
Features o f FIA methods involving dialysis
W 0-l
m
Analyte
Matrix
Anal yt e phase
Li Various metal ions Zn
serum water
aqueous 1 i gand sol ut i on
0
borax 1 igand sol u t i on
I,
;;-
CI-, ~
Second phase
~
G1 ucose Glucose, urea Galactose Glucose
~
aqueous
serum -
acid solution
serum I,
Ref.
ISE
104 105
P
theoretical I
volt
milk urine
milk, waste water, fermentation broth urine, serum
Detection
Special features
reagent solution
buffer
103 106 107
P I,
96
basic medi um
It
new dialysis probe
99
p, Pot
enzyme reactor
97
8
I,
108 109 110 112 111
aqueous sample
sample
chem.
phosphate buffer aqueous
phosphate buffer aqueous
volt amp.
enzyme reactors
bi ol ogi cal fluid aqueous
aqueous buffer aqueous
Pot
ISE
F
reagent introduction by dialysis. speciation
100
aqueous
aqueous
101
aqueous
aqueous
bi ol ogi cal
aqueous
reagent introduction by dialysis. speciation liquid membrane for cleanup and preconcentrati on calculation of
P
plasma Galactose, lactose, dihydroxyl actose Salicylic acid
urine, milk serum
Sul phi te, sulphide, snow Ami nes Sulphonamides
serum
P
98
84
102
357
Pump
C)
Knotted line
n
Stab iI %1 Carrier
Passive Pressurizcd membrane membrane reaclor reactor NH3 or NAM Na O H
Waste
Fig. 6 (a) Configuration for determination of glucose in serum with sample dialysis. (Reproduced from (ref. 97) with permission of Elsevier Science Publishers). (b) Scheme of the dialyserlflowinjection set-up used for determination of salicylic acid (IS€, tubular PVC ion-selective membrane electrode: WE, working electrode for potentiometric measurements; SCE, saturated calomel electrode: V, pH/mV meter; DC, dialysis chamber; mem, silicor,e rubber membrane; V and V flow-injection valves). (Reproduced from (ref. 98) w i 8 permigion of Elsevier Science Publishers). (c) Membrane-based FIA system for determination of sulphite, sulphide and methanethiol in water. A KCN stream is used when formaldehyde is also present. a, b, c, and d are 24 cm, 15 CIT: reactor included -, 39 cm reactor included - and 148 cm i n length, respectively (Reproduced from (ref. 100) with permission of the American Chemical Society).
-
3 58 A d i a l y s i s probe has been developed f o r continuous sampling from
complex s o l u t i o n s such as f e r m e n t a t i o n b r o t h , m i l k and waste water, aimed a t rendering them s u i t a b l e f o r a n a l y s i s by l i q u i d chromatography, flowi n j e c t i o n a n a l y s i s , enzyme c a l o r i m e t r y , e t c . The a n a l y t e i s t r a n s f e r r e d t o a f l o w i n g stream separated from t h e sample by a d i a l y s i s membrane t h a t i s p r o t e c t e d from f o u l i n g by a s t r o n g t a n g e n t i a l l y f l o w i n g stream o f t h e sample e s t a b l i s h e d by p l a c i n g a magnetic s t i r r i n g b a r c l o s e t o t h e membrane surface. The device i s c o n s t r u c t e d from m a t e r i a l s a l l o w i n g t h e probe t o be s t e a m - s t e r i l i z e d when mounted i n s i d e a fermentor ( r e f . 99). Oasgupta e t a l . (ref. 100) c a r r i e d o u t a study on t h e p r e s e r v a t i o n of s u l p h i t e , sulphate and methanethiol i n b u f f e r e d formaldehyde and o x a l dihydroxamic
a c i d s t a b i l i z e r s aimed a t developing a method f o r f a s t
determination
o f these anions on t h e b a s i s o f t h e i r
reaction with
N-acridinylmaleimide (NAM) i n a water/#, N-dimethylformamide medium t o y i e l d a f l u o r e s c e n t product. I n t h e c o n f i g u r a t i o n used, d e p i c t e d i n F i g . 6c, t h e reagent i s introduced by d i a l y s i s and t h e c a r r i e r i s pumped a t a r a t e o f 440 PI min” through t h e i n j e c t i o n v a l v e and sample l o o p i n t o a passive membrane r e a c t o r immersed i n a concentrated ammonia s o l u t i o n t o r a i s e t h e pH t o about 10 and then through a p r e s s u r i z e d porous membrane r e a c t o r immersed i n an NAM s o l u t i o n . A superincumbent a i r pressure of 11.5
psi
i s adequate f o r
equivalent t o about 44
introduction min-’
o f NAM a t
a suitable
rate,
o f conventional a d d i t i o n . The t y p i c a l
r e a c t i o n t i m e i s 50 s and t h e d e t e c t i o n l i m i t s achieved
f o r the three
above-mentioned s u l p h u r - c o n t a i n i n g compounds a r e 0.04, 0.60 and 0.80 1-1 M, r e s p e c t i v e l y . The system a l l o w s f o r d i f f e r e n t i a l a n a l y s i s t o be i m plemented
(ref.
100).
s p e c i a t i o n determination
These
authors
f o r peroxides
have
also
developed
another
(H202 and CH30H2) by use of
a p r e s s u r i z e d PTFE membrane r e a c t o r c o n t a i n i n g t h e enzyme peroxidase. The pH of t h e flowing stream i s s e t by i n t r o d u c i n g ammonia through a nonporous cation-exchange r e a c t o r ( r e f . 101). A c o n f i g u r a t i o n f o r sample cleanup and amine enrichment
i n a flow
system r e c e n t l y r e p o r t e d i n v o l v e s passing t h e sample through a l i q u i d membrane whereupon t h e a n a l y t e i s released and subsequently trapped by a stagnant acceptor phase on t h e o t h e r side. The r e s u l t a n t a n a l y t e p l u g i s then swept‘from t h e membrane s e p a r a t o r t o t h e d e t e c t i o n system The proponents p r o v i d e a t h e o r e t i c a l d i s c u s s i o n of t h e mass t r a n s f e r across t h e membrane and t h e i n f l u e n c e o f t h e t r a n s p o r t on t h e acceptor c o n c e n t r a t i o n p r o f i l e . S t r i c t l y , t h i s i s an example of mixed e x t r a c t i o n - d i a l y s i s . The enrichment f a c t o r achieved w i t h t h i s c o n f i g u r a t i o n , whose r e s u l t s compare well
with
t h e o r e t i c a l p r e d i c t i o n s , i s dependent upon t h e sample volume,
359 supporting m a t r i x , type o f i m m o b i l i z i n g s o l v e n t used, donor f l o w - r a t e and c o e f f i c i e n t o f p a r t i t i o n o f t h e a n a l y t e between t h e donor and t h e membrane phase ( r e f . 84). Other non-determinative a p p l i c a t i o n s o f d i a l y s i s have been r e p o r t e d by Macheras and Koupparis ( r e f . 102) and by Bernhandsson e t a l . ( r e f . 103). The former authors used an automated f l o w - i n j e c t i o n a n a l y s e r i n t e r f a c e d t o a dialysis
u n i t t o study d r u g - p r o t e i n
between some sulphonamides
binding interactions
and bovine serum albumin),
with
(e.g. results
s i m i l a r t o those obtained by o t h e r procedures. A complete run, i n c l u d i n g calibration,
takes
about
100 min.
The d i a l y s a b l e
sulphonamides
are
q u a n t i t a t e d s p e c t r o p h o t o m e t r i c a l l y by a m o d i f i c a t i o n o f t h e B r a t t o n Marshall method. The system a l s o a l l o w s c a l c u l a t i o n o f d i a l y s i s r a t e constants. Berhandsson e t a l . ( r e f . 103) have discussed t h e t r a n s f e r of mass i n infinite parallel
plate dialysers
with
co-flow
between
d e t e c t o r streams by a p p l y i n g t h r e e t h e o r e t i c a l models.
sample
and
These authors
d e r i v e d a n a l y t i c a l expressions f o r t h e coupled d i f f u s i o n and t r a n s f e r phenomena o c c u r r i n g i n b o t h channels and obtained numerical s o l u t i o n s f o r a laminar f l o w regime by t h e f i n i t e - d i f f e r e n c e approximation method. They a l s o considered t h e r e s u l s obtained by a mixing-cup model a p p l i e d under
.
steady -s t a t e cond it ions With t h e dimensions t y p i c a l o f a n a l y t i c a l d i a l y s e r s t h e r e were o n l y small d i f f e r e n c e s between t h e r e s u l t s p r o v i d e d by t h e l a m i n a r - f l o w and p ug-flow models. The mixing-cup model p r e d i c t e d h i g h e r f l u x e s through t h e membrane than t h e o t h e r two, p a r t i c u l a r l y w i t h increased channel heights
The t h e o r e t i c a l r e s u l t s were c o n s i s t e n t w i t h
those e x p e r i m e n t a l l y obtained i n t h e d i a l y s i s o f Z n ( I 1 ) i o n s and t h e f l o w dependence a l s o agreed reasonably w e l l w i t h t h e o r y p r o v i d e d t h a t t h 2 hydrostatic
pressures
were
equal
on
both
sides
and
that
stresses
p o t e n t i a l l y r e s u l t i n g i n membrane b u l g i n g were kept low (see Table V ) ( r e f s . 104 - 112). 5.
SOLID-LIQUID INTERFACES Separation techniques i n v o l v i n g s o l i d and l i q u i d phases have been used
i n c o n j u n c t i o n w i t h F I A almost s i n c e t h i s technique was introduced. While i o n exchange was o r i g i n a l l y t h e separation technique most f r e q u e n t l y used with
FIA,
adsorption
and
preconcentration
are
gradually
beco ing
commonplace i n t h i s context. 5.1
I O N EXCHANGE
has been p r e f e r e n t i a l l y used f o r preconcentration o f minor species from complex samples (e.g. i n d u s t r a1 I The FIA/ion exchange a s s o c i a t i o n
360 r a i n and sea water, s o l d e r i n g smokes, b i o l o g i c a l f l u i d s , e t c . ) , though i t has a l s o been employed f o r s e p a r a t i o n purposes and t o f a c i l i t a t e t h e determination o f d i f f e r e n t
a n a l y t e s i n t h e same sample by s e q u e n t i a l
e l u t i o n o f these, kept i n a s u i t a b l e a c t i v e agent ( r e f . 113). I n s o f a r as t h e analytes most f r e q u e n t l y determined a r e metal c a t i o n s , t h e commonest a c t i v e agents used a r e d i f f e r e n t types of c h e l a t i n g r e s i n . Table V I l i s t s t h e major species determined by methods i n v o l v i n g t h e F I A / i o n exchange association, c l a s s i f i e d according t o t h e t y p e o f a n a l y t e concerned i n t o c a t i o n i c species ( i n d i v i d u a l l y and i n m i x t u r e s ) , a n i o n i c species and conjugate acid-base p a i r s . A r e p r e s e n t a t i v e example o f t h e v e r s a t i l i t y of t h i s a s s o c i a t i o n and i t s ease of a d a p t a t i o n t o d i f f e r e n t problems l i e s i n t h e AAS determination o f heavy metals i n sea water proposed by Ruzicka e t al.
(ref.
114).
The metals a r e preconcentrated i n a c h e l a t i n g - r e s i n
microcolumn incorporated i n t o one of t h r e e c o n f i g u r a t i o n s o f d i f f e r i n g compexity t h a t these authors designed i n o r d e r t o overcome t h e problems successively encountered i n t h e i r experiments. A single-channel manifold f e a t u r i n g two s e r i e s o f i n j e c t i o n valves l o c a t e d p r i o r t o t h e column (Fig.
7a)
i s t h e simplest a l t e r n a t i v e f o r
concentration step.
implementation o f t h e pre-
The propel1 i n g system i s gas pressure-based.
The
c a r r i e r , ammonium acetate, d r i v e s t h e sample i n j e c t e d by means of v a l v e I1 t o t h e microcolumn through a c o i l and a by-pass o f v a l v e 12, where t h e
analytes a r e retained. The second s t e p i n v o l v e s i n j e c t i o n o f t h e e l u a n t through v a l v e I*. This c o n f i g u r a t i o n poses a s e r i e s o f problems such as t h e appearance o f a prepeak due t o the sample m a t r i x , a r i s i n g from changes
i n t h e r e s i n compactness
disturbances
i n changing from t h e
ammonium t o t h e p r o t o n from and t h e l a c k o f homogenization between sample and c a r r i e r i n t h e c e n t r a l zone o t t h e sample p l u g , which i s very a c i d i c and hinders r e t e n t i o n . These shortcomings were circumvented by u s i n g t h e c o n f i g u r a t i o n depicted i n Fig. 7b, w i t h a merging p o i n t f o r t h e ammonium acetate stream and e l u t i o n o f t h e a n a l y t e s i n t h e d i r e c t i o n opposing t h e retention
path
by
means
of
selecting
valves
whose
operation
is
i l l u s t r a t e d i n t h e f i g u r e . The a n a l y t i c a l procedure was automated by i t s proponents by u s i n g a m a n i f o l d w i t h a s i n g l e i n j e c t i o n v a l v e and a system c o n s i s t i n g o f two pumps and a t i m e r f o r s y n c h r o n i z a t i o n o f t h e o p e r a t i o n of t h e pumps (pumpl
acted d u r i n g t h e p r e c o n c e n t r a t i o n step, w h i l e pump2
worked d u r i n g t h e e l u t i o n ) . The sample m a t r i x never reached t h e d e t e c t o r i n e i t h e r case and t h e microcolumn was regenerated i n t h e e l u t i o n step. Townshend e t a l .
(refs.
115
-
116) have shown t h e v a s t p o t e n t i a l o f
a p p l i c a t i o n o f ion-exchange microcolumns i n F I A systems.
These authors
have developed a determination f o r Zn and Cd by u s i n g an exchange column
where both c a t i o n s , present i n t h e same sample, a r e r e t a i n e d t o be subsequently e l u t e d s e q u e n t i a l l y and t h e i r c o n c e n t r a t i o n determined i n d i r e c t l y through i n h i b i t i o n o f t h e c o b a l t - c a t a l y s e d
chemiluminescence
generation from luminol ( r e f . 115). These authors use t h e displacement o f t h i o c y a n a t e from a s t r o n g l y b a s i c ion-exchange r e s i n by o t h e r anions t o determine comon anions w i t h spectrophotometric d e t e c t i o n o f t h e i r o n (111)-thiocyanate
complex
formed.
N i t r a t e can be determined
in
the
presence o f c h l o r i d e and sulphate, which a r e removed by a precolumn packed w i t h a cation-exchange r e s i n i n s i l v e r form f o l l o w e d by a z i n c reductor. B i n a r y m i x t u r e s (e.g. c h l o r i d e and n i t r a t e ) can be determined simultaneously by s p l i t t i n g t h e sample i n t h e f l o w i n g system so t h a t p a r t of i t goes through t h e c h l o r i d e suppressor ( y i e l d i n g a response corresponding t o n i t r a t e alone) w h i l e t h e r e s t by-passes i t and g i v e s a response corresponding t o t h e sum o f c h l o r i d e and n i t r a t e . The j o i n t use o f i o n exchange and conversion techniques w i t h FIA has m a t e r i a l i z e d i n t h e o n - l i n e conversion o f s o l u b l e species t o i n s o l u b l e compounds by means o f a t a g m a t e r i a l which i s subsequently determined. This approach (Fig. atomic absorption
7) has been used t o determine s u l p h i d e by flame spectrometry w i t h t h e a i d o f
cadmium(I1)
as p r e -
c i p i t a t i o n t a g reagent. Excess Cd(I1) i s c o l l e c t e d on a c h e l a t i n g i o n exchanger and l a t e r eluted. The d e t e c t i o n l i m i t f o r s u l p h i d e i s 10 cg/l and t h e sampling r a t e achieved i s 100 samples hr-'
, t h e t y p i c a l standard
d e v i a t i o n being 1.2%. O f a l l p o t e n t i a l i n t e r f e r e n t s , o n l y phosphate has any e f f e c t on t h e determination (ref.117).
101, 118) use i o n exchange i n a r a t h e r - t h e r e q u i r e d pH change i s e f f e c t e d by i n t r o d u c i n g ammonia through a non-porous cation-exchange membrane r e a c t o r . Hwang and Dasgupta ( r e f s .
uncommon fashion i n t h e i r peroxide d e t e r m i n a t i o n
A novel, h i g h l y i n t e r e s t i n g c o n t r i b u t i o n t o t h i s area i s represented by t h e use o f i n t e g r a t e d microconduits ( r e f s . 119 - 137) (see Table V I ) .
5.2
ADSORPTIVE PRECONCENTRATION
The a d s o r p t i v e p r e c o n c e n t r a t i o n o f a n a l y t e s i n FIA has so f a r been t a c k l e d w i t h two c h i e f
a c t i v e agents,
namely a c t i v a t e d alumina and
e l e c t r o d e surfaces (carbon paste o r p l a t i n u m ) . Adsorption on a l u m i n i a has been used f o r preconcentration
o f chromic
i o n i n b i o l o g i c a l samples
( u r i n e ) p r i o r t o i t s d e t e r m i n a t i o n by ICP-AES ( r e f . 138) i n t h e s p e c i a t i o n o f chromium ( r e f . 139), as w e l l as f o r t h a t o f oxyanions such as
arsenate,
vanadate w i t h
borate, the
chromate,
molybdate,
phosphate,
selenate
and
same d e t e c t i o n system. Preconcentration on a carbon
362
paste electrode prior to the voltammetric determination of the analyte has been used in the analysis for drugs such as chlorpromazine (ref. 140) and doxorubicin (ref. 141) in urine. The pulsed amperometric determination of electroinactive adsorbates such as chloride and cyanide at platinum electodes (ref. 142) is but another proof of the FIA/adsorptive preconcentration association. An activated aluminia microcolumn has been used for separation and preconcentration of Cr(V1) from Cr(II1) in synthetic aqueous solutions prior to ICP detection at 267.72 nm, yielding a linear calibration graph between 0 and 1 000 ~ / lof Cr(V1) or Cr(III), with relative standard deviations at the 10 cg/l level of 2.2% and 1.1% for Cr(II1) and Cr(VI), respectively, for a 2-ml sample, the corresponding detection limits being 1.4 and 0.20 @/1, respectively. The procedure has been applied to the determination of both chromium forms at the cg/1 level in reference NBS water (ref. 139). Preconcentration and quantitation of doxorubicin, a cancer chemotherapy drug, are accomplished by a flow-injection approach involving adsorption of the drug onto a carbon paste electrode, medium exchange and differential voltammetry on the adsorbing surface (ref. 141). Linear response is obtained for concentrations from 10- 6M to the detection limit (loq9#). No preliminary steps are required for determination of the drug in urine by direct injection. Chlorpromazine can be determined under similar conditions in the presence of a tenfold excess of non-adsorbable species with similar redox potentials. The preconcentration step also results in increased sensitivity. A special type of adsorptive presoncentration is that of electroinactive species on Pt electrodes (ref. 142). Thus, chloride and cyanide modify the rate of surface oxide formation following a positive potential step. Hence, triple-step potential waveforms similar to those used successfully for pulsed amperometric detection of electroinactive adsorbates (e.g. alcohols, carbohydrates and amino-acids) can also be applied t o electroinactive adsorbates injected into an electrolyte stream. Depending o f the wave form, the overall anodic current at the detection peak will be greater or less than the baseline signal corresponding to oxide formation in the absence of the adsorbate. The sensitivy achieved i s very high indeed (ref. 143 and Table VII).
TABLE V I
Features of FIA methods involving ion-exchange processes
Anal yte
Matrix
Analytical purpose
NH3
rain water
seDaration
river water
Ni Ca cu soldering smokes
Zn, Cd
Detection
Amber1 i te- R120
Amberlite IRA-400 preconcentration chelating resin separation preconcentration 8-quinolinol separation preconcentration Dowex A-1 chelating resin chelating resin selectivity simultaneous Amberlite IRA-400 determination preconcentration Chelex-100 ,I
Mn, Pb, Cu
Pb, Cd, Ba, Be, Cu, Mn, Ni, Cu,
Active agent
Cd, Pb, Cu, Zn
I
tap, sea, polluted water sea water I,
Cd Ti, V , Al, Cr, F Cd, Co
,I
chelating resin
I1
Chelex-100
AAS
Ref.
column in samole 121 loop. Alternating h o w 122 123 multi-function valve 124 125
P
series injection valves 126 (sample-eluent) study of resin 49
chem.
sequential elution
115
AAS integrated microconduits 119 ICP-AES simultaneous 129 determination AAS two alternate columns 128
series injection and
114
selecting valves series injection and selecting valves
120
Chelex-100 and 8-quinolinol Chelex-100
AAS
129
,I
muromac A-1
ICP-AES
130
I1
tri PEN
FAA
131
8-quinolinol
AAS
TKS-gel SAX
P
,I
reference materi a1 s
F AAS
I,
,I
Cu Cd, Co Ni, Pb Pb, Cd
P
Speci a1 features
I,
indirect determination simultaneous detennination
continuous precipitation
117 132 W
m W
w m
P
Various anions sea water, serum, chlorinated reagents
Br-
Acid-base pairs Polyphosphates H202, CH30H2
rain water
H202
water
___ _ _
simultaneous determination separation
salt removal determination separation NH idroduct ion separation
bas i c resi n
,I
116
Amber1 i te XAD-2
,I
133
resin TXK-gel SAX Nafion 811X cation-exchange membrane Diaion SK-1
cond P F
P
.
hydrolytic catalysis enzyme membrane
134 135 136 118 137
____ __ cord.: condtictimelry ICP-AES: inductively coupled plasma-atomic emission spectroscopy
I__ _ _ _ _ I
F: fl:iorimct.j triPEN: N, N, N-tri(2-pyridylmethy1)ethylene
diamine
365
b) W
Fig. 7
q i m L Iminl
W
-
-
FIA/ion-exchan e c o n f i g u r a t i o n s o f v a r i a b l e increasing complexity. (a7 Single-channel manifold. (b) With e l u t i o n [a] i n t h e reverse d i r e c t i o n o f r e t e n t i o n [b]. (c) Automated m a n i f o l d . (Reproduced from ( r e f . 114) w i t h permission o f t h e Royal S o c i e t y o f Chemistry).
366
TABLE V I I Features of FIA methods involving adsorptive preconcentration Analytical Analyte
Matrix
pIrpose
Cr(II1)
urine
scpsrat im
Cr(III), Cr(VI1)
reference
Active
Detection
agent
Special
Ref.
features
138
ICP-AES
activated alumina
water Oxyanions
scparatim, prewncentrat ion prewncentrat ion,
u r i ne
speciatim
"
139 140
'I
atunina
sepsrat im Ch lorpromazi ne
activated alumina activated
preconcentrat i o n
carbon paste
volt
141
"
142
anp.
143
electrode Doxorubicin
carbon paste electrode
P t electrode
deterni M t in
Cl-
CN-,
TABLE V I I I
Analyte
Features o f FIA methods involving precipitation-dissolution
Matrix
Analytical wrpooe
Active agent ~
NH
3
, Cl-,
1042-
Detection
~~
theoretical
Special features
Ref.
~~
3 t +
Fe , Ag 2+ Ca
,
MS
with and w i t h w t
145
continuous prec i p i t a t e dissolution
c1-
waters
determination
~ g +
MS
normal and
foodstuff
siwltaneous
"
MS
mixture re-
147
reversed F I A c1-,
1-
solution
148
determinat ion Pb2+
uatars
preconcentratim NH
3
AAS
sample aspiration 149
367 5.3
PRECIPITATION AND DISSOLUTION
This separation technique, o f widespread use i n c l a s s i c a l a n a l y t i c a l chemistry applications, has been scarcely automatized owing t o t h e i n t r i n s i c d i f f i c u l t i e s involved. F i l t r a t i o n through a piece o f paper moving a t r i g h t angles t o t h e flow has been used i n air-segmented methods f o r cleanup o f samples p r i o r t o i n t r o d u c t i o n i n t o the system and i n some methods i n v o l v i n g t h e a n a l y t e p r e c i p i t a t i o n (e.9. tetraphenyl
t h e determination o f potassium i n f e r t i l i z e r s w i t h
borate and
photometric monitoring
of
the
precipitating
reagent ( r e f . 144)), though w i t h n o t t o o b r i l l i a n t r e s u l t s . Recently the authors have shown the p o s s i b i l i t y t o o b t a i n s a t i s f a c t o r y r e s u l t s from precipitation/dissolution processes implemented i n continuous unsegmented systems (Table V I I I ) . I n Fig. 9 i s shown t h e operational scheme o f an F I A c o n f i g u r a t i o n f o r i n d i r e c t AA determination o f anionic species incorporating a conventional HPLC cleanup f i l t e r . The system uses three valves; one f o r i n j e c t i o n ( I V ) o f t h e sample c o n t a i n i n g the anion; another f o r a l t e r n a t i n g i n t r o d u c t i o n o f washing and prec i p i t a t e solvent s o l u t i n s (SV1) and a t h i r d , four-way d i v e r t i n g one (SV2) f o r d i r e c t i n g streams t o t h e d e t e c t o r o r t o waste.
-
S,
Carrier
Eluent .-c
W
CdS lCd2*)
Carrier
Fig. 8 Configuration f o r p r e c i p i t a t i o n o f t h e analyte (sulphide) w i t h cadmium (11). The p r e c i p i t a t e c i r c u l a t e s f r e e l y along t h e system and i s detected by AAS. Excess Cd(I1) i s removed by t h e i o n exchange column ( I E C ) and subsequently eluted. (Reproduced from ( r e f . 117) w i t h permission o f E l s e v i e r Science Publishers).
In the p r e c i p i t a t i o n - f i l t r a t i o n step (Fig. 9a) , the sample i s i n j e c t e d i n t o the reagent-carrier.
A f t e r p r e c i p i t a t i o n , t h e f l o w i n g stream i s
passed by SV2 through the f i l t e r ,
where t h e p r e c i p i t a t e i s retained.
Since the cation-reagent stream continuously reaches t h e d e t e c t o r i n t h i s f i r s t stage, t h e signal (baseline) i s q u i t e high. On passage through t h e
368 detector, the precipitate fluid zone yields a negative signal (peak) proportional to the analyte concentration and corresponding to the reagent disappearance. Thus, no additional step is required - and valves SV1 and SV2 can be dispensed with - when the precipitate is relatively pure. A diluent stream later merged at the filter is occasionally needed when the reagent concentration in the carrier required to ensure precipitation is too high to be directly introduced into the atomic absorption spectrophotometer. In the wash step (Fig. 9b), valve SV1 introduces the washing solution, which is passed through the filter via SV2 and later led to the detector, where it gives a parasitic, nonanalytical signal corresponding to the adsorption (contamination) of the cation-reagent on the precipitate surface. Valve SV2 then sends the flow emerging from the precipitation coil to waste. In the dissolution step generally acidic (Fig. 9c), valve SV1 is switched to introduce a solvent. The remaining components act as in the previous operation. On passage of the stream through the filter, the freshly precipitated small mass is rapidly dissolved. A flow plug contains the stoichiometric amount of cation-reagent present in the precipitate. On passing through the detector, this zone yields a transient signal (peak) obviously proportional to the amount of precipitated anion-analyte. These continuous precipitation/filtration systems have been used with three types of precipitate: gelatinous (Fe203.xH20, with Fe3+ as carrier and NH3 samples), curdy (AgC1, with Ag+ as carrier and C1- samples) and crystalline (CaC204.2H20, using Ca2+ as carrier and C2042- samples). Recoveries close to 100% are achieved in every case, even at low analyte concentrations (ref. 145). Interferents are much less disturbing than in the classical precipitation-filtration procedure, probably as a result of the decreased precipitation and digestion times involved (ref. 146). By use of two FIA configurations (normal and reversed), continuous precipitation has been applied to the determination of chloride in different types of water with Ag(1) as reagent (ref. 147). Chloride and iodide have also been determined in various foods and drinks by using a configuration involving washing and sequential dissolution of the precipitates with ammonia and nitric acid for C1- and I-, respectively (ref. 148). These assemblies also allow the implementation of on-line preconcentration with the measuring device used. Such is the case with the determination of lead traces in various types of water (ref. 149). The direct aspiration of the sample into the flame of the atomic absorption spectrophotometer yields no signal. However, the set-up depicted in Fig. 10
-
369 a1 lows preconcentrating t o t h e extent required by continuously prec i p i t a t i n g the lead as a basic s a l t . concentration step. The sample stream
Only pump 2 works i n t h e pre-
-
aspirated r a t h e r than i n j e c t e d
-,
i s merged w i t h a p r e c i p i t a t i n g reagent stream (NH3) and t h e m i x t u r e i s l e d by SV2 t o the p r e c i p i t a t i o n c o i l and onto t h e f i l t e r , where t h e p r e c i p i t a t e formed i s r e t a i n e d and trough which t h e f l o w goes t o waste.
I n the d i s s o l u t i o n step, pump 2 i s stopped and a n i t r i c a c i d stream i s introduced i n t o the system by pump 1, valve SV2 leading t h e f l o w t o t h e detector. The n i t r i c acid r a p i d l y dissolves t h e p r e c i p i t a t e b u i l t up on the f i l t e r and a p o s i t i v e peak p r o p o r t i o n a l t o t h e amount o f a n a l y t e contained i n t h e aspirated sample volume i s yielded.
Lead can thus be
-
determined over a wide concentration range (1.2 1 500 ng/ml), w i t h a The p o t e n t i a l i n t e r f e r e n c e from
maximum preconcentration f a c t o r of 103
.
other t r a n s i t i o n metal ions a l s o p r e c i p i t a t e d and dissolved i n t h e process i s overcome by using t h e c h a r a c t e r i s t i c spectrum l i n e o f lead. HPLC-FIA ASSOCIATION
6.
Though a number o f papers i n t h e l i t e r a t u r e have HPLC and F I A among t h e i r keywords, few o f them a c t u a l l y r e p o r t on the o n - l i n e coupling o f both
techniques.
The
development
of
novel
continuous
hydrodynamic
detection systems o r the improvement o f those already e x i s t i n g involves
150). Also, p a r t s o f a l i q u i d chromatograph - separation column excluded - have been used i n F I A determinations, although t h i s a l t e r n a t i v e i s n o t r e commendable because o f t h e increased cost o f components designed t o withstand high pressures and o f t h e need f o r one high-pressure pump per channel ( r e f . 151). S t r i c t l y , o n l y when there i s a complementary p r e o r post-column i n j e c t i o n should t h e p o s s i b i l i t y o f an F I A system being coupled t o a l i q u i d chromatograph be considered. Thus, t h e basic components o f an on-1 i n e coupled HPLC-FIA system are two i n j e c t i o n valves, two pumps, a chromatographic column, a reactor and a continuous detector, i n a d d i t i o n t o t h e both techniques on account o f t h e i r common features ( r e f .
usual r e s e r v o i r s f o r the e l u e n t ( s ) , c a r r i e r ( s ) and reagent(s). R e s t r i c t o r c o i l s are also frequently used t o prevent t h e formation o f a i r bubbles.
I n Fig. 11 are i l l u s t r a t e d the t h r e e general manners i n which t h i s association can be experimentally implemented according t o t h e p o s i t i o n of
the i n j e c t i o n valve w i t h i n t h e F I A subsystem:
(a)
precolumn;
(b)
post-column w i t h i n j e c t i o n p r i o r t o merging o f t h e c a r r i e r o r reagent stream w i t h the chromatographic e f f l u e n t and (c) post-column w i t h t h e F I A valve placed a t the merging p o i n t i t s e l f .
3 70 a)
,
Sample
onion Reagent cation
Atomic
cbsorptlon
\
_ _ _ - ---'
5v1
-- -
- - -- -
- - - --
4 -1
- - - J
t
\
waste
4
S
l
V
"
Atomic a bsor p t i an
\
d)
Fig. 9 Continuous precipi tation/di ssol ut ion configurations for i ndi rect determination of anions by AAS. (a) Precipitation; (b) washing; (c) dissolution; (d) transient signal obtained in each step. For further details, see text.
371
PUMPS
\
0
-
NHI
Atomic absorption
-
Fig. 10 Continuous on-line system f o r preconcentration o f lead traces i n water p r i o r t o i t s determination by AAS w i t h continuous prec i p i t a t i o n (pump 2 i n operation) and p r e c i p i t a t e d i s s o l u t i o n (pump 1 i n operation). (Reproduced from ( r e f . 149) w i t h permission o f t h e Royal Society o f Chemistry).
6.1
PRE-COLUMN ASSEMBLIES Continuous pretreatment
(sample conditioning,
preconcentrat i o n and
interference removal) and d e r i v a t i z a t i o n systems applied p r i o r t o sample i n t r o d u c t i o n i n HPLC are o f special relevance whenever t h e p o s s i b i l i t y o f automatization i s involved. The most outstanding advances i n t h i s area have arisen from the use o f pre-columns packed w i t h an a c t i v e m a t e r i a l and coupled t o assemblies c o n s i s t i n g o f several r o t a r y valves f o r sample cleanup and t r a c e enrichment ( r e f s . 152, 153). L i q u i d - l i q u i d e x t r a c t i o n has occasionally been applied p r i o r t o 1i q u i d ( r e f . 154) o r gas chromatography ( r e f . 155). Indeed few FIA-HPLC systems use the F I A valve p r i o r t o t h e chromatographic column
(Fig.
lla).
A
7
t y p i c a l example i s the determination o f zinc i n t h e range 2 10-7-20 10- M based
on
its
activating
effect
on
metal-free
carboxypeptidase
A
immobilized i n a r e a c t o r ( r e f , 157) (Fig. 12). A d i v e r t i n g valve allows switching between water and regenerating s o l u t i o n (1,lO-phenanthrol ine) streams, where 500-pl samples containing t h e analyte and t h e substrate
(hippuryl-L-phenylalanine, t h e decomposition products o f which are sensed by reversed-phase 1 i q u i d chromatography) are injected. The two i n j e c t i o n valves used are connected o n - l i n e t o each o t h e r and a volume o f 10 pl i s i n j e c t e d i n t o t h e chromatograph 30 sec a f t e r sample i n j e c t i o n ( c a r r i e r flow-rate 1 ml/min).
372
S
bl
Reactor ----
VOlVQ
Confluence point
W
Cl S
R
W
Fig. 11 Generic types of HPLC-FIA assemblies. Precolumn flow injection (a); Post-column flow injection with valve located prior to (b) or at the point of merging (c) of the chromatographic eluate and the carrier or reagent. C, carrier; R, reagent; S, sample; D , continuous detector; W , waste.
373
P detector
F i g . 12 O p era t i o n a l scheme o f an FIA system used p r i o r t o a chromatog r a p h i c s e p a r a t i o n ( d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f z i n c t hrough i t s a c t i v a t i n g e f f e c t on an enzyme i m m o b i l i z e d i n t h e r e a c t o r . F o r d e t a i l s , see t e x t . (Reproduced f r o m ( r e f . 156) w i t h permisssion o f E l s e v i e r Science P u b l i s h e r s ) . 6.2
POST-COLUMN ASSEMBLIES
Post-column r e a c t i o n d e t e c t o r s a r e t h e commonest way o f implementing o n - l i n e d e r i v a t i z a t i o n i n HPLC aimed t o improve o r f a c i l i t a t e d e t e c t i o n ( r e f . 157). According t o F r e i e t a l . ( r e f . 158), one o f t h e c h i e f shortcomings o f t h e s e c o n f i g u r a t i o n s i s t h e need f o r post-column reagent addition.
The r e a g e n t can b e i n t r o d u c e d
namely (a)
i n t h r e e d i f f e r e n t manners,
i n a continuous stream merged w i t h t h e e f f l u e n t f rom t h e
chromatographic column;
(b) b y i n j e c t i o n i n t o a c a r r i e r l a t e r merging
w i t h t h e e f f l u e n t and ( c ) by means o f a s o l i d - p h a s e r e a c t o r where t h e reagent
-
generally a catalyst
-
i s i m m o b i l i zed. A f u r t h e r pump i s needed
i n t h e f i r s t two cases t o s e t t h e r e a g e nt o r c a r r i e r f l o w . post-column
pumpless
reaction
units
include
O t her
electrochemical,
photochemical and thermal sensing. Several FIA systems i n which i n j e c t i o n can be s u b s t i t u t e d by merging w i t h t h e chromatographic e f f l u e n t have been described overall
analyte concentration
th ro ugh t h e
FIA
( F i g 13).
The
i s determined by i n j e c t i n g t h e sample
v a l v e whereas d i s c r i m i n a t i o n between d i f f e r e n t a n a l y t e s
374 (multidetermination) is accomplished by acommodating the effluent in the post-column system, which uses no injection valve and thus acts as an open-tube reaction detector. Inorganic polyphosphates (ref. 159), pol)’phosphoric acids in phosphorous smokes (ref. 160), phosphate and phosphonate (with two parallel (ref. 161) or series (ref. 162) photometric detectors) and the complexing abilities of ligand for metal ions (refs. 163, 164) have been determined with these dual configurations. A real post-column on-line HPLC-FIA configuration is only justified when specific problems are involved. Such is the case with the determination of phosphinate, phosphonate and phosphate (ref. 165) , in which sodium bisulphite is previously required to oxidize P ( 1 ) and P ( I I 1 ) to P ( V ) , the species ultimately responsible for the analytical reaction with the chromogenic reagent - Mo(V)-Mo(1V). As the sulphite solution tends to corrode stainless steel and disturb the flow-rate of the reciprocating pump, it is introduced with a loop-valve injector to avoid contact with the pump.
\
/
CAREIER
I
3
I
‘2-
I W
REACTOR
REAGENT
-
W
Fig. 13 Alternate use of a flow-injection valve or the chromatographic effluent for individual and mu1 t i -determinations, respectively , wi th the same f 1 ow-i n ject i o n react i on/detect i on system. Another interesting way to couple an FIA system after a liquid chromatograph involves filling the flow-injection valve with the chromatographic effluent and introducing microvolumes of this into a reagent or carrier stream at regular intervals (Fig llc). The automatic functioning of the valve is obviously mandatory in this use. Mixtures of reducing sugars (ref. 116) and amino-acids have been resolved photometrically and amperometrical ly, respectively, with configurations involving the syn-
375 chronized operation of the two injection valves. In this respect it is worth noting the possibility to use an FIA assembly as the interface between a 1 iquid chromatograph and an atomic absorption spectrophotometer (ref. 168). In Fig 14 is shown the scheme o f the configuration developed for studying metal-ligand binding in clinical samples. It involves dual continuous detection; photometric of molecular species (citrate, albumin) and atomic absorption spectrophotometric of metal ions (Ca2+ and Mg2'). This configuration allows for individual optimization of both integrated processes (HPLC-photometric detection and FIA-atomic absorption detection). The serum samples used (250 p l ) are manually introduced into the HPLC injector, while the flow-injection valve sequentially and automatically introduces 11 pl of the effluent into the carrier with a delivery time of 5 sec (6 cycles per minute). The atomic spectroscopic detector gives a chromatographic 'peak' whose profile is formed by the maxima of the FIA peaks. Both chromatograms are recorded by a dualchannel recorder.
Gel per me a ti on
column
-
Fig. 14 Use o f a dual-detection - FIA system as interface between a 1 iquid chromatograph and an atomic spectroscopic detector in the study of metal-ligand binding interactions in clinical samples. For details, see text.
376 7.
FINAL REMARKS
Continuous separation techniques have so far been used Only occasionally in F I A - only in about 10% of all instances as can be seen from Fig. 15a. Liquid-liquid extraction is the separation technique most commonly used with this methodology. Roughly 20% of the work dealing with the joint use of F I A and separation techniques involved ion-exchange microcolumns. Gas-diffusion was used in a similar proportion, while dialysis was employed to a lesser extent. b)
0)
4
CWTINUOUS SEPARATION TECHNIWES
Fig. 15 Statistics on the use o f separation techniques with FIA. Membrane separation (Fig. 16) of molecules (dialysis), gases (gas diffusion) and immiscible liquids (extraction) was the foundation of over 60% of the continuous separation processes developed by FIA to date (ref. 169).
GAS- OlFFUSlON
0 1ALYS IS
LIQUID- LlQUlD EX TRACT ION
ANALYTICAL STREAM (L21 MEMBRANE SAMPLE STREAM I L I I
GAS
MOLECULES OR IONS
Fig. 16 Membranes used in continuous non-chromatographic separation techniques.
377
In addition to the use of solid-liquid interfaces for implementation of some analytical procedures, the chief purpose of the joint use of separation techniques and segmented flow systems is to improve sensitivity (preconcentration) and selectivity (sample cleanup, mu1 t i determinations), and in some cases - to improve or facilitate the analytical reaction and/or detection, otherwise unfeasible. Another advantage of this association over batch non-chromatograpic separation techniques lies in the higher sampling rates achieved, which is of great relevance to routine determinations. These separation processes carried out in a continuous fashion are intermediate, both kinetically and thermodynamically, between batch processes, where equilibrium is reached once or several times, and chromatographic processes, in which equilibrium is attained many times. It is interesting to note the decisive role played by kinetics in these continuous separation processes. As a rule, physico-chemical equilibrium is not reached by the time detection is performed, in contrast with batch and air-segmented continuous flow methods. This should result in decreased precision; yet, the relative standard deviations obtained by batch and air-segmented methods and by FIA are comparable. On the other hand, the kinetic discrimination afforded by the continuous methodology results in enhanced selectivity (ref. 1491, to the detriment of sensitivity - this should not be too much of a worry if the separation process involved is intended for preconcentration purposes. Despite their proven advantages, few FIA systems have been used in conjunction with continuous separation techniques so far. This can be attributed to the occurrence of a number of deterrent experimental factors influencing these dynamic systems. Nevertheless, it would suffice to test any of the above-described configurations to immediately realize the scarce technical and instrumental difficulties involved. Applications in this field will no doubt increase significantly in the years to come, particularly in clinical, food and environmental analysis, where the sample matrix and low analyte concentrations usually dealt with are decisive factors.
-
8. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
The authors wish to acknowledge the support of the comision Interministerial de Ciencia y Technologia (Grant no. PA 86-0146) for research on this topic.
378 REFERENCES
1 2 3
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
M. Valcercel and M.D. Luque de Castro, Automatic Methods o f Analysis, Elsevier, Amsterdam, 1988. C.F. Simpson, Ed., Techniques i n L i q u i d Chromatography, J. Wiley, New York, 1982. J.C. Giddings, K.A. G r a f f , K.D. Caldwell and M.N. Myers, Advances i n Chemistry Series, C.D. Craver, Ed., Amer. Chem. SOC., Waschington D.C., 1983. J.C. Giddings, Anal. Chem., 53 (1981), 1170A. W.B. Furman, Continuous Flow Analyis. Theory and Practice, Marcel Oekker, New York, 1976. J. Ruzicka and E.H. Hansen, Flow I n j e c t i o n Analysis, J. Wiley, New York, 1981. M. Valcarcel and M.D. Luque de Castro, Flow I n j e c t i o n Analysis: P r i n c i p l e s and Applications, E l l i s Horwood, Chichester, 1987. J. Ruzicka and E.H. Hansen, Anal. Chim. Acty, 179 (1986) 1. G. Den Boef and R.C. Schorthorst, Anal. Chim. Acta, 180 (1986) 1. L. Anderson, Anal. Chim. Acta, 110 (1979) 123. H.A. Mottola, Anal. Chim. Acta, 145 (1983) 27. D. Jagner, M. Josefson and K. Aren, Anal. Chim. Acta, 141 (1982) 147. J.A. Wise and W.R. Heineman, Anal. Chim. Acta, 172 (1985) 1. J. Wang and H.D. Dewald, Anal. Chim. Acts, 162 (1984) 189. E.A.G. Zagatto, B.F. Reis, H. Bergamin F and F.J. Krug, Anal. Chim. Acta, 109 (1979) 45. G.E. Pacey, D.A. H o l l o w e l l , K.G. M i l l e r , M.R. Straka and G. Gordon, Anal. Chim. Acta, 179 (1986) 259. H. Bader and J. Joigne, Water Res., 15 (1981) 71. D.H. Hollowell, Diss., Miami Univ., Oxford, OH, (1985). G.B. M a r t i n and M.E. Meyerhoff, Anal. Chim. Acta, 186 (1986) 71. G. Svensson and T. A n f i i l t , C l i n . Chim. Acta, 119 (1982) 7. H. Baadenhuijsen and H.E.H. Seuren-Jacobs, C l i n . Chem., 25 (1979) 443. J. Ruzicka and E.H. Hansen, Anal. Chim. Acta, 173 (1985) 3. M.E. Meyerhoff, and Y.M. F r a t i c e l l i , Anal. L e t t . , 14 (1981) 415. J. Moeller and B. Winter, Fresenius Z. Anal. Chem., 320 (1985) 451. D.A. Hollowell, G.E. Pacey and G. Gordon, Anal. Chem., 57 (1985) 2851. M.R. Straka, 6. Gordon and G.E. Pacey, Anal. Chem., 57 (1985) 1799. P. Marstorp, T. A n f a l t and L. Anderson, Anal. Chim. Acta, 149 (1983) 281. D.A. Hollowell, J.R. Gord, G. Gordon and G.E. Pacey, Anal. Chem., 58 (1986) 1524. M. Granados, S. Maspoch and M. Blanco, Anal. Chim. Acta, 179 (1986) 445. C. Okumoto, M. Na ashima, S. M i z o i r i , M. Kazama and K. Akiyama, Eisei Kagaku, 30 $1984) 7 B. P i h l a r and L. Kosta, A i a l . Chim. Acta, 114 (1980) 276. 0. Astrom, Anal. Chem., 54 (1982) 190. G.E. Pacey, M.R. Straka and J.R. Gord, Anal. Chem., 58 (1986) 504. D.D. Siemer, P. Koteel and V. Jariwala, Anal. Chem., 48 (1976) 836. F.D. Pierce and H.R. Brown, Anal. Chem., 48 (1976) 693. F.D. Pierce and H.R. Brown, Anal. Chem., 49 (1977) 1417. M. Yamamoto, M. Yatsuda and Y Yamamoto, Anal. Chem., 57 (1985) 1382. R.R. Liversage and J.C. van Loon, Anal. Chim. Acta, 161 (1984) 275. M. Burguera and J.L. Burguera, Analyst, 111 (1986) 171. J.C. De Andrade, C. Pasquini, N. Baccan and J.C. van Loon, Spectrochim. Acta, Part B, Oct. 38 (1983) 1329. N.H. Tioh, Y. I s r a e l and R.M. Barnes, Anal. Chim. Acta, 184 (1986) 205.
379 42
S.M. Ramasamy, M.S.A. Jabbar and H.A. M o t t o l a , Anal. Chem., 52 (1980) 2062. 43 M.D. Luque de Castro, J . Autom. Chem., 8 (1986) 56. 44 B . K a r l b e r g , Anal. Chim. Acta, 180 (1986) 16. 45 B. K a r l b e r g aad S. Thelander, Anal. Chim. Acta, 98 (1978) 1. 46 H. Bergamin F , J.X. Medeiros, B.F. Reis and E.A.G. Z agat t o, Anal. Chim. A c t a , 101 (1978) 9. 47 M. G a l l e g o and M. V a l c B r c e l , Anal. Chim. Acta, 169 (1985) 161. 48 J . Kawase, Anal. Chem., 52 (1980) 2124. 49 A. D e r a t i n i and B. S e b i l l e , Anal. Chem., 53 (1981) 1742. 50 J.L. Burguera, M. Burguera, L. Cruz and O.R. Naranjo, Anal. Chim. Acta, 186 (1986) 273. 51 K. Kina, T. S h i r a i s h i and N. I s h i b a s h i , T alant a, 25 (1978) 295. 52 P. L i n a r e s , F. Ldzaro, M.D. Luque de C ast ro and M. V a l c a r c e l , Anal. Chim. A c t a , 200 (1987). 53 M.H. Memon and P.J. Worsfold, Anal. Chim. Acta, 183 (1986) 179. 54 A. R ios , M.D. Luque de C a s t r o and M. V a l c i i r c e l , Anal. Chem. ( i n pre s s ). 55 D.C. S h e l l y , T.M. Rossi and I.M. Warner, Anal. Chem., 54 (1982) 87. 56 T.M. R os s i , D.S. S h e l l y and I.M. Warner, Anal. Chem., 54 (1982) 2056. 57 M. Bengtsson and G. Johansson, Anal. Chim. Acta, 158 (1984) 147. 58 L. Nord and B. K a r l b e r g , Anal. Chim. Acta, 164 (1984), 233. 59 J.A. Sweileh and F.F. C a n t w e l l , Anal. Chem., 57 (1985) 420. 60 F.F. C ant w e l l and J.A. Sweileh, Anal. Chem., 57 (1985) 329. 61 K. Backstrom, L.G. D a n i e l s s o n and L. Nord, Anal. Chim. Acta, 169 (1985) 43. 62 L. Nord and B. K a r l b e r g , Anal. Chim. Acta, 125 (1981) 199. 63 T. Imasaka, T. Harada and N. I s h i b a s h i , Anal. Chim. Acta, 129 (1981) 195. 64 J.T. Davies and E.K. R i d e a l , I n t e r f a c i a l Phenomena, 2nd edn., Academic Press, New York, 1963, Chapter 1. 65 A.W. Adamson, P h y s i c a l Chemistry o f Surfaces, 2nd edn., I n t e r s c i e n c e , New York, 1967, Chapters 1 and 7. 66 J.L. Burguera and M. Burguera, Anal. Chim. Acta, 153 (1983) 207. 67 L. Fossey and F.F. C a n t w e l l , Anal. Chem., 55 (1983) 1882. 68 J. Kawase, S. Nakae and M. Yamanaka, Anal. Chem., 51 (1979) 1640. 69 K. Ogata, K. Taguchi and T. I m a n a r i , Anal. Chem., 54 (1982) 2127. 70 B. K a r l b e r g i n Chemical D e r i v a t i z a t i o n i n A n a l y t i c a l Chemistry Vol. 2, S e para t i o n and Continuous Flow Techniques, R.W. F r e i and J . F. Lawrence, Plenum Press, New York, 1982. 70a C. de R u i t e r , J.H. Wolf, K.A.Th. Brinkman and R.W. F r e i , Anal. Chim. A c t a 192 (1987) 267. 7 1 L. Nord and B. K a r l b e r g , Anal. Chim. Acta, 145 (1983) 151. 72 K. Ogata, S. Tanabe and T. I m a n a r i , Chem. Pharm. B u l l , 31 (1983) 1419. 73 M. G allego, M. S i l v a and M. V a l c i i r e l , Anal. Chim. Acta, 179 (1986) 439. 74 Y. Sahlestom, S. Twengstrom and B. K a r l b e r g , Anal. Chim. Acta, 187 (1986) 339. 7 5 0. K l i n g h o f e r , J . Ruzicka and E.H. Hansen, T alant a, 27 (1980) 169. 76 F. Ldzaro, M.D. Luque de C a s t r o and M. V a l c a r c e l , Anal. Chim. Act a, 169 (1985) 132. 77 P. L i n a r e s , M.D. Luque de C a s t r o and M. V a l c a r c e l , Anal. Chim. Acta, 161 (1984) 257. 78 L. Fossey and F.F. C a n t w e l l , Anal. Chem., 57 (1985) 992. 79 K. Ogata, K. Taguchi and T. I m a n a r i , Bunseki Kagaku, 31 (1982) 641. 80 K. Ogata, K. Taguchi and T. I m a n a r i , Bunseki Kagaku, 31 (1982) 89. 8 1 L. Sun, L. L i and Z. Fang, Fenxi Huaxue, 13 (1985) 447. 82 M. G a llego, M. S i l v a and M. V a l c a r e l , Fresenius Z. Anal. Chem. 323 (1986) 50.
380 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114
115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127
P. A. Johansson, B. Karlberg and S. Thelander, Anal. Chim. Acta, 114 (1980) 215. G. Audunsson, Anal. Chem., 58 (1986) 2714. B. Karlberg, P.A. Johansson and S. Thelander, Anal. Chim. Acta, 104 (1979 21. Y. H i r a r i and K. Tomokuni, Anal. Chim. Acta, 167 (1985) 409. M.J. Whitaker, Anal. Chim. Acta, 179 (1986) 459. Y. Sahlestom and B. Karlberg, Anal. Chim. Acta, 179 (1986) 315. L. Fossey and F.F. Cantwell, Anal. Chem., 54 (1982) 1693. L. Nord, S. Johansson and H. B r B t e l l , Anal. Chim. Acta, 175 (1985) 281. T. Kato, Anal. Chim. Acta, 175 (1985) 339. S. Johansson and H. B r o t e l l , Flow Analysis 11, Lund (Sweden) 1982. B. Karlberg and S. Thelander, Anal. Chim. Acta, 114 (1980) 129. M. Maeda and A. T s u j i , Analyst, 110 (1985) 665. M. Gallego, M. Silva'and M. Valcarcel, Anal. Chem., 58 (1986) 2265. E.H. Hansen and J , Ruzicka, Anal. Chim. Acta, 87 (1976) 363. L. Gorton and L. Ogren, Anal. Chim. Acta, 130 (1981) 45. 9. Chang and M.E. Meyerhoff, Anal. Chim. Acta, 186 (1986) 81. C.F. Mandenius, B. Danielsson and B. Mattiasson, Anal. Chim. Acta, 163 (1984) 135. P.K. Dasgupta and H.C. Yang, Anal. Chem., 58 (1986) 2839. H. Hwang and P.K. Dasgupta, Anal. Chem., 58 (1986) 1521. P.E. Macheras and M.A. Koupparis, Anal. Chim. Acta, 185 (1986) 65. B. Bernhardsson, E. Martins and G. Johansson, Anal. Chim. Acta, 167 (1985) 111. R.Y. Xie and G.D. C h r i s t i a n , Anal. Chem., 58 (1986) 1806. E. Martins, M. Bengtsson and G. Johansson, Anal. Chim. Acta, 169 (1986) 31. W.D. Basson and J.F. van Staden, Analyst, 104 (1979) 419. J.F. van Staden and W.D. Basson, Lab. Pract., 29 (1980) 1279. B. Olsson, H. Lundback and G. Johansson, Anal. Chim. Acta, 167 (1985) 123. D. P i l o s o f and T.A. Nieman, Anal. Chem., 54 (1982) 1698. P.J. Worsfold, J. F a r r e l l y and M.S. Matharu, Anal. Chim. Acta, 164 (1984) 103. H. Lundback and B. Olsson, Anal. Lett., 18(B7) (1985) 871. M. Masoom and A. Townshend, Anal. Chim. Acta, 166 (1984) 111. A. Townshend, Anal. Chim. Acta, 180 (1986) 49. S. Olsen, L.C.R. Pessenda, J. Ruzicka and E.H. Hansen, Analyst, 108 (1983) 905. J.L. Burguera, M. Burguera and A. Townshend, Anal. Chim. Acta, 127 (1981) 199. A.T. F a i z u l l a h and A. Townshend, Anal. Chim. Acta, 179 (1986) 233. B.A. Petersson, Z. Fang, J. Ruzicka and E.H. Hansen, Anal. Chim. Acta, 184 (1986) 165. H. Hwang and P.K. Dasgupta, Anal. Chem., 58 (1986) 1521. J. Ruzicka and E.H. Hansen, Anal. Chim. Acta, 161 (1984) 1. Z. Fang, J. Ruzicka and E.H. Hansen, Anal. Chim. Acta, 164 (1984) 23. H. Bergamin Fo., B.F. Reis, A.O. Jacinth0 and E.A.G. Zagatto, Anal. Chim. Acta, 117 (1980) 81. H. Mikasa, S. Motomizu and K. Toei, Bunseki Kagaku, 34(8) (1985) 518. Z. Fang, S. Xu and S. Zhang, Fenxi Huaxue, 12 (1984) 997. O.F. Kamson and A. Townshend, Anal. Chim. Acta, 155 (1985) 253. L. Risinger, Anal. Chim. Acta, 179 (1986) 509. P. Hernandez, L. Hernhndez, J. Vicente and M.T. S e v i l l a , Anal. QuTm., 81 (1985) 117. S.D. Hartenstein, J. Ruzicka and G.D. C h r i s t i a n , Anal. Chem., 57 (1985) 21.
38 1 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166
2. Fang, S.Xu and S. Zhang, Anal. Chim. Acta, 164 (1984) 41. S. H i r a t a , Y. Umezaki and M. Ikeda, J. Flow I n j . Anal., 3 (1986) 8. S. H i r a t a , Y. Umezaki and M. Ikeda, Anal. Chem., 58 (1986) 2602. M. Bengtsson, F. Malamas, A. Torstensson, 0. Regnell and G. Johansson, Mikrochim. A c t a , 111 (1985) 209. H. Hirano, Y. Baba, N. Yoza and S. Ohashi, Anal. Chim. Acta, 179 (1986) 209. P . I . Anagnostopoulou and M.A. Koupparis, Anal. Chem., 58 (1986) 322. T.S. Stevens and T.E. M i l l e r , P a t e n t US 4290775. T. M i l l e r and T. Stevens, Adv. Instrum., 35 (1980) 21. N. Yoza, H. H i r a n o , Y. Baba and S. Ohashi, J. Chromat., 325 (1985) 385. T. Yamane, Bunseki Kagaku, 33 (1984) E203. A.G. Cox, and C.W. McLeod, Anal. Chim. Acta, 179 (1986) 487. A.G. Cox, I.G. Cook and C.W. McLeod, Analyst , 110 (1985) 331. I.G. Cook, C.W. McLeod and P.J. Wo r s f o ld, Anal. Proc., 23 (1986) 5 . J. Wang and B.A. Fr e i h a , Anal. Chem., 55 (1983) 1285. E.N. Cheney and R.P. Baldwin, Anal. Chim. Acta, 176 (1985) 105. J.A. P o l t a and D.C. Johnson, Anal. Chem., 57 (1985) 1373. J.M. S k in n e r and A.C. Docherty, T a l a n t a , 14 (1967) 1393. P. M a r t i n e z , M. G a l l e g o and M. V a l c i r c e l , Anal. Chem., 59 (1987) 69. M. V a l c i r c e l , A n a l y s t , 112 (1987), 729. P. M a r t i n e z , M. G a l l e q o and M. V a l c B r c e l , J. a n a l . Atom. Spec., 2 (1987) 211. P. Ma rt ine z , M. G a l l e g o and M. V a l c B r c e l , Anal. Chim. Acta, 193 (19871. 127. P. M a r t i n e z , M. G a l l e g o and M. V a l c B r c e l , Analyst , 112 (1987) 1233. C.E. Lunte, T.H. Ridgway and W.R. Heineman, Anal. Chem., 59 (1987) 761. F.P. B i g l e y , R.L. Grob and G.S. Brenner, Anal. Chim. Acta, 181 (1986) 241: R.W. F r e i , Swiss Chem., 6 (1984) 55. M.W.F. N i e l e n , R.W. F r e i and U.A.Th. Brinkman, S e l e c t i v e sample h a n d l i n g and d e t e c t i o n i n l i q u i d chromatography, Vol. I, ( E d i t o r s F r e i and Zech) E l s e v i e r , Amsterdam, 1987. J.N. Dolan, J.R. Grant, N. Tanaka, R.W. G ise and B.L. Karger, J. Chromat. Sci., 16 (1986) 616. E. Fo e l q u i s t , M. K r y s e l l and L.G. Danielsson, Anal. Chem., 58 (19867 1516. L. R i s i n g e r , L. Ogren and G. Johansson, Anal. Chim. Acta, 154 (1983) 251. I . S . K r u l l , Ed., R e a c t i o n D e t e c t i o n i n L i q u i d Chromatography, Marcel Dekker, New York, 1986. R.W. F r e i , J. Hansen and V.A.Th. Brinkman, Anal. Chem., 57 (1985) 1529A. Y. H i r a i , N. Yoza and S. Ohashi, Anal. Chim. Acta, 115 (1980) 269. R.S. B r a z e l l , R.W. Holmberg and J.H. Moneyhun, J. Chromatogr., 290 (1984) 163. Y. Baba, N. Yoza and S. Ohashi, J . Chromatogr., 295 (1984) 153. Y. Baba, N. Yoza and S. Ohashi, J. Chromatogr., 318 (1985) 319. N. Yoza, T. M i y a j i , Y. H y r a i and S. Ohashi, J. Chromatogr., 283 (1984) 89. N. Yoza, T. Shuto, Y . Baba, A. Tanaka and S. Ohashi, J. Chromatogr., 298 (1984) 419. Y. H i r a i , N. Yoza and S. Ohashi, J. Chromatogr., 206 (1981) 501. D. B e t t e r i d g e , N.G. Courney, T.J. Sly and D.G. P o r t e r , A n a l y s t , 109 (1984) 91.
382 167 168
J.B. K a f i l and C.O. Hubber, Anal. Chim. Acta, 139 (1982) 347. B.W. Renoe, C . E . Shideler and J . Savory, C l i n . Chem., 27 (1984)
169
M. Valcbrcel and M.D.
1546. 3.
Luque de Castro,
J. Chromatogr., 393 (1987)
383 SUBJECT INDEX A
barium ions 54 basic drugs 87 absorber solution 38,41 1,2-benzanthracene 285 acetylcholine 221 1,4-benzodiazepine 86 acetylcholine 262 benzodiazepines 95 acetylchol i nesterase 208 benz (a) pyrene 285 acetylsal icy1ic acid 353 biacetyl 263,306 bile acids acid digestion 39 220,248 bioluminescence acidic drugs 87 261 bismuth 84 acid-citrate dextrose (ACD) 344 acti vat i on analysi s 135 bittering compounds 353,354 blood active dialysis 45 82 actva ted charcoa1 94 blood level monitoring 96 adsorber tube 37 blood sample analysis 87 adsorption of sample constituents 54 blood sample clean-up 82 adsorptive preconcentration 361 blood sample extraction 85 215 blood sample preparation af1 atoxin 106 237 boric acid af1 atoxin determination 54 breakthrough air samples 52 70 aldehydes and ketones 215 1 bromonaph ta1 ene 303 1-bromonaphthalene aliphatic sulphonic acids 69 325 alkaline phosphatase 208 1,4-bromonaphtalene 303 a1 kylami nes 353 2-bromobiphenyl 303 a1 kylsulphates 261 2- bromonaph ta1ene 303 4-bromobiphenyl alumina cartridge columns 55 303 bromide a1 umi na columns 56 291 Amber1 i te XAD-2 94 bromine 345 3-aminofluoranthene 271,285 bromine solutions 39 amino acids 25,26,215,261 2-t-butyl-anthraquinone 277 amino acids 171 butene isomers 24 ammonia 247 ammonia in plasma 342 C ammonium sulfate 84 amobarbi tal 253 cadmi um 25 cadmium silicas amperometric detection 61 24 androstenedione 201 caffeine 187,353 calcium anion analysis 65 46,61 anionic surfactants 353 carbarnates 215 anthracene 285 carbary 1 140,187 anthraquinone 215,277 carbon dioxide in plasma 342 carboplatin anti coagul ants 84 319 arachidonic acid metabolites 190 carboxylic acids 26 Aroclor 1221 312 carbroma1 94 carotine aromatic carboxylic acids 69 201 aromatic monosulphonic acids 69 cartridge columns 50,52,55 catecholamines 19,197,215,246 aromatics 52 arsenic 344 cationic surfactants 353 ascorbic acid 265 cation-exchange cartridge column 60 atomic emi ss i on spectrometry cell clearance time 139 58 6 autoradiography 200 cellulose Cerencov counting 144 B charcoal 94 charge collectors 143 21 background count rate 165 chelating silicas back-extraction chemical derivatisation 53,261 86 chemical derivatization techniques 209 back-up adsorbent 37 barbiturates 94,215,237,248 chemical modification 44,54
-
384 chemi 1 uminescence 144 I 261 chemi 1 uminescence detection 264 chemi luminescence detection 222.264 chenodeoxychol ic acid 248 t h 1 orami ne-T 183 chloride 35,39,55,71 chlorine 345 chlorine dioxide 341 chloroaniline 215 chlorpromazi ne 94,362 choice of supports 7 cholesterol 190 ,228 cholesterol oxidase 208 cholic acid 248 chol ine 221 I 262 choline oxidase 208 chromate 324 cisplatin 319 c 1 ean-up 209 codeine 353 coincidence circuit 144 coincidence time 162 column-switching 96 combustion accelerator 41 combustion flask 41 combustion methods 40 compl exat i on 5 complexation react ions 57,58 complexes surfaces 5 complexi ng functional groups 12 complexing metal sites 5 complexing s i 1 i ca 25 concentrations 125 concentrator column 63 35,62,69 conduct i v i ty detect i on conductometric detection 252 contamination 55 contaminat ion effects 53 contamination from stainless steel 60 continuos flow analysis 336 controlles pore glasses 7 copolymer resins 6 copper 19,23,344 copper-loaded si 1 icas 26 copper-si 1 icas 24 corrosion reactions 58 counting efficiency 138,162,164 counting efficiency 162 creati ne kinase 264 creat ini ne 265 cross-linked celluloses 7 cross-1 inking 9 cross-1 inking techn i ques 5 cyan i de 343 cyano complexes 49 cyanogeni c g 1 ycosi des 225 cyanopropyl column 107 cyclic undecapeptide 97 cycl odeytrins 302 cycl ospori ne 82
cyclosporine cyclosporine cyclosporine cyclosporine cycl ospori ne cyclosporine
adverse effects and 1 ipoproteins C conformers 0 metabolites
97 97 106 116 106 82,96
D
dansylated amino acids 250 data filtering techniques 160 dehydroascorbic acid 265 deltametrin 187 deoxychol i c acid 248 deoxygenat i on 305 9,lO-dephenylanthracene 285 deproteination 85 deproteination techniques 84 derivati zation of cyclosporine 106 detection in ion chromatography 35 detergents 26 1 di acetone si 1 ica 23 dialysis 355 dialysis-injection device 48 di a1 yt i c preconcentration 74 dialytic techniques 45 diamine silicas 23 diatomaceous earth 93 4,4'-di bromobiphenyl 303 dibenzofuran 313 2,8-di chl orodi benzofuran 313 8-dichlorotheo~hvlline 353 diethylenetri aminepentaacetic acid 183 diethylstilbestrol 243 digests 52 digital chromatography 109 di ketone si 1 icas 26 di pept ides 25 direct absorption 38 di rect detection 35 disposable cartridge columns 49 disposable fi 1 ters 55 di sulfides 234 disulfiram 237 dithiocarbamate silicas 26 divinylbenzene stationary phase 53 46 I 74 Donnan dialysis Donnan exclusion 35 dopami ne 77 doxl aminesuccinate 187 doxorubi ci n 362 doxy1 amine succi nate 138 drug analysis 186 dual ion-exchange 49 dual isotope detection 183 E
EDTA 54 electrochemical reagent production 208
385
eluent pH enalapri 1 enanti omer separation energy pulse height analysis enkephal in enkephalin metabolites enzymatic cleavage enzyme assay enzyme immobilization
68 353 27 144 154 190 183 135 208 187 321 291 347 38 6 93
ethyldipropylthiocarbamate
ethylenethiourea ethynyl thiourea extraction coil extraction methods extraction techniques Extrelut R
gl ucuronidase g 1 uthet imide glyceryltrinitrate g lycochenodeoxycholi c acid glycochol ic acid glycodeoxycholic acid glycolithocholic acid gl ycosi dase glycoursodeoxycholic acid goals of cleanup gold gold(1) cyanide guai acol guan i di ne guanine
208 94 187 248 248 248 248 208 248 44 77 77 38 215 326
H F
fast fourier transform fast-scan detectors fatty acid methyl esters fel odi pi ne fenoldopam ferritin F I A manifold field flow fractionation filtering algorithms fi 1 tration devices flow cell volume flow-injection analysis f1 ow-i nject i on manifold flow-through y -counting fluorescence detection fluorescence quenching f1 uori de f1 uori ne f1 uorocarbon fi lms fluorosilicic acid flux materials formaldehyde formaldehyde formaldehyde free bromine furnace combustion fusion methods fusion techniques
161 355 190 187 223 199 348 336 160 55 168 335,336 346 145 260 318 39 39 200 39 39 215 37 54 215 54 39 42 40 39 I
G
ga 1 actose gallium gas samples gas-diffusion gas-1 iqid interfaces gas-solid interfaces geological samples gl ucagon glucose glucose
356 354 37 338 338,342 345 39 183 265,356 356
ha1 f-1 i fe time 142 ha1 ides 40 ha1 onaphthol reaction 179 HBr 40 HC1 40 heparin 265 heterogeneous catalysis 5 heterogeneous scint. counting 153,153 hexacyanocobalt 77 hexobarb i ta 1 253 HF 40 HI 40 high pressure combustion bomb 42 hollow dialysis fibre 46 hol 1 ow fiber membranes 252 hollow fibers reactors 208 hol 1 ow fibre suppressor 77 hollow-fibre suppressor device 77 homovani 1 1 i c acid 227 3a-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase 246 6-hydroxycortisol 197 6-hydroxyprednisolone 197 hydri de generation 343 hydrochloric acid 84 hydrogen peroxide 269 hyd rogenphtha 1 ate 45 hydroperoxides 215 hydrophobic interactions 35 hydroqui none 243 hydroxymethabe-su1 phonate 54 hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases 208 hypoxanthi ne 199 1
iminodiacetate silica immobi 1 i zati on immobilized acetylcholine esterase immobilized enzymes immobi 1 ized enzymes immobilized fluorophore immobi 1 ized phosphorophore
19 279 280 336 208 271 325
386 247 immobi 1 ized urease immobi 1 i zi ng enzymes 5 immuno assay 135 immunosuppressive agent 96 indirect detection 35 35 indirect UV absorption inorganic ions 33 inorganic polyphosphates 374 inorganic solutes 53 i nosi ne 226 internal standard 95 291 iodide i odi nated thyronines 235 iodine 54 ion chromatographic sample cleanup 49 ion chromatography 33,34,53,55 ion exchange resins 94 ion interaction 34 34 ion suppression ion-exchange chromatography 34 ion-exchange concentrator column 70 ion-exchanae functional i ti es 70 ion-excl usion chromatography 35 ion-i nteraction reagent 34 ,53 ion-pair 173 ion-pair formation 26 1 i ron 23 i somers 24 K
knitted reactors
211
1
labeled amino acids 1 actoperoxidase lactose lanthanide ions lanthanide luminescence laser induced fluorescence 1 aser-induced excitation 1 ead 1 igand exchange chromatography 1 iqid-sol id extraction 1 iquid-1 iquid clean-up liquid-liquid interfaces 1 iqoid-liquid sample clean-up lithocholic acid luciferase 1 ucigeni ne react ion 1 umi nescence detect i on luminescence detectors 1 umi no1 luminol chemi luminescence luminol reaction 1 umi nophores L-amono acid oxidase
152 183 356 326 328 260 355 55 23 6 87 347 86 248 264 264 260 308 341 341 264 326 208
M
magnesi um main adsorbent matrix elimination matrix elimination methods matrix interferences menadione meprobamate 2-met hy 1 ant h raqu i none 2-met hyl tetrahydrofuran metabolic pathways metabol ism metabolites metal chelating silicas metal cyanide complexes metal preconcentrati on metal separation metal si 1 icas methacrylate resin methane sulphonic acid methanethiol methanol methimazole methylamine methylene blue micellar solutions mice1 le-stabilized RTP mi c rocou 1 omet ri c ce 1 1 microdi st i 1 1 ation mi croemul s i on microsomal cytochrome P450 mobile phase reactions modified si 1 icas monoc 1 onal rad i oimmuno assay morphine
61 37 77 76 44 277 94 277 303 135 186 135 26 343 12 21 24,25 70 38 3 58 54 291,321 247 54 302 302 241 343 347 97 53 5,8 97 94
N a -naphtoflavone 345 1 ,5-naphtha1 enedi su 1 fonic acid 315 69 2-naphtyl ami ne-1-sul phonic acid 2-naphtyl selenylchloridf 106 naphtalene 303,312 narrow-bore columns 245 negatrons 141 neuronal tissue 22 1 neutron activation 136 nickel 23,344 nicotine 187 ninhydrin react ion 245 nitrate 35,55,71 nitrite 35,291 nitrogen dioxide 38 ni trophenols 253 non-i oni c surfactants353 353 nucleic acids 326 N-a1 kyl ami nes 246 N-a1 lylthiourea 29 1 N-ethyl -m-to1 ui di ne 291
387
N-methy 1 acri done N-methylcarbamate pesticides
N, N-dimethyl-phenylenediamine N, N-d imethylan i 1 i ne N,N-dipropylani1 ine
265 247,249 54 29 1 29 1
0
omeprazole on-line derivatization on-line reduction on-1 ine sample hand1 ing OPA reaction OPA reactor open tubular reactors ophthala1 dehyde (OPA) organ transplantation organic solutes organosulphur compounds oxalate oxine silicas ozone o-phtala1 dehyde
187 209 236 209 246 219 208 261 96 53 215 52,74 21 339 246
P
packed bed reactors 208,211 parathi on 140,187 parent compounds 135 passive dialysis 45 PCB mixtures 312 penici 1 1 in 215 pentanesulphoni c acid 53 peptide mapping 183 pept ide synthesi s 5 a4 perchlorid acid peroxyoxalate chemi luminescence 221 peroxyoxalate reaction 262,264 perylene 285 pestcide analysis 186 pesticides 140,171 phase separation 339 phase separator 349 phases for extraction 6 phenols 215 phenylbutazone 94 phosphate 41'74,374 phosphinate 374 phosphonate 374 phosphorescence 26 1 phosphorescence detection 296 30 1 phosphori met ry phosphorophores 30 1 phosphorus 40 photochemical deri vat ization 242 photochemical reactions 208 photochemical reactor 261,272 photolysis 245 phtalate eluents 60 phthalic acid 45
plant extract 52 pl at i num 19 polych 1 ori nated bi pheny 1 s 312 polycycl ic aromatic hydrocarbons 266 polymeric ani on-exchangers 60 polynucl eotides 326 polyphosphoric acids 374 polyvalent cations 61 positrons 141 post-column assemblies 373 post-column detector 208 post-column mixing system 247 post-col umn oxidat ion 236 post-col umn reaction 209 post-column reaction detection 208 post-col umn segmentation 170 preconcentration 5,6,71 preconcentration columns 62 preconcentration supports 7 predni solone 197 predni sone 197 pregnenolone 190 pre-column assemblies 371 pre-mixing system 247 primary amides 246 primary amines 261 procycl i di ne 353 prostaglandin 215 protective coating 57 protein precipitation 108 proteins 25 purine nucleotides 190 pyruvic acid 38 p-isopropylaniline 291 p-nitrophenacyl esters 266 p-to1 uenesulphoni c acid 69
Q quaternary ammonium type drugs 261 quenched detection 327 quenched phosphorescence 263,315 quenchers 163 quenching properties 163 quinidine 94 quinones 273 R
radio liquid chromatography 133 radioactivity detector 139 radi oanalysi s 135 radioassays 189 radioenzyme assay 135 radiohalogenides 179 183 radi oi odi nation radioiodination o f proteins 183 radioisotopes 133,135,141 radiopharmaceutical preparations 183 radio-chromatog rap hy 141
388 rare earth metal ions rare earth metals rat bile rat hepatocytes reaction detector reaction of solutes reactor types receptor assay red cresol reducing carbohydrate reflectance spectrophotometry reverse radiogram reversed energy transfer rhodi um rotating-mi rror phosphorescence
326 245 221 183 209 53 211 135 3 43 215 343 171 319 24 301
sulphide 356 sul phi te 291,356,358 sulphonami des 356 sulphonates 261 sulphonic acids 69 sulphur 40 116 supercri t. f luid chromatogr. supports 6,7 surface modification 9,lO surfactants 52 synchronous scanning 301 T
taurochenodeoxychol ic acid 248 taurocholic acid 248 S taurodeoxychol ic acid 248 taurolithocholic acid 248 sal icy1 ates tauroursodeoxychol ic acid 94 248 sampl e col 1 ec t i on temp.dependent distribution 37 98 sample digestion terodi 1 ine 39 353 sample filtration tertiary amine type drugs 44 261 sample aenerator tert.structure of cyclosporine 38 97 sample ireconcent rat ion 44,69 tetracene 285 sample treatment met hods 53 tetramethyl ammoni um hydroxide 53 Sandimmun R 82,96 thermolysis 245 sandwich type separator 350 thiamine 215 Savinsky-Go1 ay moving average 161 thiamine phosphat esters 215 Schoeniger flask 40 th iohydantoi ne 321 scinti 1 lation counters 143 thioridine 326 scinti 1 1 at ion counting 137 thiosulfate 52 seawater 39 thiourea 291 segmentation /storage system 172 thiourea derivatives 321 segmented flow analysis 336 three point rule 28 select ion of sorbents 209 to1 uenesulphonic acid 71 select i vi ty 68 trace enrichment 209 s e m i t i v i ty transition metals 68 5,23 sensitized phosphorescence 263,308 tri chloracet ic acid 84 she1 lfish 39 tri hydroxyndoles 236 triphenylphosphonium salts silicas 8 26 si 1 icates 6 trouble shootina 126 si 1 ica-based anion-exchangers 60 tryptophane 28 silver 24 tubular reactors 208,211,245 size exclusion 35 tyrosine 28 soil extract 52 solid scinti llator 144,153,164 U solid state reactors 264 solid-1 iqid extraction 93 ul traf i 1 tration 44,84 sol id-1 iquid purification 86 ultra-trace analysis 61 solution quenched phosphorescence 304 urapidi 1 173 station. phases for cartr.co1. 50 urea 247,356 steroid metabolites 190 urease 208 steroids 192,353 urease reactor 219 steroids cortisol 265 ursodeoxycholic acid 248 storage loop 171 streched polymer films 301 V s t rychn i ne 94 styrene-divinyl benzene resins 70 variable recoveries 109 sulfamethoxazole 125 vitamin 81 353 sulphate 41,55,71,74,358 vitamin D 192 ~
389
vitamin K 1 vitamin K3 vitamin K-3
243 215 276
X
XAD-2
xanthine xanthine oxidase xylenol orange
95 326 208 245
Y
yttrium silicate
144
z zinc zone compression effect
23 62
8
8-1 act am anti bi ot i c B-lactamase inhibitors
215
253
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
39 1
JOURNAL OF CHROMATOGRAPHY LIBRARY A Series of Books Devoted to Chromatographic and Electrophoretic Techniques and their Applications Although complementary to the Journal of Chromatography, each volume in the Library Series is an important and independent contribution in the field of chromatography and electrophoresis. The Library contains no material reprinted from the journal itself.
Other volumes in this series Volume 1
Chromatography of Antibiotics (see also Volume 26) by G.H. Wagman and M.J. Weinstein
Volume 2
Extraction Chromatography edited by T. Braun and G . Ghersini
Volume 3
Liquid Column Chromatography. A Survey of Modern Techniques and Applications edited by Z. Deyl, K. Macek and J. ,Janik
Volume 4
Detectors in Gas Chromatography by J . SevEik
Volume 5
Instrumental Liquid Chromatography. A Practical Manual on High-Performance Liquid Chromatographic Methods (see also Volume 27) by N.A. Parris
Volume 6
Isotachophoresis. Theory, Instrumentation and Applications by F.M. Everaerts, J.L. Beckers and Th.P.E.M. Verheggen
Volume 7
Chemical Derivatization in Liquid Chromatography by J.F. Lawrence and R.W. Frei
Volume 8
Chromatography of Steroids by E. Heftmann
Volume 9
HPTLC - High Performance Thin-Layer Chromatography edited by A. Zlatkis and R.E. Kaiser
Volume 10
Gas Chromatography of Polymers by V.G. Berezkin, V.R. Alishoyev and I.B. Nemirovskaya
Volume 11
Liquid Chromatography Detectors (see also Volume 33 ) by R.P.W. Scott
Volume 12
Affinity Chromatography by J . Turkova
Volume 13
Instrumentation for High-Performance Liquid Chromatography edited by J.F.K. Huber
Volume 11
Radiochromatography. The Chromatography and Electrophoresis of Radio labelled Compounds by T.R. Roberts
Volume 15
Antibiotics. Isolation, Separation and Purification edited by M.J. Weinstein and G.H. Wagman
392 Volume 16
Porous Silica. Its Properties and Use as Support in Column Liquid Chromatography by K.K. Unger
Volume 17
75 Years of Chromatography - A Historical Dialogue edited by L.S. Ettre and A. Zlatkis
Volume 18A
Electrophoresis. A Survey of Techniques and Applications. P a r t A: Techniques edited by Z. Deyl
Volume 18B
Electrophoresis. A Survey of Techniques and Applications. P a r t B: Applications edited by Z. Deyl
Volume 19
Chemical Derivatization in Gas Chromatography by J. Drozd
Volume 20
Electron Capture. Theory and Practice in Chromatography edited by A. Zlatkis and C.F. Poole
Volume 21
Environmental Problem Solving using Gas and Liquid Chromatography by R.L. Grob and M.A. Kaiser
Volume 22A
Chromatography. Fundamentals and Applications of Chromatographic and Electrophoretic Methods. P a r t A: Fundamentals edited by E. Heftmann
Volume 22B
Chromatography. Fundamentals and Applications of Chromatographic and Electrophoretic Methods. P a r t B: Applications edited by E. Heftmann
Volume 23A
Chromatography of Alkaloids. P a r t A: Thin-Layer Chromatography by A. Baerheim Svendsen and R. Verpoorte
Volume 23B
Chromatography of Alkaloids. P a r t B: Gas-Liquid Chromatography and High-Performance Liquid Chromatography by R. Verpoorte and A. Baerheim Svendsen
Volume 24
Chemical Methods in Gas Chromatography by V.G. Berezkin
Volume 25
Modern Liquid Chromatography of Macromolecules by B.G. Belenkii and L.Z. Vilenchik
Volume 26
Chromatography of Antibiotics. Second, Completely Revised Edition by G.H. Wagman and M.J. Weinstein
Volume 27
Instrumental Liquid Chromatography. A Practical Manual on High-Performance Liquid Chromatographic Methods. Second, Completely Revised Edition by N.A. Parris
Volume 28
Microcolumn High-Performance Liquid Chromatography by P. Kucera
Volume 29
Quantitative Column Liquid Chromatography. A Survey of Chemometric Methods by S.T. Balke
393 Volume 30
Microcolumn Separations. Columns, Instrumentation and Ancillary Techniques edited by M.V. Novotny and D. Ishii
Volume 3 1
Gradient Elution in Column Liquid Chromatography. Theory and Practice by P. Jandera and J. ChurAEek
Volume 3 2
The Science of Chromatography. Lectures Presented a t the A.J.P. Martin Honorary Symposium, Urbino, May 27-31,1985 edited by F. Bruner
Volume 33
Liquid Chromatography Detectors. Second, Completely Revised Edition by R.P.W. Scott
Volume 34
Polymer Characterization by Liquid Chromatography by G. Gliickner
Volume 35
Optimization of Chromatographic Selectivity. A Guide t o Method Development by P.J. Schoenmakers
Volume 36
Selective Gas Chromatographic Detectors by M. Dressler
Volume 37
Chromatography of Lipids in Biomedical Research and Clinical Diagnosis edited by A. Kuksis
Volume 38
Preparative Liquid Chromatography edited by B.A. Bidlingmeyer
Volume 39A
Selective Sample Handling and Detection in High-Performance Liquid Chromatography. P a r t A edited by R.W. Frei and K. Zech
Volume 39B
Selective Sample Handling and Detection in High-Performance Liquid Chromatography. P a r t B edited by K . Zech and R.W. Frei
Volume 40
Aqueous Size-Exclusion Chromatography edited by P.L. Dubin
Volume 41A
High-Performance Liquid Chromatography of Biopolymers and Biooligomers. P a r t A: Principles, Materials and Techniques by 0. Mike:
Volume 4 1B
High-Performance Liquid Chromatography of Biopolymers and Biooligomers. P a r t B: Separation of Individual Compound Classes by 0. Mikei
Volume 42
Quantitative Gas Chromatography for Laboratory Analyses and OnLine Process Control by G. Guiochon and C.L. Guillemin
Volume 43
Natural Products Isolation. Separation Methods for Antimicrobials, Antivirals and Enzyme Inhibitors edited by C.H. Wagman and R. Cooper
394
Volume 44
Analytical Artifacts. GC, MS, HPLC, TLC and P C by B.S. Middleditch
Volume 45A
Chromatography and Modification of Nucleosides. Part A: Analytical Methods for Major and Modified Nucleosides. HPLC, GC, MS, NMR, UV and FT-IR edited by C.W. Gehrke and K.C.T. Kuo
Volume 45B
Chromatography and Modification of Nucleosides. Part B: Biological Roles and Function of Modification edited by C.W. Gehrke and K.C.T. Kuo